32C-058 2016_0803 LIVE 155 - Project Manual - PERMIT155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 1
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 72 00 General Conditions (AIA 201)
00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 011000 General Requirements
Section 014320 Quality Control and Testing Services
Section 014330 Mock-Ups
Section 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
Section 016200 Substitution Request Form
Section 017400 Construction Waste Management
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 023000 Subsurface Investigation
Section 024100 Demolition
Section 024110 Site Preparation
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 033001 Cast-In-Place Concrete - Sitework
Section 033515 Concrete Finishing
Section 035412 Gypsum Cement Underlayment
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Section 042000 Unit Masonry
Section 042113 Brick Masonry - Site
Section 044302 Granite - Site
DIVISION 05 - METALS
Section 051200 Structural Steel
Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Section 061000 Rough Carpentry, Trusses and Joists
Section 064020 Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 071100 Bituminous Dampproofing
Section 071610 Crystalline Waterproofing
PROJECT MANUAL – FOR PERMIT
155 PLEASANT STREET
NORTHAMPTON, MA
August 3, 2016
ARCHITECT
PFRA+LDa
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 2
Section 071610 Crystalline Waterproofing
Section 072100 Thermal Insulation
Section 072419 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)
Section 072450 Direct-Applied Finish System (DAFS)
Section 072700 Air Barriers
Section 074610 Fiber-Cement Siding
Section 075400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 077200 Roof Accessories
Section 078100 Applied Fireproofing
Section 078410 Penetration Firestopping
Section 078440 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
Section 079200 Joint Sealants
Section 079201 Exterior Joint Sealants - Site
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
Section 080010 Door Schedule
Section 081110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 081400 Flush Wood Doors
Section 083110 Access Doors and Frames
Section 083480 Overhead Coiling Smoke Curtain
Section 083510 Horizontal-Sliding Accordion Fire Doors
Section 084110 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 085120 Fire-Rated Steel Windows
Section 085413 Fiberglass Windows
Section 087100 Door Hardware
Section 088000 Glazing
Section 089000 Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
Section 090000 Finish Schedule
Section 092110 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 092120 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies
Section 093000 Tiling
Section 095100 Acoustical Ceilings
Section 096510 Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Section 096810 Tile Carpeting
Section 096820 Sheet Carpeting
Section 099000 Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 101400 Signage
Section 102110 Toilet Compartments
Section 102600 Wall and Door Protection
Section 102800 Toilet Accessories
Section 104400 Fire Protection Specialties
Section 105500 Postal Specialties
Section 105720 Wire Closet and Utility Shelving
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section 110140 Tie-Back and Lifeline Anchors
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 3
Section 113100 Appliances
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 122110 Horizontal Louver Blinds
Section 123570 Kitchen Casework
Section 124810 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
Section 129300 Site Furnishings
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 142100 Electric Traction Elevators
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 210000 Fire Suppression
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
Section 220000 Plumbing
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Section 230000 HVAC
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 260000 Electrical
Section 263100 Photovoltaic Collectors
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section 270000 Low Voltage Cabling
Section 271000 Wireless Network
Section 272000 IP Telephone System
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Section 281000 Access Control Hardware
Section 282300 Video Surveillance
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
Section 311300 Selective Tree Removal and Trimming
Section 312300 Site Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting
Section 312500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 321216 Bituminous Concrete Paving
Section 321313 Portland Cement Concrete Paving
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 4
Section 321416 Brick Unit Paving
Section 321443 Pervious Concrete Unit Paving
Section 321543 Stabilized Stone Dust Surfacing
Section 321545 Gravel Paving
Section 321640 Granite Curbing
Section 329115 Structural Soil
Section 329119 Landscape Grading
Section 329200 Lawns and Grasses
Section 329300 Trees, Plants, and Ground Covers
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
Section 331000 Water Utilities
Section 333000 Sanitary Sewer Utilities
Section 334000 Storm Drainage Utilities
APPENDICES
Appendix A Geotechnical Report
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 72 00 - 1
Live 155
155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
PFRA+LDa
August 3, 2016
DOCUMENT 00 72 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. General Conditions: AIA A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
B. General Conditions: AIA A271, General Conditions of the Contract for Furniture, Furnishings and
Equipment.
END OF DOCUMENT
00 72 00 - 1
Live 155
155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
PFRA+LDa
August 3, 2016
DOCUMENT 00 72 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. General Conditions: AIA A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
B. General Conditions: AIA A271, General Conditions of the Contract for Furniture, Furnishings and
Equipment.
END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00 - 1
Live 155
155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
PFRA+LDa
August 3, 2016
DOCUMENT 007300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
A. Supplementary Conditions: Supplementary Conditions will be prepared and approved for use on
the project by the Owner in consultation with an attorney.
B. In addition, due to the federal funding and other funding requirements involved, the General
Contractor would likely be subject to certain reporting requirements, statutes, regulations and
orders. Some or all of these requirements may be incorporated into the contract with the
General Contractor. The contract may also require the General Contractor to incorporate some
of these requirements into its subcontracts. Federal and state statutes, regulations and orders
that may be applicable to the General Contractor’s work, and/or the Project, may include, but
may not be limited to, the following:
1. 24 CFR Part 1, Section 109 of the Housing and Community Development Act of 1974, and
other applicable law, barring discrimination on the ground of race, color, national origin,
sex, age or disability in its employment practices.
2. Massachusetts General Laws, c. 151B, barring discrimination based on race, color,
religious creed, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, which shall not include persons
whose sexual orientation involves minor children as the sex object, genetic information, or
ancestry.
3. Federal Executive Order (E.O.) 11246, “Equal Employment Opportunity,” as amended by
E.O. 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment
Opportunity,” and as supplemented by regulations at 41 CFR part 60, “Office of Federal
Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor,”
regarding equal opportunity.
4. The Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq .).
5. Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368).
6. The Federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq .) and
Executive Order 11738 (regarding enforcement of the Clean Air Act and Federal Water
Pollution Control Act, available at http://www.archives.gov/federal-
register/codification/executive-order/11738.html ).
7. 41 CFR 60-300.5, and the Vietnam Era Veterans' Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as
amended, regarding equal opportunity for disabled veterans, recently separated veterans,
other protected veterans, and armed forces service medal veterans.
8. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.), which prohibits
discrimination against disabled individuals in employment.
9. Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, including
implementing regulations at 24 CFR Part 135, intended to direct economic opportunities
(including employment and contracting / subcontracting opportunities) from HUD-funded
projects to low-income persons and businesses that provide opportunities for low-income
persons
1.2 .
END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00 - 1
Live 155
155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
PFRA+LDa
August 3, 2016
DOCUMENT 007300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
A. Supplementary Conditions: Supplementary Conditions will be prepared and approved for use on
the project by the Owner in consultation with an attorney.
B. In addition, due to the federal funding and other funding requirements involved, the General
Contractor would likely be subject to certain reporting requirements, statutes, regulations and
orders. Some or all of these requirements may be incorporated into the contract with the
General Contractor. The contract may also require the General Contractor to incorporate some
of these requirements into its subcontracts. Federal and state statutes, regulations and orders
that may be applicable to the General Contractor’s work, and/or the Project, may include, but
may not be limited to, the following:
1. 24 CFR Part 1, Section 109 of the Housing and Community Development Act of 1974, and
other applicable law, barring discrimination on the ground of race, color, national origin,
sex, age or disability in its employment practices.
2. Massachusetts General Laws, c. 151B, barring discrimination based on race, color,
religious creed, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, which shall not include persons
whose sexual orientation involves minor children as the sex object, genetic information, or
ancestry.
3. Federal Executive Order (E.O.) 11246, “Equal Employment Opportunity,” as amended by
E.O. 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment
Opportunity,” and as supplemented by regulations at 41 CFR part 60, “Office of Federal
Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor,”
regarding equal opportunity.
4. The Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq .).
5. Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368).
6. The Federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq .) and
Executive Order 11738 (regarding enforcement of the Clean Air Act and Federal Water
Pollution Control Act, available at http://www.archives.gov/federal-
register/codification/executive-order/11738.html ).
7. 41 CFR 60-300.5, and the Vietnam Era Veterans' Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as
amended, regarding equal opportunity for disabled veterans, recently separated veterans,
other protected veterans, and armed forces service medal veterans.
8. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.), which prohibits
discrimination against disabled individuals in employment.
9. Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, including
implementing regulations at 24 CFR Part 135, intended to direct economic opportunities
(including employment and contracting / subcontracting opportunities) from HUD-funded
projects to low-income persons and businesses that provide opportunities for low-income
persons
1.2 .
END OF DOCUMENT
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 1
SECTION 011000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Related Documents 1.11 Submittals
1.2 Project Requirements 1.12 Warranties
1.3 Specification Information 1.13 Cutting and Patching
1.4 Definitions 1.14 Temporary Facilities and Utilities
1.5 Industry Standards 1.15 Products and Substitutions
1.6 Codes and Regulations 1.16 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.7 Progress Schedule 1.17 Owner-Furnished (OFCI) Products
1.8 Schedule of Values 1.18 Labels
1.9 Payment Requests 1.19 Record Documents
1.10 Procedures and Controls 1.20 Project Close Out
1.21 Final Cleaning and Repair
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. This Section applies to all Work performed
under the Contract.
1.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Identification: 155 Pleasant Street, Northampton, Massachusetts.
B. Special Project Requirements:
1. Sustainable Design: EnergyStar performance as applicable to the Project.
2. Abatement of hazardous materials to be completed by the Contractor in accordance with
the project specifications
C. Project Requirements for Temporary Utilities and Facilities:
1. Utility Costs: The Contractor shall meter and pay for cost of utility services consumed,
including electricity, water, gas and temporary heat.
2. Temporary Offices: A separate field office for the Architect and the Owner's
Representative is not required.
3. Toilet Facilities: The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilets outside the
building.
D. Permits and Fees: Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, fees, and utility company
backcharges required to perform the work. Submit copies to Architect.
E. Codes: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit
copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to Architect.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 2
F. Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on drawings with field dimensions before fabrication
or ordering of materials. Do not scale drawings.
G. Existing Conditions: Notify Architect of existing conditions differing from those indicated on the
drawings.
H. Contractor’s Conduct on Premises: The Contractor and their employees shall behave in a
respectful, courteous and safe manner. Abusive, harassing, and lewd behavior is prohibited.
Music playing is prohibited. Alcohol, tobacco, and drug use is prohibited.
1. Comply with Owner’s security requirements.
1.3 SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A. These specifications are a specialized form of technical writing edited from master
specifications and contain deviations from traditional writing formats. Capitalization, underlining
and bold print is only used to assist reader in finding information and no other meaning is
implied.
B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the
Contractor.
C. Sections are generally numbered in conformance with Construction Specifications Institute
Masterformat System. Numbering sequence is not consecutive. Refer to the table of contents
for names and numbers of sections included in this Project.
D. Pages are numbered separately for each section. Each section is noted with "End of Section"
to indicate the last page of a section.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 3
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effect
as if bound with these specifications.
B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the current standard in effect as of
the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from
publisher.
C. The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be found
in Encyclopedia of Associations or consult Architect.
1.6 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices,
judgments, and communications from authorities having jurisdiction to the Architect.
1.7 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Provide comprehensive bar chart schedule showing all major and critical minor portions of the
work, sequence of work and duration of each activity. Update and reissue regularly, but not less
than monthly.
1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prepare Schedule of Values to coordinate with application for payment breakdown. Submit at
least 10 days before first payment application. Update and reissue regularly, but not less than
monthly.
1.9 PAYMENT REQUESTS
A. Provide three copies of each request on completely filled out copies of AIA G702 and
continuation sheet G703. Substantiate requests with complete documentation; include change
orders to date. Provide partial lien waivers for work in progress and full lien waivers for
completed work.
B. Record Drawing Certification: Certify as a part of each application for payment that the project
record documents are current at the time of application is submitted. The Contractor shall
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 4
require such drawings to be current as a condition of approving any payment to the trade
Contractor and Subcontractor.
C. Before first payment application, provide the following:
1. List of subcontractors, suppliers and fabricators.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Progress schedule.
4. Submittal schedule keyed to project schedule.
5. List of Contractor's key project personnel.
6. Copies of permits and other communications from authorities.
7. Contractor's certificate of insurance.
8. Performance and payment bonds if required.
9. Unit price schedule.
D. Before final payment application, provide and complete the following:
1. Complete closeout requirements.
2. Complete punch list items.
3. Settle all claims.
4. Transmit record documents to Architect.
5. Prove that all taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.
6. Remove temporary facilities and surplus materials.
7. Change lock cylinders or cores.
8. Clean the work.
9. Submit consent of surety, if any, for final payment.
1.10 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
A. Project Meetings: Arrange for and attend meetings with the Architect and such other persons
as the Architect requests to have present. The Contractor shall be represented by a principal,
project manager, general superintendent or other authorized main office representative, as well
as by the Contractor's field superintendent. An authorized representative of any subcontractor
or sub-subcontractor shall attend such meetings if the representative's presence is requested by
the Architect. Such representatives shall be empowered to make binding commitments on all
matters to be discussed at such meetings, including costs, payments, change orders, time
schedules and manpower. Any notices required under the Contract may be served on such
representatives. Written reports of meeting minutes shall be prepared by the Contractor and
distributed by the Contractor to attendees, the Architect, and Owner within three business days.
1. Pre-Construction Conference: Attendance by Architect, Contractor, major
subcontractors. Agenda shall include: Quality of workmanship, coordination,
interpretations, job schedule, submittals, approvals, requisition procedures, testing,
protection of construction, and construction waste management.
2. Exterior Envelope Meeting: Attendance by Architect, Contractor, major subcontractors.
Agenda shall include as applicable: Review of exterior wall details, wall construction,
sample panel preparation, cleaning, control and expansion joints, cold weather
procedures.
3. Roofing/Flashings Meeting: Attendance by Architect, Contractor, roofing subcontractor,
and representative of roofing manufacturer. Agenda shall include as applicable:
Preparation of roof decks, flashing and blocking details, roofing procedures and
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 5
inspections, bonds and guarantees, weather conditions during roofing, protection of roof
membrane during construction.
4. Interior Finishes Meeting: Attendance by Architect, Contractor, major subcontractors.
Agenda shall include as applicable: Quality of workmanship, environmental conditions for
application of finishes, drywall details, millwork details, condition of surfaces to receive
finishes, tile work, painting work, samples and test areas and approvals, coordination with
mechanical and electrical interfaces and penetrations.
5. Progress Meetings: Hold regularly before preparation of payment requests and additional
meetings as requested by the Architect. Attendance by Architect, Contractor, and others
as determined by Contractor. Agenda shall include work in progress and payment
requests.
6. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction, as specified.
Preinstallation Conferences may be part of Progress Meeting agenda. Attendance by
Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by
the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations
that have preceded or will follow. Agenda shall include a review of progress of other
construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration.
B. Emergency Contacts: Furnish the Owner and Architect, in writing, the names and telephone
numbers of individuals to be contacted in the event of an out-of-hours emergency at the building
site. Post a similar list readily visible from the outside of the field office or a location acceptable
to the Architect.
C. Layout: Layout work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of the
building, grading, utilities and other work executed under the contract. Retain a registered
professional engineer or registered land surveyor, acceptable to the Architect, to initially
establish exterior lines and required elevations of all buildings and structures to be erected on
the site. The registered professional engineer or registered land surveyor shall certify the actual
location of the constructed facilities in relation to property lines, building lines, easements, set-
backs, and other restrictive boundaries.
D. Field Measurements: Verify measurements at the building prior to ordering materials or
commencing work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. Differences which
may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work.
E. Field Measurements for Fixed Equipment: Dimensions for fixed equipment to be supplied under
this Contract or separate contracts shall be determined by field measurements taken jointly by
the Contractor and the equipment supplier involved. A record of the field measurements shall
be kept until time of substantial completion of the project, or until the equipment has been fully
installed and accepted by the Owner, whichever is later. Responsibility for fixed equipment
fabricated accurately to field measurements for proper fit and operation shall be that of the
Contractor. Contractor shall pay all costs involved in correcting any misfitting fixed equipment
as fabricated.
F. Project Limit Line: The boundaries of the site do not limit the responsibility of the Contractor to
perform the work in its entirety. Make utility connections as indicated.
G. Matching: Where matching is indicated, the Architect shall be the sole and final judge of what is
an acceptable match. Mockups and sample submissions are required.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 6
H. Observation: Notify the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction at least thirty-six hours in
advance of concealing any work.
I. Utilities: Prior to interrupting utilities, services or facilities, notify the utility owner and the Owner
and obtain their written approval a minimum 48 hours in advance.
J. Furnishings, Fixtures, and Equipment: Cooperate and permit the Owner to install their
furnishings and equipment during the progress of the work. Owner's installation of furnishings
or equipment does not signify Owner's acceptance of any portion of the work.
K. Clean-Up: Frequently clean-up all waste, remove from site regularly, and legally dispose of off-
site. Comply with requirements of Section 017400 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT.
L. Installer's Acceptance of Conditions: All installers shall inspect substrates and conditions under
which work is to be executed and shall report in writing to the Contractor all conditions
detrimental to the proper execution and completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts previous work
and conditions.
M. Coordination: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating all trades, coordinating
construction sequences and schedules, and coordinating the actual installed location and
interface of all work.
1. Prior to beginning mechanical, electrical and fire protection work, the Contractor shall
prepare coordination drawings showing the exact alignment, physical location and
configuration of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection installations and
demonstrating to the Contractor's satisfaction that the installations will clear all
obstructions, permit proper clearances for the Work of other trades, and present an
orderly appearance where exposed. The Contractor shall be solely liable and
responsible for any costs and delays resulting from the Contractor's failure to prepare
such coordination drawings or from the negligent preparation of such coordination
drawings.
2. Exact locations and groupings of mechanical, electrical and fire protection fixtures,
switches, heads and outlets shall be obtained from the Architect before the Work is
roughed in. Work installed without such information from the Architect shall be relocated
at the Contractor's expense if the Architect so requests.
N. Request For Interpretation (RFIs):
1. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract
Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and
submit an RFI in the form specified.
a. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than
Contractor will be returned with no response.
2. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation.
3. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return
it. Allow three working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
4. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 7
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
O. Existing Articles of Unusual Value: If during demolition, excavation, or disposal work articles of
unusual value or of historical or archaeological significance are encountered, the ownership of
such articles is retained by the Owner, and information regarding their discovery shall be
immediately furnished to the Architect. If the nature of the article is such that work cannot
proceed without danger of damage, work in the area shall be immediately discontinued until the
Architect has determined the proper procedure to be followed. Delays in time thereby shall be a
condition for which the time of the Contract may be extended. Costs incurred after discovery in
the salvaging of such articles shall be borne by the Owner.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Required Submittals: Submit shop drawings, product data, initial selection samples, verification
samples, calculations, coordination drawings, schedules, and all other submittals as specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Submittal Schedule: Within 30 days after award of contract and before first application for
payment, prepare list of submittals in chronological sequence showing all submittals and
proposed date first due at Architect's office and proposed date due to be returned to Contractor.
Note relevant specification section number.
C. Contractor's Preparation of Submittals: Modify and customize all submittals to show interface
with adjacent work and attachment to building. Identify each submittal with name of project,
date, Contractor's name, subcontractor's name, manufacturer's name, submittal name, relevant
specification section numbers, and Submittal Schedule reference number. Stamp and sign
each submittal to show the Contractor's review and approval of each submittal before delivery to
Architect's office; unstamped and unsigned submittals will be returned without action by the
Architect. Leave 4" x 6" open space for Architect's "action" stamp.
1. Electronic Submittals: Provide a copy of all submittals in electronic format to the
Architect. Architect will return a file of reviewed submittal in electronic format to the
Contractor for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, governing authorities
and others as necessary for proper performance of the Work. Unless otherwise
amenable to the Architect, additional hard copies of submittals will not be reviewed by the
Architect (or Consultant) and will not be returned to the Contractor.
2. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
3. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
4. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.
5. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's preprinted literature including, without limitation,
manufacturer's standard printed description of product, materials and construction,
recommendations for application and use, certification of compliance with standards,
instructions for installation, and special coordination requirements. Collect data into one
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 8
submittal for each unit of work or system; mark each copy to show which choices and options
are applicable to project.
1. Installer Copy: Verify that the Installer has a current copy of the relevant product data,
including installation instructions, before permitting installation to begin.
E. Shop Drawings: Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared
specifically for this project. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field
dimensions and clearly note field conditions. Identify materials and products in the work shown.
Note special coordination required.
1. After Architect's action, follow specified distribution procedure.
F. Samples: Provide units identical with final materials and products to be installed in the work.
Where indicated, prepare samples to match Architect's sample. Label each sample with
description, source, generic name or manufacturer's name and model number. Architect will
review samples for confirmation of visual design intent, color, pattern, texture and type only;
Architect will not test samples for compliance with other Contract requirements which shall
remain the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1. Initial Selection Samples Submittal Quantities: For initial selection purposes, submit 1 set
of samples showing the complete range of colors and finishes available.
2. Verification Samples Submittal Quantities: For verification of an initial selection, submit 3
sets of samples; one set will be returned to Contractor to be maintained at project site for
quality control comparisons.
G. Timing of Submittals: Submit submittals in a timely fashion to allow at least 10 business days
for each office's review and handling. This means that submittals which have to be reviewed by
the Architect and one of their consultants require at least 20 business days for review and
handling. Add ten business days for each additional consultant who must review a submission.
H. Architect's Action on Submittals: Architect will review submittals, stamp with "action stamp",
mark action, and return to Contractor. Architect will review submittals only for conformance with
the design concept of the project. The Contractor is responsible for confirming compliance with
other Contract requirements, including without limitation, performance requirements, field
dimensions, fabrication methods, means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, coordination with other work. The Architect's review and approval of submittals
shall be held to the limitations stated in the Owner/Architect Agreement and the Conditions of
the Contract. In no case shall approval or acceptance by the Architect be interpreted as a
release of Contractor of their responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Required Resubmittal: Unless submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed except as
noted, resubmission not required," make corrections or changes to original and resubmit
to Architect.
2. Distribution: When submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed as noted, resubmittal not
required," make prints or copies and distribute to Owner, Subcontractors involved, and to
all other parties requiring information from the submittal for performance or coordination
of related work.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 9
1.12 WARRANTIES
A. Warranties Required: Refer to individual trade sections for specific product warranty
requirements.
B. Procurement: Where a warranty is required, do not purchase or subcontract for materials or
work until it has been determined that parties required to countersign warranties are willing to do
so.
C. Warranty Forms: Submit written warranty to Owner through Architect for approval prior to
execution. Furnish two copies of executed warranty to Owner for their records; furnish two
additional conformed copies where required for maintenance manual.
D. Work Covered: Contractor shall remove and replace other work of project which has been
damaged as a result of failure of warranteed work or equipment, or which must be removed and
replaced to provide access to work under warranty. Unless otherwise specified, warranty shall
cover full cost of replacement or repair, and shall not be pro-rated on basis of useful service life.
E. Warranty Extensions: Work repaired or replaced under warranty shall be warranted until the
original warranty expiration date or for ninety days whichever is later in time.
F. Warranty Effective Starting Date: Guarantee period for all work, material and equipment shall
begin on the date of substantial completion, not when subcontractor has completed their work
nor when equipment is turned on. In addition to the one year guarantees for the entire work
covered by these Contract Documents, refer to the various sections of the specifications for
extended guarantee or maintenance requirements for various material and equipment.
1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Limitations: Do not cut and patch any work in a manner that would result in a failure of the work
to perform as intended, decreased energy performance, increased maintenance, decreased
operational life, or decreased safety.
1. Structural Work: Do not cut structural work or bearing walls without written approval from
Architect. Where cutting and patching of structural work is necessary and approved by
Architect, perform work in a manner which will not diminish structural capacity nor
increase deflection of member. Provide temporary shoring and bracing as necessary.
Ensure the safety of people and property at all times.
B. Cutting and Patching Materials: Use materials identical to materials to be cut and patched. If
identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing
materials to the greatest extent possible. Provide finished work that will result in equal to or
better than existing performance characteristics.
C. Inspection: Before cutting and patching, examine surfaces and conditions under which work is
to be performed and correct unsafe and unsatisfactory conditions prior to proceeding.
D. Protection: Protect adjacent work from damage. Protect the work from adverse conditions.
E. Cutting: Cut work using methods least likely to damage adjoining work. Use tools designed for
sawing or grinding, not hammering or chopping. Use saws or drills to ensure neat, accurately
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 10
formed holes to sizes required with minimum disturbance to adjacent work. Temporarily cover
openings; maintain weathertightness and safety.
1. Utilities: Locate utilities before cutting. Provide temporary utilities as needed. Cap,
valve, or plug and seal ends of abandoned utilities to prevent entrance of moisture or
other foreign matter.
F. Patching: Patch with seams and joints which are durable and not visible. Comply with specified
tolerances for similar new work; create true even planes with uniform continuous appearance.
Restore finishes of patched areas and, if necessary, extend finish restoration onto adjoining
unpatched area to eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Repaint entire assemblies,
not just patched area. Remove and replace work which has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner as determined by the Architect.
G. Qualifications: Retain experienced and specialized firms, original installers if possible, to
perform cutting and patching. Workmen shall be skilled in type of cutting and patching required.
1.14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
A. Scope of Temporary Work: This article is not intended to limit the scope of temporary work
required under the Contract. Provide all temporary facilities and utilities needed.
B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and charges related to temporary work.
C. Codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction for Temporary Facilities and Utilities: Comply with all
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, codes, utility companies, OSHA, and industry
standards including, but not limited to the following:
1. NFPA Code 241, Building Construction and Demolition Operations.
2. ANSI-A10 Series, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.
3. NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6, Temporary Job Utilities and Services.
4. Electrical Service: NEMA, NECA, and UL.
D. Field Offices: Provide Contractor's field offices as needed. Keep current copies of all Contract
Documents and project paperwork neatly on file at jobsite. Permit Architect's unrestricted use of
Contractor's field office facilities including copiers, telephones, plan tables, and other
equipment. Furnish, maintain, and pay for light, power, phone, fax, and other field office
services.
E. Shops and Sheds: At Contractor's option, provide shops and sheds for Contractor's use as
needed. Locate shops and sheds where acceptable to Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction. Prior to completion of construction, temporary storage facilities and surplus stored
materials shall be removed from the site.
F. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat as needed to protect the work and create a suitable
work environment. Provide temporary heat to protect the exterior construction against injury or
damage resulting from cold temperature and dampness, to heat materials, and to maintain the
minimum temperatures specified herein and in individual specification sections. Protect building
from soot, smoke and fire damage. Do not use heaters which would interfere with curing of
mortar and grout or damage any materials.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 11
1. Heaters for temporary heat shall be approved temporary steam generators or forced
warm air heaters located outside the building or vented to the outside, or other safety
type UL approved heating devices acceptable to the Architect.
2. Oil burning salamander type heaters will not be permitted. Non-vented, open flame
heaters will not be permitted inside the building once the building is closed-in.
3. Propane type-heaters will not be permitted within the area of the building or near
stockpiles of combustible materials.
4. Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from the
Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be adequately
maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters, strainers, controls,
reliefs, and similar items. Prior to turnover to Owner, the equipment shall be in a clean,
like new condition. The guarantee period shall not start until the equipment is turned over
to the Owner for their use. Do not invalidate existing warranty by any action or failure to
act. Clean and change air filters frequently to prevent construction dust and debris from
contaminating system.
G. Pumping and Drainage: Protect excavations, trenches, buildings and materials from rain water,
ground water, backup or leakage of sewers, drains and other piping, and from water of any
other origin. Promptly remove any accumulation of water. Provide and operate all pumps,
piping and other equipment necessary for pumping, drainage and protection from water.
H. Equipment and Tools: Provide all equipment including, but not limited to, hoists, lifts,
scaffolding, machines, tools and the like, as needed for execution of the work. Provide safe
access to all parts of the work.
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures to maintain proper temperatures and to
prevent weather damage. Always maintain legal means of egress.
J. Snow and Ice: Remove all snow and ice which interferes with work or safety.
K. Streets, Walks and Grounds: Maintain public and private roads and walks clear of debris
caused by construction operations. Repair all damage caused to streets, drives, curbs,
sidewalks, fences, poles and similar items where disturbed or damaged by building construction
and leave them in as good condition after completion of the work as before operations started.
L. Protection: Protect nearby property and the public from construction activities. Provide and
maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, railings, walkways and similar items.
Immediately repair damaged property to its condition before being damaged.
M. Public Services: Provide temporary public services such as, street lighting, night lighting,
sidewalks, covered passages, signs, signals and the like, as requested by authorities having
jurisdiction.
N. Construction Fencing: Provide construction fencing and barriers as applicable to the project
and as required by code to protect personnel, the public, and to control access. Provide 6 ft.
high chain link fencing and gates at perimeter of project work area.
O. Security: Secure site against unauthorized entry at all times. Provide secure, locked temporary
enclosures. Protect the work at all times. Provide watchman service, if necessary, to protect
the work.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 12
P. Signs: Erect project identification signs in compliance with details to be provided by Architect.
Signs shall be minimum 4' x 8' exterior grade plywood and shall contain the names of the
project, Owner, Architect, major Consultants, Contractor, and major financing institution. Except
for safety and warning signs, no other signs are permitted. Location as acceptable to the
Architect.
Q. Fire Prevention: Take every precaution to prevent fire. Provide and maintain in good operating
condition suitable and adequate fire protection equipment and services, and comply with
recommendations regarding fire protection made by the representative of the fire insurance
company carrying insurance on the Work or by the local fire chief or fire marshal. The area
within the site limits shall be kept orderly and clean, and all combustible rubbish shall be
promptly removed from the site.
R. Egress: Maintain safe and legal means of egress at all times. At all times, provide at least two
separate means of egress.
S. Mold Control and Remediation During Construction: The Contractor shall protect construction
materials and building systems from moisture damage and from conditions which promote mold
growth during and after construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for mold remediation
and replacement of materials which cannot be successfully remediated in accordance with the
following requirements:
1. Materials which become wet prior to installation shall be cleaned, treated and dried in
accordance with EPA Guidelines.
2. Materials which exhibit mold growth prior to installation shall not be installed and shall be
removed from the site.
3. Materials which exhibit mold growth after installation shall be remediated in accordance
with EPA Guidelines for Remediating Building Materials with Mold Growth Caused by
Clean Water. The Contractor shall engage and pay for a qualified industrial hygienist
acceptable to the Owner to determine the cause of the mold growth, and to certify in
writing that materials have been successfully remediated. In the event that the industrial
hygienist recommends methods of remediation in addition to those in the Guidelines, the
Contractor shall also be responsible for the additional remediation. Materials which can
not be successfully remediated shall be removed and replaced with new materials at no
additional expense to the Owner.
4. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall submit the name of the person in the
Contractor's organization responsible for ensuring compliance with these requirements
for mold control and remediation.
1.15 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Specified Products: In all cases in which a manufacturer's name, trade name or other
proprietary designation is used in connection with materials or articles to be furnished under this
Contract, whether or not the phrase "or equal" is used after such name, the Contractor shall
provide the product of the named manufacturers without substitution, unless a written request
for a substitution has been submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect.
B. Deviations from Detailed Requirements: If the Contractor proposes to use material which, while
suitable for the intended use, deviates in any way from the detailed requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing of the nature of such deviations
at the time the materials is submitted for approval, and shall request written approval of the
deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 13
C. Approval of Substitutions: In requesting approval of deviations or substitutions, the Contractor
shall provide evidence, including, but not limited to manufacturer's data, leading to a reasonable
certainty that the proposed substitution or deviation will provide a quality of result at least equal
to that attainable if the detailed requirements of the Contract Documents were strictly followed.
If, in the opinion of the Architect, the evidence presented by the Contractor does not provide a
sufficient basis for such reasonable certainty, the Architect may reject such substitution or
deviation without further investigation.
D. Intent of Contract Documents: The Contract Documents are intended to produce a building of
consistent character and quality of design. All components of the building including visible
items of mechanical and electrical equipment have been selected to have a coordinated design
in relation to the overall appearance of the building. The Architect shall judge the design and
appearance of proposed substitutes on the basis of the suitability in relation to the overall
design of the Project, as well as for their intrinsic merits. The Architect will not approve as equal
to materials specified proposed substitutes which in the Architect's opinion, would be out of
character, obtrusive, or otherwise inconsistent with the character or quality of design of the
Project. In order to permit coordinated design of color and finishes the Contractor shall furnish
the substituted material in any color, finish texture, or pattern which would have been available
from the manufacturer originally specified, at no additional cost to the owner.
E. Additional Costs or Impact: Any additional cost, or any loss or damage arising from the
substitution of any material or any method for those originally specified shall be borne by the
contractor, notwithstanding approval or acceptance of such substitution by the Owner or the
Architect, unless such substitution was made at the written request or direction of the Owner
and the Architect. Any decrease in the cost of the substitution shall be returned to the Owner.
F. Manufacturers: To the greatest degree possible, provide primary materials and products from
one manufacturer for each type or kind. Provide secondary materials as recommended by
manufacturers of primary materials.
G. Substitution Requests: Refer to Section 016200 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM. Submit
3 copies. Identify product to be replaced by substitute by reference to specification sections and
drawing numbers. Provide Contractor's certification and evidence to prove compliance with
Contract Document requirements as acceptable to Architect.
H. Substitution Conditions: Substitution requests will be returned without action unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied. The Contractor shall state which of the following conditions
applies to the requested substitution:
1. Request is due to an "or equal" clause.
2. Specified material or product cannot be coordinated with other work.
3. Specified material or product is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Substantial advantage is offered Owner in terms of cost, time, or other valuable
consideration.
5. Specified material or product is not available.
I. Invalid Substitutions: Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of shop drawings,
samples, product data or other submittal is not a valid request for, nor an approval of a
substitution unless the Contractor presents the information when first submitted as a Request
for Substitution.
J. Compatibility of Materials Used in the Work:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 14
1. Ensure complete compatibility between materials.
2. Compatibility shall include adhesion, erosion, solubility, differential thermal response, and
galvanic action.
3. Provide evidence of compatibility.
4. Provide custom testing where evidence is not available.
5. Where materials are not compatible, provide necessary isolation or transition materials
and provide details of same.
6. Correct defects resulting from incompatibility including de-construction and re-
construction of assemblies – whether materials are part of a submittal and substitution
process or not.
7. Proposed substitutions may be rejected where compatibility information is not provided;
or where compatibility is not adequately addressed, according to the Architect’s
judgment; or where incompatible materials would negatively impact the project’s success.
1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Minimize long-
term storage at the site. Maintain environmental conditions, temperature, ventilation, and
humidity within range permitted by manufacturers of materials and products used.
1.17 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Contractor’s Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
connections.
1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present
for and assist in Owner's inspection.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
B. Owner-Furnished Products: As directed by the Architect.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 15
1.18 LABELS
A. Labels, Trademarks, & Tradenames: Locate required labels on inconspicuous surfaces. Do not
provide labels, nameplates, or trademarks which are not required. Provide permanent data
plate on each item of equipment stating manufacturer, model, serial number, capacity, ratings
and all other essential data.
1.19 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Keep record documents neatly and accurately. Record information as the work
progresses and deliver to Architect at time of final acceptance. Include in record documents all
field changes made, all relevant dimensions, and all relevant details of the work. Keep record
documents up to date with all field orders and change orders clearly indicated.
B. Drawings: Keep four separate sets of blackline prints at the site, one set each for mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, and architectural/structural disciplines. Neatly and accurately note all
deviations from the Contract Documents and the exact actual location of the work as installed.
Marked-up and colored prints will be used as a guide to determine the progress of the work
installed. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the record documents are accurate
and up-to-date.
1. Work Outside Building: Record data outside of building to an accuracy of plus or minus 1
inch and determine and record the invert elevation of all drain lines.
2. At completion of the work, submit one complete set of marked-up prints for review. After
acceptance, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the record
drawings.
3. Architect shall furnish Contractor with AutoCAD files for originals of the Contract
Drawings. Make modifications to these files as shown on the marked-up prints. Remove
superseded data to show the completed installation.
4. Deliver the completed AutoCAD record drawings, in the same version as Contract
Drawings, properly titled and dated to the Architect. Indicate preparer of record drawings.
These record drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
C. Specifications: Maintain one clean copy of complete specifications [including addenda,
modifications, and bulletins with changes, substitutions, and selected options clearly noted.
Circle or otherwise clearly indicate which manufacturer and products are actually used.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Manuals shall be submitted which contain the following:
1. Description of the system provided.
2. Handling, storage, and installation instructions.
3. Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the systems or
equipment.
4. Operating procedures, including prestartup, startup, normal operation, emergency
shutdown, normal shutdown and troubleshooting.
5. Maintenance procedures including lubrication requirements, intervals between lubrication,
preventative and repair procedures, and complete spare parts list with cross reference to
original equipment manufacturer's part numbers.
6. Control and alarm features including schematic of control systems, control loop electric
ladder diagrams, controller operating set points, settings for alarms and shutdown
systems, pump curves and fan curves.
7. Safety and environmental considerations.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 16
E. Copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Three copies of the manuals shall be provided
within sufficient time to allow for training of Owner's personnel. Submit one copy of the manuals
to the Architect for review no later than 90 calendar days prior to substantial completion, or
building turn over, whichever comes first. Submit the remaining five copies within 15 days after
first review set is returned to contractor. Progress payment may be withheld if this requirement
is not met.
F. Additional Requirements for Operating and Maintenance Manuals: The requirements for
manuals applies to each packaged and field-fabricated operating system. The manuals shall be
provided in three-ring side binders with durable plastic covers. The manuals shall contain a
detailed table of contents and have tab dividers for major sections and special equipment.
G. Framed Data: Provide charts and lists of all valves, circuits, switches, controls and equipment.
Install on walls under glass at locations directed by Architect.
1.20 PROJECT CLOSE OUT
A. Complete the following prior to Substantial Completion:
1. Provide Contractor's Punch List of incomplete items stating reason for incompletion and
value of incompletion.
2. Advise Owner of insurance change over requirements.
3. Submit all warranties, maintenance contracts, final certificates and similar documents.
4. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy and similar releases which permit the Owner's full and
unrestricted use of the areas claimed "Substantially Complete".
5. Submit record documents.
6. Deliver maintenance stocks of materials where specified.
7. Make final change over of lock cylinders or cores and advise Owner of change of security
responsibility.
8. Complete startup of all systems and instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and
routine maintenance of systems and equipment.
9. Complete clean up and restoration of damaged finishes.
10. Remove all temporary facilities and utilities that are no longer needed.
11. Request Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion.
B. Architect will either issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of work
which must be performed prior to issue of certificate.
C. Complete the following prior to Final Acceptance and payment:
1. Obtain Certificate of Substantial Completion.
2. Submit final application for payment, showing final accounting of changes in the work.
3. Provide final releases and lien waivers not previously submitted.
4. Submit certified copy of final punch list stating that Contractor has completed or corrected
each item.
5. Submit final meter readings, record of stored fuel and similar information.
6. Submit Consent of Surety for final payment.
7. Submit evidence of Contractor's continuing insurance coverage (if required by Contract
Documents).
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - 17
1.21 FINAL CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean Up: Immediately prior to the Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, the
Contractor shall completely clean the premises and clean and prepare the completed work in
order for it to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Such work shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Concrete and ceramic surfaces shall be cleaned and washed.
2. Resilient coverings shall be cleaned, waxed and buffed as applicable.
3. Woodwork shall be dusted and cleaned.
4. Sash, fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
5. Stains, spots, dust, marks and smears shall be removed from all surfaces.
6. Hardware and metal surfaces shall be cleaned and polished.
7. Glass and plastic surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by professional window cleaners.
8. Damaged, broken or scratched glass or plastic shall be replaced by the Contractor at the
Contractor's expense.
9. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces with high efficiency particulate arrestor (HEPA)
vacuum.
10. Use low-emitting, environmentally friendly cleaning agents and procedures. Do not use
ammonia, chlorine bleach, or solvent-based cleaners, unless authorized in writing by
Architect.
B. Pest Control: Engage a licensed exterminator, who practices integrated pest management
(IPM), to inspect the project and eliminate rodents, termites and all other insects and pests.
Coordinate pest control plan with Owner. Owner’s written approval is required prior to
application. Submit proposed program to Owner and Architect. Program shall clearly indicate
the following:
1. Area or areas to be treated.
2. Manufacturer's printed instructions and MSDS for each chemical to be used.
3. Pollution preventive measures to be employed.
C. Repairs: Repair and touch-up all damaged and deteriorated products and surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [Not Used]
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 1
SECTION 014320
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
B. Examine the Contract Documents and become thoroughly acquainted with the detailed material
and workmanship requirements especially those of the following sections:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry.
3. Section 051000 - Structural Steel.
4. Section 053000 - Steel Deck.
5. Section 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing.
6. Section 055100 - Metal Stairs and Railings.
C. Refer to Chapter 17 of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code Eighth Edition
for quality, workmanship and requirements for all materials.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control and testing
services.
B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports
performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not
include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another
identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's quality control responsibilities are specified in, but not limited to, the
following Sections:
a. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants
b. Section 099000 - Painting
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 2
c. Division 31, Earthwork
2. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ
and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs
for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
3. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a
qualified independent testing agency to perform those services.
4. The costs of the following tests and inspections shall be accounted for separately and
reported to the Owner.
a. Tests and inspection of materials and workmanship not conforming to contract
requirements.
b. Tests and inspection necessitated by any other noncompliance with contract
requirements.
c. Acceptance tests for materials because of changes in properties or changed
sources.
d. Costs of inspector's time and expenses wasted because of cancellations or delays
of the work.
e. Tests and services of inspectors required by a public authority.
B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or
other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction
indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and
similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services
required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or
assist the agency in taking samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes
that require control by the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections,
sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall
cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties.
1. The Testing Laboratory shall make all necessary arrangements with the General
Contractor to insure the presence of the required inspectors at all contract operations
specified to be included under the Testing and Inspection Agreement. The General
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 3
Contractor shall notify the Testing Laboratory a reasonable time in advance (not less than
24 hours) of the time when operations requiring inspection or testing are scheduled to
start.
2. Provide necessary personnel, equipment and facilities for tests and inspection.
Personnel shall be experienced and competent in their particular specialties.
3. The Testing Laboratory shall conduct its work so as not to cause delay in the progress of
construction. Any non-compliance with the Contract Documents shall be immediately
reported to the General Contractor and the Architect.
4. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
5. Nothing herein specified permits the Testing Laboratory to allow the General Contractor
to deviate from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the
Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
7. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a
minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples,
and similar activities.
2. A complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the project work will be made available
by the Owner at the project site. The Testing Laboratory personnel shall become
thoroughly familiar with all provisions of these documents which apply for the testing and
inspection services.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications: Submit qualifications of testing laboratories proposed for use for approval.
B. Schedule: Submit a schedule of required tests and inspections for review.
C. Reports: Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency
shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to
the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in
duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when
the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 4
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies
with Contract Document requirements.
l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including
independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council
of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is
located.
1.6 REFERENCE
A. American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E. 329-77: Inspection and Testing
Agencies for Concrete Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction.
B. Wherever the source or characteristics of materials change or the quality of materials provided
indicates lack of compliance with contract requirements, full or partial acceptance tests shall be
performed as directed by the Structural Engineer of Record through the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. The Testing Laboratory shall maintain and distribute continuous record of the quality of
materials and workmanship under its control, and certify that such materials and workmanship
meet the contract requirements.
B. The inspection and control shall be performed under the direction of the Structural Engineer of
Record.
C. The duties of the Testing Laboratory shall include:
1. Tests and certification of materials or components designated to be tested at place of
fabrication or at the job site.
2. Supervision and certification of fabrication and erection of materials designated to be
inspected.
3. Acceptance testing of concrete design mixes.
4. Submission of reports:
a. Copies of each report of plant and field inspection shall be made and distributed
within 3 days. Copies of each report of tests shall be distributed within 2 days of
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 5
the performance of tests. Results of tests showing non-conformance to contract
requirements shall be advised to the Architect and General Contractor by phone on
the same day.
b. Distribution of one copy of each report shall be as follows: Owner, Architect,
Structural Engineer, General Contractor, Inspectional Services.
c. All reports shall include accurate and unambiguous descriptions of the source of
the materials and their location in the structure.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL FOR CONCRETE
A. Provide inspection and testing at the batching plant once at the start of the project and
periodically thereafter, and at the project whenever structural concrete is placed. Provide
testing in accordance with the approved referenced standard methods.
B. Batching Plant Inspection: Make verification of calibration of weighing equipment, measuring
equipment and timing devices. Make observation of mixing equipment and its operation,
methods used for measuring and changing ingredients and water into mixing equipment. Make
observations of truck mixers, agitators, or other concrete transportation equipment. Verify that
ingredients for concrete are from the sources identified in the approved design mixes and that
they are properly stored at the plant. Make gradation and moisture tests of aggregates.
Determine and record the actual batched weights and water-cement ratio used; verify that such
weights and ratio conform to the weights and proportions required by the approved design
mixes, adjusted for actual moisture content and gradation of aggregates.
C. Field Tests: Obtain samples of concrete at the project and make quality control tests during
placing operations, including slump tests, air content tests, density tests, air temperature and
concrete temperature for all concrete, and sets of cylinders for compressive tests. Cylinders
required by the Contractor for stripping purposes are excluded from these quality control
requirements.
D. Slump tests shall be made from each load of concrete; if concrete is pumped, slump tests shall
be taken at point of discharge. When air entrainment is required by the approved design mix,
air content tests shall be made from each load of concrete. If the measured density of any
concrete, or the measured slump of any concrete, or the air content of air entrained concrete,
falls outside the limits of the approved design mix, a check test shall be made immediately on
another portion of the same load. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be
considered to have failed to meet the requirements of the approved design mix, and shall not be
used on the project.
E. Test Cylinder Sets: Make sets of 4 cylinders (6" dia. x 12" long) for each class of concrete on
each day that it is placed. Take one set of cylinders, directly from the mixer, or point of
discharge if pumped, for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, or once per day for each
design mix. The tests are intended to ensure that the concrete meets the specified
requirements, with particular regard to 28 day strength. Identify cylinder sets by date, concrete
class, concrete delivery ticket and location of placement in the project.
F. Field Curing: Provide all facilities for making and transporting the test cylinders. Utilize the
curing box provided by the Contractor for storage of cylinders in the field. The box shall be
heated as required to maintain curing conditions consistent with the curing of the project
concrete. During hot weather, test cylinders shall be covered immediately with damp burlap and
cooled or stored otherwise as required to maintain curing conditions consistent with the curing
of the project concrete. The box shall be located in an area free from vibration caused by
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 6
construction operations and by off-site causes. Cylinders shall remain in the curing box until
ready for transportation to the laboratory but not less than 24 hours.
G. Cylinder Tests: Transport the cylinders to the laboratory in a vertical position. Store and cure
the cylinders under controlled conditions until time of testing. Make compressive strength tests
of one cylinder of each set at 7 days and of the other three cylinders of each set at 28 days. If
the first two cylinders tested at 28 days show strengths less than 85 percent of the specified
value, the third cylinder shall not be tested as directed by the Architect. The testing of each set
of three test cylinders at 28 days shall be considered as one strength test. The strength of such
test shall be the average of the breaking strengths of the three cylinders comprising the test
except that, if one of the specimens shall show manifest evidence of improper sampling,
molding, handling, or testing, it shall be discarded and the remaining two averaged. If the first
two cylinders tested at 28 days show strengths less than 85 percent of the specified value, the
third cylinder shall not be tested at 28 days but shall be kept available for later testing as
directed by the Architect.
H. Concrete Aggregate Testing: At start of project and whenever a change in source of
characteristics occurs, provide standard acceptance tests of fine and coarse aggregates for
quality and determination of physical properties. Tests shall include sieve analysis, specify
gravity, absorption tests, silt content, soundness and organic content.
I. Verification and Evaluation of Mix Designs: Verify and evaluate that Contractor's mix designs,
pumped or otherwise, are in accordance with Project Specifications.
J. Reinforcement and Formwork: Inspect reinforcement for surface cleanliness, accessories,
clearances, sizes and spacing, etc. Inspect formwork for tightness, adequacy, surface quality
and cleanliness.
K. Concrete Placement: Inspect methods of discharge, transport, placement, consolidation and
finishing.
L. Grout and Grouting: Examine and ascertain that the materials used for grouting conform to the
Specifications. Check grouting operations for conformance with the Specifications and with the
manufacturer's recommendations for use. Check that the grout fills all voids and spaces which
are required to be grouted.
M. Grout Compressive Tests: Grout shall be tested for compressive strength. Provide a top plate
fastened to the top of the mold to confine the mortar and simulate in-place conditions. Nine 2" x
2" cubes shall be taken in the field for each set. Three cubes shall be taken on each day that
each strength class of grout is being placed.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNIT MASONRY
A. The structural inspections listed below shall be required for masonry construction.
INSPECTION OR TEST
REFERENCED CRITERIA
ACI 530/ASC4/
TMS 402
ACI 530.1
ASCE 6/TMS 602
1. Material Sec. 2.2
2. Masonry Strength Sec. 1.6
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 7
3. Construction operations:
a. Proportioning, mixing consistency of
mortar and grout.
b. Application of mortar grout and ma-
sonry units
c. Condition, size, location and spacing
of reinforcement
d. Protection of masonry during cold
weather (temperature below 40 de-
grees F ) or hot weather (temperature
above 100 degrees F).
e. Anchorage
Chapter 8
Sec 4.2; 5.14
Sec. 2.3; 2.5;
4.2.2
Sec. 2.3.2.2;
2.3.2.3
4. Inspection of welding of reinforcement,
grouting, consolidation and reconsolidation
for buildings assigned to Seismic Perform-
ance Category C or D in accordance with
780 CMR 1612.1.7.
Note a.
Note a.
1. Note a: Referenced criteria not applicable.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Inspection of structural steel will be directed at verifying that inspection required to be carried
out by the Contractor's testing and quality control personnel, as specified in the Contract
Documents, has been completed.
B. Inspection of Fabricators: Where fabrication of structural load-bearing members and assemblies
is being performed on the premises of a fabricator’s shop, structural inspection of the fabricated
items shall be required. The fabricated items shall be inspected as required by 780 CMR
1705.0 and as required elsewhere in 780 CMR.
1. Fabrication procedures: The special inspector shall verify that the fabricator maintains
detailed fabrication and quality control procedures which provide a basis for inspection
control of the workmanship and the fabricator’s ability to conform to approved drawings,
project specifications and referenced standards. The special inspector shall review the
procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the
fabricator’s scope of work.
2. Procedures implementation: The structural inspector shall verify that the fabricator is
properly implementing the fabrication and quality control procedures outlined in 780 CMR
1705.4.1.
C. Field Inspection of Structural Steel: This inspection will be on a full-time basis while structural
steel is being erected, as requested by the Structural Engineer of Record, and will include the
following:
1. Proper erection of all pieces.
2. Proper fit of bolts, including nicking of threads.
3. Plumbness.
4. Proper installation of high-strength bolts, including checking of impact wrenches.
5. Weld visual inspection.
6. Comparison with approved Shop Drawings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 8
7. Examination of erector's quality control and testing records for compliance with Contract
Document.
a. Inspection and Testing of High-strength Bolts:
1) The visual examination of all joints to ascertain that bolts and washers are
properly installed and have been tensioned.
2) Tightness of bolts shall be checked by using a manual torque wrench in
accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents. As a minimum
check one bolt per connection or ten percent (10%) of the bolts involved. If
these tests indicate that proper tension in the bolts is not being achieved,
then the frequency of the tests shall be increased in consultation with the
structural engineer.
b. Inspection and Testing of Welding:
1) Verify the certification papers of each welder and his qualifications for the
particular welding positions in which he will work on the structure. Establish
and record each welder's symbol. The Testing Laboratory may reject a
welder's work and call for a retest at any time there is doubt of the quality of
work.
2) Welds shall be examined visually, for structural steel, steel deck, and studs.
Surfaces to be welded and all filler metal shall be carefully inspected.
Surface preparations, fit-up, and cleanliness of surfaces shall be noted.
Electrodes shall be checked for size, type and condition. Preheating of steel
and heating of electrodes shall be noted when required.
3) Check that all welds have been marked with the welder's symbol; mark all
welds requiring repairs or rewelding; make a reinspection of corrected work;
maintain a written record of all welds. Welds shall be tested where required
by Contract Documents.
4) Welds required to be tested by the Contractor shall be inspected by the
Testing Laboratory and verify that all welds have been performed and tested
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5) Testing of welds in the field shall consist of
a) Visual inspection of all welds
b) 10% testing of all fillet welds
c) 100% testing of all penetration welds
c. Inspection and Testing of Shear Connectors:
1) All headed stud shear connectors shall be checked for the following
indications of an insufficient weld:
a) Less than 360 degree fillet, voids, undercuts, or insufficient
penetration.
b) Burn-off (reduction in length after welding) less than 1/8 inch.
c) Cold appearance of the weld.
2) If, after welding of any shear connectors, visual inspection indicates any of
the imperfections listed above or any other questionable appearance, such
stud shall be struck hard with a three-pound hammer and bent 15 degrees
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES
014320 - 9
off perpendicular to beam and toward nearest end of beam. Studs which fail
this test, as provided in the AWS Code, shall be replaced. Studs which
show no sign of failure after this test may be left in bent position if no portion
of the stud is less than one inch from a proposed concrete surface.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL FOR WALL PANELS AND VENEERS AND LIGHT GAUGE METAL
FRAMING
A. Wall Panels and Veneers: Structural inspection is required for exterior wall panels and their
attachment to the building.
B. Light Gauge Metal Framing: Structural inspection is required for light gauge metal framing
systems for roofs, floors, and load-bearing curtain walls that have a story height greater than ten
feet.
C. Check components for size and configuration material grade against approved shop drawings.
D. Visually examine welds and metal fasteners for conformance with referenced standards.
3.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document
requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired
construction.
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
MOCK-UPS
014330 - 1
SECTION 014330
MOCKUPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. General: Provide and coordinate mock-up assemblies at Project site for Architect's review and
acceptance, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Refer to individual
Specification Sections for mock-up requirements. Generally, without limitation, mock-ups on site
include the following:
1. Mock-ups of individual pieces of the work, as specified within individual Specification
Section.
2. Field Mock-Up of exterior wall components. Three 6’ by 6’ mock-ups, Architect will
provide Drawings.
3. Field Mock-Up of interior construction. Refer to the Drawings for extent of mock-up. Two
6’ by 6’ mock-ups, Architect will provide Drawings
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the work of the related Specification
Sections so that each mock-up meets the specified requirements.
C. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 014320 – QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING SERVICES for testing of
mockups.
2. Individual Specification Sections for Submittal Samples.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Freestanding Mock-Ups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site in a
protected location.
1. Freestanding mock-ups are not part of the final construction. Freestanding mock-ups will
be used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,
testing, and operation.
2. Approved freestanding mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be
judged.
3. Approved freestanding mock-ups remain on site during the balance of construction and
are demolished and removed from site at completion of the Work they represent.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
MOCK-UPS
014330 - 2
B. In-Place Mock-Ups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed in-place and remain
part of final construction.
1. In-place mock-ups will be used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, qualities of materials and execution, and to review
construction, coordination, testing, or operation.
2. Approved in-place mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
3. Approved mock-ups remain part of the completed Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule: Construction Manager shall submit a schedule of mock-up construction, including
dates for mock-up review by the Architect.
1. Mock-up schedule shall be reviewed at each progress meeting, revised and resubmitted
as required.
2. Schedule shall allow sufficient time for mock-ups which are not accepted to be
reconstructed and reviewed until accepted by the Architect.
B. Shop Drawings of Mock-Ups: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and
erection of all parts of each mock-up. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorage,
connections and accessory items.
C. Photographs of Mock-Ups: Submit photographs of mock-ups after completion of installation and
acceptance of each mock-up.
D. Submittal Samples: Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements of
mock-up components and coordinate accordingly.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Modifications: Make design modifications to work only as required to meet performance
requirements and to coordinate the work. Indicate proposed design modifications on shop
drawings. Maintain original design concept without altering profiles and alignments indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide materials, components, and products for mock-ups as indicated on the Architect’s
Drawing and as specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to PART 3, EXECUTION portions of the various Specification Sections for specific
requirements regarding condition of surfaces, erection, and erection tolerances.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
MOCK-UPS
014330 - 3
3.2 FIELD MOCK-UP OF EXTERIOR WALL
A. Provide a field mock-up of the exterior wall at location and in configuration indicated on
Drawings. The exterior wall mock-up shall include the veneer systems and backup, one window
and all related flashings and sealants, etc. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities prior
to commencing work that individual mock-up is intended to represent. Protect and maintain
approved mock-ups throughout the work of the Contract. Locate mock-ups at the Project site as
directed by the Architect.
1. Refer to Drawings for extent of the field mock-up.
2. Provide modifications to mock-up as required until Architect's approval has been
received.
3.3 FIELD MOCK-UP OF INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide a field mock-up of the interior construction items at locations and in configuration
indicated on Drawings or as otherwise directed. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual
qualities prior to commencing work that individual mock-up is intended to represent. Protect and
maintain approved mock-ups throughout the work of the Contract. Locate mock-ups at the
Project site as directed by Architect.
1. Refer to Drawings for extent of the field mock-up.
2. Provide modifications to mock-up as required until Architect's approval has been
received.
B. Interior Construction Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups of various interior construction as indicated
or as specified in the applicable Specification Sections, as directed by the Architect.
3.4 INDIVIDUAL MOCK-UPS
A. Provide individual mock-ups of types and sizes required by individual Specification Sections to
evaluate and set the standard of quality for that work. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual
qualities prior to commencing work that individual mock-up is intended to represent. Protect and
maintain approved mock-ups throughout the work of the Contract. Locate mock-ups at the
Project site as directed by the Architect.
1. Provide as many mock-ups as required until Architect's approval has been received.
2. When indicated in individual Specification Sections, approved mock-ups may be
incorporated into the finish work.
3.5 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair and
restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as non-visible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
MOCK-UPS
014330 - 4
3.6 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
A. Demolish and remove mock-ups from site at the completion of the Project. Legally dispose of
demolished mock-up materials. Comply with requirements of Section 017400 –
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 1
SECTION 015639
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Protection of existing trees and plants from damage as a result of the Contractor's
operations including, but not limited to:
1. Tree protection fencing.
2. Root pruning and construction pruning.
3. Fencing of areas designated for tree removals by the Owner.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 312500, EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL: Silt fencing.
2. Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION: Clearing and grubbing.
3. Section 311300, SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING’ Includes stump
removal of trees removed by the Owner in designated fenced areas.
4. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING: Excavation
and backfill.
5. Section 329300, TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVERS: New plant material.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Dripline; the farthest extension of the tree branches (dripline).
B. Protected Root Zone (PRZ): is measured with a minimum radius of 10’ from the trunk or at
the tree's dripline, whichever is farther from the trunk, or as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
1.5 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 2
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
Z133.1 Safety Requirements for Pruning, Trimming,
Repairing, Maintaining and Removing Trees, and
for Cutting Brush.
2. International Society of Arboriculture (ISA):
Guide Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other
Plants
3. National Arborist Association (NAA):
Ref. 1 Pruning Standards for Shade Trees
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit drawings indicating the extent of tree protection fencing required.
B. Proposed methods, and schedule for effecting tree and plant protection shall be submitted
for approval.
C. Proposed methods, materials, and schedule for root pruning, construction pruning, and tree
fertilization by Certified Arborist shall be submitted for approval.
D. Certified Arborist Qualifications shall be submitted for Architect’s review and approval.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All tree work shall be performed by a professional Certified Arborist with a minimum five
years experience, who has successfully completed a certification program equal to the
Massachussetts Certified Arborist (MCA) program/examination sponsored by the
Massachusetts Arborists Association, 8-D Pleasant Street, South Natick, MA 01760; (508)
653-3320; FAX: (508) 653-4112; E-mail: MaarbAssn@aol.com.
B. Arborist shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Membership in:
a. NAA – National Arborist Association
b. ISA – International Society of Arborists
2. Meet state requirements for insurance.
3. Licenses for application and use of pesticides.
1.8 DAMAGE PENALTIES
A. Certain specimen trees within the construction areas and in other key locations are
indicated on the Drawings. Loss of any of these trees will result in fines assessed at
$10,000 per tree. Damage to all other trees on the property will be assessed at the rate of
$200 per inch caliper of the tree.
B. A fine of $1,000 will be levied against the Contractor for each incident of construction inside
tree protection areas.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 3
C. Damages to trees, shrubs, and other vegetation will be assessed by the Architect and
Owner in accordance with the ISA Guide.
D. Trees or roots visibly damaged will cause the Owner to withold from the Contractor an
assessed amount conforming to the requirements stipulated above for a period of two
years. After that period the impact of the damage to any tree will be assessed accordingly.
E. If any trees or shrubs designated to be saved are damaged and replacement is required, a
number and diameter of trees or shrubs of the same species and variety, as specified by
the Owner and Architect, shall be furnished and planted by the Contractor. The total inch
diameter of the replacement trees or shrubs shall equal the diameter of the tree or shrub to
be replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE PROTECTION FENCING
A. Tree protection fencing, including fencing of areas designated for tree removals by the
Owner, shall be the following:
1. Galvanized chain link fencing, 6 ft. high.
2. Fabric shall be a good commercial quality of steel wire of 2 in. mesh and 11 gage.
3. Fittings shall be malleable iron casting, wrought iron forgings, or pressed steel and
provided with pin connections. Equipment shall be designed to carry 100% overload.
4. Piping shall be steel conforming to ASTM A 120 except that pipe shall be unthreaded
and untested for water pressure.
B. Stakes for fencing shall be 9 ft. galvanized steel posts, driven a minimum of 3 ft. into the
ground, except above utility locations where surface anchors shall be used. Posts shall be
spaced 10 ft. o.c. maximum.
C. For fencing within the drip line of trees, surface mounted post anchors may be acceptable.
Review with Architect and arborist and obtain written approval prior to installing. Post
installation shall not damage tree root systems.
2.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Peat moss and mulch materials shall be as specified under Section 329300, TREES
PLANTS, AND GROUND COVERS.
B. Liquid fertilizer to be applied to root pruned and construction pruned trees shall be Peters M
77 Sequestered-Chelated Soluble Fertilizer manufactured by W.R. Grace and Co.,
Cambridge, MA 02140, Gold Start Liquid Fertilizer, manufactured by Nutra-Flo Company,
1919 Grand Ave, Sioux City, IA 51106-5708; Phone: 712-277-2011; 800-831-4815; Fax:
712-279-1946; Agro- Culture Liquid Fertilizer, manufactured by Agro-Culture Liquid
Fertilizers, 3055 W. M-21, P.O. Box 150, St. Johns, Michigan 48879; 1-800-678-9029, or
approved equal. Liquid fertilizer shall be approved by Certified Arborist.
C. Dormant oil spray shall be a dormant miscible spray equal to Sunspray, Scalecide, or Volck
Oil.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 4
D. Insecticide shall be Isotox manufactured by Ortho; QuickPRO, manufactureed by
Monsanto; LESCO Sevin Brand SL, #019106, manufactured by LESCO, or approved
equal. Insecticide shall be approved by Certified Arborist.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION FOR EXISTING TREES TO BE PRESERVED:
A. All trees to be preserved on the property shall be protected against damage from
construction operations.
1. Includes associated understory.
B. Only those trees located within the limits of improvements to be constructed as indicated,
shall be removed.
1. All trees to remain shall be flagged for review after the location of improvements to
be constructed are staked in the field.
2. Any tree to be removed shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner for approval
prior to removal.
3. Trees to be preserved are represented by a solid line. Trees to be removed are
represented by an “X”. Trees to be planted are graphically differentiated from
existing trees.
4. Obtain approval of installation of tree barricade fencing from Owner and Architect
prior to the initiation of any removal of vegetation and construction.
C. Erect fencing and armor protection prior to beginning any clearing, demolition or
construction activity, and unless otherwise instructed, maintain in place until construction
is completed.
1. Tree protection barricade shall be erected at the edge of the dripline where
possible; in extreme circumstances and with the approval of the Architect, fencing
may be located at the edge of the root protection zone.
a. For trees 10 inch caliper and less, the minimum distance the barrier shall
be erected is ten (10) feet from the trunk of tree or clump of trees.
2. Trees immediately adjacent to and within one hundred feet (100) of any
construction activities are to be protected by barricade fencing; subject to approval
of the Architect and Owner.
3. Trees exposed to construction activity within the dripline or within twenty-five (25)
feet of any construction activity are to have trunks protected with tree armor in
addition to barricade fencing.
4. The tree protection barricade shall be placed before any excavating or grading is
begun and maintained in repair for the duration of the construction work unless
otherwise directed.
5. No material shall be stored or construction operation shall be carried on within the
tree protection barricade.
6. Tree protection barricade shall remain until all work is completed.
7. Remove tree protection barricade at commencement of finish grading.
8. Remove tree armor immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 5
D. Protect tree trunk with tree armor to a height of 8' or to the limits of lower branching
(when exposed to construction activity within the drip line) with 2x4's butted side to side
completely around trunk.
1. Wire wrap, do not nail around trees.
E. Protect trees that are to remain, whether within barricade fencing or not, from the
following:
1. Compaction of root area by equipment or material storage; construction materials
shall not be stored closer to trees than the farthest extension of their limbs
(dripline).
2. The proposed finished grade within the root protection zone of any preserved tree
shall not be raised or lowered more than three (3) inches.
a. Retaining methods can be used to protect and/or provide lateral support to
the area outside the root protection zone.
3. Trunk damage by moving equipment, material storage, nailing or bolting.
4. Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches.
5. Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas, paint, etc., on or around trees and roots.
6. Cutting on roots by excavating, ditching, etc.
a. Prior to excavation within the tree drip lines or the removal of trees
adjacent to other trees that are to remain, make a clean cut between the
disturbed and undisturbed root zones with a rock saw or similar equipment
to minimize root damage.
b. Refer to EXCAVATION AROUND TREES for additional information.
7. Damage of branches by improper pruning.
8. Drought from failure to water or by cutting or changing normal drainage pattern
past roots. Contractor shall provide means as necessary to ensure positive
drainage.
9. Changes of soil pH factor by disposal of lime base materials such as concrete,
plaster, lime treatment at pavement subgrade, etc. When installing concrete
adjacent to the root zone of a tree, use a minimum 6 mil. plastic vapor barrier
behind the concrete to prohibit leaching of lime into the soil.
10. Do not cut roots 3/4" in diameter or over without approval of Architect. All
excavation and earthwork within the PRZ of trees shall be done by hand.
11. Protect all existing trees near areas to be stabilized from underground
contaminations by placing a 6 mil. Plastic film barrier along exposed vertical cut
extending a minimum 12" into undisturbed subgrade below depth of stabilization.
12. No vehicular traffic shall occur within the drip line of any tree; including parking of
vehicles.
13. No soil shall be spread, spoiled or otherwise disposed of under any tree within the
PRZ.
F. Any damage done to existing tree crowns or root systems shall be repaired by the
Arborist to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner’s Representative.
1. Broken branches shall be cut cleanly.
2. Any roots cut shall be cut cleanly with a saw other means approved by the
Architect and Owner’s Representative.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 6
G. Damages to trees caused through negligence of Contractor or his employees will be
assessed by Owner and Project Arborist as described in Paragraph 1.07.
3.2 PROTECTED ROOT ZONE:
A. PROTECTED ROOT ZONE (PRZ).
1. No disturbance shall occur closer to the tree than one-half the radius of the PRZ or
within five (5) feet of the tree whichever is greater.
3.3 PROTECTED ROOT ZONE IMPACTS:
A. Those trees to remain which have some encroachment on their protected root zone shall
have the following maximum allowable impacts:
1. Minimum Protection Criteria ‘A’: No disturbance of natural grade, e.g. trenching or
excavation, can occur closer to the tree than one-half the radius of the PRZ or
within five (5) feet of the tree whichever is greater.
2. Minimum Protection Criteria ‘B’: No cut or fill greater than three (3) inches will be
located closer to the tree trunk than ½ the PRZ radius distance.
B. Trees impacted shall have a minimum of a six (6) inch layer of mulch placed and
maintained over the PRZ and the undisturbed area within the dripline.
1. Immediate pruning and fertilization shall occur per the pruning and fertilization
sections of this specification.
2. Provide water in a slow drip manner to impacted trees as approved by the
Architect and Owner’s Representative.
3. Provide water to apply equivalent to 1 inch once per week to deeply soak in over
the area within the dripline of the tree during periods of hot, dry weather.
4. Spray tree crowns periodically to reduce dust accumulation on the leaves.
3.4 EXCAVATING AROUND TREES
A. Excavate within the dripline of trees only where required and when absolutely necessary.
1. Any excavation within the PRZ of trees shall be under the direction of the Arborist.
2. Arborist shall be at site at all times while excavation is occurring within the PRZ.
3. Air spade all removals within the PRZ.
4. Refer to PROTECTED ROOT ZONE.
B. When excavating for new construction is required within the PRZ, air spade and hand
excavate to minimize damage to root systems.
1. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots.
2. Relocate roots back into backfill areas wherever possible.
3. If large main lateral roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation limits as
required to bend and relocate without breaking.
4. If root relocation is not practical, clean cut roots using sharp ax approximately
three (3) inches back from new construction.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 7
C. Where existing grade is above new finish grade, carefully excavate within the dripline to
the new finish grade.
1. Carefully hand excavate an additional six (6) inches below the finish grade.
2. Use narrow tine spading forks to comb the soil to expose the roots, and prune the
exposed root structure as recommended by the Arborist.
3. Keep the exposed roots damp.
4. Treat the cut roots as specified and as recommended by the Arborist.
5. After pruning and treatment of the root structure is complete, backfill to finish
grade with eight (8) inches of approved plant mix, or structural soil.
D. Where noted on plan, use airspade to expose roots for required cutting to accomodate
hardscape elements. Architect to verify all cuts prior to proceeding.
E. Temporarily support and protect roots against damage until permanently relocated and
covered with recommended landscape material.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FENCING
A. Prior to start of demolition work and clearing and grubbing operations, tree protection
fencing shall be installed in accordance with the following:
1. Fencing shall be installed at the tree protection areas indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fencing shall be installed a minimum of 15 ft. beyond the drip line of trees to be
protected, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
B. Tree protection fencing to be installed over utility locations shall be installed using surface
anchors. No poles or stakes shall be driven into the ground at these locations.
3.6 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where construction will occur within drip line of existing trees designated to remain, roots
shall be pruned.
B. All root pruning shall be done by Certified Arborist only. Trenching, vibrating plow, and
stump grinding are NOT suitable means for root pruning.
C. Roots greater than 1 in. diameter shall be pruned by means of a hand saw, or other
approved means.
D. Install root protection measures as prescribed by Certified Arborist.
3.7 CONSTRUCTION PRUNING
A. Construction pruning shall conform to NAA Ref.1 for Class IV - Crown Reduction Pruning.
Work shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Z133.1, and shall be reviewed in the field
with the Architect and Certified Arborist prior to start of work.
3.8 FERTILIZATION AND INSECT SPRAYING
A. Root pruned and construction pruned tree shall be treated with liquid fertilizer, dormant oil
spray, and insecticide as prescribed by Certified Arborist.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015639 - 8
B. Liquid fertilizer shall be applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer and as
required by NAA Ref. 2.
C. Dormant oil spray shall be applied in early spring before buds begin to swell at a rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Insecticide spray shall be applied twice to root pruned trees following application of
dormant oil spray. Spray insecticide at rates recommended by spray manufacturer at
intervals appropriate for effective insect control.
3.9 REMOVAL OF PROTECTION
A. All protection shall remain in place throughout the construction period. Remove protection
devices only after written permission has been granted by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
016200 - 1
SECTION 016200
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
No substitutions will be considered without this completed substitution request form and supporting
documentation. Substitutions made without completion of this form
will be considered defective work as stated in AIA A201.
Date: _____________________ Number: __________
Re: Request for Substitution
The Contractor proposes the following substitution in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents:
Scope of ___________________________________________________
Substitution
___________________________________________________
Specification ___________________________________________________
Reference
___________________________________________________
Drawing ___________________________________________________
Reference
___________________________________________________
Reason for ___________________________________________________
Proposed
Substitution ___________________________________________________
Benefit to ___________________________________________________
Owner
___________________________________________________
Impact on ___________________________________________________
Sustainable
Design Intent ___________________________________________________
Impact on ___________________________________________________
Project Cost
___________________________________________________
Impact on ___________________________________________________
Project Schedule
___________________________________________________
Impact on ___________________________________________________
Guarantees and
Warranties ___________________________________________________
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
016200 - 2
Coordination and ___________________________________________________
Compatibility Required
with Adjacent Materials ___________________________________________________
and System
___________________________________________________
List Deviations ___________________________________________________
From Specified
Requirements ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
Attachments: Attach supporting documentation sufficient for Architect to evaluate substitution.
Substitution Request Forms submitted without adequate documentation will be returned without review.
Attachments ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
Response Date: List date by which response by Architect is requested to maintain project schedule and
allow sufficient time for inclusion of proposed substitution.
Response Date ___________________________________________________
Submitted By ___________________________________________________
Firm and Address ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
Signature below signifies acceptance of responsibility for accuracy and completeness of information
included in this Substitution Request Form.
Authorized Signature ___________________________________________________
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
016200 - 3
ARCHITECT'S RESPONSE
Notations listed below shall have same meaning as on Architect's approval stamp. Clarifications to or
changes in project schedule or time shall be processed using standard project forms.
Architect's _________ Approved
Response
_________ Approved as Corrected
_________ Revise and Resubmit
_________ Rejected
_________ Returned Without Review
Remarks ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
Date ___________________________________________________
Signed ___________________________________________________
END OF FORM
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017400-1
SECTION 017400
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for the Contractor's implementation of waste management
controls and systems for the duration of the Work.
1. Demolition procedures shall recycle at least 50% of removed materials by volume,
including site materials, appliances, structure, and finishes.
2. Construction procedures shall recycle at least 75% of construction waste. Recycle all
cardboard and foam packaging materials.
B. Develop a waste management plan, quantifying material diversion by either weight or volume to
recycle and/or salvage non-hazardous construction and demolition debris.
1.3 INTENT
A. The Owner and Architect have established that this Project shall generate the least amount of
waste practical and that processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due
to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors shall be
employed.
B. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop, for the Architect's review, a
Construction Waste Management Plan (CWMP) for this Project.
C. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for segregating his own waste into different dumpsters
as directed by the Contractor.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that debris will be disposed of at appropriately
designated licensed solid waste disposal facilities, as defined by MGL Chapter 111, Section
150A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan (WMP): Submit within 21 calendar days after receipt of Notice to
Proceed, in a format acceptable to the Owner.
1. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types and rough
quantities.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017400-2
2. Landfill Options: The name of the landfills where trash and building debris will be
disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fees, and the projected cost of disposing of all
Project waste in the landfills.
3. Landfill Certification: Contractor’s statement of verification that landfills proposed for use
are licensed for types of waste to be deposited and have sufficient capacity to receive
waste from this project.
4. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged or recycled
during the course of the Project. Include the following and any additional items proposed:
a. Cardboard and paper products.
b. Clean dimensional wood.
c. Beverage containers.
d. Concrete.
e. Slurry wall materials.
f. Bricks and masonry.
g. Asphalt.
h. Metals from framing, banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim,
steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead,
brass, and bronze.
i. Mechanical and electrical equipment.
j. Building components which can be removed relatively intact from existing
construction.
k. Packaging materials, including cardboard, boxes, plastic sheet and film,
polystyrene packaging, wood crates, plastic pails.
l. Glass.
m. Scraps from new gypsum wall board.
n. Carpet and pad.
o. Acoustical ceiling panels.
p. Plastics.
5. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste
management.
6. Materials Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which any waste
materials identified above will be protected from contamination, and a description of the
means to be employed in recycling the above materials consistent with requirements for
acceptance by designated facilities.
7. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials
(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or
whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site)
and destination of materials.
B. Waste Management Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit a
written Waste Management Progress Report in the same format as required for Final Report.
C. Waste Management Final Report: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit a written Waste
Management Final Report summarizing the types and quantities of materials recycled and
disposed of under the Waste Management Plan. Include the name and location of disposal
facilities.
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste, by weight.
D. Other Submittals:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017400-3
1. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
2. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
3. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of
recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include
manifests, weight tickets, and/or receipts.
4. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, and/or receipts.
5. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician
responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was
recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name
and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
1.5 CONTRACTORS
A. Contractor may subcontract work of this Section to a sub-contractor specializing in recycling and
salvaging of construction waste.
1. Eco One Solutions, LLC, Natick, MA 01760; tel. 978-270-8950; contact John Gundling,
JGundling@EcoOneSolutions.com.
2. Institution Recycling Network, Concord, NH 03301; tel. 603-229-1962; www.ir-
network.com.
3. Commercial Paving and Recycling Co. (CPRC Group), Scarborough, ME 04074; tel.
207-883-3325; www.cpcrs.com.
4. greenGoat, Somerville, MA 02144; tel. 617-504-2095; www.greengoat.org.
B. Gypsum Wallboard Recycling: New, paper-faced gypsum wallboard scrap (cuts from
construction - not demolition waste) generated at project shall be recycled by Gypsum
Recycling America, LLC. Keep scrap dry. Contact Gypsum Recycling America at 617-596-
4297 or www.gypsumrecycling.us to coordinate recycling efforts.
C. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Recycling: Demolition and construction waste pulpable mineral fiber
ceiling panels may be recycled by Armstrong World Industries and US Gypsum. Contact
Armstrong at 1-877-ARMSTRONG (1-877-276-7876) or www.armstrong.com or contact USG at
1-800-USG-4YOU or www.usg.com, to coordinate recycling efforts, apply for product approvals,
and receive reclamation procedure requirements.
D. Carpet Recycling: Demolition and construction waste carpet and carpet padding may be
recycled by Carpet America Recovery Effort (CARE). Visit www.carpetrecovery.org to locate
carpet reclaimers in local project area and reclamation procedure requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used]
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017400-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement Waste Management Plan as approved by the Architect. Provide
containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement WMP for
the entire duration of the Contract.
3.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: The Contractor shall designate an on-site person responsible for instructing workers
and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project.
B. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Job
Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner and the Architect.
C. Instruction: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling,
and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate
stages of the Project.
D. Separation Facilities: The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate
separation of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas
are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
Location shall be acceptable to the Architect.
E. Hazardous Wastes: Any unforeseen hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and
disposed of according to local regulations and as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
023000 - 1
SECTION 023000
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
A. Information Not Guaranteed: Information on the Drawings and in the Project Manual relating to
subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best
sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and
convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not
guaranteed.
B. Foundation Engineering Report: Refer to the Geotechnical Report in the Appendices.
1.3 CONFIRMATION OF GRADES AND UTILITIES
A. Prior to commencement of site excavating operations, the Contractor shall compare existing site
grading and proposed new site grading. Where existing utilities are indicated but their inverts or
depths are not, exploratory excavating shall be performed to assure that sufficient earth
coverage will be attained during the course of new site grading.
1. Utilities existing on the site shall be carefully protected from damage and relocated or
removed as required by the work. When an active utility line is exposed during
construction, its location and elevation shall be plotted on the record drawings and the
Architect, Owner and the utility owner notified in writing.
B. If exploratory excavating confirms that the depth of existing utilities will be negatively impacted
by proposed new grades (i.e., will be too shallow or become exposed), immediately notify the
Architect and the Owner. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued
by the Architect. Continue work in other areas.
1.4 CONFIRMATION OF INTEGRITY OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES
A. Prior to commencement of site excavating operations, the Contractor shall compare foundation
depths of existing structures and proposed depths of new utilities. Where existing structures
are indicated but their foundation depths are not, exploratory excavating shall be performed to
assure that proposed new excavations adjacent to them, or in near proximity of them, will not
undermine the structural integrity of the existing structures.
B. If exploratory excavating confirms that the footing depths of existing structures may be
negatively impacted or undermined by proposed new excavations, immediately notify the
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
023000 - 2
Architect and the Owner. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued
by the Architect. Continue work in other areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [Not Used]
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 1
SECTION 024100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and Exhibits and all
Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of
this Section of the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included:
1. Demolition and removal of structures and site elements as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Removal and legal disposal of demolished materials off site. Salvage value belongs to
the Construction Manager. On-site sale of materials is not permitted.
3. Demolition and removal work shall properly prepare for new construction to be provided
under the following contract.
4. Scheduling and sequencing operations without interruption to utilities serving other
facilities or occupied areas. If interruption is required, obtain written permission from the
utility company and the Owner. Provide temporary services as necessary to serve
occupied and usable facilities when permanent utilities must be interrupted, or schedule
interruption when the least amount of inconvenience will result.
5. Notification to Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Temporary Facilities And Controls:
a. Maintenance of access, cleaning during construction, dust and noise control.
2. Section 017400 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT:
a. Waste management and recycling.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that
may be encountered during demolition remain property of the Owner as applicable. Carefully
remove each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to a location
acceptable to the Owner.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates
the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for
dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to
remain including means of egress from those buildings.
B. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with early and late starting and
finishing dates for each activity. Ensure adjacent owner's on-site operations are
uninterrupted if applicable.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
C. Landfill Records: Provide trip tickets (receipts) indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous
wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1. Comply with submittal requirements in Section 017400 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Project Meetings. Review methods and
procedures related to demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by demolition operations.
5. Review and finalize protection requirements.
6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 3
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.
B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition
so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.
1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent
occupied buildings.
2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings.
a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be
demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use.
Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be present
in buildings and structures to be demolished because of building operations or processes
performed there.
E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall complete and submit to the Massachusetts DEP Form BWP AQ 06,
Notification Prior to Construction or Demolition; prior to start of work. Form follows this section.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
demolition required.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 4
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition activities.
E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.
B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied
buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be
demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Existing Utilities: See plumbing and electrical Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing,
and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and
sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
D. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition
operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless
authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of
service is required during changeover.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 5
C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies,
and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.
Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and
dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in
place.
3.5 DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish indicated buildings completely. Use methods required to complete the Work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 48 hours after flame cutting operations.
3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result
from building demolition activities.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage
adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
D. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DEMOLITION
024100 - 6
3.6 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS
A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize
ground impact and dust generation.
C. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that
are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new
construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area.
D. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures.
1. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings.
2. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and disconnecting
devices.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements of Section 017400 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT and the following.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition
operations. Premises shall be left in a clean condition and ready to accept alteration work and
new construction.
1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE PREPARATION
024110 - 1
SECTION 024110
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and do all work necessary to prepare the site, complete, as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 265200, EXTERIOR LIGHTING; Relocation of salvaged city light post and pull
box.
2. Section 311300, SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING’ Includes stump
removal of trees removed by the Owner in designated fenced areas.
3. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING; Excavation
and backfill.
4. Section 312500, SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL.
5. Section 321640, GRANITE CURBING; Reuse of existing granite granite removed and
salvaged under work of this Section
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013300, Submittals, for submittal provisions and procedures.
1. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for demolition work for review prior
to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility
services as required, together with details for dust and noise protection.
a. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted
progress of Owner’s on-site operations.
2. Preconstruction survey photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces,
equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related
to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to start of work.
B. The following shall be submitted:
1. Certificates of severance of utility services.
2. Permit for transport and legal disposal of debris.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE PREPARATION
024110 - 2
3. Location plan of staging areas and schedule for moving staging equipment into those
areas shall be submitted for Architect's approval prior to mobilization and related site
preparation operations.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings. Maintain free and safe passage to and
from.
B. Cease operations and and notify Architect immediately if safety of adjacent structures
appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structures. Do not
resume operations until safety is restored.
C. Prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways and
trees. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair
damage at no cost to the Owner.
D. Provide, erect, and maintain street boardings, sidewalk shed, barricades, lighting, and
guardrails as required to protect general public, workers, and adjoining property.
1.6 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services as
required to complete the work of the Contract Documents. Disconnect and stub off. Notify
the affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting this work.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and
capping locations of Project Record Documents.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will minimize the need for disruption of
Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of
demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations.
B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or
structures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by
Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur
prior to start of selective demolition work.
C. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items
from site as they are removed.
1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's
personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
1. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE PREPARATION
024110 - 3
2. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain.
3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes
exposed during demolition operations.
4. Remove protections at completion of work.
E. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work.
F. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.
G. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of
flammable materials. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities, which are to remain in service and protect them
against damage during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in
writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
I. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to
limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental
protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Submit copies of
acquired permits to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.
C. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated
materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE PROTECTION
A. Refer to Section 015639, TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE PREPARATION
024110 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. Existing structures and utilities shall be suitably protected from damage, including but not
limited to existing stone walls, concrete vault, manholes, and utility lines.
3.2 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Topsoil shall be stripped to full depth from areas to be excavated, filled, regraded, or
resurfaced. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent
intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds,
roots, and other waste materials.
C. Topsoil shall be stockpiled on-site and protected. No topsoil shall be removed from the site
without the written permission of the Architect.
D. Stockpiled topsoil which conforms to the specifications may be used for fill and finish
grading within landscaped areas. Refer to Section 329119, LANDSCAPE GRADING,
Section 329200, LAWNS AND GRASSES and Section 329300, TREES, PLANTS AND
GROUND COVERS.
E. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
3.3 PAVEMENT AND CURB REMOVAL
A. Where indicated on Drawings and as directed by the Architect, existing asphalt pavement
and concrete pavement and curb, including existing aggregate base material, shall be
removed and legally disposed of off-site. Where pavement and curb to be removed abuts
pavement and curb to remain, a neat, straight saw cut shall be made with a concrete power
saw.
3.4 REMOVALS
A. Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated by the Architect in the field to be
removed shall be dismantled, removed, and legally disposed of off-site or stockpiled as
indicated on the Drawings.
3.5 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
A. Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated by the Architect in the field to be
salvaged shall be carefully removed, protected from damage, and put in temporary storage
as follows:
1. Salvaged material shall include granite curb and shall be stockpiled on-site in an area
designated by the Architect or Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE PREPARATION
024110 - 5
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as
required to complete work indicated on the Contract Drawings in accordance with
demolition schedule and governing regulations.
B. Existing structures indicated on the Drawings to be removed, shall be completely
dismantled and removed from the site.
C. Areas formerly occupied by structures shall be regraded to conform with surrounding
topography following demolition.
D. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending
receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule
as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay.
3.7 SITE UTILITIES
A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling with the authorities having
jurisdiction the removal and/or abandonment of existing gas, telephone, cable, and electric
services, as required to complete the work.
B. Utility pipes to be abandoned shall be plugged at their ends with watertight brick masonry
or cement mortar with a minimum thickness of 8 inches. Utility pipes designated to be
removed shall include backfilling the voids with ordinary borrow.
C. All utility pipes designated to be abandoned and left in-place when cut or interrupted by
new work shall be plugged at their ends. Plugs shall be watertight brick masonry or cement
mortar with a minimum thickness of 8 inches.
D. Utility structures designated on the Contract Drawings to be removed shall consist of the
removal and stacking of cast iron castings, plugging of inlet and outlet pipes, removal of the
structure, and backfill and compaction of the void with ordinary borrow. When the void is
within the footprint of the new building, gravel borrow shall be used to backfill the void.
E. Utility structures to be abandoned in place shall have their cast iron castings removed and
disposed, inlet and outlet pipes plugged, the bottom of the bottoms shall be broken, the
void of the structure shall be backfilled and compacted with ordinary borrow and the top of
the structure shall be removed so that it is at least 30" below finished grade.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Material resulting from the site preparation work and not scheduled to be salvaged and
which is unsuitable for reuse on the project, shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be legally disposed of off-site.
B. Debris, rubbish, and other material shall be disposed of promptly and shall not be left until
final cleanup of site.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 1
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary General Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 WORK TO BE PERFORMED
A. Labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete cast-in-place
concrete work shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both, including but not limited to
items noted below.
1. Furnishing, placing, curing, finishing, and protection of reinforced cast-in-place
concrete (normalweight) above and below grade, and patching of existing slabs as
required.
2. Furnishing and erection of formwork, shoring and removal of same.
3. Furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel and related positioning and securing
accessories.
4. Furnishing and installation of admixtures, inserts for connections to steel members,
waterstops, flashing reglets, vapor barriers under slabs-on-grade, and similar items in
conjunction with concrete work.
5. Installation of anchor bolts.
6. Furnishing and installation of non-shrink grout at pockets in concrete slabs, walls, or
beams left open temporarily, and at other locations as applicable (including
baseplates at steel columns).
7. Furnishing and installation of concrete housekeeping pads, inertia blocks, and
foundations for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical equipment.
8. Installation of items furnished by other sections (such as anchors, sleeves, bolts and
plates), and required to be cast into concrete.
9. Concrete fill in steel stairs.
10. Make provisions in forms for proper location and installation of pipe sleeves, duct
openings, keys, chases, electrical boxes, bolts, anchors, inserts, and similar items, as
required by other trades. Notify appropriate trades when items noted are ready for
installation.
11. Unless specifically excluded, furnishing and installation of any other items of cast-in-
place concrete work indicated on drawings, specified, or obviously needed to make
work of this Section complete.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 2
12. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to
achieve certification, measured and documented according to the LEED
Green Building Rating System, of the US Green Building Council. Refer to
Section 018110, Sustainable Design Requirements for certification level and
certification requirements.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Division 31, Earthwork
2. Section 051200, Structural Steel
3. Section 055000, Metal Fabrications
4. Section 061000, Rough Carpentry
5. Division 7, Thermal and Moisture protection
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete Constituents:
1. Submit to Architect a detailed list of concrete materials, and corresponding sources,
proposed for use in concrete for this project.
2. See paragraph 2.02.B below for submittal of strength information related to mix
design.
3. If conveying concrete by pump is intended, submit related data regarding concrete
materials, pumping device, and methods to Architect. Consider effects of slump loss
if lightweight concrete will be pumped; provide HRWR rather than water to maintain
workability.
4. When high-range water reducing admixtures will be used for water-cement ratios
equal to or less than 0.45, submit information from manufacturer and batching plant
on dosage amounts; timing of dosage(s) (e.g., in plant, at site, repeat dosages, etc.);
initial and final slumps; quality control of dosing and mixing.
5. Tests for approval of concrete mixtures shall be paid for by Contractor.
B. Methods of Construction: Submit to Architect, prior to starting work, description of
methods, sequence of construction, and type of equipment proposed for use for performing
cast-in-place concrete work. Submit typical layouts for shoring and reshoring and size and
spacing of supports. Provide specific construction loads to be imposed on permanent
structure.
Architect's review is only for the effects of methods on permanent structure. This
submission shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for providing structural design
for methods and equipment, and the necessary methods, equipment, workmanship, and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 3
safety precautions.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect detailed Shop Drawings, including erection drawings
and schedules.
1. Reinforcement Drawings: prepare in accordance with ACI SP-66 Detailing Manual
and show following: elevations; dimensions of concrete work with specified
reinforcement clearances; ledges, brackets, openings, sleeves or other items
furnished by other Sections, where interference with reinforcement may occur;
bending diagrams; assembly diagrams; splices and laps of reinforcement;
temperature and shrinkage reinforcement; construction joint reinforcement; and
shapes, dimensions, grade designations, and details of reinforcement and
accessories. Show dowels with concrete work to be placed first and for connection to
existing construction where required.
2. Formwork Drawings: schedules of placement; construction joints and control joints
with methods of forming; general arrangement, sizes and grades of lumber and wood
panels; alignment and layout of form ties for exposed concrete: location of embedded
items and pockets. Submittal is for verification of joint and surface appearance.
Comply with ACI 303-91 Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice
where exposed concrete or special architectural treatment is required on the
Drawings. This submission does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for
providing structural design for formwork and the proper methods, equipment,
workmanship and safety precautions.
3. Architect's checking is only a review for conformance with the design concept of the
project and compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The
Contractor is responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities and
dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction;
coordinating this work with that of all other trades; coordinating this work with existing
construction; and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
4. Do not proceed with fabrication of material or performance of work until
corresponding item on Shop Drawing has been reviewed by Architect.
D. Samples: Submit to Architect samples and/or descriptive literature of materials, products,
and methods as noted herein, and as otherwise requested by Architect: concrete
constituents including admixtures; form ties (including cones) and spreaders; accessories
for reinforcement; reglets; non-shrink cement grout; inserts; form release agents, and
waterstops.
1. Do not proceed with fabrication of material/product or performance of work until
Sample has been approved by Architect.
E. Concrete Curing and Protection: Submit to Architect detailed methods proposed for curing
and protecting concrete in normal, cold and hot conditions.
F. Mill Test Certification: Submit to Architect prior to delivery of reinforcing steel or concrete
to job site, certified mill test reports of reinforcing steel and cement, (including names and
locations of mills and shops, and analyses of chemical and physical properties), properly
correlated to concrete to be used in this project. This submittal is for information and file
record.
G. Corrective Work: Submit to Architect drawings showing details of any proposed corrective
work prior to performing corrective work.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 4
H. Affidavit: Submit to Architect, on request by Architect, manufacturer's and/or supplier's
and/or installer's affidavit stating that material or product provided complies with Contract
Documents.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CODES
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications noted
below, including latest editions of applicable specifications, codes, and standards cited
therein, and latest applicable addenda and supplements. Keep copies of these items
available in shop and field.
1. "The Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code", Eight Edition.
2. "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318-05), American
Concrete Institute.
3. "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" (ACI 301-05), American
Concrete Institute.
4. "Detailing Manual" (ACI SP-66), 1994, American Concrete Institute.
5. "Manual of Standard Practice" (MSP-1-96), Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
(CRSI).
6. "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" (AWS D1.4-92), American Welding
Society.
7. "Manual of Concrete Practice 1997", Volumes 1 through 5, American Concrete
Institute for ACI Standards and Recommended Practices referred to in this Section.
8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards referenced in this
Section.
B. Any material or operation specified by reference to published specifications of
manufacturer or published standard shall comply with said specification or standard. In
case of conflict between referenced specifications, most stringent requirement shall
govern. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and Project Specifications,
Project Specifications shall govern unless otherwise indicated by Architect in writing.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-Construction Meeting
1. Adopt a quality control program which will ensure compliance with specified
requirements and industry standards. Appoint a person on the construction
management team to be responsible for quality issues, and prepare a quality control
manual which outlines proposed methods for monitoring reinforcing steel placement
and concrete placement consolidation and curing.
2. Prior to the start of concrete work, a pre-construction meeting shall be held at which
representatives of the Owner, Construction Manager, Architect and Testing Agency
and key personnel of the Contractor and Subcontractor shall be present. Key
personnel shall include persons who will supply and mix special admixtures such as
HRWR; who will place reinforcing and concrete; who will consolidate and cure the
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 5
concrete. Attendance at the meeting of all parties is mandatory. Discussions at the
meeting shall form the basis for the performance and inspection of concrete work.
3. Prior to the start of any item of new work, the specifications and drawings shall be
reviewed at a formal meeting at which the Contractor's and Subcontractor's key
personnel are present. Key personnel shall include persons actually carrying out the
work in the field.
1.07 LEED DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit documentation from the manufacturers highlighting LEED requirements for
materials and products of this section. Comply with requirements of Section 01 8110 -
Sustainable Design Requirements.
1.08 LEED CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide products manufactured from recycled content as
specified, to be measured and documented according to the LEED Green Building
Rating System.
1. Reinforcing Steel: 80% recycled content.
2. Fly Ash and Blast Furnace Slag: 100% recycled content.
3. Provide a cut sheet for each product used in the building, highlighting
recycled content.
B. Paints and coatings: Must meet or exceed the VOC and chemical limits of Green Seal
Requirements.
1. Provide a cut sheet and a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
each paint or coating used in the building highlighting VOC limits and
chemical component limits.
C. Local Purchase: Submit the manufacturing location for the supplied products and
certify if less that 500 miles from the project.
1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for member sizes, type(s) of concrete, details or any other modifications
proposed by Contractor will be considered by Architect only under following conditions:
1. That request has been made in writing and accepted prior to submission of Shop
Drawings.
2. That there is a substantial cost advantage or time advantage to Owner; or that
proposed revision is necessary to obtain required materials or methods at proper
times to accomplish work in time scheduled.
3. That sufficient sketches, engineering calculations, and other data have been
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 6
submitted to facilitate checking by Architect, including documentation of cost
reductions or of savings in time to complete work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE CONSTITUENTS
A. Cement: shall be domestic-made Portland Cement, free from water soluble salts or
alkalies which will cause efflorescence on exposed surfaces. Portland Cement shall be
Type II, ASTM C150. Do not use air entraining cements. Use only one brand of cement
for each type of cement throughout project. No visual variations in color shall result in
exposed concrete.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C of F; fly ash shall not exceed 25% of cement content by
weight.
C. Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM A989 Grade 120.
D. Normalweight Fine Aggregate: shall be washed, inert, natural sand conforming to ASTM
C33 and following additional requirements:
Sieve
Retained Percent
#4
0 - 5
#16
25 - 40
#50
70 - 87
#100
93 - 97
Fineness Modulus
2.80 (Plus/Minus 0.20)
Organic
Plate 2 maximum
Silt
2.0 percent maximum
Mortar Strength
100 percent minimum compression ratio
Soundness
5 percent max. loss, magnesium sulfate, five cycles
E. Normalweight Coarse Aggregate: shall be well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel
conforming to ASTM C33 and following additional requirements:
Designated Size (inches)
3
2
1-1/2
1
3/4
1/2
3/8
FM (+/- 0.2)
7.95
7.45
7.20
6.95
6.70
6.10
5.50
Organic
Plate 1 maximum
Silt
1.0 percent maximum
Soundness
5 percent maximum loss, magnesium sulfate, five cycles.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 7
1. Maximum designated sizes for normalweight coarse aggregate to be used in concrete
sections shall be as noted below, except that sizes shall also be chosen in
conjunction with required clearances.
a. One and one-half inches for sections over ten inches in thickness.
b. One inch for sections more than eight and up to ten inches in thickness.
c. Three-quarter inch for sections more than three and up to eight inches in
thickness.
F. Lightweight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: shall be a rotary kiln expanded shale and
conform to ASTM C330 and as specified herein. Aggregate sizes shall include fine
aggregate designated as "sand size", and coarse aggregate designated as graded three-
quarter inch size.
G. Concrete Fill for Steel Stair and Landing Pans: shall be composed of 1:2:2 mix with three-
eighths inch maximum size aggregate and shall be placed with a 0 inch to 1 inch slump.
H. Water: shall be from approved source, potable, clean and free from oils, acids, alkali,
organic matter and other deleterious material.
I. Admixtures:
1. Water-reducing admixture: Shall comply with ANSI/ASTM C494, Type A and contain
no more than .05% chloride ions.
a. "WRDA with Hycol", W.R. Grace & Co.
b. "Eucon WR-75", The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Pozzolith 220N", Master Builder's Co.
d. Or approved equivalent conforming to ASTM C494.
2. High-Range Water Reducing (HRWR) admixture (Super Plasticizer): shall comply
with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and contain not more than 0.05% chloride ions:
a. "WRDA 19", W.R. Grace & Co.
b. "Daracem 100", W.R. Grace & Co.
c. "Eucon 37", Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "Sikament", Sika Chemical Corp.
e. "Rheobuild-1000", Master Builder's Co.
f. Or approved equivalent.
3. Air-entraining admixture: shall comply with ANSI/ASTM C 260.
a. "Daravair", W.R. Grace & Co.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 8
b. "Airmix or Perma-Air", The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "MB-VR", Master Builder's Co.
d. Or approved equivalent.
4. Evaporation Retarder: use water-based monomolecular film; use one of the following
with flatwork containing corrosion inhibiter or silica fume admixture:
a. "Confilm"; Master Builders.
b. "Euco-bar"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Or approved equivalent.
5. Water-reducing Set Retarders: shall conform with ASTM C494 Type D and may be
used when ambient temperatures exceed 80 degrees F. Use one of the following or
equivalent:
a. "Daratard-17"; W.R. Grace.
b. "Eucon Retarder"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Pozzolith 100-XR"; Master Builders.
6. Accelerator admixture: Non-chloride and non-corrosive accelerators shall conform to
ASTM C494 Type C and may be used when temperatures are below 50 degrees F.
Use one of the following or equivalent:
a. "Daraset"; W.R. Grace
b. "Accelguard 80"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Pozzutec 20"; Master Builders.
7. Fiber Reinforcement: shall be “Strux 90/40” by the W.R. Grace Co. or approved
equal.
8. Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocynanates and admixtures containing
more than .05% chloride ions are not permitted.
2.02 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Proportion concrete on the basis of previous field experiences or laboratory trial batches
with the materials to be employed in the work. However, mixtures shall have the limiting
quantities or values listed below for each strength concrete with coarse aggregate less than
1½ inches.
Compressive
Strength
at 28 days PSI
Maximum Allowable
Net Water Content
Min. Cement Factor
Gal./Sack
W/C Ratio
Sacks/Cu.Yd
.
Lbs./Cu.Yd.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 9
Compressive
Strength
at 28 days PSI
Maximum Allowable
Net Water Content
Min. Cement Factor
Gal./Sack
W/C Ratio
Sacks/Cu.Yd
.
Lbs./Cu.Yd.
Normalweight
4000
5.75
0.51
6.00
564
3000
6.50
0.58
5.00
470
Lightweight
3000
as required
5.50
517
1. Maximum allowable net water content is the total water in the mix at the time of
mixing, including free water on aggregate.
2. Consider any fly ash or blast furnace slag as part of the cement content for purposes
of establishing cement factor and w/c ratio.
a. Fly Ash/ Portland Cement Replacement: Fly ash, in proportions not greater
than 25% by weight of the total amount of cementitious materials. Cement
content and/or water-cement ratio for mixes containing fly ash shall be based
on the total weight of cementitious materials (Portland Cement plus fly ash).
b. Granulated Blast Furnace Slag/ Portland Cement Replacement:
Granulated blast furnace slag may be substituted for Portland Cement in
proportions ranging from 25 to 33% by weight of the total amount of
cementitious materials. Cement content and/or water-cement ratio for
mixes containing blast furnace slag shall be based on the total weight of
cementitious materials. (Portland Cement plus blast furnace slag.)
c. When combined, the total of fly ash and granulated blast furnace slag
substituted for Portland Cement shall not exceed 33% by weight of the
total amount of cementitious materials.
3. Use maximum water-cement equal to 0.45 for concrete subject to freezing and
thawing, repeated surface wetting or deicers.
4. Use High-Range Water Reducing admixture for water-cement ratios equal to or less
than 0.45.
B. Field Experience Method: when a concrete production facility has a record of consecutive
strength tests that were made within the past 12 months, compute standard deviations and
the required average compressive strength in accordance with ACI 301 Paragraph 3.9.1
and 3.9.2.
1. Analysis of standard deviation, average compressive strength and proposed concrete
proportions shall be performed by Testing Agency paid by the Contractor. The mix
design shall be by the Contractor.
2. Submit proposed concrete proportions and supporting documentation to Architect.
C. When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, base concrete proportions
on trial mixtures meeting the following restrictions:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 10
1. Use the combination of materials proposed for use in the work.
2. Make trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies suitable for the proposed
work using at least three different water-cement ratios or, for lightweight concrete,
cement contents that will produce a range of strengths encompassing those required
for the proposed work.
3. Design trial mixtures to produce a slump within 1 inch of the maximum permitted, and
for air-entrained concrete, within 0.5 percent of the maximum allowable air content.
Report the temperature of freshly mixed concrete in the trial mixtures.
4. For each proposed mixture, make and cure at least three compressive test cylinders
for each age in accordance with ASTM C192. For normalweight concrete, each
change of water-cement ratio shall be considered a new mixture. Test the cylinders
for strength in accordance with ASTM C39 at 28 days or at a specified earlier or later
age.
5. From the results of these cylinder tests, plot a curve showing the relationship between
compressive strength and either the water-cement ratio for normalweight concrete, or
cement content for lightweight concrete.
6. From this curve, the water-cement ratio for normalweight concrete, or cement content
for lightweight concrete for the concrete to be used in the proposed work, shall be
selected to produce an average compressive strength 1200 psi higher than the
specified strength. The cement content and mixture proportions to be used shall be
such that the selected water-cement ratio or cement content is not exceeded when
slump is the maximum permitted. Maintain proper cement content, slump, and air
content.
D. Admixtures
1. Use air entrainment admixture in concrete exposed to exterior environment and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Interior protected concrete may
be air entrained for improved workability. See ACI 301 Table 3.4.1 for required air
content except that minimum for all sizes of aggregate shall be 6 percent in exterior
environment. Interior protected slab-on-grade concrete may not have air entrainment
admixtures.
2. Use water reducing admixture in concrete and in accordance with manufacturer's
written recommendations and instructions.
3. Use high-range water reducing (HRWR):
a. In concrete with water-cement ratios equal to or less than 0.45, but do not
exceed 8 inches slump. In concrete for slab-on-grade, a mid-range water
reducer may be used in stead of adding water with a maximum slump of 6
inches.
b. In concrete where anticipated slump losses in transit prevent proper pumping,
placing and finishing. Use HRWR instead of adding water at the site. Do not
exceed 8 inches slump.
E. Slump shall be in accordance with Part 3 of this Section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 11
F. Normalweight concrete shall have an air dry weight not exceeding 150 lbs. per cubic foot.
1. Design 28 day strengths as shown in the Drawings.
G. Structural lightweight concrete shall have an air dry unit weight from 110 to 115 lbs. per
cubic foot and a wet density not exceeding 120 lbs. per cubic foot. Weights shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM C567 and C138.
1. Splitting tensile strength determined in accordance with ASTM C330 and C496 shall
equal or exceed 6.7 x square root of f'c, psi.
2. Design 28 day strengths as shown in the Structural Drawings.
H. Any deviation from approved mix design will not be allowed without written approval of
Architect. Cost of any additional testing by Testing Agency associated therewith shall be
paid for by Contractor.
2.03 FORM MATERIALS
A. Exposed-to-View Surfaces:
1. Use new and unused Class 1 B-B High Density Overlaid Plyform, exterior grade, not
less than five ply, and not less than 5/8 inch thick conforming to U.S. Product
Standard P-1-83. Design and maintain forms in accordance with instructions in
American Plywood Association (APA) Manual "Concrete Forming" (Form No.
V345N/Revised June 87/5000).
B. Not-exposed-to-view Concrete Surfaces: Use forms of wood, metal, or other material
subject to approval of Architect.
C. Form Ties and Spreaders: Use products by Richmond Screw Anchor Co.; Superior
Concrete Accessories, Inc.; Dayton Sure-Grip and Shore Co.; or equivalent approved by
Architect. Wire ties shall not be used. Ties for concrete exposed to public view shall have
removable set-back cones. Ties for foundation walls shall have water seal washers on the
earth side.
D. Form Release Agent: Use a non-staining and non-emulsifiable type. Form release agent
shall not impart any stain to concrete nor interfere with adherence of any material to be
applied later to concrete surfaces.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: shall be newly rolled billet steel conforming to ASTM A615. (See
Structural Drawings for grades.) Bars shall be bent cold.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: shall conform to ASTM A185.
C. Reinforcement Accessories: Reinforcement accessories shall include spacers, chairs, ties,
slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly assembling, placing, spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcement. Tie wire shall be annealed wire of sufficient
strength for intended purpose, but not less than No. 18 gage. Bar supports shall conform
to Chapter 3, "Bar Supports" or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Supports touching
interior formed surfaces exposed to view shall be CRSI Class 1, plastic protected.
2.05 RELATED MATERIALS
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 12
A. Vapor Barrier: Provide vapor barrier over prepared base material beneath garage slab on
ground. Use only materials which have a moisture transmission rate of less than 0.01
grains per square foot per hour and meet the requirements of ASTM E1745 and ASTM
E1643. Use polyethylene sheet not less than 15 mils thick or approved equivalent such as
the following:
1. “Viper Viporcheck 16mil” by Insulation Solutions Inc.
2. “Vapor Guard” by Griffolyn (Reef Industries)
3. “15 mil Stego Wrap” by Stego Industries
B. Non-shrink Grout: Use CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout, Type D, non-metallic, such as
one of the following or an approved equivalent:
1. "Masterflow 928"; Master Builders.
2. "Euco-NS"; Euclid Chemical Co.
3. "Five Star Grout"; Five Star Products.
C. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Use fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive
aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum
oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged,
rust-proof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials.
D. Absorptive Cover: Use burlap cloth weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying
with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
E. Moisture-retaining Cover: Use one of the following, complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171:
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.
F. Curing Compounds: Verify that products listed below meet regulations of jurisdiction for
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) emissions. Notify Architect if listed products do not
comply and submit information about equivalent products that do comply.
1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use a clear acrylic type conforming to ASTM C309,
Type I, Class B. Use one of the following or equivalent where concrete surfaces will
remain exposed.
a. "Masterkure"; Master Builders.
b. "Super Rez Seal"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Dress & Seal #30"; L & M
d. "Intex"; W.R. Meadows
2. Curing and Hardening Compound: Use colorless solution containing 35% of a 42
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 13
degree Baume sodium silicate solution. Use where shown on drawings. Use one of
the following or equivalent:
a. "Chem-Hard"; L & M
b. "Eucosil"' Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Cure-hard"; W.R. Meadow
3. Dissipating Resin Curing Compound: Use a dissipating resin type compound,
conforming to ASTM C309, Type I. The film must chemically break down in a two-to-
four week period. Use one of the following or equivalent where concrete surfaces will
receive other materials:
a. "Kurez DR"; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. "3100"; W.R. Meadows
c. "Cure Resin"; L & M
G. Bonding Agent, Patching Mortar: Cementitious slurry containing polymer-modified latex
admixture, such as one of the following:
1. "SikaTop 121, 122 or 123"; Sika Corporation
2. "Flexcon"; Euclid Chemical Co.
3. "Everbond"; L & M
H. Expansion Bolts: Use hot-dipped galvanized bolt conforming to Federal Spec. FF-S-325,
Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Allowable pullout and shear values shall be based on ASTM E
488 test methods. See Drawings for diameters, edge distances, embedments and center-
to-center spacings. Use one of the following or equivalent approved by Architect:
1. "Molly Parabolt"; USM Corp.
2. "Kwik Bolt II"; Hilti Inc.
3. "Red Head Trubolt Wedge Anchor"; ITW Ramset/Redhead
I. Waterstops: Provide the following types of waterstops where shown on the drawings:
1. Provide laminate of bentonite and high density polyethylene, such as "Parastop" by
Paramount Technical Products, between the contact faces of construction joints.
Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine work prepared by other trades to receive work of this Section and report any
defects affecting installation to the Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will
be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.
3.02 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 14
A. Handle and store materials separately in such manner as to prevent intrusion of foreign
matter, segregation, or deterioration. Do not use foreign materials or those containing ice.
Remove improper and rejected materials immediately from point of use and from the site.
Cover materials, including steel reinforcement and accessories, during construction period.
Stockpile concrete constituents properly to assure uniformity throughout project.
3.03 ERECTION OF FORMWORK
A. Set and maintain formwork to insure complete concrete work within tolerance limits listed in
ACI 301, Table 4.3.1.
B. At construction joints, overlap and clamp forms (using gaskets if necessary) to prevent
offsets or loss of mortar at joints.
C. Before reusing form materials, thoroughly clean surfaces that will be in contact with freshly
cast concrete, repair damaged areas, and withdraw projecting nails. Recoat form with
release agent. Re-use of form material for architecturally exposed concrete shall be
subject to approval by Architect.
3.04 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with requirements of CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars".
B. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 117 (Tolerances) and with Contract
Documents and secure firmly in position by wire ties, chairs, spacers, and hangers, each of
type approved by Architect.
C. Do not bend, tackweld or cut reinforcement in field in any manner other than as shown on
Drawings unless specific approval for each case is given by Architect.
D. Continue reinforcement through construction joints unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
E. Splice reinforcement only in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents or as
otherwise specifically approved by Architect. Do not splice reinforcement at points of
maximum stress unless shown on the Drawings. Welded wire fabric shall be lapped six
inches or one and one-half spaces, whichever is larger, and shall be wired together.
F. At time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of excessive rust, scale, or other
coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. Paint reinforcement expected to be exposed to
weather for a considerable length of time with a heavy coat of cement grout. Protect stored
materials so as not to bend or distort bars in any way. Bars that become damaged will be
rejected.
G. Before concrete is cast, check all reinforcement after it is placed to insure that
reinforcement conforms to Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Such
checking shall be done only by qualified experienced personnel. In addition, notify the
Architect at least 36 hours prior to concrete placement so a visit may be made to observe
completed reinforcement and formwork before concrete placement.
3.05 JOINTS
A. Construction and control joints indicated on Drawings are mandatory and shall not be
omitted.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 15
1. Slab Control Joints: may be constructed by inserting hardpressed fiberboard or
plastic strips into the plastic concrete, or by cutting the concrete with a saw after it has
set. Make joints 1/8 inch wide and the depth of 1/4 the slab thickness or the
maximum size of the coarse aggregate, whichever is greater.
a. Insert fiberboard or plastic strips into a groove tooled into the concrete after
the first floating. Use a U-shaped sheet metal device fitted over the top to
insert the strips.
b. Saw joint early enough to prevent uncontrolled cracking in the slab, but late
enough that this can be accomplished without appreciable spalling. Cut joints
to true alignment and in sequence of concrete placement. Remove sludge
and cutting debris.
B. Wall Control Joints: Suspend preformed key in center of wall form and directly opposite
any vertical reglets on face of form.
C. Joints not indicated or specified shall be placed to least impair strength of structure and
shall be subject to approval of Architect.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Conform to requirements of ACI-318, paragraph 6.3, "Conduits and Pipes Embedded in
Concrete", and as specified below.
B. Install steel sleeves, furnished by other trades, at locations shown on the drawings.
C. Install anchor bolts for column baseplates in accordance with AISC Code of Standard
Practice, Paragraph 7.5 and the following: Use setting plate templates. Maintain
elevations and plan locations of bolt groups within one-quarter inch of the locations shown
on the drawings. Place individual bolts in a bolt group within one-eighth inch of center-to-
center dimensions shown on the drawings.
3.07 MIXING, CONSISTENCY, AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE
A. Use ready-mixed concrete produced by plant acceptable to Architect. Hand or site mixing
shall not be done. Batch constituents, including admixtures, at central plant. Admixtures
shall be premixed in solution form and dispensed as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 2 to 3 inches and at the time of deposit
shall be as follows:
Portion of Structure
S L U M P
Recommended
Maximum Range
Walls, Columns
4"
3" - 5"
Slabs, Beams
3"
2" - 4"
1. If high-range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) is used, it may be added at
the job site after verifying that the delivery slump is 2 to 3 inches. Maximum slump
after adding HRWR shall be 8 inches.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 16
2. For lightweight concrete, use HRWR to offset slump loss between charging and
discharging ends of pumping system.
3. For normalweight concrete, water may be added at the site only to make up water
withheld at the plant. Batching plant shall document on the driver's delivery ticket any
water withheld at the plant. When water has not been withheld and slump is too low
for proper handling of concrete, use HRWR to bring slump within specified range.
C. Transport ready mixed concrete to site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in
excess of rated capacities. Discharge at site within one and one-half hours after cement
was first introduced into mix. Do not use concrete with a temperature greater than 85
degrees F. Central mixed concrete shall be plant mixed a minimum of five minutes.
Agitation shall begin immediately after premixed concrete is placed in truck and shall
continue without interruption until discharged. Transit mixed concrete shall be mixed at
mixing speed for at least ten minutes immediately after charging truck followed by agitation
without interruption until discharged.
D. Do not retemper (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregates, or water) concrete
which has partially hardened.
3.08 PLACING CONCRETE
A. If concrete pumping is proposed, refer to "Submittals, Concrete Constituents", in this
Section for requirements. If lightweight concrete pumping is proposed, use a pipe diameter
of 5 inches. Concrete may be placed into the pump at the maximum but not more than the
specified slump.
B. Remove water and foreign matter from forms and excavations and, except in freezing
weather or as otherwise directed, thoroughly soak wood forms just prior to placing
concrete. Place no concrete on frozen soil and provide adequate protection against frost
action during freezing weather.
C. To secure bond at construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete surfaces with water jet or
compressed air. Before new concrete is deposited, saturate joint surface with water.
D. Do not place concrete having slump outside of allowable slump range. The loss of slump
between pump and discharge end of pipeline shall not exceed two inches.
E. Transport concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods
which prevent separation of ingredients and displacement of reinforcement, and which
avoid rehandling. Deposit no partially hardened concrete. When concrete is conveyed by
chutes, equipment shall be of such size and U-shaped design as to insure continuous flow
in chute. Do not use flat (coal) chutes. Use metal or metal lined chutes with different
portions having approximately the same slope. Slope shall not be less than 25 degrees nor
more than 45 degrees from horizontal. Use a baffle or spout at the discharge end of the
chute to prevent segregation. If discharge end of chute is more than five feet above
surface of concrete in forms, use spout with its lower end at surface of deposit. When
operation is intermittent, discharge chute into hopper. Do not allow concrete to flow
horizontally over distances exceeding five feet.
F. Place concrete in such manner as to prevent segregation and accumulations of hardened
concrete on forms or reinforcement above mass of concrete being placed. To achieve this
end, use suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies as required.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 17
G. During and immediately after depositing, compact concrete in accordance with ACI 309 by
means of internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools to produce required quality of
finish. Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall
be carried on only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without
permitting segregation of constituents or "pumping" of air. Vibrators used for normalweight
concrete shall operate at speed of not less than 7,000 rpm and be of suitable capacity. Do
not use vibrators to move concrete. Keep at least one vibrator on hand for every 10 cubic
yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare. Vibrators shall be operable and on site
prior to starting placement.
H. Place vertical lifts not to exceed 18 inches. Vibrate through successive lifts to avoid pour
lines. Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb,
and segregation.
I. Deposit concrete continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be
deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and
planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between
planned construction joints, as specified, introduce a joint and additional reinforcement so
as to preserve structural continuity. Notify Architect in any such case.
J. Cold joints, particularly in exposed concrete, including "honeycomb", are unacceptable. If
they occur in concrete surfaces exposed to view, Architect will require that entire section in
which blemish occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor's
expense.
K. When placing exposed concrete walls or columns, strike corners of forms rapidly and
repeatedly from outside along full height while depositing concrete and vibrating.
L. Clean chutes, hoppers, spouts, adjacent work, etc. before and after each run; discharge
water and debris outside form.
M. Place slabs-on-grade in long, alternating strips. Subdivide strips with control joints in
accordance with maximum spacing dimensions shown in the Drawings.
N. Place concrete level on steel deck to elevations shown on drawings but not less than
specified thickness at cambered beams. Thickness of concrete at midspans may exceed
specified minimum thickness due to steel beams and deck deflecting during placing of
concrete.
3.09 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Finish of Formed Surfaces:
1. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish
work. This is the concrete surface imparted by stock form facing material used with
tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections
exceeding ¼" in height rubbed down or chipped off.
2. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view and surfaces
that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, such as
waterproofing, dampproofing paint. This is the as-cast concrete surface obtained with
selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of
joints and with a systematic pattern of ties with set-back cones. Grout tie holes;
remove and rub smooth fins or other projections. Surfaces remaining exposed-to-
view shall have uniform color and texture acceptable to the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 18
3. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces.
B. Monolithic Slab Finishes: Floor Flatness (FF) and Levelness (FL) tolerances shall conform
to the criteria listed below except Floor Levelness (FL) does not apply to slabs on unshored
steel deck. Measure (FL) on shored floor slabs prior to removing shores.
1. Scratch Finish:
a. Scratch finish slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar
setting beds for tile, stone and other bonded applied cementitious finish
flooring material.
b. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding ½" in 10' when
tested with a 10' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where
required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes,
brooms or rakes.
2. Float Finish:
a. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered
with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, and as
otherwise indicated.
b. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work
surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has
disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of
power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or
by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and
level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a
10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope
surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
3. Trowel Finish:
a. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab
surfaces to be covered with wood flooring, resilient flooring, carpet, thin-set tile
and stone, paint or other thin film finish coating system.
b. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is
moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling
operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a
surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10'
straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through
applied floor covering system.
4. Non-slip Broom Finish:
a. Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 19
loading dock, and elsewhere as indicated.
b. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by
brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
5. Sealing and Hardener Finishes:
a. Apply a coat of the specified Curing and Sealing or Curing and Hardening
Compound to exposed interior concrete floors where compound is indicated
on the Drawings. Apply the compound in strict accordance with the directions
of the manufacturer.
6. Non-slip Aggregate Finish:
a. Apply non-slip aggregate finish to interior exposed concrete stair treads,
platforms, ramps, including cement-filled steel pan stair treads and platforms.
b. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly
spread 25 lbs. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface.
Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below
surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein
specified.
c. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone,
and water to expose non-slip aggregate.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Start curing before concrete has dried and immediately after placing and finishing.
Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Keep concrete surface continuously wet by moist curing, by moisture-
retaining cover curing, by curing compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein
specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by any of the following methods at Contractor's option:
a. Covering with water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly
saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive
cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over
adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and
sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 20
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound as follows:
a. Apply specified curing compound to exterior and exposed interior concrete
slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours) and to
formed surfaces immediately after forms are removed.
b. Apply uniformly in two continuous operations at right angles to each other by
power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
c. Use dissipating resin type curing compounds on surfaces which are to be
covered with finish or coating material applied directly to concrete, such as
liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing,
flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials. If curing compound
is not compatible with coating materials, moisture or moisture-cover curing
shall be used.
D. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength
which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with
ACI 306 and as herein specified.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
E. Hot weather placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein
specified.
1. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedment in concrete.
2. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
F. Keep permanent temperature record showing date and outside temperature for concreting
operations. Take thermometer readings at start of work in morning, at noon, and again late
in afternoon. Record locations of concrete placed during these periods so any effect
temperatures may have had on construction can be correlated. Distribute copies of
temperature record daily to Architect.
3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK, SHORING AND RESHORING
A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper removal of formwork shoring, and reshoring.
Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multi-story construction.
B. Remove vertical forms as soon as concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its
own weight and their removal can be done without damage to the concrete. Apply curing
compound immediately after removing forms.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 21
C. Keep horizontal forms and supports in place for not less than minimum periods of time
noted below or until concrete has reached 60 percent of its specified strength.
1. Soffits of beams or girders shall remain in place until concrete has attained 600 day-
degrees.
2. Forms of floor slabs shall remain in place until concrete has reached 400 day-
degrees.
3. Definition of day-degrees: Total number of days or fractions of days times mean daily
air temperature at surfaces of concrete; where concrete surface is protected by
insulated blankets or formwork, temperature may be taken under the blankets or
formwork. For example, five days at temperature of 60 degrees F. equals 300 day
degrees. Days or fractions of days in which temperature is below 50 degrees F. shall
not be included in calculation of day-degrees.
D. When forms are removed, place reshores at same time as stripping operations so that no
unshored area is larger than one-fourth of a slab panel. Allow no live load on slab when
stripping and shoring are being done.
E. Field cure test cylinders under same conditions as concrete they represent in order to verify
minimum strengths for form removal. Such cylinders and testing shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.12 ACCEPTANCE AND REPAIRING OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Intent of this Specification is to require forms, mixtures of concrete, and workmanship so
that concrete surfaces will require no patching, except for plugging of tie holes.
1. Remove and replace architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding the
limitations of ACI 301, Section 13.3.1 or having honeycombs, excessive air voids
(bugholes), mismatched coloring, pour lines or sand streaking. The standard of
acceptability shall be the surface quality of the approved test panel; or, where no test
panel has been made, the standard of unacceptability shall be the photographs
shown with paragraphs 7.6 and 7.7 or ACI 309R-87 "Guide for Consolidation of
Concrete".
2. Where patching is acceptable to Architect, procedure shall comply with ACI 301-96,
Chapter 9 and Section 13.6 and as described below.
B. Clean and dampen tie holes and fill solid with patching mortar immediately after form
removal.
C. Do not patch defective concrete and honeycombed areas unless examined and approval is
given by Architect. If such approval is received by contractor, areas involved shall be
chipped down square and at least one inch deep to sound concrete by means of cold
chisels or pneumatic chipping hammers. If honeycomb exists around reinforcement, chip
to provide clear space at least three-quarter inch wide all around steel to ensure proper
bond thereto. Repairs thicker than one and one-half inches shall be built-up on successive
days, each layer of one and one-half inches being applied as described in ACI 301-96
Chapter 9. Use specified bonding agent.
D. Remove and replace patches which become crazed, cracked, or sound hollow upon
tapping, at Contractor's expense.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 22
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean concrete surfaces of objectionable stains as determined by the Architect. Do not
use materials containing acid in any form or methods which will damage "skin" of concrete
surfaces. Architect may reject any exposed-to-view concrete with damaged “skin”.
3.14 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of cast-in-place concrete work will be performed by an independent
Testing Agency, under a separate contract with the Owner. Materials and workmanship
shall be subjected to inspection and testing in mill, shop and/or field by testing Agency and
shall be subjected to periodic observation by the Architect. Such inspection and testing
shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to provide his own inspection, testing, and
quality control as necessary to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with
requirements of these Contract Documents.
B. Requirements of this section are generally written for purpose of securing best
workmanship and end result. Certain deviations may be desirable under certain project
conditions, however, and may be allowed after examination by and upon written approval of
Architect. Any such approved deviation shall not be construed as a waiver of requirements
of Specifications.
C. Notify Construction Manager, Architect and Testing Agency prior to start of any phase of
concrete work so as to afford them reasonable opportunity to schedule site visit. Such
notification shall be made at least 36 hours in advance.
D. Facilitate inspection and testing by Testing Agency. Furnish Testing Agency upon request
with:
1. Information as to time and place of shipments of materials to plant and project site.
2. Free and safe access and assistance for testing materials and proper facilities for
inspection of work in plant and at proper site.
3. Covered box large enough to contain twenty-four standard concrete cylinders. At
temperatures below 60 degrees F., box shall be electrically heated to maintain inside
temperature of 60 to 80 degrees F. Place cylinders in box immediately after molding
and cover with moist burlap until delivery to laboratory, 24 to 72 hours after molding.
4. Copies of mill test reports of shipments of cement and reinforcing steel.
E. Promptly replace concrete materials or redo work which has been rejected by Architect
and/or Testing Agency, either at plant or at job site, to satisfaction of Architect and/or
Testing Agency and at no expense to the Owner.
F. Correct, or remove and replace concrete work which does not meet requirements of
Contract Documents for aesthetic appearance as directed by Architect. Criteria for
acceptance shall be based on a mockup preapproved by the Architect. Cost of such
correction or removal and replacement shall be at Contractor's expense.
G. Sampling and testing for quality assurance during placement of concrete may include the
following, as directed by Architect. Samples will be made at the point of discharge from the
ready-mix truck.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 23
ASTM C94.
a. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load and one test for each set
of compressive strength test specimens.
b. Air Content: ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normalweight
concrete; ASTM C231 pressure method for normalweight concrete; one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
c. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. (4
degrees C.) and below, and when 80 degrees F. (27 degrees C.) and above;
and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for
each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test
specimens are required. One set of cylinders shall be taken for every 50 cubic
yards or fraction thereof.
2. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction
thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of
surface area placed; one specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days,
and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
a. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, Architect may direct Contractor to evaluate current
operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-
place concrete or to redesign the mix.
b. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified
compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
c. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Construction Manager and
Contractor on same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive
strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at
28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking
strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
d. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place
concrete when test results show specified concrete strengths and other
characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect
or Construction Manager.
e. Testing Agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed,
including load testing. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any
other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is
verified.
H. Nondestructive Testing of Welded Reinforcing Steel: The Testing Agency will make
tests of welded reinforcing in accordance with AWS D1.4-79. Butt welded reinforcing
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000- 24
shall be tested by radiographic or magnetic particle methods. Parallel-welded
reinforcing shall be visually inspected.
I. Floor flatness and levelness: The Testing Agency will measure floor surface profiles
within 72 hours after concrete placement and calculate Floor Profile Numbers in
accordance with ASTM 1155. Floor profilograph or digital readout floor profiler
instrument such as a "Dipstick Auto-Read Floor Profiler" (manufactured by FACE
Construction Technologies) should be used.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 1
SECTION 033001
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the cast-in-
place concrete for slabs, pads, bases, footings and foundations, including formwork,
reinforcing, and concrete, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to the following:
1. Section 044302, GRANITE; Granite block seat wall.
2 Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING; Excavation
and backfill.
3. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
303R Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete
Practice
306.1 Cold Weather Concreting
308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
325.9R Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements and
Concrete Bases
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 2
2. American Plywood Association (APA):
Ref. 1 APA Design/Construction Guide, Residential and
Commercial
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 36 Structural Steel
A 123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel
Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
A 307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard
Fasteners
A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel
Products
A510 General Requirements for Wire Rods and Course
Round Wire, Carbon Steel
A 569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled
Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion
Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings of reinforcing steel shall be submitted. Drawings shall indicate bar sizes,
locations, spacings, quantity required, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and
spacing devices.
B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form-facing joints,
rustications, construction and contraction joints, form joint-sealant details, form tie locations
and patterns, inserts and embedments, cutouts, cleanout panels, and other items that
visually affect exposed to view cast-in-place concrete.
C. Samples of the following shall be submitted:
Item Sample Size
Preformed joint filler Two pieces, full depth and
width, 4 in. length
D. Prior to start of concrete work, Contractor shall submit to the Architect for review a
schedule for execution of the work of this section and a location plan indicating sequence of
concrete placement and location of proposed control joints and construction joints, if
required.
1.6 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix design shall be certified by independent testing laboratory. Statement of materials
constituting design of mixes (as required by referenced standards) shall be submitted for
Architect's approval within one week following award of Contract.
B. Concrete mix design shall include the following information:
1. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water.
2. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content.
3. Type of cement and aggregates.
4. Type and dosage of all admixtures.
5. Special requirements for pumping.
6. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which the design is valid.
7. Any special characteristics of the mix which require precautions in the mixing, placing,
finishing, or curing methods to achieve the finished product specified.
C. No concrete shall be delivered to the job site until the Architect has approved the design
mixes.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise specified, cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to ACI 301.
Construction of concrete subbases shall conform to ACI 325.9R
B. Dimensions, locations, and details of equipment pads, anchors, supports, and similar
features indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Manufacturer's approved shop
drawings of equipment to be supported, anchored, or contained thereby shall be consulted
for exact location, size, and details.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 4
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete Subcontractor.
e. Architect and Landscape Architect
1.8 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of the concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing
laboratory approved by the Architect. Testing equipment shall be supplied by the
laboratory, and the preparation of samples and all testing shall be performed by the
laboratory personnel.
B. Concrete materials and operations will be tested and inspected as work progresses.
Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection
when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Architect to final acceptance.
C. The following testing services may be provided by the Owner, at no cost to the Contractor:
1. Review and test of the Contractor's proposed materials for compliance with the
specifications.
2. Review of the Contractor's proposed mix design.
3. Sampling and testing of materials at plants or stockpiles during the course of the work
for compliance with the specifications.
4. Strength tests of concrete specimens.
5. Inspection of concrete batching, mixing, and delivery.
D. The following testing services shall be provided, at the Contractor's expenses:
1. Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or
proportions, requested by the Contractor.
2. Additional testing of materials or concrete occasioned by their failure by testing or
inspection to meet specification requirements.
E. At least four standard compression test cylinders shall be made and tested from each day's
placement of concrete. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cubic yards
of each type and design strength of concrete placed. Two cylinders shall be tested at
seven days, and two at 28 days. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold
weather concreting, and will be cured at the job site under the same conditions as the
concrete it represents. If job experience indicates additional cylinder tests or other tests
are required for proper control or determination of concrete quality, such tests shall be
made.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 5
F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
G. Submit to the testing laboratory, proposed concrete mix design for review, before beginning
work. Forward tesing laboratory’s mix review to Architect for approval prior to beginning
work.
H. Provide free access to work and full assistance and cooperation, concrete for samples, and
such auxilliary personnel and equipment as needed for testing agency to take samples for
required tests. Notify testing agency and Architect of intent to place concrete at least 24
hours before placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate material for base course shall consist of hard durable particles of fragments of
stone. Materials that break up when alternately frozen and thawed or wetted and dried shall
not be used. Coarse aggregates shall have a percentage of wear, by the Los Angeles test,
of not more than 45. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural or crushed sand.
1. Material shall be dense graded crushed stone conforming to MHD Specifications
Section M2.01.7.
2.2 FORMS
A. Cylindrical Forms: Sonotube Fibre Forms, wax-impregnated strippable forms manufactured
by Sonoco Products Company, General Products Division or approved equal, or ABS or
PVC plastic reusable forms.
B Footing Form Materials: Bigfoot Footing Forms, manufactured by Bigfoot Systems; Bigfoot
Systems Inc. 6750 Hwy. #3 Martin's Point Nova Scotia, Canada B0J 2E0 ; Tel. 1-800-934-
0393, or approved equal.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish: Plywood, lumber or metal, with lumber dressed on at least
two edges and one side.
D. Form Ties: Provide prefabricated, adjustable length galvanized steel snap-off ties, with
brackets, cones, cornerlocks and other accessories as necessary.
E. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation compounds that will not bond with, stain or
adversely affect concrete.
F. Forms shall be true to line and free from warp, and shall be of sufficient strength, when
staked, to resist the pressure of the concrete without springing. Formwork shall be
designed so that sections may be fastened together to prevent vertical or horizontal
movement of ends.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis
of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and the following:
1. Cement shall be Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
2. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 6
a. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal
maximum coarse-aggregate size.
b. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
4. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
5. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
6. Concrete slump shall be no less than 2 in. nor greater than 4 in., determined in
accordance with ASTM C 143.
7. Concrete shall be air-entrained type, conforming to ASTM C 94. Air-Entraining
Admixture: ASTM C 260.
a. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch
(19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
2.4 CONCRETE REINFORCING
A. Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A 615.
1. Bars employed as reinforcement shall be deformed type.
2. Bars employed as dowels shall be hot-rolled plain rounds.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcing bars shall be Grade 60.
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication
and bending.
C. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM A
185. Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in rolls
will not be permitted.
D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from
galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice."
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing shall be by moist curing or by use of curing compound.
B. Curing paper shall be a nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated kraft bituminous product
conforming to ASTM C 171. Four mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing
paper.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 7
C. Curing compound shall be a clear compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1 or white
pigmented compound conforming to ASTM C 309 Type 2, Class B.
2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Below grade base slab joints shall be located 30 ft. o.c., maximum.
B. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed, nonbituminous type joint filler conforming to ASTM
D 1752, Type II, similar to Sealtight Cork Expansion Joint Filler, manufactured by W.R.
Meadows, Inc., or approved equal.
1. Premolded filler shall be one piece for the full depth and width of the joint.
2. Use of multiple pieces of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of
joint will not be permitted.
3. Except as otherwise noted on the Drawings, joint filler shall be 3/8 in. thick.
C. Where indicated, concrete slab-on-grade shall be doweled at each expansion joint. One
end of the dowel shall be greased.
D. Round Expansion Joint Dowels: ASTM A615, Grade 60, epoxy-coated, smooth, billet-steel
bars, clean and free of rust and scale.
2.8 BOLTS
A. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307.
B. Expansion bolts for anchoring into existing concrete shall conform to ASTM A 307, and
shall have a self-drilling shell similar to Phillips Red Head Self-Drilling Shells, manufactured
by Phillips Red Head Anchor Division of ITT, Michigan City, IN., or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUITABILITY OF SUBGRADE
A. Subgrade to receive aggregate base and concrete slab-on-grade shall be inspected to
ensure that material is suitable to receive concrete, including compaction. Unacceptable
subgrade shall be brought to the attention of the Architect.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods
employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first
class road work.
B. Compaction of aggregate base shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined by
ASTM D 1557. Stone greater than 2 in. shall be excluded from course.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 8
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of concrete above, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.
D. Material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 3 in. thick, compacted measure. Each
lift shall be separately compacted to specified density.
1. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until
material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
2. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. as measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge, shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with base course.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise injured, shall be cleaned, replaced,
recompacted, or otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification
before proceeding with next operation.
3.3 ACCEPTABILITY OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Concrete structures to receive concrete topping slab shall be inspected to ensure that
surface is suitable to receive concrete. Waterproofed surfaces shall be thoroughly cured
and suitably protected with protection board prior to start of concrete work of this section.
3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.6 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 9
D. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove debris just before placing
concrete.
E. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.7 EARTH FORMED CONCRETE
A. Earth formed concrete footings shall be excavated under work of Section 312300, SITE
EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING to the depth and shape indicated on
the Drawings. Earth formed footings shall be continuous.
3.8 REINFORCING
A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and
rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce the bond between the
concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in
place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when necessary.
B. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded.
C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcing shall extend within 2 in. of
formwork and expansion joints. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints. Adjacent
sheets of fabric reinforcing shall lap 6 in.
D. After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is placed,
reinforcing steel and anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and
shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars and
supports shall be provided in a number and arrangement satisfactory to the Architect.
3.9 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Before placing concrete, forms and space to be occupied by concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned, and reinforcing steel and embedded metal shall be free from dirt, oil, mill scale,
loose rust, paint, and other material which might tend to reduce bond.
B. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is
to be placed shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free
water on surface.
C. Concrete which has set or partially set before placing shall not be employed. Retempering
of concrete will not be permitted.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no
new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints
as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
2. If concrete can not be mechanically consolidated, concrete shall be thoroughly spaded
and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and into corners of forms.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 10
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
G. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be cleaned
of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and
washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no
free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 in. thick, shall
be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed
immediately, before grout has dried or set.
3.10 FINISHING
A. Below grade concrete slabs and pads shall be screeded off and finished true to line and
grade, and free of hollows and bumps. Surface shall be dense, smooth, and at exact level
and slope required.
1. Finished concrete surface for subbases shall be wood-floated to a slightly rough
surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
B. Where finishing is performed before end of curing period, concrete shall not be permitted to
dry out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until end of curing period,
or until curing membrane is applied.
3.11 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. It is essential that concrete be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end of
specified curing period. It is equally essential that water not be added to surface during
floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after concrete placement.
Between finishing operations surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of
waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall
be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent
drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete. None of the water so applied
shall be troweled or floated into surface.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h)
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float
finishing.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
E. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or application of
a curing compound.
1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with
seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become
moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period
surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to
prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 11
2. If concrete is cured with a curing compound, compound shall be applied at a rate of
200 sq. ft. per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other.
3. Curing period shall be seven days minimum.
3.12 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joint shall be 3/8 in. wide, clean, dry, and free of loose material, dirt, oil and
grease, and shall be formed in the concrete to required width with preformed joint filler in
place. Joint filler shall extend the full length of the expansion joint.
1. Depth of filler shall extend to the full thickness of the concrete in vertical surfaces and
in concealed horizontal surfaces.
2. Depth of filler in exposed horizontal surfaces shall be as required to form a 1/2 in. deep
sealant recess below finished surface to depth recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.13 EXPANSION JOINT DOWELS:
A. Center vertically in slab, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Center longitudinal position of each dowel horizontally on joint, except where indicated
otherwise.
C. Install at same spacing as slab bar unless indicated on Drawings.
D. Install a cap or sleeve on one end of each dowel as indicated on Drawings.
E. Prior to installing the cap or sleeve on the dowels, completely coat surfaces of each dowel
on the cap-side or sleeve-side of the expansion joint with debonding compound.
F. Cut holes in expansion joint fill material accurately to fit tightly around dowels so that
concrete will not leak into gaps between the dowels and the expansion joint material.
G. Install dowels 90 degrees horizontally and vertically to expansion joint using dowel aligners
to help maintain alignment.
H. Install the dowel aligners in accordance with the manufacturer's current printed instructions.
3.14 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Control joints shall be sawn by using a diamond blade soff-type early entry cut saw. Joint
shall be made after concrete is finished and when the surface is stiff enough to support the
weight of workmen without damage to the slab. Saw shall cut to depth indicated on the
Drawings, but in no case less than 25% of slab depth.
3.15 PATCHING FORMED SURFACES OF EXPOSED CONCRETE
A. After forms have been removed, inspect concrete surfaces and only at the direction of the
Architect, patch pour joints, voids, stone pockets, other defective areas and before concrete
is thoroughly dry. Chip away defective areas to depth of not less than 1 in. with edges
perpendicular to surface. Wet areas to be patched and space at least 6 in. wide entirely
surrounding it, to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar. Do not patch concrete
in freezing weather.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK
033001 - 12
B. Apply chemical bonding agent to surface in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions, followed immediately by patching mortar. Make patch of same proportions
used for concrete except omit coarse aggregate. Add only enough water consistent with
requirements for handling and placing.
C. Thoroughly compact mortar into place and screed off; leave patch slightly higher than
surrounding surface. Leave undisturbed for one to two hours to permit initial shrinkage
before final finishing. Finish patch to match texture and color of adjoining surface.
3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONCRETE FINISHING
033515 - 1
SECTION 033515
CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Stained and polished concrete finish system.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete substrates.
2. Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATINGS for paints applied to concrete substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each finish system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
3. Submit two eight inch by 12 inch Samples for each type of finish coating for Architect’s
review of color and texture only.
C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONCRETE FINISHING
033515 - 2
D. Maintenance Data: For finish flooring to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data
for floor-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of local sources for products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the
finish coats.
C. Freestanding Mock-Ups: Refer to Section 014330 - MOCK-UPS for requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne finish only when temperatures of surfaces to be finished and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned finish only when temperatures of surfaces to be finished and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C. Close areas to traffic during finish system application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONCRETE FINISHING
033515 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acid Stain for Concrete Finish System:
a. Bomanite.
b. Lafarge QC Construction Products.
c. L. M. Scofield Companies.
2. Polished Concrete Finish System:
a. Advanced Floor Products, Inc
b. L. M. Scofield Companies.
c. Tamms Industries, Inc.
2.2 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH SYSTEM
A. Concrete Stabilizer: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of chemically reactive concrete
stabilizer formulated to increase concrete density and hardness so that it can be polished to a
high gloss.
B. Performance Criteria:
1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 – Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance.
2. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 – 21% increase impact strength.
3. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 – No adverse effect to ultra violet and
water spray.
4. Co-efficient of Friction: ASTM 1028 – all levels of finish (up to 800 grit) exceed OSHA and
ADA recommendations.
5. Reflectivity: 30% increase in reflectivity.
C. Accessory Materials:
1. Neutralizing Agent: Tri-sodium phosphate.
2. Water: Potable
3. Coating: Manufacturer’s recommended protective finish coating.
4. Finish Sealer: Manufacturer’s recommended product.
D. Basis-of-Design Product: Advanced Floor Products, Inc.; Retro Plate 99, with Retro-Pel coating,
and Retro-Guard finish sealer.
2.3 CONCRETE STAIN
A. Acid Stain: Water-based, slightly acidic solution of metallic salts, formulated to lightly etch and
penetrate concrete surface to form permanent insoluble colored precipitates that remain in the
pores of the concrete.
B. Acceptable Product: The following product is considered to be compatible with the concrete
finish system specified herein. No stain shall be approved by the Architect unless it has been
approved in writing by the manufacturer of the approved finish system:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONCRETE FINISHING
033515 - 4
1. Lafarge QC Construction Products; QC Chemical Stains
2.4 MIXING
A. Floor Finish System: Mix concrete floor finish system materials and water in appropriate drum-
type batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of concrete floor
finish system.
B. Verify that base concrete slabs comply with surface requirements specified in Section 033000 -
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
C. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by the
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
D. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 POLISHED FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM APPLICATION
A. Commence application in the presence of the manufacturer’s technical representative, after
concrete has been in place a minimum of 45 days. Apply concrete floor finish system in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
B. Grind concrete substrate to achieve Level 2 polish.
C. Apply acid stain where indicated on Drawings.
1. Spray-apply stain to surface of concrete.
2. Massage stain into surface using a stiff nylon-bristled brush in a circular motion.
3. Use brush to remove puddles of excess stain.
4. Repeat stain application after first coat has dried, a minimum of 5 hours.
5. Apply additional coats as needed to match color of approved mock-up.
6. After final coat has dried completely, a minimum of 10 hours, remove salt residue by
spraying with water and agitating with a stiff nylon-bristled brush, or a rotary floor
machine with a soft pad.
7. Rinse until rinse water runs clean. Control and collect run-off water to prevent it from
discoloring surfaces not to be stained, using a squeegee or wet-vac. Dispose of water in
a legal manner.
8. Cure stained surface.
9. Neutralize stained concrete surface with neutralizing agent and flush with water.
D. Sealing and Hardening Concrete Surface: Apply concrete stabilizer.
E. Polishing: Polish cured surface to Level 2 hard-shell medium sheen.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CONCRETE FINISHING
033515 - 5
F. Coating: Apply manufacturer’s recommended coating to protect polished surface. Apply finish
sealer over coating.
3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor finish system from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Cover all concrete finishes with construction paper or plywood to protect them from construction
traffic.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Defective Finish system: Repair and patch defective concrete floor finish system areas,
including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of concrete floor finish
systems shall take place in successive stages prior to grinding and polishing, in areas of extent
and using methods as follows:
1. Revise frequency of sampling in first subparagraph below to suit Project. Because there
are no industry recommendations, frequency below is an example only. Cubes are 2
inches square.
2. Sample Sets: At point of placement, a set of 3 molded-cube samples shall be taken from
the finish system mix for the first 1000 sq. ft., plus 1 set of samples for each subsequent
5000 sq. ft. of finish system, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each
day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C 109 for compliance with
compressive-strength requirements.
3. Concrete floor finish system shall be tested for delamination by dragging a steel chain
over the surface.
4. Concrete floor finish system shall be tested for compliance with surface flatness and
levelness tolerances.
C. Remove and replace applications of concrete floor finish system where test results indicate that
it does not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035412 - 1
SECTION 035412
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Self-leveling gypsum-cement-based floor underlayment.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete slab construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include design mixes with proposed
strengths. Include information necessary to establish conformance with specified performance
criteria; instructions for installing, curing and repairing of underlayment and for installation of
floor finishes.
1. Include UL Assembly test reports indicating compliance with indications on drawings and
UL #L546.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for concrete floor toppings.
D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Installer Qualifications: The underlayment installer shall be an authorized applicator approved
by the product manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience on comparable projects.
C. Use only mixing and pumping equipment approved by the manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035412 - 2
D. Mockups: Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups approximately 100 sq. ft. in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. If Architect determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove
them from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
components, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting concrete floor topping performance.
1. Place concrete floor topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of base
slabs are between 50 and 86 deg F.
B. Close areas to traffic during topping application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum
uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Ardex; GS-4 Self-Leveling Repair Underlayment.
b. Bonsal American, Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope; ProSpec Level Set G.
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Conflow Supreme.
d. Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete 2000.
e. USG Corporation; Levelrock 2500.
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035412 - 3
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 472.
4. Density: Minimum dry density in pounds per cubic foot - 100 for regular strength and 115
for high strength.
5. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame Spread - 0, Fuel Contributed -0, Smoke Den-sity - 0,
when tested in accordance with ASTM D E286.
6. Thickness: Not less than 1-1/2 inches.
7. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).
D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal
substrates.
1. Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
G. Sound Isolation Mat: 1/4 inch thick Acoustimat II or approved equal to achieve indicated sound
ratings.
2.2 MIXING PROPORTIONS
A. Mix gypsum concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the type of
placement employed and for the finish materials to be installed over the underlayment. Do not
exceed amounts of water as determined by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of concrete floor
topping.
B. Verify that base concrete slabs comply with scratch finish requirements specified in Section
033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035412 - 4
C. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by the
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
D. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses, provide the services of the
manufacturer's technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the
manufacturer to advise on all phases of this Work.
B. Install the system in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are specified.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
B. Concrete Underlayment Over Concrete Slab: Prime porous surfaces of 11% (minimum)
absorption with primer. Comply with underlayment concrete manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Fill non-moving cracks and joints as recommended by the concrete underlayment materials
manufacturer.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Mix materials by methods and in proportions recommended by manufacturer.
B. Maximum depth of concrete underlayment shall be 2 in. Minimum depth shall be 1/4 in. Add
aggregates as recommended by manufacturer for underlayment depth over 1 in.
C. Install control joints following manufacturer's recommendations in locations indicated on the
Drawings.
D. Allow underlayment to cure properly. Block off traffic and protect floor underlayment from
physical damage during curing.
E. Test for dryness by taping 24 x 24 in. sections of plastic to concrete underlayment surface.
After approximately 16 hours of curing, if no condensation occurs, the installation shall be
considered dry and ready to receive finish flooring.
3.5 PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in hot, dry,
or windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035412 - 5
written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor topping, but
before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by according to concrete
floor topping manufacturer's written instructions:
3.6 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, once topping has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semirigid joint
filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.7 REPAIRS
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areas
that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of concrete floor toppings
shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows:
1. Sample Sets: At point of placement, a set of 3 molded-cube samples shall be taken from
the topping mix for the first 1000 sq. ft., plus 1 set of samples for each subsequent 5000
sq. ft. of topping, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each day's
placement. Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C 109 for compliance with
compressive-strength requirements.
2. Concrete floor topping shall be tested for delamination by dragging a steel chain over the
surface.
3. Concrete floor topping shall be tested for compliance with surface flatness and levelness
tolerances.
C. Remove and replace applications of concrete floor topping where test results indicate that it
does not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Face brick.
3. Embedded flashing.
4. Reconstructed stone trim units.
5. Installation of cast stone trim units.
6. Mortar and grout.
7. Reinforcing steel, masonry joint reinforcement, ties and anchors.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061600 - SHEATHING for plywood sheathing on wood framing.
2. Section 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION for cavity wall insulation.
3. Section 078440 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS for fire-resistive joint systems
openings in masonry walls and at heads of masonry walls.
4. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.
3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Exposed concrete masonry units.
2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.
4. Stone trim.
5. Weep holes/vents.
6. Accessories embedded in masonry.
D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units:
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.
d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780 for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019 for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for
testing indicated.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
D. Preconstruction Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency
to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
the Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C 1314.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 48 inches
long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic
qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically
approved by Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01. Agenda shall include protection of air barrier membrane during construction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 4
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Air Barrier Membrane: During construction, protect air barrier membrane from
penetrations which allow air to pass through air barrier assemblies. Engage original installer to
repair damage promptly using identical materials and methods of installation, and to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
C. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
D. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
E. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
F. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUS)
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight unless indicated otherwise manufactured
to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
B. Shapes: Provide standard shapes indicated and as required for building configuration. Provide
special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2.3 BRICK
A. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1. Trade Reference and Color: Golden Buff standrd by Harmar.
2. Size (Actual Dimensions): Standard.
3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per
ASTM C 67.
4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
B. Building (Common) Brick where Concealed: ASTM C 62, Grade SW.
C. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes,
and lintels.
3. Provide lip stretcher brick at relieving angles.
4. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces.
5. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
6. Units which are sawn and less than one-half full size shall not be used.
2.4 STONE TRIM UNITS
A. Reconstructed Stone Units: Provide WT-F, 3-5/8 in. by 11-5/8 in. by 23-5/8 in. units by Hanover
Architectural Products. Colors and textures as selected by the Architect.
B. Provide stone units accurately shaped, with exposed faces dressed true, and with beds and
joints at right angles to faces.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that have been
extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry
mortar.
1. Available Products:
a. LanXess; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate
consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1. Interior Walls: Mill-galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size and Spacing: As required by Code.
4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches
in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
6. Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 7
B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Partition Top Anchors: 0.097-inch-thick metal plate with 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches
long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in
and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D. Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.
E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood
or metal studs, with structural performance capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both
tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.
2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units, equal to Pos-I-Tie Brick Veneer
Anchoring System by Heckmann Building Products Inc., consisting of a wire tie and a
metal anchor section.
a. Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged head with wing-nut eye and
corrosion-resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to
serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit sheathing
thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against framing with flanged head
covering hole in sheathing.
b. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188-
inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563
hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 - SHEET METAL
FLASHING AND TRIM and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
2. Configuration: Provide continuous flashing including preformed outside, inside corners,
and end dams with smooth uninterrupted soldered seams and hemmed edges to
maintain continuity. See drawings for profiles required.
B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 – SHEET
METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 8
C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates. Verify compatibility between flashing materials and substrates.
D. Transition Strips: Provide long-term compatible 6” wide transition strips to seal embedded
flashing terminations to air barrier membrane. Comply with requirements of section 072700 –
AIR BARRIERS.
E. Drip Edge: Provide type 316, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick stainless steel drip edge plates with
factory applied adhesive strip for all through-wall flashing conditions. Provide preformed outside
and inside corner drip plate corners with smooth uninterrupted soldered seams and hemmed
drip edges to maintain continuity. Custom sizes will be required see drawings for profiles
required.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Vent Products: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and
width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from
manufacturer's standard.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity. Provide strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail
shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings or
equivalent. Available products:
1. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break.
2. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
3. Hohmann & Barnard, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
4. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 9
2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of
portland cement by weight.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 10
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Do not use units cut to less
than one-half size.
E. Do not install concrete masonry units with more than 5 percent damage to the face. Do not
install brick units which will show defects after installation.
F. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond
pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs. Prior to installation review bond pattern with Architect.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 11
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated on Structural Drawings.
G. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors
48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 078440 – FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar
holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 12
3.5 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. Where one wythe is of
clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for
differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.
2. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove
mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D. Coordinate and allow access for air and vapor barrier membrane installed in cavity under
Section 072700 - AIR BARRIERS.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through insulation and sheathing to wall framing and to
concrete and masonry backup as applicable with metal fasteners of type indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 13
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide air space indicated on the Drawings
between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
4. Space anchors as required by Code.
3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction
of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if
any.
2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch
for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a
compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section
079200 - JOINT SEALANTS but not less than 3/8 inch.
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.10 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 14
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4-inch
hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe.
3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge covered with
elastomeric membrane, lapping at least 4 inches.
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form end dams.
5. Install air barrier transition strips to seal embedded flashings in masonry to air barrier
membrane in accordance with Section 072700 – AIR BARRIERS.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D. Install metal drip edge plate in accordance with architectural details and manufacturer’s
requirements.
E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated.
3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for
cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 15
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare
reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports. Retesting of materials failing to
comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. Test
types as determined by the independent testing and inspection agency.
3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
around penetrations and where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
6. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes
20.
7. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 16
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 - EARTHWORK.
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off the Site.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 1
SECTION 042113
BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide brick masonry work for exterior brick steps, as indicated on Drawings and as
specified herein. Include, but do not limit to:
1. Brick tread and riser masonry.
2. All other unit masonry work shown on Drawings or reasonably required to make work
of this Section complete in all respects.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK; Concrete backup.
2. Section 079201, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS; Sealing of expansionl joints.
3. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A41.1 Building Code Requirements for Masonry
A41.2 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 67 Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Sampling and Testing
C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
C 150 Portland Cement
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 2
C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
C 216 Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry
C 952 Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units
D 1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
E 447 Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms
3. International Masonry Institute (IMI):
Ref. 1 Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold
Weather Masonry Construction
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the governing laws, building code, and the following
standards:
1. Brick Institute of America (BIA) applicable standards.
2. ANSI A41.1 and A41.2, as applicable.
3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) applicable published standards.
4. IMI Ref. 1.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit representative samples for each material as follows. Delivered materials
shall closely match approved samples.
1. Brick treads and risers: Submit a minimum of four bricks of each type, size, and color.
2. Expansion and control joint material: Submit duplicate samples of material, minimum
6 in. length.
3. Mortar: Submit cured mortar samples of each mortar color selected.
4. Reinforcing anchors and ties: Submit samples of each type, size, thickness, and finish
specified.
B. Product Data: Submit product data of materials and systems. Include manufacturer's
installation instructions, use limitations, and recommendations for each material used.
1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Mock-Up: Prior to commencing primary work of this section, construct mock-up of brick
steps as directed by the Architect, and obtain Architect’s acceptance of visual qualities.
Provide mock-up at locations acceptable to Owner and Architect. Protect and maintain
mock-up throughout work of this Section to serve as criteria for acceptance of work.
1. Remove and replace mock-up as many times as necessary to obtain Architect’s
approval.
2. Demolish and remove mock-ups from site at completion of work of this Section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 3
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source: For each type of material required by work of this section, provide primary
materials which are products of a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials which
are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
1.9 TESTS
A. Testing and inspection of mortar materials and masonry materials will be conducted by a
testing laboratory selected and paid for as described under Division 01, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
B. No materials shall be used on the work without prior test and the written approval of the
Testing Laboratory. Materials shall be submitted to the Testing Laboratory at least three
weeks in advance of proposed first use in the structure for subjection to the basic
acceptance tests and determination of basic mixtures.
C. Efflorescence: In addition to other tests required, and sufficiently in advance of the
beginning of masonry work, all brick, brick mortar, and brick mortar materials proposed for
exterior use on the Project shall be tested to ensure freedom from efflorescence.
1. Brick Test:
a. The Testing Laboratory shall select from each type of brick proposed for use, ten
unbroken specimens selected in five pairs, each pair being of similar appearance.
b. These units shall then be tested with efflorescence test described under ASTM C
67. Units rated as "efflorescence" shall be cause for rejection of the proposed
units.
2. Mortar Test:
a. Prepare 3 oz. mortar specimen for each proposed mix, using as little water as
possible. While still in a plastic condition and prior to initial set, each mortar
specimen and a brick, set on end, which has been tested free of efflorescence,
shall be placed in a receptacle of such size that 4 ounces of water will have a depth
between 1/2 and one inch. The distilled water and mortar shall be thoroughly
stirred for five minutes before placing brick in water. Water level shall be
maintained by addition of distilled water. After seven days, the brick shall be
removed and air dried for 24 hours. Efflorescence visible on brick at 10 ft. with
normal vision under an illumination to affect its appearance when compared to the
untreated brick, shall be cause for rejection of the mortar.
b. If tests show mortar is the cause of efflorescence, the components shall be tested
in separate receptacles, each containing a brick on end which has been tested free
of efflorescence. The receptacle shall be filled and maintained with distilled water
to a depth between 1/2 and one inch. In testing, one ounce of each cementitious
ingredient and 3 ounces of each aggregate shall be used, each mixed in 4 ounces
of distilled water. Visual test of material for efflorescence, and rejection of faulty
materials, shall be as described for mortar, in previous paragraph.
D. At the start of field operations, and periodically during the course of the work, the Testing
Laboratory will test materials and mortar and conduct on-job inspections of measuring,
mixing, laying, and curing of brick and mortar materials, including prism tests, in
conformance with ASTM C 952 and ASTM E 447 (Method B), to ensure compliance with
these specifications and originally approved samples. Number and frequency of tests shall
be determined by the Testing Laboratory and the Architect. Recommendations of the
Testing Laboratory shall be strictly followed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 4
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Protection: Use mortar within 1-1/2 hours after mixing. Discard mortar over
1-1/2 hours old and mortar stiffened due to hydration (setting).
B. Cold Weather Protection: Strictly comply with IMI Ref. 1, BIA Ref. 1, and Portland Cement
Association.
C. Protection: Cover walls at end of each days work. Extend cover 24 in. down sides of walls
and hold securely in place.
D. Loading: Do not apply loads until work has set and cured and is ready to accept loading.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled fully protected from wetting, staining,
chipping, and other damage. Store masonry materials on raised timber or platforms, above
ground, under weathertight covers or indoors, and kept clean and dry.
B. Deliver and store cement, lime, and other perishable materials in their original containers,
plainly marked with brand name and manufacturer's name, indoors or in weathertight
sheds.
C. Protect metal accessories and reinforcement from elements. Immediately before placing,
remove loose rust, dirt, and other foreign materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK
A. Provide face brick conforming to ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS. Use building brick
conforming to ASTM C 62 only where concealed from view. Provide brick masonry as
follows:
1. Compressive strength, individual: Not less than 6,000 psi.
2. Compressive strength, average of 5: Not less than 8,000 psi.
3. Water absorption, individual: Not more than 10%; ASTM C 67.
4. Water absorption, average of 5: Not more than 8%.
B. Tread and Riser Brick: Endicott Medium Ironspot #46.
C. Provide all special shapes of each type of brick as required to complete the work as
indicated, at no additional cost to Owner. Carefully review the Drawings to determine the
scope and varieties of the special brick shapes required. Lip stretcher brick shall be 100%
solid.
2.2 MORTAR
A. Mortar for all brick walls shall be Flamingo Brixment Mortar, manufactured by Essroc
Intalcementi Group, 3251 Bath Pike, Nazareth, PA 18064; Tel. 1-800-437-776, 610-837-
6725; Fax: 610-837-9614, or approved equal. Color will be selected by the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 5
B. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C 270, Type S, (Provide Type M mortar for masonry below
grade and in contact with earth) consisting of one part Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type
I, and meeting specified efflorescence requirements), 1/4 to 1/2 parts hydrated lime (ASTM
C 207, Type S), and sand (ASTM C 144) in quantity of not less than 2-1/2 nor more than 3
times the sum of the quantities of cement and lime, by volume. Type M mortar shall consist
of one part Portland cement, 1/4 part hydrated lime, and not less than 2-1/2 nor more than
3 times the sum of the quantities of cement and lime by volume.
1. Mortar for joints and pointing of exposed face brick shall contain color additive
manufactured by Solomon Grinding Service, Springfield, IL 62705 or approved equal.
Color additive shall not affect workability, setting, or strength of mortar. Color additive
shall be chemically inert, nonfading, alkali-fast mineral oxides, finely ground and
specially prepared for use in cement and lime mortar. Assume that mortar color of
same hue as brick color will be required. Exact color shall be determined by Owner at
time of approval of sample masonry panels.
2. Single brands of cement and lime and single source of sand shall be used throughout
the project, for each mix.
3. Water shall be potable and free of injurious contaminants.
4. Integral waterproofing additive shall be used in all mortar for exterior masonry work.
Waterproofing additive shall be equal to products of Master Builders, W.R. Grace &
Co., Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., or approved equal, used in strict accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions.
5. No antifreeze admixtures or admixtures of any other type except those specifically
called for herein will be permitted.
C. Design of Mortar Mixes: Specific mix design for each type or use of mortar, using the
specified materials, shall be determined by same Testing Laboratory engaged for testing
and inspection, hereinbefore, and costs of determining design mixes will be handled in
same manner as for testing and inspection work. Specific tests shall be made for
efflorescence (exterior mortar only), water retention, compressive strength and bond (seven
day and 28 day), and other characteristics deemed necessary. Materials found unsuitable
by the Testing Laboratory will be rejected and replaced with new proposed materials of
other brands or sources.
D. Grout: Provide grout complying with ASTM C 476 and with consistency appropriate to
conditions so that grout will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Compressible filler material for control joints in brick masonry work shall be compressible
closed-cell, expanded polyethylene foam, ASTM D 1056, 1.8 lb. per cu. ft. minimum
density.
B. Masonry Cleaning Materials: Provide one of the following products as applicable for
cleaning mortar stains, job dirt, and job stains from masonry work:
1. Cleaning Material for Light Colored Masonry: Sure Klean 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo,
Inc., Kansas City, KS 66117.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Masonry work shall be done by skilled masons, fully instructed as to requirements of this
specification, and adequately supervised during work.
B. Cold weather masonry shall conform to BIA Ref. 1, IMI Ref. 1 and following:
1. Do no masonry work when outdoor temperature is less than 40oF. unless provisions
are made to adequately protect materials and finished work from frost by heating
materials, enclosing work, and heating enclosed spaces.
2. If masonry work must be done when ambient temperature is freezing or below, all
masonry material must be at temperature between 50oF. and 90oF., and mortar,
when used, shall have a temperature between 60oF. and 80oF. In addition, all
masonry shall be protected from temperatures below 40oF. for at least 48 hours after
being laid. Heat for heating materials and heating temporary enclosures will be
provided by the Contractor.
C. Lay masonry plumb, true to line, and with level courses, with straight, clean, uniform joints,
and true surfaces, and plumb corners. Maintain vertical alignment of joints as required by
bond patterns indicated. Align horizontal joints with tops of openings, as indicated. Lay
units in solid partitions to provide same evenness of surface on each side.
D. Adjust each masonry unit in final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. Remove units
disturbed after mortar has stiffened and re-lay with fresh mortar.
E. Provide chases, slots, and recesses as required to accommodate work of other trades.
Close only after such work has been installed, tested, and approved. No cutting and
patching of completed masonry work will be permitted except as approved by Landscape
Architect.
F. Maintain masonry clean as work progresses. Exercise extreme care at exposed work to
prevent smearing or staining with mortar.
3.2 BRICK MASONRY WORK
A. Lay brick in patterns indicated on the Drawings. Construct brickwork to conform to
Architect-approved mock-up.
B. Shove bricks into place (do not lay) in full mortar beds, with vertical and horizontal joints
completely filled. Do not slush. Strike exposed joints flush with face of brick, then finish as
specified below.
C. When mortar at exposed joints has become partially set, but still sufficiently plastic to flow
under pressure (i.e., is "thumb-print" hard), tool joints to a glassy hard, smooth, concave
finish using 1 in. sled-type stainless steel jointer.
D. Install expansion-joint materials as masonry progresses, ready to receive joint backing and
sealant provided under Section 079201, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK MASONRY
042113 - 7
3.3 CLEANING AND POINTING
A. Upon completion, exposed exterior masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned with a solution of
detergent and water, using stiff fiber or stainless steel brushes. If required, proprietary
masonry cleaner shall be used as directed by Architect. Acid cleaners or other solutions
which may cause discoloration or damage shall not be used.
B. Rake out all imperfect mortar joints of all masonry work and repoint to match appearance of
surrounding acceptable work. The entire work shall be left free of defects.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 1
SECTION 044302
GRANITE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to furnish and install the
granite block seat wall, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect the work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION.
2. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITEWORK; Reinforced concrete
base.
3. Section 129300, SITE FURNISHINGS.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
A 167 Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
C 503 Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior)
2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
3. National Building Stone Quarries Association, Inc. (NBGQA):
Specifications Specifications for Architectural Stone
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Samples of the following shall be submitted:
Item Quantity and Size
Granite Block One section required, full thickness x full width x 3 ft.
long, specified color and finish.
1. Stone sample shall fully demonstrate color, shade, veining, texture, range, and finish.
B. Shop Drawings: Cutting and setting drawings of stone pieces specified herein shall be
submitted. Drawings shall indicate sizes, dimensions, layout, finishes, edging, radius
edges, arrangement and provisions for jointing, anchoring, cut-out and holes, and other
necessary details for reception of other work.
1. Drawings shall indicate locations of inserts for stone anchors and supports which are to
be built into concrete, and locations and dimensions of cut-outs, holes, openings, and
other provisions required for the work of other trades. The shop drawings should
indicate the connections from stone to stone creating a monolithic stone block bench.
2. Shop drawings shall indicate the setting number of each piece and each piece shall
bear the corresponding number in a non-staining paint.
C. Contractor's Review: Before commencing work, submit signed statement that Contract
Documents have been reviewed with a qualified representative of Stone supplier, and that
selected materials and construction are proper, compatible, and adequate for application
shown.
D. Test Report: Submit reports from tests conforming to ASTM C 67 methods indicating:
1. Compressive strength, psi. (ASTM C 170)
2. Density, lbs./c.f. (ASTM C 97)
3. Absorption by weight, % (ASTM C 97)
4 Abrasion resistance (ASTM C 241)
5. Flexural strength psi, (MPa) (ASTM C 880)
1.6 MOCK UP
A. Provide mock up seatwall installation as directed by Architect, conforming to typical Project
construction. Sample shall show the proposed stone type, color, and finish, setting system,
relationship to paving, jointing and other pertinent details of installation.
B. Replace sample installation as many times as necessary until Architect's approval of the
installation has been obtained. Upon Architect's approval, construct all subsequent Stone
work to conform to approved sample installation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with that of other sections affecting, affected by, this work, as necessary to
assure the steady progress of the work under the Contract.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 3
B. Do all cutting and drilling to accommodate work of other sections, as expressly indicated
and as reasonably inferred from Contract Documents Specifications, or required for the
proper completion of the Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Stone shall be carefully packed and banded by the supplier for shipment. Following
shipping stone shall be stored on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining,
waterproof membrane and protected from the weather. Skids shall be placed and stacked
in such a manner as to evenly distribute the weight of the Stone materials and to prevent
breakage, cracking, and damage to stone pieces. Stone materials shall be stored in such a
manner as to allow air to circulate around the stone material. Stone shall not be permitted
to be in direct contact with the ground any time during storage.
B. Stone shall be carefully handled to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other damage.
Pinch or wrecking bars shall not be used without protecting edges of stone with wood or
other rigid materials. Stone units shall be lifted with wide-belt type slings wherever
possible; wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances which might cause staining
or damage to stone finish shall not be used.
C. Stone damaged in any manner will be rejected and shall be replaced with new materials at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES
A. Finished surfaces adjacent to the stone work shall be adequately protected from soiling,
staining, and other damage.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Stone shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 615, Architectural Grade and NBGQA
Specifications, except as modified herein.
B. Stone shall be standard grade, free of cracks, seams, starts, or other defects which may
impair its strength, durability or appearance. Exposed surfaces shall be free from spots,
spalls, chips, stains, discoloration, or other defects which would affect its appearance.
Color, texture and finish shall be within the range of samples approved by the Architect.
1.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall make early contact with vendors identified below so that they have from
now until fall of 2017 to flag the material, allowing for a better selection of what may be
available in the reclaimed market.
1. Olde New England Granite (A Reed Corporation Company), 357 Summer Street;
Lynnfield MA 01940
2. Granite Farm One New Salem St., Wakefield, MA 01880 Phone: 781-334-4805 ; FAX:
781-334-2362.
3. Stonefarm Living 3 Simm Lane, Unit 1C Newtown, CT 06470, or other Architect
approved supplier.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 4
B. Pretagging of Granite Stone Blocks
1. Ganite blocks for retaining wall and benches will be tagged by the Architect.
1.12 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Protection:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not build on frozen work; remove and replace Stone work damaged by frost or
freezing.
3. During all seasons, protect partially completed Stone work against weather when work
is not in progress.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL STANDARDS
A. Quarrying Supervision
1. Quarrying shall be supervised and coordinated by the stone fabricator to insure that the
as-quarried block orientations will yield finished material with characteristics as
described herein.
2. All stone shall be cut from matched blocks. Matched blocks shall mean blocks
extracted from a single bed of stratum in the quarry. The use of blocks chosen at
random, though similar in general character and color to that of the approved Stone will
not be permitted, except by written permission of the Architect.
B. Examinations
1. Examination at the Quarry: Quarried blocks shall be made available for inspection by
the Architect upon request.
2. Examination at the Fabrication Plant: Production units shall be made available for
inspection by the Architect upon request. To this end, the Subcontractor shall, after
approval of final shop drawings, advise the Architect when production has begun and of
the earliest possible opportunity to inspect a representative sampling of production
work.
3. Contractor shall provide lighting that is sufficient in intensity and color range to permit
an adequate examination to the satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Criteria for Stone
1. Visual: All examinations, selections, and approvals shall be for the purpose of
achieving a final appearance of stone with greatest possible uniformity, and will be
based upon the following criteria:
2. Stone shall be of sound stock and uniform texture, and shall be free from holes, seams,
shakes, clay pockets, spalls, stains, starts, and other defects which would impair the
strength, durability and appearance of the work, with the exception of irregular marble
blocks selected by the Architect.
3. Inherent variations characteristic of the stone and the quarry from which the stone is to
be obtained shall be brought to the attention of the Architect at the time the samples
are submitted for approval, and shall be subject to approval of the Architect.
4. Stone shall be selected for background color, veining, marking and matching, shall run
in even shades, and shall be set accordingly.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 5
D. Physical and Mechanical: Contractor to submit data to the Architect.
1. Absorption and Bulk Specified Gravity (ASTM C 97).
2. Flexural strength (ASTM C 880).
3. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 170).
4. Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C 99).
5. Abrasion Resistance, Hardness (ASTM C 241).
E. Stone materials rejected for non-compliance with these standards shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
2.2 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting
devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit supports.
C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with
fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if
none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.
1. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.
D. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as
required to accommodate contiguous work.
E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone, except sawed reveals, to comply with
requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups.
F. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements
for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of
colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and
mockups.
G. Flatness Tolerance: Variation from true plane, or flat surfaces, shall be determined by use
of a 4 ft. long straightedge, applied in any direction on the surface. Maximum variation from
true plane shall not exceed 1/4 of the specified joint width.
H. Variations from true plane on other parts of face surfaces shall not exceed the following:
1. 4-cut and sawn finishes 1/8 in.
2. Thermal and coarse stippled sandblasted finishes 3/16 in.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 6
I. Backs of pieces shall be sawn or roughly dressed to approximate true planes. Maximum
variation in thickness from the specified shall not exceed the following:
1. 1/2 in. on pieces above 3 in. modular thick
2.3 GRANITE
A. Granite shall.be fine grained domestic light gray, salvaged from a regional source with split
face or weathered finish. Granite shall conform to ASTM C 615 and be of the approximate
sizes and dimensions indicated on the Drawings, supplied by one of the following:
1. Olde New England Granite (A Reed Corporation Company), 357 Summer Street;
Lynnfield MA 01940
2. Granite Farm One New Salem St., Wakefield, MA 01880 Phone: 781-334-4805 ; FAX:
781-334-2362.
3. Stonefarm Living 3 Simm Lane, Unit 1C Newtown, CT 06470, or other Architect
approved supplier.
a. Finishes:
1. Granite blocks for seatwalls: Thermal finish on tops and split face finish on all
other exposed faces.
B. Use only one source for each type of granite throughout the entire Project. Other sources
will be reviewed according to substitution requirements specified in the Conditions of the
Contract.
C. Granite shall be sound and uniform in quality, texture, and strength, and shall be free of any
flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, seams, or defects which would impair its strength, durability,
or appearance.
D. Exposed surfaces shall have a “Cleft” finish; all other surfaces shall be saw cut.
E. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/2 inch (13
mm).
3. Sawn surfaces shall be cleaned of rust stains and iron particles.
F. All faces shall be at right angles to the plane of the top.
G. Granite shall be cut accurately to required shapes and dimensions.
H. Holes, cut-outs, sinkages and openings in granite work for anchors, cramps, dowels,
supports, and lifting devices, shall be accurately cut or drilled to required dimensions, as
shown on the approved shop drawings, and as necessary to secure granite in place to
ensure correct location and accurate fit of all fixtures. Setting beds shall be shaped to fit
supports.
I. Arrises shall be cut sharp and true to square, and continuous with adjoining arrises. Where
exposed, arrises shall be eased.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 7
2.4 SETTING BED MORTAR
A. Setting bed mortar shall be equal to "Laticrete 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed", a polymer fortified
blend of carefully selected polymers, portland cement and graded aggregates, manufactured by
Laticrete International, Inc., One LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA ·
1.800.243.4788 · +1.203.393.0010, or approved equal. Mix with water according to
manufacturer's instructions.
2.5 THIN SET BED AND/OR BOND COAT
A. High strength bond coat between concrete base slab and setting bed mortar, and between
setting bed mortar and granite shall be equal to "Laticrete 254 Platinum", one-step, polymer
fortified, thin-set mortar bond coat, manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc., One
LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA · 1.800.243.4788 ·
+1.203.393.0010, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABILITY OF CONCRETE BASE
A. Contractor shall examine the concrete to determine its adequacy to receive granite block
and mortar setting bed. Evidence of inadequate base shall be brought to the immediate
attention of the Architect.
B. Start of work of this Section shall constitute acceptance of the concrete base.
3.2 SETTING STONE - GENERAL
A Stone shall be carefully handled to prevent marking, chipping, breakage, soiling, or other
damage. Pinch or wrecking bars shall not be used. Stone units shall be lifted, moved and
placed with wide-belt type slings; wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances
which might cause staining or damage to stone finish shall not be used.
3.3 SETTING
A. All setting shall be done by competent granite setters under adequate supervision and in
accordance with the approved shop drawings.
B. Granite units with chips, cracks, stains, or other defects which might be visible in the
finished work shall not be used.
C. Before setting, granite shall be clean and free of dirt, and foreign matter on all sides.
Granite shall be dry before setting.
D. Granite shall be set true to the required lines and grades. Joints shall be uniform in
thickness. Joints shall be butted tight.
E. Bond coat shall be applied to concrete base slab using flat trowel. Thickness of bond coat
shall be approximately 1/16 in.
F. Mortar bed shall be spread evenly over the troweled bond coat. Bond coat shall be applied
to mortar bed using flat trowel to thickness of 1/16 in.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 8
G. Before setting, the bottom of each granite piece shall be dampened and shall receive a
slurry of mortar to ensure maximum contact with mortar bed. Each piece shall be carefully
bedded in a full bed of mortar and tapped home to a full and solid bearing. Particular care
shall be exercised to equalize bed and joint openings and eliminate the need for redressing
of exposed surfaces.
H. Exposed surfaces shall be kept free from mortar at all times. Any mortar smears shall be
immediately removed with a clean sponge and clean water before latex modified mortar
can set.
I. Holes, slots, and other sinkages for anchors, and dowels, shall be completely filled with
mortar during setting of granite.
J. Blocks for seat walls shall be set according to the details and locations indicated on the
Drawings. Vertical face of wall and curb shall be as indicated on the Drawings with tops
pitched as indicated.
K. Extreme care shall be taken not to destroy alignment during backfilling operations.
Sections disturbed during backfilling or otherwise shall be reset to line and grade, and
properly backfilled.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective
joints, and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples and mockups.
Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect approves methods and results.
B. Replace in a manner that results in dimension stone matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. Clean stone no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing, using clean
water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents,
cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods
that could damage stone
1. Mild abrasive cleaners that contain no harsh or caustic ingredients may be used, with
fiber brooms or brushes and clear water.
2. Expansion joints and other joints to receive sealant shall be cleaned of all mortar and
left ready for sealing of joints under Section 079201, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
D. Upon completion of granite work, surfaces shall be left in a clean, unsoiled condition,
acceptable to the Architect.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Granite work shall be properly and adequately protected under the responsibility of the
Contractor until final acceptance of the Project by Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE
044302- 9
B. After the granite work has been installed, it shall be properly and adequately protected from
damage. Boxing or other suitable protection shall be provided by Contractor wherever
required. However, no lumber which may stain or deface the granite shall be used. Nails
shall be high-quality galvanized or non-rusting.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 1
SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary General Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 WORK TO BE PERFORMED
A. Labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete structural
steel work shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. Structural steel work is that
work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice" plus steel work listed below and shown
on the structural drawings.
1. Furnishing of anchor bolts, and loose leveling plates.
2. Furnishing and erection (including bolted and welded connections) of base plates,
columns, tubes, channels, struts, beams, hangers, girders, bracing (temporary and
permanent), rigid bents, brackets, anchors, angles, stiffeners, plates, bolsters, clips,
support angles for metal deck lintels or relieving angles affixed to structure.
3. Furnishing and installation of openings (unreinforced and reinforced) in structural
steel required to accommodate mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work.
4. Furnishing and installation of non-shrink grout under leveling and base plates.
5. Furnishing and application of shop paint, including finish coat(s) when required, and
field touch-up paint for designated structural steel items.
6. Furnishing and application of hot-dip galvanizing for masonry lintels, masonry
relieving angles, exposed mechanical equipment dunnage beams, and steel so
designated on the drawings.
7. Design of bolted/welded structural connections.
8. Furnishing and shop-installation of headed shear connectors (excluding shear
connectors required for composite beam action) where shown on the drawings.
9. Furnishing of structural steel items shown in structural drawings required to be built
into or from part of work specified under other Sections, to appropriate trade at proper
time with complete instructions and templates to facilitate installation. Verify proper
installation of same.
10. Unless specifically excluded, furnishing and installation of any other items of structural
steel work indicated on Drawings, specified or obviously needed to make work of this
Section complete.
11. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to
achieve certification, measured and documented according to the LEED Green
Building Rating System, of the US Green Building Council. Refer to Section
018110, Sustainable Design Requirements for certification level and certification
requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 2
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 033000, Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Section 054000, Cold Form Metal Framing
3. Section 055000, Metal Fabrications
4. Section 099000, Painting and coatings(excluding touch-up of prefinished surfaces
and shop coats as required)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Standard Shop Details and Connection Design Calculations: Submit to Architect prior to
submitting detailed Shop Drawings, design calculations and details for connections not
shown on the Drawings. Calculations shall be prepared under supervision of registered
professional engineer.
B. Joint Welding Procedures: Submit to Architect joint welding procedures and program of
welding sequence (for each component and for welding components together) before any
welding is done. After return of submittal, welding procedures and sequences shall be
followed without deviation. Architect may require prequalification of these welding
procedures by tests prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
C. Quality Control Manual: Submit to Architect, prior to start of fabrication, description of field
and plant inspection procedures including titles of responsible personnel, methods and
equipment for non-destructive testing of specific typical joints, documentation of inspection
results, and procedures for repairing or disposing of nonconforming materials. Results of
tests during the course of work shall, upon request by Architect or Construction Manager,
be made available for review by Architect and/or Testing Agency.
D. Methods of Erection: Submit to Architect, in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents, prior to starting work, description of methods, sequence of erection, and type
of equipment proposed for use in erecting structural steel work. Provide construction loads
imposed on permanent structure.
1. Architect's review is only for effects of methods on permanent structure. This
submission shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for providing proper
methods, equipment, workmanship, and safety precautions.
E. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect detailed Shop Drawings, including erection drawings,
schedules and index sheets showing: grades of steel; identification mark of members;
orientation and relation of members to appropriate grid lines; setting elevations for column
bases; framing to support metal deck; location and size of openings, slots, and holes;
requirements, such as punched or drilled holes, for attachment of other materials or parts
of construction; type, size, and location of shop and field connections; type, size, and extent
of welds; joint welding procedures; welding sequences (use welding symbols adopted by
American Welding Society); cleaning requirements prior to painting; type and dry thickness
of paint. Members to be galvanized shall be so noted on shop drawings.
1. Architect's checking is a review for conformance with the design concept of the
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 3
project and compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities and
dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction
coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe
and satisfactory manner.
2. Do not proceed with fabrication of material or performance of work until
corresponding item on Shop Drawing has been reviewed by Architect.
F. Samples: Submit to Architect, upon request by Architect, samples and/or descriptive
literature of materials, products and methods.
1. Do not proceed with fabrication of material/product or performance of work until
Sample has been approved by Architect.
G. Submit to the Architect complete shop details (keyed to erection layouts) and technical data
for all structural bearings specified or shown.
H. Submit to the Architect drawings and directions for the installation of anchor bolts, high
strength bolts, direct tension indicator washers, torque control snap-off bolts, or items to be
installed by others. Verify proper installation of same.
I. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before
fabrication. Field dimensions shall be shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be noted as
having been verified in the field.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CODES
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications noted
below, including latest editions of applicable specifications, codes, and standards cited
therein, and latest applicable addenda and supplements. Copies of these items shall be
kept available in shop and field.
1. "The Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code", Eighth Edition.
2. "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC), 2005.
3. "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings",
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), 1993.
4. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", American Institute for
Steel Construction, (AISC) 2005 except as modified herein by deletion of the following
sentence: Paragraph 4.4 "Theses drawings shall be returned to the fabricator within
fourteen (14) calendar days."
5. "Structural Welding Code - Steel (AWS D1.1-96)", American Welding Society.
6. "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", Research
Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation (RCSC) 2004.
7. "Painting Manual, Vol. 1, Good Painting Practice" and "Painting Manual, Vol. 2,
Systems and Specifications", Steel Structures Painting Council.
8. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards referenced in this Section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 4
B. Any material or operation specified by reference to published specifications of
manufacturer or published standard shall comply with said specification or standard. In
case of conflict between referenced specifications, most stringent requirement shall
govern. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and Project Specifications,
Project Specifications shall govern unless otherwise indicated by Architect in writing.
1.06 LEED DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit documentation from the manufacturers highlighting LEED requirements for
materials and products of this section. Comply with requirements of Section 018110 –
Sustainable Design Requirements.
1.07 LEED CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide products manufactured from recycled content as
specified, to be measured and documented according to the LEED Green Building
Rating System.
1. Steel: 80% recycled content.
2. Provide a cut sheet for each product used in the building, highlighting
recycled content.
B. Paints and coatings: Must meet or exceed the VOC and chemical limits of Green Seal
Requirements.
1. Provide a cut sheet and a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
each paint or coating used in the building highlighting VOC limits and
chemical component limits.
C. Local Purchase: Submit the manufacturing location for the supplied products and
certify if less that 500 miles from the project.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mill Test Certification for Structural Steel: Submit to Architect, prior to delivery of structural
steel to job site, certified mill test reports of structural steel (including names and locations
of mills and shops, and analyses of chemical and physical properties), properly correlated
to structural steel to be used in this project. This submittal is for information and field
record.
B. Mill Test Certifications for Connection Material: Submit to Architect, prior to delivery of
structural steel to job site, certified mill test reports of bolts, nuts and washers (including
names and locations of mills and shops, and analyses of chemical and physical
properties), properly correlated to connections on this project. Submit manufacturer's
certifications for filler metal for welding. This submittal is for information and file record.
C. Painting Certification: Submit to Architect certification stating that requirements pertaining
to pre-paint cleaning and painting of steel have been performed in accordance with
Contract Documents. This submittal is for information and file record.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 5
D. Galvanizing Certification: Submit to Architect a copy of certification stating that
requirements pertaining to pre-galvanizing cleaning and galvanizing of steel have been
performed in accordance with Contract Documents. This submittal is for information and
file record.
E. Corrective Work: Submit to Architect drawings showing details of proposed corrective
work prior to performing corrective work.
F. Affidavit: Submit to Architect, on request by Architect, manufacturer's and/or fabricator's
and/or erector's affidavit stating that material or product provided complies with Contract
Documents.
G. Maintain records of shop and field welding procedures and records of welders employed,
date of qualification and identification symbol or mark. Maintain records for each impact
wrench used in shop and field, showing dates, sizes of bolts tested and the corresponding
torque values. Certified copies of the records shall be made available to Contractor,
Architect and Owner's testing laboratory.
1.09 SUBSTSITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for member sizes, type(s) of steel, connection details or any other
modifications proposed by Contractor will be considered by Architect only under following
conditions:
1. That request has been made and accepted prior to submission of Shop Drawings.
2. That there is a substantial cost advantage or time advantage to Owner; or that
proposed revision is necessary to obtain required materials or methods at proper
times to accomplish work in time scheduled.
3. That sufficient sketches, engineering calculations, and other data have been
submitted to facilitate checking by Architect, including documentation of cost
reductions or savings in time to complete work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide positive identification for each steel type and tensile strength classification, except
A36 steel, by a uniform marking system on each piece. All steel shall be newly rolled steel.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. High strength low alloy steel: ASTM A992 of grades and to provide yield strengths shown
on the drawings. Use A588 or A572 modified for plates over 1½ inch thick where Fy 50 ksi
is required.
B. Carbon steel: shapes, plate and bar shapes, ASTM A36. Tubing, ASTM A500 Grade B;
Steel pipe, ASTM A501 or A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A. or ASTM F1554 Grade 105.
D. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 with ASTM A563, Grade A Hex Style
Nuts and compatible washers. Bolts shall be cold-forged with rolled threads. Bolts with
Torque Control snap-off ends may be used.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 6
E. Direct Tension Indicating Compressible Washers: ASTM F959-85, steel alloy washer with
5 to 6 circular protrusions on one side and selected to match bolt strength.
F. Filler Metal for Welding: E70XX low hydrogen as per Table J2.3 of LRFD Specification or
as per Table J2.5 of the Allowable Stress Specification of AISC.
G. Headed Studs: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 - 1020, minimum yield point of 50,000 psi, and
minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi.
H. Structural Steel Protective Coatings:
1. Structural Steel Primer Paint: "Tnemec 10-1009 Grey VOC” for interior use and
“Tnemec 394 Omnithane” for exterior steel, or approved equal.
2. Structural Steel Finish Paints: See Paragraph 3.05C below.
3. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize steel so designated herein and on the drawings and
after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A-123. Hot-dip galvanized steel shall be
inspected for compliance with ASTM A-123 and shall be marked with a stamp that
indicates the name of the galvanizer, the ASTM Number, and the ounces of zinc per
square foot of surface. A notarized Certificate of Compliance with all of the above
shall be required from the galvanizer. Finish color if required will be specified by the
Architect.
I. Coating for Finished Bearing Surfaces (e.g., columns): "Magnafilm 1043" by Magnus
Chemical Co., Garwood, N.J.; "M-2658, Blue Lacquer" by U.S. Steel Corp., Pittsburgh, PA
or approved equivalent.
J. Bedding mortar for bearing and base plates:
1. Non-Shrink: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout, Type D, non-metallic, shall be one
of the following or an approved equivalent:
a. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
b. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn-Contech.
c. "Euco-NS"; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "Five Star Grout"; U.S. Grout Corp.
K. Expansion Bolts: 3/4" diameter stainless steel with ultimate capacities in 4000 psi concrete
of 16,000 lbs. in shear and 16,000 lbs. in tension; minimum embedment of 6"; shall be one
of the following or an approved equivalent:
1. "Parabolt", ISM Corp.
2. "Kwik Bolt II", Hilti Corp.
3. "Red Head Trubolt Wedge Anchor", ITW Ramset/Redhead.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine work prepared by other trades to receive work of this Section and report any
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 7
defects affecting installation to Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be
construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.
3.02 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Fabricate and erect members or components designated as AESS on the drawings in
accordance with Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
3.03 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Handle and stack materials carefully to prevent deformation or damage or accidental
movement. Use fabric slings to transport finished, prepainted members. Store structural
steel carefully on substantial timbers and blocking, so arranged that steel will be free from
earth and properly drained, preventing any spattering with dirt or accumulation of water in
or about steel. Take care to prevent damage to any shop painted surfaces and to prevent
accumulation of mud, dirt, or other foreign matter on steel. Any accumulation shall be
completely removed prior to erection.
B. All bolts shall be kept in dry storage until needed for installation. A325 bolts 1-1/8"and 1-
1/4" and A490 bolts 1" and over must first have Johnson's Stick Wax #140 applied to their
threads before being assembled in work. If bolts have been left out and have become
rusty before use, they shall be rejected and shall not be used until they have been cleaned
and waxed with Johnson's Stick Wax.
3.04 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate structural steel in
accordance with References in this Section.
B. Permissible tolerances for steel members shall conform to ASTM A6. The as-fabricated
tolerances shall conform to the cited AISC Specifications, AISC Code and the AWS Code,
except where closer tolerances and straightness of members are required for fitting of the
work in fabrication or erection.
C. Provision for attachment of other materials: Punch and drill steel for attachment of other
materials indicated on Drawings or noted in Specifications to be attached to steel.
D. The Contractor shall design and detail all connections required to resist the loads and
reactions shown on the drawings and as specified. Fabrication and erection details shall
supplement and be consistent with details shown on the drawings. Do not use one-sided or
other eccentric connections, except in isolated cases where approval of Architect is
obtained.
E. Welding:
1. Provide quality control and qualification of welders and welding procedures and
operations as specified under "Inspection and Testing" in this Section.
2. Shop Welding Process: Use shielded metal-arc, submerged arc, gas metal-arc, and
flux cored-arc, or other process approved by Architect.
3. Groove Welds: Provide complete penetration unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
4. Fillet Welds: Where weld symbol is not shown or welds are not dimensioned, provide
continuous fillet welds all around and on both sides as appropriate. Minimum
dimension shall be as shown in Table J2.5 of LRFD Specification or Table J2.4 of
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 8
Allowable Stress Specification of AISC.
5. Base metal shall be checked by Contractor to insure absence of laminations or other
defects. Welds shall be sound throughout and have no cracks.
6. Where structural joints are required to be welded, details of joints, technique of
welding employed, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in
correcting defective work shall conform to applicable requirements noted under
References in this Section.
7. Prepare joint welding procedures and program of welding sequence (for each
component and for welding jointing components to each other) and submit to
Architect for approval before any welding is done. After approval, welding procedures
and sequences shall be followed without deviation unless specific approval for change
is obtained from Architect. Architect may require requalifications of these welding
procedures by tests prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedures".
8. Each welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or
mark. Each welder shall mark or stamp his identification symbol at each weldment
completed, whether in shop or field.
F. Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch, except as
permitted below.
1. Gas cut edges which are not welded and will be free of substantial stresses, as
determined by the Architect, may be cut manually with an unguided torch provided
that specified AISC edge distances to holes are maintained.
2. Gas cut edges which will be subjected to substantial stress (over one-half the
allowable stress), as determined by the Architect, or which are to be welded may be
cut manually with an unguided torch to a line within 1/8 inch of the finished dimension,
with final removal of material completed by chipping or grinding to produce a surface
quality equal to that of the base metal edges.
G. Openings in Structural Steel.
1. Cutting of openings differing from or in addition to those shown on approved shop
drawings will not be permitted without written approval of Architect.
H. Corrective Work: Structural steel elements having fabrication errors and/or which do not
satisfy tolerance limits shall not be incorporated in finished work. Such elements may be
corrected if permitted by Architect and/or Testing Agency. Submit to Architect drawings
showing details of proposed corrective work. These drawings shall be approved by
Architect prior to performing corrective work. Corrective work shall be performed in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Corrective work and any retesting
which may be required shall be at the Contractor's expense.
1. Identification: Structural steel members shall have an assigned position and
identification mark or symbol, clearly indicated on each piece near one end. Marks
shall correspond to those given on Shop Drawings and erection drawings related to
specific members.
3.06 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Verify that products listed below meet regulations of jurisdiction for Volatile
Organic Compounds (VOC) emissions. Notify Architect if listed products do not comply
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 9
and submit information about equivalent products that do comply.
B. Unexposed Steel:
1. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, paint structural steel
work in accordance with Reference Specifications in this Section.
2. Steel to be painted:
a. Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
b. Unless specifically excluded or modified, apply one shop coat of structural
steel primer paint to steel. See Materials above for primer type.
c. Apply paint to surfaces requiring paint only to within two inches of any field
weld or high strength bolted friction-type connection. If for any reason surface
to be field welded or bolted is painted, remove such paint completely to within
limits before field welding or bolting.
3. Steel to be left unpainted:
a. Surfaces to receive metal deck and/or shear connectors fastened by welding.
b. Contact surfaces of high strength bolted connections.
c. Finished Bearing Surfaces and Surfaces to be welded in field: Protect
surfaces (e.g., bearing surfaces of columns and column base plates) against
corrosion by use of rust-inhibiting coating that can be easily removed prior to
erection or which has characteristics that make removal unnecessary prior to
erection.
d. Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
e. Member areas to be embedded in concrete or mortar.
4. Shop Coat Application:
a. After steel has been properly prepared as specified above, apply structural
steel primer paint to dry steel surfaces by brush, spray, or roller, assuring no
running or sagging in accordance with manufacturer's directions as approved
by Architect.
b. Apply 2.0 to 3.0 d.m.t. of shop primer.
c. Inspection of shop painting - as specified under "Inspection, Testing and
Quality Control" in this Section.
C. Exposed Steel (Prefinished)
1. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, paint structural steel
work in accordance with Reference specification in this Section.
2. Surface preparation:
a. Exposed steel within protected environment, such as exposed framing
members - SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 10
b. Exposed steel subject to corrosive or exterior atmosphere or solutions, such
as entry canopy framing, exterior equipment dunnage or supports, relieving
angles -- SSPC SP-10 Near-White Blast Cleaning or Galvanizing.
3. Primer Application - SPRAY ONLY
a. Exposed steel within protected environment: “Tnemec 10-1009 Grey VOC” or
an approved equal at 3.0 to 3.5 d.m.t.
b. Exposed steel subject to corrosive or exterior atmosphere or solutions:
i) Single package epoxy organic zinc rich material such as "Tnemec 394
Omnithane" or an approved equal at 3.0 to 3.5 d.m.t.
4. Finish Coat - SPRAY ONLY
a. Exposed steel within protected environment:
i) First Coat: "Tnemec 115 Series Uni-Bond" or approved equal at 4.0 to
6.0 d.m.t.
ii) Second Coat: See Related Work sections.
b. Exposed steel subject to corrosive or exterior atmosphere or solutions: Epoxy
coating such as "Tnemec 27 Typoxy" or an equal approved at 6 to 8 mils.
5. Surfaces inaccessible to blast cleaning after assembly shall be blast cleaned and
coated before assembly. Zinc-rich primers may be applied to friction type
connections in accordance with AISC Specifications.
6. Contractor shall include complete details and description of coating operations on
shop drawings for approval of the Architect.
7. A pre-production conference shall be arranged by the Contractor with the Architect,
Construction Manager, fabricator and representative of the paint manufacturer prior to
work.
D. Notification: Notify Testing Agency five (5) days prior to shipment of any structural steel so
paint inspection can be made. At these inspections dry mil thickness of paint film will be
checked. Steel containing mill scale that can easily be removed with blade of pocket knife
will be subject to recleaning and repainting at no expense to the Owner.
3.07 GALVANIZING
A. Safeguard against embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A-143.
B. To safeguard against warpage or distortion of steel members, in conformance with ASTM
A-384, steel fabricator shall submit shop drawings of non-standard fabrications, all tubular
fabrications, all fabrications involving any dimension which exceeds the size of the
galvanizer's kettle, and any fabrication involving materials of different thicknesses. These
drawings shall be submitted to the galvanizer prior to fabrication to determine the suitability
of the material for galvanizing.
3.08 HEADED STUD WELDING REQUIREMENTS
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 11
A. Testing Agency shall conduct test welding procedure for welding of headed studs.
B. Headed studs shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use
only personnel and equipment authorized by manufacturer.
C. Check headed studs for indications of insufficient and improper weld:
1. Less than 360 degree fillet for headed studs.
2. Burn-off (reduction in length after welding) less than 1/8 inch.
3. Cold appearance of weld.
D. If, after welding of any headed stud, visual inspection indicates any imperfections listed
above or any other questionable appearance, such shear connector shall be struck hard
with three-pound hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular to beam and toward
nearest end of beam. Headed studs meeting this test shall be considered acceptable and
left in this position. Headed studs failing under this test shall be replaced.
E. Personnel welding headed studs shall be qualified using elements of above procedure,
prior to any production welding of headed studs.
3.09 FIELD ERECTION
A. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, erect structural steel in
accordance with Reference Specifications in this Section.
B. Surveys: Employ an engineer or surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check
elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and
similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect and
Construction Manager. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or
until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with
Architect. Establish required leveling and plumbing references with respect to expected
service temperatures inside the building; compensate as required for difference between
service temperature and erection temperature.
C. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with
connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members
and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made.
Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection
proceeds. Loads imposed during construction shall be determined by an Engineer
employed and paid for by Contractor.
D. Field Connections: Beams shall have framed connections using 3/4 inch diameter (min.)
high strength bolts in accordance with requirements of AISC "Manual of Steel Construction"
and Contract Documents. Do not use one-sided or other eccentric connections, except in
isolated cases where approval of Architect is obtained. Snug all nuts before applying final
torque to any one.
1. High Strength Steel Bolts
a. Perform installation by using pneumatic powered impact wrenches with
sufficient capacity and adequate supply of compressed air. On large bolts (1-
1/8" and 1-1/4" A325 and 1" or over A490) wrenches used shall be equivalent
in capacity to a Chicago Pneumatic 6120. Air pressure shall be maintained at
100 psi at the wrench.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 12
b. Perform installation in accordance with turn-of-nut method outlines in RCSC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", with
modifications noted below.
Use hardened washer under bolt head or nut, whichever is turned in tightening,
unless oversize holes have been approved which require such washer under both
head and nut. Use not more than two washers.
Qualification of high strength bolting procedures and operations shall be as specified
under "Inspection, Testing and Quality Control", in this Section.
Refer to this bolting installation method as "Modified Turn-of-nut Tightening Method".
c. In lieu of "modified turn-of-nut" method, direct tension indicator washers or
snap-off TC bolts may be used at Contractor's option provided it can be
demonstrated by an accurate direct measurement procedure that bolt has
been properly tensioned; written approval by Architect is required.
i) If tension indicator washers are used, place protrusions against bolt
head and tighten the nut. Do not tighten at head. All plies must first be
brought into firm contact by partially compressing the direct tension
indicator bumps. Tightening shall commence from the most rigid part
of the connection to its free edges. The part not being turned must be
held by a spud wrench, as the bolt must not be allowed to spin.
ii) If snap-off bolts are used for friction type connections, snug tight all
bolts in connections before proceeding to apply final snap-off torque.
d. Make joints without use of erection bolts; high strength bolts required for joint
shall serve that purpose.
e. Correct poor matching of holes by drilling to next larger size and using larger
size bolt, if approved by Architect. Welding or enlarging with drift pins shall not
be permitted without Architect's approval.
f. If top flange plates are used at girder moment connections, bolts at top flange
plate shall be oriented nut-end down.
2. Field Welding: Execute in accordance with requirements under "SHOP
FABRICATION" in this Section, excepting those requirements which apply to shop
conditions only.
E. Errors in shop fabrication or deformations resulting from handling and/or transportation that
prevent proper assembly and fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to Architect for
approval of method of correction. Approved corrections shall be made at Contractor's
expense.
F. Furnish templates and anchor bolts and instructions for setting of anchor bolts and other
items to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete, in ample time so that this work will not be
delayed.
G. Setting Base and Bearing Plates: Clean bearing surfaces of concrete and masonry and the
bottom of the plates. Set plates level to correct elevations and support temporarily on steel
wedges, shims, leveling devices, or as shown on Drawings, until corresponding supported
member has been positioned, plumbed and anchor-bolted. Entire area under plates shall
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 13
then be packed solidly with non-shrink bedding grout. Leave protruding leveling devices in
place until after grout has attained required strength, and then cut off flush with top or
edges of base plates, or both, except as otherwise noted.
H. Align, level, and adjust members accurately prior to final fastening. Fasten compression
member splices only after abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact.
Splice members only where shown on the Drawings.
I. Top flanges of beams to receive shear connectors, shall be free of paint, water, dirt, rust,
or any other material detrimental to welding.
J. Openings in structural steel required in field:
1. Make no openings without the specific written approval of the Architect. All re-entrant
corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 1/2 inch at blocks, copes,
cuts and openings.
2. Openings in structural steel shall be cut and/or reinforced only by structural steel
Contractor, and only with specific prior written approval of the Architect.
3. Field Oxygen Cutting: Not to be performed without written consent of Architect. Once
approval is obtained, execute in accordance with requirements under
"FABRICATION" in this Section.
3.10 F IELD PAINTING
A. Field Coat application:
1. Use same type of paint as used for shop coat.
2. After erection, touch-up field welds and connections and other surfaces required to be
painted. Do not paint connections until after inspection and approval of Testing
Agency.
3. Do not paint when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. or when conditions
differ from paint manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by Architect.
4. Touch up damaged galvanizing with zinc-rich paint in accordance with ASTM A780.
3.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of structural steel fabrication and erection will be performed by an
independent Testing Agency, under a separate contract with the Owner. Materials and
workmanship shall be subjected to inspection and testing in mill, shop and/or field by
Testing Agency and shall be subjected to periodic observation by the Architect. Such
inspection and testing shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to provide his own
inspection, testing, and quality control as necessary to furnish materials and workmanship
in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Requirements of this Section are generally written for purpose of securing best
workmanship and end result. Certain deviations may be desirable under certain project
conditions, however, and may be allowed after examination by and upon written approval of
Architect. Any such approved deviation shall not be construed as waiver of requirements
of Specifications.
C. Contractor shall maintain his own inspection and quality control of shop and field work.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 14
Quality control and inspection of welding work shall consist of supervision by Contractor's
own welding inspector using non-destructive spot testing, at rate of at least one test per 50
linear feet of weld by each welder, except that full penetration welds shall be tested 100
percent by the ultrasonic method. Results of such tests shall be provided to Architect
and/or Testing Agency when requested.
D. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Testing Agency prior to start of any fabrication,
erection, or other phases of work so as to afford them reasonable opportunity to visit the
site. Such notification shall be made at least 36 hours in advance.
E. Facilitate inspection and testing by Testing Agency. Contractor shall, at his own expense,
furnish Testing Agency, upon request, with:
1. Complete sets of approved Shop Drawings and corrective work procedures at
fabricating shop(s) and in field.
2. Cutting lists, order lists, material bills, shipping lists, and mill reports.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipments of material to shops and
field.
4. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
5. Free and safe access and assistance for testing materials, and proper facilities for
inspection of work, in mill, shop and field.
F. Do not remove any marks or tags applied by Testing Agency identifying rejected work.
G. Any work found deficient shall be corrected or replaced in accordance with these
specifications. Deficient welds shall be cut out to sound material and rewelded. Deficient
assemblies shall be taken apart, corrected and reassembled, using new materials as
required. A490 bolts shall not be reused. A325 bolts may be retightened once only.
H. Structural steel work which has been rejected by Architect and/or Testing Agency in mill,
shop, or field, shall be corrected by Contractor without delay and at no expense to the
Owner. Additional tests shall be performed at Contractor's expense to confirm compliance
of corrected work.
I. The acceptance of steel work at the shop shall not prevent its final rejection at the job site,
or even after it has been erected, if it is found to be defective in any way.
J. Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the latest edition
AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
2. Provide certificates of welders to be employed in the work showing that they have
satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for the specific types of welds they will be
doing; where certification dates are older than 12 months before start of welding work,
certify that affected welder(s) have been continuously employed doing the type(s) of
welds since certification.
K. Sampling and testing for quality assurance of bolted and welded work by the Owner's
testing agency may include the following, as directed by the Architect.
1. Shop and Field Bolted Connections:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL STEEL
051200 - 15
a. Inspect in accordance with RCSC specifications. Calibrate wrenches
periodically.
b. A minimum of two bolts in each connection shall be tested. If tension
indicating washers are used, verify bolt tension in accordance with approved
procedure for this project (see paragraph 3.8.D.1) and verify position of
washers and method of tightening nut. If snap-off bolts are used, verify that all
knurled ends have been snapped off. Periodically verify snap-off torques.
2. Shop and Field Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel
assemblies and in accordance with AWS Codes, as follows:
a. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types
and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed
to correct deficiencies.
b. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
c. Perform random verification ultrasonic testing of shop full penetration welds.
Perform 100% ultrasonic testing, in accordance with ASTM E-164, on all field
full penetration welds.
3. Camber: Inspect fabricator's procedures and material to ensure specified camber is
achieved in accordance with referenced standards.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following. Requirements for materials, hot-dip
galvanizing, and shop-applied primers are included with each item as applicable.
1. Loose steel bearing and leveling plates, galvanized at exterior locations and in exterior
walls.
2. Galvanized steel lintels with shop-applied primer at exterior locations.
3. Steel lintels with shop-applied zinc-rich primer at interior locations.
4. Galvanized shelf angles with shop applied primer at exterior locations.
5. Shelf angles with zinc-rich shop-applied primer at interior locations.
6. Steel elevator machine beams.
7. Steel support angles for elevator door sills.
8. Cants in elevator hoistways made from sheet steel.
9. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports:
a. Steel framing and supports with shop applied primer for operable partitions.
b. Galvanized steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
c. Galvanized steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections; galvanized at exterior locations and in exterior walls.
e. Prefinished slotted steel channel support framing.
f. Steel framing and supports with shop-applied primer for countertops.
10. Ladders:
a. Steel ladders to all roof levels, galvanized at exterior locations.
b. Steel elevator pit ladders.
c. Alternating tread devices.
11. Awning framing.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for lintels, sleeves, anchors, inserts,
plates and similar items.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
2. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for lintels, miscellaneous metal and iron sleeves,
anchors, inserts and plates to be built into masonry walls.
3. Section 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING for structural steel items.
4. Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting work of this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design ladders and miscellaneous framing and supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3. Where fabrications are to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, include statement that primer
is compatible with fireproofing proposed for use.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of metal fabrications that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 at interior, Type 316L
at exterior.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 at interior, Type 316L at exterior.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with
MFMA-4.
H. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated
anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Anchors shall have an ICC-ES report
with approval for use in cracked concrete.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kwik-Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc., TruBolt Wedge Anchor by ITW
Red Head, Power-Stud+ by Powers Fasteners, or Strong Bolt by Simpson.
E. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than
3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts,
complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as
needed for fastening to inserts.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zinc-rich primer.
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1. Provide interior, field-applied primer with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
1. Provide interior, field-applied paint with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.5 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.6 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members
together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inchbolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-
place concrete.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 7
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to
receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop
Drawings.
2.9 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
2.10 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICES
A. Alternating Tread Devices: Fabricate alternating tread devices to comply with ICC's
International Building Code. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers
and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for
installation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Lapeyre Stair Inc.
b. Precision Ladders, LLC.
c. Vestil Manufacturing Company.
2. Fabricate from steel and assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 8
2.12 STEEL PRIMERS AND FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer:
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush Off Blast Cleaning."
3. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, embedded in concrete or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of
2 inches.
4. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
5. Comply with SSPC-PA 2, "Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with magnetic Gages.”
B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Urethane zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat Specified in Section
099000 - PAINTS AND COATINGS. Provide primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L (2.8 lb/gal.)
or less per OTC and HAPS COMPLIANT STANDARDS PER 2007 standards when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide Tnemec Series 394
Perimerprime at 3.0 mils DFT or approved equal by DuPont or Carboline.
1. Provide interior, field-applied primer with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.13 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and
other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by
the hot-dip process.
1. Basis-of-Design: Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware.
3. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.
4. Galvanizing bath shall contain special high grade zinc and other earthly materials.
5. Fill vent holes after galvanizing, if applicable, and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 9
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of isolation coating.
3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but,
if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in this Section.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified in this Section.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 10
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touch-Up and Repair for Galvanized Surfaces: For damaged and field-welded metal coated
surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas.
1. For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of
ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall have
95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied
galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A 123
or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite paint, or
aluminum paints is not acceptable.
2. For factory-applied finish coatings, field-touch-up shall be performed by factory approved
personnel. Touch-up shall be such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.
3. A touch-up repair kit or touchup instructions shall be provided to the Owner for each type
of factory-applied finish.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
061000 - 1
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary General Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete rough
carpentry work shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or both, including but not limited
to items noted below.
1. All sawn lumber joists, rafters, studs, plates, sills, blocking, nailers and curbs, etc.
2. All engineered lumber products, I-joists, LVL’s, Versa-Studs, etc.
3. All rough hardware, inserts, related metal components, etc. for the work of this
Section, except those items specifically specified to be provided by other trades.
4. Wood grounds, furring, strapping for all trades.
5. Plywood backing panels for electrical and telephone equipment.
6. Plywood wall, floor, and roof sheathing.
7. Fire retardant wood products.
8. Pressure-treated wood products.
9. Framing for and attachment of temporary dust-proof, fire-proof and/or weather-proof
partitions as called for elsewhere in these Specifications.
10. All temporary and/or permanent rough carpentry floors, ladders, ramps, stairs, stair
covers, jamb guards, barricades, protective fencing, temporary doors, etc., required
for all trades.
11. Building Felts for work of this Section, and protective papers for finished floor.
12. Wood stud reinforcement in partitions around door openings, window openings, fixed
lite openings.
13. Other usual items of normal rough carpentry work indicated on the Drawings or
necessary for the proper completion of the project, even though not specifically
mentioned herein.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications noted
below, including latest editions of applicable specifications, codes, and standards cited
therein, and latest applicable addenda and supplements. Copies of these items shall be kept
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
06100 - 2
available in shop and field.
1. "The Massachusetts State Building Code", eighth edition.
2. "National Design Specification for Wood Construction", National Forest Products
Association.
3. "Design Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses", TPI 85, Truss
Plate Institute.
4. Applicable Standards of American Plywood Association.
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01505, Temporary Facilities and Construction
B. Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. Section 051200, Structural Steel
D. Section 055000, Metal Fabrications
E. Section 062010, Exterior Finish Carpentry
F. Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection
G. Division 8, Openings
H. Section 092110, Gypsum Board Assemblies
I. Section 095100, Acoustic Ceilings
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Certification:
1. Preservative treated wood: Submit certification for water-borne preservative that
moisture content was reduced to 19% maximum, after treatment.
2. Fire-retardant treatment: Submit certification by treating plant that fire-retardant
treatment materials comply with governing ordinances and that treatment will not
bleed through finished surfaces.
B. Calculations: Submit complete design calculations showing internal layout, member forces
and stress control points for all roof trusses. Include ICBO performance standard data. The
design shall be stamped and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of
Massachusetts.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing critical dimensions and design loads.
1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
061000 - 3
B. Store materials a minimum of 6 inch above ground on framework of blocking and cover with
protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation.
C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building.
D. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and
erection.
E. Protect sheet materials from corners breaking and damaging surfaces, while unloading.
1.07 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A. All rough or finish lumber or other finish wood work specified any where in the Contract
Documents to be pressure-treated shall be pressure-treated with Wolman salts or
Pentachlorophenol with paintable type carrier. The minimum shall be 0.35 pounds of
preservative per cubic foot of wood. Standard pressure process shall conform to the
following Federal Specifications.
1. For Wolman Salts TT-W-571
2. For Pentachlorophenol TT-W-570a (1)
3. The treating plant shall furnish a notarized certificate that all permanent details of the
specifications have been met.
4. Preservative shall be tinted with a color which is easily noticeable.
5. NOTE: Do not use Pentachlorophenol preservative for wood members which will be
in contact with bituminous base materials.
B. Also, brush coat or dip surfaces which are cut after treatment with a heavy brush coat of one
of the above preservatives used in pressure treatment. All cut surfaces shall be so treated,
not just contact area.
1.08 GRADING AND SEASONING
A. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark.
1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name,
grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules
under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of
manufacture.
a. S-Dry: Maximum 19% moisture content.
b. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content.
c. Dense.
2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
a. Type, grade, class, and Identification Index.
b. Inspection and testing agency mark.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
06100 - 4
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber
1. Dimensions, unless specifically called out otherwise:
a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal.
b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by the
American Lumber Standards Committee and the rules-writing agencies.
2. Moisture Content: 19% maximum as specified in the "National Specification for
Wood Construction" (1982).
3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S), unless specified otherwise.
4. Lumber, 2 in. to 4 in. thick, 2 in. to 14 in. wide.
a. Light framing: any commercial softwood species.
i) Supports and nailers for H.M. and finished carpentry: construction
grade.
ii) Plates, blocking, bracing, and nailers: standard grade.
iii) Bracing, blocking, bulk headings, and general utility purposes:
utility grade.
iv) Furring and grounds: minimum grade, standard.
@ Fibre Cement: #2 P.T.
b. Joists, rafters, studs, plates, sills: shall have an allowable extreme fiber
stress in bending for single member use of 875 psi and a Modulus of
Elasticity of 1,400,000 psi.
c. Heavy beams and headers: multiple members face nailed together with
staggered splices.
i) Allowable stress and modulus of elasticity same as item b above.
ii) "LVL" Laminated Veneer Lumber products (E=2,000,000 psi) by
Boise Cascade Corporation or equivalent.
B. I-type plywood or lumber joists. Joists shall consist of flanges composed of laminated veneer
lumber made from kiln dried veneer laminated by a continuous hot press process under
constantly monitored conditions and a web consisting of APA structure I CD exterior grade
plywood with veneers installed with grain running in the vertical direction of the joist and butt
jointed to form a continuous web member. The web shall be pressure formed and fit into a
groove in the center of the wide face of the flange members so as to form a pressurized glue
joint at that junction. Joist shall have Modulus of Elasticity (E) of 2,100,000 psi and a strength
in bending of 2800 psi.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
061000 - 5
C. Plywood
1 Plywood for floor and roof sheathing shall be 3/4" exterior groove plywood, APA Structural
I and II.
2 Plywood for exterior wall sheathing and shear walls shall be 1/2" exterior plywood, APA
Structural I and II.
3 Plywood for interior work such as electrical and telephone panel boards shall be 3/4" thick
and fire-retardant treated.
D. Fire-Retardant Treated Products: all lumber and plywood where shown on drawings shall be
pressure treated with fire retardant chemicals and have a flame spread rating of not higher than
equivalent of 25, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested for 30
minutes duration under the Standard Test. Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building
Materials UL 723 NFPA 255, ASTM E84. Fire retardant treatments shall be in the accord
with the following:
1. Lumber: AWPA-C20.
2. Plywood: AWPA-C27
E. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is
specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of SPA Standards C2
(Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB standards listed below. Mark each treated item with
AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15%. Treat
indicated items and the following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping and similar members in
connection with roofing, sheathing, flashing, vapor barriers and
waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, strapping and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for
treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or defective pieces.
F. Rough Hardware:
1. Provide and install all rough hardware and metal fastenings as shown on the
Drawings, specified herein or required for proper installation of carpentry and
millwork.
2. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts and similar items shall be of sizes and types to rigidly
secure members in place.
a. Minimum fastener size and spacing shall comply with Table 2103-2
(Fastener Schedule for Structure Members) and with Appendix M,
(Recommended Nailing Schedule), in the International Building Code.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
06100 - 6
b. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in
area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-
dip zinc coating (ASTM A153).
c. Bolts and screws shall penetrate structural substrate at least 1/2 of a wood
substrate thickness, at least 3" into concrete and masonry substrates and as
shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Rough Carpentry shall generally conform to the following:
1. Provide all necessary wood framing, blocking, nailing strips, furring strips, nailing
inserts, grounds, centers for masonry, rough door bucks, fascia, and usual items of
similar nature as required to frame out and to secure and properly install the work of
all trades indicated. Nailing shall be in accordance with Schedules listed in Products,
Rough Hardware.
B. Wood blocking, nailers, grounds, furring and strapping:
1. Install all built-in wood blocking, screeds and furring required for all interior finish
work.
2. Blocking nailers on masonry or concrete shall be bolted with not less than 5/16" bolts
not over 2'-0" o.c. except as otherwise shown. Where finish fits blocking closely,
counterbore holes for heads of bolts so that no metal projects beyond the face of the
blocking.
3. Provide solid wood blocking, 2 x 6 minimum in frame walls and 3/4" plywood in
furred walls, for attachment of toilet partitions grab bars, wall hooks, toilet tissue
dispensers, mirrors and all other wall-mounted accessories.
4. Provide solid wood blocking, 2 x 6 minimum in frame walls, and 3/4" plywood in
furred walls, for secure attachment of wall cabinets, base cabinets, and wall-
supported counter tops, and all other wall-mounted fixtures or accessories.
C. Wood stud reinforcement
1. Provide wood stud reinforcement around all door openings, fixed lite openings,
window openings, etc. as shown on the drawings. Securely fasten wood stud
reinforcement to adjacent metal studs.
3.02 PLYWOOD WORK
A. Install plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports; end joints occurring over the
supports.
B. Allow minimum space 1/16 in. between end joints and 1/8 inch at edge joints for expansion
and contraction of panels.
C. Stagger panel end joints.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES AND JOISTS
061000 - 7
D. Support edge joints by use of solid blocking where required on the drawings.
E. Nail 3 in. o.c. along panel edges, (nail to each member of double sills or plates or other
multiple members) and 12" o.c. at intermediate supports.
F. Use 10d ring-shank, or spiral-thread nails.
3.03 FLOOR AND ROOF I-JOISTS
A. Fabrication: I-joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by the building
code and under the supervision of a third party inspection agency.
B. Erection and Installation:
1. I-joists shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather. They
shall be handled with care so they are not damaged.
2. I-joists shall be erected and installed in accordance with the plans, the approved
shop drawings and written installation suggestions. Temporary construction loads
beyond limits shown shall not be permitted. Erection bracing in addition to specified
bridging shall be provided as detailed to keep the joists straight and plumb as
required and to assure adequate lateral support for the individual trusses and entire
system until the sheathing material has been applied. The contractor will give
notification prior to enclosing the trusses to provide opportunity for inspection of the
installation.
3.04 JOISTS, BEAMS, RAFTERS, STUDS, PLATES, SILLS
A. Install in accordance with plans and details.
B. Do not support joists or rafters with toe nails or end grain nails. Use approved joist and beam
hangers.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 1
SECTION 064020
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior frames and jambs.
3. Wood casework.
4. Plastic-laminate casework.
5. Plastic-laminate countertops.
6. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
7. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Section 125720 - KITCHEN CASEWORK for premanufactured casework.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified, including casework hardware and
accessories, and finishing materials and processes.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
a. Provide schedule of blocking required to support the Work of this Section.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 2
2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, electrical
components and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for
each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-
finished woodwork.
a. Submit step-type range sample sets of factory finished plywood and factory
finished solid wood in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish, including
edge banding detail and any veneer or solid edge glue joints.
b. Submit one leaf for every 1000 gross square foot of veneer required.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches
long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2
of exposed surface finished.
4. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1
sample applied to core material, and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production of interior architectural woodwork with blueprint-matched wood veneers and
components.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards," latest edition, including errata, for grades of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined
by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 3
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1. The HVAC systems as specified elsewhere may not provide for humidity controls. The
expected ranges of relative humidity are expected to be as high as 55% to a low of
uncontrolled during the heating system. Comply with AWS Section 2, Care and Storage.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards" for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Wood Veneers and Lumber: Provide AWI Custom Grade materials and workmanship, unless
otherwise indicated. For species not listed in the AWS comply with the following:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 4
1. Provide AWI Lumber Grade 1 and AWI Grade A Veneer, book-matched, minimum 6 inch
face veneer width. Kiln dry to 6-8 percent moisture content. Components shall be free of
defects and sapwood. Match adjacent pieces for color and grain pattern.
2. Single-Source Requirement for Wood Veneers and Solids: Intent is to provide wood
which matches as closely as possible throughout the project. Provide wood veneers and
solids from the same distributor, and from the same flitches and solids sources to the
greatest extent possible.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As selected by the Architect.
1. Architect’s control samples for transparent finish, veneer grain and figure characteristics
are available for review at the office of the Architect.
2. Veneer Matching Requirements:
a. Matching Between Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match and architectural end
match.
b. Matching Within Individual Panel Faces: Balance and Center Match.
c. Method of Matching Panels: Blueprint-matched panels and components.
D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products
with recycled content.
2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay (MDO).
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
a. Resin impregnated paper backs are not permitted. Backs shall be of compatible
hardwood species and cut. Contact adhesive is not permitted.
F. High-Pressure Decorative Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. Lamin-Art, Inc.
e. Nevamar Company; a division of Panolam Industries.
f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 5
G. Solid-Surfacing Material, Quartz-Agglomerate Type: Solid sheets consisting of quartz
aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS-1 and
ISSFA-2.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. CaesarStone.
b. Cosentino USA; Silestone.
c. Dal-Tile; ONE Quartz Surfaces.
d. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; Zodiaq.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.
Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
1. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide five ply construction with
crossbands to prevent any ammonia fuming from the core to the face veneers.
2.3 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide casework hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
casework, except for items specified in Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 6
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602,100 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 or
BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; side mounted and extending under bottom edge of
drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades:
1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1.
2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2.
4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1.
5. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: Molded-plastic grommets and matching
plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2. Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized: BHMA 628.
K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 7
2. Contact Adhesives: Not permitted on the Project without Architect’s prior approval.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Casework and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove.
1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 8
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.8 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
D. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs Where Indicated: Products fabricated from fire-retardant
particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
2.9 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.10 WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As specified hereinabove.
1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match.
5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide casework veneers in each room or other space
from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced
set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
D. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed
surfaces, stained to match.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for
exposed surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 9
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
2.11 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CASEWORK
A. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.
2.12 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 10
F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop
substrate.
2.13 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-
surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated on the Finish Schedule.
C. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material
manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
D. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
2.14 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for factory
finishing.
1. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for opaque-finished
items specified to be field finished. Refer to Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for
material and application requirements.
D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. Grade: Same as item to be finished.
2. AWS Finish System 5: Water white conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-
grain wood before staining and finishing.
5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
6. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 11
7. Effect: Partially filled pore.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
H. Casework: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install casework with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 12
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of casework with transparent finish.
I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base casework or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints
smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches and to walls
with adhesive.
4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 -
JOINT SEALANTS.
J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071100 - 1
SECTION 071100
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing applied to the following surfaces:
a. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete and masonry foundation walls.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 071610 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING for crystalline waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Euclid Chemical Company.
2. Henry Company.
3. Karnak Corporation.
4. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
5. Sonneborn, Degussa Building Products.
6. Tremco Inc.
2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing, Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227,
Type III, Class 1.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
C. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing
manufacturer.
D. Protection Course: Multi-ply semi-rigid core composed of a mineral-fortified asphalt core formed
between two outside layers of asphalt impregnated reinforced mats, manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D 6506, 1/8 inch or 1/4 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071100 - 3
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve coverages
indicated.
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.
3. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a
minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
4. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
5. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an
8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
B. On Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft.
for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft.. for second coat.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply
with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection
course. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not
otherwise indicated.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071610 - 1
SECTION 071610
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Crystalline waterproofing for the following applications.
a. Elevator pits.
b. Sump pits.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete substrate and finishing
concrete walls and slabs to receive waterproofing.
2. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for elastomeric and preformed sealants in concrete
and masonry walls and floors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, and material descriptions and installation
instructions for crystalline waterproofing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit crystalline waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other
projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only after
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071610 - 2
concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been
repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.
C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at 40
deg F or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free of water.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of crystalline waterproofing that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty period.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Crystalline Waterproofing:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Hydro Cap.
b. Conproco Corp.; Super Seal.
c. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Hey'Di K-11.
d. ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; Tegraproof.
e. Vandex International Ltd.; Vandex Super.
f. Xypex Chemical Corporation; Xypex.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: A prepackaged, proprietary blend of Portland cement, specially
treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied, penetrates by
capillary action into concrete or masonry and reacts chemically with free lime in the presence of
water to develop crystalline growth within concrete or masonry capillaries to produce an
impervious, dense, waterproof concrete or masonry with properties meeting or exceeding the
following criteria:
1. Permeability: 0 for water at 33 feet when tested according to CE CRD-C 48.
2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3000 psi when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Patching Compound: Cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling and patching tie
holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; with properties meeting or exceeding the
following criteria:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071610 - 3
1. Compressive Strength: 7600 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2. Flexural Strength: 710 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.093 percent at 28 days and plus 0.073 percent at 90 days when
tested according to ASTM C 596.
C. Plugging Compound: Cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties; resistant to water
and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead and
horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); with properties meeting or exceeding the
following criteria:
1. Permeability: 30 feet when tested according to CE CRD-C 48.
2. Compressive Strength: 6000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: 1000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 300 psi at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
D. Water: Potable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, with Applicator present, where waterproofing is
to be applied.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or structural defects that would affect system
performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from damage from cleaning, preparation, and application of crystalline
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensure
adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory concrete or masonry according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to remove
efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release
agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to concrete or masonry surfaces.
1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
a. Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10 percent muriatic (hydrochloric)
acid solution according to ASTM D 4260.
b. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading or
abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071610 - 4
2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application.
1. Dampen surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing.
2. Apply waterproofing to negative-side surfaces.
3. Number of Coats: Two coats.
4. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth
C. Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after application has set, followed by two
days of air drying as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:
1. Onto columns integral with treated walls.
2. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe trenches, pits, and
sumps.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and water
accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than three days by
procedures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect waterproofing from
temperatures below 36 deg F.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application and to
provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Perimeter foundation wall insulation.
3. Exterior wall insulation.
4. Building felt.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for underslab vapor barrier.
2. Section 075400 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING for roofing insulation.
3. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for interior vapor retarder and
acoustic insulation in gypsum board assemblies.
4. Division 22 - PLUMBING for plumbing insulation.
5. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for mechanical
insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer of spray-applied products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has been trained by and is acceptable to spray
polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store in a dry and secure location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic and spray polyurethane foam insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver materials to Project site before
installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOUNDATION WALL AND UNDER SLAB INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. DiversiFoam Products.
2. Dow Chemical Company.
3. Owens Corning.
B. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square
edged of type, density, and compressive strength indicated below:
1. For vertical applications, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 25-psi minimum
compressive strength.
2. For horizontal applications, pedestrian traffic, Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and
60-psi minimum compressive strength.
3. For horizontal applications, vehicular traffic, Type V, 3-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 100-
psi minimum compressive strength.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.2 SPRAYED-FOAM INSULATION AT GAPS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Canam Building Envelope Specialists; Zerodraft Z1-24 Foam Sealant.
2. Dow Chemical; GreatStuff Pro.
3. Foam-Tech Div. of H.C. Fennell; SuperGreen Foam.
4. Todol Products; Pur Fill 1G.
B. Zero VOC Product: Pro-Foam II by OSI, Henkel Corporation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
C. Sprayed-Foam Insulation: Water-cure closed cell polyurethane containing no urea-
formaldehyde and no CFCs.
1. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
2.3 RIGID INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. DiversiFoam Products.
2. Dow Chemical Company.
3. Owens Corning.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, and ASTM D 1621 compressive strength
of 15 pounds per square inch minimum.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.4 CAVITY WALL INSULATION, MINERAL-WOOL BOARD
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roxul Inc.
2. Isolatek International.
3. Owens Corning; Thermafiber.
B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IVB; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F minimum.
2. Fiber Color: Natural, except darkened where visible through joints in cladding.
3. NFPA 285 Assembly Fire Propagation Characteristics Testing Results: Passing.
C. Attachment to Substrate, Masonry Veneers: Manufacturer’s recommended mechanical
attachment clip or disk.
2.5 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roxul Inc.
2. Isolatek International.
3. Owens Corning; Thermafiber.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.6 BUILDING FELT
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.
B. Felt-Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire nails; with
1-inch-minimum diameter, low-profile capped heads or disc caps.
C. Tape: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install spray polyurethane foam insulation in miscellaneous voids and
cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set rigid insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches below exterior grade
line.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 5
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay rigid insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24
inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties (if applicable) and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in
both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated. Fill gaps with compatible
insulating material.
B. Install mineral wool board cavity insulation per manufacturer’s instructions. Fit insulation with
edges butted tightly in both directions. Do not compress insulation. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and cladding material.
1. Masonry Veneers: Secure with clips installed over masonry anchors. Provide at least 6
clips per mineral wool board.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
3.7 BUILDING FELT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with felt manufacturer's written installation instructions and CSSB
recommendations applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent
requirements apply.
B. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with felt nailed to framing immediately after
sheathing is installed.
1. Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap. Wrap around inside and
outside corners 4 inches.
2. Cut back felt 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or
control-joint locations.
C. Tape joints.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 6
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 1
SECTION 072419
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Water-drainage, polymer-based exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) including, but
not limited to, the following components:
a. Water-resistive, water-vapor-impermeable air barrier applied over sheathing.
b. Flexible flashing.
c. Adhesive; vertically “channeled” to permit water drainage.
d. Rigid insulation.
e. Reinforcing mesh.
f. Finish coat.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061600 - SHEATHING for sheathing substrate.
2. Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM for metal flashing.
3. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint
sealants.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are
protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other
causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation
board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base
coat; and a textured protective finish coat.
B. Water-Drainage EIFS: EIFS with a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to
drain to the exterior.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 2
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other
in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies
behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-
insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including
substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that
comply with the following:
1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick
gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or
loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968,
Method A.
2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss
after 60 cycles per ASTM E2485.
3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ASTM E2568 showing no cracking, checking,
crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that
might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed
under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153, ASTM G 154 or ASTM G 155.
4. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate,
cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated
according to ASTM D 3274.
5. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ASTM E2568.
6. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested
per ASTM E2134.
7. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick
gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the
base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes
at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure,
whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per
International Building Code Chapter 14.
8. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-
inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing,
erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D
2247.
9. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS when constructed,
conditioned, and tested per ASTM E2486; and meeting or exceeding the following:
a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb.
b. Medium Impact Resistance: 50 to 89 inch-lb.
c. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb.
d. Ultra-High Impact Resistance: More than 150 inch-lb.
10. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall be tested per
ASTM E 330.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of
penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and
anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of joint sealants and exposed accessories involving color
selection.
D. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture
indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including custom
trim, each profile, an aesthetic reveal, a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected.
1. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS comply with
requirements.
G. Material or Product Certificates: For each insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each insulation, reinforcing mesh, and coating.
I. Field quality-control reports.
J. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified
to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. Installer shall possess a current
manufacturer’s certificate of education and be experienced and competent in installation of
plaster-like materials.
1. Fabricator/Erector Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to
fabricate and erect manufacturer's prefabricated panel system using skilled and trained
workers.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Insulation Board must be produced and labeled under a third party
quality program as required by applicable building codes.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 4
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system
components per test method indicated below by IBC Chapter 26. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable code.
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119.
2. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed
multistory wall assembly of which EIFS is a part, complies with NFPA 285 for test method
and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall panel
assemblies containing foam-plastic insulation.
3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and
finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or
less, per ASTM E 84.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set
quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly
identifying products.
B. Store materials in a cool location, inside and under cover and at a temperature above 40°F
(4°C) and below 110°F (43°C); keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other
causes, and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.
2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating
materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24
hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives
or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be
applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
requirements.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dryvit Systems Inc.
2. Parex USA, Inc.
3. Senergy, BASF Wall Systems
4. Sto Corp.
5. Greenmaker Industries.
B. Basis of Design: Sto Corp; StoTherm Essence E100G NExT.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing
meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one
another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use
as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and
performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209.
1. Sheathing Joint Compound and Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for
sealing joints between and penetrations through sheathing.
C. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates
from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and
adhesive used for application of insulation.
D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt
and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or
product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
E. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use;
compatible with substrate.
F. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS
manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance
and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:
1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less
than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
3. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
4. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness
indicated, but not more than allowed in the EIFS manufacturer’s current ICC Evaluation
Service Report.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 6
5. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
G. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per ASTM E 2098; complying with ASTM D
578 and the following:
1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.5 oz./sq. yd.
2. Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 12.0 oz./sq. yd.
3. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd.
4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.2 oz./sq. yd.
5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 9.0 oz./sq. yd.
H. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following:
1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert
fillers to which only water is added at Project site.
I. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof
formulation and complying with the following:
1. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and
manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.
2. Project Locations: Provide for base coat over foundations, parapets, splash areas trim
and other projecting features.
J. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing
base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
K. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced
mildew resistance, complying with the following:
1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound
stone particles, and fillers.
2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
L. Water: Potable.
M. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply
with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and
complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM
C 1063.
1. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with
perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth
required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to
coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall
construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage.
2. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of
movement.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 7
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Refer to Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint
sealants.
2.4 MIXING
A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.
Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS
manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by
EIFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.
B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coats on other work.
B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates.
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain
optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation.
Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by
EIFS manufacturer.
3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to
each type of substrate indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 8
3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing or concrete substrates to protect substrates from
degradation and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to
substrate.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to
provide water-/weather-resistive barrier and air barrier.
1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of
sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed
water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime
substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions and details.
3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as
indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of
insulation.
1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads, and at
floor line expansion joints of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated.
2. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
3. Other Trim: Use where indicated on Drawings.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397,
EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following:
1. Apply adhesive to in vertical “channels” in accordance with EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions to permit drainage to base flashing. Apply adhesive channels in thickness as
recommended by the manufacturer for application.
2. Press and slide insulation into place to provide uniform contact with all adhesive channels
while maintaining space between channels to permit drainage.
3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS
manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding
insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.
4. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented
horizontally.
5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter
casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.
6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond
pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches
high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and
not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 9
a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from
horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.
7. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
8. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps
greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation
without using adhesive or other material.
9. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges
and shapes complying with details indicated.
10. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more
than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to
sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Prevent
airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.Cut aesthetic
reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce
grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do
not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch.
11. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
12. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges
and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough
to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and
reinforcing mesh.
13. After installing insulation and before applying reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges
with strip reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not
less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
14. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:
a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat,
reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.
b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between
EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish
coat over face leg of accessories.
15. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not
allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating lamina.
B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as
follows:
1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.
2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other
EIFS.
3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction.
4. Where wall height or building shape changes.
5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
3.7 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: Apply over sloped surfaces and where indicated on Drawings
to protect substrates from degradation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 10
B. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness
recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
C. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation
with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated
at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap
reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-
coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.
D. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and
second layer of intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or
otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.
E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches
beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of
openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and
outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of
corners.
1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.
2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.
F. Foam Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.
G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and
thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat
has cured.
3.8 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
1. Texture: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on approved Shop Drawings.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Refer to Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint
sealants.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency for Field Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2273 “Standard Test Method for Determining
the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies.”
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
072419 - 11
C. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified
requirements.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials
from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS
coatings.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 1
SECTION 072450
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Direct-applied finish system (DAFS) applied over exterior cementitious sheathing.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061600 - SHEATHING; Exterior cementitious sheathing.
2. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing joints in DAFS with elastomeric joint
sealants.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. DAFS Performance: Comply with the following:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within DAFS components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other
in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into DAFS and
assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of
thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of DAFS and assemblies behind it,
including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
B. Class PB DAFS: Provide DAFS having physical properties and structural performance that
comply with the following:
1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick DAFS mounted on 1/2-inch-
thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking,
or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per
ASTM D 968, Method A.
2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss
after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.
3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 2
characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000
hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154.
4. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting,
blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components
when viewed under 5 times magnification after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.
5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate,
cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated
according to ASTM D 3274.
6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219.
7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the DAFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when
tested per EIMA 101.03.
8. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick DAFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick
gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the
base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes
at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure,
whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per
EIMA 101.02.
9. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- thick DAFS mounted on
1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking,
crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per
ASTM D 2247.
10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219.
11. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick DAFS when constructed,
conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following:
a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb.
12. Structural Performance Testing: DAFS assembly and components shall comply with
ICC-ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and component of DAFS indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For DAFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details
of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and
anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of exposed accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture
indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including a typical
control joint filled with sealant of color selected.
1. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator/erector, and testing agency.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 3
F. Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and joint sealant, from
manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for reinforcing mesh, and coating.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Maintenance Data: For DAFS to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by DAFS manufacturer as qualified
to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain DAFS from single source from single DAFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by DAFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly
identifying products.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic,
and other causes.
1. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24
hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply DAFS
adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures
permit DAFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of DAFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, including sheathing, weather-resistant sheathing paper, flashing, trim, joint
sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age,
corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and
barrier coating of DAFS.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2. Parex, Inc.; a brand of ParexLahabra, Inc.
3. Pleko LLC.
4. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
5. SonoWall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
6. Sto Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, sheathing, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-
coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with
substrates and approved for use by DAFS manufacturer for Project.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: DAFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use
as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and
performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212.
C. Primer/Sealer: DAFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal
substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type
indicated.
D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt
and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; DAFS manufacturer's standard or
product recommended in writing by DAFS manufacturer.
E. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other DAFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per ASTM E 2098 or EIMA 105.01; complying
with ASTM D 578 and the following:
1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
2. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
3. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.
F. Base-Coat Materials: DAFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the
following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or
natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use
with portland cement.
2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and
manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.
3. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert
fillers to which only water is added at Project site.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 5
4. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers
that is ready to use without adding other materials.
G. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: DAFS manufacturer's standard waterproof
formulation complying with one of the following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or
natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use
with portland cement.
2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and
manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.
H. Primer: DAFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing
base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
I. Finish-Coat Materials: DAFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced
mildew resistance, complying with the following:
1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound
stone particles, and fillers.
2. Colors: As selected by Designer from manufacturer's full range.
J. Water: Potable.
K. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply
with DAFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from zinc.
1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type, of depth required to suit thickness of
coating, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.
2. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of
movement.
2.3 MIXING
A. General: Comply with DAFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.
Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by DAFS
manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by
DAFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of DAFS.
B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where DAFS will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 6
1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of DAFS.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coats on other work.
B. Protect DAFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind DAFS and deterioration of substrates.
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with DAFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain
optimum bond between substrate and coating.
3.3 DAFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and DAFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
DAFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation
and where required by DAFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of coating to substrate.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to
provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.
1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of
sheathing unless otherwise indicated by DAFS manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: Apply over sloped surfaces and where indicated on Drawings
to protect substrates from degradation.
D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed
water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by DAFS
manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime
substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with DAFS manufacturer's written
instructions and details.
3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of DAFS, at expansion joints, at vent sills, and
elsewhere as indicated, according to DAFS manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
2. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
3.6 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of sheathing in minimum thickness recommended in
writing by DAFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEM (DAFS)
072450 - 7
B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or
otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and DAFS manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh,
applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are
not visible.
C. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches
beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of
openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and
outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of
corners.
1. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.
3.7 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to DAFS manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by DAFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
1. Texture: As selected by Designer from manufacturer's full range.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests
and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. DAFS Tests and Inspections: Comply with testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Contracting Officer and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
C. Remove and replace DAFS where test results indicate that DAFS do not comply with specified
requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials
from vent, window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive DAFS
coatings.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 1
SECTION 072700
AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Self-adhering, vapor-retarding, modified bituminous sheet air barrier (water-resistive
barrier).
2. Transition strips to adjacent and penetrating materials.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES, AND JOISTS for sheathing
substrate for air and vapor barrier system.
2. Section 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING for roof air and vapor
barrier.
3. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for joint sealant requirements.
4. Section 092110 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for vapor retarder at interior of
exterior walls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an
opaque wall or soffit, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air
movement through the wall.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier
and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation
or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate
movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes,
penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage
exceeding specified limits.
B. Air Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.03 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq.
ft., ASTM E 2357.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 2
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Mockup Testing: Air barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements indicated,
as evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. The Owner may engage a qualified testing agency.
2. Quantitative Air Leakage Testing: Testing of the mockup for air leakage will be conducted
not to exceed the test pressure differential, positive and negative, indicated in
"Performance Requirements" Article for air barrier assembly air leakage when tested
according to ASTM E 783.
3. Notify Architect and the Owner a minimum of seven days in advance of the dates and
times when mockup testing will take place.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and
cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins
with adjoining construction.
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
2. Include details of mockups.
C. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory
materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier; signed
by product manufacturer.
D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for air barriers.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly
150 sq. ft., incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and
sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and
sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane.
1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air
barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed.
2. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall
intersection.
3. If the Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct
mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 3
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Include installers of other construction connecting to air barrier, such as roofing,
waterproofing, architectural precast concrete, masonry, joint sealants, windows, glazed
curtain walls, and door frames.
2. Review air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and
pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special
details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation,
testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location
and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental
conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet
substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
A. Self-Adhering, Vapor-Retarding Modified Bituminous Sheet: Rubberized asphalt laminated to
cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for
application with primer that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705.
b. GCP Applied Technologies (formerly W.R. Grace); Perm-A-Barrier.
c. Henry Co.; Blueskin SA.
d. Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall SA.
e. Tremco, Inc.; ExoAir 110.
f. W.R. Meadows; SealTight Air-Shield.
2. Thickness: 40 mils minimum.
3. Physical and Performance Properties:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 4
a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-
lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
c. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
d. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F, ASTM D 1970.
e. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836.
f. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perms, ASTM E 96, Water Method.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with air barrier. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer
of air barrier material.
C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous 40-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils
of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil-thick, crosslaminated polyethylene film with release
liner backing.
D. Butyl Strip at Termination with EPDM or TPO Roofing Membrane: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-
mil-thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl
adhesive, with release liner backing.
E. Modified Bituminous Strip To Cover Cracks and Joints and Terminate Air Barrier to Compatible
Roofing Membrane: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil-thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of
36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- polyethylene film with release liner backing.
F. Termination Mastic: Cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.
G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
H. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive
adhesive tape.
I. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300
stainless-steel fasteners.
J. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant to Fill Gaps at Penetrations and Openings: one- or two-
component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft. density; flame
spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate
cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
K. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip to Seal Air Barrier Terminations with Glazing Systems:
Vapor-retarding, 40-mil-thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of
rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick polyethylene or aluminum film with release liner
backing.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 5
L. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion to Seal Air Barrier Terminations with Glazing Systems:
Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit
opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone
sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. Elbex Corp: Transition Silicone Sheeting.
c. GE Silicone; UltraSpan US1100.
d. Tremco; approved equal.
M. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-
modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
contaminants.
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air
barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 6
1. Install modified bituminous strips and center over treated construction and contraction
joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.
G. Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-
deck joints with overlapping modified bituminous strips.
H. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and
edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
I. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another
with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous
support for air barrier.
3.3 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION
A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's
written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air
barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install butyl or modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a
minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window
systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door
framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with
termination mastic.
E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
these temperature ranges.
F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is
achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter
frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install
flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over
exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 7
3. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls,
frame, and membrane.
G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
termination mastic.
I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch-wide, modified
bituminous strip.
J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by
metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and
flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired
areas in strip direction.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE
A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions
and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-
adhering, modified bituminous air barrier sheets produced for low-temperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is
higher than 60 deg F.
B. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
1. Install modified bituminous strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch
fillets of termination mastic on horizontal inside corners.
C. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with
termination mastic and according to ASTM D 6135.
D. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
E. Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally or vertically over area to
receive air barrier sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain a uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum
lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure airtight
installation.
1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any exposed
sheet edges.
2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
3. Apply termination mastic on any horizontal, field-cut or non-factory edges.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 8
F. Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging substrate
cracks, construction, and contraction joints.
G. Seal top of non-metallic through-wall flashings to air barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch- wide
strip.
H. Seal exposed edges of metallic sheets at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not
concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
I. Install air barrier sheets and auxiliary materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to
maintain a continuous air barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install compatible strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3
inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.
J. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window
systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door
framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings using accessory materials.
K. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply membrane specified below so that a minimum of 3 inches of
coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to
perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install
flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over
exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.
3. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls,
frame, and membrane.
L. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
M. At end or each working day, seal top edge of membrane to substrate with termination mastic.
N. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
these temperature ranges.
O. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths
and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all
directions.
P. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner’s testing agency.
Q. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air barrier components.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 9
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with
requirements. Inspections may include the following:
1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with
no gaps or holes.
2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided.
3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and
mortar droppings.
4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
maintained.
5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
6. Surfaces have been primed.
7. Laps in sheet materials have complied with the minimum requirements and have been
shingled in the correct direction (or mastic applied on exposed edges), with no
fishmouths.
8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
9. Air barrier has been firmly adhered to substrate.
10. Compatible materials have been used.
11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided.
12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with
requirements for cleanliness, preparation, and priming of surfaces, structural support,
integrity, and continuity of seal.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Tests:
1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage
according to ASTM E 1186.
2. Quantitative Air Leakage Testing: Testing not to exceed the test pressure differential,
positive and negative, indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article for air barrier
assembly air leakage according to ASTM E 783.
D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required
by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these conditions for more
than 30 days.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM,
flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
AIR BARRIERS
072700 - 10
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from adjacent construction that would be exposed in the
completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of
affected construction.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
074610 - 1
SECTION 074610
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Fiber-cement siding and trim.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
2. Section 061600 - SHEATHING for wall sheathing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.
1. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.
2. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of siding and trim, from manufacturer.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and trim and related accessories to include in
maintenance manuals.
G. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim including related accessories, in a quantity equal to
2 percent of amount installed.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
074610 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and trim, including
related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for siding and trim including accessories.
a. Size: 48 inches long by 60 inches high.
b. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding and
trim that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming, and fading.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
3. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM
A. General: Siding made from fiber-cement board that complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A,
Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a
flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
074610 - 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Fiber Cement Corporation
b. Nichiha Fiber Cement.
2. Basis-of-Design: AFC Cladding Fiber Cement Panels by American Fiber Cement
a. 5/16" Cembonit through-color panels.
b. 5/16" Metro surface color and texture panels.
c. 5/16" Minerit HD natural color panels.
3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.
B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by
a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps,
and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.
1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Clear anodized.
C. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated
on the Drawings.
1. Colors for Decorative Accessories: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range of industry colors.
D. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 076200 - SHEET METAL
FLASHING AND TRIM at window and door heads and where indicated.
E. Fasteners:
1. For fastening fiber-cement, use stainless-steel fasteners.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
074610 - 4
2. For fastening to wood, use siding nails or ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to
penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.
3. Staples, small brads, and wire nails will not be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and trim and related accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding and trim manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
B. Install fiber-cement siding and trim and related accessories.
1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 2 inches from ends.
2. Align fasteners to engage framing member behind sheathing.
3. Install siding for average 5 in. exposure, adjusting as required to align courses with
window and door openings.
C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS and to produce a
weathertight installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 1
SECTION 075400
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Mechanically-fastened membrane-roofing system.
2. Cover board.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Substrate Board (thermal barrier).
5. Vapor retarder.
6. Membrane clad metal flashing.
7. Flashing for equipment mounted on roofing and roofing penetrations.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
3. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealants.
4. Section 110140 – TIE-BACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS for roof anchors.
5. Division 22 - PLUMBING for roof drains.
6. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for roof curbs for
HVAC equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 2
on testing and field experience. PVC membrane shall be separated by specified cover board
from extruded polystyrene insulation.
C. Roofing System Design: Roofing system shall be designed to withstand loads indicated on
Drawings, but not less than loads required by Code.
D. Flashings: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component
materials that comply with requirements and recommendations in FMG 1-49 Loss Prevention
Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings; FMG 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck
Roof Components; NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (Fourth Edition) for Construction
Details and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Fifth Edition) for Construction Details,
as applicable.
E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) not less than
78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a
qualified testing agency.
F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Transitions to air barrier membrane.
3. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
4. Insulation fastening patterns.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
F. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
C. Roofing Inspector: Owner may engage a full-time roofing inspector during installation of the
deck, insulation assembly, membrane, flashing and other appurtenances, and when a survey of
the roof and roof drains is conducted. Cooperate with Owner’s roofing inspector and allow
unlimited access to roofing during construction.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Meet with the Owner, Architect, Owner’s insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative,
deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including
installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 4
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Roofing Contractor’s Warranty: The roofing subcontractor shall supply Owner with a minimum
two-year workmanship warranty for each roof. In the event any work related to the roofing,
flashing, or metalwork is found to be defective within two years of substantial completion, the
roofing contractor shall remove and replace such at no additional cost to the Owner. The
roofing subcontractor’s warranty obligation shall run directly to the Owner, and a copy the
roofing signed warranty shall be sent to the roofing system’s manufacturer.
1. The duration of the Roofing Contractor’s two-year warranty shall run concurrent with the
roofing system’s manufacturer’s 20-year warranty.
B. Roofing Systems Manufacturer’s Warranty: The roofing manufacturer shall guarantee roof areas
to be in a watertight condition, for a period of 20 years, from the date of final acceptance of the
roofing system. The warranty shall be a 20-year no dollar limit (NDL), non-prorated total system
labor and material warranty, for wind speed as required by Code or as indicated on the
Drawings. Total system warranty shall include all roofing materials, related components and
accessories including, but not limited to the substrate board, vapor retarder, insulation board,
cover board, roofing membrane, membrane flashings, fasteners, adhesives, metal roof copings,
metal roof edges and termination metals and roof drain assemblies. The manufacturer shall
repair defects in materials and workmanship as promptly after observation as weather and site
conditions permit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type III, fabric reinforced.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc.
c. Flex Roofing Systems
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. Johns Manville.
f. Sika Sarnafil Inc.
2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: White.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 5
B. Basis-of-Design: Sure-Flex PVC by Carlisle.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,
thickness, and color as sheet membrane.
C. PVC-Clad Metal Roof Flashing: Heat-weldable flashing designed to serve as gravel stop and
fascia at perimeter of thermoplastic membrane roofing.
1. Composition: 25 gauge steel with G90 galvanized coating, with 20 mil (1 mm) PVC
membrane laminated to the outside face. Provide unsupported width of membrane along
edge to be welded to roofing membrane.
2. Profile: As shown on Drawings.
3. Product: Sarnafil, Inc., Sarnaclad, or equal product approved by manufacturer of roofing
system.
4. Exposed Face Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination
reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 1970, minimum 40-mil- thick film laminated to
layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive; maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm; cold-applied,
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 6
with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by
vapor-retarder manufacturer.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both
major surfaces.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
c. Firestone Building Products Company.
d. GAF Materials Corp.
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f. Johns Manville International Inc.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Cover Board: Provide one of the following, as required by roofing manufacturer to comply with
performance requirements and provide specified warranty.
1. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2
or 5/8 inch thick, factory primed.
D. Substrate Board (Thermal Barrier): ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum
substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, factory primed.
2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
vinyl walkway pads or rolls approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing
system manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners,
perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' written instructions
and as required to comply with performance requirements.
3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self-
adhering sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side, and end lapping each
sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by rolling.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at side laps, end laps, terminations, obstructions, and
penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.
C. Tie vapor retarder to wall air barrier. Coordinate construction sequence to ensure air barrier
continuity at roof to wall interfaces.
3.5 INSULATION AND COVERBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 8
B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
Install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous
layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
2. For insulation applied in multiple layers, loose-lay first layer and mechanically fasten top
layer.
H. Mechanically Fastened Cover Boards: Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in
continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation
below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and
mechanically fasten to roof deck.
1. Mechanically fasten cover boards, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3.6 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082.
B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
E. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 9
F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and
sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
G. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with
clamping ring.
3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required
rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement (except for heat-welded application), and firmly roll
side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap
sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.
3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof
tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: Engage a qualified manufacturer’s technical
representative to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Engage roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect and the Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
075400 - 10
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane-roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and the Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane-roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane-roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 1
SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Sheet metal flashing and trim for the following applications:
a. Through-wall flashing.
b. Formed wall flashing and trim.
c. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim.
d. Formed copings and cornices.
e. Formed vertical projecting trim.
f. Horizontal projecting trim.
g. Window panning.
2. Downspouts.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for through-wall flashings in masonry.
2. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Section 072700 - AIR BARRIERS for perimeter terminations at air and vapor barrier
assembly.
4. Section 074610 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING.
5. Section 075400 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING for installing sheet metal
flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane.
6. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim
sealants.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting Wind Zone forces
required by Code according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 2
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,
including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
4. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and
contraction.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and
other attachments.
2. Trim: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: Full-size Sample.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1. Meet with the Owner, Architect and Owner’s insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of
roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 3
4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005. Thickness as specified in this
Section. Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than
H14, finished as follows:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color
coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 1.5 mil; complying with AAMA 2605.
1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, with No. 2D dull, cold-rolled finish.
Thickness as specified in this Section.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 4
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
G. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 5
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for
application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 10-foot-long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal,
and solder or weld watertight.
1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch-wide concealed backup plate.
2. Fabricate copings from the following material:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
B. Formed Vertical Projecting Trim: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
C. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick.
D. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 6
H. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick.
2.6 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ATAS International, Inc.
2. Berger Building Products, Inc.
3. Cheney Flashing Company.
4. Hickman Company, W. P.
5. Merchant & Evans, Inc.
6. Metal-Era, Inc.
7. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
8. MM Systems Corporation.
B. Downspouts: Plain round complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following
exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.
2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing, Typical: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but
not exceeding 12 foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated.
Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of
wall openings. Form with 2-inch-high end dams. Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
B. Through-Wall Flashing, In Masonry: Through-wall flashing in masonry is specified in Section
042000 – UNIT MASONRY.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Coat side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with isolation coating where
flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip-sheet or install a
course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 8
1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners.
2. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F set joint
members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show
in finished Work.
1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.
2. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Pretin edges of uncoated sheets to be soldered using solder
recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux
residue from metal after soldering.
3. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow
solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from
exposed surfaces.
J. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements[,
sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions,] and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base
flashing. Install stainless steel draw band and tighten.
C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with elastomeric sealant.
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant.
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for
flashing on vent piping.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 9
3.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls;
locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing In Masonry: Installation of through-wall flashing in masonry is specified
in Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Roof hatches and safety rails.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and
stairs for access to roof hatches, and from roof to roof.
2. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood cants and wood nailers
3. Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM for shop- and field-fabricated
metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
metal trim and accessories.
4. Section 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS for elevator vents.
5. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for roof-mounted
ventilators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of
roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent
damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF HATCHES
A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall
curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with
welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight
perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company.
b. Bilco Company (The).
c. Nystrom, Inc.
d. O'Keeffe's Inc.
e. Wasco Products, Inc.
2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal
loads.
3. Type and Size: Lid type and size as indicated on Drawings.
4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.
5. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard board insulation, R-18 min.
6. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer
metal lid.
7. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
metal curb.
8. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
9. Thermal Break: Fabricate with thermal break between interior and exterior surfaces.
10. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge
system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
11. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on
full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
B. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube,
1-5/8 inches in diameter.
3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.
4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches in
diameter.
5. Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end.
6. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing
system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.
7. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated
end fittings.
8. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
handrail and railing members.
9. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.
10. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.
11. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
B. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed
fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to
exterior exposed fasteners.
D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat
design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory
installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking,
and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with isolation coating where
in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly
on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a
slip-sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E. Roof Hatch Installation:
1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean
and lubricate joints and hardware.
2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb.
3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
3.3 TOUCH UP
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance
with Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 1
SECTION 078100
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Exposed thin-film mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING for surface conditions required for
structural steel receiving sprayed fire-resistive materials.
2. Section 078410 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING for firestopping and firesafing
insulation.
3. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
4. Section 092120 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES for fire-resistance-
rated assemblies.
5. Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for topcoats applied to intumescent
coatings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:
1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.
2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. UL design numbers shall be based
on steel designed using AISC LRFD design method (LSD, limit state design).
3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of
each structural component and assembly.
4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of colored, exposed sprayed fire-resistive material, two
Samples, each 4 inches square, of each color, texture, and material formulation to be applied.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 2
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.
F. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.
G. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing.
H. Reports: Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by sprayed
fire-resistive material manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to
sell its sprayed fire-resistive materials to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor
does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent approved testing agency, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented in accordance with local State Building Code.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain sprayed fire-resistive materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Testing: By an approved testing and inspecting agency
engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for
performance and test methods.
1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the
applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Testing is performed on specimens of sprayed fire-resistive materials that comply with
laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed
fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping,
troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and
inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports
a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test
for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for
coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design,
but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not
found primers or coatings to be incompatible with sprayed fire-resistive material.
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 3
jurisdiction. Identify bags containing sprayed fire-resistive materials with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for sprayed fire-resistive material serving as direct-applied
protection tested per ASTM E 119.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, limits in accordance with applicable local
Building Code.
G. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method
specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
H. Code-Required Inspections: Notify Architect and Owner’s independent testing agency a
minimum of 72 hours prior to commencing work of this Section, for Code-required special
inspections.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to sprayed fire-resistive materials
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
C. Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, and kept dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply sprayed fire-resistive material when ambient or
substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat is provided to
maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after
product application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fire-resistive
material. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive
material dries thoroughly. Comply with manufacturer’s recommended ventilation procedures.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive materials with other related work
specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 4
1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.
2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity,
temperature, and ventilation.
3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely
to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if
any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply
fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed;
prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.
5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping
has been completed.
6. Except for thin-film intumescent fireproofing, do not begin applying fire-resistive material
until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in
place.
7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-
resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has
been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or
delaminating of sprayed fire-resistive materials from substrates.
2. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and the
Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those
investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably
foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 5
2.2 EXPOSED THIN-FILM MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS (MIFRC)
A. Interior General Use Conditions: Coatings limited to interior service where protection of the
coating during application and curing, the construction and the occupancy of the building are as
recommended by the product manufacturer for the specific application.
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.; Firefilm III and Colorcoat.
2. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad TF.
3. Carboline Company, a subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.;
Nullifire S607 or Nullifire S606 and Topseal.
4. Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products; Cafco SprayFilm WB-3 and WB-5 Basecoat
and Topseal.
5. NuChem Inc.; Thermo-Sorb with topcoat.
6. Sherwin Williams; Firetex FX5120 with topcoat.
B. Exterior Use Conditions: Coatings for exterior use or interior use where exterior environmental
conditions exist.
1. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad 800.
2. Carboline Co, a subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.;
Nullifire S607 and Topseal.
3. Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 4 with Topseal.
4. International Paint, LLC; Interchar 212 with topcoat.
5. NuChem Inc.; Thermo-Lag 3000 with topcoat.
C. Thin-Film Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistive Coating: Factory-mixed formulation.
1. Approved by manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction for interior or exterior use.
2. Multicomponent system consisting of primer, intumescent base coat and topcoat.
3. Systems shall comply with applicable VOC requirements and meet OTC emission
regulations.
D. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
1. If additional painted topcoats are required, comply with manufacturer’s requirements and
coordinate with Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING.
2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with sprayed fire-resistive
materials and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product,
provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory," for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response
characteristics of sprayed fire-resistive material per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 6
C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of sprayed
fire-resistive material.
D. Reinforcing Fabric for Use with Intumescent Coatings: Glass-fiber fabric of type, weight, and
form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated, approved by manufacturer of
thin-film mastic and intumescent coating fire-resistive material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is
in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or
other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with
substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C. Verify that roof construction, installation of rooftop HVAC equipment, and other related work are
completed.
D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to
verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during
application.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
C. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect
uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of sprayed fire-resistive material. Remove
minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after
application.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 7
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive
material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings indicated.
B. Apply sprayed fire-resistive material that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1
"Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application,
accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and
procedures affecting test results.
C. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and
fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and
intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support and
reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing
by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required
for secure attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.
D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to
achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material
manufacturer for material and application indicated.
E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
Unless otherwise recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer, install
body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer.
G. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from sprayed fire-
resistive material over which they are applied.
3.4 APPLICATION, EXPOSED MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
A. Apply exposed thin-film mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings in thicknesses and
densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each
condition.
B. Apply mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coating as follows:
1. Install reinforcing fabric as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating and where
indicated.
2. Finish: Even, spray-textured finish produced by lightly rolling flat surfaces of fire-
protected members before fire-resistive material dries, to smooth out surface irregularities
and to seal in surface fibers.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 8
1. Cooperate with testing agency, provide access.
B. Remove and replace applications of sprayed fire-resistive material that do not pass tests and
inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
C. Apply additional sprayed fire-resistive material, per manufacturer's written instructions, where
test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as
specified above.
D. Field inspect intumescent materials in accordance with AWCI Tech Manual 12B.
3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project,
remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed
surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Protect sprayed fire-resistive material, according to advice of product manufacturer and
Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection
will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive material with other construction to minimize need
to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect sprayed
fire-resistive material and patch any damaged or removed areas.
D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 1
SECTION 078410
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated
constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1. Section 078440 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS for fire-resistive joint sealers.
2. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for standard joint sealers.
3. Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION for fire-protection piping penetrations.
4. Division 22 - PLUMBING for piping penetrations.
5. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for duct and piping
penetrations.
6. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for cable and conduit penetrations.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Jobsite conditions of each through-penetration firestop system must meet all details of the UL-
Classified System selected. If jobsite conditions do not match any UL-classified systems,
contact firestop manufacturer for alternative systems or Engineer Judgment Drawings.
B. Coordinate work with other trades to assure that penetration-opening sizes are appropriate for
penetrant locations.
C. Verify that the schedule is current at the time of construction, and that each referenced system
is suitable for the intended application.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop
systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating
of construction penetrated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 2
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls and
fire partitions.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg
(2.49 Pa).
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening
at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping:
1. Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and
450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
2. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
a. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems demonstrating no evidence
of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
b. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of
supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
F. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 3
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.
C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration
firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Either a firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors" or a firm experienced in installing through-penetration
firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction of a minimum of five projects with a record of successful
performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to
install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up
inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed in the UL “Fire
Resistance Directory.”
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 4
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
2. BioFireshield; RectorSeal Corporation.
3. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI).
4. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
A. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 5
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-
penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Materials: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing primary materials and fill
materials which are part of the tested assemblies indicated in the approved Through-
Penetration Firestop System Schedule submittal. Fill materials are those referred to in
directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
D. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed
to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only
components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated
2.3 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove
loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078410 - 6
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes
and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-
penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 1
SECTION 078440
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the Work of this
Section, including but not limited to fire-resistive joint systems for the following:
1. Floor-to-floor joints.
2. Floor-to-wall joints.
3. Head-of-wall joints.
4. Wall-to-wall joints.
5. Perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter
edge of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1. Section 078410 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING for firestopping.
2. Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION for fire-protection piping penetrations.
3. Division 22 - PLUMBING for piping penetrations.
4. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for duct and piping
penetrations.
5. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for cable and conduit penetrations.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of
fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are
installed.
B. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in
which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 2
resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction
and penetrating items.
C. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and
design designation of qualified testing agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration
for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications
marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as
an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration fire stop systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction of a minimum of five projects with a record of successful performance.
Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Evidence of FMG 4991 approval is
acceptable for installer qualifications, but not mandatory.
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction
condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1
"Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 3
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system
designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or
packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer,
date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,
if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint systems that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
2. BioFireshield; RectorSeal Corporation.
3. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI).
4. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC
content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 4
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. General: Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to
resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-
resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building
movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
C. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.
D. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating
determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg
(2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor
assembly.
E. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per
UL 2079.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7
Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
F. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 5
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible
without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining
surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive
joint systems and prepare inspection reports.
B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take
place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not
proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines
completed work shows compliance with requirements.
1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems
comply with or deviate from requirements.
C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078440 - 6
D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-
resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-
resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Joint sealants and fillers.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Section 088000 - GLAZING for glazing sealants.
3. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
4. Section 093000 – TILING for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile surfaces.
5. Section 095100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with
joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates.
a. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
b. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when
in contact with joint sealant backing and glazing and gasket materials.
2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
4. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide colors as selected by the Architect from
manufacturer’s full range of standard and custom colors; maximum of five colors, three standard
colors and two custom colors.
2.2 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Elastomeric sealants shall be nonstaining to porous
substrates. Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Tremco Inc.; Spectrem 1.
d. Pecora Corporation; 864.
e. Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 290
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
2. Extent of Use: Joints in exterior vertical and soffit surfaces.
E. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE.
c. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
d. Tremco Inc.; THC-901.
e. Bondaflex Technologies; PUR 2 SL
2. Extent of Use: Joints in exterior horizontal surfaces.
F. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
c. Tremco Inc.; Tremsil 200.
d. Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 100 WF
e. Pecora 898NST.
2. Extent of Use: Sanitary joints at toilet rooms.
G. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
c. Sonneborn, BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
d. Tremco Inc.; Tremflex 834.
e. May National Bondaflex Sil-A 700
2. Extent of Use: Non-moving joints at interior locations.
2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or
other type, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated,
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include concrete, masonry and unglazed
surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following metal, glass, porcelain enamel and
glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 8
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 1
SECTION 079200
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Caulk and seal joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Include, but do not
limit to:
1. Sealing of joints in exterior concrete, masonry and steel construction.
2. All other exterior sealing called for, or reasonably inferred from the Drawings, and as
required to provide weathertight conditions in exterior assemblies.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING; Sealing of expansion
joints.
2. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
M 220 Preformed Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals for Concrete
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 719 Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants under
Cyclic Movement
C 790 Use of Latex Sealing Compounds
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 2
C 834 Latex Sealing Compounds
C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C 962 Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C 1330 Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied
Sealants
D 412 Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
D 624 Test Method for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance
D 2628 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for
Concrete Pavements
3. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
TT-S-00227 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For
Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures)
TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details,
installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each sealant material
used. Provide certifications that sealant materials comply with specified requirements.
B. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples manufacturer's color charts showing complete
range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used.
C. Verification Samples: Submit actual representative samples of each sealant material that is
to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations
expected. Provide sealant samples having minimum size of 4 in. long.
D. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for all specified tests.
1.6 COMPATIBILITY
A. Provide sealant and sealant joint backing materials suitable for the use intended and
compatible with the materials with which they will be in contact. Compatibility of sealant
and accessories shall be verified by the sealant manufacturer.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 3
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source: For each sealant material type required for the work of this section, provide
primary materials which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or
accessory materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials.
B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years experience in type of work required by this
Section and which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials.
C. Mock-Ups: Prior to commencing the primary work of this Section, provide mock-ups at
locations acceptable to Architect. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities. Protect
and maintain accepted mock-ups throughout the remainder of the work of this section to
serve as criteria for acceptance of the work.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Perform work of this Section only when existing or forecasted weather conditions
are within the limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used.
B. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is
complete.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials under this Section shall be delivered to, and stored at, the job site in unbroken
factory sealed containers with labels intact.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Furnish joint sealant manufacturer's written single-source performance warranty that joint
sealant work will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for five
years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before installation check each sealant for compatibility with adjacent materials and surfaces
and with indicated exposures. Select sealers which are recommended by manufacturer for
each application indicated. Where exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic, provide
sealants which are non-tracking and are strong enough to withstand the traffic without
damage.
B. Provide colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and special (Tremco
Fastpak) colors. Where specifically requested, provide custom color matches.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 4
2.2 SELF-LEVELING POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Provide two or more part, self-leveling, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying
with ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 Use T, Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E Type 1
Class A, having Shore A hardness of not less than 30 when tested according to ASTM C
920, cured modulus of elasticity at 100% elongation of not more than 150 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 412, and tear resistance of not less than 50 lbs./inch when tested
according to ASTM D 624.
B. Where joint surfaces contain bituminous materials, provide modified sealants which are
compatible with bituminous materials encountered.
C. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements:
1. Pecora Urexpan NR-200.
2. Mameco Vulkem 245 or 255.
3. Sika 2C, SL.
4. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL-1.
5. Tremco THC 901.
D. Extent: Provide self-leveling polyurethane sealant for paving joints not indicated to be
sealed with another type of sealant.
2.3 NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Provide multi-part, non-sag, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM
C 920 Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E Class A, having Shore A
hardness of 20 to 30, cured modulus of elasticity at 100% elongation of not more than 75
psi, and tear resistance of not less than 50 lbs./inch when tested according to ASTM D 624.
B. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements:
1. Mameco International Vulkem 227
2. Harry S. Peterson Co. Iso-Flex 2000
3. Sika Sikaflex 2c NS.
4. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2.
5. Tremco Dymeric
C. Where joint requires 50% movement capabilities, provide Tremco Dymeric Plus, or equal
product approved by Architect.
D. Extent: Provide non-sag polyurethane sealant for all other joints not indicated to be sealed
with another type of sealant.
2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALER
A. Preformed Resilient Joint Sealer: Preformed Resilient Joint Sealer for use at expansion
joints in exterior concrete walls where specifically called for on Drawings shall be
preformed, resilient, extruded polychlorophrene elastomeric joint sealer, conforming to
ASTM D 2628 and AASHTO M 220 of indicated configuration(s), in continuous lengths, set
in manufacturer's recommended primer-lubricating-adhesive consisting of moisture curing
polyurethane and aromatic hydrocarbon solvent mixture (73% solid by weight) concrete
gray color, equal to one of the following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 5
1. D.S. Brown Co.
2. Watson-Bowman & Acme Corp.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Provide primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be adhered
to.
B. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer to prevent three-sided adhesion.
C. Backer Rod: Provide closed cell compressible rod of durable nonabsorptive material
recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant, conforming to ASTM
C 1330. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers:
1. Backer Rod Manufacturing and Supply Co.
2. Dow Chemical Co.
3. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
4. Williams Products, Inc.
5. Woodmont Products, Inc.
D. Joint backing for general use at joints in horizontal surfaces shall consist of two rows of
butyl rubber or neoprene foam rod in contact with one another, and each compressed to
approximately 2/3 original width when in place.
E. Provide miscellaneous materials of type that will not bleed through sealant, discolor
surface, or produce other deleterious effects. Select size to provide compression to
approximately 2/3 original width when in place. Provide backing material profile concave to
the rear of the sealant, and equipped with a bond-breaking film.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The Installer shall examine substrates and conditions under which this work is to be
performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion
of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning
of sealant work means Installer's acceptance of joint surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where more
restrictive requirements are specified in this Section.
B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealants, primers, tapes and fillers.
Remove substances which could interfere with bond. Etch or roughen joint surfaces to
improve bond. Surfaces which have been given protective coatings and those that contain
oil or grease shall be thoroughly cleaned with xylol or MEK solvent, with due precautions
taken to minimize hazards.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, use of sealants shall conform to the following: ASTM C 790 for
latex sealants and ASTM C 962 for other sealants.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 6
D. Tape or mask adjoining surfaces to prevent spillage and migration problems.
E. Prime surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Schedule work as long as possible after completion of concrete work and finished brick
paving work.
B. Provide backer rods for liquid sealants except where specifically recommended against by
sealant manufacturers.
C. Prevent three sided adhesion by use of bond breaker tapes or backer rods.
D. Force sealant into joints to provide uniform, dense, continuous ribbons free from gaps and
air pockets. Completely wet both joint surfaces equally on opposite sides.
E. Except in hot weather, make sealant surface slightly concave. Install sealants so that
compressed sealants do not protrude from joints. Dry tool sealants to form a smooth dense
surface. At horizontal joints form a slight cove to prevent trapping water.
F. Provide sealants to depths indicated, or if not indicated, follow manufacturer's
recommendations. For joints up to 3/8 in. width, depth of joint shall not exceed 1/2 in.; for
joints larger than 1/2 in. width, depth of joint shall not exceed 5/8 in.
3.4 EXTENT OF SEALANT WORK
A. General Extent: Seal joints indicated, and all exterior joints, seams, and intersections
between dissimilar materials. Provide elastomeric sealant installation with backer rod in all
exterior expansion joints.
B. Exterior Sealing: Without limitation, the work of this Section includes sealing the following:
1. Masonry to masonry joints.
2. Metal to metal joints.
3. Concrete to concrete joints.
4. Joints and cracks in paving and walks.
5. Joint fillers for all joints.
3.5 CURING
A. Cure sealants in strict compliance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations to
obtain highest quality surface and maximum adhesion. Make every effort to minimize
accelerated aging effects and increase in modulus of elasticity.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove smears from adjacent surfaces immediately, as the work progresses. Exercise
particular care to prevent smearing or staining of surrounding surfaces which will be
exposed in the finished work, and repair any damage done to same as result of this work
without additional cost to Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
079201 - 7
B. Remove and replace work that is damaged or deteriorated.
C. Clean adjacent surfaces using materials and methods recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned.
D. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time
of final acceptance. Remove protection immediately before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR SCHEDULE
080010 - 1
SECTION 080010
DOOR SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
01 General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install doors and door frames as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Refer to
Specifications Sections in Division 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS for material and installation
requirements.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 081100 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.
2. Section 081400 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS.
3. Section 083310 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS.
4. Section 084110 – ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT.
3. Section 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE.
4. Section 088000 – GLAZING.
1.04 HARDWARE SETS
A. Refer to Section 087100, Finish Hardware for description of each hardware set listed for doors.
1.05 DOOR SCHEDULE
A. The DOOR SCHEDULE follows this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016 OPENING # HDW SETFIRE RATINGDOOR TYPE DOOR MATERIAL FINISH WIDTH THICKNESS HEIGHTFRAME TYPE FRAME MATERIALLEVEL 0LEVEL 0001445min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0"7' - 6"SFSFLEVEL 0002445min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0"7' - 6"SFSFLEVEL 0003445min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0"7' - 6"SFSFLEVEL 0003.1121HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 0004445min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0"7' - 6"SFSFLEVEL 0004.1121HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 0005845 min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 0005.11220 min1HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 0005.2121HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 03-1E645min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1LEVEL 11-1990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 11-1E645min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 12-1E645min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 110091HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 11011920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1101.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1101B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1101B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1101D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11021920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1102.1211WOODPTD 1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1102B201WOODPTD 2' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1102D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11031920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1103.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1103B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1103B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1103D205WOODPTD 2' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"6AWOODLEVEL 11041920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1104.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1104B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1104B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODPage 1 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 1104D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11051920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1105.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1105B205WOODPTD 2' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"6AWOODLEVEL 1105B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1105D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11061920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1106.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1106B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1106B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1106D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11071920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1107.1211WOODPTD 1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1107B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1107D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11081920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1108.1211WOODPTD 1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1108B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1108D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11091920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1109.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1109B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1109B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1109D205WOODCLR/STAINED2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 11101920 min1WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1110.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 1110B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1110B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 1110D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 1111345 min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0"7' - 0"SFALUMINUMLEVEL 1111.1345 min7ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED3' - 0 1/16"7' - 0"SFALUMINUMLEVEL 1111A171WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1111B169WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"3' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1111C171WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1111E1145min2HOLLOW METALPTD 6' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 11121320 min1WOODCLR/STAINED2' - 6"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 111318ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED5' - 10"7' - 0"SFALUMINUM - SFPage 2 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 1113.128ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED5' - 10"7' - 0"SFALUMINUM - SFLEVEL 11141320 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1115142HOLLOW METALPTD 5' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 11161320min1WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1116A1190min2HOLLOW METALPTD 6' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 1117181WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 111818ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED5' - 10"7' - 0"SFALUMINUM - SFLEVEL 1118.128ALUMINUM & GLASSPREFINISHED5' - 10"7' - 0"SFALUMINUM - SFLEVEL 1119181WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1120112HOLLOW METALPTD 6' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 1121181WOODPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 1122153HOLLOW METALPTD 5' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 11231190min3HOLLOW METALPTD 4' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 1123.11190min1HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 11241145min3HOLLOW METALPTD 5' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"2AMETALLEVEL 1124.1111HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2LEVEL 21-2990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22-2990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 23-2990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22011920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2201.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2201B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2201B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2201D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22021920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2202.1211WOODPTD 1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2202B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2202D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22031920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2203.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2203B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2203B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2203D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22041920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2204.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2204B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/APage 3 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 2204B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2204D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22051920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2205.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2205B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2205B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2205D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22061920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2206.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2206B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2206B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2206D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22071920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2207.1211WOODPTD 1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2207B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2207D206WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22081920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2208.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2208B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2208D206WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22091920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2209.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2209B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2209B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2209D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22101920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2210.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2210B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2210B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2210D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22111920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2211.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2211B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2211B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2211D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22121920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2212.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODPage 4 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 2212B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2212B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2212D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22131920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2213.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2213B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2213B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2213D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22141920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2214.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2214B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2214B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2214D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22151920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2215.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2215B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2215D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22161920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2216.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2216B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2216D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22171920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2217.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2217B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2217D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22181920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2218.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2218B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2218D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22191920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2219.1211WOODPTD 1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2219B211WOODPTD 2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 2219D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22201920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 2220.1226WOODPTD 3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 2220B205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 2220B.1211WOODPTD 2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODPage 5 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 2220D205WOODPTD 2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 22211320 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22221320 min1WOODPTD 2' - 6"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22231190 min1HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22251345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 22271345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD 3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3LEVEL 31-3990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 32-3990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33-3990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33011920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3301.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3301B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3301B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3301D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33021920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3302.1211WOODPTD1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3302B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3302D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33031920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3303.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3303B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3303B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3303D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33041920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3304.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3304B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3304B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3304D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33051920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3305.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3305B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3305B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3305D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33061920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3306.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3306B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/APage 6 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 3306B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3306D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33071920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3307.1211WOODPTD1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3307B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3307D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33081920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3308.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3308B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3308D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33091920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3309.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3309B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3309B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3309D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33101920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3310.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3310B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3310B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3310D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33111920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3311.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3311B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3311B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3311D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33121920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3312.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3312B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3312B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3312D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33131920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3313.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3313B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3313B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3313D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33141920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3314.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODPage 7 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 3314B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3314B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3314D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33151920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3315.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3315B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3315D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33161920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3316.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3316B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3316D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33171920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3317.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3317B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3317D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33181920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3318.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3318B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3318D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33191920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3319.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3319B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3319D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33201920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 3320.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 3320B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 3320B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 3320D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 33211320 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33221320 min1WOODPTD2' - 6"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33231190 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33251345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 33271345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4LEVEL 41-4990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 41-4A111HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 42-4990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALPage 8 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 43-4990 min4HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 44011920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4401.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4401B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4401B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4401D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44021920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4402.1211WOODPTD1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4402B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4402D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44031920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4403.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4403B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4403B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4403D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44041920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4404.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4404B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4404B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4404D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44051920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4405.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4405B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4405B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4405D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44061920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4406.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4406B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4406B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4406D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44071920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4407.1211WOODPTD1' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4407B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4407D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44081920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4408.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4408B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODPage 9 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 4408D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44091920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4409.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4409B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4409B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4409D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44101920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4410.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4410B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4410B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4410D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44111920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4411.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4411B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4411B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4411D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44121920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4412.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4412B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4412B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4412D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44131920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4413.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4413B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4413B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4413D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44141920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4414.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4414B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4414B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4414D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44151920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4415.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4415B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4415D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44161920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4416.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODPage 10 of 11
Live 155 - DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016LEVEL 4416B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4416D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44171920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4417.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4417B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4417D206WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44181920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4418.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4418B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4418D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44191920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4419.1211WOODPTD1' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4419B211WOODPTD2' - 0"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4419D205WOODPTD2' - 8"1 3/8"7' - 0"6AWOODLEVEL 44201920 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 4420.1226WOODPTD3' - 6"1 3/8"7' - 0"5AWOODLEVEL 4420B205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 4420B.1211WOODPTD2' - 4"1 3/8"7' - 0"4AWOODLEVEL 4420D205WOODPTD2' - 10"1 3/8"7' - 1"N/AN/ALEVEL 44211320 min1WOODCLR/STAINED3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 44221320 min1WOODPTD2' - 6"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 44231190 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 44251345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALLEVEL 44271345 min1HOLLOW METALPTD3' - 0"1 3/4"7' - 0"1AMETALEND Page 11 of 11
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 1
SECTION 081110
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Standard hollow-metal steel doors.
2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for building anchors into and grouting steel frames in
masonry construction.
2. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for door hardware for steel doors.
3. Section 088000 - GLAZING for glazed lites.
4. Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting steel doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
compliance, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes for each type of steel
door and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 2
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each type of standard steel door and frame.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Door, Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies (Including Sidelights and Transoms): Complying with
NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257
or UL 9.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 3
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
2. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
3. de LaFontaine
4. Mesker Door Inc.
5. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
6. Philipp Manufacturing Company.
7. Republic Builders Products Company.
8. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 4
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 - GLAZING.
J. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors
complying with ANSI A250.8.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Exterior Doors: Where indicated, provide doors
fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
4. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model
and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-
3/4 inches thick.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying
with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-3/4
inches thick.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 5
2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
2. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material
as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 6
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same
material as frames in which they are installed.
2.8 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or
baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-thick steel frame.
1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped
blades.
2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by
actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type
and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that
established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Full Profile Welded Frames at Fire-Rated Doors and Exterior Doors: Weld joints
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and not visible.
2. Interlocking (Knock-Down) Frames at 20-Minute-Rated Doors and Non-Rated Doors:
Interlocking with visible seams.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as doorframe. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 7
4. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
5. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
6. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
7. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal-stud partitions.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
8. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 - DOOR
HARDWARE.
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 8
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division
26 - ELECTRICAL.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings, so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
of installation indicated.
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard epoxy primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
2. Refer to Section 099000 – PAINTING AND COATING for field-applied coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 9
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply isolation coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 10
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch .
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
D. Glazing: Comply with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 1
SECTION 081400
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer and medium-density overlay faces.
2. Factory finishing for wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
4. Louvers and glass lites for flush wood doors.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 064020 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for wood frames.
2. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for hardware for wood doors.
3. Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field finishing of opaque wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers,
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish specifications.
5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of finish color, sheen, and grain to be expected in
the finished work.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 2
2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies
provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard
construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for
size.
D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-
inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall include hardware installation and replacement of glass and glazing.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 3
3. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
3. Graham Wood Doors.
4. Marshfield DoorSystems.
5. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: AWI Premium, with AWI Grade AA faces.
2. Species and Cut: Clear White Maple, plain sawn/sliced.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balanced.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
6. Transom Match: Continuous match.
7. Stiles: Same species as faces.
8. Cross-Banding: 1/8 in. high density fiberboard, urea formaldehyde free.
9. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA T.M.-6.
B. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces for Interior Doors: Either medium-density overlay or high-density fiberboard.
3. Apply medium-density overlay directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.
4. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA T.M.-6.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particle Core: ANSI A 208.1, Grade 1-LD-2.
2. Structural Composite Lumber Core: Timberstrand LSL, WDMA I.S.10.
3. Provide doors with structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at
locations where exit devices are indicated or where light or louver cutouts exceed 40% of
the door area.
B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 4
1. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed, with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
C. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating
indicated.
a. Fire Retardant Mineral Core, with no added urea formaldehyde cross-banding.
2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer
stile matching face veneer.
a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.
4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are
labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and
astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood, chevron-style, louvers, unless
otherwise indicated. Species to match veneer.
B. Fire Door Louvers (not required on 20 min. doors): Metal louvers with fusible link and closing
device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire rating of one and one-half hours and less.
1. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch thick, hot-dip zinc coated and factory
primed for paint finish.
C. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.
3. At 20-minute, fire-rated, wood-core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips
approved for such use.
D. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use
in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for
opening size and fire rating indicated.
2.5 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: Provide factory installed glass products in accordance with requirements in Section
088000 - GLAZING.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 5
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining. Drill pilot holes for screws for butt hinges and lock
fronts at the factory.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory prime and premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for
hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors to receive concealed vertical rod exit devices.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top
edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide
factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal doorframes.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
3. Glass: Factory install glass products in prepared openings.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one
coat of wood primer specified in Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING.
2.8 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Factory prime and
prepare for field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed solvent-based polyurethane.
3. Staining: Provide custom color as selected by Architect.
4. Sheen: Satin.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Protection: Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration
at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean as necessary immediately before
final acceptance.
C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083110 - 1
SECTION 083110
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for blocking out openings for access
doors and frames in concrete.
2. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in
masonry construction.
3. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for rim cylinder locks and master keying.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details,
fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each
type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.
D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule,
including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
E. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-
mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame through one source from a
single manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083110 - 2
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames.
2. ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which
may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet: Electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M with cold-rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-
SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and
die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083110 - 3
1. Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
3. Dur-Red Products.
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.
5. Karp Associates, Inc.
6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
7. Milcor Inc.
8. Nystrom, Inc.
B. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at toilet and wet areas.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
4. Hinges: Continuous piano.
5. Lock: Cylinder.
a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section
087100, DOOR HARDWARE.
C. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at toilet and wet areas.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for
gypsum board infill.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board
surfaces.
4. Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge.
5. Lock: Cylinder.
a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section
087100, DOOR HARDWARE.
D. Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel at typical areas and from stainless-steel sheet at toilets and wet areas.
1. Locations: Wall surfaces.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, flush construction.
4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim.
5. Hinges: Continuous piano.
6. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
7. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083110 - 4
a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section
087100, DOOR HARDWARE
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum
base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
2. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated
expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.
3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1. For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached to
door panel.
E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish
plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083110 - 5
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
OVERHEAD COILING SMOKE CURTAIN
083480 - 1
SECTION 083480
OVERHEAD COILING SMOKE CURTAIN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Overhead coiling smoke containment system at elevator hoistway entrances.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for miscellaneous steel supports.
2. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for electrical service and connections for powered operators
and accessories and tie-in to fire alarm system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of smoke containment curtain and accessory. Include
the following:
1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
2. Include description of fire-release system including testing and resetting instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience in producing smoke containment
systems of the type specified. Manufacturer shall maintain a quality control program in
accordance with ICBO-ES Acceptance Criteria AC 77.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
OVERHEAD COILING SMOKE CURTAIN
083480 - 2
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b
and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
F. Testing Laboratory Label:
1. UL Listing.
2. OSHPD Anchorage Pre-Approval No. R-0318.
G. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting prior to commencement of field
operations with representatives of the following in attendance: Owner, Design
Professional, Construction Manager, smoke containment system sub-contractor, painting
sub-contractor, and electrical sub-contractor.
2. Review substrate conditions, requirements of related work, installation instructions,
storage and handling procedures, and protection measures.
3. Keep minutes of meeting including responsibilities of various parties and deviations from
specifications and installation instructions.
1.5 TESTS
A. Fire-Resistance: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction, provide curtains which are identical to curtains whose fire-resistance rating has
been tested in compliance with ASTM E152 by independent agencies acceptable to the
Design Professional and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
C. ICBO Evaluation Services: AC77 - Acceptance Criteria for Smoke-Containment Systems Used
With Fire-Resistive Elevator Hoistway Doors and Frames.
D. NFPA Codes and Standards:
1. 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. 105 - Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies.
3. 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
E. SBCCI Public Safety and Evaluation Services, Inc., Report No 9710 - Smoke Guard.
F. UL Standards:
1. 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
2. 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
3. 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
OVERHEAD COILING SMOKE CURTAIN
083480 - 3
4. 1784 - Air Leakage Tests for Door Assemblies.
G. Air Leakage: Less than 3 cfm per sq. ft. of door opening at 0.1 in water pressure differential at
ambient temperature and 400 degrees F tested per IBC 714.2.3 or per 1997 UBC Vol. 3,
Standard 7-2, Part II.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Model 400 by Smoke Guard Corporation, Boise, ID 83713.
2.2 CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Curtain:
1. Film: Minimum 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick transparent polyimide film reinforced with 100
denier nomex yarn at .25 in (6.35 mm) each way.
2. Magnetic Strips: Flexible multi-pole strips attached to longitudinal edges of film with low
modulus silicone adhesive.
B. Housing: 20 gauge, powder coated, cold rolled or stainless steel container and door with
concealed hinges, and latch.
C. Auxiliary Rails:
1. Material: 16 gauge ASTM A 240/240M, Type 430, ferretic stainless steel.
2. Size: As shown on Drawings.
D. Cove Bases (required for hoistway openings wider than 48"): 16 gauge ASTM A 240/240M,
Type 430, ferretic stainless steel.
E. Rewind Motor: NFPA 70, 90v DC.
F. Release Mechanism: IAS ( IAS is a trademark of International Accreditation Service) Accredited
Testing Laboratory Labels for UL Standard 864.
G. Wall Switch: Include switch to rewind curtain into housing, system status indicators, keyed
curtain deployment switch, and keyed to silence function.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each smoke containment system with following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name.
2. Maximum leakage rating at specified pressure and temperature conditions.
3. Label of quality control agency.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
OVERHEAD COILING SMOKE CURTAIN
083480 - 4
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide automatic-closing device that is inoperative during normal door operations, with
governor unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80 and with an easily tested and reset
release mechanism, and designed to be activated by building fire alarm and detection system
and door-holder-release devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
1. Install fire-rated curtain to comply with NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICES
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release
system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 1
SECTION 083510
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Horizontal-sliding, accordion-type fire doors.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for electrical service and connections for powered operators
and accessories and tie-in to fire alarm system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of fire door and accessory. Include the following:
1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
2. Include description of fire-release system including testing and resetting instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience in producing horizontal-sliding
accordion-type fire door systems of the type specified. Manufacturer shall maintain a quality
control program in accordance with ICBO-ES Acceptance Criteria AC 77.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal-sliding accordion fire doors through one source from a
single manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 2
1. Obtain operators and controls from door manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b
and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
F. Testing Laboratory Label:
1. UL Listing.
2. OSHPD Anchorage Pre-Approval No. R-0318.
G. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting prior to commencement of field
operations with representatives of the following in attendance: Owner, Design
Professional, Construction Manager, fire door system sub-contractor, and electrical sub-
contractor.
2. Review substrate conditions, requirements of related work, installation instructions,
storage and handling procedures, and protection measures.
3. Keep minutes of meeting including responsibilities of various parties and deviations from
specifications and installation instructions.
1.5 TESTS
A. Fire-Resistance: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction, provide curtains which are identical to curtains whose fire-resistance rating has
been tested in compliance with ASTM E152 by independent agencies acceptable to the Design
Professional and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
C. ICBO Evaluation Services: AC77 - Acceptance Criteria for Smoke-Containment Systems Used
With Fire-Resistive Elevator Hoistway Doors and Frames.
D. NFPA Codes and Standards:
1. 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. 105 - Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies.
3. 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
E. SBCCI Public Safety and Evaluation Services, Inc., Report No 9710 - Smoke Guard.
F. UL Standards:
1. 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
2. 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
3. 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 3
4. 1784 - Air Leakage Tests for Door Assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
2. Modernfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group company.
3. Won-Door Corporation.
B. Basis-of-Design: Won-Door; Fireguard Cross Corridor, 90 minutes.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each smoke containment system with following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name.
2. Maximum leakage rating at specified pressure and temperature conditions.
3. Label of quality control agency.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Construction: shall consist of two parallel, accordion-type walls of panels independently
suspended with no floor tracks, pantographs, or interconnections except at the lead-post.
B. Panels shall be formed of 24-gauge enamel coated steel V-grooved for strength and resilience.
Panels shall be connected by full height 24-gauge enamel coated steel hinges. Panels shall be
modular in design and capable of in-place repair-ability.
C. Suspension System: shall consist of two 14-gauge cold rolled steel (or 0.125 aluminum) tracks
on 8 inch centers attached to the overhead structural support. Each lead post shall be
suspended by an 8-wheel ball bearing trolley. Each panel shall be suspended by a steel hanger
pin and a ball bearing roller.
D. Lead-Posts: shall be of 24-gauge cold rolled steel and shall be connected by specially formed
steel panels. An internally mounted stabilizer bar shall keep lead-posts plumb and in proper
alignment during operation and insure a tight fitting closure.
E. Perimeter Seals: shall consist of continuous extruded vinyl sweeps attached to the top and
bottom of the fire door to form a smoke and draft seal.
F. Hanging Weight: 5.5 pounds per square foot.
G. Automatic Closing System shall consist of the following:
1. Microprocessor based Electronic Control box with these features:
a. Ability to monitor dual power sources continually for peak performance including:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 4
1) Detect a missing battery, bad battery, or low battery condition.
2) Detect if the charging circuit is bad.
3) Detect fuse failures.
4) Detect high or low AC conditions.
b. Ability to monitor the health of the drive train including:
1) Direction errors, obstruction errors, hindrance errors, and position errors.
2) Active daily path checks, by actually closing and opening to assure a clear
path and proper operation.
3) Ability to monitor a passive input such as an infrared light beam to assure
the closing path is clear.
c. Ability to monitor inputs including:
1) Sticky door block, exit hardware, patron hardware, and key switches.
2) Key switch mis-wires where key open and key close are both on
simultaneously.
d. Ability to self-monitor the health of:
1) Internal volatile and non-volatile memory.
2) Proper operation of firmware.
e. Ability to run a “watch dog” monitoring circuit which will force a software restart in
the event the software hangs, including the ability to track the number of resets
that occur for diagnostic purposes.
f. Ability to record the number of times the door has closed, opened, lost
communication with external microprocessors, and the number of times the
controller has been reset manually.
g. Ability to monitor ambient temperature and lockout the operating devices once the
environment at the door becomes untenable.
h. Ability to enter a security mode to help control access through the door including:
1) The ability to automatically re-close and secure itself after a legitimate
patron access has occurred.
2) The ability to unlock and revert to a fire door in a fire alarm condition,
including the ability to re-lock automatically after the fire alarm condition has
cleared.
i. Ability to withstand voltages up to 120 volts AC on the fire alarm input circuit
without damage including the ability to indicate that the alarm circuit has not been
wired as a dry contact, “no voltage” circuit when errant voltages are applied to the
circuit.
j. Ability to communicate with other microprocessors on the system via an internal
bus system, including but not limited to microprocessors on the motor drive, in the
leading edge of the door, and on a wall mounted display panel adjacent to the
door.
k. Ability to indicate alarm, trouble and door status both locally and at a remote
location.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 5
1) Local conditions shall be audibly and or visually indicated at the door where
each condition shall have distinct audible pattern as explained in the owners
manual.
2) Remote indications shall be via isolated dry contact form C relays. One each
to indicate if the door has received the fire alarm signal from the building
system/smoke detector; if the door is in a trouble condition; and if the door is
closed or not.
2. Motor Operator Assembly including: A DC gear-motor, drive sprocket, clutch, and position
sensors. The motor shall drive the fire door by means of a chain attached to a stabilizer
bar trolley each time the door operates including the initial closing cycle.
3. A door control momentary rocker switch shall be mounted on one side of the door near
the lead post and shall have the following functions: Pressing the upper portion of the
switch shall close the door and/or clear fault conditions. Pressing the lower portion of the
switch shall open the door and/or temporarily mute the local horn. For doors using wall
mounted key switches, option L, a color coordinated cover plate shall be provided to fill
the hole left when the rocker switch is removed.
4. The control box shall be equipped with a service switch that performs the following
functions:
a. When the switch is off with AC power present, the controller shall emit an audible
coded sound indicating the system is out of service. In this mode all normal
functions shall cease including motor and communications.
b. When the switch is off and AC power is not present, the controller shall enter a
sleep mode during which the system shall use the battery to monitor the AC line for
power but do nothing else.
c. When the switch is moved from the off position to the on position, the controller
shall enter a calibrate mode where it emits a coded audible alert indicating that the
door needs to be closed to complete the calibration sequence. As soon as the door
is closed, the controller shall automatically stop the audible alert, and resume all
normal functions and monitoring.
H. Leading Edge Obstruction Detector:
1. Shall be pressure sensitive such that each contact with an obstruction shall cause the
door to stop, reverse enough to remove pressure on the leading edge, pause, and then
re-close when in an alarm condition. The leading edge obstruction detector shall be fully
functional at all times, including during the initial closing cycle.
2. Constant pressure to the leading edge in the direction of opening shall, while the door is
opening under motor power, continue to open under motor power until the leading edge is
released. This is termed motor assisted opening.
3. Constant pressure to the leading edge while not under motor power shall prevent motor
operation and allow the door to be opened manually.
I. I. Exit Hardware shall be located on both sides of each fire door.
1. In emergency mode, a slight pressure on the hardware will cause the door to open a
minimum of 32 inches, pause for 3 seconds, and then automatically close.
2. The open distance shall be field programmable, up to the entire opening width, if the local
authority requires an opening larger than 32 inches.
3. The pause before re-close shall be field programmable, up to 30 seconds, if the local
authority requires a longer pause time.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING ACCORDION FIRE DOORS
083510 - 6
4. The exit hardware shall have the ability when not in the emergency (fire) mode or the
security (lock) mode to be used to open the door and move it back into the storage
pocket.
5. The exit hardware shall be field programmable to provide access control. When
programmed, the exit hardware shall not respond when pressed until activated by signal
from smoke detector or fire alarm.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide automatic-closing device that is inoperative during normal door operations, with
governor unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80 and with an easily tested and reset
release mechanism, and designed to be activated by building fire alarm and detection system
and door-holder-release devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb
and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
1. Install fire doors to comply with NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICES
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release
system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 1
SECTION 084110
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts.
2. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section:
1. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for installation of joint sealants installed with
aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
2. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for lock cylinders and keying.
3. Section 088000 - GLAZING for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
Section.
4. Section 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS for units installed with aluminum-framed
systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design entrance and storefront system, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
4. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 2
f. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units to function properly.
C. Structural Loads: Wind and seismic loads as indicated on the Structural Drawings, but not less
than that required by Code.
D. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches (and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is
less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever
is smaller, amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent
of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members
and glazing or other fixed components directly below to less than 1/8 inch and clearance
between members and operable units directly below to less than 1/16 inch.
E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F. Air Infiltration Test: Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283, as follows:
1. Static Air Pressure Difference: 6.24 psf for fixed storefront units, and 1.567 psf for doors.
2. Performance: Maximum air leakage shall not exceed the following: fixed storefront units,
1.0 cfm/sf.: glazed entrance door units, 0.3 cfm/sf.
G. Water Leakage Test: Test fixed framing system in accordance with ASTM E 331.
1. Test Pressure: 8 psf.
2. Performance: No leakage as defined in test method at specified test pressure. No
uncontrolled water penetrating system or appearing on normally exposed interior
surfaces.
H. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide units with a whole-unit SHGC maximum as required by
Code, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. Submit proof of compliance with
submittals as specified.
I. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units that have a U-value as required by Code rated in
BTU/hour/sq. ft./degrees F at 15-mph exterior wind velocity, when tested in accordance with
AAMA 1503.1. Test unit to be 4 ft. x 6 ft. Submit proof of compliance with submittals as
specified.
J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 for fixed storefront units
and not less than 48 for doors when tested according to AAMA 1503.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis of story drift and deflection from anticipated live loads, and
determination whether head receptors are required.
2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.
3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For entrance and storefront systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems.
G. Performance Reports: Based on systems, components and glazing methods proposed for use
on this Project, proof that units as glazed for this Project meet or exceed Code requirements for
the following:
1. U-value.
2. Solar heat-gain coefficient.
H. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of entrance and storefront systems that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of
this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 4
D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction, local state building code and
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with
requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. EFCO, a Pella Company.
2. Kawneer North America.
3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
4. Tubelite Inc.
5. United States Aluminum.
6. YKK AP America Inc.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 5
B. Basis-of-Design:
1. Storefront Framing: VG451T by Kawneer.
2. Entrances: Insulclad 360 by Kawneer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and
prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermal-break.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible
deflection.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 6
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 - GLAZING.
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or
extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: Mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plus welds and 1-
1/8 inch long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be
hook-in type and EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord.
2.6 DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.
1. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to set door in motion and not more
than 15 lbf required to open door to minimum required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf.
B. Hardware Sets: Provide as specified in Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded
PVC.
D. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Section 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION.
B. Joint Sealants: Provide manufacturer recommended sealants for seams and joints within
aluminum framing system.
C. Bituminous Paint (Isolation Coating): Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with
ASTM D 1187 requirements, containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 7
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 8
C. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating:
manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color coat, with color coat containing not less than 70
percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 -
JOINT SEALANTS and to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 - GLAZING.
1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 9
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS and
according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof
joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4
inch over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of
installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive
stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test
results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than
0.09 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum cyclic
static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for
laboratory testing under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than
4.18 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.
3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of
75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084110 - 10
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions.
1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second
closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from
the latch measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 1
SECTION 085120
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Fire-rated steel windows from cold-rolled members.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 088000 - GLAZING for requirements for glass and glazing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. SWI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements in SWI's "The Architect's Guide to Steel
Windows and Doors" and "Specifications: Cold-Rolled," except where more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B. Structural Wind Loads: As required by Code.
C. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less
than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressures.
D. Steel windows shall conform to the voluntary specifications in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 and
be designed to meet the following performance requirements. Fire-rated windows shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label including the manufacturer’s file number for the indicated
rating.
1. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration shall not exceed .3 SCFM per square foot of window area at
a static air pressure difference of 1.57 PSF as established by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-
97 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2. Water Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 547, there shall be no water
leakage at a static air pressure difference of 9 PSF.
E. Fire Resistance: Fire resistance shall meet requirements established by ASTM E 163 and as
tested and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc, in accordance with UL-9. Products shall
meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. The Listing Mark of UL on the product
will be accepted as evidence of compliance.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 2
F. Life Safety Criteria: Windows shall conform to NFPA 101 Life Safety Code when rescue and/or
second means of escape are indicated.
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Detail attachments to other work, and between units, if any.
3. Include hardware and required clearances.
4. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
5. Flashing details.
6. Glazing details.
7. Accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of cold-rolled steel window.
1. Main Framing and Sash Members: Full-sized sections 12 inches long, with factory-
applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing bead.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Test Reports: For cold-rolled steel windows, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
F. Product Schedule: For cold-rolled steel windows. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating cold-rolled steel windows
that meets performance requirements indicated and of documenting performance by labels, test
reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of units
required for this Project.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 3
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cold-
rolled steel windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures, including excessive deflection.
c. Excessive water leakage or air infiltration.
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Windows:
a. D.V. Fyre-Tec, Inc.
b. Hopes’s Windows.
c. Optimum Window Manufacturing Corp.
B. Basis-of-Design: UL-Labeled Fire-Rated Fixed Lite Series 950 by Fyre-Tec.
2.2 COLD-ROLLED STEEL WINDOWS
A. Operating Types: Fixed.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Windows: Provide frame and sash members mechanically formed from
metallic-coated, low-carbon, cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Comply with SWI specifications for combined weight of frame and sash members and front-to-
back depth of frame or sash members.
C. Mullions: Formed of cold-rolled steel matching window units; with anchors for support to
structure and for installation of window units and having sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated. Provide mullions of profile indicated and with cover plates. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building
deflections.
D. Sill Cap/Track: Designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the
exterior.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 4
E. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied glazing stops; coordinate with Section 088000 "Glazing"
and with glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match panel frames. Finish glazing
stops to match window units if fabricated of steel; otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard
finish.
2.3 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing System: Manufacturer’s standarc clear ceramic glass, 1-hour rated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of bronze, brass, stainless steel, or other metal that are warranted
by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with trim, hardware, anchors, and other
components of cold-rolled steel windows.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
B. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Provide units of stainless steel, hot-dip zinc-coated
steel, bronze, brass, or iron complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide units with sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
C. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate cold-rolled steel windows of type and in sizes indicated to comply with SWI
standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window
units.
B. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling framing.
C. Prepare windows for site glazing.
D. Provide weep holes and internal water passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior.
2.6 METALLIC-COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of oil and other contaminants. Use cleaning methods that
do not leave residue. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic
coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing repair paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20, to comply with ASTM A 780.
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Color: Black
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work. Verify rough-opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and
clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other
built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. SWI Publication: Comply with applicable requirements in SWI's "General Guidelines on the
Installation of Steel Windows," except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, operators,
accessories, and other components.
C. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impediment to thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight
construction.
E. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water-penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
F. Separate corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact
with other materials according to ASTM E 2112.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing:
1. Testing Methodology: Test windows for air-penetration resistance and water resistance
according to AAMA 502, Test Method, by applying same test pressures required for
performance.
2. Testing Extent: Three windows as selected by Architect and a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency. Test windows immediately after installation.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports according to AAMA 502.
D. Window will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS
085120 - 6
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean factory-finished steel surfaces immediately after installing windows. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes.
B. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. Remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Refinish or replace windows with damaged finish.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 1
SECTION 085413
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Fixed and operable fiberglass windows with factory-installed glass and glazing.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 088000 - GLAZING for requirements for glass and glazing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated,
based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are
of test size indicated below:
1. Minimum size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide windows of the performance class and
grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
1. Performance Class: Heavy Commercial HC40 for fixed, project-in, project-out, in-swing,
out-swing casements; Commercial C30 for single hung, double hung, and horizontal
sliding windows.
2. Performance Grade: Minimum for performance class indicated.
3. Exception to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: In addition to requirements for performance
class and performance grade, design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of
glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch whichever is less, at
design pressure based on the following:
C. Structural Performance: Provide windows capable of withstanding the following, including wind
loads based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Structural Test, at basic wind
speed indicated and as required by Code:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 2
1. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less
than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based
on structural computations.
2. Wind and Seismic Loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings, but not less than that
required by Code.
D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Air Infiltration Test.
1. Maximum Rate: As required by Code.
E. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/NWWDA referenced test methods at
a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Water Resistance Test.
1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. or
more than 12 lbf/sq. ft..
F. Condensation-Resistance Factor: Provide windows tested for thermal performance according
to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 52 where windows are indicated to be "thermally improved."
G. Thermal Transmittance: Provide windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at
15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
1. U-Value: As required by Code. Submit proof of compliance with submittals as specified.
H. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum as
required by Code, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. Submit proof of compliance
with submittals as specified.
I. Thermal Movements: Provide windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal
movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants,
damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions
for each type of window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
Work, operational clearances, and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 3
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Glazing details.
7. Window cleaning provisions.
8. Window System Operators: Show locations, mounting, and details for installing operator
components and controls.
9. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation and used to determine the following:
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size operable window of each type of window.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer, professional engineer and testing agency.
E. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by
Contractor.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last
four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of window. Test results
based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted.
G. Performance Reports: Based on systems, components and glazing methods proposed for use
on this Project, proof that windows as glazed for this Project meet or exceed Code requirements
for the following:
1. U-value.
2. Solar heat-gain coefficient.
H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and
finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of units
required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for
Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 4
1. Provide AAMA certified windows with an attached label.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup for types of windows indicated, in locations shown on Drawings.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to windows including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other
trades.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review required testing and inspecting procedures.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify window openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating windows without
field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Failure to meet performance requirements.
2. Structural failures including excessive deflection.
3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation.
4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
6. Insulating glass failure.
B. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty Period for Fiberglass Finishes: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Glass: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide single-hung, casement, and
fixed transom windows by Accurate Dorwin, substitutions will not be accepted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Frame and sash profiles are made from pultruded fiberglass, nominal wall thickness of 0.090
in., with a minimum glass content of 60%. Non-structural accessory members are permitted to
be in vinyl or aluminum and are identified as such.
2.3 GLAZING
A. Insulating-Glass Units for Vertical Glazing: 1-5/16 inch thick insulating glass consisting of three
lites of minimum 1/8 inch thick glass, low e coating on the No. 2 surface and argon gas filled.
B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight
seal.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Hardware Requirements: Provide hardware that complies with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
2.5 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Provide for each operable
exterior sash or ventilator.
B. Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC
spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.
1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum
sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
2. Finish: Match window members.
C. Stainless-Steel Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.009-inch-diameter, nonmagnetic stainless-steel
wire, Type 304 or 316, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VI.
D. Wickets: Provide sliding wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and durability during
handling.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate fiberglass windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a
complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 6
B. Construction: Connect frame and sash corners with molded reinforced polymer shearblocks
and mechanical fasteners. Factory seal and neatly fit joints. Fill the perimeter of open-back
frames with insulation and injected urethane foam in four corners.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
D. Weep Holes: Provide concealed weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water
to exterior.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances
and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections,
as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window
units.
F. Aluminum Brake Metal Trim Work: Provide aluminum brake metal work in conjunction with
aluminum windows. Fabricate brake-metal work from minimum 0.062 in. thick aluminum sheet,
finished to match windows.
G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze fiberglass windows in the factory where practical and
possible for applications indicated. Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Finish System: Manufacturer’s standard isocynate-free, two part polymer enamel with 1.5 mm
minimum dry film thickness and medium gloss of 25-55; complying with ASTM 613 Organic
coatings.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Designer from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions;
levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in
components; operational clearances; and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
2. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,
accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 7
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements
specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be
performed according to AAMA 502.
2. Air-Infiltration Testing:
a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.
b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class
rounded down to one decimal place.
3. Water-Resistance Testing:
a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance
with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated.
b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.
4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter
sealants have cured.
5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.
C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
085413 - 8
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, operators, and accessories for a
tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces,
remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels
and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge
protection.
3. Automatic operators.
4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”.
2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
4. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
5. Division 08 Section “All-Glass Entrances”.
6. Division 08 Section “Interior Aluminum Frames”.
7. Division 28 Section “Access Control”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. 521 CMR – MA Architectural Access Board.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
6. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire
and Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry
standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational
descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's
"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets
indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the
end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the
Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest
possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must
precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected
by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of
the Door Hardware Schedule.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system
wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of
the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing
location and interconnection of major system components with respect to
their placement in the respective door openings.
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring
diagrams.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections
the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated
hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule
detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying
system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering
of permanent cylinders.
E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and
maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware
installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to
include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the
hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after
completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during
installation, checkout, and acceptance.
F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements
specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years
of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that
indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a
minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified
builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware
distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory
direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a
warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and
electromechanical door hardware and keying.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
D. Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator products and accessories
are required to be supplied and installed through current members of the
manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program. Suppliers are to be
factory trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specified power operators and
be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the units and accessories
indicated for the Project.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this
Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's
product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as
mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI
A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices,
and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows:
a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is
easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight
pinching, or twisting of the wrist.
b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force
requirements indicated:
1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a
slope of not more than 1:2.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch.
Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for
operation.
b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.
4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying
with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on
testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C.
a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.
G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the
referenced standards.
H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into
the final keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by
representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods
and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting
to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and
adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by
installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum,
hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation
manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as
required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled
opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration
procedures
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were
applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to
approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door
hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware,
software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door
Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or
package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials,
software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight
package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the
"Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames,
and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified
hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of
scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with
required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies,
detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and
Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired
(if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling
and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties
specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or
replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2. Five years for exit hardware.
3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers.
4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with
the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including
repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as
used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door
Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade,
function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are
indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified
by using door hardware designations, as follows:
a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer
are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the
Door Hardware Schedule.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical
and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be
submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in
Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the
architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as
specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1
hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths
sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” heavy weight.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the
following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets
or on Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when
tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is
closed; for the following applications:
1) Out-swinging exterior doors.
2) Out-swinging access controlled doors.
3) Out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries (BO).
b. Hager Companies (HA).
c. McKinney Products (MK).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous geared hinge
with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a
minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated
to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full
surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the
Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and
including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm components
where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service
power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries (BO).
b. McKinney Products (MK).
c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
C. Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding door hardware is to be of type and design as specified
and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1. Sliding, folding bi-passing, pocket door hardware: Provide complete sets
consisting of track, hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, pivots,
hinges and accessories indicated.
2. Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb.
3. Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Hafele Manufacturing (HF).
2) Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
3) Richards-Wilcox, Inc. (RW).
2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with
Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to
12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric
locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option.
b. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.
B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway
housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware.
Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed
wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door
Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10
connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are
not acceptable.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series.
b. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 Series.
C. Electric Door Hardware Cords: Provide electric transfer wiring harnesses with
standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors
plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices
and power supplies. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate
electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic
locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut
connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified
hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per
electrified opening.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series.
Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:
a. McKinney Products (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001.
b. McKinney Products (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.
2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified
automatic, self-latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to
be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet
from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum
8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm
components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes,
coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Door Controls International (DC).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type
and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper
width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets,
with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the
hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets.
Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in
Hardware Sets.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Burns Manufacturing (BU).
2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
3) Trimco (TC).
2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing
secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system
policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU).
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
c. Schlage (SC).
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA).
e. Medeco.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and
raised trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder
face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying
with the following:
1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use
with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable
core (small or large format) as specified in Hardware Sets.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
E. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinders employing a
utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of patented controlled keys.
Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established
and maintained.
1. Provide a 6 pin multi-level master key system comprised of patented controlled
keys.
a. Level 1 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway cylinders that
are furnished with patented keys available only from authorized
distribution.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Degree Series.
b. Corbin Russwin (RU) – Access 3 Series.
c. Schlage – Everest 29 Series.
d. Yale – Keymark Series.
e. Medeco – X4 Series.
F. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified
"Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and
requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a
visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying
conference, and as follows:
1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master
key, and a grand master key.
G. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Top Master Key: One (1)
2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3)
3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Five (5)
4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2)
5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10)
6. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
7. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
H. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed
construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as
required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores.
Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying
Conference".
I. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the
proper format for importing into key control software.
J. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and
tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall
have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment (LU).
b. MMF Industries (MM).
c. Telkee (TK).
K. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key
management software package that includes one year of technical support and
upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing
into “Key Wizard” software.
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000,
Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in
the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped
12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing without
disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons,
roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset,
3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for
deadbolt functions.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series.
c. Schlage (SC) – L9000 Series.
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.
B. Tubular Locksets: Standard tubular locksets designed to fit ANSI standard 161 door
prep without additional through-bolt preps. Locksets to be non-handed with bi-
directional lever operation and be available with 2 3/4" standard and 2 3/8" optional
backsets. Lever designs shall be available to match other locksets and exit devices.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - TL3700 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – DL Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - RL Series.
C. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14
2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same
compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified
locksets to be of type and design as specified below.
1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide
electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and
lock/unlock status monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.
2. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw
of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be
field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML20900 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series.
c. Schlage (SC) - L9000 EL/EU/RX Series.
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 8890 Series.
2.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 2, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit
standard ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered
collars to resist vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins.
Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other
locksets.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU).
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
c. Schlage (SC).
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA).
2.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock
bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set,
unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated
for aluminum framing.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the
following criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101
and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper
fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings
specified in the Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying
with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide
devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL.
Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.
a. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use
with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to
UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions to be used only with exit devices for
which they have been tested.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with key cylinder dogging device
to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized
dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is not acceptable except in
any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass
configuration.
5. Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of
architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets.
Plastic end caps will not be acceptable.
6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish
manufacturer's heavy duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges,
and four threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and
designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling
type trim where indicated.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an
interchangeable core type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in
Hardware Sets.
7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed
vertical rod exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified
in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width
application.
11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware
Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1
certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the
Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or
bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of
0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch
to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
c. Stanley Precision (ST) – Apex 2000 Series.
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 6000/7000 Series.
2.11 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance
standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of
type and design as specified below. Include any specific controllers when conventional
power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
c. Stanley Precision (ST) – Apex 2000 Series.
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 6000/7000 Series.
B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device
options including: electric latch retraction , electric dogging, outside door trim control,
exit alarm, delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17
touchbar monitoring and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide
electrified exit devices standard as fail secure.
2.12 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and
style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of
application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers
including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure
Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of
door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible
to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise
indicated in Hardware Sets.
a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy
duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.
b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy
duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly
designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder
to be manually selectable to on-off position.
c. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy
duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door
when opened to maximum degree.
d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where
possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop
plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates,
special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper
mounting.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru
6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and
opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum
alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for
closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series.
b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series.
d. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 9500 Series.
e. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5800 Series.
C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Light Commercial): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 and 2
surface mounted, light commercial grade door closers. Non-handed, minimum sizes 2
to 4 Provide closer standard packed for regular, top-jamb, and parallel arm type
mounting applications.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Falcon Hardware (FA) - Dor-O-Matic SC90 Series.
b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 1700 Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 1100 Series.
2.13 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,
weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325.
Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that
comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency.
B. Electromechanical Door Operators: Self-contained units powered by permanent
magnet DC motor, with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train,
connections for power, activation and safety device wiring, and manual operation
including spring closing when power is off.
C. Electrohydraulic Door Operators: Self-contained low-pressure units with rack and
pinion design contained within a cast aluminum housing. Door closing speed
controlled by independent hydraulic adjustment valves in the sweep and latch range of
the closing cycle. Operator is to provide conventional door closer opening and closing
forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Unit is to include an adjustable
hydraulic backcheck valve to cushion the door speed if opened violently. Non-handed
units for both push and pull side applications.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
1. Performance Requirements:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19
a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a
latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in
motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.
b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped
door from closing or opening.
F. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of
swinging doors.
G. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI
A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before
initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic
mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening
and closing forces, with or without electrical power.
1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated.
H. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing
force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time
delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to
30 seconds.
I. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit
device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion
sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.
J. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA
A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance
free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with
electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard
SPST, with optional DPDT availability.
K. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Besam Automated Entrance Systems (BE) – SW200 Series.
b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4640 Series.
c. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series.
2.14 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or
in the Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than
door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 20
of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and
provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates
(kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following:
a. Bronze: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the
Hardware Sets.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
b. Trimco (TC).
c. Burns (BU).
2.15 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as
indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do
not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are
not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Burns Manufacturing (BU).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead
stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets.
Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock
absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting
brackets as required for proper operation and function.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 21
2.16 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as
specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on
exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where
indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere
where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive
Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 1408.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips
are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS).
3. Zero International (ZE).
2.17 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
A. Door Position Switches (Coordinate with Division 28): Door position magnetic reed
contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On
recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole.
Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex
cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on
steel doors with flush top channels.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3280 Series.
b. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series.
c. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 22
B. Power Supplies (Coordinate with Division 28): Provide Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power
supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in
addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least
number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required
total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 782.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3500 Series.
c. Securitron (SU) – BPS/AQD Series.
d. Von Duprin (VO) - PS.
e. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 782.
C. Push-Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary or alternate contact, back-lighted
push buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination.
Flush mounting. Function per hardware sets.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Security Door Controls (SD).
b. Securitron (SU).
D. Request-to-Exit Motion Sensor: Request-to-Exit Sensors motion detectors specifically
designed for detecting exiting through a door from the secure area to a non-secure
area. Include built-in timers (up to 60 second adjustable timing), door monitor with
sounder alert, internal vertical pointability coverage, 12VDC or 24VDC power and
selectable relay trigger with fail safe/fail secure modes.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Security Door Controls (SD) - MD-31D Series.
b. Securitron (SU) - XMS Series.
2.18 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws
according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.19 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware
finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional
U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 23
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case
less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door
types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or
conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control
equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to
specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper
installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including:
hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following
applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI
A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted
hardware is located.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 24
C. Power Operator products and accessories are required to be installed through current
members of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program.
D. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates
and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware
onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate
removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work
specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrates involved.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion
of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and
state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including
whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect
exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all
hardware at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final
protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 25
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical
and electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect.
They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the
attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted
items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate
additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
B. Manufacturers Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. RO - Rockwood
4. YA - Yale
5. IV - Ives
6. AD - Adams Rite
7. RF - Rixson
8. NO - Norton
9. SU - Securitron
10. 00 - Other
11. ZE - Zero International Inc
Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0
Description: Main Entry Alum Pair - Card Access; Auto Operator; Intercom
2 Continuous Hinge (EPT prep) CFM-SLF-HD1 PT Series PE
1 Exit Device (CVR, ELR, NL, RX) 7220 B P 503F K840 630 YA
1 Exit Device (CVR, NL, RX) 7220 B 503F K840 630 YA
2 Pull (offset) RM3301-36" 12XHD US32D RO
2 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Door Operator 6060 D 689 NO
1 Threshold 273x292AFGPK FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU
2 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
2 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
2 Door Switch 501 NO
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
2 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 26
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply 782N YA
1 Perimeter Seals Supplied by Door & Frame Mfr. 00
Notes:
Operation; Doors are to remain closed, latched and secured at all times. Door unlocks upon
signal from units. Valid card at reader retracts exit device latches for momentary access and
enables outside actuator. Inside actuator retracts exit device latch and auto opens
door. Monitoring by door position switches. During a loss of power the door will default to
secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire detection/suppression
systems are activated. Depressing pushrail(s) will activate request to exit switch for appropriate
monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 2.0
Description: Interior Alum Vestibule Pair - Push/Pull; Auto Operator
2 Continuous Hinge CFM-SLF-HD1 Series PE
4 Pull (offset, BTB) RM3301-36" 5HD US32D RO
2 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Door Operator 6060 D 689 NO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
2 Door Switch 501 NO
Set: 3.0
Description: Interior Alum Sgl - Reception - Card Access
1 Continuous Hinge (EPT prep) CFM-SLF-HD1 PT Series PE
1 Electrified Deadlatch 4300-M ELX 4901 strike 628 AD
1 Inside Lever Trim (RX) 4600-REX MG US32D AD
1 Inside Lever Trim 4600 MG (prep for cylinder) US32D AD
1 Concealed Closer PH91N 626 RF
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at reader unlocks outside lever for
momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss of power the door will
default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire
detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate request to exit
switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 4.0
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 27
Description: Exterior Alum Sgl - Retail - Panic; Pull; Key
1 Continuous Hinge CFM-SLF-HD1 Series PE
1 Exit Device (rim, NL, CD) 7205 121NL K840 630 YA
1 Door Pull BF158 12HD US32D RO
1 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Threshold 273x292AFGPK FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Perimeter Seals Supplied by Door & Frame Mfr. 00
Set: 5.0
Description: Exterior Pair - Loading - Panic; Card Access
6 Hinge MPB99 NRP (qty, size per spec) US32D MK
2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Exit Device (mortise, FSE, RX) 7130F B SECURE TR656F K820 630 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
2 Armor Plate K1050 34" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Threshold 273x292AFGPK FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Gasketing 294AV PE
2 Sweep 57AV PE
1 Astragal 355CS PE
1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
2 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at reader unlocks outside lever for
momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss of power the door will
default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire
detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate request to exit
switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 6.0
Description: Exterior Sgl HM - Panic; Card Access
3 Hinge MPB99 NRP (qty, size per spec) US32D MK
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure, RX) 7100F B TR691F K840 630 YA
1 Surface Closer (stop arm) 5821 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Threshold 273x292AFGPK FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Gasketing 294AV PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 28
1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is to remain closed, latched and secured at all times. Valid Fob at reader
unlocks outside lever for momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss
of power the door will default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change
when the fire detection/suppression systems are activated. Depressing pushrail will activate
request to exit switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 7.0
Description: Exterior Service Sgl - Card Access
3 Hinge MPB99 NRP (qty, size per spec) US32D MK
1 Mortise Lock (fail-secure, RX) TRR6 8891RL K820 REX 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Gasketing 294AV PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is to remain closed, latched and secured at all times. Valid Fob at reader
unlocks outside lever for momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss
of power the door will default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change
when the fire detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate
request to exit switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 8.0
Description: Exterior Sgl - Panic; Storeroom Trim
3 Hinge MPB99 NRP (qty, size per spec) US32D MK
1 Exit Device (rim, storeroom) 7100F TR627F K840 630 YA
1 Surface Closer (stop arm) 5821 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Threshold 273x292AFGPK FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Gasketing 294AV PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 29
Set: 9.0
Description: Stair; Hall Sgl - Panic; Passage Trim
3 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Exit Device (rim, passage) 7100F TR628F 630 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
Set: 10.0
Description: Main Electric Room; Loading - Panic; Card Access
3 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
3 Hinge MPB68 QC12 US26D MK
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure, RX) 7100F B TR691F K840 630 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is to remain closed, latched and secured at all times. Valid Fob at reader
unlocks outside lever for momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss
of power the door will default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change
when the fire detection/suppression systems are activated. Depressing pushrail will activate
request to exit switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 11.0
Description: Elev Machine Room - Card Access
2 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Hinge MPB68 QC12 US26D MK
1 Mortise Lock (fail-secure, RX) TRR6 8891RL K820 REX 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal 322CSN PE
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 30
1 Auto Dr Bott (surface) 4301CRL PE
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Closer Mntg Bracket 770SPB (up to 1.156"h seal) ZE
Notes: Provide knurled outside lever at hazardous locations.
Set: 12.0
Description: Service Hall from Retail Sgl - Panic; Classroom Trim
3 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Exit Device (rim, classroom) 7100 TR626F K840 630 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Sweep 57AV PE
Set: 13.0
Description: Sgl - Card Access
2 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Hinge MPB68 QC12 US26D MK
1 Mortise Lock (fail-secure, RX) TRR6 8891RL K820 REX 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at reader unlocks outside lever for
momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss of power the door will
default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire
detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate request to exit
switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 14.0
Description: Pair - Card Access
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 31
5 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Hinge MPB68 QC12 US26D MK
2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Mortise Lock (fail-secure, RX) TRR6 8891RL K820 REX 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
2 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
2 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Astragal 355CS PE
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
2 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at reader unlocks outside lever for
momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss of power the door will
default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire
detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate request to exit
switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 15.0
Description: Service Door Pair - Panic; Card Access
5 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Hinge MPB68 QC12 US26D MK
2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Exit Device (mortise, FSE, RX) 7130F B SECURE TR656F K820 630 YA
2 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
2 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
2 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A FHSL14 (or per detail) PE
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Astragal 355CS PE
1 Wiring Harness QC-Cxxx (hinge jamb to device) MK
1 Wiring Harness QC-CxxxP (hinge/strike to J-box) MK
1 Card Reader By Security Vendor 00
1 Position Switch (concealed) DPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
1 Power Supply BPS Series (coord w/ security) SU
Notes:
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at reader unlocks outside lever for
momentary access. Monitoring by door position switch. During a loss of power the door will
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 32
default to secure. Free egress at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire
detection/suppression systems are activated. Rotating inside lever will activate request to exit
switch for appropriate monitor by EAC systems. Outside key override.
Set: 16.0
Description: Gate at Reception - Passage Set
2 Spring Hinge MPS60 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Mortise Lock (passage) TRR6 8801RL 626 YA
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
2 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 17.0
Description: Office; Conference
3 Hinge MPB79 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Mortise Lock (entry) TRR6 8807RL K820 626 YA
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 18.0
Description: Restroom - Push; Pull
3 Hinge MPB68 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Push Plate 70F US32D RO
1 Door Pull 112 US32D RO
1 Surface Closer 5801 Series 689 YA
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 19.0
Description: Unit Entry – Card Access (Stand-alone, Battery-powered)
3 Hinge MPB79 (qty, size, nrp per spec) US26D MK
1 Integrated Card Reader (fail-sec) by Div 28 / Net2 Paxlock US / Galaxy Lever
PAXTON
1 Surface Closer 1101BF 689 YA
1 Door Stop 441CU (floor) / 409 (wall) US26D RO
1 Head & Jamb Seal (adhesive) S88BL PE
1 Door Bottom 3692APK773BL PE
1 Viewer 622 CRM RO
1 Threshold Per Detail 00
Notes: Provide 6-x36 630 overhead stop where wall/floor stop is not feasible. Provide 2nd
viewer at Accessible units.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 33
Operation: Door is normally closed and secured. Valid card at integrated reader unlocks outside
lever for momentary access. During a loss of power the door will default to secure. Free egress
at all times. Lock status will not change when the fire detection/suppression systems are
activated. Outside key override.
Set: 20.0
Description: Unit Bedroom/Bath Barn Door
1 Barn Door Frame & Hdwr by Door Manufacturer
2 Flush Pull 872 US26D RO
NOTE: Stop in track to be coordinated with locations of flush pulls.
Set: 21.0
Description: Unit Closet Sgl
3 Hinge (for 1-3/8" doors) 1400 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" US26D MK
1 Tubular Passage Set TRR3 RL201 626 YA
1 Door Stop 526 NP RO
Set: 22.0
Description: Unit Closet Bypass
1 Bypass Door Hdwe HBP200A PE
2 Flush Pull 872 US26D RO
Set: 23.0
Description: Misc Items
1 Extractor Tool QC-R002 MK
1 Repair Kit QC-R001 MK
1 Crimp Tool QC-R003 MK
5 Wiring Diagram Elevation & Point-to-Point YA
END OF SECTION 087100
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 1
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Glass and glazing for the following products and applications:
a. Steel doors, frames and sidelights specified in Section 081110 - HOLLOW METAL
DOORS AND FRAMES.
b. Glazed entrances and storefronts specified in Section 084110 - ALUMINUM-
FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.
c. Interior borrowed lites.
d. Unframed mirrors.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 081400 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for factory glazing for wood doors.
2. Section 085123 – FIRE-RATED STEEL WINDOWS for factory glazing for steel windows.
3. Section 085413 - FIBERGLASS WINDOWS for factory glazing for fiberglass windows.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both,
as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 2
E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and
blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As required by Code.
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically
or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4
edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
1) For monolithic-glass lites heat-treated to resist wind loads.
2) For insulating glass.
3) For laminated-glass lites.
d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 3
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick and a
nominal 1/2-inch-wide interspace.
4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 6.3 computer program for
the following methodologies:
a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12-inch- square Samples for each type of glass and glass assembly, glazing sealants.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that
manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For installers.
F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer
indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates
and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
G. Product Test Reports: For each type of glazing products:
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance..
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single
manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass.
C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-
control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 4
program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units
from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test
reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period.
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric
glazing sealants:
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data
based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility
with, glazing materials matching those submitted.
G. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing
according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20 minutes shall
be exempt from the hose-stream test, unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
certification agency] acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2
articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide
glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in
exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I
or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required
by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 5
I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide"
and GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-
A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
Insulating Glass Units."
J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and
inspecting agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
K. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup for types of windows indicated, in locations shown on Drawings.
L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to the Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-
glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 6
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to the Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to the Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS
A. Insulating-Glass Units for Vertical Glazing: 1 inch thick (25.0 mm) insulating glass consisting of
two lites of 1/4 inch (6 mm) glass, low e coating on the No. 2 surface and argon gas filled.
Provide one of the following or equal:
1. VE1-2M by Viracon.
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent.
b. Reflectance Visible Light: 11 percent.
c. U Value (Winter): 0.25.
d. Shading Coefficient: 0.43.
e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.37.
2. Solarban 60 by PPG Industries.
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent.
b. Reflectance Visible Light: 11 percent.
c. U Value (Winter): 0.29.
d. Shading Coefficient: 0.44.
e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38.
3. SN-68 by Guardian Industries.
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent.
b. Reflectance Visible Light: 10 percent.
c. U Value (Winter): 0.29.
d. Shading Coefficient: 0.43.
e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.37.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 7
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
C. Coated Float Glass: Pyrolytic and vacuum deposited coatings on glass in conformance with
ASTM C 1376.
D. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; Kind FT; 1/4
inch thick unless indicated otherwise.
E. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
1. Construction for Framed Units: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply
with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Construction for Units with Exposed Edges: Laminate glass with cast-in-place and cured-
transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick for vertical glazing, 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) thick for sloped glazing.
4. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
F. Fire-Rated Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material (Not for Doors or Locations Requiring Safety
Glazing): Proprietary product in the form of clear flat sheets of 3/16-inch nominal (5.0 mm)
thickness weighing 2.5 lb/sq. ft. and as follows:
1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material is
installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Product: "Premium FireLite" (polished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric Glass Co.,
Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products.
G. Fire-Rated Laminated Ceramic Glazing Material (for Doors and Locations Requiring Safety
Glazing): Category II safety glazing product in the form of 2 lites of clear ceramic glazing
material laminated together to produce a laminated lite of 5/16-inch nominal (8.0 mm) thickness;
polished on both surfaces; weighing 4 lb/sq. ft. and as follows:
1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the assembly in which glazing material is
installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Polished on both surfaces, transparent.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Technical Glass Products;
FireLite Plus or one of the following:
a. Safti First; Pyran Platinum L, (for maximum 90 minute-rated openings).
b. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 8
H. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by an argon-filled interspace, and complying with ASTM E2190 and with
requirements specified in this Section.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed
to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to
comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 “Performance Requirements”
paragraph.
2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.
3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-
glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly
from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit’s edge.
4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
a. Manufacturer’s Standard Sealants. Butyl primary and silicone secondary sealants.
Secondary sealant shall cover entire spacer bar at IGU perimeter.
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard spacer material. Spacer corners shall be
bent, soldered, or welded. Keyed spacer corners will not be accepted. Spacer may have
a mid-span spacer key located at the midpoint of the insulating glass unit head. Where a
mid-span spacer key is used, the key must be fully embedded (all sides) in butyl sealant.
I. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror
coating process.
1. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge.
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Verify glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
interlayer of laminated glass, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
4. Adhesives and sealants that are used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
b. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 9
1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Tremco Inc.; Spectrem 1.
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test
assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.4 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for project conditions.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire-resistance rating.
G. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 10
H. Mirror Hardware, Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return
deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and
in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 11
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware
securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as
applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GLAZING
088000 - 12
3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge
clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 1
SECTION 089000
LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Fixed extruded-aluminum louvers and frames.
2. Elevator vents.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealants installed in perimeter joints between
louver frames and adjoining construction.
2. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for louvers that are a
part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and wind loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent
deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter,
or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on
vertical projection of louvers. Loads as required by Code.
B. Seismic Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions as required by code.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 2
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. For installed louvers indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of
louver.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Louvers and Vents:
a. Airolite Company, LLC.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Greenheck.
d. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
e. McDermott Metal Works Corporation
f. Nystrom Building Products.
g. Ruskin Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,
made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head
and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 4
1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where
length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting
blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from
view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between
frame members necessary.
2.4 ELEVATOR VENTS
A. Elevator Vents: Factory-fabricated horizontal or through-wall dampered elevator vents as
detailed on the Drawings meeting local state building code requirements.
1. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard fluoropolymer finish as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s full range.
2.5 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louvers:
1. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance
requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch.
3. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Comply with requirements indicated on the Drawings.
b. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when
subjected to a rain fall rate of 3 inches per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph at a
core area intake velocity of 300 fpm.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
B. High-Performance Organic-Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer
color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying
with AAMA 2605.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.6 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening..
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 5
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6
inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2.7 INSULATED, BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core
surfaced on back and front with metal sheets.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness.
3. Insulating Core: Rigid insulation board.
4. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8-by-l-inch PVC
compression gaskets.
5. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery
of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 6
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,
where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final
cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss
of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FINISH SCHEDULE
090000 - 1
SECTION 090000
FINISH SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install finishes as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Refer to Specifications
Sections in Division 09 - FINISHES for material and installation requirements.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 093000 – TILING.
2. Section 095100 – ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.
3. Section 096510 – RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES.
4. Section 096710 – RESINOUS FLOORING
5. Section 096810 – TILE CARPETING
6. Section 099000 – PAINTING AND COATINGS.
1.3 FINISH SCHEDULE
A. The FINISH SCHEDULE follows this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not Used.
END OF SECTION
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color NotesSTAIRS1-1STAIR 1baserubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTDceiling GWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 1-2 STAIR 1 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber NosingwallsARGWB PTDceiling GWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 1-3 STAIR 1 baserubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 1-4 STAIR 1 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 2-1 STAIR 2 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTD Ptd. Perf. Mtl. GuardrailceilingGWB PTDfloor Polished ConcreteSealed/Stained2-2 STAIR 2 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTD Ptd. Perf. Mtl. GuardrailceilingGWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 2-3 STAIR 2 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTD Ptd. Perf. Mtl. GuardrailceilingGWB - PTDPTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 2-4 STAIR 2 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTD Ptd. Perf. Mtl. GuardrailceilingGWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex Page 1 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color Notes3-1 STAIR 3 base rubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber Nosingwalls ARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloor Sheet Carpet Forbo FloTex 3-2STAIR 3baserubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber NosingwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorSheet Carpet ForboFloTex 3-3STAIR 3baserubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber NosingwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorSheet Carpet ForboFloTex 3-4STAIR 3baserubberRisers/Treads: Forbo Flotex w/ Rubber NosingwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorSheet Carpet ForboFloTex TYPICAL UNIT FINISHES (ALL UNITS LEVELS 1, 2, 3, 4)101ENTRYbaseWDPTDFinishes are typical of all studio & one bedroom units201wallsGWB PTD301ceilingGWB PTD401floorLinoleum TileForboModular Series25cm x 100xm101ALIVINGbaseWDPTDFinishes are typical of all studio & one bedroom units202AwallsGWB PTD302AceilingGWB PTD402AfloorLinoleum TileForboModular Series25cm x 100xm101BBEDROOMbaseWDFinishes are typical of all studio & one bedroom units201BwallsGWB PTD301BceilingGWB PTD401BfloorLinoleum TileForboModular Series25cm x 100xm101CKITCHENbaseWDPTDFinishes are typical of all studio & one bedroom units201CwallsGWB PTD301CceilingGWB PTD401CfloorLinoleum TileForboModular Series25cm x 100xmPage 2 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color Notes101DBATHROOMbaseTile (4" x 4")Finishes are typical of all studio & one bedroom units202DwallsMRGWBPTD302DfloorTile (4" x 4")shower wallsTile (4" x 4")402DShower floorTile (2" x 2")ceilingMRGWBPTDLEVEL ONE001RETAILbasenoneFinishes typical for all retail spaceswalls GWB -(exterior walls only)PTDceilingnonefloorConcreteSealed002RETAILSee 001003RETAILSee 001004RETAILSee 001005HALLbaserubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorConcreteSealed100LOBBYbase4" tilewallsARGWB PTDFiber Cmt. PanelCembritCembonitSee plans & interior elevations for extent.ceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloor Polished ConcreteSealed/Stained100AHALLbaserubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet tilesForboFlotex12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)111HAP - RECEPTIONbaseRubberwallsGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorcarpet tileForboFlotex111AHAP OFFICE 1baseRubberwallsGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorcarpet tileForboFlotexPage 3 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color Notes111BHAP OPEN OFFICEbaseRubberwallsGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorcarpet tileForboFlotexTB111CHAP CONF. ROOMbaseRubberwallsGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorcarpet tileForboFlotexTBD111DKITCHENbaseRubberwallsGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorLinoleumForboMarmoleum112JANITORbaseRubberwallsMRGWBPTDceilingMRGWBPTDfloorConcrete113SOUTH ENTRYbase4" tilewallsARGWB PTDFiber Cmt. PanelCembritCembonitSee plans & interior elevations for extent.ceilingGWB PTDfloor Polished ConcreteSealed/Stained aluminum framed walk-off matt (recessed)114LAUNDRYbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorCarpet TileForboFlotex115MECHbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcrete116HAP/TENANT FLEXbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorCarpet TileForboFlotexPage 4 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color Notes117WOMEN'S TOILETbasePorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 13.4cm x 90cm, Estocolmo NaturalwallsMRGWBPTDceilingMRGWB PTDfloorPorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 22cm x 90cm, Estocolmo Natural118NORTH ENTRYbase4" tileSee plans & interior elevations for extent.wallsARGWB PTDFiber Cmt. PanelCembritCembonitceilingGWBPTDfloorPolished ConcreteSealed/Stainaluminum framed walk-off matt (recessed)119MEN'S TOILETbasePorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 13.4cm x 90cm, Estocolmo NaturalwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorPorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 22cm x 90cm, Estocolmo Natural120TEL/DATAbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealed121ALL GENDER TOILETbasePorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 13.4cm x 90cm, Estocolmo NaturalwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorPorcelain PlankPorcelanosaSton-ker 22cm x 90cm, Estocolmo Natural122MAINTENANCEbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealed123ELECTRICALbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcrete124LOADINGbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealed125UNASSIGNEDbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealedPage 5 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color NotesLEVEL 2200LOBBYbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTex12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)200AHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexTBD12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)200CHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexTBD12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)222JANITORbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcrete223EMRbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcrete224NOT USED225TEL/DATAbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcrete226NOT USED227ELECTRICALbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcretePage 6 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color NotesLEVEL 3300LOBBYbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTex12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)300AHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexTBD12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)300CHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTex12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)319LAUNDRYwallsARGWB PTDceilingGWB PTDfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexbaseRubber322JANITORbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealer323UTILITYbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealer324NOT USED325TEL/DATAbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealer326NOT USED327ELECTRICALbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWEBPTDfloorConcreteSealerPage 7 of 8
LIVE 155 - FINISH SCHEDULEISSUED: 08-03-2016Rm. # Room Name Item Material Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color NotesLEVEL 4400LOBBYbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorCarpet TileForboFloTex12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)400AHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexTBD12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)400CHALLbaseRubberwallsARGWB PTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorCarpet TileForboFloTexTBD12" Flotex Border (see plans for extent)422JANITORbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealer423UTILITYbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceiling Suspended ACT Certainteed Performa, Symphony M9/16" ceiling gridfloorConcreteSealer424NOT USED425TEL/DATAbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealer426NOT USED427ELECTRICALbaseRubberwallsGWBPTDceilingGWBPTDfloorConcreteSealerPage 8 of 8
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 1
SECTION 092110
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Acoustic insulation in gypsum wallboard assemblies.
4. Installation of access panels.
5. Marking and identification for fire- and smoke-partitions.
6. Vapor retarder at interior of exterior walls.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING for load-bearing steel framing.
2. Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY, TRUSSES, AND JOISTS for wood framing.
3. Section 083110 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES for installation in gypsum board
assemblies.
4. Section 092120 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES for framing, gypsum
panels, other components of shaft wall assemblies, and finishing gypsum board shaft wall
assemblies.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide fire stop tracks capable of withstanding deflection within limits
and under conditions indicated.
1. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure.
B. UL Designs:
1. Unit ceiling assemblies to be UL L570.
2. Corridor ceiling assemblies to be UL L570 (floors 2-5 only).
C. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions,
smoke barriers, smoke partitions and other walls required to have protected openings or
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 2
penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such
identification shall:
1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; and
2. Locate within 15 feet of end of each wall and repeat at intervals not exceeding 30 feet
measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and
3. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8 inch stroke in
contrasting color, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE
BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or other wording.
4. Exception: Walls in Group R-2 occupancies that do not have a removable decorative
ceiling allowing access to the concealed space.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: If materials and systems other than those specified and those indicated on the
Drawings are proposed for use, submit shop drawings signed and sealed by a structural
engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project certifying proposed systems meet code
requirements, project requirements and the following deflection criteria:
1. For gypsum board assemblies without applied rigid finishes L/240; for gypsum board
assemblies with applied rigid finishes such as tile, stone, wood paneling L/360. Lateral
load 5 psf except at shafts. Lateral load at shafts shall be required based on analysis of
equipment and systems using shaft.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Drywall Recycling: All new paper-faced gypsum wallboard scrap (cuts from construction but not
demolition waste) shall be recycled by Gypsum Recycling America LLC or approved equal.
D. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 3
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
B. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
C. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
D. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
2. Basis-of-Design: RC Deluxe 3 by Clark Dietrich.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 4
E. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: Provide galvanized steel and resilient material sound-isolation
clips, equal to the following:
1. Kinetics Noise Control Co.; IsoMax.
2. Basis-of-Design: PAC International, Inc.; RSIC-1.
3. Pliteq, Inc.; GenieClip.
F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
G. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
H. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow
fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
2.2 VAPOR RETARDER AT INTERIOR WALLS
A. VaporRetarder: MemBrain Continuous Air Barrier & Smart Vapor Retarder by CertainTeed; 2
mil polyamide, ASTM E96 1 perm or less permeance using the dry cup method, increasing to
greater than 10 perms using the wet cup method.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. USG Corporation.
2. Georgia-Pacific (G-P) Gypsum LLC.
3. National Gypsum Company.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Fire-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Flexible Type: ASTM C 1396. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than
standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 5
F. Abuse-Resistant Type: ASTM C 1629. Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface
indentation and through-penetration (impact resistance) than standard, regular-type and Type X
gypsum board.
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
G. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-
resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
c. National Gypsum Company; Permabase Cement Board.
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
e. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 6
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Type W Bugle Head screws for attachment to wood framing.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 7
E. Acoustical Sealant: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
c. USG Corporation.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
3. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2.8 IDENTIFICATION LABELS FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A. Identification Labels: Vinyl adhesive signs, to comply with applicable local Code.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fire Wall Signs, Inc.
b. Marking & Identification Tape (mnitape.com).
c. My Safety Sign.
d. Safety Supply Warehouse.
2. Text: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Install vapor retarders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install vapor retarders continuously at locations on walls as indicated on the drawings. Ensure
there are no discontinuities in vapor retarder at seams and penetrations.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 8
1. Install vapor retarders in largest practical widths.
2. Ensure surface behind vapor retarder is smooth with no sharp projections.
3. Join sections of vapor retarder and seal penetrations in vapor retarder with mastic tape.
Ensure vapor retarder surfaces to receive mastic tape are clean and dry.
4. Immediately repair holes in vapor retarder with self-adhesive repair tape.
5. Seal around pipes and other penetrations in vapor retarder with pipe boots in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 9
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
B. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
D. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent
to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile, with joints
treated to comply with ANSI A108.11.
B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install at areas not subject to wetting and elsewhere as
indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 10
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: Panel surfaces that will be exposed to view (typical panels).
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Permanently install as required by
Code.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit mold growth. Repair of
damaged panels in place is not acceptable.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 11
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 1
SECTION 092120
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
2. Marking and identification for fire- and smoke-partitions.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 083110 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
2. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for non-shaft-wall gypsum board
assemblies.
3. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for applying and finishing panels in
gypsum board assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for
gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance:
1. Provide gypsum board shaft wall assemblies capable of withstanding the full air-pressure
loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions without failing and while maintaining an
airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits
indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end-reaction shear
causing track (runners) to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled.
2. Provide gypsum board shaft wall assemblies for horizontal duct enclosures capable of
spanning distances indicated within deflection limits indicated.
B. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions,
smoke barriers, smoke partitions and other walls required to have protected openings or
penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such
identification shall:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 2
1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; and
2. Locate within 15 feet of end of each wall and repeat at intervals not exceeding 30 feet
measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and
3. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8 inch stroke in
contrasting color, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE
BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or other wording.
4. Exception: Walls in Group R-2 occupancies that do not have a removable decorative
ceiling allowing access to the concealed space.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft wall assembly indicated.
B. Fire-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
substantiating each gypsum board shaft wall assembly's required fire-resistance rating.
1. Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate each
gypsum board shaft wall assembly do not negate fire-resistance rating.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from FM's
"Approval Guide, Building Products," UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," or ITS's "Directory
of Listed Products."
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For gypsum board shaft wall assemblies indicated to have STC
ratings, provide assembly materials and construction complying with requirements of
assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 01. Review methods and procedures for installing work related to gypsum board shaft
wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Fasteners proposed for anchoring steel framing to building structure.
2. Sprayed fire-resistive materials applied to structural framing.
3. Elevator equipment, including hoistway doors, elevator call buttons, and elevator floor
indicators.
4. Wiring devices in shaft wall assemblies.
5. Doors and other items penetrating shaft wall assemblies.
6. Items supported by shaft wall-assembly framing.
7. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft wall assemblies.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 3
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat on leveled supports off the ground to prevent sagging.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures, and ventilation
specified in Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum Co.
2. G-P Gypsum Corp.
3. National Gypsum Company.
4. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-
rated assemblies indicated.
1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645.
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized coating.
C. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch thickness and with
moisture-resistant paper faces.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated.
E. Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES comply with gypsum board shaft wall
assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
F. Gypsum Wallboard Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Section 092110
- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
G. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 4
H. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress
of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated fasteners with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shaft wall assemblies,
as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according
to ASTM E 1190.
2. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion anchors with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft wall
assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency according to ASTM E 488.
I. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly
adhering gypsum face-layer panels and gypsum-base face-layer panels to backing-layer panels
in multilayer construction.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
J. Acoustical Sealant: As recommended by gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer for
application indicated.
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
K. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock
wool.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL
A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
B. Sustained Air-Pressure Loads: 5 lbf/sq. ft.
C. Deflection Limit: L/240.
D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members
and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with
structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated.
E. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with
manufacturer, but at least 2 inches in depth matching studs.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with
structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 5
F. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth
matching studs, and not less than 0.0341 inch thick.
G. Room-Side and Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated.
H. STC Rating: As indicated.
I. Cavity Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION LABELS FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A. Identification Labels: Vinyl adhesive signs, to comply with applicable local Code.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fire Wall Signs, Inc.
b. Marking & Identification Tape (mnitape.com).
c. My Safety Sign.
d. Safety Supply Warehouse.
2. Text: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer
present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway doorframes, cast-in anchors, and
structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum shaft wall assemblies so both
elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive
materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies to comply with
requirements specified in Section 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING.
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 6
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-
resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the
following:
1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing and gypsum shaft wallboard.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints
with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft
wall assembly framing.
1. At elevator hoistway doorframes, provide jamb struts on each side of doorframe.
2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide
galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel.
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies by locating cavity of
assemblies where required to enclose rods.
E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing
supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes
containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
F. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while
maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
G. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies.
H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it
abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant
to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain
an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with manufacturer's written instructions or
ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent.
I. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 2
inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft,
install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections.
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in
adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to
shaft wall framing.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092120 - 7
2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24
inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to the shaft wall framing.
3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: Panel surfaces that will be exposed to view (typical panels).
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
3.5 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Permanently install as required by
Code.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit mold growth. Repair of
damaged panels in place is not acceptable.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 1
SECTION 093000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Floor tile.
2. Wall tile.
3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
4. Waterproofing and crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations.
5. Elastomeric sealants for expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
surfaces.
6. Surface preparation for tile and accessories.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for monolithic slab finishes specified for
tile substrates.
2. Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing of joints between dissimilar materials.
3. Section 083110 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES for installation in tile.
4. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for cementitious backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
B. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined
by the test protocol provided in ANSI A137.1, Section 9.6.
1. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each
color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use
grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for
each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Waterproofing.
3. Joint sealants.
4. Metal edge strips.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid additives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 3
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Tile Types: Provide tiles as indicated on the Finish Legend.
B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
3. Large Format Tiles are defined as more than 12 inches in any nominal dimension.
C. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and
coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's
standard shapes.
G. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
extruded aluminum exposed-edge material, with clear anodized satin finish.
1. Available Manufacturer: Schluter Systems.
H. Marble Thresholds: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining,
ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and
with honed finish. Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition
between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit
height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
I. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Waterproofing and Crack Suppression Membrane: System
consisting of liquid-latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), and fabric reinforcement.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 4
1. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane with fabric
reinforcing.
2. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete Hydroban Waterproof Membrane with fabric
reinforcing.
3. MAPEI Corporation; Aqua Defense with fabric reinforcing.
4. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000 with fabric reinforcing.
J. Acoustic Underlayment and Crack Suppression Adhesive: Provide a sound abatement and
crack suppression adhesive complying with ANSI A118.12, extra heavy rating and a minimum
ΔIIC of 15:
1. Basis-of-Design: Laticrete 125 Sound & Crack Adhesive by LATICRETE International,
Inc.
2. Service Rating per ASTM C 627: Extra Heavy
3. Delta Impact Insulation Class per ΔIIC; ASTM E 2179: 15.
4. Point Load per ANSI A118.12 5.2: >1,000 psi.
5. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.12): 100psi.
K. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
L. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Laticrete International, Inc.
e. MAPEI Corporation.
f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
a. For glass tile wall applications, provide white color mortar.
M. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 5
N. Joint Grout, Epoxy Type: Provide chemical resistant, water cleanable, tile grouting epoxy,
conforming to ANSI A118.3, as follows:
1. Available Product: Laticrete SpectraLock Pro Grout.
2. Colors: A selection of at least fourteen standard colors plus black, white, and natural
must be available for Architect's selection.
O. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
P. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 -
JOINT SEALANTS.
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1. Available Products:
a. Custom Building Products; 100 Silicone Caulk.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
c. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1. Available Products:
a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550.
b. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 245.
c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan.
d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 6
2.3 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors that comply with flatness tolerances specified in
referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 7
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to
substrate.
B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 8
C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine
that it is watertight.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including
those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting
bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile
Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-
bed standards.
1. Glass Wall Tile Installation: Comply with tile manufacturer’s recommendations for setting
beds and grouts.
2. Large Format Wall Tile Installation: Comply with tile manufacturer’s recommendations for
setting beds and grouts.
a. Substrate Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/8 in. in 10 ft. and 1/16 in. in 2 ft.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILING
093000 - 9
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed. After seven days, cover areas subject to construction traffic with heavy cardboard.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.8 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. This schedule refers to Tile Installation Methods specified in the TCNA Manual. Refer to Finish
Schedule for Tile Product Types.
B. Floor Tile Installation Method FT-1: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar;
TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
3. Joint Width: 1/16 inch.
C. Wall Tile Installation Method WT-1: Not used.
D. Wall Tile Installation Method WT-2: Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units; thin-
set mortar; TCA W244C and ANSI A108.5.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
3. Joint Width: 1/16 inch.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 1
SECTION 095100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Acoustical ceiling tiles and panels.
2. Suspension systems, grid systems and ceiling hangers.
3. Acoustical sealant at edge moldings at acoustical ceilings.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for gypsum board ceilings and soffits.
2. Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION for fire-suppression components located in ceilings.
3. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for air handling and
distribution components located in ceilings.
4. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for light fixture and alarm system components located in
ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place
anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in
other Sections.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 2
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D. Asbestos Certification: Manufacturer's written certification that acoustical ceiling products
contain no asbestos (0.0000%). Product labels indicating that it is the user's responsibility to
test the products for asbestos are unacceptable and sufficient cause for rejection of the product
on site.
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension Systems: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264
for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 3
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturer: USG, Armstrong, or CertainTeed Ceilings.
B. Basis-of-Design: CertainTeed Performa, Symphony “M”, narrow reveal, curved bevel with
CertainTeed 9/16 in. grid.
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
1. Manufacturer: USG, Armstrong, CertainTeed Ceilings, or Chicago Metallic.
2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
3. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
4. Face Design: Flat, flush.
5. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
6. Color: White, prefinished.
7. Grid Face Width: As specified with ACT type.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as
applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency; zinc-plated for Class
SC1 service.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 4
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106 diameter wire.
D. Hold-Down Clips: At vestibules and areas subject to wind uplift, provide manufacturer's
standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches on all cross tees.
2.3 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's
standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
B. Suspension Trim: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Axiom.
2. CertainTeed Ceilings; Approved equal.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Compasso.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for
sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 5
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Space hangers not more than 48 o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 6
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
2. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 1
SECTION 096510
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Linoleum tile/plank floor covering.
2. Resilient stair accessories.
3. Resilient wall base and accessories.
4. Substrate preparation for resilient flooring and accessories.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 096810 - TILE CARPETING for carpet accessories.
2. Section 096820 – SHEET CARPETING for carpet accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of
seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient flooring required.
1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not
less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.
D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure
behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LINOLEUM TILE/PLANK FLOOR COVERING
A. Floor Tile: ASTM F 2195, Type I, linoleum floor tile with fibrous backing.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Forbo Flooring, Inc.
3. Tarkett Inc.
B. Basis-of-Design: Madulan Line Series by Forbo; T5225 “Compressed Time” or other standard
color as selected by the Architect.
C. Thickness: 2.5mm
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Size: 25cm by 100cm.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Burke Flooring Products.
3. Johnsonite, a division of Tarkett.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 3
4. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.
5. Nora Systems, Inc.
6. Roppe Corporation.
B. Style and Colors: As indicated on the Finish Legend.
C. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
D. Shape: Straight (toeless) at carpet and coved at resilient flooring.
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F. Height: 4 inches.
G. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H. Outside Corners: Premolded.
I. Inside Corners: Premolded.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.3 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
A. Nosing:
1. Burke Flooring Products.
2. Endura
3. Johnsonite, a division of Tarkett.
4. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
5. Nora Systems, Inc.
6. Roppe Corporation.
B. Basis-of-Design: SLN-XX by Johnsonite, color as selected by the Architect.
C. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Types Include the Following as Applicable: Cap for cove carpet, cap for cove resilient sheet
floor covering, carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient
floor covering, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, joiner for tile and carpet
1. Burke Flooring Products.
2. Endura
3. Johnsonite, a division of Tarkett.
4. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
5. Nora Systems, Inc.
6. Roppe Corporation.
B. Material: Rubber.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 4
C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread
manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of
flooring.
3. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 5
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer
of flooring.
4. Relative Humidity Testing:
a. Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise
required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.
5. Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, doorframes, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 6
F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint
between units.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 7
1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive,
and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Coordinate selection of floor polish with the Owner’s maintenance service.
2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or
plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILE CARPETING
096810 - 1
SECTION 096810
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Modular carpet tile.
2. Carpet accessories.
3. Substrate preparation for carpet and accessories.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES for resilient wall base
and accessories installed with carpet.
2. Section 096820 - SHEET CARPETING for broadloom carpet and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3. Type of subfloor.
4. Type of installation.
5. Pattern of installation.
6. Pattern type, location, and direction.
7. Pile direction.
8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILE CARPETING
096810 - 2
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpeting Standard: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute’s “CRI Carpet Installation
Standard,” 2011 edition, formerly CRI 104 “Standard For Installation Specification Of
Commercial Carpet.”
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7, "Site Conditions."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILE CARPETING
096810 - 3
D. Where equipment or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet
tiles before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent
loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Basis-of-Design: Flowtex by Forbo.
B. Size: 20 in. by 20 in.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C. Transitions: WA transition by Forbo.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 9, “Testing
Concrete Substrates.” Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILE CARPETING
096810 - 4
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of
flooring.
3. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer
of flooring.
4. Relative Humidity Testing:
a. Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise
required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.
5. Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 18, "Modular Carpet," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive
adhesive.
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TILE CARPETING
096810 - 5
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element and HEPA filter.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 20,
"Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET CARPETING
096820 - 1
SECTION 096820
SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Carpet for direct glue-down installation.
2. Carpet accessories.
3. Substrate preparation for carpet and accessories.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES for resilient wall base
and accessories installed with carpet.
2. Section 096810 - TILE CARPETING for carpet tiles and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate required.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
3. Seam locations, types, and methods.
4. Type of subfloor.
5. Type of installation.
6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
7. Pile direction.
8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET CARPETING
096820 - 2
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-long Samples.
3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpeting Standard: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute’s “CRI Carpet Installation
Standard,” 2011 edition, formerly CRI 104 “Standard For Installation Specification Of
Commercial Carpet.”
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7, "Site Conditions."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET CARPETING
096820 - 3
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install
carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent
loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Basis-of-Design: Flotex “Metro” by Forbo.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET CARPETING
096820 - 4
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 9, “Testing
Concrete Substrates.” Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet
manufacturer.
2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of
flooring.
3. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer
of flooring.
4. Relative Humidity Testing:
a. Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise
required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.
5. Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SHEET CARPETING
096820 - 5
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 13,
"Direct Glue-Down Installation."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element and HEPA filter.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 20, "Protecting
Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 1
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.
2. Field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation for painting.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING for shop priming structural steel.
2. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Section 055100 - METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS for shop priming ferrous metal.
4. Section 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for shop priming interior
architectural woodwork.
5. Section 074610 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING for factory priming siding and trim.
6. Section 081110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES for factory priming steel
doors and frames.
7. Section 081400 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for factory finishing.
8. Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for surface preparation of gypsum
board.
1.3 DEFINITIONS AND EXTENT
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 2
B. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork.
b. Toilet enclosures.
c. Kitchen appliances.
d. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
e. Elevator equipment.
f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
g. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
g. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper and copper alloys.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 3
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
3. Submit two eight inch by 12 inch Samples for each type of finish coating for Architect's
review of color and texture only.
C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Mockups: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate
required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample
Submittals.
1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each type of coating and substrate.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.
b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after
permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide
required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 4
a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate
coating systems of a similar nature.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work are listed in the Finish Schedule at the end of this Section.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 5
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Refer to Finish Schedule.
D. VOC Content for Interior Paints and Coatings: Products shall comply with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the
following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 6
1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions and technical bulletins for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 7
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Exterior Exposed Steel: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP
6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall
exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime cleaned surfaces within 8
hours and prior to surface rusting.
b. Interior Exposed Steel, in Humid Environments: Clean steel surfaces in
accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive
blast cleaned surfaces shall exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime
cleaned surfaces within 8 hours and prior to surface rusting.
c. Interior Exposed Steel, in Dry Environments: Clean steel surfaces in accordance
with SSPC-SP2 or SP3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP16 Brush
off Blast Cleaning of Galvanized Steel and NonFerrous Metals, to achieve a minimum 1
mil anchor profile.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 8
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors and doors in wet areas on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same
as exterior faces.
9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 9
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboards.
3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by the Architect.
3. The Architect may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously
coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove
noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,
the two coatings are incompatible.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 10
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Schedule: Provide products and number of coats specified. Use of manufacturer's proprietary
product names to designate colors, materials, generic class, standard of quality and
performance criteria and is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to
the exclusion of equivalent performing products of other manufacturers.
B. Exterior Paint Schedule:
1. Exterior Galvanized Metal (not shop-finished under Section 051200 - STRUCTURAL
STEEL FRAMING, Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS, or Section 055100 -
METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS), Alliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane System:
a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP16 Brush-off Blast of Galvanized Steel.
b. One Coat:
1) Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 mils DFT.
2) PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 4.0-5.0 mils DFT.
3) Dupont 25P High Solids at 4.0 mils DFT.
4) International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
c. And One Coat:
1) Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT.
2) PPG PMC Amercoat 450H Polyurethane at 3.0 mils DFT.
3) Dupont Imron 2.8 Urethane at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
4) International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
2. Exterior Fiber-Reinforced Cement Board, for Painted Finish:
a. Factory Primed per Section 074610 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING.
b. Two Coats, Flat Finish:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 11
1) Duron Weathershield Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat House Paint 34-914.
2) PPG Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex 72 line, N105 or 183.
3) S-W SuperPaint Exterior Latex Acrylic Flat A80 series.
4) California Paint Fresh Coat 100& Acrylic Velvet Flat 450 series.
or
c. Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish:
1) Duron Weathershield Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss House Paint.
2) PPG Sun-Proof Exterior Semi-Gloss Latex 78 line, N096 or 170.
3) S-W SuperPaint Exterior Latex Acrylic Satin A89 series.
4) California Paint Fresh Coat Satin-Gloss 100% Acrylic 471 series.
C. Interior Paint Schedule:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard, Latex Paint Finish:
a. One Coat, Primer:
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Wall Primer.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
b. And Two Coats, Flat Finish: At ceilings, and elsewhere as indicated.
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat 373.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Flat.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Flat.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Flat 633.
or
c. And Two Coats, Eggshell Finish: At walls, and elsewhere as indicated.
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell 374.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Eggshell.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Eggshell.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Eggshell 631.
or
d. And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish: At toilet rooms, other wet areas, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 12
2. Interior Architectural Woodwork, Finish Carpentry, and Wood Doors (softwoods, paint
grade hardwoods, MDF, MDO, and hardwood veneers), Latex Paint Finish:
a. One Coat, Primer:
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Primer.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
b. And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss:
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi Gloss 663.
3. Interior Concrete Masonry Units in Dry Areas, Latex Paint Finish:
a. One Coat:
1) PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 6-15 or 6-16.
2) S-W Loxon Block Surfacer.
3) California Paint Pro Block Filler 515-00.
b. And Two Coats:
1) PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
2) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
3) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
4. Interior Metals (Not specified to receive other coating systems/not shop finished), Latex
Painted Finish:
a. One Coat: Approved primer, in shop under other Sections (where specified). If not
shop primed, provide primer recommended by finish coating manufacturer.
b. And Two Coats:
1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
2) Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
5) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
5. Concrete Floor, Clear Exposed Sealer:
a. One Coat:
1) Curecrete Chemical; Ashford Formula.
2) Chem Probe; CT Denisifyer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 13
3) WR Meadows; Liqui-Hard.
4) L&M; Sealhard.
6. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint all exposed items throughout the project except
factory finished items with factory-applied baked enamel finishes which occur in
mechanical rooms or areas, and excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and
aluminum other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork and inner portion of all
ductwork. Same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SIGNAGE
101400 - 1
SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Code-required interior panel signage, including but not limited to, accessibility signage,
toilet room signage and mechanical and electrical room signage.
2. Unit signage.
3. Exterior building signage.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for illuminated exit signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
artwork, and braille layout.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color
selected:
1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.
2. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project.
D. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in
maintenance manuals.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SIGNAGE
101400 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board,
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which
they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage
devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be
used for attaching signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses,
finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction as indicated. Produce
smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance
of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Provide the following:
1. Code-Required Signs for Certificate of Occupancy:
a. Type: Photopolymer on acrylic or printed acrylic / aluminum as applicable.
b. Color: Custom color as selected.
c. Type Size: As selected.
d. Typeface: As selected.
2. Interior Signs Based on Owner’s Requirements:
a. Type: Photopolymer on acrylic or printed acrylic as applicable.
b. Color: Custom color as selected.
c. Type Size: As selected.
d. Typeface: As selected.
3. Exterior Signs:
a. Type: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with
ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2
braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SIGNAGE
101400 - 3
1. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch
C. Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 6-inch- high symbol fabricated from opaque nonreflective
vinyl film, 0.0035-inch nominal thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for
both exterior and interior applications.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not corrosive
to sign material and mounting surface.
B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that items provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate
signs.
C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to
comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:
1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SIGNAGE
101400 - 4
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102110 - 1
SECTION 102110
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments and screens, floor-mounted and overhead braced.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES for partition mounted accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch-
square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of Massachusetts Architectural
Access Board and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) for compartment door operating hardware and compartments
designated as accessible."
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102110 - 2
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of ICC A117.1 and the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) for
compartment door operating hardware and compartments designated as accessible."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without
field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with the work of Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for locations requiring
wood blocking or flat plate reinforcing within partitions for compartment mounting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
3. Flush Metal Partition Corp.
4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
5. Global Steel Products Corp.
6. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
7. Metpar Corp.
B. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with
melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately
laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch-thick doors and
pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch-thick panels.
1. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units.
2. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at
locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
C. Urinal-Screen Construction:
1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Wall-mounted, matching panel construction.
D. Brackets and Fittings: Manufacturer's standard design.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102110 - 3
1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type Brackets: Stainless steel.
2. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch
nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.
3. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on exposed faces. Protect
exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective
covering before shipment.
E. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Apply one color in each room.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
2. Core Color: Manufacturer’s standard dark color core.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Floor-Mounted, Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes
at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-
wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height
brackets.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102110 - 4
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Floor-Mounted, Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten.
Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each
pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels,
and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units
level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors and doors in entrance screens to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 1
SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Corner guards.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS.
2. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long.
C. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum
condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include
precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to
plastic finishes and performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-
resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Sections.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 2
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers
inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and
humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the
period plastic materials are stored.
2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.
3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic
material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning
installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,
and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
C. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to
substrate indicated.
D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
3. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 3
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from 1-piece, formed or extruded metal
with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Boston Retail Products.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
e. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International Corporation.
f. Pawling Corporation.
2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0781 inch.
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.
4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces
free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
2.4 METAL FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 4
2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directionally textured finishes with long dimension of each piece.
C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.
D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,
and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment
of support fasteners.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall
protection system components.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be
visible in the finished Work.
1. Provide mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete
installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
SECTION 102800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Toilet accessories as scheduled on the Drawings. Coordinate with Owner for
accessories provided by Owner.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for blocking.
2. Section 088000 - GLAZING for frameless mirrors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-
inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-
and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
LIVE 155 - TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE ISSUED: JUNE 3, 2016 # Item Manufacturer Line/Product # Finish/Color NotesTA #1 - Public Toilet Rooms1Grab BarsBobrickB-5806Stainless Satin PeenedIncluded on A4102 Toilet Paper Dispenser Bobrick B-686 Stainless Satin Included on A4103 Combination Paper Towel/ Waste Receptical Bobrick B-3903 Stainless Included on A4104 Sanitary Disposal (Women's Room Only) Bobrick B-354 Stainless Satin Included on A4105Coat hookBobrickB-542Stainless SatinIncluded on A4106 Soap Dispenser Bobrick B-8226 Stainless Bright Included on A4107 Hand DryerXleratorStainless Brushed Included on A4108 Changing Station Koala Kare KB110-SSRE Stinless Included on A4109 MirrorBobrick B-1556 Stainless Included on A410TA #2 - Group 2A Unit Bathroom1 Toilet Paper Dispenser Ginger Hotelier 306 Polished Chrome2Medicine CabinetBobrickB-397Stainless3 Shower Curtain Rod Ginger 1139R Polished Chrome3A Shower Rod Brackets Ginger 4839B Polished Chrome4 Towel BarGinger Hotelier 0301 Polished Chrome5 Towel RingGinger Hotelier 0305 Polished Chrome6 Shower shelf Ginger Hotelier 554G Polished Chrome7 Grab BarsBobrick B-5806 Satin Stainless8 Shower Seat Bobrick B-5191TA #3 Typical Unit Bathroom1Toilet Paper DispenserGingerHotelier 306Polished Chrome2Medicine CabinetBobrickB-397Stainless3Shower Curtain RodGinger1129RPolished Chrome3AShower Rod BracketsGinger4839BPolished Chrome4Towel BarGingerHotelier 0301Polished Chrome5Towel RingGingerHotelier 0305Polished Chrome6Shower ShelfGingerHotelier 554GPolished ChromeTA #4 Janitor's Closet1 Mop Holder Bobrick B-223
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 1
SECTION 104400
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each item.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
and mounting bracket indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. JL Industries, Inc.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
3. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E. Door Material: Steel sheet with baked enamel finish, color as selected.
F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
G. Door Glazing: Tempered glass.
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
I. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 3
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or baked-enamel finish.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-
rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material.
a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Contractor shall be responsible for
fire extinguisher tagging by a certified service technician located within 75 miles of the project.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated on the
Drawings and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RATED CABINETS
A. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD.
Center pipe within knockout.
B. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078410 -
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties
are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 5
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-
protection cabinet manufacturer.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 1
SECTION 105500
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. USPS-approved mail receptacles.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for lock cylinders for postal specialties that are
keyed to building keying system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
postal specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Include identification sequence for compartments.
2. Include layout of identification text.
3. Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages installed as part of the work of other Sections.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch
square Samples.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS
regulations, signed by product manufacturer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of
each corresponding lock and key number.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed and semirecessed postal specialties with wall
construction.
B. Templates: Obtain templates for installing postal specialties and distribute to parties involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated, and
as follows:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
B. Die-Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 85, manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy.
C. Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55, hot-dip galvanized.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 USPS-APPROVED MAIL RECEPTACLES
A. USPS-Approved Mail Receptacles: Consisting of multiple compartments, enclosed within
recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of
unit as indicated. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging
compartment door. Comply with USPS-STD-4C, unless indicated otherwise.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Eagle Mailboxes.
b. American Postal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Postal Products Unlimited, Inc.
c. Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company.
d. Bommer Industries, Inc.
e. Jensen Industries.
f. Salsbury Industries.
g. Security Manufacturing Corporation.
2. Basis-of-Design: Florence 4C line
3. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed
to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master-door lock.
a. Master-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster.
5. Rear-Loading Cover: Not required.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 3
6. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each with lock and
tenant identification as required by cited standard.
a. Compartment-Door Locks, USPS Delivery: Comply with USPS-L-1172C,
PSIN O910, for locks and keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS; with three
keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently.
b. Tenant Identification: Identification engraved into face of compartment door, four
digits each door.
7. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested
units, with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment.
8. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors.
9. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with
manufacturer's standard finish.
10. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows:
a. Anodic Finish: Silver/Clear.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Letter Drops (Through Wall): Consisting of 11-inch-wide by 3-1/2-inch- high, top-hinged, spring-
loaded flap that pivots inward, held in place by 1-inch- wide face frame. Fabricated from 1/4-
inch- thick aluminum or steel, with exposed surfaces finished to match adjacent mail
receptacles.
1. Sleeve: Provide steel wall sleeve for full depth of wall.
2. Finished Frame: Provide finished face frame on back side of wall opening.
3. Identification: Engrave face of swinging flap with 1-inch- high letters as directed by
Owner.
4. Exposed Material and Finish: Exposed surfaces fabricated from same material and finish
as adjacent mail receptacles.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid,
and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal
edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal
specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.
B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration.
D. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where
fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.
E. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed
surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 4
F. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or
mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to
support loads.
G. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for roughing-in
openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls and other adjacent construction for suitable conditions where units will be
installed.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions and roughing-in drawings.
1. Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
3. Comply with USPS Publications. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS
depends on compliance with USPS requirements.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they
have been installed according to USPS regulations.
B. Obtain written final approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval
from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended
by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 5
C. Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal
specialty manufacturer.
D. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRE CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
105720 - 1
SECTION 105720
WIRE CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Wire shelving at closets and utility/storage closets.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTY for blocking and nailers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of shelving indicated. Include installation details, materials,
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples: For each type of shelving material, 12 inches long, in specified finish.
C. Shelving Schedule: Provide complete shelving schedule, including types, locations, sizes, and
other data pertinent to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain shelving and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver storage shelving palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Schulte Corporation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRE CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
105720 - 2
B. Refer to Section 090000 - UNIT FINISH SCHEDULE.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Series: “Lifetime Ventilated Series 1110-1212-11 Shelf with Hanging Rod”
1. 12-inch Shelf: Model No. 1710-1212-11
2. Clip with TriLoc II Anchor Versa: Model No. 1435-6620-11
3. Sidewall Bracket with TriLoc II Anchor: Model No. 1435-6621-11
4. Support Brace: Model No. 1435-6659-11
B. ADA Series: “Series 1210-1212-11 Storage Shelf”
2.3 SHELVING
A. Wire Shelves: One (1) shelf with hanging rod to be provided. Top Shelf to be full width of closet.
1. Shelf Depth: 12 inches.
B. ADA Wire Shelves: Four (4) additional 18” wide stacked shelves located to one side of closet
below top shelf with Series 1210-1212-11 Storage Shelves.
1. Storage Shelves to begin 16” from floor and stacked at 13” intervals (16”, 29”, 42”, and
55”)
C. Materials:
1. Steel Rod: Grade C 1008 cold drawn steel rod. Tensile strength of 100 ksi.
2. Front Rods and Studs: 0.306 inch diameter.
3. Back Rods: 0.243 inch diameter.
4. Cross Wires:
a. 1 Inch Spacing: 0.120 inch diameter for one inch spaced standard 20 inches shelf.
0.120 inch diameter for one inch spaced standard mesh shelf.
b. 1/2 Inch Spacing: .0915 inch diameter for one-half inch spaced tight mesh shelf.
D. Components:
1. Hanging Shelf with Open Slide: 12 inches deep by length as shown on Drawings.
2. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard components including anchor clips, end
brackets, angled support braces and end caps, including the following:
a. Side Wall Bracket: As required. Shelf side wall interface.
b. Anchor Back Clips.
c. Fasteners, clips, caps and touch-up all as required.
d. Down Back Clips.
E. Finish: Electrostatic applied oven cured epoxy at all surfaces to 3 to 5 mil (0.075 to 0.127 mm)
thickness.
1. Color: Pure White
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRE CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
105720 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing wire shelving.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TIEBACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS
110140 - 1
SECTION 110140
TIEBACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Tie back and lifeline anchors for window cleaning and exterior maintenance applications.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
2. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS.
3. Section 075400 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, installation instructions, use
limitations and recommendations for window washing equipment and accessories specified.
Provide certifications stating that products comply with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication, layout, and configuration of the system,
including all installation and erection of all parts of the work, and including all accessories. Shop
drawings shall meet the relevant health and safety standards of all agencies having jurisdiction.
Shop drawings shall identify necessary restrictive and non-restrictive working usage notes and
general safety notes.
1. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items.
Provide installation templates for work installed by others.
2. Show the general arrangement of all components, clearances and principal dimensions,
assemblies of window washing equipment.
3. Include weights of components and maximum loads and spacings.
4. Include the seal of a qualified professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
the jurisdiction where Project is located.
5. As part of shop drawings, include a safety inspection log book for yearly inspections.
6. Submit two copies of as-built shop drawings showing anchor locations and details. This
drawing shall be posted near exits onto the roof.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit operation and maintenance data.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TIEBACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS
110140 - 2
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Strictly comply with applicable codes, regulations, and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, including but not limited to the following:
1. OSHA 1910.66 Subpart F, "Powered Platforms" and Subpart I "Fall Protection".
2. OSHA 1910.66 Subpart D, "Walking and Working Surfaces and Personal Protective
Equipment (Fall Protection Systems).
3. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards and 29 CFR 1910.306 -
Specific Purpose Equipment and Installations.
4. AISC Specifications.
5. AWS D1.1.
1.5 DESIGN
A. The equipment supplier is responsible for the design and erection of equipment and anchors
and for all coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work
of all trades. The equipment supplier shall verify all dimensions of the building that relate to
fabrication of the equipment and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancy before the order
for the equipment is finalized.
B. Design a window washing system that complies with applicable regulatory requirements.
C. Design all anchor components to provide an adequate attachment means suited to current
window washing practices and compatible with industry standard equipment.
D. Ensure that all anchor components meet proper engineering principles and have been designed
by a company qualified in the window cleaning applications and safety.
E. Design a horizontal lifeline system which allows the worker to walk freely along without having
to manipulate his lanyard in order to pass by an intermediate bracket (hand free). Include any
hardware required to attach the components to the building structure.
F. The system must be designed with fall arrest capability (FAS). The system shall comply with
Federal OSHA regulatory requirements for FAS limiting the total fall to 6 feet, ensure a user is
not exposed to maximum arrest force (MAF) in excess of 1800 lbs. System shall include all
hardware, two safelink lanyards attached to the horizontal life line system complete with body
harnesses.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver window washing equipment and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Protect from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified
requirements, or approved equal.:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TIEBACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS
110140 - 3
1. Boston Anchor & Safety Equipment, Inc.
2. Hayn Enterprises, LLC.
3. Pro-Bel Enterprises, Limited.
4. Thaler Metal USA Inc.
B. Firm shall be specialized in the design, fabrication, and installation of fall arrest roof anchors.
1. Equipment supplier/installer shall carry specific liability insurance, products and
completed operations insurance, in an amount of not less than $2,000,000.00. This
insurance shall cover the failure of the safety anchor itself.
C. Other manufacturers producing equipment meeting this specification may be submitted for
Architect's review provided that proposed substitute supplier can demonstrate qualifications and
experience and furnish evidence of insurance coverage.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide equipment required to satisfy design requirements and proposed equipment layout.
B. Tieback Lifeline Anchors:
1. System shall resist pullout with force of 5000 pounds in any direction.
2. Safety anchoring eye, bolts and connecting hardware shall be fabricated of stainless
steel.
3. Steel bases shall be fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized mild steel.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Exposed structural components: Stainless steel, Type 304 with minimum yield strength of 42
ksi.
B. Cast In Place Inserts: Stainless steel, Type 304.
C. All nonexposed steel shall be hot dip galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 36, Type 350W
with 50 ksi yield strength for HSS and 43 ksi for plate and all other sections.
D. Exposed non-structural aluminum shall be seamless spun aluminum conforming to ASTM B 221
and ASTM B 209.
E. Cold Rolled Sections: ASTM A 500, yield strength 55 ksi, tensile strength 66 ksi.
2.4 FLASHINGS
A. All wall anchors shall be properly flashed.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TIEBACK AND LIFELINE ANCHORS
110140 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Erect and install tieback and lifeline anchor systems complete in accordance with the approved
shop drawings and all applicable codes, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.2 ERECTION SERVICES
A. The fall arrest equipment manufacturer shall provide supervisory erection services, including the
services of a registered professional engineer to oversee installation of equipment.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIANCES
113100 - 1
SECTION 113100
APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Appliances.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Division 22 - PLUMBING for water distribution piping connections, drainage and vent
piping connections, sinks, and waste disposers.
2. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for services and connections to appliances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics,
dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.
B. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance
required.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:
1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIANCES
113100 - 2
2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances
that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
3. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.
D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply
with accessibility requirements, comply with Massachusetts Architectural Access Board
requirements and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)."
E. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance
Labeling Rule.
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling
program.
F. Switches: Provide mercury-free switches in appliances.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance
specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials
or workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLIANCES
A. Living Units Appliance Schedule: Provide the following or equal as approved by the Architect:
1. Refrigerator: Whirlpool WRB329DMB, 18.7 cubic inch, bottom freezer, stainless steel
finish
2. Range: GE JB450RFSS, 30" all-electric range, stainless steel on black
3. Hood: Broan QSE1 Series, 30", Allure, 210cfm, 2-speed, stainless steel
4. Cooktop: (Type 2B units): GE, 30", JP3030DJBB, black on black
5. Wall Oven (Type 2B units): Frigidaire, 27", FGEW276SP F/ B, stainless steel finish.
B. Common Laundry Rooms Appliance Schedule: Provide the following or equal as approved by
the Architect:
1. Washer: Maytag, MHW5100DW, white
2. Dryer: Maytag, MED3100DW, white
C. Office Suite Appliance Schedule: Provide the following or equal as approved by the Architect:
1. Refrigerator: Whirlpool WRB329DMB, 18.7 cubic inch, bottom freezer, stainless steel
finish
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
APPLIANCES
113100 - 3
2. Dishwasher: GE, GDF610PSJSS, stainless steel finish
3. Microwave Oven: GE, PEB7226SFSS, stainless steel finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Range Hood, Exhaust Fans, and Dryer Vents: Vent directly to the building exterior.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Utilities: Refer to Division 22 - PLUMBING for plumbing requirements and Division 26 -
ELECTRICAL for electrical requirements.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for
operation.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner’s maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain appliances.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122110 - 1
SECTION 122110
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Micro miniblinds with aluminum louver slats.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood blocking and grounds for mounting
horizontal louver blinds and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal louver blinds. Include elevations,
sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details,
mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining
work.
C. Samples for Verification: Louver slat in specified color, minimum 12 inches long.
D. Window Treatment Schedule: Include horizontal louver blinds in schedule using same room
designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes
and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122110 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of
installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment
schedule.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and
dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions.
2. Levolor Contract; a Newell Company; Levolor.
3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber.
4. Verosol USA, Inc.
2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM LOUVER SLATS
A. Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish
indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.
1. Nominal Slat Width: 1/2 inch for micro miniblinds.
2. Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch.
3. Slat Finish: Two colors as indicated, one per side of slat.
B. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing
operating mechanisms on three sides and ends
C. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism[, slip clutch or detachable wand
preventing overrotation, and linkage rod, for the following operation:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122110 - 3
1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand
2. Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.
3. Tilt: Full.
D. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or
descending travel.
E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag; braided string.
F. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for
blind placement and alignment indicated.
1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing
recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
G. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated.
H. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by the Architect.
2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS FABRICATION
A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless otherwise
indicated, for each horizontal louver blind designed to be self-leveling and consisting of louver
slats, rails, ladders, tapes, lifting and tilting mechanisms, cord, cord lock, tilt control, and
installation hardware.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
1. Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2
inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which
each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-
to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting
headrail and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method
indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Color-Coated Finish: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked
finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122110 - 4
G. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic
matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1
inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in
headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's
operation hardware, if any.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 1
SECTION 123570
KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Kitchen base and wall cabinetry.
2. Bathroom vanities.
3. Cabinet hardware.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for countertops.
2. Section 113100 - APPLIANCES for residential appliances.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; behind clear
glass doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor.
B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or
drawers are extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches
above finished floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after
installation; bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of casework
over 78 inches above finished floor and not visible from an upper level; stretchers, blocking, and
components concealed by drawers.
D. Reveal Overlay: Door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet frame.
E. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient
for operating clearance.
F. Flush: Door and drawer faces flush with cabinet face.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each casework type specified.
C. Product data for each hardware type specified.
D. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and
filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop
and walls.
E. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's color charts in the form of unit sections
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated or exposed to view.
F. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of material indicated; in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
1. 12-inch-square samples of wood with a transparent finish for each species.
2. 12-inch-square samples of veneered plywood with a transparent finish.
3. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.
G. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with
specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications: Continuously tested, certified and display label or seal of Kitchen Cabinet
Manufacturer’s Association (KCMA) in accordance with ANSI Z34.1.
1. HUD Minimum Property Standards for Housing, Paragraph 611-1.
2. HUD Severe Use Cabinets: Bear KCMA Certification Seal and additional label indicating
conformance to HUD Severe Use specifications.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain kitchen casework from one source of a single
manufacturer.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Comply with tests procedures and required performances of ANSI/KCMA A161.1.
a. Tests: Performed on standard 30 inch wall and base cabinets.
2. Drawers and Drawer Hardware for HUD Severe Use: Apply 75 pound point load to
exterior edge of drawer extended 6 inches from its closed position for period of 15
minutes.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 3
a. Successful Test: No failure in any part of drawer assembly or operating system
and drawer remain operable with no mechanical interference with any part of
cabinet assembly.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver casework as factory-assembled units, packaged individually.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer's written requirements for
temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework
until these conditions have been attained and stabilized.
B. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify kitchen
casework can be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 KITCHEN CASEWORK AND CABINETS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong; Extreme series.
2. Crotone Kitchens, Inc.; MetrpHud.
3. Mid-America; Severe Use series.
4. Tru-Wood Cabinets Inc.; Severe Use series.
B. Basis-of-Design: “MetroHud” Series by Crotone; stained 3/4"solid birch wood frame, stained
3/4" birch plywood at exposed sides, with slab style stained birch plywood semi-inset doors and
drawer fronts.
C. Cabinet Materials:
1. Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP and PS 1.
2. Pressure Treated Lumber: AWPA C2.
3. Cabinet Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
a. Cabinet Hardware: Finishing requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156, corrosion
resisting.
D. Wall and Base Cabinets:
1. Construct to produce sturdy and rigid construction.
2. Wall and Base Cabinets: Constructed of solid lumber and/or exterior grade plywood with
wood veneer core.
a. Particleboard, flakeboard, fiberboard, or hardboard not allowed.
3. Base Cabinets:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 4
a. Parts Touching Floor: Pressure treated solid lumber.
b. Provide integral toe space of minimum 3 inches by 3 inches.
c. Toe Kicks: 3/4inch net thickness, pressure treated solid lumber.
E. Face Frames: 3/4 inches net thick kiln dried solid hardwood, free of knots and selected for light
uniform color suitable for stain finish.
1. Frames: Mortised and tenoned, dovetailed or doweled, glued and stapled under pressure
and filled and sanded.
2. Vertical End Members (Stiles): Minimum 1-1/2 inch net width.
3. Vertical Center Members between Doors and Drawers (Mulls): Minimum 2 inches net
width.
4. Horizontal Members (Rails): 1-3/4 inches net width.
5. Stiles and Top and Bottom Rails: Dadoed to receive ends, bottoms and tops.
F. Doors and Door:
1. Doors: 3/4 inch thick 7-ply A-D grade exterior hardwood plywood with no more than one
veneer joint on face.
2. Edges: Reversed shaped to form continuous finger grip around sides.
3. Edges: Filled and sanded smooth prior to finish.
4. Edges: May be treated with hot foil transfer.
5. Edges: May be covered with 3/8 inch by 3/4 inch reverse shaped hardwood bands.
6. Acceptable Hardwoods: Beech, birch, maple or oak suitable for stain finish.
7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard heavy duty with self-closing feature, face mount or
semi-concealed type.
G. Drawers and Drawer:
1. Fronts Construction and Finish: Same as doors.
2. Sides and Backs: Minimum 11/16 inch net thickness Grade C solid lumber with sides
dovetailed or mortised and tenoned into fronts.
3. Backs: Dadoed into sides.
4. Bottoms: Minimum 1/4 inch softwood or hardwood exterior plywood let into front, sides
and back.
5. Drawer Parts: Glued and nailed or stapled together.
6. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091 (Grade 1); side mounted and extending under
bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings;
75 lb. min. capacity.
7. Cabinet Members or Guides: Attached at rear to 3/4 inch solid lumber hanging rail or 1/2
inch solid lumber or plywood block which is attached to 3/4 inch solid lumber hanging rail
by use of metal rear mount brackets or by continuous wraparound method.
H. Hardware: Hinges, barrel style 1/2 overlay self closing. Drawer slides, galvanized steel with
75lb capacity.
1. Basis-of-Design – Door and Drawer Hardware: Mockett; DP57B, 4-5/32" Wire Pull.
I. Installation Cleats: Minimum 3/4 inch by 3-1/2 inches net thickness S4S, Grade C, kiln dried
solid lumber, dadoes to receive bottoms and tops.
1. Provide two horizontal members running full length of cabinet at top and bottom.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 5
2. Base Cabinets with Drawers: Side mount drawer slide bracket(s) rigidly attached to 1/2
inch thick plywood or wood block which is rigidly attached to top cleat.
J. End Panels:
1. Exposed End Panels: Minimum 2-2 Grade, 1/2 inch thick 5-ply exterior hardwood
plywood, selected for light uniform color.
2. Ends Not Exposed : May be 1/2 inch exterior softwood plywood, Grade A-D, with Grade
A side to inside of cabinet.
3. Ends: Dadoed minimum of 1/4 inch deep to receive shelves, bottoms and tops.
4. Ends: Let into dado in face frame.
5. Base Cabinet End Panels: Stop 3-1/2 inches above floor and supported by 3/4 inch by 3-
1/2 inch pressure treated solid lumber member.
K. Shelves and Wall Cabinet Bottoms: 1/2 inch thick Grade 2-2 exterior hardwood plywood or
Grade A-D exterior softwood plywood with wood banded front edge or 3/4 inch net thickness
solid lumber.
1. Shelves: Let into dadoes of end panels and braced behind mulls.
2. Bottoms: Let into (rabbet or dado, manufacturers choice) ends, cleats and front frames.
3. Shelves and Bottoms: Glued and stapled.
4. Adjustable Shelves: 3/4 inch thick Grade 2-2 exterior hardwood plywood of Grade A-D
exterior softwood plywood with wood banded front edge or 3/4 inch net thickness solid
lumber.
a. Shelves: Support as necessary to comply with shelf deflection provisions of
ANSI/KCMA A161.1.
b. Shelves: When loaded at 15 PSF for seven days shall not deflect more than 1/16
inch per linear foot between supports.
c. Maximum Deflection: 1/4 inch between supports.
L. Backs: Provide on cabinets (optional on sink bases depending on job conditions).
1. Backs: Minimum 1/4 inch thick Grade 2-2 exterior hardwood plywood or A-D grade
exterior softwood plywood.
2. Backs: Securely glued and stapled to ends, 3-1/2 inch cleats and shelves of cabinet.
3. Backs: May be let into dado of ends and cleats or may be applied flush with ends and
cleats.
M. Base Bottoms: 1/2 inch thick Grade 2-2 exterior hardwood plywood or A-C Grade exterior
softwood plywood.
1. Bottoms: Let into (rabbet or dado, manufacturers choice) end panels, front rails and
installation cleats.
2. Bottom: Supported by 3/4 inch net thickness pressure treated solid lumber braces 24
inches OC running front to rear of cabinet and resting on finished floor.
2.2 WOOD CASEWORK FINISHES
A. Factory Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final
touch-up until after installation.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123570 - 6
B. Cabinet Finish: Comply with ANSI/KCMA A161.1 finish test and performance requirements.
1. Exposed Surfaces and Interior of Cabinet: Factory finished consisting of stain, sealer and
top coat, lightly sanded between application.
a. Sealer and Top Coats: Oven dried.
b. Stain Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Toe Kick: Painted as directed by the Architect.
C. Finish: As selected by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance
of casework.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims.
Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,
scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install casework level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall
construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide
unencumbered operation.
B. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124810 - 1
SECTION 124810
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Roll-up aluminum-tread rail floor mats with aluminum hinges.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete work, including forming,
placing, and finishing concrete floor slabs, and for concrete materials for grouting and
filling around and under recessed mats and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.
2. Divisions between mat sections.
3. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.
1. Floor Mat: 12-inch- square, assembled sections of floor mat.
2. Frame Members: 12-inch- long Sample of each type and color.
D. Maintenance Data: For floor mat and frames to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124810 - 2
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)” and the Massachusetts
Architectural Access Board.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive
floor mats and frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roll-up Aluminum Rail Hinged Mats:
a. AFCO-USA.
b. Balco, Inc.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Mats Incorporated.
e. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. (The).
B. Basis-of-Design: Balco, Inc.: FGLP-C Low Profile Aluminum Frame with Carpet Tread
2.2 METAL FRAME MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6061-T6 or alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52 as standard with
manufacturer.
2.3 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Provide concrete materials complying with Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for
grout and fill around and under recessed mats and frames that produce concrete equivalent in
strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs. For concrete fill, adjust aggregate size to not exceed
one-third fill thickness.
2.4 FLOOR MATS
A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including metals and metal finishes
indicated or specified. If not indicated, provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standards.
B. Roll-up Aluminum Rail Hinged Mats: Clear-anodized finish, extruded-aluminum tread rails
sitting on continuous vinyl cushions with 1-1/2-inch-wide by 1-inch-thick, tread rail modules.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124810 - 3
Provide aluminum hinges and 28-oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet
tread inserts].
1. Tapered Rigid Frame: Tapered extruded-aluminum frame members, not less than 1-1/2
inches wide, with mitered corners and finish to match tread-slat extrusions.
2. Carpet Tread: As selected by the Architect.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
B. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. If not
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where
joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter
corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without
joints.
C. Recessed Metal Mat Frames: Extruded aluminum of size and style to fit floor mat type
specified, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and
anchorage devices.
1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed
maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline
joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.
D. With manufacturer's standard protective coating, coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will
contact cementitious material.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating
0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124810 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth,
and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat
surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and
mat.
1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure
attachment of frames.
2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in
recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection
until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mats until Project is near Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 1
SECTION 129300
SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all materials and equipment, and do all work necessary to furnish and install the
site furnishings, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK; Concrete.
2. Section 044302, GRANITE; Granite block seat walls.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop drawings of each item specified shall be submitted.
B. Where appropriate, and when approved by the Architect, manufacturer's catalogue cuts
may be substituted for shop drawings.
C. Submit assembly instruction drawings showing layout(s), connections, bolting and
anchoring details as per manufacturer's standards.
D. Product Data: Include physical characteristics such as shape, dimensions, materials, and
finish for each site furnishing.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 2
E. Samples for Verification: Submit finish samples for review and verification.
F. Maintenance Data: For each site furnishing.
1. Include recommended methods for repairing damage to the finish.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of bicycle
racks similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing bicycle racks similar to
those required for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, finish, shape and type of bicycle rack from a single
source with resources to provide components of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, shape and dimensional requirements of bicycle
racks and are based on the specific system indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon delivery, before signing for shipment, inspect for any damages and notate on the
B.O.L.
B. Store site furnishings in original undamaged packages and containers until ready for
installation. Handle with sufficient care to prevent any scratches or damage to the finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products. The materials provided shall be of a type with proven
satisfactory usage for at least 2 years.
2.2 FASTENERS AND HARDWARE
A. Provide manufacturer's standard materials and accessories as required for assembly of
units and as indicated on the assembly drawings. Provide unexposed aluminum, stainless
steel or steel plates, angles and supports as required for complete assembly. Separate
dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
1. Fasteners and metal components shall be cadmium-plated steel or steel hot-dipped
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 3
2.3 BIKE RACK
A. Bicycle racks shall be Model “Bike Rib Series 1 BR2 Bike Rack”, manufactured by Function
First, 3935 N. Country Club Rd., Tucson, Arizona 85716, or approved equal.
1. Anchor method shall be embedded.
2. Finish: Thermo Plastic Coating
3. Color: D121 (Medium Gray)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall verify that finished grades and other operations affecting mounting
surfaces have been completed prior to the installation of site furnishings. Site furnishings
shall be installed plumb and true, at locations indicated in accordance with the approved
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION OF COMPONENTS
A. Items shall be shipped knocked-down (KD) ready for site assembly. Packaged
components shall be complete including all accessories and hardware. New parts shall be
acquired from the manufacturer; substitute parts will not be accepted unless approved by
the manufacturer. When the inspection of parts has been completed, the site furnishings
shall be assembled and anchored according to manufacturer's instructions or as indicated.
When site furnishings are assembled at the site, assembly shall not interfere with other
operations or pedestrian and vehicular circulation.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Furnish metal work, mounting bolts or hardware in ample time for securing into concrete or
masonry as the work progresses. Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening
furniture or furnishings securely in place. Provide, for anchorage not otherwise specified or
indicated, slotted inserts, expansion shields, and power-driven fasteners, when approved
for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for
steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any
material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed
fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish the fastenings to
which they are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 TESTING
A. Each site furnishing shall be tested to determine a secure and correct installation. A
correct installation shall be according to the manufacturer's recommendations and by the
following procedure: The Contractor shall measure the physical dimensions and clearance
of each installed site furnishing for compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and
as indicated. Site furnishings which do not comply shall be reinstalled. Fasteners and
anchors determined to be non-compliant shall be replaced. A written report describing the
results of the testing shall be provided.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 4
3.5 BICYCLE RACK
A. Work shall be executed only by workmen experienced in the trade.
B. Examine areas to receive bike racks.
C. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.
D. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
E. Coordinate bicycle rack installation with installation of the surrounding surface at grade
beneath the bicycle racks.
F. Installation
1. Install bike rail racks in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install bike hoops level and plumb.
G. Adjusting
1. Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and as approved by Architect.
2. Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be
successfully repaired as determined by Architect.
H. Cleaning
1. Clean bike racks promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.
I. Protection
1. Protect bicycle racks from paint spatter, splashed concrete, and other construction
damage by wrapping and taping in place plastic sheeting or heavy kraft paper around
the bicycle racks until adjacent work is completed.
2. Protect installed bike racks to ensure that, except for normal weathering, bike racks will
be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 1
SECTION 142100
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Machine-room-less electric traction passenger elevators.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for lintels, sleeves, anchors, inserts,
plates and similar items for elevators.
2. Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for elevator rail bracket inserts.
3. Section 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING for the hoist beams, attachment
plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail
brackets.
4. Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for miscellaneous framing and supports for
hoisting machines, and for elevator door sills, cants in hoistways made from sheet steel,
and elevator pit ladders.
5. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for telephone service to elevators.
6. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect
switches at machine room door and telephone wiring to elevator.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section.
B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified
ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe
conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar
unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes,
and similar information. Include product data for the following:
1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 2
2. Operation, control, and signal systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at
each landing, equipment layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control
station and standby power operation control panel. Indicate variations from specified
requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples for Verification: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal
equipment; 3-inch-square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim
members.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and
machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown
and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
G. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities
having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
I. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who
is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal
fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single
manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1 and Massachusetts Elevator Code.
D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board.
E. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close
to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 3
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective
packaging.
B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration,
or soiling.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or
masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to
Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to traction elevators including pit
ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical
outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full
maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts
and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to
Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
electric traction elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 4
1. Fujitec America, Inc.
2. KONE Inc.
3. Otis Elevator Co.
4. Schindler Elevator Corp.
5. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
B. Basis-of-Design: EcoSpace by KONE
2.2 PASSENGER ELEVATORS
A. Elevator:
1. Type: Machine-room-less, gearless traction.
2. Rated Load: 3500 lb
3. Rated Speed: 150 fpm
4. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation.
5. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Standby power operation.
b. Standby powered lowering.
c. Battery-powered lowering.
d. Independent service.
e. Loaded-car bypass.
f. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.
g. Nuisance call cancel.
6. Car Enclosures: As follows:
a. Inside Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
b. Inside Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.
c. Inside Height: As indicated on the Drawings.
d. Front Walls: Satin stainless steel with integral car door frames.
e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel.
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate.
g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel.
h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel.
i. Door Sills: Aluminum.
j. Ceiling: Polished stainless steel with LED lighting
k. Handrails: Satin stainless steel, 1.5: round, at side and rear walls.
l. Floor prepared to receive carpet specified in Section 096810 – CARPET TILE.
7. Hoistway Entrances: As follows:
a. Width: As indicated on the Drawings
b. Height: As indicated on the Drawings.
c. Type: Single-speed side sliding.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel.
e. Doors: Satin stainless steel.
f. Sills: Aluminum.
8. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel.
9. Additional Requirements: As follows:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 5
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with satin
stainless-steel frame.
b. Provide protective blanket hooks in all cars and two complete sets of full-height
blankets.
2.3 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not
otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in
standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B. Elevator Machines: Provide variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type or variable-voltage,
dc-type hoisting machines. Provide solid-state power converters.
1. Provide regenerative or nonregenerative system.
2. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.
3. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on
standby power.
4. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into
building power system.
C. Fluid for Oil Buffers: If oil buffers are used, use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluid containing
antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives.
1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be
incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Hydro Safe (FR)" by Hydro
Safe Oil Division, Inc.
D. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for
installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of
devices is specified in another Section.
E. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves
from the building structure. Comply with Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials
and fabrication.
F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.
G. Guides: Provide roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides at top and bottom
of car and counterweight frames.
2.4 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator
as required to provide type of operation system indicated.
B. Single-Car Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the
following operational features for elevators where indicated:
1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a
designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 6
standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control
panel located at main lobby. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease.
2. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less
than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and
predetermined weight can be adjusted.
C. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features
shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to authorize
calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require
authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in traveling cable and panel in
machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system equipment,
and elevator controllers. Provide stripe-swipe card reader integral with each car control
station.
2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security
keyswitches at car control stations. Key is removable only in deactivated position.
3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby, that causes car to
return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch,
calls registered before keyswitch activation are completed and normal operation is
resumed.
2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of
one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
2.6 FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car
doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte
finish.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
1. Textured Stainless-Steel Sheet: Product with embossed texture rolled into exposed
surface.
E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
G. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 7
2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with
removable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by
ASME A17.1.
2. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below.
B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch nominal thickness.
2. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
3. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
6. Sills: Extruded nickel silver, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
7. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails meeting code requirements, of shape,
metal, and finish indicated.
2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway
entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size
and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction.
1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with
reinforced head sections.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
2. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
3. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call
has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or
other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car control stations. Mount in
return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the
U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation,
system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to
monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 8
provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring
station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification,
instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.
D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in
each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone
communication service specified in Division 26 - ELECTRICAL.
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car
door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car
is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.
1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing for each single
elevator or group of elevators, but not less than one station for each four elevators in a group.
G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.
Provide[ one of] the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.
H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and
direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car.
I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with
text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire
elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall
push-button station, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings,
pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional
discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions
and conditions were found to be satisfactory.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 9
B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,
inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for
workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.
C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed
to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure-borne noise
from elevator system.
D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails
for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and
doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension
at each landing.
F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center
of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either
temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended
by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests
are to be performed on elevators.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with
the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car,
to protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.
3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame
faces.
4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment.
5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 10
cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and
capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to
operate elevator.
B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner’s personnel present and before date of
Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning
properly.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 - i
SECTION 210000
FIRE SUPPRESSION TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ................................................................................. 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 6
1.8 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................ 7 1.9 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 7
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................... 8 1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 8
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 9 1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS .......................................................................................................................... 9
1.14 CORING, DRILLING ........................................................................................................................... 9 1.15 ACCESSIBILITY .................................................................................................................................. 9
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ....................................................................................... 9 1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 9
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ........................................................................................ 10 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. 10
1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY .............................................................................................................. 10 1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 11
1.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 12 1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 13
1.24 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING ....................................................................................................... 13 1.25 EXTRA MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................... 13
1.26 DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................... 13 1.27 FIRE PROTECTION WORKING PLANS .......................................................................................... 14
1.28 UNIT PRICES .................................................................................................................................... 16
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 16 2.2 UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE ................................................................................................... 16
2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE (175 psi) ...................................................................... 17 2.4 VALVES ............................................................................................................................................. 18
2.5 HANGERS, ANCHORS, CLAMPS AND INSERTS .......................................................................... 19 2.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION .................................................................................... 20
2.7 SPRINKLER HEADS ......................................................................................................................... 20 2.8 SPRINKLER CABINET ..................................................................................................................... 21
2.9 SIGNALING DEVICES ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.10 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES ........................................................................................................ 22
2.11 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS .................................................................................................... 22
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 22
3.1 COORDINATION .............................................................................................................................. 22 3.2 SHUT DOWNS .................................................................................................................................. 23
3.3 TESTS ............................................................................................................................................... 23
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 - ii
3.4 PIPE VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 24 3.5 ANCHORS AND INSERTS ............................................................................................................... 25
3.6 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................... 25 3.7 CORING, DRILLING ......................................................................................................................... 25
3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ..................................................................................... 25 3.9 SPRINKLER / STANDPIPE INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 25
3.10 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS .................................................................................................................... 26
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 1
SECTION 210000
FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal back charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this
Contract and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price
should he fail, for any reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the local utility companies or municipal agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide,” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for Fire Protection work, certain non-technical words
shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Fire Protection work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support all as part of the Fire Protection work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project, all as part of the Fire Protection work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any fire protection item in the Drawings or Specifications for Fire
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 2
Protection work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the Fire Protection work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Fire Protection work are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Fire Protection
work.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with
work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Water supply from existing main to building.
2. Post indicator valve on water service. 3. Wet pipe sprinkler system and all components.
4. Fire department inlet connections. 5. Sprinkler heads, piping, fittings, hangers and valves.
6. Gate valves, check valves, drain valves, fire department valves. 7. Preparation of complete and detailed Shop Drawings in accordance with NFPA No. 13.
8. Preparation of complete and detailed Working Plans. 9. Submitting Drawings and obtaining necessary approvals, permits and certificates.
10. Tests. 11. Securing hydrant flow test data reports.
12. Hydraulic calculations. 13. Miscellaneous steel support.
14. Combined sprinkler and standpipe system and all components. 15. Assisting the Owner in preparing a fire protection impairment plan.
16. Furnish and install water flow switches and tamper switches. Flow and tamper switches shall be wired to the fire alarm system under the Electrical section of this specification.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain necessary approvals from Authorities Having Jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated
sections.
1. Temporary Facilities.
2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill. 3. Concrete:
a. Equipment foundations. b. Housekeeping pads.
c. Rebar for items “a, and b” above. 4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 3
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking. 6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting. 8. Finished Carpentry and Millwork.
9. Steel Doors and Frames. 10. Finished Hardware.
11. Elevators and Lifts. 12. Electrical.
13. Plumbing. 14. HVAC.
15. Electric power wiring for all equipment. 16. Fire alarm system and controls.
17. Utilities beyond 10’-0” from the building. 18. Installation of access panels.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local Codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and obtain all permits and pay for all fees and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance shall conform with the adapted by the State edition of the following standards, codes,
Specifications, requirements and regulations:
1. State Building Code.
2. National Electric Code (NEC). 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
4. Department of Environmental Protection (DEP). 5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of the City or Town of Northampton.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 7. Owner’s Insurance Underwriters.
8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
10. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 11. American Welding Society (AWS).
12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS). 13. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI).
14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 15. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
16. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 17. Massachusetts or State Water Resource Authority (MWRA).
18. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). 19. Architectural Access Board (AAB).
20. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 4
E. All Fire Protection work shall meet or exceed any other State and Local Codes and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Scaled detailed working Drawings (system layout) and equipment
Specifications (cut sheets) indicating all information in accordance with requirements of the applicable NFPA Standards for the specific fire protection systems to be installed in
accordance with the Registered Professional Engineer’s plans and Specifications.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
C. Submittals, Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title. b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s). d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal. f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
g. Contractors’ license number and expiration date.
3. Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed dimensional Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s
published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.
D. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
E. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” (referred to above) shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 5
service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating characteristics.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the
manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work.
Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the
altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of
Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
F. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and
techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work.
G. Schedule: Incorporated the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that
work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 6
Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time shop a Shop Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days,
exclusive of transmittal time, are required for the following:
1. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
2. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
H. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted out of sequence.
I. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited, waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
J. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Wet pipe sprinkler system components including alarm valves, pipe, fittings, sprinkler heads,
pressure gauges, etc.
2. Fire department connections.
3. Valves including gate, fire department, drain and test type.
4. Access panels.
5. Seismic restraints.
6. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and shall be specifically identified by the listed manufacturer’s style or series designation. Trade names and abbreviations are not
permitted.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Fire Protection work. In the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the
General Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been issued by the General Contractor.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 7
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels, review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request
information from Architect. Where the Fire Protection work shall interfere with the work of other trades, assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before
installation. Without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings,
or relocating and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all
locations. All piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as possible.
E. If any Fire Protection work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the fire protection trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the Fire
Protection work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owner.
1.9 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the fire protection equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to
connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the
work, as well as the electrical characteristics of the fire protection equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for
the line voltage power.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to fire protection control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor.
E. Flow and tamper switches shall be connected to the Building’s fire alarm system by the Electrical
Subcontractor.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 8
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for
coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades: 1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System. 3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work. 5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return
Drawings to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
7. Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings. Fabrication shall not start until such transparencies of completed Drawings are received by
the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Fire Protection work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and
indicates the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and
installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 9
B. Check the Architectural plans and Specifications before ordering any material and equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his determination prior to
proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many
cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the
Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or concrete, as required for Fire Protection work. Internal diameter of sleeve shall be 1/2” larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls and floors required for the installation of sleeves and supports for the Fire Protection work.
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor, wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the mechanical and
electrical equipment at the site.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 10
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the Fire Protection system until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be handed over
to the Owners.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As the work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At completion of the work prepare a complete set of electronic Record Drawings showing all systems as actually installed, including all fire alarms and electrical circuitry. The electronic
copies will be made available for the Fire Protection Contractor’s copying, at his expense, for the Record Drawings. The quantity of electronic copies which are made available shall in no way be
interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings necessary to show the required information. The Fire Protection Contractor’s professional Draft Person shall transfer changes to
electronic copies. Submit three (3) sets of electronic prints to Architect for comments as to compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility of the Fire Protection and General Contractors.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 hour service.
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary service etc, prior to acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 11
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
9. Part 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not
constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction then advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will
direct course of action.
1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT for submittal procedures pertaining to
Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved Operating and Maintenance Manual shall contain copies of approved
Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and engineering data sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the
equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction:
a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use. b. Description of systems.
c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment. d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams.
e. Installation drawing.
3. Maintenance:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 12
a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions. b. Replacement charts.
c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components. d. Testing instructions for each typical component.
e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name, price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature: The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and
approved.
1.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum
acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the adapted by the State editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
1. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for
quality assurance and traceability.
D. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on Drawings or specified herein.
E. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
F. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.
G. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. By products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and
certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.
H. All items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer
throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Fire Protection work, the Fire
Protection work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 13
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who originally purchased the item.
5. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
J. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Fire Protection work shall be carefully examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been
received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the electric work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the
date of delivery to the project of the items in question. The Fire Protection work includes all procedures, regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for
which no claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
1.24 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding for all the work of this section complying with Division 1 requirements.
1.25 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in following product specification sections that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1.26 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide wet-pipe sprinklers in all areas. Provide dry-type sprinkler system in all areas where
ambient temperature is 40 deg. F or below.
B. Design sprinkler system according to the following:
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications as follows: a. Building Services Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2. e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
f. Residential Areas: Light Hazard. g. Retail Areas: Ordinary Hazard Group 2.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic Sprinkler Piping Design – as follows:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 14
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler – as follows: a. Office space: 225 sq. ft.
b. Future Tenant Space: 168 sq. ft. c. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. e. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
f. Residential: Per Manufacturers Criteria. g. Retail Areas: 130 sq. ft.
C. Secure water flow test data taken from fire hydrants nearest site. If recent flow test data is not
available from city records, make necessary tests as required by NFPA Standard to determine character of water supply.
D. Run piping horizontally and at right angles to walls and ceilings. Center sprinkler heads with respect to ceiling components, such as ceiling grid, lighting fixtures, HVAC diffusers and
speakers, as directed by Architect.
E. Add a 10 psi safety factor to hydraulic calculations for a cushion against future pipe main
deterioration. Pipe velocity in sprinkler piping shall not exceed 20 FPS.
F. Provide test connections at highest point of main portion of each sprinkler system, with 1” pipe
and valve. Test pipe shall be connected to sprinkler pipe at least 1-1/4” in size and shall discharge outside building.
G. Provide sprinklers in all areas except where exempted by code or AHJ.
1.27 FIRE PROTECTION WORKING PLANS
A. Submit working plans to indicate actual sprinkler system and/or combination system piping layout. Working plans shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer.
B. Seismic restraints: All seismic restraints shall be indicated on working plans including locations and type of plan, details and calculations.
C. Hydraulic calculations shall be signed and sealed by Professional Engineer. Submit working plans and hydraulic calculations to:
1. Architect/Engineer. 2. Insurance Underwriter.
3. Building Department. 4. Fire Department.
D. Submit working plans and hydraulic calculations in one complete package. When it is not
possible to submit entire system design in one package due to job conditions, submit plans of entire building indicating areas not yet defined. Submit working plans and hydraulic calculations
to:
1. Architect/Engineer.
2. Insurance Underwriter. 3. Building Department.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 15
4. Fire Department.
E. Working plans shall be at least 1/8”=1’ scale of sheets of uniform size. Working plans shall show all data required by NFPA No. 13, 14, 20, including but not limited to:
1. Name of Owner and Occupant. 2. Location, including street address.
3. Point of compass. 4. Full height cross section, or schematic diagram, if required for clarity; including ceiling
construction and method of protection for nonmetallic piping. 5. Location of partitions.
6. Location of fire walls. 7. Occupancy class of each area or room.
8. Location and size of concealed spaces, closets, attics, and bathrooms. 9. Any small enclosures in which no sprinklers are to be installed.
10. Size of city main in street and whether dead-end or circulating; and, if dead-end, direction and distance to nearest circulating main. City main test results and system elevation relative
to test hydrant. 11. Other sources or water supply, with pressure or elevation.
12. Make, type, and nominal orifice size of sprinklers. 13. Temperature rating and location of high-temperature sprinklers.
14. Total area protected by each system on each floor. 15. Number of sprinklers on each riser per floor.
16. Pipe type and schedule of wall thickness. 17. Nominal pipe size and cutting lengths of pipe (or center-to-center dimensions).
a. Note: Where typical branch lines prevail, it will be necessary to size only one typical line. 18. Location and size of riser nipples.
19. Type of fittings and joints and location of all welds and bends. The Contractor shall specify on drawing any sections to be shop welded and the type of fittings or formations to be used.
20. Type and locations of hangers, sleeves, braces, and methods of securing sprinklers when applicable.
21. All control valves, check valves, drain pipes, and test connections. 22. Kind and location of alarm bells.
23. Size and location of hose outlets, hand hose, and related equipment. 24. Underground pipe size, length, location, weight, material, point of connection to city main; the
type of valves, meters, and valve pits; and the depth that the top of the pipe is laid below grade.
25. Piping provisions for flushing. 26. For hydraulic designed systems, the information on the hydraulic data nameplate.
27. A graphic representation of the scale used on all plans. 28. Name and Address of Contractor.
29. Hydraulic reference points shown on the plan shall correspond with comparable reference points on the hydraulic calculation sheets.
30. The minimum rate of water application (density), the design area of water application, in-rack sprinkler demand, and the water required for hose streams both inside and outside.
31. The total quantity of water and the pressure required noted at a common reference point for each system.
32. Relative elevations of sprinklers, junction points, and supply or reference points. 33. If room design method is used, all unprotected wall openings throughout the floor protected.
34. Calculation of loads for sizing, and details of sway bracing. 35. Information about backflow preventers (manufacturer, size, type).
F. Working plans will be subject to Architect’s final approval. Submit to Architect after review by
other Authorities. If necessary to submit plans to Architect before review by other Authorities,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 16
identify Authorities that have not reviewed plans and resubmit for final approval when review by all parties is complete.
G. Sprinkler pipe and standpipe pipe sizing shall be based on hydraulic calculations.
H. Fire protection contractor shall provide piping layout on measured Drawings. For renovation
projects, this shall require Contractor to field survey existing building and prepare reproducible Drawings on which to show building background and all Fire Protection work.
I. Working Plans shall show all hangers and supports from floors, walls, underside of slabs and structural steel members. Where piping cannot be supported from walls or slabs, contractor shall
provide additional structural steel bracing to support pipe.
J. Working Plans shall be submitted with the shop drawing cover sheet from Section 15000. Any
deviations from original plans and Specifications shall be noted. Any hydraulic deviations shall be noted.
1.28 UNIT PRICES
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall list the following unit prices in bid proposal which shall
include the complete installation (labor and materials) for each item(s):
1. Cost for addition of pendent head.
2. Cost for addition of sidewall head. 3. Cost for addition of upright head
4. Savings or deduction for eliminating a sprinkler head.
B. Above prices shall include 10 feet of piping, connection, sprinkler heads, fittings, hangers, labor system draining and refill, drawing involvement and any other associated costs for the addition or
deletion of a sprinkler head.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping shall meet applicable ANSI or ASTM standard requirements and shall have manufacturer’s
name and standard marked on each length. Joints shall meet applicable ANSI or ASTM standards requirements. Where ANSI or ASTM standard does not exist, joints and fittings shall
bear UL listing symbol.
2.2 UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE
Ductile Iron
2” and Smaller
2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Type “K” copper water tube conforming to ASTM B88
annealed.
Ductile iron AWWA C151. Cement lining ANSI A21.4 and AWWA
C104. The outside coating shall be a bituminous coating of 1ml
minimum thickness. The pipe shall be clearly marked with the letters
“Ductile” of “DI” and shall indicate
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 17
weight, class and casting period.
Fittings ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought
copper and bronze pressure fittings.
Ductile iron 250 psi rating
conforming to AWWA C-11, cement lining AWWA C-104. The
fittings shall be clearly marked with the letters “Ductile” or “DI” and
shall have an outside bituminous coating of 1 ml.
Joints ANSI/AWS A5.8 BcuP silver
braze.
Push on joint shall conform to a
single rubber gasket joint per ANSI A21.11 and AWWA C111. Flange
joints and pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1. Flanged
joints are to be fitted such that the contact faces bear uniformly on the
gasket and are made with uniform bolt stress.
Flanges Flanges shall be plain faced, CI150
and shall match the piping system and fittings on which they are
installed.
Gaskets/Bolts Gaskets shall be full-face rubber 1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall
conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2, respectively.
A. Notes:
1. This contractor shall make submittal to the Water Authority having jurisdiction and secure all
local permits and approval for the underground water piping system prior to submitting Shop Drawings to the engineer. The shop drawing submittal to the engineer shall include an
approval notification from the local water authority.
2. Receiving, Storage and Handling: Pipe shall be unloaded using slings, hooks, pipe tongs or skids. Care should be taken to avoid injury to coating or lining. Store lubricant for rubber
joints in a sanitary condition and as an aid in disinfection of the main. Rubber gaskets shall be used on a first in, first out basis and stored in a cool, dark location.
3. Thrust restraint shall be installed at all changes in direction, tees, deadends and where
changes in pipe size occur by the use of concrete thrust blocks, restrained joints and tie rods.
4. Excavation, shoring and dewatering will be done under Division 2.
2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE (175 psi)
Carbon Steel 2” and Smaller 2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A53, ASTM A795 or ANSI/ASTM A135,
Schedule 40.
Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A795 or ANSI/ASTM A135, Schedule 10.
Fittings Cast iron fittings. ANSI/ASME B16.1 and B16.4 Mechanical grooved couplings with ductile iron housing clamps to
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 18
engage and lock, “C” shaped
composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts and Vic plug gasket
(pre-tube).
Joints Thread. Apply joint compound or Teflon tape to male pipe threads
on threaded systems.
Weld or roll groove. Welding procedures shall conform to the
requirements of AWS D.10.9, level AR3.
Flanges Flanges shall be plain faced and
shall be CI-150 and shall conform to ANSI B.16.5.
Flanges shall be plain faced and
shall be CI-150 and shall conform to ANSI B16.5.
Gaskets/Bolts Gaskets shall be full face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
Gaskets shall be full face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
A. Notes: Pipe material and fittings shall meet the standards set forth for pipe and tube in the
National Fire Code NFPA 13, Section 6.3.
B. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two (2) ductile iron housing segments, pressure
responsive elastomer gasket, and ASTM A449 zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
1. Rigid: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide
system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be fully installed at a visual pad-to-pad offset contact. Couplings that require gapping of bolt
pads or specific torque ratings for proper installation are not permitted. Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 009H and
107N.
2. Flexible: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 177 Installation-Ready, and Style 77.
C. CPVC pipe and fittings may be used within residential dwellings.
2.4 VALVES
A. Valves shall be of materials and weights required by NFPA standards.
B. Valves that control mains inside building shall be approved OS&Y, 175 psi, unless noted otherwise, Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 771. Valves shall be normally open and shall
accommodate tamper switches wired under Electrical Section. Victaulic Series 705 grooved end butterfly valves with pressure responsive seat, stainless steel stem (stem shall be offset from the
disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating), and weatherproof actuator housing with built-in tamper switches UL/FM approved to 300 psi is acceptable.
C. Check valves shall be approved pattern, 250 psi, installed vertically or horizontally, Victaulic Series 717. Alarm valves shall be 300 psi UL/FM Victaulic Series 751 or approved equal suitable
for variable pressure operation and wet pipe system.
D. Valves shall be UL-listed and FM-approved. Valves 2A and smaller shall be bronze body iron
sized threaded end, Victaulic style 717, UL/FM approved 250 psi; valves 2-1/2” and larger shall be ductile iron body grooved end, Victaulic series 705-butterfly valve UL/FM approved at 300 psi.
Valves at fire pump shall be iron body butterfly.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 19
E. Sprinkler Alarm Valves:
1. Sprinkler alarm valves and trim are described in the following charts: See Drawings for valve
location and quantities.
Wet Pipe Valve
Description 175 psig working pressure, ductile iron body, grooved seat
alarm port, external bypass, brass seat and removable hand hole cover hinged to a stainless steel clapper assembly. Valve
internal components shall be replaceable with valve in the installed position. Size range: 1-1/2” to 8”.
Manufacturers and Model No. Victaulic Series 751 alarm check valve.
Trim Required 300 psig trim kit. Victaulic Variable Pressure trim kit with
retarding chamber, water pressure gauges to indicate the inlet and outlet pressures and water motor and electric pressure
switch with approved connected alarms. All installed trim must be UL listed and FM approved for use with the Wet valve.
Prefabrication Requirements All components ready for maintenance and inspection. Provide
drip check valve, drain cup, alarm test shut-off valve, drain check valve. Provide the standard trim kit with gages.
Certification/Approvals UL listed.
FM approved. Accepted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Guarantee
Start-up and Service Test and set valve to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction. Instruct Owner’s representative for valve actuation and maintain.
Capacities See hydraulic data.
Acceptable Manufacturers Viking Corporation Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.
Victaulic Co.
2.5 HANGERS, ANCHORS, CLAMPS AND INSERTS
A. Hangers shall meet NFPA Standards. Provide adjustable swivel rings for piping 3” and smaller and adjustable clevis hangers for 4” and larger piping. Support piping from building structure to
maintain required grade and pitch of pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure piping in place. Secure hangers to insets where practical. Hanger rods shall have machine threads.
B. Provide vertical brackets and guides for pipe risers at each floor and where horizontal piping is racked along walls. Trapeze hangers may be used where conditions permit.
C. Hanger rods shall be connected to beam clamp, or UL-listed concrete inserts. Beam clamps shall have retaining straps.
D. Hanger spacing shall meet requirements of state and local codes.
E. Pipe supports, vertical and horizontal, shall not bear on sleeves.
F. All support devices shall conform to seismic standards.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 20
G. Provide seismic restraint calculations.
2.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION
A. Provide polished brass inlet connections where shown on Drawings, of size and type indicated, with brass caps and chains. Provide integral lettering as required by local Fire Department to
indicate use for sprinklers and fire standpipe. Threads shall match local Fire Department.
B. On branch line to inlet connection, provide approved straightway check valve installed in
horizontal position. Piping shall be arranged to drain between check valve and fire department inlet connection by approved ball drip connection piped to nearest drain or through wall.
C. Fire Department flush inlet connection shall be Potter-Roemer Figure No. 5023 (4” x 2-1/2” x 2-1/2”) chrome-plated. Square plate with lettering Auto Sprinkler/Standpipe with caps and chains.
Threads shall match local Fire Department standards.
D. At the low point near each fire department connection, provide a 90-degree elbow with drain
connection to allow for localized system drainage to prevent freezing. Basis of Design: Victualic FireLock #10-DR.
2.7 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Provide UL-listed and/or FM-approved, (quick response for light hazard) sprinkler heads.
B. Heads shall have ordinary degree temperature ratings, except in areas subject to abnormal heating conditions, where sprinkler heads shall have temperature ratings high enough to prevent
accidental discharge. Minimum fusing temperature shall be 155°F.
C. Sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, with hex shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler
body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. (Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the cast wrench boss). Basis of Design: Victaulic.
D. Sprinkler heads shall be by Victaulic, Viking or Reliable.
E. The following table indicates head types:
Sprinkler Head Specifications
Upright Sprinkler Finish:
Temperature Rating: Link:
Response Application: Approvals:
Equivalent to:
Bronze
155°F (212°F Mechanical Rooms) Glass bulb QR UL, FM, Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction Victaulic V27 or V34
Concealed Finish: Cover Plate:
Temperature Rating: Link: Response Application:
Approvals: Equivalent to:
White (coordinate with Architect) White
155°F Glass bulb
QR UL, FM, Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction Victaulic V38
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 21
Sidewall Finish:
Cover Plate: Temperature Rating:
Link: Orifice Coefficient:
Response Application: Approvals:
Equivalent to:
Chrome/White
Chrome/White
155°F Glass bulb
5.6 QR UL, FM, Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction Victaulic V27 or V34 HSW
Quick Response Recessed Pendent Finish: Temperature Rating:
Link: Response Application: Approvals:
Equivalent to:
Chrome
155°F - 165°F
Glass bulb QR
UL listed for 175 psig, FM approved to 175 psig, Local
Authority Having Jurisdiction Victaulic V27 or V34 (for light
hazards only)
F. Flexible Stainless Steel Sprinkler Drop Systems may be used to locate sprinklers as required by
final finished ceiling tiles and walls. The drop shall include a UL approved Series AH2 braided hose with a bend radius to 2-inch to allow for proper installation in confined spaces. The hose
shall be listed for [(4) bends at 31” length] [(5) bends at 36” length] [(8) bends at 48” length] [10 bends at 60” length] [(12) bends at 72” length]. Union joints shall be provided for ease of
installation. The flexible drop shall attach to the ceiling grid using a one-piece open gate Series AB1 or AB2 bracket. The bracket shall allow installation before the ceiling tile is in place. The
braided drop system is UL listed and FM Approved for sprinkler services to 175 psi (1206 kPa). Basis of Design: Victaulic Vic-Flex.
2.8 SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Provide enameled steel sprinkler cabinet with approved number of sprinkler heads as required by
NFPA. Provide appropriate sprinkler wrench with each type of head in each cabinet.
2.9 SIGNALING DEVICES
A. Tamper Switches to be:
1. “Potter” OSYSU-2 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on S+OS&Y valves or
equivalent tamper switch.
2. “Potter" PCVS-2 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on PIV and butterfly valves or equivalent tamper switch.
3. Milwaukee BB-SCK02 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on built-in tamper
switches for butterfly valves.
B. Water flow switches to be “Potter” WSR-F with retard and two sets of SPDT contacts or equivalent.
C. Electric bell to be “Potter” PBA-AC.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 22
2.10 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Water pressure gauges of the double spring Bourdon type, as manufactured by U.S. Gauge
American, Mueller, Trerice, Ashcroft or approved equal, shall be installed at the top of standpipe risers and at fire pump and alarm check valves. The gauges shall have 3-1/2” diameter face with
brass case and shall be Underwriter’s approved.
B. Gauges shall be controlled by a valve with arrangements for drainage. An outlet, at least one
quarter of an inch in size, plugged for the installation of the inspector’s gauge shall be located between each valve and gauge.
C. Dial graduations reading in “psig” shall be such that the normal operating pressure of the system installed shall be indicated near the middle of the scale.
D. The accuracy of the gauges shall be within one (1) percent of the scale range.
2.11 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS
A. Pipe Sleeve Materials:
1. Sleeves through floors and through exterior, structural and fire-rated construction shall be
galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Sleeves through partitions and non-fire-rated construction shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel with lock longitudinal seams or approved plastic pipe.
3. Provide waterproofing membrane locking devices at floors. Provide 150 lb. Slip-on welding
flanges at exterior wall penetrations.
B. Fire stop penetration seals in fire-rated construction shall conform to ASTM E814 and shall be ceramic fiber (Proset Systems Firefill); mineral fiber (Manville Thermo-mat); or silicone foam (Dow
RTV 3-6548). Provide mineral fiberboard, matting or putty for damming and forming. Finish seals flush to wall surface and fill gaps with silicone adhesive sealant caulking (Dow 96-081 RTV
or approved equal). Provide 1” thick ceramic fiber board on both sides of penetrations in 2 and 3 hour rated walls and floors less than 8” thick. All penetration seals shall be installed in
accordance with listing requirements.
C. Packing for sleeves that do not require maintenance of fire rating shall be oakum, silicate, foam,
ceramic fiber or mineral fiber with approved sealant. Pack or foam to within one inch of both wall surfaces. Seal penetration packing with approved caulking and paintable waterproof mastic
surface finish or silicone caulking.
D. Wall and floor penetration fire stops shall be UL listed, FM approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 23
B. Verify conditions and take field measurements as required to ensure work shall fit actual conditions. Field corrections to fabricate work and adjustments to adjacent work where required
for proper installation of work shall be subject to Architect’s approval. Corrections and adjustments shall be permitted only when not detrimental to appearance and function of work.
3.2 SHUT DOWNS
A. Work with Owner in maintaining integrity of new fire protection system. Coordinate and minimize
any and all shut downs of fire protection system as follows:
1. Give proper notice to Owner when making shutdowns, a minimum of two full weeks.
2. Perform all duties required by Owner when making a shut down.
3. Fill out a shut down notice form answering all items requested such as time and location of
shut down, systems affected, areas affected, etc. when requesting a shut down.
4. Provide fire watch as required during a shut down.
5. Duration of shut downs shall be kept to a minimum.
6. In no case shall the fire protection system be shut down during off-hours of work day without a fire watch.
7. System shall be returned to normal operating conditions at end of work day.
3.3 TESTS
A. Test sprinkler system as required by NFPA Insurance Underwriters, Factory Mutual and agencies that have jurisdiction.
B. Test water flow detecting devices including associated alarm circuits through inspection test connection.
C. Test sprinkler system under pressure of 200 psi for two hours. Correct defects and leaks. Caulking will not be allowed.
D. Submit written approval of tests from Authorities Having Jurisdiction over installation to Owner before Final Acceptance of work.
E. Submit written approval of tests from Authorities Having Jurisdiction over installation to Owner before Final Acceptance of work.
F. Do not backfill before testing and approval.
G. Notify Architect and various departments and bureaus 48 hours before tests are to be made.
H. Operating test of sufficient duration shall be made for systems, equipment, fixtures and accessories to Owner’s satisfaction.
I. General:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 24
1. Test sprinkler and standpipe and make watertight before painting and concealment. Make partial tests as required, during progress of work. Tests shall be witnessed by: General
Contractor, Insurance Underwriter’s Representative, Municipal Inspector and a representative of the Architect.
2. Standpipe and sprinkler system shall be tested to hydrostatic test of 200 psi in accordance
with NFPA requirements.
3. If inspection or test show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material.
3.4 PIPE VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers. Pipe markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic with acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall be applied after painting.
B. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in either direction, use double-headed arrow marker.
C. Mains shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, next to valves, on risers, at tee fittings, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once in each room and
at intervals not longer than 20 feet.
D. In general, 2” high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4” diameter and larger than ¾” high legend
shall be used for pipe lines 3” diameter and smaller.
E. Markers shall be Seton Setmark or approved equal.
F. Color banding shall meet latest ANSI and OSHA requirements.
G. Markers shall have legend with “black” letters:
Service
Legend
Background
Color
Sprinkler Sprinkler Red
Combination Sprinkler-standpipe
Sprinkler-Fire
Red
Fire Fire Red
H. Valve Tags:
1. All valves on pipes of every description shall have neat, circular brass valve tags of at least
1.5 inches in diameter, attached with brass hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valve tags in letter as large as practical, the number of the valve and the service such as “S.P.” for
sprinkler. The numbers of each service shall be consecutive.
2. All valves on equipment, tanks and pumps shall be numbered by 3 inch diameter red metal discs with white numbers 2 inches high secured to stem of valves by means of brass hooks
or small solid link brass chain.
I. Equipment:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 25
1. Nameplates shall be made of black surface, white core laminated “Bakelite” with indented letters.
2. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 3 inches long by 1.5 inches high and bear the equipment
name as designated in these Specifications.
3. Equipment identification designations shall be taken from equipment schedules as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
3.5 ANCHORS AND INSERTS
A. Inserts shall be UL listed and FM approved and shall be steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction
and shall develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete.
B. Provide anchors as necessary for attachment of equipment supports and hangers.
3.6 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project
where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full.
Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the Owner.
3.7 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all holes in walls and floors required for the installation of sleeves and
supports for the Fire Protection work.
3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary steelwork required for mounting or supporting equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction; all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized; manufacturer shall be Unistrut or equivalent.
3.9 SPRINKLER / STANDPIPE INSTALLATION
A. Standpipes shall have pressure gauges at the top and supervised control valves at the bottom.
B. Final standpipe test shall be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction, Owner’s Representative and an Insurance Underwriter’s Representative.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
FIRE SUPPRESSION
210000 - 26
C. Maintain or install at least one existing or new standpipe riser up through the floors with temporary hose, nozzle and valves, as required for fire protection during construction.
Standpipes shall be supplied through a temporary 2-1/2” x 2-1/2”x 4” siamese inlet at grade located where directed by Fire Department if standpipe is not connected to building fire supply
system. Access to temporary siamese inlet connection shall be kept clear and accessible at all times. Contractor shall ensure temporary fire protection supply availability at all times.
D. Grooved Joints: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in
the area from pipe end to (and including) groove. Gasket shall be manufactured by the coupling manufacturer and verified as suitable for the intended service. A factory trained representative
(direct employee) of the coupling manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. The
representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation to ensure best practices in grooved joint installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly
installed products.
E. Signaling devices shall consist of the following:
1. Electric micro switch locks on zone valves and water flow control switches on each floor supply be wired to fire alarm panel and Building Automation System.
2. Alarm devices provided on alarm valves and pipes by Sprinkler Contractor.
3. Fire alarm zone panels and wiring by Electrical Contractor and System Automation
Contractor.
4. Complete coordination shall be exercised between Sprinkler Contractor and Electrical Contractor to ensure electrical connections are compatible with fire alarm system described
under Electrical Section.
F. Electric micro switch locks on zone valves and water flow control switches on each floor supply wired to fire alarm panel and Building Automation Sprinkler.
G. Alarm devices provided on alarm valves and pipes by Sprinkler Contractor.
H. Fire alarm zone panels and wiring by Electrical Contractor.
I. Complete coordination exercised between Sprinkler Contractor and Electrical Contractor to ensure electrical connections are compatible with fire alarm system described under Section
16100.
3.10 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All piping, equipment and devices shall be seismically supported as required by NFPA.
END OF SECTION 210000
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING 220000 - i
SECTION 220000
PLUMBING TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................... 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2 1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ................................................................................. 3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 3 1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 7 1.8 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................ 7
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ........................................................................ 7 1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................... 8
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 9 1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 9
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS .......................................................................................................................... 9 1.14 CORING, DRILLING ........................................................................................................................... 9
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY .................................................................................................................................. 9 1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ..................................................................................... 10
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 10 1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ........................................................................................ 10
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. 10 1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY .............................................................................................................. 11
1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 12 1.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 12
1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 13
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 14 2.2 COPPER PIPE (FOR CW,HW SYSTEMS) ....................................................................................... 14
2.3 STEEL PIPE (FOR NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED AIR (GENERAL) SYSTEMS) ...................... 15 2.4 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT, STORM DRAIN ............................................................................ 16
2.5 PRESSURE, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES .................................................. 17 2.6 INSULATION ..................................................................................................................................... 18
2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................................. 19 2.8 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FIRE STOPPING AND ESCUTCHEONS ..................................................... 20
2.9 TRAPS AND STRAINERS ................................................................................................................ 21 2.10 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES .............................................................................. 22
2.11 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS ............................................................................................ 23 2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS ..................................................................................................... 23
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM .................................................................................................. 23 2.14 EQUIPMENT – GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 24
2.15 WATER HEATERS ........................................................................................................................... 25
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 25
3.1 COORDINATION .............................................................................................................................. 25 3.2 EXPANSION PROVISIONS .............................................................................................................. 25
3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 25
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING 220000 - ii
3.4 TAGS, VALVES, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS ..................................................................... 26 3.5 FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING .......................................................................................... 27
3.6 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................... 27 3.7 INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 27
3.8 INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE, STORM, DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING .................................... 28 3.9 WATER ENTRANCE ......................................................................................................................... 29
3.10 EXTERIOR SANITARY SEWER ....................................................................................................... 29 3.11 WATER METER ................................................................................................................................ 29
3.12 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS .................................................................................................................... 30 3.13 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS ......................................................................... 30
3.14 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS .......................................................................................... 30 3.15 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES ........................................................................................................ 31
3.16 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 31 3.17 GAS SERVICE, METER, VENTS AND PIPING ............................................................................... 31
3.18 CLEANING ........................................................................................................................................ 32 3.19 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR .......................................... 33
3.20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING – GENERAL ....................................................................................... 33 3.21 TESTING: PIPING SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 35
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 1
SECTION 220000
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal back charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this Contract
and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price should he fail, for any
reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the local utility companies or municipal agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for Plumbing work, certain non-technical words shall
be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Plumbing work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support, all as part of the Plumbing work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project, all as part of the Plumbing work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any plumbing item in the Drawings or Specifications for Plumbing
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 2
work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the Plumbing work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Plumbing work are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Plumbing work except that
indications on the Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take precedence over the Specifications where they conflict.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Domestic water piping system. 2. Exterior water service piping for domestic water beginning 10’-0” outside exterior wall of the
building. 3. Pressure reducing station.
4. Domestic water heaters. 5. Interior sanitary waste and vent piping system.
6. Interior sanitary drainage system extended to a point 10’-0” outside the interior face of the foundation wall of the building.
7. Interior rainwater drainage system to a point 10’-0” outside wall of the building. 8. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
9. Natural gas system. 10. Extend all gas train vents to atmosphere.
11. Final connection al all gas fired equipment including valves, regulators, drip and dirt pockets, unions and necessary appurtenances.
12. Roof and floor drains. 13. Hose bibs and wall hydrants.
14. Insulation. 15. Valves.
16. Water hammer arresters. 17. Fittings unions, flanges and couplings.
18. Flashing of floor drains. 19. Hangers, plates and inserts. 20. Cleaning, testing and disinfection of piping systems. 21. All supplementary steel for piping and equipment support.
22. Guarantees. 23. Drilling for installation of inserts.
24. Core drilling.
25. Fire seal off all penetrations in floors and walls to the rating of the barrier. B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain necessary approvals from Authorities Having Jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change
Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 3
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under other sections.
1. Temporary Facilities. 2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill.
3. Concrete: a. Equipment foundations.
b. Housekeeping pads. 4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking. 6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting except as specified herein. 8. Finish Carpentry and Millwork.
9. Steel Doors and Frames. 10. Finish Hardware.
11. Elevators and Lifts. 12. Fire Protection.
13. Electrical. 14. HVAC.
15. Foundation drains. 16. Site drainage.
17. Furnishing of toilet accessories such as toilet paper holders, mirrors and soap dispensers. 18. Utility structures.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities Having Jurisdiction, obtain all permits and pay for all fees and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance shall conform with the latest edition of the following standards, codes, Specifications,
requirements and regulations:
1. Local and State Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire and Health Department
Codes. 2. American Gas Association (AGA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 4. American Insurance Association (AIA), formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
7. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL).
E. All Plumbing work shall meet or exceed any other state and local codes and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 4
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in
more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
C. Submittals Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title. b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s). d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal. f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
3. Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed dimensional
Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not
acceptable), plumbing requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
E. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above, shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system
shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, plumbing services, service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating characteristics or cycles.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 5
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications.
Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination
problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related
changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work. Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within
the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply
with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance. 6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims. F. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for
dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the
satisfactory performance of his work.
G. Schedule: Incorporated the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not
incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule. Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time a Shop
Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, are required for the following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 6
H. Schedule:
1. Copies of all backflow preventer permits.
2. Certification of domestic water system disinfection. 3. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
4. Adjustment and balancing certification. 5. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
I. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and
before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to
partial lists submitted out of sequence.
J. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents
regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Documents requirements are not limited,
waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
K. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 2. Water heaters.
3. Roof and floor drains. 4. Hose bibs and wall hydrants. 5. Piping. 6. Fittings, unions, flanges and couplings.
7. Insulation. 8. Sleeve packing.
9. Valves
10. Water hammer arresters. 11. Flashing of floor drains. 12. Backflow preventers.
13. Hangers, plates and inserts. 14. Pressure reducing station. 15. Receptors for condensate drainage.
16. Fire-rated penetration assembles (ASTM E814, UL 1479). 17. Access panels. 18. Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a single bound package, organized and titled.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 7
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Plumbing work. In the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General
Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels, review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request
information from Architect. Where the Plumbing work shall interfere with the work of other trades, assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation.
Without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings, or relocating
and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All
piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as possible.
E. If any Plumbing work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the plumbing trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the
Plumbing work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owner.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the plumbing equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to connect
power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The Plumbing and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work,
as well as the electrical characteristics of the plumbing equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 8
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the
Plumbing Subcontractor.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to heating and ventilating control
panels, transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All low voltage thermostats, zone valve and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
F. Pipe heat tracing shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. Power connections shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
G. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an integral part of packaged equipment.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for
coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades: 1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System. 3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work. 5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return
Drawings to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty trades. 5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the approval of the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 9
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings. Fabrication shall not start until such transparencies of completed Drawings are received by
the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Plumbing work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and indicates
the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to
require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and
equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his determination prior to proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project
where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full.
Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or
concrete, as required for Plumbing work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be 1/2" larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls and floors required for the
installation of sleeves and supports for the Plumbing work.
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 10
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods
of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the plumbing equipment at the site.
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be
handed over to the Owners.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At the completion of work, prepare a complete set of electronic Record Drawings showing all systems as actually installed. The electronic copies will be made available for the Plumbing
Contractor’s copying, at his expense. The quantity of copies which are made available shall in no way be interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings necessary to show the required
information. The Plumbing Contractor’s professional Draft Person shall transfer changes to electronic copies. Submit three (3) electronic sets of prints to Architect for comments as to
compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Plumbing Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 11
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 Hour Service:
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary power etc, prior to acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
day of the week, for the duration of the service. 6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify
situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct course of action.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 12
1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT for submittal procedures pertaining to operating and maintenance manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved operating and maintenance manual shall contain copies of the approved Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and
engineering data sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum
contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction:
a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use. b. Description of the plumbing systems.
c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment. d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams.
e. Installation drawing.
3. Maintenance: a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions.
b. Replacement charts. c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components.
d. Testing instructions for each typical component. e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name,
price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature: a. The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.
1.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 13
2. Be without blemish or defect. 3. Not be used for temporary purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable ASME standards.
G. Products shall meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and certified by
Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.
H. All items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Electrical work, the Electrical work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
7. Their connection to building wiring including the purchase and installation of all termination
junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring. Included also shall be the purchase and installation of any substitute lugs or other wiring terminations as may be
necessary to adapt their terminals to the building wiring as called for and to the connection methods set forth in these Specifications. J. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Plumbing work shall be carefully
examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
Plumbing work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The Plumbing work includes all procedures, regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 14
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS
A. The table below indicates pipe class for each service. Refer to the following pages for expanded Specifications for the respective class.
PIPE MATERIALS SPEC INDEX
Service
Code
Maximum
Operating (psig)
Service Limits
(Temperature °F)
Pipe Material
Domestic Cold Water CW 150 below grade 250 Copper/CPVC
Domestic Hot Water HW 150 below grade 250 Copper/CPVC
Non-Potable Water NPW 100 250 Copper
Sanitary Waste & Vent S or W or V Gravity 120 Cast Iron/PVC
Natural Gas G 50 70 C Steel
Storm Drain RW Gravity 80 Cast Iron/PVC
B. Each valve type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Each system shall be provided with valves as required by Code and shown on the Drawings and shall be installed to facilitate
operation, replacement and repair.
C. Provide access panels for concealed valves behind non-removable ceilings or walls.
D. Provide shut-off valves on supply piping to individual pieces of equipment.
E. Provide pipe dope, Teflon tape, wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds as
required by best standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Apply putties and jointing compounds for plumbing fixtures and trim as recommended by
manufacturers.
G. Valves on insulated piping system shall be equipped with extended handles to accommodate
insulation thickness.
2.2 COPPER PIPE (FOR CW,HW SYSTEMS)
1/2” to 3”
4” and Larger
Pipe Seamless copper water tube, drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-
88. See Note 1.
Seamless copper water tube, drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-
8. See Notes 2 & 5.
Fittings Wrought copper, solder-joint. ASTM B-16.22. Ductile iron coupling with copper alkyd enamel paint coating,
ASTM A-536. Grade “E” EPDM elastomer gasket. ASTM D-
2000. Equal to Victaulic Style 606 coupling. ASTM B-75
copper alloy fittings. ASTM B-584 grooved end cast bronze
fittings for 6” pipe size.
Joints ASTM B-32 solder filled material, Rolled groove prepared and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 15
Alloy Sb5 “95/5.” ASTM B-813
liquid or paste flux. Soldering procedures shall comply with
ASTM B-828.
assembled in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions, hexagonal stock with ball-and-
socket joint, solder joint ends. ASME B-6.18.
ANSI Class 150 flange adapter equal to Victaulic Style 641 for
connections to flanged equipment. ANSI B-16.1 flange
dimensions. Watts G-4000-FDA series.
Valves Gate Use ball valve. Use ball valve.
Ball All bronze, 3 piece, full port,
PTFE seats, solder end connections. 600 psig WOG.
Apollo 82-200, Milwaukee BA-350, Watts B-6801.
Class 125, cast iron body, epoxy
coated. Full port, flanged ends, stainless steel ball and stem.
ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions. Watts G-4000 FDA series.
Check Bronze body and clapper, solder
ends, 200 WOG. Jenkins 4093, WOG. Milwaukee 1509,
Stockham B-309.
Iron body, bronze mounted,
flanged ends, 200 Jenkins 625-C, Milwaukee F-2974-M,
Stockham G-931.
A. Notes:
1. Below grade water piping 3” and smaller be Type K copper with bituminous coating copper brazed joints, BcuP filler alloy. ANSI/AWS A5.8 procedures shall be per ANSI/AWS B2.2.
2. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with dielectric couplings or dielectric
flanges. Contact between ferrous and stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated with non-metallic washers.
3. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as water heaters, etc.
4. CPVC/PEX piping may be used for water distribution within dwelling units.
2.3 STEEL PIPE (FOR NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED AIR (GENERAL) SYSTEMS)
2” and Smaller 2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Schedule 40 carbon steel ASTM A53
Grade B, A106 Grade A or A120.
Schedule 40 Carbon Steel ASTM
A-53, Grade B, A106 Grade A or A120.
Fittings Screwed malleable iron 125 psi. Butt weld carbon steel Schedule
40, A234.
Unions Screw 150X malleable iron A105 Grade II. Use flange.
Flanges 150# raised face, screwed, A105. 150# raised face weld neck A105
ASTM A181. Grade I. 150# flat face for cast iron valve.
Valves, Plugs,
Gas Cock
Use ball valve. Iron body, greaseable and
lubricated tapered plug, flanged end, 175 working pressure
Nordstrom 143, Serck Audco LSW-133-GG, Walworth.
Solenoid Honeywell Skinner Value
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 16
U121XXXXX/423/XXXXX with coils,
printed circuit and other parts for intrinsic safe Specifications completely
encapsulated within the enclosure using epoxy material. Operated at 24
VDC with an intrinsic safety barrier.
Ball (Gas) Bottom loaded pressure stem. Valve rated at 600 psi WOG. Watts B-6000-
UL-MASS or equal.
Emergency Gas
Shut-Off
Zurn Accudoor custom valve box with brushed stainless finish. Flush door,
glass pane, labeled “Safety Gas Shut-off Valve”, T-handle locks. Furnish
and install approved ball valve as specified above.
Check (Gas) 150# Class, bronze swing check valve,
aluminum disc, screwed cap and threaded ends. Approved equal to
Eclipse, Inc. series 1000.
Gaskets 1/16” red rubber, wire inserted. 150# raised face and 125 flat-face gasket.
A. Notes:
1. Provide two wrenches for each gas cock size.
2. The Contractor, at his option, may weld piping down to 1-1/4” if permitted by local codes.
3. All welders for gas piping must be certified per the requirements of Section 15000.
4. All exterior black steel gas piping shall be painted with two (2) coats of epoxy-based paint.
(Color by Owner.)
5. When steel comes in contact with dissimilar material, provide dielectric couplings or dielectric flanges. Contact between ferrous stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated
with non-metallic washers. Provide union connections to all pneumatically operated equipment.
2.4 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT, STORM DRAIN
Above Grade Below Grade
Piping 3” and Larger: Hubless cast
iron soil pipe, service weight. ASTM-A-888, CISPI 130 or
Schedule 40 PVC
2-1/2” and Smaller: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service
weight. ASTM A-88, CISPI 130 or type M copper tubing. ASTM
B8872or Schedule 40 PVC. . See Note 1
2” and Larger: Hub and spigot
cast iron soil pipe, extra heavy. ASTM A-74 or service weight if
Code approved. Piping shall be asphalt or coal tar pitch coated
or Schedule 40 PVC.
Fittings 3” and Larger: Hubless cast 2” and Larger: Hub and spigot
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 17
iron fittings, service weight.
ASTM-A-888, CISPI 801 or Schedule 40 PVC.
2-1/2” and Larger: Hubless
cast iron fittings, service weight, ASTM A-888, CISPI 301 or
wrought copper DWV fittings. or Schedule 40 PVC. See Note 1
cast iron fittings, extra heavy.
ASTM A-74. Asphalt or coal tar pitch coated. DWV pattern or
Schedule 40 PVC.
Joints Hubless Cast Iron: Heavy-duty
stainless steel band coupling with neoprene gasket. Bank
torque of 80 foot/pounds 15 psig pressure rating. Husky SD
4000 or CLAMP-ALL HI-TORQUE 80.
Caulked with leak and oakum or
neoprene compression gaskets conforming to ASTM C-564.
A. Notes:
1. Copper tube and fittings shall not be used on urinal wastes.
2. CISPI 310 no-hub couplings will not be accepted as equal to manufacturer’s listed.
2.5 PRESSURE, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
1. Pre-piped thermostatic mixing valve, inlet check valves, isolation valves, dial thermometer and mounting hardware.
2. Acceptable manufacturers: Powers, Leonard or Lawler.
B. Pressure Reducing Valves on Water Services:
1. PRV 2-1/2” and 3” size shall be all bronze with separate strainer, inlet pressure up to 300 psi, adjustment range 25-75 psi: Watts N223B-S or equivalent by, Cash-Acme or Wilkens.
2. Full flow range pressure reducing valves shall be equal to Watts control valve Model 115.
3. Supply a strainer upstream of all PRV valves.
C. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves on Water Heaters:
1. Combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valves shall be automatic, ASME-rated, AGA and CGA-certified, ANSI standard, bronze body. Pressure relieving setting shall be
150% of the working pressure of the unit to a maximum of 150 psi; temperature relieving
setting shall be 120° F. Temperature relieving capacity shall be selected on AGA-CGA
rating.
2. Valves shall be by Watts Regulator Co. Approved equivalent valves by Robertshaw or Cash-Acme may be provided.
D. Vacuum Relief Valves on Cold Water Inlet to Water Heaters and Tanks:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 18
1. Relief valves shall be bronze body composition disc with 200 psi working pressure and 250° F temperature rating.
2. Valves shall be by Watts Regulator Co. Approved equivalent valves by Taco or B&G may be
provided.
E. Vacuum Breakers:
1. Atmospheric vacuum breakers shall be all-bronze, for temperature up to 210° F: Watts 800 or equivalent by Neptune or Febco.
F. Strainers: Strainers shall be wye strainers, bronze body, stainless steel screens, 400 psi working
pressure, threaded end with blow-off valved and piped to drain by strainers shall be Watts 777 series or equivalent by Wilkins or Febco.
2.6 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be by Owens-Corning, Certain-Teed or Manville.
B. Insulation shall be installed by insulation firm regularly specializing in this work and employing men particularly skilled therein. No covering applied by plumber's “helpers” will be acceptable.
C. Insulation installation shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. No insulation shall be applied until piping has passed tests as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
D. Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be flame-retardant and shall have ASTM E-84 fire hazard ratings of 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50 fuel contributed.
1. Interior Applications – Jackets: a. Type a – Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints. Jacket shall be heavy duty fire retardant material with glass fiber reinforcing and self-sealing lap. Jacket will be factory applied to the insulation. Jacket
shall have neat, white Kraft finish or white vinyl suitable for painting, with bead puncture resistance of 50 units minimum. Vapor barrier shall be .001” aluminum foil adhered to
the inner surface of the jacket. Permeance shall not exceed 0.02 perms. Jacket shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass “ASJ-SSL” or Manville Flamesafe “AP-T”.
b. Type b – PVC Jackets: One piece, pre-molded type.
E. Insulation and jacketing shall be in accordance with following:
1. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ANSI/ASTM C547; “k” value of 0.22 – 0.28 at 100° F non-
combustible.
2. Type B: Molded, flexible closed cell vinyl, ASTM D635; “k” value of 1.17 bacterial resistant. F. Schedule: The following piping systems require insulation:
Piping System
Type
Insulation Thickness
Inch (mm)
Jacket
Type
Domestic Hot Water Supply Less Than 1-1/2” A 1” a, b
Domestic Cold Water A 1” a, b
Roof Drains and Horizontal Rainwater A 1” a, Note 3
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 19
Non-Potable Water A 1/2” a, b
Handicap Lav. Hot Water and Waste B 1/8” b
1. Notes: a. Two (2) layers of 1” with staggered joints. Provide galvanized ½” steel bands, 12” on
center, apply 1’ hexagonal mesh over insulation and ½” thick coat of insulating cement troweled smooth. Apply glass cloth jacket and size with one brush coat of lagging
adhesive. b. Unless noted otherwise, Section “F” pertains to all piping specified system. This note
pertains to all piping scheduled above.
G. Insulation of exterior piping and fittings shall be covered with 0.016” thick smooth aluminum jacket with longitudinal zee closures. Jacket shall be secured at both joints with 2” wide aluminum
straps centered over butt joint of jacket. Provide ½” wide aluminum bands on 12” centers. Fitting covers shall be manufactured for purpose intended and shall be of same material.
H. Pipe hangers shall be outside insulation and shall incorporate 12”, 26 gauge protection shields. Insulation on piping that passes through walls or partitions shall pass continuously through
sleeves, except at firewalls, smoke partitions and floor penetrations where space between sleeves and piping shall be fire stopped with approved packing.
2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable clevis hangers for hanger sizes 4” and larger and cast brass split-ring hinged
hangers or band type hangers for smaller. Support piping from building structure to maintain required grade and pitch of pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure piping in place and provide for
expansion and contraction. Hangers on all insulated pipe shall be clevis type.
B. Provide vertical brackets and guides for horizontal piping where it is racked along walls. Trapeze
hangers may be used where conditions permit. Provide all necessary pipe clips, anchors and sundries for proper alignment and support of piping. Hangers for copper piping shall be coated
for dielectric isolation. Hangers for PVC, polypropylene and other plastic piping shall be extended V-shaped, with angle iron pipe supports as necessary.
C. Hanger rods shall have machine threads. Beam clamps, concrete inserts and expansion shields shall be provided as required. No ramset or shot shields will be allowed.
D. Hanger spacing shall meet requirements of State and Local Plumbing Codes. In no case shall horizontal piping be supported at intervals greater than 10’-0”.
E. Piping below basement or lowest level slab (that is, buried piping), need not be supported from structure if slab is not designed as structural slab. The Plumbing Contractor shall support all
piping under structural slabs on grade.
F. Pipe supports shall not bear on sleeves.
G. Friction clamps shall be installed at base of plumbing risers and at each floor. Friction clamps shall not be supported from or rest on sleeves.
H. Horizontal piping shall be suspended from building structure by mild steel rod connecting pipe hanger to inserts, beam clamps, angle brackets and lag screws as required by Building
Construction in accordance with the following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 20
Rod Size
Pipe Size
3/8” 1/2" to 2”
1/2" 2-1/2” to 4”
5/8” 5” to 12”
3/4" 15”
I. Hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe insulation. Provide
hangers for insulated piping with 12” long, 18 gauge galvanized insulation shields.
J. Piping at equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in
connected equipment and control valves. Piping at equipment shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without
requiring additional support after these items are removed.
K. Piping installed under this Section shall be independently supported from building structure by
means of beam attachments and not from piping, ductwork or conduit of other trades. Supplementary steel, including factory-fabricated channels, required to meet the requirements
specified herein, shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
L. Maximum spacing of hangers on runs of steel, copper or brass pipe shall be as follows:
Schedule: Hanger Spacing in Feet/Pipe Material
Pipe Size
(Inches)
Steel
(Feet)
Copper or Brass
(Feet)
1/2 to 1 7 5
1 to 1/4 10 6
1 to 1/2 10 8
2 to 8 10 10
M. Maximum spacing of hangers on no hub cast iron soil pipe shall be 5’ and hangers shall be
provided at all changes in direction. Hanger rods to support piping from the structure or supplementary steel shall not exceed 4’ in total length. Where pipe support assemblies exceed 4’
in total length, Plumbing Contractor shall provide factory-fabricated channels and associated accessories.
N. All thermoplastic piping systems shall be hung in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
O. Hangers in areas exposed to weather or in unheated spaces shall be provided with a shop coat of rust inhibited paint. Hanger rods shall be hot dipped galvanized.
P. Hangers and rods for under slab piping shall be hot dipped galvanized.
2.8 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FIRE STOPPING AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. All pipes passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter one inch larger than the outside diameter of pipe. Pipe Sleeve Materials:
1. Sleeves through floors and through exterior, structural and fire-rated construction, shall be hot dipped galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves shall extend 1” above finished floor.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 21
2. Sleeves through partitions and non-fire-rated construction shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel
with lock longitudinal seams or approved plastic pipe.
3. Provide waterproofing membrane locking devices at floors. Provide 150 lb. Slip-on welding flanges at exterior wall penetrations.
B. Fire stop penetration seals in fire-rated construction shall be products of STI SpecSeal, 3M,
Proset Systems Firefill or Dow and shall be installed in accordance with the latest requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479). Fire stop penetration sealants for non-metallic and insulated piping shall
be intumescent (STI SpecSeal Series 100 Sealant or SpecSeal Collar or approved equal). Provide mineral fiberboard, matting or putty for damming and forming. Finish seals flush to wall
surface and fill gaps with silicone adhesive sealant caulking (Dow 96-081 RTV or approved equal). Provide 1” thick ceramic fiberboard on both sides of penetrations in 2 and 3 hour rated
walls and floors less than 8” thick.
C. Packing for sleeves that do not require maintenance of fire rating shall be oakum, silicate foam,
ceramic fiber or mineral fiber with approved sealant. Pack or foam to within one inch of both wall surfaces. Seal penetration packing with approved caulking and paintable waterproof mastic
surface finish or silicone caulking.
D. Waterproof Pipe Penetrations:
1. Sleeves through outside walls shall be provided with pipe to wall penetration closures equal to Link-Seal Thunderline Corporation. Seals shall be mechanical type of interlocking rubber
links shaped to fill space between pipe and sleeve. Links shall be assembled with bolts to form a belt around the pipe with pressure plate under each bold head and nut. After seal
assembly is positioned, tightening of bolts will provide watertight seal. This Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of each individual sleeve before ordering, fabricating
or installing. The inside diameter of each sleeve shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and Link-Seal to assure a watertight joint.
2. Prefabricated modular sleeves shall be Mason Industries (SWS) or approved equal stiffened
galvanized steel sleeves with preformed closed-cell elastomeric seal (non-fire rated) or preformed mineral fiber or silicone foam seal (fire rated). 3. Provide waterproof 1” single ring set in silicone and bolted to floor or wall at chipped and
drilled penetrations of existing slabs on grade and existing walls below grade.
E. Inserts shall be individual or strip type or pressed steel construction with accommodation for
removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3/4" diameter, permitting lateral adjustment. Individual inserts shall have an opening at the top to allow reinforcing rods up to 1/2" diameter to be passed through the insert body. Strip inserts shall have attached rods with hooked ends to allow
fastening to reinforcing rods.
F. Unless otherwise specified herein, escutcheons shall be cast brass chrome plated type and provided with a set screw to properly hold escutcheon in place.
2.9 TRAPS AND STRAINERS
A. Provide cleanouts in soil, waste and storm drainage piping on straight runs at changes in directions and at foot of stacks and other points where required by inspecting Authorities.
Cleanouts shall suit construction in which they are to be installed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 22
B. Maximum horizontal distance on straight runs between cleanouts in piping 4” and smaller shall be 50 feet. In piping 5” and larger, maximum horizontal distance between cleanouts shall be 100
feet.
C. Cleanouts shall be same size as pipe 4” and smaller. Cleanouts for piping larger than 4” shall be
sized per local code and in no circumstance shall they be less than 4” in diameter. No reduction in cleanout sizes for pipe 4” and smaller is permitted.
D. Traps not integral with fixtures and in accessible locations shall have brass trap screw protected by water seal and will be regarded as cleanout.
E. Bodies of cleanout ferrules in bell and spigot piping shall be standard pipe sizes conforming in thickness to that required for pipe and fittings and shall extend not less than 3/4" above hub of
pipe.
1. Cleanout plug shall be cast brass with raised nut 3/4" high.
2. Cleanouts in copper waste piping shall be soldered brass cleanout fittings with extra heavy
brass screw plugs of same size as line.
3. Cleanouts in threaded waste piping shall be cast iron, drainage T pattern, 90 branch fitting with extra heavy brass screw plugs of same size as pipe.
4. Floor cleanouts in finished areas shall be per schedules equivalent to J.R. Smith, Wade or
Zurn.
5. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be per schedules equivalent to J.R. Smith, Wade or Zurn.
F. Provide test tees with cleanout plugs at foot vertical soil, waste, acid waste and roof conductor
lines and at each floor. Cleanouts on vertical lines concealed behind finished walls shall extend to back of finish wall; provide wall plate. Obtain Architect’s approval for wall plate locations and
reroute piping if necessary.
G. Cleanouts shall open in direction of flow of drainage line served or at right angles thereto.
H. Keep cleanout plugs clean and unimpeded. Prevent covering with cement, plaster or other permanent finished materials.
2.10 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Provide bronze Bourdon tube pressure gauges where shown on Drawings and where specified,
by U.S. Gauge, Trerrice or Weksler, accurate to +1%.
1. Gauges shall have white faces with black-filled engraved lettering. Gauge bodies shall be set
in phenolic cases. Provide pulsation dampers and gauge cocks to isolate each gauge.
2. Gauges shall be easily accessible and easily read. Gauges readable from floor at less than 5 feet shall be 4-1/2” dials. Other gauges shall have 6” dials. Gauges graduations shall meet
limit requirements of normal operation. Gauges shall indicate at mid-scale.
3. Provide pressure gauges at the inlet and outlet of each pump.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 23
4. Provide pressure gauges at each water entrance, downstream of the water meter and on each side of PRV stations.
B. Provide separable well V-case thermometers by U.S. Gauge, Terrice or Weksler where shown on
Drawings and where specified. Thermometers shall have 9” scale and white face with black-filled engraved letters. Thermometers shall be angular or straight stemmed, as conditions necessitate.
Thermometer wells shall be bronze and shall be installed so as to ensure minimum restriction of water flow in pipe and shall be installed to be able to be viewed from the floor.
1. Provide thermometer at the inlet and outlet of each water heater and where shown on
Drawings. Thermometers shall have scale range of 30°-240° F with 2° scale division.
2. Provide thermometer in hot water return system at each hot water recirculation pump and
where shown on Drawings. Scale range shall be 30°-240° F with 2° scale division.
2.11 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Provide wall hydrants as shown on the Drawings. Provide hose bibs in every toilet core where more than one (1) flushing fixture is shown.
B. Wall hydrant shall be recessed box anti-siphon, non-freeze, key-operated, 3/4". Hydrant shall be J.R. Smith or equivalent by Josam or Zurn. Coordinate cover and plate finish with Architect prior
to ordering any units.
C. Hose bib shall be chrome plated bronze or brass with replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread
spout and integral vacuum breaker in conformance to ANSI/ASSE 1011. Hose bib shall be equal to Chicago No. 952 or equivalent, T&S Brass or Watersaver.
2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Provide water hammer arresters at fixtures with automatic solenoid or cylinder operated valves,
automatic flush valves quick-closing valves or solenoid valves and where indicated on Drawings.
B. Fixtures and equipment in battery installation may use single water hammer arrester properly
sized for connected load.
C. Provide proper access to water hammer arresters in chases, utilizing a minimum 12” x 12” access
panel furnished by this Contractor.
D. Water hammer arresters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
and not less than one (1) installed per core piping hot system and core piping cold system. Arresters shall be equal to J.R. Smith, Zurn or PPP.
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. Refer to Architectural and Plumbing Drawings for quantities, locations and mounting heights of
fixtures provided under this Section.
B. Fixture trim, traps, faucets, escutcheons and waste pipes exposed to view in finished spaces
shall be I.P.S. brass with polished chromium plating (CP) over nickel finish.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 24
C. Vitreous china fixtures shall be regular selection fused and vitrified to produce homogeneous material with close grain without pores. Surfaces that contact walls, floors and other fixtures shall
be set true.
D. Enameled surfaces on cast iron fixtures shall be of suitable thickness to provide the highest
commercial grade. Exterior exposed surfaces not enameled shall be treated at factory with one (1) coat of filler.
E. Affix manufacturer’s guarantee label or trademark to fixture to indicate first quality. Acid-resisting enamel fixture shall bear manufacturer’s symbol signifying resistance to acid.
F. Set fixtures with wall outlet flanges at proper distance from floors and walls with closet setting compound or gasket.
G. Catalog designations and manufacturer’s names of vitreous china and enameled cast iron fixtures are specified to establish standards of quality for performance and materials. Equivalent fixtures
by Kohler, American Standard or Eljer may be submitted for consideration.
H. Vitreous china and enameled cast-iron fixtures shall be white throughout, unless specified
otherwise. Closet seats shall match closet fixture color.
I. Fixture Types: As listed on Drawings.
1. Notes: a. Standards:
1) Floor Drains: a) Cast Iron – ASME A112.21.1M
b) Plastic – ASTM A112.21.M c) Cast Iron Trench Drains – ASME A112.21.1M
2) Cleanouts: Cast Iron – ASME A112.36.2M 3) Roof Drains: Cast Iron – ASME A112.21.2M
4) Sleeve Systems: UL 1479
2.14 EQUIPMENT – GENERAL
A. The following mechanical equipment is to be supplied by a single manufacturer as part of this
package unless otherwise noted.
B. Equipment Tags:
1. All equipment shall be tagged using black phenol background with a 1/4" white engraved lettering tag affixed to the piece. Tag shall be minimum of 2” high and 4” long for large
equipment and shall include the tag number and the piece.
2. Equipment Tag Sequence (Example): a. G-CMP – 1XXX where:
b. 1 – Indicates piece number (1, 2, 3…) c. XXX – Indicates building number (if applicable)
C. All equipment furnished in the following pages shall be furnished with seismic anchoring points.
Equipment supplied shall be constructed with a seismic rating.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 25
2.15 WATER HEATERS
A. Provide water heaters of sizes and types indicated on the schedule sheets. Heaters shall be
tested at 200 psi and rated for working pressure of 150 psi and shall bare stamp certifying testing and rating. Tanks with capacity greater than 120 gallons or input rating greater than 200,000
Btu/hr shall meet ASME Boiler and Pressure and Vessel Code requirements.
B. Provide pressure and temperature relief valve and vacuum relief valve.
1. Pressure and temperature relief valves shall be at least 3/4" and shall be rated and listed for heater input rating and as required by ANSI and ASME Standards. Temperature relief valves
shall be installed within top 6” of tank.
2. Vacuum relief valves shall meet ANSI standards requirements and shall be rated and listed for heater input rating and as required by ANSI and ASME Standards. Temperature relief
valves shall be installed within top 6” of tank.
C. Storage type heaters shall have minimum standby heat loss in accordance with requirements of State Energy Code. Tank and heaters which are not factory insulated and jacketed shall be field
insulated.
D. Heaters and tanks shall be of size and type as scheduled on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
3.2 EXPANSION PROVISIONS
A. Allow for expansion with offsets, loops, swing joints, expansion joints and other means, where necessary to protect piping systems as shown. Take-offs from mains to run outs shall not have
less than a three (3) elbow swing.
B. Anchor mains and risers with loops or offsets to structure to impart expansion toward loops and
offsets. Anchors shall be forged wrought iron, secured to pipe and structure. Provide vibration isolation as required and as specified.
C. Provide pipe alignment guides to guide expanding pipe to move freely from anchor points towards expansion joints, offsets and other expansion provisions.
3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on piping installed under this section. Pipe
markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic protected by clean acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall be applied after Architectural painting where such is required.
B. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in either direction, use double-headed arrow marker.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 26
C. Main shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once
in each room and at intervals no longer than 20’.
D. In general, 2” high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4” in diameter and larger, and 3/4" high
legend shall be used for pipe lines 3” in diameter and smaller.
E. Markers shall be Seton, MIS or approved equivalent.
F. Color banding shall meet ANSI latest and OSHA requirements.
G. Markers shall have legends and color coding with black letters:
1. Markers are to be applied to all piping, regardless of under jacket colors per the following schedule:
Service Legend Background Color
Cold Water Cold Water Green
Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow
Non-Potable Water Non-potable Yellow
Sanitary Sanitary Sewer Green
Vent Vent Yellow
Rainwater Storm Sewer Green
H. In Mechanical Room and Janitor’s Room and other areas without hung ceilings, colored PVC jackets shall be used per the following schedule:
1. All insulated piping exposed in mechanical rooms shall be covered with a Ceel-Co plastic jacket. Color pattern and system identification legend shall be as in the following schedule:
2. This plastic jacket shall include fitting covers and piping covers.
3. Piping to be covered with this plastic jacket shall be insulated and finished as herein specified
and then the plastic jacket shall be applied.
3.4 TAGS, VALVES, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Upon completion of work, attach engraved laminated plastic tags to all valves and
instrumentation. Equipment shall bear a stamped stainless tag. Tags shall have black characters on white face, consecutively numbered and prefixed with letter “P” for general valves.
Tags shall bear the number used in the P&IDs for those items so marked.
B. Embossed or engraved aluminum or brass tags may be substituted if desired. Tags shall be at
least 1/8” thick.
C. Tags shall be at least 1” diameter with numerals at least 3/8” high and attached by “S” hooks and
chains.
D. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to electrical
and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 27
E. Non-potable water outlets shall be identified with permanently attached yellow color-code or 4” high triangle tag reading “Water Unsafe”.
F. Coordinate numbering system with existing piping tags as not to duplicate numbers.
3.5 FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING
A. Floor drains shall be flashed watertight with 20 ounce sheet copper flashing which shall extend 8” beyond drain flashing flange.
B. Provide counter flashing for roof penetrations required under this Section including vents and roof drains.
C. Flashing of vents, roof drains and other penetrations of roof required under this Section shall be done under other Sections.
3.6 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Joints and connections shall be permanent and shall be gas and water-tight. Jointing shall be
types specified for serviced indicated. Joints and connections shall meet requirements of manufacturer’s best recommended practice. All transitions between different piping materials
shall be made using approved adapters. Adapters for transitions between two (2) types of piping materials shall be manufactured for purpose intended.
3.7 INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Provide a complete, new (domestic and/or protected) hot and cold water piping system as
indicated on Drawings and as specified, including supplies to fixtures and indicated equipment. Piping shall be pitched at least 1” in 40 feet so that it can be drained completely at low points with
drain valves. Piping shall be pitched up toward fixtures for proper air relief. Provide automatic air vents with outlet piped to floor and gate valve ahead of air vents, where offsets cannot be vented
by means of fixture connections.
1. Pipe used in piping assembly shall be clean and shall have ends square and reamed before
putting into fittings.
2. Cut tube to required length with hacksaw or tube cutter designed for copper work.
3. Remove burrs from inside and outside of cut edge and clean end of tube with steel wool or sand cloth until discoloration is removed and metal is smooth and bright.
4. Oxides shall be removed by sand cloth and brush.
5. Removal of oxides or discoloration of pipe and fittings by acids or self-cleaning flux is
forbidden.
6. Apply a thin, uniform and complete coating of reliable brand of soldering flux (Nokorode or Crest) to cleaned surfaces of tube and fittings.
7. When joints are soldered, remove excess solder with a cloth or brush leaving a fillet of solder
in chamber at end of the fitting.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 28
8. Where quick closing valves such as solenoid or flush valves are being used, piping shall be protected from water hammer by shock absorbers. Shock absorbers shall be installed at all
batteries of fixtures that are operated by flush valves. Shock absorbers shall be as manufactured by PPP, J.R. Smith, or Zurn, and shall conform to the Plumbing and Drainage
Institute (PDI) published requirements.
9. Connections to tanks and equipment shall be made with unions.
10. Water services supplying the building shall flow through in-line strainers and shall have containment backflow protection as indicated.
11. Shut-off and control valves on main distribution and branch lines shall be located for easy
access and operation. Branch piping shall be valved with access panels provided as required at locations shown on Drawings and determined in field.
3.8 INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE, STORM, DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
A. Provide waste, drainage and vent lines shown in building as shown on Drawings. Vents shall extend through roof and shall increase to at least 4”. Piping shall be assembled and installed
without undue strains and stresses and provision shall be made for expansion, contraction and structural settlement.
B. Interior horizontal sanitary waste and storm drainage piping shall be installed in practical alignment at uniform grade of at least 1/8” per foot, but 1/4" per foot where code dictates and as
shown on Drawings.
C. Vents from fixtures or line of fixtures, when connected to vent line serving other fixtures, shall be
extended at least 6” above flood level rim of highest of fixtures to prevent use of vent line as waste. No vent terminal shall be directly beneath door, window or other ventilating opening of
building, nor shall any vent be within 12 feet horizontally of such opening.
D. Provide sleeves for pipe that pass through walls.
E. Provide 3” air gap on equipment and drains that discharge to floor drains.
F. Provide an air gap in which the vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the waste
pipe and the floor rim of the receptacle into which it is discharging is a minimum of 2 pipe diameters greater.
G. Piping shall be run straight and plumb and offsets shall be made at an angle of not less than 45.
H. Carefully lay out work in advance so pipes pass through openings and permit proper pitch to
stacks. Due to extensive ventilation and lighting systems all trades shall coordinate work with work of other trades.
I. Hub and spigot soil pipe shall be thoroughly assembled with joints of picked oil-free oakum packed tightly into space between pipes to a depth of 1-1/2”. Remaining space shall be filled in
by pouring with molten lead, caulked to ensure tight joints without straining bell. After caulking, lead shall be flush with ends of bell.
J. No hub soil pipe shall be assembled with any hub heavy-duty stainless steel couplings and neoprene gaskets.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 29
K. Cleanouts:
1. Provide cleanouts with brass caps and screws same size as pipe up to 4 inches and not less
than 4 inches for larger piping at the ends of all branches on soil and waste piping and in such other portions of the piping where run is over 50 feet. Locate floor cleanouts as
indicated on Drawings.
3.9 WATER ENTRANCE
A. Run exterior water service piping for domestic water, beginning 10’-0” outside building wall, as
shown on Drawings.
B. When water pipe laying is not in progress, close ends of pipe with watertight plugs. If water
enters pipe, flush and clean line.
C. Keep excavation for underground water main open until system has been tested, inspected and
approved.
D. Piping shall be bedded as specified in Division 2.
3.10 EXTERIOR SANITARY SEWER
A. Sanitary line ending 10’-0” outside exterior building wall shall run by gravity as shown on
Drawings.
B. Check line and grade of piping with laser designed for purpose intended.
C. Plug open ends of piping when work is not in progress.
D. Piping shall be bedded as specified in Division 2.
3.11 WATER METER
A. Provide compound water meters that meet AWWA C701-70 requirements for cold water meters
and the Municipal Water Authority.
B. Registers shall be straight reading, hermetically sealed calibrated in cubic feet and shall meet
Section 9.3 of AWWA standard requirements. Provide center swept test hands.
C. Meter shall register at least 98% and no more than 102% of water actually passing through meter
at any rate of flow, within range of 15 gpm to 800 gpm.
D. Main casing shall be bronze. Bolts shall be stainless steel.
E. Meter shall permit easy removal of interior parts without disturbing meter connections to pipeline.
F. Provide magnetic couplings to transmit motion from measuring chamber to register unit.
G. Provide remote register. Remote register plug/jack to conform to and be compatible with Owner'’ standard building automated system.
H. Measuring chamber shall be removable from main line case for repair and re-calibration.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 30
I. Meter shall be by Rockwell, Hersey or Neptune Products, and shall be approved by local water and sewer authority.
3.12 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS
A. Install rough plumbing including fixture carriers and supports, valves and water hammer arresters
within chase tolerances. Supply roughing through finish walls and at hose bibbs and shower heads shall be secure and free of movement. Locate valves and water hammer arresters within
12 inches of approved access panel location.
B. Align exposed waste and supply pipe roughings with fixture connections within 1 inch tolerance.
Provide flush valves in alignment with the fixture, without vertical or horizontal offsets. Obtain fixture manufacturer roughing data sheets for recommended roughing dimensions.
C. Provide fixture templates for Casework Contractor for counter mounted sinks and lavatories.
1. Rough handicapped use water closets to locate the flush valve handle on the wide side of the
toilet stall.
D. Secure fixture supports to floor slab construction with lag bolts and metal expansion shields to support at least 250 pounds on the front rim of the fixture for 5 minutes.
E. Mounting heights shall be in accordance with all local and state codes and latest ADA Standards.
F. Provide fixture rough-in piping connections, sizes in accordance with schedule on Drawings.
3.13 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide roughing and final connections for water, waste, air and gas systems including indirect
wastes, traps, tailpieces, stops and supplies, valves and unions for all equipment and fixtures including those supplied under other sections.
B. Provide complete plumbing roughings with capped and valved service with union of flange to suit Owner furnished equipment.
C. Refer to Architectural floor plans and Equipment schedules for all equipment provided under other sections or by Owner. Roughing for all equipment including floor drain locations shall be
based on approved Shop Drawings. Install indirect waste discharge to spill into floor drain funnel. Floor drain grate and sediment bucket shall be removable.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS
A. Install vacuum relief valves located above the top of the heater on cold water supply lines to
water heaters.
B. Gauges: Install gauges where indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Install pressure
gauges at water service entrance on inlet and outlet sides of strainers, filters, backflow preventers and pumps. Install temperature gauges on inlet and outlet side of water heaters and on
recirculation line at least 10 feet upstream of circulation pumps. Gauges shall be legible from 4 feet to 6 feet above the floor.
C. Trap Primers: Install trap primer and related piping through the floor and connect to primer connection on floor drains in all areas where maintaining the trap seal could be a problem.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 31
D. Water Hammer Arresters: Provide water hammer protection at all self-closing fixtures and equipment. Equip quick-closing valves such as flush valves and solenoids with water hammer
arresters. Banks of plumbing fixtures may be protected with a single properly sized and located PDI certified arrester. Obtain approval for access panel location prior to installation.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Mount fixtures level at the elevations shown on Architectural Drawings. Refer to toilet room
elevations and casework details.
B. Install handicapped used fixtures in accordance with the requirements to the Architectural Access
Board Code, latest ADA standards and ANSI A117.1. Insulate hot water supply and waste piping under lavatories.
1. Where urinals are provided, install one urinal with the rim mounted 17 inches above the finish floor in compliance with the Handicapped Code.
C. Grout walls and floor mounted fixtures watertight where the fixtures are in contact with walls and
floors.
D. Caulk deck-mounted trim at the time of assembly, including fixture and casework mounted. Caulk
self-rimming sinks installed in casework.
3.16 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION
A. All potable water piping outlets and connections to equipment or machinery shall be protected against backflow by means of an air-gap or approved backflow preventer.
B. Backflow preventer type, application and installation shall comply with the Commonwealth of (Massachusetts), Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) Drinking Water Regulations 310
CMR 22.00.
C. Mount backflow preventers horizontally, unless device is approved for vertical installation, at
heights and with clearances as required by DEP regulations.
1. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be installed between 36” to 48” above the floor
with a minimum of 6” clear space all around.
2. Double check valve assemblies shall be installed such that the top of the device is between 30” and 53” above the finished floor, with 12” clear space all around.
D. Submit plans to DEP and obtain permit for each reduced pressure or double check valve
backflow preventer installation and submit copies of permit to Architect for record.
E. Provide indirect waste piping with funnel to receive discharge from reduced pressure backflow
preventer atmospheric vents and spill through air gap into floor drain.
3.17 GAS SERVICE, METER, VENTS AND PIPING
A. Gas meter and piping to meter from gas main, will be provided by Gas Company. Pay charges associated with Gas Company installation. Gas piping provided under this Section shall begin at
building side of gas meter.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 32
B. Piping shall be done by licensed gas fitter (as required by Code).
C. Gas piping shall pitch to drain and shall have drip pockets at least 6” long with removable caps at
low points. Branch connections shall be taken from top or side of horizontal running main. Provide gas cock or valve on connections to fixtures or equipment.
D. Provide union connection between shut-off cock and equipment to permit disconnection of equipment.
E. Provide pressure reducing valve between meter and building piping, as required by Gas Company, piped and vented to outside of building.
F. Provide individual vents from regulators, pressure switches and reliefs on factory packaged equipment gas trains at all equipment located on this system. It is this Contractor’s responsibility
to extend all vents to atmosphere terminal at a safe location in conjunction with the Fuel Gas Code.
G. Gas piping and safety devices shall meet requirements of NFPA No. 54 and shall be subject to inspection and approval of State Gas Regulatory Board.
1. Special Note: Provide aluminum check valves on all gas pipes that enter rooms where compressed air is installed or when both compressed air and gas piping connect to the same
piece of equipment. This is required in all areas where gas and air are present.
H. Provide a gas cock valve at each branch run out from main or riser serving gas outlets.
I. Piping shall be securely fastened, separately hung, and shall not support any other weight or
piping. Piping dropped in concrete block walls shall be factory wrapped for corrosion protection.
J. Gas valves or cocks shall not be concealed and shall be readily accessible for inspection and
repair.
K. Welded piping shall conform to the latest requirements of the (Massachusetts) Fuel Gas Code.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean systems thoroughly before testing. Fixtures, equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be
free of grease, metal cuttings, dirt and other foreign material. Remove protective covers. Fixtures (including lavatories, water closets and urinals) shall be cleaned and ready for use.
B. Repair stoppage, discoloration and damage to parts of building, finish and furnishings due to failure to properly clean piping system within Contract Price.
C. After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of equipment included in this section, including concrete residue.
D. After the completion of the work, all materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished in accordance with the finish of the material. All chromed surfaces shall be
highly polished.
E. Before the systems are tested and balanced, pipes and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned so
that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter will be deposited in or carried through the systems.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 33
F. Water systems shall be thoroughly flushed and cleansed of any and all deleterious materials at least once before system is placed in operation. At this time, these systems will be carefully
checked for leaking and defects as hereinafter specified. An approved cleansing agent will be used in flushing.
G. At all times, keep the premises clear of undue accumulation of rubbish.
H. On completion of the work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from this contract and dispose
of same. At any time should the General Contractor be dissatisfied with the performance of clean-up responsibilities, he may elect, after proper notification, to undertake this operation and
back charge this Subcontractor accordingly.
I. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in a satisfactory condition for proper operation
at project completion.
3.19 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
A. Water piping systems shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing no less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. Chlorinating materials shall be either liquid chlorine or
sodium hypochlorite solution, and shall be introduced into the system and drawn to all points in the system. Disinfection solution shall be allowed to remain in system for 24 hours. During this
time, valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After disinfection, solution shall be flushed from the system with clear water until residual chlorine content is no greater than
0.2 parts per million.
1. Notify all parties 48 hours prior to cleaning system.
2. Bypass all building filters.
3. Perform chlorination prior to heating the domestic hot water system. Run circulation pumps
on the domestic HW system.
4. Provide advance notice to all trades prior to procedure. Post warning signs throughout the job site.
5. Collect samples randomly and at end user points.
B. Work shall be supervised by Owner and performed by approved chemical testing laboratory and
results sent to the Architect or Architect’s representative for verification.
C. Testing laboratory shall submit a summary of test procedure for approval prior to any work
performed. Subcontractor shall provide valves required to disinfect water supply system in part as required by phasing of construction and to provide isolating valves and draw-off valves for
proper containment, phasing and flushing.
3.20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING – GENERAL
A. Scope:
1. Test and adjust plumbing systems as specified and as required by Code.
2. Testing, balancing and adjusting shall in no way relieve guarantee requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 34
3. Provide services of qualified personnel, equipment and apparatus required to perform tests.
4. All systems shall be thoroughly adjusted for perfect intended operation. All mechanical equipment shall be adjusted for flow, temperature, etc. of fluid. The entire hot water
circulation system shall be thoroughly balanced so hot water draw from fixtures shall be as quickly available as possible. Pumps, relief valves and pressure reducing valves shall be
adjusted as required. Submit in writing to the Engineer upon completion of this work that it is complete and ready for use.
B. Before date of acceptance, furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection indicating
approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. General:
1. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms and test equipment for review before
testing.
2. Notify Architect and Authorities involved at least 48 hours before testing and inspection.
3. Do not paint, cover or conceal work before testing, inspecting and obtaining approval; this includes backfilling and application of insulation.
4. Costs of repairs and restoration of work of other trades and of existing building surfaces or
material damaged during cleaning or testing shall be borne by trade performing cleaning or testing.
D. No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned as described under “Cleaning” paragraph. Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing or draining systems to be tested.
1. Repair or replace leaks, damage and defects that result from tests to like-new condition. Remove and replace defective materials with acceptable materials.
2. Piping and joints shall be made tight without caulking. Continue tests until systems operate without adjustments and repair to equipment or piping.
3. Provide testing instruments, force pumps, gauges, equipment and labor necessary to conduct tests. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six
months before balancing. Instrument calibration shall be certified.’
4. Submit six (6) copies of complete testing and balancing report to Architect for review.
E. Final test shall be made after vertical and horizontal pipes and roughing-in have been run and before sewer or fixture connection is made.
1. After soil, waste and storm lines, etc. have been installed outlets shall be temporarily plugged
up. 2. Fill pipes with water to top of vertical lines and allow them to remain so filled for 24 hours.
3. Retesting after leaks are repaired shall be at no additional cost.
F. Pressurized Piping Systems:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 35
1. Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI applicable codes and as specified herein.
2. Before piping of various systems has been covered or furred-in, piping systems shall be
tested tight for 1 hour under hydrostatic pressure, 1-1/2 times systems working pressures, but not greater than test pressure of 150 psig.
3. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is
removed or any water drained off.
4. Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less than test pressure.
5. Retest systems after leaks are repaired within Contract Price.
G. Gravity Systems: Test under water pressure at heads specified in Plumbing Codes. Fill pipe
lines with water to top of 5 foot vertical section of pipe or to level of top of vent pipe; maintain head pressure for 30 minutes.
H. Potable Water System Test:
1. Certification of the potable water system integrity shall be required where separate systems
of potable and non-potable water are provided to supply plumbing fixtures.
2. Fill potable water system to capacity with clean clear water. Introduce water at top of piping system (Hot and Cold). During filling, introduce green food coloring dye into piping system.
A floor-by-floor survey shall be conducted. Operate each outlet (Hot and Cold) connected to potable water system until coloring has been observed. A method of maintaining the level of water and coloring shall be employed in order to make up the drawn off amounts. A survey sheet shall indicate each floor and the room number sequentially.
3. This survey is required to be performed after all pressure testing and flushing of the piping
system, but before sterilization. Further, it is required that all fixtures connected to the
potable water system be installed prior to the test. I. Examine Part 2 for supplemental testing requirements.
3.21 TESTING: PIPING SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Piping systems shall be subjected to testing water or air as noted and shall hold tight at the
pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any system is being tested, required head or pressure shall be maintained until joints are inspected.
2. Tests shall be witnessed by inspector having jurisdiction, and the Architect within 48 hour
notice, given these Authorities.
3. Equipment, material, and labor required for testing of various systems, or part thereof, shall be provided by Plumbing Contractor.
B. Sanitary, Waste and Roof Water Conductor System:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 36
1. Water test shall be applied to drainage system either in their entirety or in sections as required, after rough piping has been installed.
2. If applied to entire system, openings in piping system shall be tightly closed, except the
highest opening and system filled with water to point of overflow.
3. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly closed except highest opening in the section under test and each section shall be filled with water but no section shall be
tested with less than a 10’ head of water.
4. In testing successive sections, at least upper 10’ of next preceding section shall be tested so that no joint of piping in building, except the uppermost 10’ of the system shall be submitted
to a test of less than a 10’ head of water.
5. Water shall be kept in system for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be made tight at all points.
C. Points of drainage systems tested with air instead of water shall be tested by attaching an air
compressor testing apparatus to suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets or outlets, forcing air into systems until a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi or sufficient pressure to balance a
column of mercury 10” high. Pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 15 minutes.
D. All new sanitary, waste and vent piping installed under the floor slab, in the area of work, shall be video camera scoped and recorded upon completion and prior to final acceptance. Any debris
found in underground piping shall be flushed and removed as part of this contract. All video recordings and results shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the closeout documents.
E. Interior Water Piping System: Upon completion of water supply systems or section thereof, as required, system shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure of 150 psi. Gauge shall
be located on lowest new floor and pressure shall hold for a period of one (1) hours without introducing additional water. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply.
F. Natural Gas Piping Systems – Domestic Gas:
1. Upon completion of gas piping system or section thereof, as required, test by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening, and after closing all other inlets and outlets, force air into the system until a uniform pressure of at least 6” mercury or 3 lb. gauge
for a period of no less than 30 minutes for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume without showing any drop in pressure. Pressure shall be measured with a mercury manometer,
slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to read in increments of no greater than 1/10
lbs. G. Testing Summary:
1. W&V – with water to a 10 foot head for 30 minutes. 2. Water – with potable water to 150 psi for one hour.
H. Defective Work: If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking or screwed joints or holes shall be acceptable.
I. Additional Tests:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PLUMBING
220000 - 37
1. Provide additional tests such as smoke pressure tests as required by regulations or as directed by Authorities making the inspection.
2. Provide for any repeated test as directed by the Architect, to make all systems tight as
required.
3. Visual inspections of joints and valves shall be made as directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 220000
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC 230000 - i
SECTION 230000
HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ................................................................................. 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 7
1.8 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................ 7 1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ........................................................................ 8
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................... 8 1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 9
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ............................................................................................................................. 9 1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS .......................................................................................................................... 9
1.14 CORING, DRILLING ........................................................................................................................... 9 1.15 ACCESSIBILITY ................................................................................................................................ 10
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ..................................................................................... 10 1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 10
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ........................................................................................ 10 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. 10
1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY .............................................................................................................. 11 1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 12
1.22 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................ 12 1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 13
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 14
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 14 2.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING ........................................................................................................... 23
2.3 DUCT INSULATION: ......................................................................................................................... 24 2.4 PIPE INSULATION ............................................................................................................................ 25
2.5 PIPING AND FITTINGS .................................................................................................................... 26 2.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .................................................................................................. 27
2.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION (SEISMIC) ................................................................................................ 28 2.8 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS .................................................................................................... 38
2.9 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING .............................................................................................. 38 2.10 CABINET UNIT HEATER (ELECTRIC) ............................................................................................ 39
2.11 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS ............................................................................................................. 40 2.12 SPLIT SYSTEM DIRECT EXPANSION AIR CONDITIONING ......................................................... 40
2.13 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS ................................................................................ 41 2.14 RESIDENTIAL AIR CYCLER ............................................................................................................ 47
2.15 OUTDOOR STATIC CORE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS ............................................................. 47 2.16 INDOOR STATIC CORE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS ................................................................. 51
2.17 LOUVERS ......................................................................................................................................... 53 2.18 RADIANT CEILING PANELS ............................................................................................................ 54
2.19 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL VENTS .......................................................................................... 55 2.20 PACKAGED, AIR COOLED, DX ROOFTOP UNIT ........................................................................... 55
2.21 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................... 59
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC 230000 - ii
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 59
3.1 COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 59
3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................... 60 3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................. 62
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ........................................................................................................... 62 3.5 TAGS ................................................................................................................................................. 62
3.6 ANCHORS AND INSERTS ............................................................................................................... 63 3.7 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................... 63
3.8 EXPANSION PROVISIONS .............................................................................................................. 63 3.9 CLEANING ........................................................................................................................................ 64
3.10 STARTUP, TESTING AND BALANCING ......................................................................................... 64
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 1
SECTION 230000
HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections” and “HVAC” means “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning”.
B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for Mechanical Work, certain non-technical words
shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the HVAC work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support, all as part of the HVAC work. Purchasing shall include payment
of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project, all as part of the HVAC work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any HVAC item in the Drawings or Specifications for HVAC work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the HVAC work,
regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for HVAC work are complimentary
and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the HVAC work except that indications on the Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take precedence over
the Specifications where they conflict.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 2
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is
not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain
necessary approvals from Authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change
Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
D. Work shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Hoisting and rigging required to complete the work of this Section. 2. Sleeves, inserts and hangers.
3. Flexible connections for pumps and other vibrating and rotating equipment. 4. Equipment bases and supports.
5. Vibration isolation. 6. Motors.
7. Sheetmetal work. 8. Complete air distribution system including low and medium pressure ductwork, diffusers,
registers, grilles, splitters, dampers, etc. 9. Insulation for duct.
10. Exhaust and ventilating air fans. 11. Rooftop heating and ventilating units and related equipment.
12. Condensate piping. 13. Electric cabinet heaters.
14. Instruction manuals and startup instructions. 15. Testing and balancing.
16. Cleaning. 17. Automatic temperature controls, variable air volume controls and other controls.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated sections.
1. Cutting and patching of masonry, concrete, tile and other parts of structure, with the exception of drilling for hangers and providing holes and openings in metal decks.
2. Flashing of roof fans, or rooftop HVAC units, and of ductwork and all roof penetrations.
3. Installation of access panels in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling.
4. Painting, except as specified herein.
5. Electric power wiring for all equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 3
6. Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from equipment to roof or floor except as specified herein.
7. Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during construction
and testing.
8. Outdoor air intake or exhaust louvers.
9. Gypsum drywall enclosures of supply and return ductwork on all rooftop air handlers, supply and return airshafts, as shown on Drawings.
10. Fire protection.
11. Plumbing.
12. Electrical.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and laws of Local, State and Federal governments, and all other Authorities that have legal jurisdiction over
the site. Materials and equipment shall be manufacturer installed and tested as specified in latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
1. Local and State Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire and Health Department Codes.
2. American Gas Association (AGA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.) (formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
B. Material and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL), and approved by ASME and AGA for intended service.
C. When requirements cited in this Specification conflict with each other or with Contract Documents the most stringent shall govern work. The Architect may relax this requirement when such
relaxation does not violate the rulings of Authorities that have jurisdiction. Approval for such relaxation shall be obtained in writing.
D. Most recent editions of applicable Specifications and publications of the following organizations shall form part of the Contract Documents.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5. American Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 6. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
7. Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 8. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).
9. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 4
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This section shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in
more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
3. Manufacturer’s Product Data: Information prepared by the manufacturer which depicts standard equipment.
C. Submittals Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of
each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of
each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate
on cover sheet, the following information: a. Title.
b. Name and location of project. c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s).
d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc. e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
3. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be ¼” = 1’-0” and shall
indicate work of other Sections where physical clearances are critical and where interferences are possible. Provide larger scale details as necessary. Sheetmetal Drawings
shall show elements of Architect’s reflected ceiling plan, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves and other aspects of construction as
necessary for coordination.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Architect’s Mechanical/Electrical design for each project is based on the single
manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the Drawings. In Division 15 of these Specifications certain “Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These are
acceptable only if, as a minimum, they: a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 5
c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances
to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the Contract Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall
not be taken to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will fit within the available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor. d. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the
products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or Specifications.
e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to, being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified
products.
E. Deviations:
1. Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at discretion of the Architect.
F. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “H” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
G. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above, shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services,
service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating characteristics or cycles.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the
manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work.
Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the
altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 6
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
H. Submittal Notations: will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for
dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the
satisfactory performance of his work.
I. Schedule: Incorporate the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not
incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule. Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time a Shop
Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, are required for the following:
1. Automatic temperature controls. 2. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
3. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
J. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted out of sequence.
K. Responsibility: The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract
Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and
other Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited, waived, nor superseded in
any way by review.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 7
1. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
L. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and/or Manufacturer’s Data Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Diffusers, registers, grilles, splitters, dampers and accessories. 2. Ventilating and exhaust fans.
3. Electric cabinet heaters. 4. Automatic controls.
5. Insulation and acoustical lining. 6. Vibration isolation.
7. Equipment bases and supports. 8. Unit heaters.
9. Complete ductwork Shop Drawings, construction details and duct construction standards. 10. Color selection charts and samples for equipment and systems in finished areas.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Mechanical work. In
the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been
issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate general arrangements of Mechanical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets
required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels,
review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request information from Architect. Where the HVAC work shall interfere with the work of other trades,
assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation. Without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by
normal Structural interferences. The Mechanical Contractor shall be liable for any additional openings, or relocating and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams
and roof required for any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to
underside of structure as possible.
E. If any HVAC work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be made by the trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 8
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the Mechanical work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owners.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the heating
and ventilating equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The HVAC and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work, as well as the electrical characteristics of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to HVAC control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All low voltage thermostats and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the HVAC Subcontractor.
F. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an
integral part of packaged equipment.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale
not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination
Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings. All fire and smoke partitions
must be highlighted on the Coordination Drawings for appropriate coordination.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades: 1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System. 3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work. 5) Sprinkler System.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 9
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return Drawings to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty
trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination
Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings.
Fabrication shall not start until such electronic Drawings are received by the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all HVAC work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and indicates the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual measurements
shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his
determination prior to proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many
cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the
Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or concrete, as required for mechanical work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be 1/2" larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls and floors required for the installation of sleeves and supports for the Mechanical Electrical work.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 10
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor, wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the mechanical
equipment at the site.
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be handed over to the Owners.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 11
B. At the completion of work, prepare a complete set of Record Drawings showing all systems as actually installed. The copies will be made available for the HVAC Contractor’s copying, at his
expense, to serve as backgrounds for the Record Drawings. The quantity of copies which are made available shall in no way be interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings
necessary to show the required information. The HVAC Contractor’s professional Draft Person shall transfer changes to electronic CAD files. Submit three (3) sets of electronic copies to
Architect for comments as to compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Mechanical Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes
and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model numbers of final equipment installation.
1.20 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 hour service.
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary heat, cooling, etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 12
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed
those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify
situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct course of action.
1.21 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication and maintenance manuals for all items. Assemble literature in coordinated manuals with additional information
describing combined operation of field-assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams. The manual shall contain the names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who
stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. Divide manuals into three sections or books as follows:
1. Detailed maintenance and trouble-shooting manuals containing data furnished by manufacturer for complete maintenance. Include copy of balancing report.
2. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount and intervals recommended by
manufacturer for each item of equipment. Include additional instructions necessary for implementation of first class lubrication program. Include approved summary of lubrication
instructions in chart form, where appropriate.
B. Furnish three copies of manuals to the Architect for approval and distribution to the Owner. Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit the Owner’s
personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.
C. Operating Instructions: Upon completion of installation or when the Owner accepts portions of
building and equipment for operational use, instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in any or all parts of the various systems. Instructions shall be performed by factory authorized personnel.
The Owner shall determine which systems require additional instructions. The duration of instructions shall take equipment through complete cycle of operation (at least five working days).
Make adjustments under operating conditions.
D. Each contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and
accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment which are not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plug during construction to
prevent entry of obstructing material.
E. Each separate contractor shall protect the work and material of other trades that might be
damaged by his work or workmen and make good all damage thus caused.
1.22 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Secondary Building Voltage – High Level: 277/480.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 13
B. Secondary Building Voltage – Low Level: 120/208.
C. All equipment and wiring shall be suitable for the applied voltage.
D. All motors rated 1/2 horsepower and above shall be 208V or 480V, 3-phase.
1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. Not be used for temporary purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable ASHRAE standards.
G. Purchase products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and
certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.
H. Except for plans, all items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the HVAC work, the Mechanical Contractor work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 14
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
J. Items which are to be installed, but not purchased as part of the HVAC work shall be carefully examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the HVAC work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The mechanical work includes all procedures, regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Reference Standards:
1. Material, construction and installation shall meet requirements of most recent editions of the following standards and references, except for more stringent requirements specified or
shown on the Drawings:
Standard
As Applicable To
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Sheetmetal Ductwork; Duct Liners; Adhesives; Fasteners; Flexible Ductwork
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual
Duct Leakage Testing
SMACNA Ducted Electric Heat Guide for Air Handling Systems Electric Duct Heaters
ADC and TIMA Flexible Duct
Performance Standards
Flexible Ductwork
NFPA 90A Fire Dampers; Fire Resistance Standards for Ducts and Liners
B. General:
1. Provide supporting and hanging devices necessary to install the entire HVAC system
including ductwork and equipment, and to prevent vibration.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 15
2. Provide vertical and horizontal supports as required by code to meet minimum applicable earthquake resistance standards.
3. Ductwork shall be free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Dimensions shown on
the Drawings for lined ductwork are net inside dimensions. Increase ductwork dimensions to accommodate lining requirements.
4. Pipe or conduit crossing duct: No pipe, conduit, hanger, Architectural element nor structural
member shall pass through ductwork.
5. When making offsets and transformations necessary to accommodate structural conditions, preserve full cross-sectional area of the ductwork as shown on the Drawings.
6. Ductwork shall have pressure-velocity classifications as follows:
Pressure
SMACNA Seal
Class
SMACNA Leakage
Class Velocity
Pos. * A 3 2000 fpm or greater
Pos. * A 3 2000 fpm or greater
Pos. * A 3 4000 fpm or less
Pos. or Neg. A 3 4000 fpm or less
Pos. or Neg. A 6 2500 fpm or less
7. Ductwork shall have pressure-velocity classifications as follows:
Duct Construction
Class
Static Pressure
Rating Pressure
SMACNA Seal
Class
SMACNA Leakage
Class Velocity
2” 2” Pos. or Neg. B 12 2500 fpm or less
1” 1” Pos. or Neg. B 12 2500 fpm or less
1/2” 1/2” Pos. or Neg. B 12 2000 fpm or less
a. For negative pressures over 3” w.g., refer to SMACNA Round and Rectangular Industrial
Duct Construction Standards for joint and intermediate reinforcement requirements
8. Sealing requirements for Class B, Leakage Class 12, galvanized, non-welded, aluminum or non-welded stainless steel ductwork:
a. Transverse Joints: 1) During assembly seal all flanged transverse joints with sealing tape of quality equal to
Hardcast Inc. Model 1902-FR. Corners shall be sealed as described by SMACNA and when applicable per manufacturer’s published procedures.
2) Seal all non-flanged transverse joints with Hardcast Inc. Versa Grip Model 102 or approved equal.
b. Longitudinal Seams: Seal all longitudinal seams during ductwork fabrication with Hardcast Inc. Cold Seal Model 1001 or approved equal.
9. Support:
a. Space hangers as required by SMACNA (8 ft. max.) for horizontal duct on 8 ft. centers, unless concentrated loadings require closer spacing.
b. Support vertical duct on each floor or slab it penetrates. c. Supports for ductwork and equipment shall be galvanized unless specified otherwise.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 16
10. Connections: a. Connect inlets and outlets of air handling units and fans to ductwork with flexible
connections unless fan has vibration isolator mounts inside unit with flexible connections and no external vibration isolators. Exception: Do not use flex on life safety smoke
exhaust fans. b. Indoors, flexible connections shall be neoprene-coated fibrous glass fire retardant fabric,
by Ventifabrics, or Durodyne. Outdoors, flexible connections shall be DuPont hyplon-coated fibrous glass fire, weather and UV-resistant by Ventifabrics or Durodyne.
c. Secure flexible connections tightly to air handlers with metal bands. Bands shall be same material as duct construction.
d. Connections from trunk to branch duct shall be as detailed on Drawings.
11. Construction: a. No sharp metal edges shall extend into air streams.
b. Install drive slips on air-leaving side of duct with sheetmetal screws on 6” centers. c. Spin in collars shall NOT be used for branch connections in 3” or higher pressure class
ductwork.
12. Joints: a. Longitudinal lock seams shall be double-locked and flattened to make tight joints.
b. Make transverse joints, field connections, collar attachments and flexible connections to ducts and equipment with sheetmetal screws or bolts and nuts. Do not use rivets or
staples.
13. Prefabricated Transverse Duct Joints: a. Transverse joints in galvanized sheetmetal ductwork may be made with galvanized
gasketed frame and angle duct systems by Ductmate, TDF, TDC or approved equal. Angles shall be at least 20 gauge. Prefabricated transverse duct joints shall not be used
for duct 16 ga. and heavier, nor for duct 23 ga. and lighter. b. Secure angles to duct with screws (using clutched arbor) or spot-welds spaced as
recommended by manufacturer for duct pressure class.
14. Elbows and Bends: a. Elbows and bends for rectangular ducts shall have centerline radius of 1-1/2 times duct
width wherever possible. Elbows for grease exhaust and fume hood exhaust shall be full radius. Vanes or mitered duct are not allowed.
b. Where centerline radius is less than 1-1/2 times duct width (on supply, return and exhaust ductwork), elbows shall be radius throat (square throat allowed when turning
around column or other close objects) with radius heel. For elbows whose width is greater than 48 inches and/or where shown on plans, provide splitter vanes. Install
vanes in accordance with SMACNA. Where multiple elbows are separated by less than ten duct diameters use splitter (full length) vanes.
c. For round ductwork provide stamped elbows, with centerline radii equal to 1-1/2 times duct diameter, or gored elbows as follows:
Elbow Angle No. of Gores
0° - 36° 2
37° - 72° 3
73° - 90° 5
d. Elbows for flat oval ducts shall have centerline radii equal to 1-1/2 times duct diameter in plane of bend, or gored elbows with gores as specified for round ducts.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 17
15. Access Panels/Doors: a. Provide proper pressure and leakage rated, gasketed, duct mounted access
panels/doors for the following items with minimum sizes, as indicated. Access doors shall be of double wall construction. Access doors in insulated ducts shall be insulated.
Gauges of door materials, number of hinges, number and type of door locks shall be as required by the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Hinged doors are not
acceptable, screwed or bolted access panels are not acceptable. Doors shall be chained to frame with a minimum length of 6” to prevent loss of door. For seal Class A, access
doors shall be leakage rated, neoprene gasketed UL 94 HF1 listed, DUCTMATE “sandwich” or approved equal. Door metal shall be the same gauge as the attached duct
material. For grease and high temperature ducts, door assembly shall be rated for 2300° F. The minimum sizes shall be:
1) Fire dampers – 12” x 12”, or larger. 2) Combination Fire/Smoke dampers – 12” x 12”, or larger.
3) Smoke dampers – 6” x 6” minimum. 4) Automatic control dampers – 6” x 6” minimum.
5) Manual volume dampers 2 sq. ft. and larger – 6” x 6” minimum. 6) Inlet side to all coils – 12” x 12”, or larger.
7) Suction and discharge sides of inline fans – 24” x 24” minimum 8) At additional locations indicated on Drawings, or specified elsewhere – 12” x 12”
minimum. 9) Generally access doors are not shown on the Drawings, but shall be provided in
accordance with the above.
16. Plenums and Connections to Louvers: a. Shall be 18 ga. minimum cross-broken and properly reinforced with galvanized angle
irons to SMACNA requirements. b. Shall have bottom and corner seams soldered watertight at least 12” up from bottom.
c. Shall have neoprene gaskets or other non-corrodible material to make connections to louvers watertight.
d. Shall pitch connection back towards the louver. Provide half-coupling drain connection at bottom of plenum unless noted otherwise. Pipe drain to nearest floor drain.
e. Shall have unused portions of louvers blocked-off with sheetmetal; sealed air and watertight; insulated with 2” thick 6 lb. Density rigid or board insulation.
17. Duct Pressure Tests:
a. Pressure test ducts after takeoffs and wall penetrations are in place and before applying exterior insulation. Correct any leaks.
b. Pressure and leak test 100% of medium and low-pressure ductwork at 100% of operating system pressure. Duct shall be constructed so there is no joint or structural failure at the
test pressure.
18. Duct Leakage Tests: Leak testing shall be per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Provide orifice assembly including straightening vanes, orifice-plate mounted in
straight tube with properly located pressure taps, and U-tube manometer or other device as specified by SMACNA. The orifice assembly shall be calibrated accurately and shall come
with calibration curve. Leakage classes shall be as previously specified. Submit leak test report (per SMACNA format) for Architect review. Drawings of ductwork tested shall also be
submitted with report, indicating presence of takeoffs, wall penetrations, joints, etc.
19. Materials: a. Sheetmetal ducts shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized sheetmetal with G90
Commercial coating according to ASTM 527 unless specified otherwise. b. Flexible Ductwork:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 18
1) Flexible ductwork, connecting to uninsulated or unlined duct, shall be polyester core with corrosion-resistant helical wire reinforcing. The polyester core shall be minimum
two-ply and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0017”. Flex duct shall be UL rated for 6” WC positive pressure, 2” WC negative pressure with a maximum velocity of
4000 FPM. Flexduct must be listed as a Class 1 Connector according to UL 181 and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. The maximum ASTM E-84 fire-hazard
rating shall be 25 flame spread, 50 fuel contributed and 50 smoke developed. Uninsulated flexible duct shall be equivalent to Wiremold, Type WB, or Flexmaster
Types 2 and 4 (not type 9). 2) Flexible duct connected to insulated or lined duct shall also be insulated and shall be
equivalent to Wiremold Type WK or Flexmaster Types 2 or 4 (not type 9), with 1-1/2” 3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation and an aluminized reinforced vapor barrier.
3) Submittals shall include data or number of polyester plies and minimum thickness of polyester core, in addition to other data listed above required to ensure that
submitted product meets the requirements of these Specifications. 4) If flex duct other than the model numbers of the vendors listed above is submitted, a
sample of the flex duct shall be submitted to the Architect. The Architect shall have sole discretion in determining whether the submitted flex duct is equivalent to that of
the named vendors above. 5) Unless otherwise indicated, flexible duct shall not exceed 5’-0” long.
C. 2” and Lower Pressure Class Ductwork – Rectangular:
1. Ducts wider than 19” with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel shall be beaded or cross-broken.
2. Internal stiffening struts shall only be used upon prior written approval of the Architect.
3. Make changes in duct size with tapered connections as required by SMACNA. Changes
shall NOT exceed 30° from line of airflow. Take-off to the diffusers shall be 45° leading edge type or bellmouth type.
4. Transverse joints shall be TDF/TDC or slip joints; use flat or standing seam according to
SMACNA. Where the duct size requires a standing seam but space restrictions dictate flat seam, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
D. 2” and Lower Pressure Class Ductwork – Round:
1. Joints: a. Longitudinal joints shall be spiral seam, butt welded, lap and seam welded, or ACME
lock-grooved seam. Snap lock seams shall be used on 1/2" w.g. pressure class duct only.
b. Transverse joints shall be beaded sleeve joint or other approved joints listed in SMACNA. Use three (3) or more sheetmetal screws at 15” uniform intervals along circumference of
joints.
2. Branch fittings shall be conical tee (Buckley or equal) or combination tee as shown in SMACNA.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 19
E. Flexible Duct:
1. Flexible ductwork shall be Flexmaster Triple-Lock Buck Duct Flexible Air Duct (insulated or
non-insulated) as manufactured by Buckley Associates, ATCO, or equal. Flexible duct, non-insulated, shall be Underwriters Laboratory Listed UL 181 Class 0 air duct and constructed in
accordance with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. It shall have a smoke/flame spread rating of 50/25.
2. The duct shall be made from a tape of dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral wound into a tube
and spiral corrugated to provide strength and stability. The joint shall consist of a triple lock mechanically performed without the use of adhesives to make a durable airtight seam. A
double lock is not acceptable.
3. Flexible duct connected to insulated or lined duct shall also be insulated. Flexmaster insulated flex shall have a gray Fire Retardant Polyethylene outer jacket with a 1/2 lb.
density, 1-1/2” thick fiberglass insulation blanket, factory wrapped providing a thermal performance of R-6 overall. Flexible Duct, insulated, shall be Underwriters Laboratory Listed
and constructed in accordance with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. It shall have a smoke/flame spread rating of 50/25.
4. The flexible duct shall be supported as required.
5. Flexible ductwork shall be rated at 12” positive pressure. Flexible ductwork from 3” to 16” in
diameter shall have a negative pressure rating of 12”. Flexible ductwork 18” to 20” in diameter shall have a negative pressure rating of 8”.
6. All flexible ductwork shall be individually boxed and labeled for delivery to the jobsite for
maximum protection.
7. Submittals shall include data on minimum thickness of aluminum core, in addition to other data listed above required to ensure that submitted product meets the requirements of these
Specifications.
8. Provide sealing compound for installation. See further paragraphs in this Specification and details for other installation requirements.
F. Fire Dampers:
1. Provide fire dampers throughout the air distribution system(s) as required by applicable codes, standards and Authorities. Provide an access door for each fire damper of sufficient
size to repair the internal fusible link (see access panel/door section). Fire dampers indicated on the Drawings may not fully represent the exact number required for this project. It is the
Contractor’s responsibility, at no additional cost to the Owner, to provide all required dampers.
2. Fire dampers shall be the fusible link spring loaded type. Where in ductwork served by fans
which shut off during a fire alarm condition, dampers shall be the static type, similar to Greenheck Model FD series. Where in ductwork served by fans which do not shut off during
a fire alarm condition, dampers shall be the dynamic type, similar to Greenheck Model DFD series.
3. Fire damper frames shall be fitted with angle iron stop and stainless steel spring latch, and
shall be securely fastened to building construction.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 20
4. Seal spaces between damper frames and walls and between damper frames and floor with approved fire-retardant material.
5. The use of fire dampers shall NOT reduce net free area of duct below that shown on
Drawings. Fire dampers shall be Type B with the blades of the fire dampers out of the air stream.
6. Samples of fire dampers shall be submitted to and approved by Local Authorities Having
Jurisdiction.
7. Dampers shall bear 1-1/2 hour UL-rating fire damper label and shall be constructed and installed as required by UL-555.
8. Fire dampers shall be Buckley, Greenheck, Ruskin, Nailor Industries, Pottorff or Prefco for
use in the proper duct pressure classification.
9. Dampers shall be installed per SMACNA with breakaway connections and nose pieces on duct liner (see SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards).
G. Ceiling Radiation Dampers and Fire-Rated Blankets: For fire-rated ceiling assemblies, provide at
all ceiling diffusers, registers and grilles: Radiation dampers (Nailor Industries Series 0700 or approved equal) and Fire Blanket (Nailor Industries 0725 or approved equal) or fire assembly:
radiation damper and blanket already assembled Nailor or equal.
H. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers:
1. Provide and install combination fire and smoke dampers as required and as indicated on the drawings. As related work of this section, see also Electrical Specifications fire alarm system
sequence of operations. Devices shall be FSD series as manufactured by Greenheck, Pottorff, or another approved equal.
2. Dampers shall have a UL 555 fire resistance rating of 1-1/2 hours when intended installation
is in less than 3-hour rated fire-resistant assemblies. Rating shall be 3 hours when intended installation is in 3-hour or greater rated fire-resistant assemblies.
3. Fire closure temperature: Each combination fire smoke damper shall be equipped with a
factory installed heat responsive device rated to close the damper when the temperature at the damper reaches 250°F.
4. Dampers shall have a UL 555S approved elevated temperature rating of 250°F minimum.
5. Dampers shall have a UL 555S Class II leakage class rating minimum and a differential
pressure rating of 4 in. wg. Damper velocity rating shall be 2000 feet/min. minimum.
6. Frame construction: shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel formed into a 5 in. by 1 in. structural hat channel. Frames shall be 4-piece construction with 1-1/2 in. minimum integral
overlapping gusset reinforcements in each corner.
7. Blade construction: shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel strengthened by three longitudinal 1 in. deep V-grooves running the entire length of each blade. Each blade shall be symmetrical
relative to its axle pivot point for identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 21
8. Blade edge seals shall be extruded silicon rubber permanently bonded to the blade edges. Jambs shall be flexible stainless steel compression type.
9. Linkages shall be concealed in the jamb.
10. Axles shall be minimum 1/2 in. diameter plated steel. Frames shall be galvanized steel in the
gauge required by manufacturer’s UL listing.
11. Dampers shall be supplied as single assembly with an integral factory sleeve.
12. Dampers shall be supplied with factory retaining angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the manufacturer’s UL listing.
13. Axle bearing shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in polished extruded holes in the
damper frame. 14. Damper actuators shall be externally mounted (120 VAC), (24 VAC), (230 VAC) (Pneumatic
with 20 psi min. control pressure), two-position, fail closed.
15. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s UL installation instructions, labeling and NFPA 90A at the locations indicated on the drawings. All damper installations
not in accordance with the manufacturer’s UL installation instructions must be approved prior to installation.
16. Dampers must be accessible to allow inspection, adjustment, and replacement of
components. General Contractor shall furnish any access doors required in walls, ceilings, or other general building construction. Access points shall not affect the integrity of the fire-
resistance rated assemblies nor reduce the actual fire resistance rating of the assembly. Access points shall be permanently identified on the exterior by a label having letters not less
than 1/2 in. high reading “FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER”.
17. Coordination with Electrical: a. Where combination fire/smoke dampers are installed in ducts, an approved smoke
detector shall be installed in the same duct within 5 feet of the damper with no air outlets or inlets between the detector and damper. Detectors shall be listed for the air velocity,
temperature and humidity anticipated at the point where it is installed.
I. Volume Dampers:
1. Provide manually adjustable rectangular parallel blade dampers for duct heights less than 12”
with factory-installed locking hand quadrants extended 2” for all dampers installed in externally insulated duct:
a. On each supply, return and general duct take-off. b. At each take-off to register, grille or diffuser (not all are shown on Drawings for clarity).
2. Volume dampers shall be manufactured approximately 5/16” smaller in width and 1/8” smaller
in height than size of duct in which they are installed; e.g., nominal damper size is 24” x 10”; actual size is approximately 23-11/16” x 9-7/8”.
3. Volume damper frames shall be constructed of #6063 extruded aluminum reinforced channel
with minimum thickness of 0.050”. Opposed damper blades shall be #6063 extruded aluminum with minimum thickness of 0.050” and shall include reinforcing ribs. Each blade
shall be supported in the damper frame by individual Teflon axle bearings, and shall be driven by stainless steel connecting slide linkage controlled by 3/8” square steel control shaft.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 22
4. All required volume dampers may not be indicated on Drawings, but volume dampers shall be provided as necessary for systems balancing.
5. Dampers 12” and larger in height shall be opposed multi-blade type.
6. Where volume dampers are inaccessible, use locking type ceiling regulators and miter gear
or worm gear for all horizontal dampers. Bearing coupling for bottom duct control may be used for shaft on vertical blade dampers. The 3/8” rod between ceiling regulator and damper
shall be provided by Contractor.
7. Damper blades shall be two gauges heavier than adjoining ductwork, and shall be riveted to supporting rods. Hem over edges parallel to rods.
8. Brackets shall be galvanized metal, secured to ductwork with sheetmetal screw with locking
quadrant arms (see Seal Class Section for additional requirements). Provide 2” handle extension for all dampers on externally insulated ductwork.
9. Note: All required volume dampers may not be indicated on Drawings but dampers shall be
provided as necessary for system balancing.
J. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
1. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles for supply, return and exhaust outlets, of size, type and
design shown on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Anemostat, Krueger, Metal*Aire, Price, or Titus.
2. Equipment shall be tested and rated per ASHRAE 91-70.
3. Equipment shall handle air quantities at operating velocities:
a. With maximum diffusion within space supplied or exhausted. b. Without objectionable air movement as determined by Architect.
c. With sound pressure level not to exceed NC 30.
4. Supply, return and exhaust outlets shall have opposed blade volume dampers operable from front.
5. Supply registers shall have two (2) sets of directional control blades.
6. Diffusers within same room or area shall be of same type and style to provide Architectural
uniformity.
7. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with gaskets and installed with faces set level and plumb, tightly against mounting surface.
8. Finish shall be as directed by the Architect.
9. Coordinate diffusers, registers and grilles with ceiling and wall construction. Refer to
Architectural Drawings for exact lengths and for framing and mitering arrangements that may differ from those shown on HVAC Drawings.
K. Shower Exhaust Ductwork: Shower exhaust ductwork shall be aluminum, of types as detailed in
this specification above and constructed in accordance with SMACNA except that Seal Class shall be “A” regardless of duct pressure rating.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 23
L. Branch Duct Take-off Fittings:
1. Contractor shall provide bellmouth take-offs at all branch duct locations.
2. Bellmouth fitting shall be provided with damper.
3. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel. Bellmouths shall include an
airtight neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting with minimal leakage. Pre-drilled holes shall be provided for quick mounting.
4. Standard damper hardware to be constructed of 26-gauge galvanized material with a
quadrant damper and tight-fitting gasketing to ensure minimal leakage at damper pivot points.
5. Optional heavy-duty hardware shall be provided at locations of higher static pressure where shown on the Drawings.
6. Ninety-degree (90°) take-offs are not permitted on this project.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING
A. Provide 1” thick acoustical lining by Certain-teed, Knauf, Owens Corning or Manville for following ductwork:
1. Supply and return ductwork, including plenums for minimum of 20 feet from rooftop or air handling units (or to sound attenuator if attenuator is located further than 20 feet from fan).
Exception: 3 feet before and 10 feet after humidifiers and dedicated life safety smoke exhaust systems.
2. Increase duct dimensions to accommodate lining while maintaining inside clear dimensions
shown on the Drawings.
3. Lining shall be as follows:
Lining for
Material
Minimum
NRC
Maximum K-Factor
At 75° F Mean
Low-pressure ductwork (below 4” S.P.)
Black, Matfaced, 2 lb. density, flexible glass
0.75
0.24
4. For all lined ductwork at the inlets and outlets of fans over 1 HP, and for all lined medium and high pressure ductwork (including plenums) within 20 feet from RTU’s and AHU’s provide a
perforated aluminum (24 gauge) or galvanized liner (minimum 28 gauge), with 28% minimum free area on the side of the liner exposed to the moving airstream. Metal liner shall be held in
place by welded pins spaced no more than 12” O.C.
5. Materials and installation shall meet following standards, as applicable: a. NFPA-90A, UL723, NFPA-255.
b. SMACNA Duct Liner Applications Standard. c. SMACNA Mechanical Fasteners Standard.
d. Adhesive and Sealant Council: Adhesives Standard for Duct Liner – ASC-A-7001A e. ASTM E-84 fire hazard classifications of 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50
fuel contributed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 24
6. Duct liner shall be installed without interruptions or gaps, using 100% coverage of adhesive and mechanical fasteners. Mechanical fasteners shall be welded or secured mechanically to
duct on 12” maximum centers.
7. Cut liner to ensure overlapped and compressed longitudinal joints at corners. Transverse joints in liner shall abut precisely. Seal joints against fiber entrainment with approved
adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer. Use sheetmetal nosing at beginning of lining (in direction of flow) to prevent erosion.
8. The Contractor shall ensure the integrity of acoustical lining when slip-in duct heaters are
installed; loose lining shall not flap about in the airstream. Secure edges of lining with sheetmetal nosing, where liner is interrupted to make room for slip in heaters.
9. Submit samples and catalog data for duct liner, mechanical fasteners and adhesives to
Architect for approval.
10. Friction coefficient correction factor at 1000 FPM shall be no greater than 1.1. Liner shall be Certain-teed Ultra Liner, Knauf Duct Liner M or Johns Manville Linacoustic. Other liners from
these manufacturers with friction coefficient correction factors greater than listed above, are not acceptable.
11. Mylar used for vapor barrier shall meet ASTM E-84 classification.
12. Any cut liner due to duct take-offs and branches shall be totally sealed at edges (with
sheetmetal nose pieces) to prevent entrainment of loose fibers.
13. Do not insulate lined duct.
2.3 DUCT INSULATION:
A. General:
1. Insulation shall be Certain-Teed, Knauf, Manville or Owens Corning. Install insulation, mastics, adhesives, coatings, covers, weather-protection and other work exactly as required
by manufacturer’s recommendations. Materials shall meet requirements of Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards and SMACNA.
2. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by Architect.
Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and other foreign matter prior to installation of insulation.
3. Leaks in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will not be accepted.
4. ASTM E-84 minimum fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame-spread, 50 fuel contributed and 50 smoke developed.
5. Where ducts are insulated, flexible connections to ducts shall be insulated.
6. Insulate standing seams with same material and thickness as duct.
7. Acoustically lined ductwork shall not be insulated externally, except as noted otherwise.
8. Return ductwork in ceiling plenums shall not be insulated.
9. Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and in sleeves.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 25
10. Transmission rates of vapor barriers shall not exceed 0.02 perms.
11. Do not insulate fibrous glass duct.
B. Concealed Rectangular, Flat Oval and Circular Ductwork:
1. Insulate supply and outside air ductwork and plena in concealed spaces and return ductwork not in ceiling plenum with 1-1/2” thick glass duct wrap; with foil-Kraft flame-resistant vapor
barrier.
2. Insulation shall provide a minimum R-6 value when located in unconditioned spaces and a minimum R-8 value when located outside the building.
3. If insulation does not have pre-cut lap, make lapped butt joints by cutting 2” strip of insulation
away from vapor barrier. Apply 6” strips of approved adhesive on 16” centers and wrap duct with insulation. Staple lapped joint with outward-clinching staples. Seal stapled joints airtight
with approved matching pressure-sensitive tape.
4. For rectangular duct 24” or larger in any dimension, augment application method specified in item 3 with approved mechanical fasteners, such as weld pins with speed washers, on 18”
centers on bottom of duct.
5. Cover breaks in vapor material with patches of same material, secured with adhesive and staples. Seal staples with approved pressure sensitive tape.
6. Fill voids in insulation at jacket penetrations and seal with pressure sensitive tape.
7. Seal and flash terminations and punctures with fibrous glass cloth between two (2) coats of
pressure sensitive tape.
8. Terminate vapor barrier and extend insulation at standoff brackets.
2.4 PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be fibrous glass insulation with factory-applied fire retardant vapor barrier jacket
by Owens Corning, Certain-Teed, Manville or Knauf, installed as required by manufacturer. ASTM E-84 fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50 fuel
contributed.
B. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by the Architect.
Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and foreign matter prior to installation of insulation.
C. Drain piping shall have 1/2" thick insulation.
D. Refrigeration Line Insulation:
1. Suction lines, hot bypass lines and outdoor liquid lines shall be insulated with 3/4" thick rigid
closed cell foam insulation. Armstrong Rigid Armaflex, Manville, Owens Corning or Halstead/Nomaco (Insultube), except in computer room plena.
2. Installation shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. Seal butt joints with insulation
manufacturers approved adhesive.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 26
3. Outside above ground insulation shall be protected with two (2) coats of approved vinyl lacquer coating over woven glass mesh adhered to insulation with Insulcolor or approved
equal lagging adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Refrigerant piping in hung ceiling and under floor supply and return plena shall be insulated with 1” thick fibrous glass insulation that meets applicable requirements of this paragraph.
5. VRF systems require all refrigerant lines to be insulated from the outdoor unit to the indoor
terminal units.
2.5 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. General: Pipe materials and fitting materials shall be as indicated in Schedule of Pipe and Fitting
Materials.
B. Schedule of Pipe and Pipe Fitting Materials:
Service
Systems Description
Pipe Size
Pipe Material
Joints
Fitting Material
Fitting Rating PSI/Class/
Weight
Condensate
Drain
CD All PVC.
Schedule 40 Note 2
Solvent
Welded
PVC,
Schedule 40
Class 150
Refrigerant R All Copper,
ACR
Silver Brazed Wrought
Copper
200 PSI
Refrigerant Up to 5 tons R (see Note 3.) Up to 1-1/8” PEX-AL-PEX Composite Press Brass 650 PSI
1. Use copper for drain lines in plenums and through fire-rated walls. Copper tubing must be insulated for 12” from equipment.
2. Refrigerant Line Sets – Composite (Optional):
a. At Contractor’s option the use of “Multi-Flex Pipe” may be used for pipe up to 1-1/8” and units up to 5 tons. It shall be capable of a temperature range from -40 degrees F up to
220 degrees F and has a working pressure of 650 psi. b. Pipe must carry the following approval: ICC-ES LC 1035–2013 Report PMG-1221.
c. Pipe shall carry a 25 year warranty against defects in material and workmanship. “Multi-Flex Pipe” is represented by Green Technology Associates of Hingham, MA.
C. Connections:
1. Provide dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar materials.
2. Provide eccentric reducing couplings to bring pipes flush on top for water service and flush on bottom for steam service.
3. Branch lines in welded piping shall be made with welding tees except that branch lines less
than one half diameter of main may be made with Weld-O-Lets or Sock-O-Lets.
4. Nipples shall be same material, make and thickness as pipe with which they are used. Close nipples shall not be used.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 27
5. Make piping connections 2-1/2” diameter and larger to valves and equipment with welding neck flanges, ANSI B16.5, pressure rating to match system, flat or raised face as required.
6. Make piping connections 2” diameter and smaller to valves and equipment with steel body,
300 psi brass seat unions on steel piping and with heavy semi-finished brass unions on copper tubing.
7. Fit flanged joints with Johns-Manville or approved equal full-face gaskets. Flanges shall be
faced and drilled to ASA standards and fitted with semi-finished hexagon machine bolts and nuts of proper number and size.
8. Make screw joints tight with Teflon (polytetrafluoroethylene) tape or litharge-glycerin mixture
applied to male threads. Use tapered threads.
9. Make fusion welded joints as required by ANSI B31.1. Make changes in direction of pipe with welded fittings only. Bevel connections before welding, mechanically or by flame cutting.
2.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide pipe stands, supports, hangers and other supporting devices in accordance with ANSI B31.9 and MSS-69, as necessary to support work required by Contract Documents.
B. Secure vertical piping to building construction to prevent sagging or swinging.
C. Space hangers for horizontal piping as follows:
Pipe Size
Rod Diameter
Maximum Spacing
Up to 1-1/4” 3/8” 8 ft.-0”
1-1/2” and 2” 3/8” 10 ft.-0”
2-1/2” and 3” 1/2" 10 ft.-0”
4” and 5” 5/8” 12 ft.-0”
6” 3/4" 12 ft.-0”
8” and over 7/8” 12 ft.-0”
D. Horizontal copper tubing shall have maximum hanger spacing of 5 ft. for tubing 1-1/4” diameter and smaller and 10’ for tubing 1-1/2” and larger. Maximum spacing for PVC pipe hanger shall be
4”.
E. Reduce spacing to a maximum of 10’-0” apart, regardless of pipe size, as necessary for fittings,
valves and other concentrated loads.
F. Support piping 4” diameter and larger from structure with pipe roll hangers with adjustable steel
rod hangers, sized to accommodate insulation.
G. Support piping 3” diameter and under from structure with Carpenter and Patterson Fig. 100 clevis
hangers or approved equal.
H. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, F&S or Grinnell Co. Figure
numbers of Carpenter and Patterson are specified to establish standards of quality for performance and materials.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 28
I. Provide spring hangers with travel stops as specified in Vibration Isolation Paragraph, where necessary and where shown on Drawings.
J. Hangers for horizontal lines shall be vertically adjustable to obtain pitch requirements of Piping Paragraph.
2.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION (SEISMIC)
A. General:
1. Description: Provide the necessary vibration isolation materials to eliminate excessive noise and vibration from being transmitted from the equipment to the occupied areas of the
structure and also serve as the basis for seismic restraint design for the entire mechanical system within the building (see definitions). Provide isolation materials and seismic restraints
complete as shown and specified.
2. The work in this section includes the following: a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.
b. Equipment isolation bases. c. Piping flexible connections.
d. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. e. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
f. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. g. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
h. Definitions: The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes all non-structural components within the facility and 5 feet outside the facility that
is not buried underground including but not limited to:
Air Distribution Condensing Units Pumps (all types) Air Handling Units Control Panels Rooftop Units
Boilers Cooling Towers Tanks (all types) Cabinet Heaters Ductwork Var. Frequency Drives
Chillers Fans Water Heaters Compressors Mounted Coils
Condensers Piping
3. Certification and Analysis: a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the
structure. b. Calculations to support seismic restraint designs stamped by a Structural, Civil Engineer
or professional Mechanical Engineer. c. A seismic design liability insurance certificate must accompany all submittals.
4. Code and Standards Requirements:
a. BOCA – 1990. b. SMACNA Guidelines for seismic restraint of mechanical system.
c. NFPA – 13 and 14. d. All State and Local Codes.
5. Manufacturer’s Responsibility:
a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities:
1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 29
2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified.
3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections. 4) Provide installation instructions, Drawings and field supervision to ensure proper
installation and performance of systems. b. Manufacturer’s working in this Section must provide a seismic design errors and
omissions insurance certificate with their bid to certify their ability to provide engineering and design as required by this Section.
6. Quality Assurance:
a. All vibration isolators shall have calibration markings of some method to determine the actual deflection under the imposed load after installation and adjustment.
b. All isolators shall operate within the linear portion of their load vs. deflection curves. Load vs. deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a
deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection. c. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per
isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than + 10%.
d. Substitution of internally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu of the isolation and restraints specified in this Section is acceptable provided all conditions of this Section are
met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a letter of guarantee stamped and certified paragraph A.2 stating that the specified noise and vibration levels will be
obtained and that the restraints are in compliance with these Specifications or all costs of converting to the specified external vibration isolation and/or restraints shall be borne by
the equipment manufacturer. e. The following Specifications describe spring hangers with 30° misalignment feature. This
requirement is mandatory. The Contractor shall replace any hangers without the 30° capability discovered on-site at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Products:
1. Description: a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
b. Acceptable manufacturers of vibration isolation products shall be: Novia Associates, Mason Industries, Amber Booth Company, Peabody Noise Control, Korfund Dynamics
Corporation, Vibration Mountings and Equipment or Vibration Eliminator Co. provided they meet the requirements of this Specification. Mason Industries model numbers have
been used in this Specification to establish quality of components. Products of the other listed manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent,
structural design, performance and deflections of the base manufacturer.
2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types: a. General:
1) Shall be capable of accepting, without failure, 1/2 “G” external forces, 1 “G” for life safety equipment. Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position, and not short
circuit isolation during normal conditions. Isolators shall have provisions for bolting and welding to the structure.
2) Attachment plates to be cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, beam clamps, etc. that may be required for seismic compliance, shall be provided by this
section. 3) Housekeeping pad attachment shall be designed and certified by this Section.
Materials and labor required shall be by the concrete section of these Specifications. b. Seismic Restraints:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 30
1) Type I: Shall comply with general characteristics of spring isolator Type A with the following additional features. Isolator shall incorporate snubbing restraint in all
directions and be capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevations during installation, and have a 1 “G” rating. Cast or aluminum housings, except ductile iron,
are not acceptable.
a) Mason Ind. Type SSLFH.
2) Type II: Each corner or side of equipment base shall incorporate a seismic restraint having a minimum of 5/8” thick, all directional resilient pad limit stop. Restraints shall
be fabricated of plate, structural members or square metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. Isolator shall have a 1 “G” acceleration rating.
a) Mason Ind. Type Z-1011 or Z-1225. 3) Type III: Multiple metal cable type with approved fastening devices to equipment and
structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members using two-sided beam clamps or appropriately designed inserts for concrete. All parts of the system including cables and excluding fasteners are to be of a single supplier to
assure seismic compliance.
a) Mason Ind. Type SCB Seismic Restraining System.
4) Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator (min. 0.1”) encased in ductile iron or steel casing. Isolator shall have 1 “G” acceleration rating.
a) Mason Ind. Type BR or RBA.
5) Type V: Non-isolated equipment shall be field bolted or welded (powder shots not
acceptable) to the structures as required to meet seismic forces. Bolt diameter, embedment data and/or weld length must be shown in certified calculations as
required by Paragraph A.2 above. 6) Vibration Isolators:
a) Type A: Spring Isolator.
(1) Having a minimum OD to OH of 0.8:1.
(2) Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with:
(a) Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized. (b) Hardware cadmium plated.
(3) All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.
(4) Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated deflection.
(5) Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designed otherwise.
(6) Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel.
(7) Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural frequency.
(a) Mason Ind. Type SLF.
b) Type B: Spring isolator shall be the same as Type A with the following
additional features:
(1) Built-in vertical limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance under normal operation.
(2) Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment.
(3) Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment installation. Installed and operating heights shall be identical.
(4) Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene isolation pad.
(5) Housing rated to accept 1 “G” Acceleration.
(a) Mason Ind. Type SLF
(b) Note: Type B spring isolator must be bolted or welded to the structure.
c) Type C: Spring hanger rod isolator.
(1) Spring element (Type A) seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup incorporating a rod isolation bushing.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 31
(2) Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
(3) When used on ductwork, provide eyebolts for attachment to duct straps.
(4) Spring diameter and hanger box lower hole size shall allow 30° hanger rod misalignment.
(a) Mason Ind. Type 30, W30.
d) Type D: Same as SEISMIC RESTRAINT IV.
(1) Type E: Elastomer hanger rod isolator.
(2) Molded (min. 1-3/4” thick) neoprene element with projecting busing lining the rod clearance hole. Static deflection at rated load shall be a minimum of
0.35”.
(3) Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting capable of supporting equipment up to four times the rated capacity of the element.
(a) Mason Ind. Type HD.
e) Type F: Combination Spring/Elastomer hanger rod isolator.
(1) Spring and neoprene elements in a steel retainer box with the features as
described for Type C and E isolators.
(a) Mason Ind. Type 30N. (b) Note: SEISMIC RESTRAINT III must be used with Type F hanger rod
isolator.
f) Type G: Pad type elastomer isolator.
(1) 0.75” minimum thickness, 50 psi maximum loading, ribbed or waffled
design.
(2) Minimum 0.1” deflection.
(3) 1/16” galvanized steel between multiple pad layers.
(4) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less
than 75% of the pad area (Type “GM”).
(a) Mason Ind. Type Super W pad. (b) Note: Bolting required for seismic compliance. Neoprene and duck
washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short circuiting.
g) Type H: Pad type elastomer isolator.
(1) Laminated canvas duct and neoprene, maximum loading 1000 psi, minimum
1/2" thick.
(2) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less than 75% of the pad area (Type “HM”).
(a) Mason Ind. Type HL pad.
(b) Note: Bolting required for seismic compliance. Neoprene and duck washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short-circuiting.
h) Type I: Thrust restraints.
(1) A spring element similar to Type A isolator shall be combined with steel
angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices capable to limiting movement of air handling equipment to 1/4".
(2) Restraint shall be easily converted in the field from a compression type to
tension type.
(3) Unit shall be factory pre-compressed.
(4) Thrust restraints shall be installed on all cabinet fan heads, axial or
centrifugal fans whose thrust exceeds 10% of unit weight.
(a) Mason Ind. Type WB.
i) Type J: Steel Rails.
(1) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during
operation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 32
(2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.
(a) Mason Ind. Type ICS or R.
j) Type K: Pipe anchors.
(1) All directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement
of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2" thickness of Type H pad.
(2) Vertical restraints shall be provided by a similar material arranged to prevent
vertical travel in either direction.
(3) Allowable loads on isolation materials shall not exceed 500 psi and the
design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction.
(4) Must be bolted or welded to meet seismic criteria.
(a) Mason Ind. Type ADA.
k) Type L. Isolated clevis hanger.
(1) Combination clevis or rod roller hanger and a Type C, (LC), E, (LE), or F, (LF) isolation hanger.
(2) System shall be pre-compressed to allow for rod insertion and standard leveling.
(a) Mason Ind. Type CIH.
l) Type M: Flashable restrained isolator.
(1) Shall have all features of Type B isolator.
(2) Shall have waterproof spring covers for adjustment or removal of springs.
(3) Unit shall have a structural top plate for welding and bolting of
supplementary support steel.
(4) Isolator shall accept 2” roofing insulation and be flashed directly into the waterproofing membrane.
(5) To be complete with wood nailer and flashing.
(a) Mason Ind. Type REVRS.
3. Equipment Bases – General: All curbs and roof rails are to be bolted or welded to the building steel or concrete deck to attain acceleration criteria and shall be wind restrained for 100 mph
wind loads. a. Type B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base.
1) Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment startup and misalignment of driver and driven units. Centrifugal fan bases shall be complete with
motor slide rails and drilled for driver and driven units. 2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.
3) Member depth shall be a minimum of 1/10 of the longest unsupported span.
a) Mason Ind. Type M. WF.
b) Note: Restraint I, II or IV must be used with Type B-1 base.
b. Type B-2: Concrete Inertia Base. c. Type B-4: Flashable Roof Rail System.
1) Rooftop fans, condensing units, air handlers, etc., shall be mounted on continuous support piers that combine equipment support and isolation into one assembly.
2) Rails shall incorporate Type A isolators which are adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment has been installed.
3) The system shall maintain the same installed and operating height with or without the equipment load.
4) The system shall have full plywood nailers on all four sides, designed to accept membrane waterproofing and shall be dry galvanized or plastic coated.
5) Unit shall be supplied with flashing. 6) Curbs shall be Mason Ind. Type R-7000 having a minimum 3” rated static deflection.
d. Type B-5: Roof Rail Base.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 33
1) Rails shall be constructed from structural steel angles as required to prevent flexure and misalignment under load.
2) Each rail shall be the full length of the supported equipment and be welded to a series of Type B isolators. Bolt-on angle cross ties at the ends and center shall form
one rigid platform. 3) Roof Rail Type TRSLR.
e. Type B-6: Non-isolated Roof Curb. 1) Non-isolated, curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on structural curbs
that meet the one “G” acceleration criteria. 2) Curbs shall accept standard 2” roof insulation.
3) Curbs shall be Mason Ind. B-6000. f. Type B-7: Computer Room Unit Base.
1) Computer room AC units shall be welded or bolted to welded structural steel stands having a minimum 1/2" “G” certified lateral acceleration capabilities.
2) Stand shall have + 2” of adjustment to accommodate floor irregularities. 3) Bolting or welding required to meet seismic criteria.
4) Base shall be Mason Ind. Type CRFS-1.
4. Flexible Connectors: All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shut-off valves, horizontal and parallel to shafts whenever possible.
a. Type FC-1: Elastomer Connector. 1) Manufactured of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured in hydraulic
presses. 2) Straight connectors to have tow (2) spheres reinforced with a molded-in, external
ductile iron ring between the spheres.
3) Rated at 250 psi/170° F, dropping in a straight line to 170 psi/250° F for sizes 1/2" to
12”. 4) Sizes 10” and 12” at 200 psi and greater operating pressure to employ control cables
with neoprene end fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of 1/2" bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
5) Connectors shall be pre-extended per manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent elongation under pressure.
6) Minimum safety factor of 3.6:1 at maximum pressure ratings shall be certified by test reports. Submittals shall also include two (2) test reports by independent consultants
showing minimum reduction of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10 dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies.
7) Connectors bolted to Victaulic type couplings or gate, butterfly or check valves to have a minimum 5/8” flange spacer installed between the connector and the coupling
flange. 8) Neoprene in lieu of EPDM is not acceptable.
9) Mason Ind. Super-Flex Types: MFTNC or MFTFU. b. Type FC-2: Flexible stainless steel hose.
1) Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor. 2) 2” and smaller with male nipples, 2-1/2” and larger with fixed steel flanges.
3) Length as follows: 1/2 x 9 2-1/2 x 12 10 x 26
3/4 x 10 3 x 14 12 x 28
1 x 11 4 x 15 14 x 30 1-1/4 x 12 5 x 19 16 x 32 1-1/2 x 13 6 x 20
2 x 14 8 x 22
4) Mason Ind. Type BSS, or as approved equal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 34
c. Type FC-3: Unbraided exhaust hose. 1) Bronze hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor (minimum 150 psi).
2) Copper tube ends. 3) Length as follows:
2-1/2 x 14 8 x 22
3 x 16 10 x 26 4 x 17 12 x 28
5 x 18 14 x 30 6 x 19 16 x 32
4) Mason Ind. Type SDL-RF or as approved equal.
d. Type FC-4: Bronze braided flexible hose. 1) Bronze hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor (minimum 150 psi).
2) Copper tube ends. 3) Length as follows:
1/8 x 7-1/2 3/4 x 11-1/2 3 x 27
1/4 x 8-1/4 1-1/4 x 14-3/4 3-1/2 x 32 3/8 x 9 1-1/2 x 17 4 x 33
1/2 x 9-3/4 2 x 20 5 x 41 5/8 x 10 2-1/2 x 2 46 x 48
4) Mason Ind. Type BFF or as approved equal.
C. Execution:
1. Isolation and seismic restraint system must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position
of equipment resulting in stress on equipment connections.
2. Equipment Installation: a. Equipment shall be isolated and restrained as per Table A at the end of this section.
b. Place floor-mounted equipment on 4” high concrete housekeeping pads properly doweled or expansions shielded to the deck to meet acceleration criteria. Mount vibration
isolators and/or bases on housekeeping pads. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
3. Additional Requirements: a. The minimum operating clearance under inertia bases shall be 2”.
b. The minimum operating clearance under other bases shall be 1”. c. All bases shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by blocks or shims, as
appropriate, prior to the installation of the machine, isolators and restraints. d. The isolators shall be installed without raising the equipment.
e. After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators. When the
isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks shall be barely free and shall be removed. Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are no short circuits
of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all directions. f. Install equipment with flexibility in writing.
4. Piping and Ductwork Isolation:
a. All piping and ductwork is included in this section. b. Installation – Isolate the following piping and ductwork outside of shafts:
1) All water and steam piping in mechanical rooms.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 35
2) Piping exposed on roof 3) Water piping and ductwork within 50 feet or 100 pipe diameters (whichever is
greater) from connected rotating or reciprocating equipment and pressure reducing stations
c. The isolators shall be installed with the hanger box attached to, or hung as closely as possible to the structure.
d. The isolators shall be suspended from substantial structural members sized for 0.08” deflection at center of span, not from slab diaphragm, unless specifically permitted.
e. Hanger rods shall not short circuit the hanger rod. f. Horizontal suspended pipe 1-1/4” to 2” and all steam piping shall be suspended by Type
E isolators with a minimum 3/8” deflection. Water piping larger than 2” shall be supported by Type F isolators with a minimum 0.75” deflection or same deflection as equipment for
the first three locations nearest equipment, whichever is greater. g. Type L hangers may be substituted for the above.
h. Ductwork shall be supported by Type C hangers with 1” minimum deflection. i. Horizontal floor and roof supported pipe shall be the same as C.3.f except used isolator
Type D and Type A, respectively. j. Vertical riser pipe supports under 2” diameter shall utilize Type H isolation.
k. Vertical riser guides, if required, shall avoid direct contact of piping with the building. l. Pipe anchors or guides where required shall utilize Type K isolators.
m. Riser sway supports, where required, shall utilize two (2) neoprene elements (Type G or H) to accommodate tension and compression forces.
n. Install Type FC-1 (FC-4 for Freon) flexible connectors at all connections of pipe to equipment such as pumps, chillers, cooling towers and as shown on Drawings.
o. Install FC-2, FC-3 or FC-4 type connectors only at locations which exceed temperature or service (such as gas, fuel oil or Freon) limitations of FC-1.
p. For control air piping, provide two (2) flexible connectors Type FC-2 90 degrees to each other in the compressor discharge piping to the receiver. When the receiver is remote
from the compressor, isolate the piping between the compressor and receiver with Type C isolators having 3/8” deflection. The receiver shall be isolated with Type D isolators
having 3/8” deflection.
5. Seismic Restraints – Installation: a. All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be bolted or welded to the
structure to allow for required acceleration. Bolt points, diameter of inserts, embedment depth and weld length as shown on the approved submittal Drawings shall be followed in
all respects. b. All suspended equipment shall be four point independently braced with Type III restraints,
installed taught for non-isolated equipment, piping or ductwork and slack with 1/2" cable deflection for isolated equipment.
c. Piping, Schedule 10, 20 or 40 weld or Victaulic braced at a maximum of 40 foot intervals and at turns of more than 4 feet.
d. Piping, lateral bracing at 80 foot intervals. e. Non-hub piping to be braced at 20 foot intervals (or 40 foot using approximately rated
seismic couplings) as required. f. Ductwork to be braced a maximum of every 40 feet and at every turn and at run ends.
Lateral bracing shall be every 60 feet. g. Seismic restraints are not required on the following: 1) Gas piping less than 1” ID. 2) Piping in mechanical equipment room less than 1-1/4” ID.
3) Other piping less than 2-1/2” ID. 4) All rectangular ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in cross sectional area.
5) All round ducts less than 28” diameter.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 36
6) All clevis hung pipe suspended by individual hangers 12” in length (6” in length for fire protection mains) or less from the top of the pipe support to the bottom of the
support for the hanger. 7) All top supported ducts suspended by hangers 12” or less in length from the top of
the duct to the bottom of the support for the hanger. h. Chimneys and stacks passing through floors are to be bolted at each floor level or
secured above and below each floor with riser clamps. i. Chimneys and stacks running horizontally to be braced every 30 feet with Type III
restraint. j. Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic forces, restraints such
as Type III shall be located above the unit’s center of gravity to suitably resist “G” forces. 1) Note: Vertically mounted tanks may require this additional restraint. For overhead
support equipment, overstress of the building structure must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
a) Flanges and structural beams.
b) Upper or lower truss chords in bar joists.
c) Cast-in-place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete structures.
d) Pipe risers through cored shafts require no additional seismic bracing. (Core
diameters to be a maximum of 2” larger than pipe OD.)
e) Non-Isolated Equipment Installation:
(1) HVAC:
(a) All ceiling suspended pipe and duct not excluded by diameter or distance
from structure allowances. (b) Restraint Type III or V: All ceiling suspended equipment including but not
limited to tanks, stacks and VAV boxes. (c) Restraint Type III or V: All diffusers in acoustical tile ceilings to be four
point independently cable braced unless ceiling meets seismic Zone 2 requirements. In such case earthquake clips or other approved means
of positive attachment shall secure fixture to T-bar structure. Note: If VAV units are rigidly attached to duct (no flex), they shall be considered
ductwork. (d) Restraint Type III: All floor mounted equipment and tanks.
(e) Restraint Type III or V: Computer room AC units. Bolted to floor mounted stands that are in turn bolted to deck.
(f) Base Type B-7: Roof (curb) mounted AC, H&V units, or fans to be mounted on seismically rated curbs.
(g) Base Type B-6.
6. Inspection: Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices, the local representative shall inspect the completed project and certify in writing to the Contractor that
all systems are installed properly or require correction. The Contractor shall submit a report to the Architect including the representative’s report. Certify correctness of the installation or
detail the corrective work to be done.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 37
TABLE A
Non-Critical
Critical
Equipment HP MTNG ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE
Absorption Mach. Flr GM .10 - B .75 J*
AC Units (Dx)
Flr
Clg
D
A
.30
.75
--
--
A
F
.75
.75
J*
--
Air Compressors Tank or Unitary to 10 > 10 Flr Flr D A .30 .75 -- -- A A .75 1.50 − B-2
Air Cooled Cond.
or Chillers
Flr
- - -
A
2.50
B-4
Axial Fans Flr Clg D - .30 - -- -- A** F See Guide -- --
Base Mounted Pumps to 15 > 15 Flr Flr D D .30 .30 B-2 B-2 A A .75 1.50 B-2 B-2
Boilers
Flr
GM
.10
-
B
.75
-
Centrif. Chillers Flr D .30 J* B 1.50 J*
Centrif. Fans
Arr. 1 & 3
Flr
Clg
D
-
.30
-
B-1
-
A**
F
See
Guide
B-1
***
Arr. 9 & 10
Flr
Clg
D
-
.30
-
J
-
A**
F
See
Guide
J
J
Computer Room Units Flr Clg D - .30 - B-7 - A F .75 .75 B-7 -
Condensate Pumps Flr D .30 J D .30 J
Cooling Towers
Flr
B
.75
-
M
2.50
-
Fan Coil Units Flr Clg D - .30 - -- -- A C .75 .75 -- --
Unit/Cab.
Heater
Clg
- - --
--
E
.30
--
DEFL GUIDE
RPM DEFL
<400 3.5”
<600
2.5”
>600 1.5”
Notes:
1. “ISOL” and “BASE” column indicates letter type as appears in the specs. 2. “MTNG” refers to method of support of equipment from the structure. 3. “SEE GUIDE” indicates isolator deflection selection to be taken from RPM/DEFLECTION Guide at bottom of table.
*Use on vertically arranged units.
**Substitute Type B isolator for roof installation.
***Substitute Type B-2 base for Class 2&3 fan.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 38
2.8 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS
A. Duct Sleeves and Openings:
1. Sleeves through floors, through exterior structure, through fire-rated construction and through smoke partitions that require smoke dampers shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for
round duct and shall meet the SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for rectangular ducts. Fireproof packing shall be applied to seal any openings between sleeve and wall.
Materials shall maintain the fire rating of the wall, and shall be installed in accordance with the SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide.
2. Openings in walls, partitions and other fire-rated construction that do not require smoke
dampers shall meet NFPA 90A, Section 3-3.8.
3. Materials for prepared openings in partitions shall match construction penetrated.
2.9 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING
A. Provide motors and controls, and furnish starters for HVAC equipment, except units served by
MCC provided under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL WORK. Provide control and other related wiring including interlocks. Power wiring (to panelboards, disconnect switches, starters and
motors) will be provided under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL WORK. Starters that are not integral to equipment will be furnished, installed and wired under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL
WORK.
B. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be NEMA Design B, constant speed, self-ventilated
squirrel cage induction. Motors shall have 1.15-service factor unless totally enclosed. Motors shall have Class B insulation.
1. Motors 1/2HP and over shall be as required in schedules.
C. All motors shall be high or premium efficiency type. They shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-1-12.53a and shall have their efficiencies determined in accordance with IEEE Standard 112
Method B. The NEMA nominal efficiency shall be listed on the motor nameplate. Minimum nominal efficiencies shall be as follows:
Size (HP)
Nominal Efficiency (Minimum)
1 – 3 84%
5 – 7-1/2 88.5%
10 – 25 90%
30 –100 93%
100+ 95%
D. Starters that require interlocks or remote control shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch in cover. Provide magnetic starters as necessary, with auxiliary contacts, buttons and
switches in required configurations. Refer to paragraph AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS and to Drawings for interlock requirements. Starters shall be as manufactured by
one of the following manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer, Clark, Arrow Hart, or Square D.
1. Each 3-phase, 60 Hz motor shall be provided with magnetic starter with either ON-OFF push
button or hand-off-automatic switch.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 39
2. Other motors shall be provided with a manual starter with ON-OFF switch.
3. Control relay for each starter shall be for operation on 120 V, single-phase, and transformer of sufficient capacity within starter case shall be furnished for this purpose.
4. Provide inverse time limit overload and under voltage protection in each leg and with pilot
lights. Provide “red” and “green” On-Off pilot lights.
5. Provide nameplates with engraved “white” lettering to designate area and equipment served.
6. Starters for refrigeration machines shall be furnished by Unit Manufacturer.
7. Provide starters for two-speed motors with deceleration relay.
8. Furnish for all single speed motors, 25 HP and above, 95% power factor correction capacitors. Capacitors shall be in NEMA enclosure of the same rating as the motor’s starter.
2.10 CABINET UNIT HEATER (ELECTRIC)
A. Furnish and install electric cabinet unit heaters as shown and scheduled on the drawings. Units shall be as manufactured by Qmark, Berko, Brasch or an approved equal. Unit heater power
ratings and voltages shall match the schedules and be coordinated with the electrical plans.
B. Construction:
1. Heater assembly shall fit into a backbox and consist of all operational parts mounted to a fan panel.
2. Heating elements shall be of the non-glowing design consisting of an 80/20 nickel-chromium
resistance wire enclosed in a steel sheath with copper brazed plat fins.
3. Fan shall be five-bladed aluminum.
4. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed.
5. Back box shall be designed as a recessed rough-in type for masonry or frame installations or to be surface mounted with option frame. Box shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel and
contain knockouts through which power leads are brought.
6. Front panel shall be a bar grille type constructed of 10 gauge cold-rolled steel, welded into a uniform grille and finished in a baked enamel paint.
C. Features:
1. Thermal cutout: built into the system to shut down heater in the event of over-heating.
2. Disconnect switch: double pole single throw type mounted on the back box for positive disconnect of unit power supply (completely concealed behind front cover).
3. Heater shall be 3-piece design: Back box, heater assembly, and front panel.
4. Fan delay switch: shall be of bi-metallic, snap-action type and shall activate fan after heating
element reaches operating temperature. Fan shall operate after thermostat is satisfied and until the heating element is cool.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 40
5. Thermostat: tamper-proof and completely concealed behind the front cover, shall be bi-
metallic, snap-action type with enclosed contacts.
D. Options (provide as scheduled):
1. Pneumatic/Electric Switch: Available for use with energy management systems employing
pressure devices.
2. Low voltage relays: Normally open 24 volt and 120 low voltage holding coil relays for use on higher voltage units for temperature control integration.
3. 1 inch or 2 inch deep surface mounting frames (for surface mounted heater applications).
4. 14 gauge security front cover.
2.11 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. Provide electric unit heaters of horizontal discharge type, by Q Mark, Markel, Brasch or Trane, as shown on Drawings and on Schedules.
B. Casings shall be heavy gauge steel with mounting bracket.
C. Horizontal heaters shall have adjustable steel discharge louvers.
D. Electric motor shall have integral overload protection and shall be equipped with combination fan guard/motor support resiliently mounted to absorb motor vibration.
E. Fan blades shall be aluminum directly connected to fan motor and shall be dynamically balanced.
F. Fan switching shall be available to operate fan independently for summer circulation.
G. Automatic reset thermal overheat protection shall be wired for instantaneous pilot operation of built-n control contractor holding coil.
2.12 SPLIT SYSTEM DIRECT EXPANSION AIR CONDITIONING
A. Provide complete DX system for central station air conditioning units of types, sizes and
capacities shown on schedules. System shall consist of matching air cooled condensing units, compressors, piping, controls, wiring and other accessories and appurtenances necessary to
provide fully automatically functioning system.
B. Condenser coil shall be aluminum plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes,
circuited for sub-cooling. Provide propeller fans arranged for vertical discharge. Condenser fan motors shall have inherent protection and shall be permanently-lubricated and resiliently-
mounted. Fans shall have safety guards. Provide controls for cycling fans.
C. Compressors shall be serviceable hermetic with external spring isolators and automatically
reversible oil pump.
D. Compressor shall unload in response to suction pressure in steps for partial load operation.
Compressor shall be separated from condenser fans and coil.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 41
E. Multiple compressor units shall have stop-start fans and coils. Compressor motors shall have part-winding start.
F. Provide factory-wired controls in separate enclosure. Safety devices shall consist of high and low pressure switching and compressor overload devices. Wiring shall incorporate positive acting
timer to prevent short cycling of compressor if power is interrupted. Time shall prevent compressor from restarting for approximately 5 minutes after shutoff. Units shall have
transformer control circuit.
G. Casing shall be galvanized steel finished with baked enamel. Provide service access panel.
H. Provide openings for power and refrigerant connections.
I. DX air conditioning system be capable of starting and operating down to 0° F ambient. Low
ambient operation shall be accomplished by varying the speed of condenser fan based on sensing of head pressure in refrigerant liquid line, by modulating damper in condenser fan
discharge based on refrigerant head pressure sensing, or by flooding the condenser coil with liquid refrigerant to maintain the desired condenser pressure. Low ambient systems with cycle fans or modulate dampers based on ambient temperature exclusively, are unacceptable. Provide time delay rate for timed bypass of the low pressure switch or other means to start condensing at
0° F without nuisance safety trip units. Any field installation and control wiring of low ambient
operation components shall be performed under the work of the mechanical section according to equipment manufacturer’s instructions. If condensing unit does not come with hot gas bypass
pre-piped, provide under the work of the mechanical section all components necessary for hot gas bypass operation. Hot gas system shall be piped in strict accordance with recommendations
of condensing unit manufacturer. Submit with Shop Drawings showing refrigerant piping, hot gas piping layout including bypass pipe sizes and connection locations, hot gas bypass valve and
solenoid valves manufacturers and model numbers, sensing capillary bulb locations, control wiring of solenoid and details of any other components. Adjust hot gas bypass in field, as
required, to maintain proper system operation.
J. Provide refrigerant piping between air-cooled condensing unit and AC unit. Provide necessary
auxiliaries and appurtenances, such as strainer, sight glass, oil trap, scale trap and other devices, to make system complete and operable under fully automatic control. Refrigeration piping shall
be ACR copper tubing made up with wrought copper fittings using silver solder, installed with nitrogen charge while soldering; of sizes as recommended by manufacturer of air conditioning
unit and matching air-cooled unit. Piping shall meet requirements of Piping and Valves paragraphs of this Section.
K. Provide back-seating globe stop valve, winged and sealed. Cap valves 1” and under shall be diaphragm setting.
L. Tests as specified in PART 3.
M. Provide supports, hangers and other appliances necessary to support refrigeration system and
air-cooled units.
2.13 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Systems for variable refrigerant flow shall be as manufactured by Mitsubishi City-Multi or an
approved equal provided the system can meet the performance and installation parameters scheduled, details and specified on the drawings and herein.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 42
2. System designs for this project are customized for the intended installation. The purchased system(s) shall be verified with the Manufacturer’s representative as being the same as the
system designs shown on the drawings. For substituted Manufacturer’s systems that are considered equal, a full design analysis shall be completed by their certified Manufacturer’s
representative proving equality in the sizing, configuration and layout of the specified system.
B. R2-Series Outdoor units (simultaneous heating and cooling)
1. Units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls
system and shall perform all function necessary for operation. Each unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run-tested at the factory.
2. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of
outdoor rated capacity. 3. Sound rating shall be no higher than 58 dBA individually or 61 dBA when twinned.
4. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the branch circuit (BC) controller shall be
insulated in accordance with the installation manual.
5. Unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls, high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.
6. Unit operation capabilities in heating mode shall be down to -4°F ambient temperatures or
cooling mode down to 23°F ambient without additional low ambient controls.
7. Unit shall have oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.
8. Unit shall have manufacturer supplied 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized snow/hail guard.
9. The unit shall contain a heat interchanger circuit for sub-cooling liquid prior to entering the
outdoor coil during heating mode. The interchanger shall be of a copper tube within a tube construction. The interchanger circuit refrigerant flow shall be controlled by and electronic
expansion valve.
10. Unit cabinet/casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished, able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM B117 criteria for seacoast protected models.
11. Fans:
a. Units shall have one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan per module. Fans shall be factory set for operation under 0”wg external static pressure but capable of
normal operation under a maximum 0.24”wg via dipswitch. b. Fans shall have inherent protection, permanently lubricated bearings and be completely
variable speed. c. Shall be mounted for quiet operation.
d. Shall have raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. e. Shall have vertical flow discharge.
12. Refrigerant shall be type R-410A. Polyolester oils shall be required.
13. Coil:
a. Outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing.
b. Fins shall have factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 43
c. Coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. d. Refrigerant flow from outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven
compressor. e. Outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for
last stage.
14. The unit shall include a basepan heater. The basepan heater shall activate only when compressor is operating in heating mode at an outdoor ambient temperature of 39°F or
below.
15. Compressor: a. Each module shall have an inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor.
b. Crankcase heaters shall be factory mounted on compressors. c. Shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. Variable capacity turndown shall be 19%-5%
of rated capacity. d. Shall be equipped with internal thermal overload.
e. Shall be mounted to avoid transmission of vibration. f. Field installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed.
16. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of up to 8 levels of demand control for each
refrigerant system.
17. Electrical power for the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volt, 3-phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. The control circuit between indoor units, BC
controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24 VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.
C. R2-Series Branch Circuit (BC) Controllers:
1. BC controllers shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor units for heating or subcooled liquid
refrigerant to flow to indoor units for cooling.
2. BC controllers shall be specifically used with R-410A R2-Series systems. Units shall be equipped with circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perfrom all
functions necessary for operation. Unit shall have galvanized steel finish, be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run-tested at the factory. The sum of
connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity.
3. Unit cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves as well as two tube-in-tube heat exchangers.
4. Refrigerant valves shall be two-position to control refrigerant from every port. Service shut-off
valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. Linear electronic expansion valves shall
be used to control the variable refrigerant flow.
5. Each system shall include at least (1) unused branches of branch devices for future use. Branches shall be fully installed and wired in central location with capped service shutoff
valve and service port.
6. Unit shall have an integral drain pan.
7. Unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 44
D. (Non-Simultaneous) Outdoor units
1. Units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all function necessary for operation. Each unit module shall be
completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run-tested at the factory.
2. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 130% of outdoor rated capacity.
3. Sound rating shall be no higher than 60 dBA individually or 64 dBA when twinned.
4. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units shall be insulated in
accordance with the installation manual.
5. Unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls, high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.
6. Unit operation capabilities in heating mode shall be down to -13°F ambient temperatures or
cooling mode down to 0°F ambient without additional low ambient controls. The unit shall maintain 100% heat output at 0°F without a supplemental heat source or a second
compressor to boost low ambient heating performance.
7. Unit shall have oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.
8. Unit shall have manufacturer supplied 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized snow/hail guard.
9. The unit shall contain a heat interchanger circuit for sub-cooling liquid prior to entering the
outdoor coil during heating mode. The interchanger shall be of a copper tube within a tube construction. The interchanger circuit refrigerant flow shall be controlled by and electronic
expansion valve.
10. Unit cabinet/casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished, able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM B117 criteria for seacoast protected models.
11. Fans:
a. Units shall have one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan per module. Fans shall be factory set for operation under 0”wg external static pressure but capable of
normal operation under a maximum 0.24”wg via dipswitch. b. Fans shall have inherent protection, permanently lubricated bearings and be completely
variable speed. c. Shall be mounted for quiet operation.
d. Shall have raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. e. Shall have vertical flow discharge.
12. Refrigerant shall be type R-410A. Polyolester oils shall be required.
13. Coil:
a. Outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing.
b. Fins shall have factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish. c. Coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 45
d. Refrigerant flow from outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor.
e. Outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for last stage.
14. Compressor:
a. Each module shall have an inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. b. Crankcase heaters shall be factory mounted on compressors.
c. Shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. Variable capacity turndown shall be 18%-4% of rated capacity.
d. Shall be equipped with internal thermal overload. e. Shall be mounted to avoid transmission of vibration.
15. Electrical power for the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volt, 3-phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall
be controlled by integral microprocessors. The control circuit between indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24 VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to
provide total integration of the system.
E. Indoor Air Handling Units
1. General:
a. Indoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volt, 1-phase, 60 hertz as scheduled. b. Indoor unit controls shall be as provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform the functions
necessary to operate the system. Refer to “Temperature Control System” portion of these specifications.
c. Unit control boards shall consist of contacts for control of external heat source (as applicable). Boards shall have no less than 4 digital inputs capable of customizable
control strategies and no less than 3 digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.
2. 4-way ceiling recessed cassette unit:
a. Unit shall recess into ceiling with a ceiling grille. Units shall be factory assembled, wired and run-tested. Unit shall contain all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear
expansion valve, control circuit board and fan motor. Unit shall have self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, auto restart function, emergency operation
function, test run switch, and ability to adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment.
b. Unit cabinet shall be ceiling recessed cassette type with provisions for field installed filtered outside air intake. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two,
three or four way blow. Grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the wired remote controller to customize airflow pattern in the space. Indoor vanes shall have 5
fixed positions and swing feature capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution.
c. Indoor fans shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently
lubricated bearings. The fan shall include 5 speed settings including “auto” to adjust based on difference between controller set-point and space temperature. The controller
shall have switches to set for optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of air outlets used.
d. Unit filter shall be long-life washable type.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 46
e. The indoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. Tubing shall have inner grooves and be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. Coils
shall be pressure tested at the factory. There shall be an integral condensate drain pan under the coil and the unit shall be provided with integral condensate lift mechanism that
is able to raise drain water 33” above the condensate pan. f. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated in accordance with the
installation manual.
3. One-way ceiling recessed cassette: a. Unit shall recess into ceiling. Units shall be factory assembled, wired and run-tested. Unit
shall contain all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion valve, control circuit board and fan motor. Unit shall have self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time
delay mechanism, auto restart function, emergency operation function, and test run switch. Indoor unit refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before
shipment. b. Unit cabinet shall be ceiling recessed cassette type with provisions for field installed
filtered outside air intake. One-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet for one-way airflow.
c. Indoor fans shall be an assembly with a line-flow direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently
lubricated bearings. The fan shall include 4 speed settings. The controller shall have switches to set for optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of air outlets
used. d. Unit filter shall be long-life washable type.
e. The indoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. Tubing shall have inner grooves and be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. Coils
shall be pressure tested at the factory. There shall be an integral condensate drain pan under the coil and the unit shall be provided with integral condensate lift mechanism that
is able to raise drain water 23” above the condensate pan. f. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated in accordance with the
installation manual.
4. Ceiling concealed/ducted units: a. Units shall be factory assembled, wired and run-tested. Unit shall contain all factory
wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion valve, control circuit board and fan motor. Unit shall have self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, auto
restart function, emergency operation function, and test run switch. Indoor unit refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment.
b. Unit cabinet shall be concealed/ducted type with provisions for field installed filtered outside air intake.
c. Indoor fans shall be an assembly with 2 Sirocco fans direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently
lubricated bearings. The fan shall include 3 speed settings plus “auto-fan” function. The unit shall have ducted air outlet and return air systems.
d. Unit filter shall standard disposable pleated type. e. The indoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.
Tubing shall have inner grooves and be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. There shall be an integral condensate drain pan under the coil and condensate shall be gravity drained from the unit. f. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated in accordance with the
installation manual.
5. Vertical air handlers:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 47
a. Units shall be multi-position indoor fan coil design with fixed bottom return and fixed vertical discharge supply. The units shall be capable of mounting in either the vertical or
horizontal positions. Units shall be factory assembled, wired and run-tested. Unit shall contain all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion valve, control
circuit board and fan motor. Unit shall have self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, auto restart function, emergency operation function, and test run switch.
Indoor unit refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment. b. Unit cabinet shall be pre-painted, pre-insulated, 22 gauge galvanized steel.
c. Indoor fans shall be an assembly with a single direct driven D. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The
fan shall include 3 speed settings plus “auto-fan” function. The unit shall have ducted air outlet and return air systems.
d. Unit shall include a filter rack and standard disposable pleated type filter. e. The indoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.
Tubing shall have inner grooves and be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. There shall be an integral condensate drain pan
under the coil and condensate shall be gravity drained from the unit. f. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated in accordance with the
installation manual.
2.14 RESIDENTIAL AIR CYCLER
A. Single room ventilation cycler by Vent-US TwinFresh Model # RA1-50-2 or equal.
B. Three speed fan operation.
C. Quiet operation: 0.1 SONES at 32 CFM.
D. Through the wall installation with integral 6” diameter telescopic duct.
E. Ceramic enthalpy core with up to 90% efficiency and covered with factory applied antibacterial
compound.
F. Aluminum (or stainless steel) outer hood.
G. Antibacterial MERV 6 air filter.
H. Reversible axial EC fan.
I. Integral front grille.
J. Multifunctional Wireless Remote control.
K. Automatic shutter/damper.
L. Five year warranty.
M. Reversible EC motor, 120/1/60.
2.15 OUTDOOR STATIC CORE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
A. General:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 48
1. Product Specification: Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit as manufactured by RenewAire, Mitsubishi, and Greenheck, and shall transfer both heat and
humidity using static plate core technology.
2. Quality Assurance: a. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by AHRI
under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications shall confirm manufacture’s published performance for airflow, static pressure,
temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be accepted.
b. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation
through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723. c. Unit shall be listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers. Some
exceptions to UL Listing may apply. Units intended for “Outdoor Use” shall be listed using the specific UL requirements for rain penetration, corrosion protection and seal durability
and shall be so labeled. d. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its
functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten years from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to be free of
manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years from the date of purchase.
B. Performance:
1. Energy Transfer: The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor
transfer from one air stream to the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.
2. Passive Frost Control: The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under
normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function,
performance or durability of the core. No condensate drains will be allowed.
3. Continuous Ventilation: Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need for bypass, recirculation, pre-heaters, or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions.
4. Positive Airstream Separation: Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by
hydroscopic resin and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall travel at all times in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix.
5. Laminar Flow: Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products entire
operating airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the energy exchange plate material.
C. Product:
1. Construction: a. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction, with no
moving parts.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 49
b. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate.
c. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners and zinc plated screw fasteners. The unit roof shall be one piece or have
watertight standing seam joints and shall overlap wall panels and doors in order to positively shed water.
d. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets rated for outdoor
exposure. Pressure taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement.
e. Weatherhoods shall be screened to exclude birds and animals. Inlet weatherhoods shall be sized to maintain inlet velocities below 500 fpm, and equipped with rain excluder
baffles. f. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim faced,
high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3
(hr f t 2 ° F / B T U ) . g. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated, disposable
filter in both airstreams. h. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC contactor
control connection. i. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency. The
blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and be shall be supplied with factory installed motor starters (HE6X and HE8X 208-230/460V models are open drip-proof).
Direct drive models (EV450 and HE1X models) shall be EISA-compliant for energy efficiency with open drip proof design and integral thermal protection.
j. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be either direct drive (EV450 and HE1X only) or belt drive. HE1.5X shall be backward incline, motorized impeller type
packages. HE6X and HE8X units use backward incline, belt drive blower packages. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for
blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt tensioning. k. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect switch and a
24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package. l. The ERV shall be provided “inverter-ready” allowing for applications of inverters supplied
and installed by others.
2. Options: a. Provide unit and duct connection orientation per project schedule.
b. Provide double wall construction with 24-gauge galvanized steel liner. c. Units are available single or three phase at a full range of operating voltages. See project
schedule. d. Provide motor horsepower as specified in project schedule.
e. Provide factory installed disconnect fuses. f. Provide factory installed Variable Frequency Drives (available for all models HE2X and
larger) allowing either preset or variable speed operation with appropriate 0-10 volt DC or DDC control signal.
g. Provide ECM controlled motors (available for EV450, HE1X and HE1.5X models) allowing for to preset speeds or variable speed operation with a 0-10 volt DC control signal. h. Provide factory installed isolation dampers for either or both air streams (available for all
models except EV450RT, and RTC models). The insulated dampers shall be of a low leakage design and shall not restrict the airstream, reducing airflow, in any way. The
dampers shall be opened with a motor actuator powered by the standard unit transformer
package and have a spring return for low off-position power consumption.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 50
i. Provide factory installed filter monitors for each airstream. j. Provide MERV-13 filters for final installation after construction phase.
k. Provide 14 inch high, non-pitched roof curbs as available from the factory. Pitched curbs, vibration curbs, seismic curbs and other custom curbs are available directly from curb
manufacturer. l. RTC (RoofTop Connect) units shall have return air and fresh air ducts configured to
permit direct tie-in to rooftop air handlers using factory offered transition piece. (See separate specification for factory transition availability.)
m. Provide high wind tie-down kit.
D. Installation:
1. Unit Location and Placement:
a. Locate and orient unit to provide the shortest and most straight duct connections. Provide service clearances as indicated on the plans. Locate units distant from sound critical
occupancies. b. Install a structurally sound, weathertight, level and properly insulated roof curb with
nailers, curb gasket and tie-downs to meet local wind load requirements. c. Insure roof decking penetrations inside curb are properly positioned and sized for ducts.
Seal all penetrations and gaps between ducts and decking with appropriate fire, weather and acoustic sealant system.
d. Install fiberglass batt insulation over the decking inside the curb. Insulation thickness to be determined by local thermal requirements.
e. Use proper rigging, including spreader bars, for safe lifting and placement.
2. Vibration Isolation: a. Provide spring type vibration rails or curb to match the specific unit corner weights.
b. Provide flexible duct connections at unit duct flanges.
3. Duct Design: a. All ductwork shall be designed, constructed, supported and sealed in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and pressure classifications. b. Ductwork shall be installed to the curb duct adaptors before unit is set in place.
c. Both the return and the supply ducts shall be thermally insulated at levels appropriate to the local climate from the unit through the curb and continuous until at least the first
elbow or tee. A continuous vapor barrier shall also be provided on warm surface of the insulation.
4. Sound Control:
a. To control sound associated with the two blower outlets: 1) Provide straight, gradual transition ductwork for a minimum of 2-1/2 duct diameters
downstream from the blower outlet for air velocities of less than 2,500 feet per minute.
2) Provide continuous acoustic insulation treatment of the duct until after the first elbow or tee.
3) Provide engineered sound attenuation ductwork to meet noise criteria (NC) requirements.
5. Test and Balancing
a. Test and Balancing may not begin until 100% of the installation is complete and fully functional.
b. Follow National Comfort Institute (NCI) air test and balance procedures specific to Heat Recovery Ventilator Balancing Procedure including standard reports to the owner’s
representative.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 51
2.16 INDOOR STATIC CORE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
A. General:
1. Product Specification: Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit as
manufactured by RenewAire, Mitsubishi, and Greenheck, and shall transfer both heat and humidity using static plate core technology.
2. Quality Assurance:
a. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications
shall confirm manufacture’s published performance for airflow, static pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR).
Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be accepted. b. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core by
Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and NFPA
90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723.
c. Unit shall be listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers. Some exceptions to UL Listing may apply.
d. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten years
from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of
normal use, for a period of two years from the date of purchase.
B. Performance:
1. Energy Transfer: The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy
between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one airstream to the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding
cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.
2. Passive Frost Control: The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside relative
humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate drains will be allowed.
3. Continuous Ventilation: Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need
for bypass, recirculation, preheaters or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions.
4. Positive Airstream Separation: Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and
fresh airstreams shall travel at all times in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix.
5. Laminar Flow: Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products entire operating airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the energy
exchange plate material.
C. Product:
1. Construction:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 52
a. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction, with no moving parts.
b. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate.
c. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners and zinc plated screw fasteners.
d. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets. Pressure taps, with
captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement.
e. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim faced, high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and eliminating the
possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr•ft2•°F/BTU).
f. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated, disposable filter in both airstreams.
g. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC contactor control connection.
h. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency. The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and be shall be supplied with factory
installed motor starters. Direct drive models shall be EISA-compliant for energy efficiency with open drip proof design and integral thermal protection.
i. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be either direct drive or belt drive. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for
blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt tensioning. j. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect switch and a
24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package. k. The ERV shall be provided “inverter-ready” allowing for applications of inverters supplied
and installed by others.
2. Options: a. Provide unit and duct connection orientation per project schedule.
b. Units are available single or three phase at a full range of operating voltages. See project schedule.
c. Provide motor horsepower as specified in project schedule. d. Provide factory installed disconnect fuses.
e. Provide factory installed filter monitors for each airstream. f. Provide MERV-13 filters for final installation after construction phase.
g. Provide ECM controlled motors allowing for to preset speeds or variable speed operation with a 0-10 volt DC control signal.
h. Provide factory installed isolation dampers for either or both air streams. The insulated dampers shall be of a low leakage design and shall not restrict the airstream, reducing
airflow, in any way. The dampers shall be opened with a motor actuator powered by the standard unit transformer package and have a spring return for low off- position power
consumption.
D. Installation:
1. Unit Location:
a. Locate and orient unit to provide the shortest and most straight duct connections. Provide service clearances as indicated on the plans. Locate units distant from sound critical
occupancies.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 53
b. Provide a poured concrete equipment pad for all floor mounted units. The pad thickness and floor plan dimensions to be determined based on the unit selected, and site structural
considerations. c. Provide a structurally suitable support for the base of any wall mounted or hung units.
2. Vibration Isolation:
a. Provide rubber or spring type isolators appropriately sized for corner weights of the specific unit.
b. Provide flexible duct connections at unit duct flanges.
3. Duct Design: a. All ductwork shall be designed, constructed, supported and sealed in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and pressure classifications. b. At a minimum all duct runs to the outdoors shall be thermally insulated at levels
appropriate to the local climate. A continuous vapor barrier shall also be provided on warm surface of the insulation.
4. Sound Control:
a. To control sound radiated from the unit: 1) Provide acoustic treatment in mechanical room walls and ceilings.
b. To control sound associated with the two blower outlets: 1) Provide straight, gradual transition ductwork for a minimum of 2-1/2 duct diameters
downstream from the blower outlet for air velocities of less than 2,500 feet per minute.
2) Provide continuous acoustic insulation treatment of the duct until after the first elbow or tee.
3) Provide engineered sound attenuation ductwork to meet noise criteria (NC) requirements.
E. Test and Balancing:
1. Test and Balancing may not begin until 100% of the installation is complete and fully functional.
2. Follow National Comfort Institute (NCI) air test and balance procedures specific to Heat
Recovery Ventilator Balancing Procedure including standard reports to the Owner’s Representative.
2.17 LOUVERS
A. General: Provide stationary drainable blade style architectural louvers as shown on the drawings and based on the drawing schedules as manufactured by Greenheck, Ruskin, or an approved
equal. All louvers shall be designed to protect air intake and exhaust openings in building exterior walls. Design shall incorporate a drainable head member and stationary horizontal blades to
channel water to the jambs and guide water through vertical downspouts to escape at the sill. All louver finishes shall be coordinated with the Project Architect or Building Owner prior to final
submittal to the Engineer.
B. Construction:
1. Frame: Heavy gauge extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, 4 inch by 0.081 inch nominal wall thickness.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 54
2. Blades: Drainable design, heavy gauge extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, 0.081 inch nominal wall thickness, positioned at 37 degree and 45 degree angles on approximately 4 inch
centers.
3. All components mechanically fastened.
4. Birdscreen: 3/4 inch by 0.051 inch flattened expanded aluminum in removable frame, inside mount.
C. Performance: Based on testing in standard air conditions – 0.075 lb./cubic foot, beginning point
of water penetration shall be no less than 1007 feet/minute free air velocity. Individual louver panels shall be capable of withstanding a 25 pound/square foot wind load.
D. Certifications: All louvers shall be AMCA certified and may bear the AMCA Seal for air performance and water penetration ratings in accordance with AMCA publication 511.
2.18 RADIANT CEILING PANELS
A. Electric radiant ceiling panels shall be by INDEECO, Marley-Qmark or equal. Construction and
options as shown below. Panels shall be cETLus Listed, for the wattage, voltage and size as specified in the schedule.
B. Panels shall use a high quality alloy resistance wire element electrically insulated with an approved TEFZEL® compound rated at 200 deg. C. The heating element is uniformly arranged
over the entire face of the panel to provide evenly distributed radiant heat. High-efficient reflective foils are used to adhere the heating element to the radiant panel.
C. Panels are to be designed with a watt density range of 65-95 watts/ft2 at rated voltage.
D. The panel shall contain two-inch thick, four-pound density high temperature mineral wool
insulation. Fiberglass insulation is not acceptable.
E. Panel shall be constructed from heavy 22 gauge galvanized steel. Front panel shall be finished
with a white textured high temperature baked on powder coat. Textured finish enhances the radiant effect by providing a wider scattering of the radiant energy, increasing the panels overall
efficiency.
F. Panels will be a two-piece construction crimped together for strength and rigidity. Pop rivet
construction is not acceptable.
G. Panel shall be provided with an electrical junction box attached to the back of the panel. Junction
box shall be 4 x 4 x 1-1/2 inches and shall be provided with a cover. Internal pigtail wires shall be provided for field wiring connection.
H. Hanging/support clips in each corner shall be provided for local code and earthquake installation requirements.
I. Provide special finishes:
1. Custom color panels to match color sample provided as part of submittal package. Finish to
be baked on high temperature powder coat.
J. Provide panel with the following optional mounting system:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 55
1. Surface mounting frame kits sized to radiant panel heater. Confirm with architect.
K. Additional special features:
1. The following accessories shall be factory furnished for field installation:
a. Wall mounted stand-alone programmable thermostat.
2.19 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL VENTS
A. Provide extruded aluminum wall vents with fixed louvers for installation in masonry walls for
ventilation.
B. Provide Ex series extruded aluminum wall vents by Sunvent Industries, a division of Sylro Sales
Corporation, 1 Industrial Drive, No. 26, Pelham, New Hampshire 03076; 800-325-4115, or equal.
C. Materials:
1. Extruded Aluminum: 0.125 inch minimum thickness extruded aluminum complying with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T-5.
2. Sheet Aluminum: 0.040 inch minimum thickness complying with ASTM B209.
3. Fasteners: Type, size, and spacing as recommended by Vent Manufacturer for project
conditions.
4. Top of frame shall have an integral drip edge at front of frame.
5. Bottom of frame shall have an integral water stop at back of frame and integral drip edge at front of frame.
6. Fabricate vents with mechanical connections such that all fasteners are concealed when vent
is installed.
7. Insect Screen: Aluminum 18 by 14 mesh screen set behind louvers in extruded stop on frame.
8. Opposed vertical blade damper.
9. Duct Extension: Straight, rectangular aluminum sheet duct extension fastened to wall vent.
Wall depth as indicated on Drawings.
2.20 PACKAGED, AIR COOLED, DX ROOFTOP UNIT
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide where shown on Drawings, a completely factory assembled, piped, wired and tested, rooftop heating and cooling unit. Unit shall have a full charge of refrigerant, and compressor
oil. The rooftop unit shall be shipped in one (1) piece and shall have a single point power connection.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be: Carrier, McQuay, Trane, York. Provided that they meet
the requirements of this specification and the performance requirements listed in the equipment schedules. Note particularly the following items.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 56
a. The submitted rooftop unit must produce the CFM listed in the schedule, at the static pressure, external to the unit, listed in the schedule. This performance must be
accomplished using equal or less fan horsepower than the scheduled unit and at an evaporator coil face velocity equal or less than the scheduled unit.
b. The discharge air temperatures listed in the schedule are at the discharge of the unit into the supply ductwork, NOT the discharge temperatures at the evaporator coil. These
temperatures must be produced by the submitted unit. Draw through rooftop manufacturers must fully account for fan heat gain in determining their discharge
temperatures. c. The scheduled sensible and total loads, listed in the schedules, are base on actual
calculation, not manufacturer’s catalog data. Both loads must be met at the outdoor air and return air temperature, to the unit, listed in the schedules.
d. The rooftop unit shown on the Drawings has been coordinated with architectural and structural elements, and with electrical service requirements. If a different unit is
submitted, ALL mechanical, electrical, architectural and structural modifications which are required shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor, under the work of the
mechanical section, under the original contract price.
B. Submittal Requirements: This paragraph supplements the “Submittals” paragraph in PART 1 of these Specifications. In addition to complying with all submittal requirements contained in PART
1, the rooftop unit submittal shall contain ALL performance and other items listed in the schedule, as well as:
1. The air temperatures, entering and leaving the evaporator coil.
2. The temperature gain in degrees, due to the return (or exhaust) and supply fan.
3. The component pressure drops of all items internal to the unit – i.e. coils, filters, dampers, furnaces, etc.
C. Quality Assurance:
1. Rooftop unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 360. Unit shall be capable of
starting and running at 115° F ambient outdoor temperature per the maximum load criteria of
ARI Standard 360. Unit shall be capable of mechanical cooling down to 55° F ambient
temperature.
2. Gas fired units shall be certified by AGA or UL as a total package.
3. Unit shall be designed to conform to ANSI B9.1 Safety Code and the National Electrical Code.
4. Unit casing shall be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method Standard 141 (Method
6061) 500 hour salt spray test.
5. Air cooled condenser coils shall be factory leak tested at minimum of 150 psig and pressure tested at 450 psig. Evaporator coils shall be factory pressure and leak tested at minimum
300 psig.
6. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.
7. All fan shaft bearings shall have a life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions in
accordance with ANSI B3.15.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 57
D. Equipment Requirements:
1. Unit Casing: a. Unit casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and be protected against corrosion
to such an extent that salt spray test, referenced in the Quality Assurance paragraph above can be passed.
b. Casing shall be weatherproof. If rooftop unit casing is found to leak after it is installed, within the guarantee period, then whatever modifications to the unit are required to make
the casing watertight shall be made, under the work of the mechanical section, within the original contract price.
c. Hinged, insulated, man-size access doors, which are capable of being secured and locked in the open position, shall be provided on both sides of the casing, to allow access
to all fans and drives, coils and all filters. It shall not be necessary to remove any bolts to open the access doors. A hinged, lockable panel shall also be provided for the control
cabinet. If this cabinet is external to the unit casing it shall be NEMA 3R (rainproof). All hinged panels shall be provided with suitable gasketing to prevent moisture leakage.
Easily removable man-sized access panels shall also be provided for the condensing unit section and the gas furnace (if provided).
d. All interior surfaces exposed to the moving airstream shall be coated with insulation having R-Value equivalent to 3/4" glass fiber insulation. On units without internal casing
sheetmetal liner, the glass fiber insulation shall be coated on the airstream side to minimize erosion. Insulation adhesive shall maintain satisfactory adhesion over a range
of –20 to 180° F. e. Unit casing shall be equipped with lifting lugs to facilitate overhead rigging.
2. Fans:
a. Evaporator and Return/Exhaust Fans: 1) Evaporator and return/exhaust fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
2) Provide fixed pitch fan pulley and variable pitch motor pulley. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide, under the work of the mechanical section, a fixed pitch
motor pulley. Pulley size shall be determined when balancing is complete. Pulley shall replace the variable pitch pulley, when balancing is complete. Provide fan and
motor structural steel sled, such that motor position may be altered to adjust fan belt tension. Fan drive shall have a service factor of 150%.
3) Provide spring-type vibration isolators under the fan sled with a minimum of 90% isolation efficiency.
4) Fan shaft bearings shall be self-aligning, pillow-block type. 5) Condenser Fans: Condenser fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, statically and
dynamically balanced with 3-phase motors. Fans shall discharge air vertically upwards and be protected by PVC coated steel wire safety guards.
3. Compressors and Refrigeration Components:
a. Compressors shall be reciprocating and shall be located for easy servicing. Compressors shall be equipped with cylinder unloading (minimum of 4 steps) and factory
pre-piped hot gas bypass system to maintain capacity control at minimum cooling loads. b. Semi-hermetic compressors shall be mounted on spring type isolators with a minimum
isolation efficiency of 95%. c. Each compressor shall be equipped with an automatically reversible oil pump, insert type
crankcase heaters and suction and discharge service valves. d. Unit shall be equipped with dual refrigeration circuits each containing, liquid line service
valve, filter drier, sight glass, thermal expansion valve and fusible plug. e. Maximum compressor operating speed shall be 1800 rpm.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 58
f. Provide the following safety controls and equipment over-temperature, over-current, oil equalizer lines on circuits on dual compressors, high pressure and low pressure
switches. Provide manufacturer’s recommended time delay, to prevent compressor short cycling. Provide any additional safety controls recommended by manufacturer for proper
operation, in addition to those listed above. See temperature control Drawings for any requirements for provision of auxiliary contacts.
4. Evaporator and Condenser Coils:
a. Evaporator coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. Coils shall be full-face active type during full and part load conditions.
b. Condenser coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.
5. Heating Section:
a. Gas Furnace: 1) Gas furnaces shall be two-stage. The burner shall be factory fired and adjusted for
proper combustion. 2) All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at single location. Provide ignition system,
gas train and safety controls. Safety controls shall include: loss of airflow switch, temperature limit switches, flame rollout switch and pilot flame proving switches and
any other controls required for proper system operation and code compliance. Provide redundant main gas valves and any other gas train components required by
Owner’s Insurer.
6. Filter Section: Filter section shall consist of a 2” thick, disposable glass fiber filters of commercially available sizes.
7. Automatic Temperature Controls:
a. For constant volume systems, provide electronic, programmable heating/cooling thermostat with sub-base.
b. Equipment manufacturer’s responsibilities for provision of automatic temperature control components and interface to ATC provided components are detailed on the Control
Drawings which accompany these Specifications. c. Control dampers shall be low leakage type with leakage not to exceed 3% leakage at 3”
WC differential pressure when fully closed. Smoke dampers are to be supplied with
seals which will withstand temperatures of 400° F.
d. The means of supply fan capacity control shall not be discharge dampers. If two (2) motor combinations or two (2) speed motors are provided for the supply fans, they shall
not be used without an additional means of capacity control such as inlet vanes.
8. Motors and Electrical Requirements: a. All unit power wiring shall enter the casing at a single location.
b. Electrical control cabinet shall include the following items: 1) Power terminal block.
2) Power transformer switch 115 volt secondary and 115 volt control fuse. 3) 24 volt control transformer and fuse.
4) All necessary relays. 5) 115 volt terminal strip.
6) 24 volt terminal strip containing wired terminals for all controls, numbered in accordance with the wiring diagram.
7) An isolated 24 volt field wiring terminal strip. 8) An electrical print pocket which shall contain the electrical print and maintenance
instructions.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 59
c. All fan motors shall be high efficiency type – see “Motor and Starter” paragraph of these Specifications for requirements.
d. All power wiring shall be in conduit – no exposed wiring shall be permitted. All power or control wiring within the condenser section and any other wiring exposed to the elements
shall be in vapor tight conduit. e. For VAV systems the unit manufacturer shall furnish, install and wire VFD’s in
accordance with the paragraph in this specification.
E. Execution:
1. Startup of the rooftop unit shall be performed under the direct on-site supervision of a factory
trained manufacturer’s representative. Startup shall not be performed exclusively by the Mechanical Contractor. See further requirements for startup under the Startup, Testing and
Balancing Paragraph in PART 3 of these Specifications.
2. The Startup, Testing and Balancing paragraph in PART 3 of these Specifications contains requirements for two (2) meetings to be held in the Engineer’s Office between the Mechanical
Contractor, the Balancing Contractor and the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. The rooftop unit’s manufacturer’s representative shall attend both meetings.
3. The Startup, Testing and Balancing paragraph of PART 3 of these Specifications requires
that the rooftop unit’s manufacturer’s representative be on-site during the time when those parts of the air system balancing and temperature control testing, which effect the rooftop unit
takes place. See “PART 3” of these Specifications for specific requirements.
2.21 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A. Refer to drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. The Architect will check the completed installation either sequentially as different parts are completed, or when the entire installation is complete, at the sole option of the Architect.
B. Prior to the Architect’s checking a part of the installation or the entire installation, this Contractor shall submit a letter signed by an Officer of this Contracting Company or an Officer of the General
Contractor stating that:
1. He is an Officer of the Company.
2. He has personally inspected the installation to be checked. 3. The date of his inspection.
4. The installation is complete and tested and ready to be inspected by the Architect, and that all required test reports have been submitted.
C. This Contractor shall arrange that an Officer of this Contracting Company or of the General
Contractor, as well as the Clerk of the Works, in addition to other test witnesses that may be specified, shall witness the below listed tests. At the conclusion of each such test this Contractor
shall submit a letter signed by the Officer stating that:
1. He/She is an Officer of the Company.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 60
2. He/She has personally witnessed the tests (giving the name of the tests). 3. The date of testing.
4. The results of testing, as compared to specified performance. 5. List the name, title and company affiliated to all those witnessing the tests.
3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Coordination: Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
1. Perform work such that progress of entire project including work of other Sections shall not be interfered with or delayed.
2. Provide information as requested on items furnished under this Section which shall be
installed under other Sections.
3. Obtain detailed installation information from manufacturers of equipment provided under this Section.
4. Obtain final roughing dimensions or other information as needed for complete installation of
items furnished under other Sections or by Owner.
5. Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or equipment to be provided under this and other Sections. Give full information so that
openings required by work of this Section may be coordinated with other work and other openings and may be provided for in advance. In case of failure to provide sufficient
information in proper time, provide cutting and patching or have same done, at own expense and to full satisfaction of Architect.
6. Provide information as requested as to sizes, number and locations of concrete
housekeeping pads necessary for floor-mounted vibrating and rotating equipment provided under this Section.
B. Maintenance of equipment and Systems: Maintain HVAC equipment and systems until Final
Acceptance. Ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown delays pending final test of systems and equipment because of
seasonal conditions. Do not use boilers before providing water treatment where required; this includes use of boilers for temporary heat or for testing.
C. Use of Premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed by Architect and as required below:
1. Remove and dispose of dirt and debris, and keep premises reasonably clean. Upon completion of work, remove equipment and unused material. Put building and premises in
neat and clean condition and do cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of equipment, to satisfaction of Architect and as specified under
CLEANING paragraph.
2. It shall be this trade’s responsibility to store his material in a manner that will maintain an orderly clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, all equipment and
material shall be kept off the ground by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 61
3. Do not interfere with functions of existing sewers and gas mains. Extreme care shall be observed to prevent debris from entering ductwork. Confer with Architect as to disruption of
heating services or other utilities due to testing or connection of new work to existing. Interruption of heating services shall be performed at time of day or night deemed by
Architect to provide minimum interference with normal operation. Obtain Architect’s approval of the method proposed for minimizing service interruption.
D. Surveys and Measurements:
1. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by Contractor and be responsible for correct laying out of work.
2. In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify Architect in
writing and do not proceed with work until written instructions have been issued by Architect.
E. Fireproofing:
1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be
installed, insofar as possible prior to start of spray fiber work.
2. Ducts, piping and other items, which would interfere with proper application of fireproofing, shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work.
3. Patching and repairing of spray fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during
course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for an extra to
Owner.
F. Temporary Heat:
1. Special reference is made to TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS – SECTION
01500.
2. Coordinate work under this Section with progress of construction so that permanent heating system will be ready to provide temporary heating if permitted by Architect as soon as
building is closed in.
3. Provide and direct labor required for attendance, operation and final restoration of permanent heating system if used for temporary heating purposes. Continuous direct attendance shall
be provided whenever permanent system is in operation, prior to acceptance of permanent heating system by Owner.
G. Gypsum Drywall Enclosures:
1. Coordinate and supervise construction of drywall and related work affecting work of this Section.
2. Work shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Supply and return air duct enclosures on rooftop air handling units. b. Supply air plenums located above labs and computer rooms.
c. Return air shafts.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 62
3. Ensure tightness of plenums and chases used as part of air distribution system. System will not be accepted until proved tight, without leakage. Notify Architect in writing after system
test for leakage, if construction and finish of plenums and ducts are not satisfactory.
H. Airbound Coils: If, after plant is in operation, any coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be re-piped with new approved and necessary fittings,
air vents or vacuum breakers at no extra cost. If connections are concealed in furring, floors or ceilings this trade shall bear all expenses of tearing up and refinishing construction and finish,
leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed.
3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Work shall be neat and rectilinear. Ductwork and piping shall run concealed except in mechanical rooms and areas where no hung ceiling exists. Install material and equipment as
required by manufacturers. Installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue wear, noise, vibration, corrosion or water hammer. Work shall be properly and effectively protected,
and pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed to prevent obstruction and damage before completion.
1. Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new. Provide supplies, appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational installation. Provide
components required or recommended by OSHA and applicable NFPA documents.
2. References to manufacturers and to catalog designation are intended to establish standards of quality for materials and performance but imply no further limitation of competitive bidding.
3. Finish of materials, components and equipment shall be as approved by Architect and shall
be resistant to corrosion and weather as necessary.
4. Owner will not be responsible for material and equipment before testing and acceptance.
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt existing service without Owner’s approval.
B. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner’s instructions. Submit, in writing, with request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize length of interruption.
C. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work so that they have minimal impact on Owner’s operations.
3.5 TAGS
A. Upon completion of work, attach engraved laminated tags to all valves (listed in the valve
directory called for in the “Bulletins, Manuals and Instructions” paragraph of these Specifications) and all pieces of HVAC equipment (including but not limited to pumps, fans, air handlers, coils
and all other equipment listed in the HVAC Schedules). Valve tags shall have black characters on white face, consecutively numbered and prefixed by letter “V”. Equipment tags shall have
black characters on white face with labels corresponding to drawing schedule numbers.
B. Embossed or engraved aluminum or brass tags may be substituted if desired. Tags shall be at
least 1/8” thick.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 63
C. Valve tags shall be at least 1” in diameter with numerals at least 3/8” high and attached by “S” hooks or chains. Equipment tags shall be at least 2” diameter securely attached to apparatus.
D. Provide manufacturers equipment nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identification securely attached to electrical and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will
not be permitted.
3.6 ANCHORS AND INSERTS
A. Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one (1) horizontal direction and shall develop strength of bolt
when installed in properly cured concrete.
B. Provide anchors as necessary for attachment of equipment supports and hangers.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate headroom
and clearing doors and passageways to satisfaction of Architect and in accordance with code requirements. Installation shall permit clearance for access to equipment for repair, servicing and
replacement.
B. Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads on building structural members
provided for equipment support under other Sections. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on structural steel provided under other Sections.
C. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as necessary for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment provided under this Section (e.g. heating and
ventilating units, fans, ducts and piping) as indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.
D. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides, etc.
E. Provide cuts, weight and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of equipment support provisions and installation.
F. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of ASTM; use of steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of Section 5 of Code of Practice of American Institute of
Steel Construction.
G. Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation of
equipment without disassembly which will void warrantee. Report in writing to Architect, prior to purchase or shipment of equipment involved, on conditions which may prevent proper installation.
3.8 EXPANSION PROVISIONS
A. Installation of piping must allow for expansion using offsets, loops, swing joints, expansion joints,
etc., as shown and as necessary to prevent undue strain. Take-offs from mains to runouts shall not have less than three (3) elbow swing.
B. Mains and risers with loops or offsets shall be securely anchored to structure so as to impart expansion towards loops or offsets. Anchors shall be constructed of heavy forged wrought iron,
secured to pipe and to structure. Provide vibration isolation as required.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 64
C. Provide pipe alignment guides as required to guide expanding to move freely from anchor points toward expansion joints, offsets, etc.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Ductwork:
1. New ductwork shall be shipped from the shop to the job site with the ends of the ducts sealed tight with heavy duty plastic to prevent dirt, water or other elements from entering the ducts
while in transport to the job site.
2. At the end of each working day all open ends of ducts that have been hung in place shall be re-covered with the plastic material to prevent the entry of foreign objects, dirt or debris into
the ducts.
3. All ducts shall be cleaned of dirt and any other foreign matter if it should accumulate on or in the ducts prior to start-up and testing of the new HVAC systems. If the ducts do need to be
blown clean, cheesecloth shall be placed over the outlet air openings, and the rooftop unit(s) serving the ducts shall be provided with temporary filters.
3.10 STARTUP, TESTING AND BALANCING
A. General: Provide qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services for startup, testing and balancing of mechanical systems, to performance data shown in schedules, as specified, and as
required by codes, standards, regulations and Authorities having jurisdiction including City Inspectors, Owners and Architect. Note that some ATC startup procedures listed below require
the cooperation of the balancing contractor and the rooftop unit manufacturer’s representative (if rooftop units are required) and some balancing procedures require the cooperation of the ATC
contractor and the rooftop units manufacturer representative (if appropriate). Ensure that all contractors are present on-site during the entire time that these procedures take place. Note that
some procedures listed below have a distinct order of precedence, e.g., the testing of the temperature control system shall not occur until major pieces of mechanical equipment have
been started up and testing is complete. Ensure that any listed orders of precedence for procedures are followed.
1. Startup, testing and balancing shall not diminish guarantee requirements.
2. Notify Architect and Authorities involved at least two (2) weeks before startup testing and balancing begins.
3. Do not cover or conceal work before testing and inspection and obtaining approval.
4. Instruments for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six (6) months prior to
testing and balancing. Calibration shall be traceable to NBS Standards. Provide Photostat of certificate of calibration to Architect’s representative at meeting demonstrating balancing
procedures mentioned in Paragraph 4 above.
5. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup, testing and balancing shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be
continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs
6. Report on reporting forms, submitted to Architect for approval in advance, and on forms provided by Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 65
7. For each piece of equipment, copy nameplate data and include in report.
8. Submit six (6) copies of testing and balancing reports to Architect for approval.
9. Provide capacity and performance of equipment by field testing. Install equipment and instruments required for testing, thermo-wells and gauge connections at no additional cost to
Owner.
10. Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at test.
11. Startup, testing and balancing procedures outlined below are the minimum effort required for the project. Contractor shall use any additional procedures he feels will be necessary to
properly startup, test and balance the job.
B. Equipment Startup: Startup the following pieces of equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with manufacturer’s representative present:
1. Fans. 2. Rooftop Units.
3. Split System Units and VRF.
C. Automatic Temperature Controls Testing:
1. Temperature Control Testing General Requirements: Start up temperature and control
system so that all sequences of operation called for in Architect’s Drawings and Specifications operate properly. Ensure that all control components are properly calibrated in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. See that all software, included with control system, is fully debugged. For further requirements see “Automatic Temperature Control”
paragraph of these Specifications. For requirements requiring letters certifying ATC startup see paragraph “3.01” of these Specifications.
D. Refrigeration Systems:
1. Test refrigeration systems for refrigerant and air leaks at least twice: Approximately six (6) months after startup and at end of guarantee period.
2. Use electronic refrigerant detector for leak detection.
3. Leaks detected shall be properly sealed and above test repeated.
4. Test pressures shall be 300 psi for high pressure side and 150 psi for low pressure side.
5. Replace refrigerant and oil lost during guarantee period at no cost to Owner.
6. Certify condition of system in writing after test.
E. Air Balancing:
1. General: a. Provide qualified personnel, equipment and services for balancing and adjusting of
mechanical systems. Submit resumes at demonstration of balancing meeting. b. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified to perform, record and evaluate all
procedures contained here and/or qualified on Drawings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 66
c. For each air handler on job, provide, under the work of the mechanical section, one (1) spare sheave of size to be determined after tranverses are complete.
d. Submit procedures, recording forms and test equipment for review prior to balancing, as described in Paragraph A.4 above.
e. Balancing procedure or sequence is contained herein. f. Recording forms used for balancing must be submitted to Architect for approval before
balancing is started. g. Failure to submit forms will result in rejection of entire submittal.
h. Submit description of balancing equipment being used. i. Balancing shall not begin until system has been installed complete and capable of normal
operation. j. All grilles, dampers, fans, coils, pumps, valves and linkages shall be installed and
operating prior to balancing. k. System shall be capable of operating under control as specified on Drawings and/or
contained herein. l. Independent balancing agency shall have the following qualifications:
1) Agency is known to have specialized in balancing commercial HVAC system for at least three (3) years.
a) Agency shall provide proof of qualifications to Architect’s satisfaction.
Qualification shall include submittal of at least three (3) sample balancing reports
prepared for commercial HVAC system over 100,000 ft2 in floor area.
b) Agency employed balancing technicians shall be qualified to balance HVAC
system to Architect’s satisfaction. Submit resume of technician
c) At least one (1) balancing technician shall be qualified to balance HVAC system to Architect’s satisfaction. Submit resume of technician.
d) Agency shall be approved by Architect.
F. Air System Balancing:
1. Testing agency shall balance, adjust and test motors, systems, air moving equipment and distribution, supply, return and exhaust systems, as follows:
a. Adjust blower rpm to design requirements and record. Test and record motor full load amperes.
b. Make pilot tube traverse of main supply, return and exhaust and obtain design CFM at fans.
c. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge. d. Test and record entering air temperatures.
2. Balance and adjust supply air systems in finished areas of building:
a. Balance and adjust as required to deliver volume of air at each air outlet within 10% of design flow shown on Drawings.
b. Readjust air volumes after occupancy, as required to properly balance heating and cooling loads throughout conditioned areas.
c. Balance supply air systems in unfinished areas: d. Supply air systems shall be balanced after installation of items related to same systems
with exception of duct taps to air diffusers in interior zones. e. Balance as required to deliver air volume at outlets within 10% of design flow shown on
Drawings. f. Provide sufficient temporary openings in interior zone duct systems to adjust interior zone
air volumes. g. Readjust air volumes after completion and occupancy, as required to properly balance
heating and cooling loads throughout conditioned areas.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 67
h. Adjust toilet exhaust and relief air systems as required to deliver air volumes at inlets within 10% of design flow.
i. Adjust miscellaneous ventilation systems as required to deliver air volumes at inlets and outlets within 10% of design flow.
j. Compile test data and submit to Architect for approval. k. If questions arise, tests or portions of tests shall be repeated in presence of Architect.
G. Air System Balancing:
1. Visually inspect all fire, smoke and volume dampers on branch takeoffs to each floor to ensure that they are fully open.
2. Verify with straight edge that fan and motor shafts are parallel and that sheaves are in proper
alignment. Use Browning belt tensioner to confirm belts are at proper tension. Refer to defection tables appropriate for installed belts.
3. Start fans, verify that fan rotation is correct. If not, coordinate with electrical contractor to
switch power leads such that the fan rotates correctly.
4. Verify that fan belts are tight on one side and have slight bow on other side where fan is operating with no excessive squeal at startup. If not correct, adjust sheaves or motor base
accordingly.
5. Check nameplate, voltage on motor, compare to scheduled voltage. Notify Architect immediately of any discrepancies. Measure and record actual voltage across all power
leads. Notify Architect of discrepancies immediately.
6. For each variable volume air handling unit, do the following: a. Add total CFM of all volume boxes shown on approved Shop Drawings.
b. Divide this total by the maximum CFM scheduled for the unit to get diversity factor. For example, if total box CFM is 50,000 and AHU is scheduled for 40,000 CFM diversity is
40,000/50,000 = 80%. c. Open (by setting local stats to call for maximum cooling) number of volume boxes
necessary to approximate diversity; i.e., in the above example, open 80% of the volume boxes.
d. Check motor nameplates full load amps, measure and record amperage across all power leads. If there are marked discrepancies in amperage draws between legs, notify
Architect immediately. e. Measure and record fan and motor rpm. Check that motor rpm agrees with nameplate
and schedule rpm. f. Perform static pressure profile as follows: Record all results and submit to Architect.
g. Determine static pressure across supply and return fan as follows: 1) Measure static or total pressure at fan suction.
2) Measure static pressure at fan discharge. h. Differential is total static pressure developed by fan.
7. Determine static pressure in discharge ductwork after AHU smoke damper, across each filter
section. a. Across each coil.
b. Across fire and volume dampers at branch take offs to each floor. c. At up to 25 points, in system shown on Drawings or to be selected by Architect to be
determined, when ductwork Shop Drawings are approved.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 68
8. Determine the correct causes of any excessively high readings, i.e. open throttled dampers, clean dirty coils, etc. Cover all holes when measurements are complete.
9. Add 1/2" of static pressure to the system, to simulate the effect of dirty filters. Static may be
added by throttling branch volume dampers, blanking off portions of the filter section, covering filter section with cheesecloth or other suitable means. Confirm 1/2" static has been
added with new static pressure reading across fan. Open dampers and remove cheesecloth, etc. after traverses are complete.
10. Perform pilot tube traverse of supply ducts downstream from AHU dischargers and return
ducts. Summing CFM totals from diffusers is not an acceptable method of determining total airflow from AHU’s. At Architect’s request, show Architect holes where traverses were taken.
Perform traverses in accordance with procedures outlined in latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Manual, except that if recommended lengths of
straight duct before and after traverse points are not available, increase number of measuring points by 50%. If a 24 point traverse would be called for given the duct cross section area –
measure 36 points, for example.
11. Measure amperage at each power leg after traverse is complete. If an overload condition exists with measured CFM equal to scheduled CFM, notify Architect immediately.
12. For economizer systems with ATC contractors presence and assistance, adjust minimum and
maximum outdoor air CFM to quantities shown on schedules. Place outdoor air dampers in minimum position as adjusted by ATC Contractor. Measure temperature in mixed air plenum,
temperature of outdoor air and by proportioning determine % of outdoor air being supplied. Place outdoor air damper in maximum open position or fully open variable outside air damper
and repeat above measurements.
13. For systems with variable volume boxes or constant volume boxes do the following, with ATC Contractor present for necessary coordination:
a. At static pressure probe locations in field with number of stats necessary to approximate installed diversity calling for full cooling, measure static pressure with manometer and
compare with reading registering at DDC system field panel or CRT. The “most critical” volume box shall be determined by the Architect from approved sheetmetal shop drawing
submittals. Typically the pressure drop from the supply fan outlet to this box inlet is greater than for any other box. Observe damper linkage, at this box, instruct ATC
Contractor to vary static pressure setpoint as required so that with stats calling for full coding, most critical box damper is 75% open. (Score line on damper linkage and mark
full open and closed positions of box damper. Using protractor mark 75% position open position on volume box.)
b. At each variable volume box, confirm that thermostat and box controller are of the same type (i.e., direct acting or reverse acting). At each variable box and constant volume box
disconnect the actuator’s pneumatic air line and confirm that box damper fails to position called for on Control Drawings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
HVAC
230000 - 69
c. At each variable volume box, set thermostat serving box for no cooling. At box test ports take differential pressure reading with gauge. Note they must be calibrated against a
manometer before use. Adjust box minimum position at controller so that differential pressure reading corresponds to box minimum primary air CFM shown on schedules.
Place thermostat controlling box to full cooling position. Using gauge, adjust box controller maximum position setting to produce differential pressure corresponding to box
maximum primary air as shown on schedules. Measure CFM’s from all diffusers served by box. Confirm total agrees with scheduled box CFM. If box has a reheat coil set start
to call for full heating and confirm that box diverting relay switches to heating operation at proper thermostat pressure. With gauge confirm differential pressure corresponding to
heating CFM. Confirm the P/E’s controlling electric heating coils (if any) stage properly. Confirm that hot water control valve modulates open.
d. At each fan box, set thermostat serving box for full heating. At box test ports take differential pressure rating the magnahelic gauge. Adjust box minimum position at
controller so that differential pressure reading corresponds to box minimum primary air CFM shown on schedules. With stats continuing to call for full heating, confirm that fan is
operating. Measure CFM’s or all diffusers that the box serves and adjust fan speed controller, and/or inlet damper to produce CFM for box as shown on schedules. Place
thermostat controlling box to full cooling position. Using magnahelic gauge adjust box controller maximum position setting to produce differential pressure corresponding to box
maximum primary air as shown on schedules. e. At each constant volume box, use magnahelic gauge to adjust setpoint of box controller
to differential pressure corresponding to velocity (airflow) scheduled for box. f. Balance each diffuser on each floor to within 10% of schedule values. Follow procedures
in SMACNA manual referenced above. g. For constant volume systems, perform pilot tube traverses for branch ducts on each floor.
Adjust volume dampers to produce design CFM for each branch. h. Traverse all exhaust ducts. By sheave adjustment or damper throttling balance fans to +
10% airflow scheduled on Drawings. i. Balance supply air systems in unfinished areas:
1) Supply air systems shall be balanced after installation of items related to same systems with exception of duct tapes to air diffusers in interior zones.
2) Balance as required to deliver air volume at outlets within 10% of design flow shown on Drawings.
3) Provide sufficient temporary openings in interior zone duct systems to adjust interior zone air volumes.
4) Readjust air volumes after completion and occupancy, as required to properly balance heating and cooling loads throughout conditioned areas.
END OF SECTION 230000
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - i
SECTION 260000
ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................... 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2 1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ................................................................................. 3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 3 1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 7 1.8 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................ 7
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ........................................................................ 8 1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................... 9
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 9 1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................... 10
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS ........................................................................................................................ 10 1.14 CORING, DRILLING ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.15 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING ................................................... 10 1.16 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS .................................................................................................... 10
1.17 ACCESSIBILITY ................................................................................................................................ 10 1.18 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ..................................................................................... 10
1.19 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 11 1.20 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ........................................................................................ 11
1.21 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. 11 1.22 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY .............................................................................................................. 11
1.23 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 12 1.24 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................ 13
1.25 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 13 1.26 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 14
1.27 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING .......................................................................................... 14 1.28 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING ....................................................................................................... 15
1.29 EXTRA MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................... 15 1.30 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 16
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES ............................................................................................................ 16 2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................................ 18
2.4 CABLE TRAY .................................................................................................................................... 19 2.5 WIRING MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 20
2.6 OUTLET, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND WIRING TROUGHS FOR ALL SYSTEMS ................... 21 2.7 WIRING DEVICES ............................................................................................................................ 21
2.8 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 23 2.9 PHASING AND COLOR CODING .................................................................................................... 24
2.10 SWITCHBOARD ............................................................................................................................... 25 2.11 MAIN METERING SWITCHBOARDS ............................................................................................... 27
2.12 ENCLOSURES FOR INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED OVERCURRENT AND SWITCHING DEVICES 29
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - ii
2.13 METER CENTERS ............................................................................................................................ 29 2.14 PANELBOARDS ............................................................................................................................... 30
2.15 LOAD CENTERS .............................................................................................................................. 32 2.16 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................ 32
2.17 CARTRIDGE FUSES ........................................................................................................................ 33 2.18 MOTOR CONTROLS ........................................................................................................................ 33
2.19 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 35 2.20 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ............................................................................................. 41
2.21 LIGHTING FIXTURES ....................................................................................................................... 50 2.22 LIGHTING CONTROL AND DIMMING SYSTEM ............................................................................. 52
2.23 TELEPHONE/DATA EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM............................................. 55 2.24 COMPUTER EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM ........................................................ 56
2.25 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 56 2.26 INTRUSION ALARM CONDUIT SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 65
2.27 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 65 2.28 ACCESS PANELS ............................................................................................................................ 67
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 67
3.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................. 67
3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS & INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................. 68 3.3 BRANCH CIRCUITRY ....................................................................................................................... 74
3.4 SHORT-CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDIES ................................................................................ 75 3.5 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRICAL WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS ............. 76
3.6 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN AIR HANDLING SPACES ........................ 77 3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT BANKS ............................................................................................... 77
3.8 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING ................................................................................................... 79 3.9 LIMITING NOISE PRODUCED BY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................. 80
3.10 SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS ...................................................................................................... 81 3.11 SPLICING AND TERMINATING WIRES AND CABLES .................................................................. 82
3.12 PULLING WIRES INTO CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS .................................................................. 82 3.13 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND
PULL BOXES .................................................................................................................................... 83 3.14 LOCATING AND ROUTING OF CIRCUITRY ................................................................................... 85
3.15 INSTALLING CIRCUITRY ................................................................................................................. 86 3.16 PHYSICAL SEPARATION OF NORMAL, OPTIONAL STANDBY, AND EMERGENCY
SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................................... 87
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 1
SECTION 260000
ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal back charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this Contract
and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Electrical Subcontractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price should he fail, for any
reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the Local Utility Companies or Municipal Agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for Electrical work, certain non-technical words shall
be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Electrical work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support, all as part of the Electrical work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project, all as part of the Electrical work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any electrical item in the Drawings or Specifications for Electrical
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 2
work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the Electrical work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Electrical work are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Electrical work except that
indications on the Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take precedence over the Specifications where they conflict.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Primary electric service duct bank.
2. Secondary electric service including underground conduit bank and secondary service entrance feeders, from the utility company pad mounted transformer, building grounding
electrode and main service disconnect.
3. Interior secondary distribution systems including main switchboard, all distribution panelboards, motor controls, magnetic starters, overcurrent and switching devices,
panelboards, raceways, cables, wiring, junction and pull boxes, wireways, and all other components required for complete electrical distribution system.
4. Power system study.
5. All lighting systems (indoor and outdoor, normal, night, emergency and exit) including all
fixtures, lamps, mounting accessories, switches, controls, outlets, wiring, raceways, and all other components and fittings required for a complete lighting system.
6. Telephone system wiring and outlets.
7. Grounding and bonding of all electrical systems and equipment.
8. Fire alarm system complete with all devices and wiring including municipal connections. 9. Wiring devices (switches and receptacles) complete with associated wallplates.
10. Power wiring to HVAC, plumbing and fire protection equipment.
11. Data system wiring and outlets. 12. Testing of all electrical systems.
13. Access panels (furnish only).
14. Emergency distribution system including diesel generator, automatic transfer switch, panelboards, and all other components required for a complete system.
15. Coordination between electrical and other trades.
16. Power wiring for elevators and associated equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 3
17. Lighting control and dimming system.
18. All other systems hereinafter specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, complete, leaving ready an electrical system in perfect operating condition.
19. All required staging and scaffolding of any height.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain necessary approvals from Authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated
sections.
1. Temporary Facilities.
2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill. 3. Concrete:
a. Equipment foundations. b. Housekeeping pads.
c. Concrete encasement for conduit banks. d. Light pole bases.
e. Rebar for items “a, b, c & d” above. 4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking. 6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting except as specified herein. 8. Finish Carpentry and Millwork. 9. Steel Doors and Frames. 10. Finish Hardware.
11. Elevator. 12. Fire Protection.
13. Plumbing.
14. HVAC. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local Codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities having jurisdiction, obtain all permits and pay for all fees and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 4
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance shall conform with the latest edition of the following standards, codes, Specifications,
requirements and regulations:
1. State Building Code.
2. State Electrical Code. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. Local Town Regulations and By-Laws. 5. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
6. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
E. All Electrical work shall meet or exceed any other state and local codes and/or Authorities having
jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
3. Manufacturer’s Product Data: Information prepared by the manufacturer which depicts
standard equipment.
C. Submittals, Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information: a. Title. b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s). d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted. 3. Shop Drawings and/or Manufacturer’s Product Data shall contain detailed dimensional
Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 5
published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate
location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract
Documents.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Architect’s Mechanical/Electrical design for each project is based on the single
manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the Drawings. In Division 16 of these Specifications certain “Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These are
acceptable only if, as a minimum, they: a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications. c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and
component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the
Contract Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
fit within the available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the Contractor.
d. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or
Specifications. e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to,
being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified products. E. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
F. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above shall be requested individually in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or deviation to the
attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services, service access
requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating characteristics or
cycles. 2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 6
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related
changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work. Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within
the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the altered system. Any extra costs incurred to the project based on the use of alternate
manufacturers shall be borne by the Contractor who has requested the substitution.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of
Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
G. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and
techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work.
H. Schedule: Incorporate the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that
work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule.
Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time Shop Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of
transmittal time, are required for the following:
1. Motor control wiring diagram submittals.
2. Short circuit and coordination studies. 3. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
4. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
I. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted out of sequence.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 7
J. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited, waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
K. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and/or Manufacturer’s Data Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Light fixtures. 2. Switchboard and motor controls.
3. Panelboards. 4. Overcurrent and switching devices.
5. Wiring devices and wall plates. 6. Fire alarm system with wiring diagram and schedule.
7. Emergency generator system, including automatic transfer switch. 8. Cable trays. 9. Wiring and cables. 10. Conduit.
11. Boxes and fittings. 12. Safety switches.
13. Lighting control system.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Electrical work. In the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General
Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been
issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 8
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels,
review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request information from Architect. Where the Electrical work shall interfere with the work of other trades,
assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation. Without extra cost to the Owners, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by
normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings, or relocating and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for
any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as
possible.
E. If any Electrical work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be made by the trades involved without extra cost to the Owners.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the Electrical work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owners.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the heating
and ventilating equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The HVAC and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work, as well as the electrical characteristics of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to HVAC control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All low voltage thermostat, and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor.
F. Pipe heat tracing shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. Power connections shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
G. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an integral part of packaged equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 9
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic type background Drawings at a scale not less than 1/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information
as needed for coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades: 1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System. 3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work. 5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each Coordination Drawing. Return Drawings to the
Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty trades. 5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect. 6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Drawings shall
assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make copies of all coordination Drawings. Fabrication shall not start until such copies of completed Drawings are received by the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors. 1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Electrical work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and indicates
the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to
require the least amount of cutting and patching.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 10
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his
determination prior to proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many
cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the
Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or concrete, as required for Mechanical and Electrical work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be
1/2" larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls, floors and ceiling required for the installation of sleeves, supports, and conduit for the Electrical work.
1.15 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
A. Provide firestop or smokestop between sleeves and conduit as manufactured by STI, Nelson, or
Dow Corning Corp. Provide at all locations where conduits or electrical equipment penetrate fire/smoke walls or partitions.
B. Provide waterproofing of all materials which penetrate a floor, exterior wall, slab or roof. All sleeves shall extend a minimum of 3 inches above floor or roof. All penetrations thru building
foundation walls shall utilize Link-Seal products or approved equal.
1.16 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS
A. Provide the services of an authorized representative to instruct the Owner. The Electrical Contractor shall be available during the commissioning phase to demonstrate the operation of all
systems.
1.17 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.18 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 11
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor, wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.19 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the Mechanical and
Electrical equipment at the site.
1.20 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be handed over to the Owners.
1.21 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At completion of work prepare a complete set of Record Drawings utilizing AutoCAD produced
drawings showing all systems as actually installed, including all fire alarm and electrical circuitry. Submit three (3) sets of prints to Architect for comments as to compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.22 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 Hour Service:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 12
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary power etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each day of the week, for the duration of the service. 6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct course of action.
1.23 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT for submittal procedures pertaining to
operating and maintenance manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved operating and maintenance manual shall contain copies of approved
Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and engineering data
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 13
sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction: a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use.
b. Description of the electrical systems. c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment.
d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams. e. Installation drawing.
3. Maintenance:
a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions. b. Replacement charts.
c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components. d. Testing instructions for each typical component.
e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name, price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature:
a. The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.
1.24 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Secondary Building Voltage: 120/208.
B. All equipment and wiring shall be suitable for the applied voltage.
1.25 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 14
3. Not be used for temporary light and power purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA standards.
5. Buy products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested
and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.
G. Except for conduit, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, wire and cable, all items of equipment or material
of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.
H. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Electrical work, the Electrical
work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who originally purchased the item.
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
I. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the electric work shall be carefully examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
electric work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of delivery to the project of the items in question. The electric work includes all procedures, regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.26 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
1.27 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install feeders of sufficient size from the Utility
Company’s power lines for the electric light and power requirements for the building while under construction and until the permanent feeders and related equipment have been installed and are in operation. Temporary lighting shall be based on a minimum of one watt per square foot
covering each and every square foot of floor area in the building. Sufficient wiring, lamps, and outlets shall be installed to insure proper lighting in all rooms, space, stairwells, and corridors.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 15
Minimum sized lamp used shall be 100 watt. Where higher lighting intensities are required by Federal or State Standards of Laws or otherwise specified, the above specified wattage shall be
increased to provide these increased intensities.
B. All necessary transformers, meters, cables, panelboards, switches, temporary lamp replacements
and accessories required for the temporary light and power installation shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide and maintain on each floor of the building, a feeder or feeders of sufficient capacity for the requirements of the entire floor and he shall provide a
sufficient number of outlets, located at convenient points so that extension cords of not over 50 feet in length will reach all work requiring temporary light or power.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install and maintain the wiring and accessories for the offices of the General Contractor and the Clerk of the Works as specified in the contract form.
E. All temporary Electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code Article 590 Temporary Wiring, the Local Utility Company, and all Federal Standards and Laws.
F. All temporary wiring and accessories thereto installed by the Electrical Subcontractor shall be removed after their purposes have been served.
G. The General Contractor will pay for the cost of electric energy consumed by himself and by all of his Subcontractors, unless otherwise indicated.
H. All lamps installed in permanent lighting fixtures and used for lighting during construction shall be replaced by the Electrical Subcontractor just prior to date of Use and Occupancy or Final
Acceptance.
I. Provide all temporary lighting and power required above during the normal working hours of the
project or a total of ten (10) hours per normal working day; Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays are excluded. The ten hours per day shall include manning the temporary power and
lighting 1/2 hour before and 1/2 hour after a normal eight (8) hour working day. In addition to the above, provide and maintain, to the satisfaction of the local Authorities having jurisdiction, all
temporary lighting and power that may be required for safety purposes. The Electrical Subcontractor will be compensated by the General Contractor for any additional standby time,
materials or equipment required by the General Contractor or other Subcontractors beyond the normal working hours, as defined above.
1.28 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding for all the work of this section complying with Division 1
requirements.
1.29 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials as indicated below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. 10% of each total lamps installed. 2. 10% of each total circuit breakers installed.
3. 10% of each total fuses installed. 4. Ten (10) toggle switches and duplex receptacles.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 16
5. 10% of total audio/visual appliances installed. 6. 10% of each total pull stations and smoke detectors installed.
1.30 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and work shall meet the restraint requirements for the designated Seismic Design category. This shall include all installation and connections of material and equipment to the
building structure. Refer to Structural Drawings for Seismic Design category and ASCE7 for electrical requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Product Specifications are written in such a manner so as to specify what materials may be used in a particular location or application and therefore do not indicate what is not acceptable or
suitable for a particular location or application. As an example: Non-metallic sheathed cable is not specified; therefore it is not acceptable.
B. For purpose of establishing a standard of quality and not for purposes of limiting completion, the basis of this Specification is upon specified models and types of equipment and materials, as
manufactured by specified manufacturers.
C. In all cases, standard cataloged materials and systems have been selected. Materials such as
lighting fixtures specially manufactured for this particular project, and not part of a manufacturer’s standard product line, will not be acceptable. In the case of systems, the system components
shall be from a single source regularly engaged in supplying such systems. A proposed system made up of a collection of various manufacturers products will be unacceptable.
D. Where Specifications list manufacturers names and/or “as approved” or “equal approved by Designer”, other manufacturers equipment will be considered if equipment meets Specification
requirements and has all features of the specified items as are considered essential by the Architect.
E. All materials shall be new and shall be UL listed.
2.2 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. Short Circuit Studies, Protective Device Evaluation Studies, Protective Device Coordination Studies and arc flash analysis shall be provided by this Electrical Subcontractor. The studies
shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacture. If formal completion of the
studies may cause delay in equipment manufacture, approval may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics
will be satisfactory.
B. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal power
source. Normal system connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study.
C. The short circuit study shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE guidelines, NFPA 70B and ANSI C2.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 17
D. The study input data shall include the power company’s short circuit contribution, resistance and reactance components of the branch impedances, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected, and
other source impedances.
E. Short circuit momentary duty values and interrupting duty values shall be calculated on the basis
of assumed three-phase bolted short circuits at each power center bus, distribution panelboards, pertinent branch circuit panel and other significant locations through the system. The short circuit
tabulations shall include symmetrical fault currents, and X/R ratios. For each fault location, the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contribution from each connected branch, shall be
listed with its respective X/R ratio.
F. A protective device evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of overcurrent
and switching devices and automatic transfer switches, by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the calculated fault currents. Appropriate multiplying factors
based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards shall be applied.
G. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary calculations
and logic decisions required to select or to check the selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated current transformers,
and low voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. The objective of the study is to obtain optimum protective and coordination performance from these devices.
H. The coordination study shall include all low voltage classes of equipment from the utility’s incoming line protective device down to and including the devices in the 120/208 volt
panelboards. The phase and ground overcurrent protection shall be included as well as settings of all other adjustable protective devices.
1. Provide selective coordination for all emergency system overcurrent devices in accordance with NFPA 70, Articles 620, 645, 695, 700, 701 and 708.
I. The time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be drawn on Keuffel and
Esser log-log paper. The plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagram and legends, associated power company’s relays or fuse characteristics, significant motor starting
characteristics, complete parameters of transformer withstand limits and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. All restrictions of the National Electrical Code shall be adhered
to and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained. The coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices shall be provided on a system basis. A sufficient number of separate curves shall be used to clearly indicate the coordination achieved.
J. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios and
recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for the medium voltage fuses where applied in the system. Any discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the Architect’s attention.
K. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. Six (6) bound copies
of the final report shall be submitted:
L. Report shall include the following selections:
1. Description, purpose, basis and scope of the study and a single diagram of that portion of the power system which is included within the scope of the study.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 18
2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus calculated short circuit duties, and commentary regarding same.
3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit
breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same.
4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.
5. The Electrical Subcontractor shall test, calibrate, and adjust circuit breaker trip devices as
recommended in the power system study.
M. The arc flash analysis shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 1584. Based on results of this study, the Electrical Contractor shall provide labeling at all equipment outlined in NFPA 70E
130.5(c). Labeling shall indicate at a minimum, the required level of PPE, nominal system voltage and arc flash boundary.
2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Raceways – General:
1. No raceway shall be used smaller than 3/4" diameter. No conduit shall have more than three
(3) 90° bends in any one run, and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided.
2. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 344 of
NFPA 70 shall be heavy wall zinc coated steel conforming to American Standard Specifications C80-1 and may be used for service work, exterior work, slab work, and below
grade level slab, wet locations, and in mechanical rooms and where raceway may be subjected to mechanical damage, i.e., loading docks, workshops, etc.
3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with Article 342
of NFPA 70 shall be zinc coated steel and may be used in all areas similar to RMC.
4. Thin wall conduit (EMT), conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 358 of NFPA 70 shall be zinc coated steel, conforming to industry standards, may be used in masonry
block walls, stud partitions, above furred ceilings where exposed but not subject to mechanical damage, and shall be used for fire alarm work.
5. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with Article 348 of
NFPA 70 shall be used for connections to recessed light fixtures, vibrating equipment and motors. All FMC shall be secured and supported in accordance with Article 348 of NFPA 70.
6. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with
Article 350 of NFPA 70 shall be used for connections to light fixtures, vibrating equipment and motors. All LFMC shall be secured and supported in accordance with Article 350 of NFPA
70. If used on roof applications, all LFMC shall be supported by sleepers approved by the Architect prior to installation.
7. Rigid non-metallic conduit may be used at the Contractor’s option for underground electric
and telephone services outside the foundation wall and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
schedule 40 or 80, 90° C. If option of rigid non-metallic conduit is exercised, underground runs outside the foundation wall shall be concrete encased at Contractor’s expense.
Schedule 40/80 conduit shall be installed in conformance with Article 352 of NFPA 70. Use
of type EB or A PVC conduit is not allowed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 19
8. PVC Schedule 40 may also be used for below grade slab circuits within building confines.
Below slab rigid non-metallic conduits do not require concrete encasement. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall not be used in slabs. Rigid steel elbows or stubs shall be used for
penetrations from below slab or through exterior walls into building. PVC shall not be installed within building. Raceways and fittings shall be produced by same manufacturer. All
PVC conduit shall comply with ANSI/UL 651.
9. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wheatland Tube Company
b. Allied Tube c. Western Tube & Conduit
d. Carlon e. Perma-Cote Supreme
f. Cantex
10. Fittings: a. Provide insulated bushings on all raceways that house conductors #4 AWG or larger at
all threaded fittings no matter what the size of the conductor. b. Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used for raceway supports.
c. Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings shall be used where structural and concrete expansion joints occur and shall include a ground strap.
d. Couplings for rigid metal conduit and IMC shall be threaded type. Provide insulated bushings.
e. All fittings for EMT conduit shall be steel. No die-cast fittings are allowed. Set screw and compression connectors are allowed. f. Threadless fittings for EMT shall be watertight compression type. Set-screw type fittings are not acceptable. All fittings shall be concrete tight. No die-cast fittings allowed.
g. Cable supports in vertical raceways shall be of the split wedge type. Armored cable supports for vertical runs to be of wire mesh basket design.
h. Wall entrance seals shall be equal to O.Z. Gedney type “WSK” or Link-Seal.
i. Couplings, elbows and other fittings used with rigid nonmetallic raceways shall be of the solvent cemented type to secure a waterproof installation. j. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Crouse Hinds 3) American Fittings
4) Hubbell 5) Thomas & Betts
2.4 CABLE TRAY
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes indicated with splice hangers and all other necessary accessories. Provide cable trays with
rounded edges and smooth surfaces in compliance with applicable standards, and with the following additional construction features.
B. Materials and Finishes – Aluminum: Rails and rungs shall be extruded from Aluminum
Association Alloy 6063. All hardware and fasteners shall be zinc-plated steel.
C. Rungs shall be spaced every 9 inches.
D. Straight sections shall be supplied in 12 foot lengths.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 20
E. Cable tray width shall be 18 inches.
F. Cable tray loading depth shall be 4 inches.
G. Cable tray shall meet the loading requirements of NEMA 12C.
H. Cable tray shall meet the requirements of NEMA VE-1 or CSA C22.2 No. 126-M91.
I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these Specifications, cable tray system shall be as manufactured by B-Line Systems, Square D, Huskey or equal.
2.5 WIRING MATERIALS
A. Building Wire and Cable shall be copper with 600V insulation, THWN for branch circuitry and
XHHW for feeders.
B. Conductors shall be of soft drawn 98% minimum conductivity properly refined copper, solid
construction where No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded construction where No. 8 AWG and larger.
C. Exterior of wires shall bear repetitive markings along their entire length indicating conductor size, insulation type and voltage rating.
D. Exterior of wires shall be color coded, so as to indicate a clear differentiation between each phase and between each phase and neutral. In all cases, grounded neutral wires and cables shall be
identified by the colors “white” or “gray”. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied colors are not available, wires and cables shall be color coded by the application of colored
plastic tapes in overlapping turns at all terminal points, and in all boxes in which splices are made. Colored tape shall be applied for a distance of 6 inches along the wires and cables, or
along their entire extensions beyond raceway ends, whichever is less.
E. Final connections to motors shall be made with 18” of neoprene sheathed flexible conduit.
F. Minimum branch circuit conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG installed in conduit. Motor control circuit wiring shall be minimum No. 14 AWG installed in conduit.
G. Fire alarm and security system wiring shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Other wires and cables required for the various systems described elsewhere in this section of
the Specifications shall be as specified herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings, or as recommended by the manufacturer of the specific equipment for which they are used, all installed
in conduit.
I. Metal clad sheathed cable NFPA 70, type MC may be used for branch circuitry where shown and
where run concealed and not subject to physical damage. All type MC cable used shall contain a full size insulated ground conductor. All conductors shall be copper. All type MC cable insulation
used shall have voltage rating of 600 volts, shall have a temperature rating of 75° C, and shall be thermoplastic material. Armor material shall be steel and armor design shall be interlocked metal
tape. Fire alarm rated MC cable may be used for fire alarm work where concealed and acceptable to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
J. Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed fire-resistive cables, type MI, shall consist of a factory assembly of one or more solid copper conductors insulated with highly-compressed magnesium oxide and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 21
enclosed in a seamless, liquid and gas-tight continuous copper sheath. Cables shall be rated for 600 volts. Cable shall comply with Article 330 of the National Electrical Code. Cables shall be
classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as having a 2-hour fire resistive rating. Cable terminations shall be made with UL listed mineral-insulated cable fittings. Cables shall be as
manufactured by Pyrotenax USA, Inc., or approved equal.
K. Wiring materials except MI cable shall be manufactured by Southwire, Prysmian, General Cable,
or equal.
2.6 OUTLET, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND WIRING TROUGHS FOR ALL SYSTEMS
A. Outlets:
1. Each outlet in wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit
conditions encountered. Boxes installed in normally wet locations shall be of cast-metal type having hubs. Concealed boxes shall be cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type.
Old work boxes with Madison clamps are not allowed in new construction.
2. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate number of conductors in accordance with requirements of NFPA 70. Boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2” deep unless shallower
boxes are required by structural conditions and are specifically approved by Architect. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4” octagonal except that smaller boxes
may be used where required by particular fixture to be installed. Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate junction boxes when required by fixture terminal temperature
requirements. Switch and receptacle boxes shall be 4” square or of comparable volume.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Appleton b. Crouse Hinds
c. Steel City d. RACO
B. Pull and Junction Boxes: Where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple raceway runs
or to facilitate conductor installation, furnish and install appropriately designed boxes. Boxes shall be fabricated from code gauge steel assembled with corrosion resistant machine screws. Box size shall be as required by Code. Where intermediate cable supports are necessary because of box dimensions, provide insulated removable core brackets to support conductors.
Junction boxes are to be equipped with barriers to separate circuits. Where splices are to be made, boxes shall be large enough to provide ample work space. All conductors in boxes are to
be clearly tagged to indicate characteristics. Boxes shall be supported independently of
raceways. Junction boxes in moist or wet areas shall be galvanized type. Boxes larger than 4 inches square shall have hinged covers. Boxes larger than 12 inches in one dimension will be allowed to have screw fastened covers, if a hinged cover would not be capable of being opened a
full 90 degrees due to installation location.
2.7 WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide wiring device type plates for all wall-mounted devices. All wall plates shall be smooth
high impact nylon for all areas, color as directed by the Architect. Provide galvanized steel for all Utility, Electric and Mechanical Rooms.
B. Wiring devices standard for the project (i.e., with no specific type indicated) shall conform to the
following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 22
1. Visible part colors of wiring devices shall be as directed by the Architect for all areas. Provide brown devices for all Utility, Electrical and Mechanical rooms.
2. Exclude compact or “despard” type devices.
C. Wiring device switches shall be toggle type, A.C. quiet design, specification grade, 20 amps on
120 volt circuits. Switches shall be mounted 48” to center line above finished floor unless noted otherwise.
1. Single pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1221. 2. Double pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1222.
3. Three-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1223. 4. Four-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1224.
5. Single pole pilot light switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL 1221PL. 6. Equivalent 277 volt 20 amp switches shall be used where required.
D. Standard duplex convenience receptacles shall be 125 volt, 20 amps, three wire (two circuit wires
plus ground), “U-bar” ground NEMA slot configuration 5-20R, specification grade. Receptacles shall be mounted 18” to center line above finished floor unless noted otherwise.
1. Equal to Hubbell No. 5362.
2. Where indicated on plans provide receptacles with ground fault current interrupters, UL Class A; 20A, 125V to be equal to Hubbell No. GF5362. All GFI receptacles shall be self-testing
type in compliance with UL 943.
E. Non-standard convenience receptacles and special purpose power supply receptacles shall be as listed on plans.
F. Devices and device plates for flush wall devices which are not integrally equipped with same, shall be as directed by the Architect.
G. For unfinished spaces, plates for surface-mounted wall devices which are not integrally equipped with same, shall be galvanized sheet steel, formed raised type which does not overlap box.
Where for switches, such plates shall have toggle guards.
H. Where more than one wiring device is indicated in the same location, the devices shall be mounted in gang under a common wall plate.
I. Mount duplex convenience and power receptacles vertically with grounding posts at top of device
unless otherwise indicated. Locate grounding post to left when horizontal mounting is indicated.
J. Wiring devices and associated hardware shall be manufactured by Leviton, Hubbell or Pass and
Seymour.
K. Floor Outlets (Poke-Thru Type):
1. Thru-floor assembly of floor outlets for power and communications shall be UL listed and have a two-hour fire rating. Core drilling shall be by Electrical Subcontractor.
2. Complete assembly shall consist of a flange assembly, slide holder assembly, and insert
assembly.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 23
3. Length of extension raceway shall be sufficient to penetrate bottom of slab. Coordinate ordering of raceway with type of slab.
4. Thru-floor assemblies shall be as manufactured by Raceway Components, Inc., or equal.
L. Dimmer Controls:
1. All devices shall be UL listed specifically for the required loads (i.e., incandescent, fluorescent, magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage). Manufacturer shall provide file
card upon request. Universal dimmers are not acceptable.
2. All dimmers and switches shall incorporate an air gap switch. The air gap switch shall be capable of meeting all applicable requirements of UL 20 for air gas switches in incandescent
dimmers.
3. All dimmers and switches shall provide power failure memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently returned, the lights will come back on to the same levels set prior to the
power interruption. Restoration to some other default level is not acceptable.
4. Dimmers and switches shall meet ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.41-1980, tested to withstand voltage surges of up to 6000V and current surges of up to 200A without damage.
5. Dimmers and switches shall meet the UL 20 limited short circuit test requirement for snap
switches.
6. Dimmer shall provide a smooth and continuous Square Law dimming curve. 7. Dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that + 10% variation in line voltage shall cause not more than +5% variation in load voltage when dimmer is operating at 40V (5% light output).
8. Dimmers shall be 2000 watt equal to Lutron Nova Series. Single pole dimmers shall be “slide
to off” type. Three-way dimmers shall be “preset” type used with appropriate 3 or 4-way
linear slide switches. 2.8 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with best industry practice, the requirements of NFPA 70, Article 250 and the following:
1. The ground bus of the main switchboard shall be connected to the main grounding electrode
specified below by means of insulated conductors run in conduit. a. Metal underground water pipes. b. Metal frame of building.
c. Concrete encased electrode. d. Rod and pipe electrodes. e. Ground ring.
2. Provide grounding bonds between all metallic conduits of the light and power system which enter and leave cable chambers or other non-metallic cable pulling and splicing boxes.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type individually
cross connected.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 24
3. Bond metallic conduits containing grounding electrode conductors and main bonding conductors to the ground bus service enclosure and/or grounding electrode at both ends of
each run utilizing grounding bushings and jumpers.
4. Provide grounding bonds for all metallic conduits of the light and power system which terminate in pits below equipment for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by
equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected individually to the ground bus.
5. Provide supplementary ground bonding where metallic conduits terminate at metal clad
equipment (or at the metal pull box of equipment) for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this be equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected
individually by means of jumpers to the ground bus. Exclude the jumpers where directed. This exclusion will be required where an isolated ground for electronic equipment is to be
maintained.
6. Each grounding type bushing shall have the maximum ground wire accommodation available in standard manufacture for the particular conduit size. Connection to bushing shall be with
wire of this maximum size.
7. Bonding conductors on the load side of the service device and equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in relation to the fuses or trip size of the overcurrent device
supplying the circuit.
8. The central equipment for the fire protective alarm system and telephone system shall have its grounding terminal connected to the grounding electrode by means of a No. 6 green coded insulated conductor, run in 3/4" conduit. Utilize a ground clamp of a type specifically manufactured for the purpose.
2.9 PHASING AND COLOR CODING
A. The insulation or covering of each wire or cable shall be color coded so as to provide for circuit
identification as specified below:
120/208 V Circuits
Phase Circuits
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Equipment Ground
B. Color coding shall be achieved by one of the following methods:
1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one of the following methods:
a. Colored compounds. b. Colored coatings.
2. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied colors are not available, wires and cables
shall be color coded by the application of colored plastic tapes in overlapping turns at all terminal points, and in all boxes in which splices are made.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 25
C. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project.
D. In general, building load centers and panelboards shall be phased “A”, “B”, “C”, left to right. The
neutral, although it may be in different locations for different equipment, shall be identified.
2.10 SWITCHBOARD
A. The switchboard shall be of the free-standing deadfront, front accessible only, totally metal enclosed externally operable type, and shall consist of an assembly of standardized vertical
sections, each having rigid frame construction of heavy gauge formed steel. Each section shall be thoroughly rustproof, primed and painted to provide an overall even appearance. Adjacent
vertical sections shall be arranged for bolting together. Welded construction will be permitted only for individual vertical sections. Switchboards shall include all protective devices and
equipment as listed on the Drawings with the necessary interconnections, instrumentation and control wiring. All switchboard sections shall align on front and rear.
B. Its arrangement shall be such that their lowest current carrying parts are at least 12 inches above finished floor, and its height is no more than 90 inches.
C. It shall comply with all the latest applicable standards of NEC, NEMA, ANSI and UL, having all main overcurrent and switching devices individually mounted and front accessible only. All
branch overcurrent and switching devices shall be panel mounted, and shall be front accessible only.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Main and distribution feeder protective devices as shown shall be molded case air circuit
breakers, built, tested and UL labeled per UL 489. Main and distribution feeder breakers shall have long time, short time, instantaneous, (LSI) trip functions. Main circuit breaker shall
also have a ground fault (G) trip function.
2. Breaker trip unit shall be solid-state trip complete with built in current transformers, solid-state trip unit and flux transfer shunt trip. Breakers shall have interchangeable trip rating plugs with
trip ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames and interlocked such that breaker cannot be latched with
rating plug removed. Provide test kit that is fully compatible with built-in test points for testing long delay and instantaneous functions of the breaker by means of a 120-volt operated test
kit. a. Solid-state instantaneous element shall be continuously adjustable from approximately 4
to 8 times the trip rating, with short time adjustment from instantaneous to 10 cycle delay for coordination purposes. Provide short delays over-ride feature providing for
instantaneous tripping on high magnitude faults.
3. Molded case breakers shall have available interrupting current (AIC) rating shall meet or exceed the switchboard assembly UL listed integrated short circuit rating but shall have a minimum 65,000 symmetrical RMS interrupting capacity at 240 volts.
E. It shall have ample gutter space for outgoing cables.
F. It shall have complete bussing suitable for main service supply characteristics.
G. It shall have a neutral bus.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 26
H. It shall have a ground bar sized per NEC but shall be minimum 2” x 1/4" copper bar run along the switchboard for its entire length. The ground bar shall be fastened and bonded to each vertical
framing member of the switchboard.
I. Rear or side access to each vertical section shall not be required.
J. Switchboard bussing shall be of hard drawn 98% minimum conductivity copper and shall conform to the following:
1. No individual bar shall be of a thickness of more than 1/4 inch. Where necessary for current capacity, multiple parallel bars shall be used. Parallel bars shall be separated by copper
spacers or washers maintaining a spacing equal to bar thickness.
2. Exclude divergent routing of electrically paralleled bars.
3. Connections shall be made up with cadmium plated steel bolts and nuts utilizing “Belleville” type washers or split locknuts plus flat washers.
4. The current density across bolted contact surfaces of bars shall not exceed 200 amps per
square inch. Bolted contact surfaces of bars shall be silver or tin-plated.
5. Bracing and protective devices shall be such as to withstand and interrupt short circuit stresses of 65,000 amps symmetrical at 208 VAC minimum or available short circuit
whichever is larger.
6. Bussing designated as mains shall be run for the full extend indicated without reduction in size.
7. Neutral bussing shall be full size.
8. Neutral bussing shall extend the same length as the main phase bussing with which it is
associated.
9. The neutral bus shall be bonded to the ground bus by means of insulated copper cables. 10. Each neutral bus shall be properly drilled and tapped for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.
11. “Spaces only” for overcurrent protection and switching devices shall be bussed for the
maximum device that can be fitted into them including all necessary hardware except the
device itself. 12. Bussing and arrangement of overcurrent and switching devices shall be bussed for the
maximum trip setting of the device that can be fitted into them. K. Submit certification that the switchboard has withstood, without breakdown, a factory dielectric
“Hi-Pot” test consisting of a one minute application of a 60 cycle AC test voltage applied between phase legs and from each phase leg to enclosure. The applied test voltage shall have an RMS valve of at least twice the line-to-line system voltage to which the switchboard is to be applied.
L. The main switchboard shall be listed with an Underwriters label attesting to its suitability as
service entrance equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 27
M. Provide a separate barriered-off Utility Metering Compartment complete with hinged sealable door complying with Utility Company requirements. Bus work shall include provisions for
mounting Utility Company current and potential transformers.
N. Provide a separate customer metering compartment with front hinged door and include the
following:
1. Current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall be wired to shorting type
terminal blocks.
2. Potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means for metering.
3. Microprocessor based metering system.
O. Provide small control wiring, necessary fuse blocks, suitable numbering strips and terminal blocks
as required.
P. Provide adequate means for rigging, skidding and rolling.
Q. Switchboard shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton.
2.11 MAIN METERING SWITCHBOARDS
A. Provide dead-front rigid switchboard with voltage rating shown on Drawings, approximately 90" high, formed of bolted vertical sections, with screwed-on sides and rear, and formed edge front.
B. Provide small wiring, fuse blocks, terminal blocks and suitable numbering strips as required.
C. Provide for rigging and skidding or rolling.
D. Finish shall be ANSI 61 gray over phosphatized coating.
E. Provide copper bus bars rated to withstand maximum short circuit stresses when connected to
supply system with 100,000 A fault capacity at rated voltage. Arrange main horizontal bus bar phases in same vertical plane. Provide full capacity neutral where shown on Drawings. Secure
ground bus and lug to vertical sections length of switchboard. Conductor hardware shall be high-tensile strength, zinc-plated. Terminals shall be anti-turn solderless suitable for cable material.
F. Provide cable pull boxes with cable tie down supports where shown on Drawings. Seal as required by Utility. Provide 1-1/2" empty conduit for remote meter wiring by Utility.
G. Switchboard Front-Accessible Panel-Mounted Breakers
1. Switchboard shall be floor mounted Type SB3.
2. Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line termination, main device connections
and main bus bolted connections without rear access. Feeder or branch devices shall be removable from front and shall be panel-mounted with device line and load connections
accessible from front.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 28
3. Provide current transformer compartments in service entrance section of switchboards, connected for cold sequence metering. Provide for current transformers that meet Utility
Specifications.
4. Provide a steel base assembly with formed steel and commercial channel welded or bolted together for rigid support necessary for moving on rollers and floor mounting. Framework
shall be code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to support coverplates, busing and component devices during shipment and installation.
5. Switchboard section shall have open bottom and individual removable top plate.
6. Bussing shall be plated and of sufficient cross-sectional area to conduit continuously rated full
load current with maximum temperature rise of 650 C, above ambient temperature of 400 C.
7. Bus shall be rigidly braced to comply with integrated equipment rating of switchboard. Minimum bracing for short circuit faults shall be 30,000 A symmetrical RMS.
8. End section shall have bus bar provisions for future addition of switchboard section, with bus
bars to extreme side of switchboard, pre-punched to receive splice plates. Horizontal main bus bar supports, connections and joints shall be bolted.
H. Main Devices - Siemens insulated case circuit breaker type SBS.
1. Provide circuit breaker by Siemens or approved equal, with current sensors and solid-state trip unit with true RMS sensing.
2. Breakers shall be fixed mounted. Breaker shall have solid-state trip with adjustable elements: a. Continuous current adjustable in increments from 50% to 100% of the rating plug value.
Long time pick up shall be equal to 115% of the continuous setting. b. Long delay time: increments from 2.5 to 30 seconds at 6 times rating plug.
c. Short time current pick-up increments from 1.5 to 8 times plug rating.
d. Short time delay: fixed range: 0.07 to 8 seconds. I2T range: 0.07 to 0.3 seconds at 8 times the plug rating. e. Instantaneous range shall be 1.5 to 10 times the rating plug. An instantaneous override
function shall be provided and shall be set to operate at in 0.5 seconds at 65,000 A or greater. f. A discriminator circuit shall override the short circuit settings during the first 6 cycles to
trip the breaker instantaneously in the event the breaker is attempted to be closed into a fault.
I. Feeder Protective Devices Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
1. Provide molded case circuit breakers by Siemens (Sentron) or approved equal.
2. Breakers shall be thermal magnetic trip with inverse time current characteristics. 3. Breakers shall be rated minimum 30,000 A RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity at 480V.
4. Breakers shall have interchangeable trip unit with continuous current ratings as indicated on Drawings.
5. Instantaneous settings shall be discrete steps in the range of 5 to 10 times the breaker frame
size.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 29
J. Metering Sections:
1. Where meter sections are shown, provide meter sockets rated as shown with accessories as required by Utility; metering to be arranged for cold sequence.
2. 400 ampere meter sections shall contain circuit breakers and utility metering current
transformers only.
3. Metering sections shall be close coupled to the main as shown on the line diagram, forming a complete freestanding switchboard.
4. Metering sections shall match the requirements of the main switchboards section.
2.12 ENCLOSURES FOR INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED OVERCURRENT AND SWITCHING DEVICES
A. Construction shall be NEMA Class I, where installed indoors.
B. Construction shall be NEMA Class IIIR, where installed outdoors, in mechanical rooms, in
locations defined as damp or wet by NFPA 70 or where indicated as weatherproof.
C. Operating handles shall be front or side type to accommodate hand access space and flush or
surface mounting requirements.
D. Each shall be equipped with padlock for locking operating handle in the open position.
2.13 METER CENTERS
A. General: Provide all components tested and U.L. listed for use as an integral part of the multi-
metering system. Manufacture according to latest NEMA standards. Provide meter centers as herein specified and shown on the associated Electrical Drawings
B. Ratings: The meter center assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault
current of 65,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.
C. Construction:
1. The entire assembly shall be front accessible and shall include main lugs or a main disconnect device as shown on plans.
2. Tenant disconnects shall be wired for “hot” or “cold” sequence as required by local utility
company and shall be molded case circuit breakers.
3. The meter sockets shall be ring or ringless type as required by local utility company and shall be rated 200 amperes. A manual bypass shall be provided if required by local utility
company. The meter sockets and associated branch protective device positions shall be completely pre-wired and shipped ready for installation of the meters and tenant main
breakers. Meter sockets shall include covers with sealing provisions.
D. Bus:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 30
1. All bus bars shall be tin-plated aluminum. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on U.L.
standard temperature rise criteria for multiple metering equipment.
2. Provide a full capacity neutral bus.
3. All hardware used for bus bar connections shall be high-tensile strength, zinc plated. Provide Belleville type spring washers for all joints.
E. Wiring and Terminations:
1. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable and rated at 75° C.
2. Lube shall be provided in the incoming section for connection of the main grounding
conductor.
F. Main Protective Devices:
1. Main protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and
instantaneous tripping characteristics.
2. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on drawings.
3. Circuit breakers shall be U.L. listed for series applications.
G. Enclosures:
1. Meter center enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for surface mounting.
2. Boxes and trim shall be bonderized and finished with ANSI G1 light grey enamel.
H. Approved Manufacturers: Meter centers shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton.
2.14 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall consist of factory completed dead front assemblies of back pans, main busses,
overcurrent and switching units, sheet metal cabinets and trims. They shall be so designed that switching and overcurrent devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without
removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machine drilling or
tapping.
B. Where indicated as power or distribution panels, they shall be as manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton.
C. Bus bars for their mains shall be of copper having current capacities as indicated and sized for such capacities in accordance with Underwriter Laboratory standards. Provide double size
neutral bus bars and lugs for all 120/208 volt panelboards where fed from “K” rated transformers.
Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Phase bussing shall be full height
without reduction.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 31
D. A ground bus shall be provided for each panel. Each ground bus shall be of the same material as the phase and neutral buses.
E. Cabinets shall be fabricated from industry standard gauge galvanized sheet steel with corners lapped and riveted, or fastened by approved methods.
F. The inside and outside of the trims shall be factory painted with one (1) rust proofing primer coat and one (1) finish coat. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will bond.
All trims shall be hinged.
G. Cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the required mounting. Trims shall be fastened to
cabinets and shall be of a type that is self-supporting on cabinets. Trims for flush panels shall overlap cabinets by at least 3/4" all around. Where two section panels are required, cabinets
shall be of equal height including those cases where there is one main for both sections.
H. Cabinets and trims for lighting and appliance panels shall accommodate and conform to the
following limited dimensions:
1. Minimum wiring gutter width on each side: 5-3/4”.
2. Maximum overall width: 24”. 3. Maximum overall depth: 6”.
I. Where wires or cables are used within panelboards to make up internal connections (factory
installed or otherwise) such wire or cable shall have copper conductors only.
J. Any cabinet for a power or distribution panel shall (regardless of the actual devices required to be
in it) have a width, depth and bussing adequate for a 3-pole branch device equal in rating to the panel mains. In no case shall the cabinet be wider than 42” or deeper than 18”.
K. Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims.
L. Doors in panelboard trims shall conform to the following:
1. In making switching device handles accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.
2. Doors shall have flush type paracentric cylinder locks and catches. Two (2) keys shall be supplied for each lock and each key shall open all panelboards. Locks and keys shall
conform to a “standard keying policy” as directed.
M. Where “spaces only” for overcurrent protection and switching devices are called for in a panel, its main bus, and backpan, as well as its cabinet and trim, shall be extended to accommodate these
spaces and shall include all necessary hardware including bus connectors to add future devices.
N. Panelboards shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. UL Standards: a. Panelboards – UL67.
b. Cabinet & Boxes – UL50.
2. NEMA Standard – PB1.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 32
O. Panelboards shall be labeled with UL short-circuit rating adequate for the available short-circuit and based on the lowest panel mounted circuit breaker available UL listed interrupting current
rating, but in no case less than 65 ka for 480 volt and 22 ka for 240 volt panelboards.
P. Provide “lock on” clips for the toggle handles of certain branches serving the Fire Alarm System,
security, etc.
Q. Panelboards shall be manufactured by Eaton, Siemens, General Electric, or Square D.
2.15 LOAD CENTERS
A. Provide “load center” type panels for dwelling unit branch circuit wiring. Load center panels shall
consist of factory completed dead front assemblies of back pans, main buses, overcurrent switching units, sheet metal cabinets and flush style trims with door. They shall be designed so
that switching and overcurrent devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, and so that circuits may be charged without machine
drilling or tapping.
B. Bus bars for their mains shall be of aluminum having current capacities as indicated and sized for
such capacities in accordance with Underwriter Laboratory standards. Unless otherwise noted, full size neutral bars shall be included. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction and
shall have this for single pole branches arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.
C. A ground bus with terminal space for each branch circuit shall be provided for each load center. Each ground bus shall be of the same material as the phase and neutral buses.
D. Load centers shall be provided with surface or flush trims as indicated. Flush trims shall overlap
cabinets by at least 1/2" on all sides.
E. Cabinets and trims for load centers shall accommodate and conform to the following limiting
dimensions:
1. Maximum overall width – 14-1/2”.
2. Maximum overall depth – 3-3/4”.
F. Hinged locking doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims.
G. Branch circuit breakers load centers shall be plug-on type.
H. Load centers shall be manufactured by Siemens, Eaton, General Electric, or Square D.
2.16 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded case type circuit breakers shall consist of manually operated quick-make quick-break mechanically trip free operating mechanisms for simultaneous operation of all poles, with
contacts, arc interrupters and trip elements for each pole, all enclosed in molded phenolic plastic cases.
1. Their tripping units shall be of the “thermal magnetic” type having bimetallic elements for time delay overload protection and magnetic elements for short-circuit protection.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 33
2. They shall be manually operable by means of toggle type operating handles having “tripped” position midway between the “on-off” position.
3. They shall each be contained in an individual case enclosing only the number of poles
required for the particular breaker.
4. All panels and individually mounted circuit breakers shall have short circuit ratings exceeding the available short-circuit of the values indicated in the “Power System Studies” in this section
by a factor of 1.2 with a minimum as follows: a. 240V class panels/breakers: 10 kAIC where shown fed by a 150 kVA or less transformer
1) 10 kAIC where shown 2) 22 kAIC where shown fed by a 300 kVA or less transformer.
b. 480V Class Panels/Breakers shall be 65 kAIC.
5. They shall be of the “bolted-in” type. a. Where necessary, to accommodate other requirements, their frame sizes shall be
increased to conform to such requirements, frame sizes being indicated only as a reference to the minimum acceptable interrupting ratings noted above.
b. Where single pole in trip sizes 20 amps or less, they shall be rated for switching duty. c. They shall be equipped with 5 milliamp sensitivity ground fault interrupting features where
so indicated. d. All circuit breakers connected to lighting branch circuits shall be high magnetic type
breakers.
6. They shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton. 2.17 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Cartridge fuses shall be as follows:
1. Provide a complete set of fuses for each item of fusible type equipment. Fusible equipment furnished by other contractors will be complete with fuses.
2. Secondary system fuses, rated at 600 volts or less, shall be UL listed and constructed in conformance with the applicable standards set forth by NEMA and ANSI. All fuses of a particular class shall be of same manufacturer.
3. Regardless of actual fault current, they shall, at full recovery voltage, be capable of safely interrupting fault currents of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or 340,000 amperes RMS
asymmetrical, deliverable at the line side of the fuse. 4. Circuits 0-600 amperes shall be protected by the equal of Bussman “Low Peak” current
limiting fuses, LPN-RK (250 volts), LPS-RK (600 volts), UL class RK-1.
5. Fuses shall be suitable for application to fuse gaps which reject other types of fusing.
6. Supply 10% spare fuses of each size and type 60 amps and less. Supply three (3) spare fuses for each size and type over 60 amps.
B. Cartridge fuses shall be manufactured by Bussman, Gould or EFCO.
2.18 MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Motor Controls – Manual and Magnetic:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 34
1. Individually-mounted magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type with thermal overload on each phase, single-speed, two-speed, or reduced voltage start as indicated. Check exact
type of two-speed or part-winding motors to be furnished by other contractors, and provide proper starter.
2. Starters shall be of the replaceable contact double break type, of size and type required for
particular motor horsepower and voltage. Minimum size starter to be size 1. a. Starters shall have OL reset button, green pilot light to indicate “ON”, and “HAND-OFF-
AUTO” switch in cover. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test type. b. Starters to have 120 volt control transformers with fused output being provided for those
units operating on 277/480 volt system. c. Provide proper rating of thermal overloads. Replace any overloads found to be of an
incorrect rating. Provide a spare set of three (3) thermal overloads for each starter. d. Provide four (4) sets of auxiliary contacts of convertible type N.O. to N.C. for each starter.
e. Motor starters installed in dry locations shall have NEMA I enclosures. Those in wet locations shall have NEMA IV enclosures.
f. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Siemens
2) Eaton 3) Square D
4) General Electric
3. Manual motor starters shall have pilot lights and shall be furnished with thermal overloads on each phase.
B. Motors: Each motor shall have disconnect switch and starter provided under this section. Starters which are a part of “factory assembled” control panel will be provided under section supplying equipment to be controlled but connected under this section.
C. Disconnect Switches:
1. Disconnect (safety) switches shall conform to industrial standards of NEMA, be UL listed and
shall be heavy-duty type, quick-make, quick-break type with interlocking cover mechanism
and provisions for padlocking switch handle in “OFF” position. Three (3) pole toggle switches are not acceptable as substitute for disconnect switches.
2. Disconnect switches shall be of fused or un-fused type as indicated with number of disconnecting poles indicated. The grounded conductor shall not be switched. Switches shall be for use with current limiting fuses with rejection type fuse clips and those shall be
horsepower rated. 3. Enclosures shall be of proper NEMA type for the intended location and shall be phosphate
coated or equivalent code gauge galvanized sheet steel with gray baked enamel finish.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Eaton b. Siemens c. Square D
d. General Electric
D. Combination Starter: Provide combination starters where indicated on the plans.
E. Motor Control Circuitry:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 35
1. Except as noted below, select materials exactly as specified for feeders. Utilize No. 12 A.W.G. THWN conductors throughout minimum.
2. Motor control circuit wires may be run in the same conduit as the wires of motor power
circuits; however, exclude motor control wires from enclosures (other than motor starter enclosures) which contain power circuit overcurrent protection and switching devices; also
from pull boxes and junction boxes containing the wires of main and sub main feeders. Utilize auxiliary pull boxes to separate motor control wires from motor power circuit wires
before the power circuit wires enter the items from which motor control wires are excluded.
3. Prior to installing any motor control circuitry for a particular motor, notify the Architect of any deviations between the control circuitry requirements of the trade supplying the motor and the
indicated electric work.
2.19 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diesel generator set of one of the following:
a. Caterpillar Tractor Co. b. Onan Corp., Division of McGraw Edison Co.
c. Cummins
B. Scope:
1. Furnish and install one (1) standby electric generating system rated for continuous standby
service as shown on the Drawings. Voltage shall be 120-208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire at 60 hertz. The system shall be a package of new and current equipment consisting of:
a. A four (4) cycle diesel engine driven electric plant to provide emergency electric power. b. Start-stop control system.
c. Automatic and manual load transfer controls to provide automatic starting and stopping of the unit and switching of the loads.
d. Mounted accessories as specified. e. Remote annunciator panel. f. Generator housekeeping concrete pad. g. Exhaust system and insulation.
h. Sub-base fuel storage system and piping.
C. Source of Supply: This system shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer and by the
alternator so there is one source of supply and responsibility. The performance of the electric plant shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory as to the plant’s full power rating, stability and voltage and frequency regulation. Submit certificate of compliance with Shop
Drawings. Furnish detailed summary of testing of unit of this rating in accordance with NFPA-110T.
D. Parts and Service: The supplier of this equipment shall maintain a full-time “in-house” parts and
service organization within 100 miles of the job site. The manufacturer of this set shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in building similar units in this part of this country. This supplier shall have his name, address, and telephone number clearly and visibly located on all
equipment. Service shall be available on a 24-hour a day, 7-day a week basis. The supplier
shall be authorized by the engine generator manufacturer to provide service and warranty for all generator components.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 36
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Enclosed with each submittal set shall be the following information:
a. Unit Drawings of all major components showing exact dimension data. b. Catalog information on the engine, generator, battery charger, vibration isolators, exhaust
silencer, flexible exhaust connector, and automatic transfer switch. c. A complete bill of material indicating exactly what is to be provided.
d. A list of at least two (2) similar installations using the same major components as specified herein.
e. Estimated time, in calendar days, for delivery after approval and release is received. f. Furnish engine heat rejection data to jacket water, exhaust, and ambient and total DB
measurement of engine, generator, and radiator measured at 23 feet. Mechanical noise shall not exceed 88 DBA at 23 feet and exhaust noise shall not exceed 94 DBA at 23 feet
before the exhaust silencer. Exhaust flow shall not exceed 2500 CFM.
2. Any notation marked on submission of the equipment is outlined in this section by Reviewing Authority must be responded to in writing, by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Complete engineering submittal, catalog cuts, wiring diagrams, interface Drawings, unit
Drawings, A.C. & D.C. schematics, termination chamber Drawings, terminal strip Drawings, foundation plan, annunciator panel layout and wiring, etc. must accommodate all Shop
Drawings.
F. Intent: This Specification is for furnishing and installing one (1) diesel fueled engine driven generating set rated for continuous standby service 60 kW rating. The kW rating shall be
continuously available during any power outage whether the duration be minutes, hours, or days. The unit shall be complete with all accessories, controls, attachments, fuel and exhaust systems. Rating shall be with engine driven radiator fan attached regardless of cooling system specified herein.
G. General Operation:
1. The operation of this unit shall be automatic such that upon the closing of a remote starting
contact, the engine shall start and attain rated voltage and frequency within ten (10) seconds. 2. All necessary accessories shall be provided to assure starting within the time described above under the ambient conditions described herein.
H. Engine:
1. The diesel engine shall be water-cooled, 4 cycle industrial type with removable cylinder
liners, 1800 rpm type. Other than 1800 rpm type engines or engines which utilize reduction from a higher rpm down to 1800 rpm shall not be approved.
2. Lubrication shall be a full pressure system, using an engine-driven gear-type lube oil pump with replaceable element full flow lube oil filter. Lube oil cooler shall be provided.
3. The engine-mounted fuel system shall include all equipment normally supplied and recommended by the generator set manufactured for emergency generator service. The engine-mounted fuel system equipment shall include the following:
a. Fuel injection system.
b. Fuel transfer pump. c. Duplex fuel filters (replaceable type).
d. Hand priming pump.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 37
e. Flexible fuel connections.
4. In addition to the engine-mounted fuel system, there shall be a sub-base fuel tank system. a. The fuel tank system shall be a 140 gallon UL listed tank, pressure tested, double walled,
trim line construction, sub-base fuel tank. All piping and venting shall be completed by the housing manufacturer prior to shipment. Tank system shall comply with all State and
Local Codes. Provide one (1) full tank of fuel after testing at the completion of the project for each generator.
5. Governor: The engine shall be equipped with a hydraulic/electronic isochronous governor
capable of maintaining the engine speed from no load to full load within plus or minus .25% of the synchronous speed.
a. Starting System: The engine shall have a 24 VDC starting system with starting motor and starter solenoid switch.
b. Batteries: One (1) set of starting batteries with cables and steel battery rack and heater
shall be included for each starter. Batteries shall be sized for operation at -20° F.
1) Batteries shall be heavy-duty lead acid type, rated not less than 210 ampere hours each.
2) A float type battery charger shall maintain the starting batteries at full charge. The charger shall be suitable for wall-mounting and shall have a cranking disconnect
relay or current limiting feature. The charger shall be Charles AE2420, Lamarche A46 or equal. The charger shall have high and low voltage alarm relays, and have
20 amp outlet. 3) There shall be a belt-driven battery charging alternator with regulator and charge rate
ammeter for charging the batteries while the engine is running.
6. Heaters: a. Engine jacket water heaters and thermostats shall be provided to maintain the engine
jacket water at a temperature high enough to assure starting the engine and attaining rated voltage and frequency within 10 seconds. The jacket heaters shall be of the
capacity recommended by the engine generator manufacturer to meet above conditions. Input voltage to the heaters shall be 208 volts, 1 phase, 60 cycles.
b. Battery heater shall be thermostatically controlled and shall keep battery at optimum temperature for both operation and battery life.
7. Engine Cooling System:
a. Engine shall be provided with 130° F ambient unit mounted radiator. Radiator shall have sufficient capacity to dissipate not less than total British thermal units per hour rejected at
100% full-load under the condition specified. Filler cap shall be designed for pressure relief.
b. Cooling system shall be provided with initial charge of permanent type anti-freeze solution containing rust inhibitor. c. Water-cooled manifold shall be furnished.
I. Safety Shutdowns:
1. The engine shall be equipped with safety shutdown contacts for:
a. Low lube oil pressure, pre-warn and shutdown. b. High jacket water temperature, pre-warn and shutdown. c. Over speed. d. Over crank.
e. Low water level, pre-warn. f. Low water temperature, pre-warn.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 38
J. Generator Control Panel:
1. The following electrical instruments and devices shall be included in the generator control
panel: a. Digital metering with:
1) Voltmeter. 2) Ammeter.
3) kVAR meter. 4) Power factor meter.
5) kW meter. 6) RWH meter.
b. Line circuit breakers. c. Auto start circuitry.
d. NFPA 99 alarm and shutdown system. e. Emergency stop pushbutton.
f. Provide programmable protective relay functions for under and over voltage and frequency, reverse power, overcurrent (phase and total), kW, and three (3) spare LED’s.
2. The following engine instruments shall be included in the generator control panel:
a. Lube oil pressure. b. Water temperature.
c. D.C. voltmeter. d. Tachometer.
3. Any other instruments and devices considered necessary by the Manufacturer shall be
included. K. Exhaust System:
1. An exhaust silencer suitable for critical type silencing (complete with condensate drains) shall
be supplied of the size recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Silencer shall be equal to Maxim Model M51. An octave band center frequency, in hertz, data sheet shall
accompany all muffler Shop Drawings. Silencer shall include side inlet and companion
flanges, nuts, boxes, and gaskets. 2. A section of seamless, flexible stainless steel exhaust piping of the size and type
recommended by the generator set manufacturer. L. Mounting:
1. The engine and generator shall be close-coupled and mounted on a structural steel base designed to maintain proper alignment of the unit.
2. The unit shall be certified by the manufacturer to be free from any critical torsion vibrations within a range of plus or minus 10% of synchronous speed.
3. Vibration isolators of spring type shall be supplied with the unit. The number of isolators shall be as recommended by the generator set manufacturer, and shall be mounted within the enclosure.
4. Vibration isolators shall be Ace Mountings or equal.
M. Generator:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 39
1. Rating as shown on the Drawings and with the following characteristics: a. Type-revolving field, 4 pole, single-bearing, drip proof, 93% efficiency at nameplate
rating. b. Exciter: Brushless, direct-connected, fully tropicalized, SCR rectifiers, static voltage
regulator, rheostat, excellent motor starting capability. c. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 1/2% of any preset valve over the 3 phase load range.
Instantaneous voltage dip or rise when measured with an oscilloscope, will not exceed 20% upon full load application, and will return to preset valve within 0.5 seconds. Voltage
regulator shall be 3 phase sensing, provide volts/hertz regulation, provide over-voltage and under-voltage protection, and shall include a solid state circuit to remove excitation
when generator is overloaded for more than 10 seconds. d. Waveform: Deviation factor of output voltage will not exceed 5% and the valve of any
individual harmonic will not exceed 2% of the fundamental when operating with an unbalanced load.
e. Temperature Rise: Temperature rise of any component will not exceed the rise permitted by NEMA standards.
f. Rotor: One-piece lamination welded and secured to shaft by a key and press fit. Amortisseur windings installed and connected between poles as an acid to parallel
operation and improve wave form during unbalanced loads. Field coil machine wound on insulated pole body and securely braced. Rotor statically and dynamically balanced.
g. Stator: One-piece lamination welded together. Stator coils from wound and place in insulated slots. Starter pressed and welded in a rigid steel frame.
h. Bearing: Double-sealed ball bearing, lubricated for life. i. Insulation: NEMA Class F insulation.
j. Varnish: Three (3) coats modified polyester type, will not support fungus growth. k. Cooling: Cast aluminum fan mounted on generator shaft. l. Radio Suppression: Radiated or conducted radio interference will not affect normal commercial apparatus.
N. Remote Annunciator Panel:
1. The engine generator shall be supplied with a flush mount remote annunciator panel with
faceplate mounted to annunciation terminal strip to give remote indication of the following: a. Generator power. b. Battery charger malfunction (red).
c. Annunciator “OFF” (red). d. High jacket water temperature “Pre-warn” (amber). e. Low water temperature “Pre-warn” (amber).
f. Low oil pressure “Pre-warn” (amber); “Shutdown” (red). g. Low fuel/rupture. h. Over speed (red).
i. Over crank (red).
j. Lamp test switch.
O. Outdoor Generator-Set Enclosure:
1. Description: Sound Attenuated Aluminum housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Instruments, control, and
battery system shall be mounted within enclosure.
2. Construction:
a. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. Restraint/Holdback hardware to prevent door to keep open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips over all doors.
b. Exhaust System: Muffler location within enclosure.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 40
c. Hardware: All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. d. Mounting Base: Suitable for mounting on sub-base fuel tank or housekeeping pad.
e. A weather protective enclosure shall be provided which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load with a static pressure drop equal to or less than 0.5 inches of
water.
3. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. Louvers: Fixed-
engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge.
4. Sound Performance: Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 70 dBA measured at any location 50 feet from the engine
generator in a free field environment.
5. Site Provisions – Lifting: Complete assembly of engine generator, enclosure, and sub-base fuel tank shall be designed to be lifted into place as a single unit, using spreader bars.
P. Submit detailed generator pad requirements with Shop Drawings. Refer to plans for minimum
requirements.
Q. Quality Assurance:
1. The supplier of the equipment shall provide with no additional charge and information or supervision required for the proper installation of the equipment and training of operating
personnel.
2. Tests: a. Preliminary start-up and operating tests of the generator system with the building load shall be conducted for one (1) hour duration to assure that the system is complete and in proper working order, that all adjustments have been made, and that all deficiencies have
been corrected. b. Engine alarm and shutdown features shall be function tested, including low oil pressure,
high water temperature, over speed and low water level.
c. Final tests to be witnessed by the A/E shall be scheduled only after preliminary tests have been successfully completed. d. Upon completion of the preliminary test of the unit, a test run of three (3) hours duration
shall be conducted by the equipment manufacturer’s factory-trained servicemen. At this time, adjustments shall be made for correct operation of the equipment and the following readings taken at 15 minute intervals:
1) Ambient temperature. 2) Engine jacket water temperature. 3) Generator temperature.
4) Oil pressure.
5) Battery charger rate. 6) AC volts (all legs).
7) AC amps (all legs). 8) Engine air exhaust temperature. 9) Decibel readings with sound meter at 50 feet in all directions.
e. This test shall be made with the door to the enclosure or room in which the generator is
locked maintained in the closed position. The test shall be made of a load bank sized at the full kilowatt rating of the generator. This load bank shall be furnished by the supplier
of the engine generator unit and shall be connected to the generator terminals as one complete and full unit of kilowatt load. This load bank shall be applied to the generator
terminals only after the generator has reached its full voltage output.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 41
R. Provide complete maintenance and service contract for a period of 36 months from date of
substantial completion. Price of maintenance and service contract shall be included in the bid. Maintenance and service contract shall include the following:
1. Regular lubrication, adjustment, cleaning, and check-up. 2. Repair/replace worn parts at no cost to Owner.
S. Provide exhaustible materials and supplies not covered by warranty under maintenance contract.
T. Include provision for 24 hour a day, 7 days a week service with service response within 2 hours after first notification and need for service.
U. In addition to the testing procedures outlined in paragraph “S” above, refer to Section 3.02 “Test Requirements and Instructions” for general requirements and procedures.
V. The engine manufacturer shall provide the necessary lube oil for the crankcase and antifreeze for
the cooling system to provide protection to -20° F.
2.20 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. General:
1. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Summary: This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the
following: a. Automatic transfer switches.
b. Remote annunciation systems. c. Remote annunciation and control systems.
3. Submittals:
a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1) Technical data on all major components of all transfer switches and other products described in this section. Data is required for the transfer switch mechanism, control
system, cabinet, and protective devices specifically listed for use with each transfer switch. Include steady state and fault current ratings, weights, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2) Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation
switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
b. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and
material lists for each switch specified. 1) Dimensioned outline drawings of assembly, including elevations, sections, and
details including minimal clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices and material lists for each switch specified.
2) Internal electrical wiring and control drawings. 3) Interconnection wiring diagrams, showing recommended conduit runs and point-to-
point terminal connections to generator set. 4) Installation and mounting instructions, including information for proper installation of
equipment to meet seismic requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 42
c. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division
26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1) Seismic certification, as required for site conditions. Seismic certifications shall be
third-party certified, and based on testing. Certification based on calculations does not meet this requirement.
a) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational both during and after the seismic event." 2) Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3) Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements. d. Manufacturer and Supplier Qualification Data:
1) The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001.
2) The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 10 years. When requested, an acceptable list of installations with
similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. e. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1) Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2) List of all factory settings of relays, timers and protective devices; provide setting and calibration instructions where applicable. f. Warranty documents demonstrating compliance with the project’s contract requirements.
4. Quality Assurance:
a. Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract.
b. Manufacturer Qualifications: The equipment supplier shall maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, maintenance and emergency repairs to equipment, including transfer switch generator sets and remote monitoring equipment (if applicable)
at the site within a response period of less than (eight hours or appropriate time period designated for Project) from time of notification. 1) The transfer switch shall be serviced by technicians employed by, and specially
trained and certified by, the generator set supplier and the supplier shall have a service organization that is factory-certified in both generator set and transfer switch service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the
local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be
on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. 2) Submit names, experience level, training certifications, and locations for technicians
that will be responsible for servicing equipment at this site. 3) The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each transfer switch provided for at least 20 years. c. Source Limitations: All transfer switches are to be obtained through one source from a
single manufacturer. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant transfer switches to provide a single source of responsibility for products provided.
d. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked as suitable for use in emergency, legally required or optional standby use as appropriate for the connected load.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 43
e. The automatic transfer switch installation and application shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards:
1) Transfer switches and enclosures shall be UL 1008 listed and labeled as suitable for use in emergency, legally required, and optional standby applications.
2) CSA 282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings, and CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment
3) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance with Articles 700, 701 and 702.
4) Comply with NEMA ICS 10-1993 AC Automatic Transfer Switches 5) IBC 2006 – The transfer switch(es) shall be prototype-tested and third-party certified
to comply with the requirements of IBC group III or IV, Category D/F. The equipment shall be shipped with the installation instructions necessary to attain installation
compliance 6) IEEE 446 – Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for
Commercial and Industrial Applications 7) EN55011, Class B Radiated Emissions and Class B Conducted Emissions
8) IEC 1000-4-5 (EN 61000-4-5); AC Surge Immunity 9) IEC 1000-4-4 (EN 61000-4-4) Fast Transients Immunity
10) IEC 1000-4-2 (EN 61000-4-2) Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 11) IEC 1000-4-3 (EN 61000-4-3) Radiated Field Immunity
12) IEC 1000-4-6 Conducted Field Immunity 13) IEC 1000-4-11 Voltage Dip Immunity
14) IEEE 62.41, AC Voltage Surge Immunity 15) IEEE 62.45, AC Voltage Surge Testing
f. Comply with NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems for Healthcare Facilities g. Comply with NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The transfer switch shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems, regardless of the actual circuit level. h. The manufacturer shall warrant the material and workmanship of the transfer switch
equipment for a minimum of one (1) year from registered commissioning and start-up, or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment.
i. The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time,
service hours, repair parts cost, and etc. during the minimum noted warranty period described above.
5. Project Conditions: Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:
a. Notify (Architect/Construction Manager/Owner) no fewer than (insert appropriate number) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. b. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without (Architect/Construction
Manager/Owner’s) written permission.
c. Do not energize any new service or distribution equipment without notification and permission of the (Architect/Construction Manager/Owner).
6. Coordination: a. Size and location of concrete bases and anchor bolt inserts shall be coordinated. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork must meet the requirements specified in Division
03. See section 3.1 for additional information on installation b. If Project calls for bypass switch(es) mounted on a concrete base, the base must be
designed to accommodate the requirements of the drawout mechanism (extension rails and/or wheeled carriage) of the bypass switch.
B. Products:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 44
1. Manufacturers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: 1) Cummins Power Generation
2) Russelectric 3) ASCO
b. Equipment specifications for this Project are based on automatic transfer switches manufactured by Cummins Power Generation. Switches manufactured by Russelectric
or ASCO that meet the requirement of this specification are acceptable, if approved not less than two weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must include a line-by-line
compliance statement based on this specification. c. Transfer switches utilizing molded case circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of
this specification and will not be accepted.
2. General Transfer-Switch Product Requirements: a. Provide transfer switches in the number and ratings that are shown on the drawings.
Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer.
b. Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: UL 1008 WCR ratings must be specifically listed as meeting the requirements for use with protective devices at installation locations,
under specified fault conditions. Withstand and closing ratings shall be based on use of the same set of contacts for the withstand test and the closing test.
c. Solid-State Controls: All settings should be accurate to +/- 2% or better over an operating temperature range of - 40 to + 60 degrees C (- 40 to + 140 degrees F).
d. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. e. Electrical Operation: Accomplished by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or
electric motor operator mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions (except that mechanical interlock is not required for closed transition switches).
f. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated
current between active power sources. 1) Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers, or insulated case circuit breaker components are not acceptable.
2) Transfer switches shall be double-throw, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in the Source 1 and Source 2 positions. 3) Main switch contacts shall be high pressure silver alloy. Contact assemblies shall
have arc chutes for positive arc extinguishing. Arc chutes shall have insulating covers to prevent inter-phase flashover. 4) Contacts shall be operated by a high-speed electrical mechanism that causes
contacts to open or close within three electrical cycles from signal.
5) The transfer switch operation shall include the ability to switch to an open position (both sources disconnected) for the purpose of load shedding from the generator set.
6) The power transfer mechanism shall include provisions for manual operation under load with the enclosure door closed. Manual operation may be electromechanical or mechanical, but must be coordinated with control function. 7) Transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant transparent covers to allow
viewing of switch contact operation but prevent direct contact with components that could be operating at line voltage levels.
8) The transfer switch shall include the mechanical and control provisions necessary to allow the device to be field-configured for operating speed. Transfer switch operation
with motor loads shall be as is recommended in NEMA MG1. a) Phase angle monitoring/timing equipment is not an acceptable substitute for this
functionality.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 45
9) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “4-pole” shall be provided with a switched neutral pole switched which is switched simultaneously with phase poles.
10) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “3-pole” shall have a full current-rated neutral bar with lugs.
11) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “isolation-bypass” switches shall meet the requirements of section 2.4 of this specification.
12) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “non-automatic” switches shall meet the requirements of section 2.5 of this specification.
13) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “closed transition” switches shall meet the requirements of section 2.6 of this specification.
14) Transfer switches designated on the drawings as “service entrance” switches shall meet the requirements of section 2.7 of this specification.
g. Control: Transfer switch control shall be capable of communicating with the genset control, other switches and remote programming devices over a high-speed network
interface. h. Factory wiring: Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of pre-manufactured
harnesses that are permanently marked for source and destination. Harnesses shall be connected to the control system by means of locking disconnect plug(s), to allow the
control system to be easily disconnected and serviced without disconnecting power from the transfer switch mechanism
i. Terminals: Terminals shall be pressure type and appropriate for all field wiring. Terminal arrangement and cabinet space must be such that feeder conductors can enter from the
top, side or bottom of the switch, at the installer’s discretion. Control wiring shall be equipped with suitable lugs, for connection to terminal strips.
j. Enclosures: All enclosures shall be third-party certified for compliance to NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated: 1) The enclosure shall provide wire bend space in compliance to the latest version of NFPA70, regardless of the direction from which the conduit enters the enclosure.
2) Exterior cabinet doors shall provide complete protection for the system’s internal components. Doors must have permanently mounted key-type latches. Bolted covers
or doors are not acceptable.
3) Transfer switches shall be provided in enclosures that are third party certified for their intended environment per NEMA requirements. a) Transfer switches mounted in a controlled indoor environment shall be provided
in NEMA Type 1 enclosures (IEC type IP30). b) Transfer switches installed indoors shall be NEMA Type 12 (IEC type IP61) if the Project environment requires dust-proof and/or drip-proof equipment.
c) Transfer switches located outdoors shall be supplied in NEMA Type 3R (IEC IP34) when dust-proof and/or rain-proof enclosures are required. d) Transfer switches that are installed outdoors or in any other uncontrolled
environment shall be supplied with NEMA Type 4 or 4X (stainless steel)
enclosures (IEC IP65).
3. Automatic Transfer Switches: a. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. b. Indicated current ratings: 1) Refer to the Project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer
switch equipment, withstand and closing ratings, number of poles, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosure type, and accessories.
2) Main contacts shall be rated for 600 VAC minimum. 3) Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100% of rated current continuously in the
enclosure supplied, in ambient temperatures of -40 to +60 degrees C (-40 to +140 degrees F), relative humidity up to 95% (non condensing), and altitudes up to 10,000
feet (3000 meters).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 46
c. Manual Switch Operation: The power transfer mechanism shall include provisions for manual operation under no load, de energized conditions. Manual operation may be
electromechanical or mechanical, but must be coordinated with control function. d. Relay Signal: Control shall include provisions for addition of a pre-transfer relay signal,
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds, to be provided if necessary for elevator operation, based on equipment provided for the project.
e. Control: Transfer switch control shall be provided with necessary equipment and software to communicate with the genset control, other transfer switches, remote annunciation
equipment, and other devices over a high speed control network. f. Neutral Switching: Transfer switches designated on the drawings as 4-pole shall be
provided with a switched neutral pole. The neutral pole shall be of the same construction and have the same ratings as the phase poles. All poles shall be switched
simultaneously using a common crossbar. Substitute equipment using overlapping neutral contacts is not acceptable.
g. Transfer switches that are designated on the drawings as 3-pole shall be provided with a neutral bus and lugs. The neutral bus shall be sized to carry 100% of the current
designated on the switch rating. h. The transfer switch physically located closest to the generator and not more than 50 ft
(15 meters) away, except those served by generator paralleling equipment, shall be provided with a battery charger suitable for the requirements of the application and in
compliance with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. If no transfer switch is located within this distance, a battery charger shall be installed on the generator set.
i. Automatic Transfer Switch Control Features: 1) The transfer switch control system shall be configurable in the field for any operating
voltage level up to 600 VAC. Voltage sensing shall be monitored based on the normal voltage at the site. Systems that utilize voltage monitoring based on standard voltage conditions that are not field configurable are not acceptable. 2) All transfer switch sensing shall be configurable from an operator panel or from a
Windows XP or later PC-based service tool. Designs utilizing DIP switches or other electromechanical devices are not acceptable.
3) The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a
network signal from an external device for load shedding purposes. On receipt of this signal, the transfer switch shall switch to a neutral position when connected to Source 2. If Source 1 is available when the load-shed signal is received, the transfer switch
shall connect to Source 1. 4) The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a network signal from an external device to prevent transfer to the generator service.
5) The transfer switch shall provide a relay contact signal prior to transfer or re-transfer. The time period before and after transfer shall be adjustable in a range of 0 to 50 seconds.
6) The control system shall be designed and prototype tested for operation in ambient
temperatures from - 40 degrees C to + 60 degrees C (- 40 to +140 degrees F). It shall be designed and tested to comply with the requirements of the noted voltage
and RFI/EMI standards. 7) The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high isolation transformers for AC inputs and relays on all outputs, to provide optimum protection from line voltage surges, RFI and EMI.
8) The transfer switch network monitoring equipment, when supplied, shall be provided with a battery-based auxiliary power supply to allow monitoring of the transfer switch
when both AC power sources are non-operational. The battery power supply shall be monitored for proper condition, and the transfer switch shall include an alarm
condition to indicate low battery condition. j. Transfer Switch Control Panel: The transfer switch shall have a microprocessor-based
control with a sealed membrane panel incorporating pushbuttons for operator-controlled
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 47
functions, and LED lamps for system status indicators. The panel shall also include an alphanumeric display for detailed system information. Panel display and indicating lamps
shall include permanent labels. 1) The indicator panel LEDs shall display:
a) Which source the load is connected to (Source 1 or Source 2). b) Which source or sources are available?
c) When switch is not set for automatic operation, because the control is disabled or the bypass switch is in use.
d) When the switch is in test/exercise mode. 2) The indicator shall have pushbuttons that allow the operator to activate the following
functions: a) Activate pre-programmed test sequence.
b) Override programmed delays, and immediately go to the next operation. c) Reset the control by clearing any faults.
d) Test all of the LEDs by lighting them simultaneously. 3) The alphanumeric digital display shall be vacuum fluorescent-type, clearly visible in
both bright sunlight and no-light conditions over an angle of 120 degrees, and shall display the following:
a) AC voltage for all phases, normal and emergency. b) Source status: connected or not connected.
c) Load data, including voltage, AC current, frequency, KW, KVA, and power factor. 4) The display panel shall be password-protected, and allow the operator to view and
make adjustments: a) Set nominal voltage and frequency for the transfer switch.
b) Adjust voltage and frequency sensor operation set points. c) Set up time clock functions. d) Set up load sequence functions. e) Enable or disable control functions including program transition.
f) View real-time clock data, operation log (hours connected, times transferred, failures) and service history.
k. Control Functions: Functions managed by the control shall include:
1) Software adjustable time delays: a) Engine start (prevents nuisance genset starts in the event of momentary power fluctuation): 0 to 120 seconds (default 3 sec).
b) Transfer normal to emergency (allows genset to stabilize before load is transferred): 0 to 120 seconds (default 3 sec). c) Re-transfer emergency to normal (allows utility to stabilize before load is
transferred from genset): 0 to 30 minutes (default 3 sec). d) Engine cooldown: 0 to 30 minutes (default 10 min). e) Programmed transition: 0 to 60 seconds (default 3 sec).
2) Undervoltage sensing: three-phase normal, three-phase emergency source.
a) Pickup: 85 to 98% of nominal voltage (default 90%). b) Dropout: 75 to 98% of nominal voltage (default 90%).
c) Dropout time delay: 0.1 to 1.0 seconds (default 0.5 sec). d) Accurate to within +/- 1% of nominal voltage. 3) Over-voltage sensing: three-phase normal, three-phase emergency source. a) Pickup: 95 to 99% of dropout setting (default 95%).
b) Dropout: 105 to 135% of nominal voltage (default 110%). c) Dropout time delay: 0.5 to 120 seconds (default 3 sec).
d) Accurate to within +/- 1% of nominal voltage. 4) Over/under frequency sensing:
a) Pickup: +/- 5 to +/-20% of nominal frequency (default 10%). b) Dropout: +/-1% beyond pickup (default 1%).
c) Dropout time delay: 0.1 to 15.0 seconds (default 5 sec).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 48
d) Accurate to within +/- 0.2%. 5) Voltage imbalance sensing:
a) Dropout: 2 to 10% (default 4%). b) Pickup: 90% of dropout.
c) Time delay: 2.0 to 20 seconds (default 5 sec). 6) Phase rotation sensing: Time delay: 100 msec
7) Loss of single-phase detection: Time delay: 100 msec l. Control features shall include:
1) Programmable genset exerciser: A field-programmable control shall periodically start the generator, transfer the load to generator for a preset time, then re-transfer and
shut down the generator after a preset cool-down period. a) Push-button programming control shall have a selection of eight different
schedules for exercising generator, with or without load. 2) In event of a loss of power to the control, all control settings, real-time clock setting
and the engine start-time delay setting will be retained. 3) The system continuously logs information including the number of hours each source
has been connected to the load, the number of times transferred, and the total number of times each source has failed. An event recorder stores information,
including time and date-stamp, for up to 50 events. 4) Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic re-transfer control so automatic
transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light to indicate override status.
m. Control Interface: 1) Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by transfer switch
position, rated 10 amps 250 VAC. 2) The transfer switch shall be provided with a network communication card, and configured to allow network-based communication with the transfer switch and other network system components, including the generator set(s) provided for the Project.
3) Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, 1-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10A at 240 VAC.
n. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and
normally open; rated 10A at 32 VDC minimum. 4. Remote Annunciator System:
a. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following: 1) Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch
controls. 2) Switch position. 3) Failure of communication link.
b. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.
1) Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored. 2) Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and
identity of load it serves. 3) Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 4) Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel. c. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shall
not affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained
operation. d. Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operating function shall not depend on
remote panel for proper operation. The remote annunciation system shall not prevent transfer to the alternate source when the primary power source fails, nor prevent return to
the primary source if the alternate source fails.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 49
C. Execution:
1. Installation: a. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and
according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
b. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. 1) Floor-mounted transfer switches (except drawout switches supported by wheeled
carriages, which must be rolled out at floor level) shall be mounted on concrete bases complying with the following requirements:
a) Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the
maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." c. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
e. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
2. Connections: a. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to
control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to
accommodate required wiring. b. Field control connections shall be made on a common terminal block that is clearly and permanently labeled. c. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU mechanical lugs sized to accept the full
output rating of the switch. Lugs shall be suitable for the number and size of conductors shown on the drawings.
d. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems." e. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3. Source Quality Control: a. Prior to shipping, factory shall test and inspect components, assembled switches, and
associated equipment to ensure proper operation. b. Factory shall check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements.
c. Factory shall perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.
4. Field Quality Control:
a. Manufacturer's Field Service: The supplier of the transfer switch(es) and associated equipment shall inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and report results in writing. b. Manufacturer’s representative shall perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports. c. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, installer shall
test for compliance with requirements. 1) Perform recommended installation tests as recommended in manufacturer’s
installation and service manuals.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 50
2) After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch.
a) Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.
b) Verify time-delay settings. c) Verify that the transfer switch is accurately metering AC voltage and current
(when provided). d) Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations. e) Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.
3) Ground-Fault Tests (if integral to transfer switch): Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.
a) Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. d. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, the contractor shall perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device. 3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action. 5. Demonstration:
a. After generator set installation, the generator and transfer switch supplier shall conduct a complete operation, basic maintenance, and emergency service seminar covering
generator set and transfer switch equipment, for up to 10 people employed by the Owner.
1) The seminar shall include instruction on operation of the transfer equipment, normal testing and exercise, adjustments to the control system, use of the PC based service and maintenance tools provided under this contract, and emergency operation
procedures. 2) The class duration shall be at least 8 hours in length, and include practical operation with the installed equipment.
2.21 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with identifications on the Drawings and the following:
1. Finishes shall be as selected by the Architect or as indicated on the plans.
2. Any additional appurtenances required for installation and operation, where same are not
covered by the identification used on the Drawings, shall be included. 3. Recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with ceiling construction.
4. Exact location of all fixtures shall be confirmed with Architect prior to rough-in.
5. Recessed fixtures throughout shall have their components, wiring and external connections coordinated for use in ceilings utilized as air handling plenums.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 51
6. Fixtures for use outdoors or in areas designated as damp locations, shall be suitably gasketed and UL listed for such applications.
7. All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps shall be for 60 cycles operation.
8. All ballasts or transformers for discharge or fluorescent type lamps shall be high power factor
type.
9. In-line fuses shall be provided for all ballast and transformers.
10. Ballasts for T5 and T8 fluorescent lamps shall be electronic high frequency electronic type (20 KHZ or greater) type “P”, class “A” sound-rated, instant start and parallel wired such that
if one lamp burns out the remaining lamps stay lit. Electronic ballasts shall comply with UL 935, ANSI C82.1, CBM certified and meet FCC standards for EMI/RFI (FCC 47 CFR Part 18
non-consumer) with a total harmonic distribution of less than 20%. Ballasts shall carry a manufacturer’s warranty of five (5) years and be manufactured by Osram Sylvania,
Magnetek, Advance, or approved equal.
11. Remote ballasts shall be standard core and coil type “P”, sound rating “A”.
12. All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps intended for use outdoors shall be of the low temperature type having the lowest temperature rating available in standard manufacture.
13. Ballasts and transformers shall be of the “low energy full light output” type where available.
Each shall not exceed industry minimum rated input wattage by more than 8%. 14. All fixtures shall be UL approved with labels attesting thereto.
15. All lamps shall be included. Except where specifically noted otherwise all fluorescent lamps shall be as follows:
a. Fluorescent lamps of the proper wattage and voltage rating shall be provided in each
fixture as indicated on the fixture schedule. All fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured to appropriate Specifications given in ANSI C78. Unless noted otherwise, fluorescent lamps shall be T8 3500K and have a minimum CRI of 82.
b. Unless otherwise noted, all compact fluorescent lamps shall be 3500K and have a minimum CRI of 82. The Contractor shall verify that the proper lamp type for the specified ballast type is furnished with the compact fluorescent fixture.
1) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, Type 1 and CBM Certified. 2) Where 4-pin electronic ballast compatible compact fluorescent lamps are specified, electronic ballasts shall include circuitry capable of sensing when lamp is
approaching end of life and shut show the lamp circuit. This end of life sensing must
be impervious to low/high line voltage conditions and result in no false tripping or overheating of lamp bases.
16. The Contractor shall obtain all information relative to the exact type of hung ceilings and suspension systems to be installed before ordering any recessed fixtures. This Contractor shall furnish the proper type fixtures applicable to the ceiling framing system. If, other than
the type of fixtures specified are required for installation, due to the type of ceiling construction, this Contractor shall furnish and install the proper type fixtures and mounting
appurtenances required at no extra charge.
17. The Contractor shall coordinate the exact locations of all lighting fixtures with the ceiling pattern during the construction period and before installation of the fixtures. Interferences
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 52
between lighting fixtures, and other equipment, shall be brought to the attention of the General Contractor.
18. Include the aiming and/or adjustments of all lighting fixtures requiring same in accordance
with instructions issued by the Architect in the field.
19. All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be set so that the lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixture components.
20. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from building structure only, not from hung or suspended
ceiling, by means of chains, threaded rods or #14 gauge tie wire.
21. All fixtures shall include seismic clips and shall be supported to comply with seismic regulations.
22. Lamps shall be manufactured by Eaton, Phillips. OSRAM, or Sylvania.
2.22 LIGHTING CONTROL AND DIMMING SYSTEM
A. Scope: The Electrical Subcontractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive, mount, connect and place into operation all equipment. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish
all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and other incidental items necessary for the complete and properly functioning lighting control and dimming system as described herein and shown on
the plans.
B. Related Documents:
1. General Conditions. 2. Electrical Section – General Provisions.
3. Conduit. 4. Wire and Cable.
C. Manufacturer’s Services:
1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval within 30 days after receipt of contract. No fabrication of equipment is to proceed prior to approval of these Drawings. Submittal package shall contain six (6) sets of the following: a. Complete Bill of Materials.
b. Sets of catalog cut sheets for standard equipment. c. Sets of Shop Drawings detailing all Mechanical and Electrical equipment including one
line diagrams, wire counts, internal wiring, and physical dimensions of each item.
Marked up catalog cut sheets are unacceptable. 2. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are installed
and lamped, a qualified factory representative shall completely check the installation prior to energizing the system. At the time of checkout and testing, the Owner’s Representative shall be thoroughly instructed in the proper operation of the system.
a. Within two (2) weeks after the system turn-on is completed, the manufacturer is to provide three (3) sets of as-built Drawings and three (3) sets of operations and maintenance manuals for the dimming system.
D. Quality Assurance:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 53
1. Manufacturer’s products shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) and comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and Local building codes that apply.
2. The equipment specified herein shall be the coordinated product of a single manufacturer.
All dimmer and cabinet fabrication must take place in the manufacturer’s plant. The use of subcontracted component assemblers is not acceptable.
3. The manufacturer shall be one who has been continuously engaged in the manufacture of
architectural lighting controls and dimmers for a minimum of ten (10) years.
4. All equipment shall be 100% tested as a complete system. Manufacturers using sample testing methods are not acceptable.
E. Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted free of defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year from date of turn-on.
F. Manufacturer: Manufacturer capable of meeting the Specifications shall be Lutron.
G. System Testing:
1. All dimmers shall be assembled into the dimmer cabinets and all inter-wiring completed at the
factory prior to shipment. All dimmers shall be simultaneously connected to load banks, all control stations shall be connected to the dimmer cabinet (or cabinets) and testing shall be
done as a complete system under power at the factory prior to shipment. This testing shall include exercising all functions such as take control, transferring, mastering, fading, or other
special control provisions, and this shall be done for each individual control and control station included in this system. Dimming systems shipped as components for job site
assembly or that are not completely tested as a system at the factory prior to shipping shall not be acceptable. Sample testing methods are not acceptable.
2. In addition to the testing procedures listed above refer to Section 3.02 “Test Requirements
and Instructions” for general requirements and procedures.
H. Equipment:
1. The dimmer shall be a modular design and shall occupy the same space in the enclosure as other dimmers and contractor modules, thereby allowing complete interchange ability between system components.
2. The dimmer module shall consist of dual circuit SCRs, torrid inductors and a network
interface PCB mounted on a black anodized aluminum heat sink.
3. Dimmers shall be cooled exclusively by free convection without the aid of fans within an
ambient temperature range of 0° to 40° C.
4. The dimmer module shall interface with the system control computer and other system
components on a four-conductor token passing LAN (local area network) having a minimum baud rate of 38.4K.
5. The module shall be capable of controlling 4 or 6 independent lighting channels with each
channel rated at 2.4 kW. The total load of all channels shall be a maximum of 64 amps. Dimmer shall be capable of controlling incandescent, low voltage, fluorescent, neon, cold
cathode and non-dim loads.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 54
6. All dimming and control electronics shall be solid state for maximum reliability. Each channel shall be controlled by an encapsulated pair of silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) connected in
reverse-parallel configuration with a minimum rating of 40A. The SCRs shall be optically isolated from the control circuit with at least 2500V RMS isolation. The device shall be
mounted in a beryllium oxide substrate to insure maximum heat dissipation. The SCR shall withstand transient voltages of 600 volts and surge currents of 500 amps for one full cycle.
7. Dimmers shall utilize a square law curve to provide smooth continuous dimming throughout
the entire dimming range and shall be repeatable within + 2 volts.
8. An LED shall be provided for each channel on the module to indicate the relative dimmed state of each output.
9. Dimmers shall have an efficiency of 97% or greater at full rated load with intensity set to
100%.
10. If required, the minimum and maximum level for each channel shall be set in the system software and stored in non-volatile memory. Systems which require tools or access to the
dimmer module to set these levels shall not be acceptable.
11. The module shall be equipped with a slide switch which may be used to set all channels to full on by passing the system control computer.
12. All circuit boards shall be made of UL approved, flame retardant material.
13. Air-gap disconnect for each channel shall be available as an option. 14. The dimmer module shall be rated for control of dimmed and non-dimmed incandescent and
low voltage loads. In dim mode, the module shall provide smooth continuous dimming from 0% to 100% regardless of the load. Systems that require load compensation adjustments
shall not be acceptable.
15. A switch shall be provided for each channel to select dim or non-dim operation, thereby preventing a ramping voltage on an output designed as non-dim. Systems that do not have
this type of hardware protection shall not be acceptable. 16. Each dimmer circuit shall contain a powered iron thyroidal inductor to suppress RFI and EMI,
limit objectionable harmonics as well as acoustical noise from the lamp filament. The current
rise time shall not be less than 400 micro-seconds measured at a 90° conductive angle from 10% to 90% of the output wave form with the dimmer operating with maximum load.
17. The inductor shall be completely potted in a thermal conductive epoxy coating to promote
heat dissipation as well as significantly reduce the noise emanating from the dimmer enclosures. Systems which do not incorporate this type of noise suppression shall not be
acceptable.
18. DC output of the dimmer module shall not exceed 0.5% of the input voltage under normal operating conditions.
I. Installation:
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to receive and store the necessary materials and equipment for dimming system. It is the intent of these Specifications and
plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 55
dimming system, even though every item may not be specifically mentioned. The Contractor shall timely deliver to other trades any equipment that must be installed during construction.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for field measurements and coordinating the
physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall install all lighting control dimming equipment in accordance
with manufacturer’s Shop Drawings.
4. All branch load circuits shall be live tested by the Electrical Subcontractor before connecting the loads to the dimmer system load terminals.
J. Manufacturer’s Services: Upon completion of the installation including testing of load circuits, the
Contractor shall notify the dimming system manufacturer that the system is available for formal checkout. This notification is to be given in writing two (2) weeks prior to the time factory trained
personnel are needed on the job site. At the Manufacturer’s discretion, formal turn-on can be waived. No power is to be applied to the dimming system unless specifically authorized by
written instructions for the Manufacturer.
2.23 TELEPHONE/DATA EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install, complete in every respect, a telephone empty raceway system, all interior raceways, pull boxes, plywood backboards, outlets, outlet cover
plate, fittings, and all other appurtenances required, leaving the entire installation ready for installation of telephones, equipment and cables.
B. In general, the telephone system raceways, outlets and terminal backboard locations shall be as shown on the Drawings.
C. All work and the entire installation of same shall be coordinated with the Architectural/ Engineering Coordination Office of the Telephone Company and the Electrical Contractor before
the start of the construction and shall be in full conformance with their requirements and recommendations.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish a nylon pull cord in each raceway to facilitate the pulling of cables in the future.
E. All outlet cover plates shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All telephone outlet cover plates shall be blank cover plates of the same finish and by the manufacturer furnishing all other
devices and switch plates installed throughout the buildings.
F. Telephone terminal locations are existing and shall be expanded as required as designed on the
Drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install 3/4 inch thick sheet of plywood backboard for the mounting of equipment and cable terminators by the Telephone Company. The backboards shall be painted with two (2) coats of fire-retardant paint by the Electrical Contractor. Exact dimensions of the backboards shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as
required by the Telephone Company.
G. Conduit from telephone outlets indicated on the Drawings shall be installed into the nearest
partition, extend a minimum of 6 inches into nearest accessible ceiling space and left ready to be
used by the Telephone Company for the installation of their cables.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 56
2.24 COMPUTER EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install computer outlets including conduit, outlet
box, outlet cover plate, fittings, and all other appurtenances required, leaving the entire installation ready for installation of equipment under a separate Contract.
B. In general, computer outlets and empty conduit locations shall be as shown on the Drawings.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish a nylon pull cord in each conduit to facilitate the pulling
of cables in the future.
D. All wall plates shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All computer outlet cover plates
shall be provided with a blank cover plate and be of the same finish and by the manufacturer furnishing all other device and switch plates installed throughout the renovation.
E. Conduit from computer outlets indicated on the Drawings shall be installed into the nearest partition, extended a minimum of 6 inches into nearest accessible ceiling space and left ready to
use for the installation of cables under a separate Contract.
2.25 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Scope:
1. Provide complete networked analog/addressable fire detection, evacuation alarm and control
network in compliance with all specifications, drawings and applicable code requirements.
2. System shall be a networked microprocessor based fire alarm system which will integrate peripheral devices onto system via digital data communications.
3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; identify its' exact location,
and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications.
4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with related contract documents.
5. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm communications according
to contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition.
6. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of system shall be done under direct supervision of system supplier.
a. System design and installation shall conform to following standards: 1) Equipment shall be UL listed for its intended purpose, including UL 864 (UOJZ,
UOXX, UOQY and UUKL), 1480 and 1971. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101.
c. Current State Building, Electrical and Life Safety Codes. d. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
e. Requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, including permitting and acceptance procedures.
7. Shop Drawings shall include:
a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number
of conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of control panels, annunciators, transponders, showing module placement and spare capacity allowances.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 57
c. Complete, itemized bill of materials with quantities, descriptions. d. Original catalog data sheets to assure compliance with these specifications. This
equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval.
e. Calculations to support size of standby batteries, notification appliance circuits (NAC) and audio amplifiers submitted. Circuit calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw,
voltage drop, wire size considerations and spare capacity allowances. Calculations shall be based on UL nameplate RMS voltage ratings. NAC calculations shall demonstrate 25
percent spare capacity. f. Copy of Original Equipment Manufacturer’s Warranty Statement.
g. Complete description of system Sequence of Operation. h. Details of any special installation procedures.
i. Complete floor plans showing network nodes and all device locations and corresponding addresses. Point identification lists shall be included to ensure proper coordination of
alarm messages and shall include each device type address number and corresponding CCO text message.
j. Confirmation that equipment supplier will provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction.
k. Operation and maintenance manuals.
8. Conform to UL and NFPA standards for testing of completed installation by UL approved testing company.
9. O & M Manuals shall include the following:
a. All information submitted in final reviewed shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to completed system, whether made as field change or by change order. c. Include copy of final test report, Record of Completion, as-built documentation and Fire
Alarm Support Contracts as described herein.
B. Sequence of Operation:
1. Operation of manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system smoke, system heat detector, waterflow) shall initiate system-wide but only in respective building/wing, response according to established response procedures and as follows:
a. Initiate transmission of alarm to Municipal Fire Station via on board dialer/DACT. Include the cost for monitoring at a UL listed central station for a period of one year. b. Sound approved temporal code 3 horn signal over all audio circuits throughout entire
building.
c. Upon any alarm condition, visual signals shall activate throughout the building. Visual notification shall be synchronized in accordance with applicable code requirements and
latest NFPA 72 guidelines. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at each FACP and the Fire Command Location. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Visually indicate alarm initiating device type and location via LCD display at all Fire Command Centers.
f. Operate prioritized outputs to release magnetically held smoke doors and magnetically locked doors throughout building.
g. Activate exterior W/P beacon. h. Store system events in event history file.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 58
i. Provide control signal to Lighting Control System to bring all lighting to full brightness.
2. Operation of any tamper switch, charging of pre-action system, or activation of other device designated to initiate system Supervisory condition shall cause the following to occur:
a. Flash Supervisory LED and sound audible tone at FACP and each network panel. Upon Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent
Supervisory conditions shall re-initiate this sequence. b. Visually indicate device type and location via LCD display located at FACP and remote
annunciators. c. Visually annunciate type of initiating device and its zone, floor or area as required on
system annunciators. In addition, Supervisory LED and audible tone will sound. Upon Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent
Supervisory conditions shall re-initiate this sequence. d. Record event in event history log. Restorations shall likewise be recorded.
3. In event of System Trouble condition such as device removed, loss of AC Power or wiring
fault, system Trouble condition shall occur as follows: a. Flash Trouble LED and sound audible tone at FACP and each network panel. Upon
Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent Trouble conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
b. Initiate reporting of event to designated staff members via email notification as required and described herein.
c. Visually indicate device type and location via LCD display located at FACP and network annunciator panel.
d. Visually annunciate type of initiating device and its zone, floor or area as required on all system annunciators. In addition, Trouble LED and audible tone shall sound. Upon Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent Trouble conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Record event in event history log. Restorations shall likewise be recorded.
C. General Requirements:
1. Fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and
Security applications. System operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory involvement.
2. System shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enables user to set sensitivity parameters. Inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification.
System shall be capable of reporting status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this
information to printer. System shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty (maintenance alert), prior to false alarming.
3. System shall be supported by standby batteries. In event of loss of primary power, batteries shall support 24 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 5 minutes of alarm.
4. System shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs.
5. Equipment shall be new and unused. Components and systems shall be designed for
uninterrupted duty. Equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 59
shall be provided by single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers.
6. Control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL 864
requirements. a. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP): Provide isolated loop circuit protection device on
all fire alarm circuits which extend beyond building by either aerial, underground or other methods (walkways, bridges or other above ground connectors).
b. ILCP shall be located as close as practical to point at which circuits leave or enter building. Grounding conductor shall be No. 12 AWG wire having maximum length of 28
feet and connected to unified ground per NEC.
7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable. Wiring shall match existing conventions as follows:
a. Individual Zone Addressable Modules shall be used to supervise and monitor waterflow, tamper, and status conditions from any related systems or devices.
b. Zone Addressable Control Modules and/or programmable relays shall provide auxiliary control functions.
c. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for minimum of 25 percent spare capacity, and be wired in Class A, Style 7 fashion, with circuit isolation by
floor and every 18 devices. d. Entire system shall allow minimum of 25 percent spare capacity. This shall apply to all
aspects of system including CPU, cabinets, power supplies, amplifiers and batteries. e. Conventional Visual Appliance Circuits shall operate devices shown plus 25 percent
spare capacity, and be wired in a Class A, Style Z fashion. D. Fire Alarm Control Panel:
1. Provide a Fire Alarm Control System. System shall consist of the required Fire Alarm control
and remote nodes, each sized to support a minimum of 1000 analog points, expandable to 2500 points. Panels shall be provided with programmable soft switches and associated LED's
for panel silence, alarm silence, system reset and drill. Provide lamp test button. Provide
individual LED's for power-on, common alarm, supervisory, fault. Adjacent to the fire control panel, provide passive graphic map depicting architectural layout of building with stairwells, elevators, major corridors and egress points shown.
2. Provide each panel with integral power supplies, amplifiers, addressable loop interface cards and standby batteries sized to serve building and/or space as shown. Panel shall have
following functions: a. Monitor all initiating devices, report event to fire alarm network, annunciate alarmed device and its' location, capture elevators, conduct smoke control functions, and initiate
audio/visual evacuation signaling and control sequences as described herein.
b. Conduct municipal and off-site notification from main network panel as described herein. c. Initiating devices shall respond with their condition. Control relays shall be individually
addressable by system to respond automatically in event of an alarm of related sensors. Manual override of control sequences and status feedback points shall be individually addressable.
3. Operator Controls: The control panel shall include an operator interface module consisting of 180 character backlit LCD display to display system wide alarm, trouble and supervisory
conditions. Provide full system control from Fire Command Center, as well as control switches for status message scrolling, event acknowledgment, System Reset, and Alarm
Silence. Display shall have LED's to indicate Power On, Fire Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Alarm Silenced status.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 60
4. Addressable Loop Interface: Provide addressable loop interface card for each floor in each
building. Each interface card shall be integral to network panel and support digital communications. Each circuit shall support a total circuit capacity of up to 250
analog/addressable detectors and wiring of twisted unshielded pair with distances of up to 12,500 feet.
5. Auxiliary Control / Annunciation: Provide required auxiliary switch and LED modules for
discreet LED annunciation, zone disconnect, HVAC override, or related monitoring and control functions integral to each FACP. As a minimum, provide a minimum of 64 Auxiliary
Override and Audio Control switches with status LED's and 8 HOA switches with corresponding status inputs and LED indicators for auxiliary functions, or as required. These
are intended for use by Fire Department during events, or by authorized personnel during testing periods. Keypad entered commands for these functions shall not be acceptable
6. Field Power Supplies: Provide Field power supplies with 24VDC operating and NAC Circuits
for Visual signals, 6 amps minimum. Each power supply module shall have 4 dedicated Class A NAC outputs rated at 3 amps each and charging circuit that will support up to 12AH
batteries. Provide necessary interface to synchronize all power supplies together and provide each power supply with independent monitor module for trouble supervision. Field
Power Supplies shall be located on Floor/Section which they serve.
7. Provide hard copy printout of system program to be maintained on site.
E. Remote LCD Annunciator.
1. Each annunciator shall contain a supervised; back lit, liquid crystal with a minimum of 8 lines with 21 characters per line. Where required, the annunciator shall include additional zonal annunciation and manual control without additional enclosures. The annunciator shall
support full ability to serve as the operating interface to the system and shall include the following features; Matched appearance with other system displays
F. Intelligent System Devices:
1. Provide intelligent analog addressable devices where shown and required. Analog devices shall utilize dual multi-color red/ green LED indicator which shall flash green to denote normal
active communication and light red steadily to denote alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases that support discreet address-setting rotary decade switches. Each base shall support remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, auxiliary relay
contact, or sounder base with integral Piezo horn were such functions are required. Provide wire guards or other physical protection devices as shown on contract documents.
2. Provide analog/addressable combination photoelectric smoke and carbon monoxide (CO)
detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The combination smoke and CO detector shall provide two independent signals (smoke & CO) to the control panel for programming
system responses. When mounted in a sounder base, the detector shall be capable of initiating a temporal 3-3-3 when smoke is detected or temporal 4-4-4-4 when CO is detected. Detectors that transmit a common signal to the control panel for both smoke and CO alarms
shall not be considered as equals. The detector shall be listed under standards UL-268 and
UL-2075.Each smoke detector shall be individually programmable to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. The detector shall also store pre-alarm and alternate pre-alarm
sensitivity settings. Pre alarm sensitivity values shall be configurable in 5% increments of the alarm and alternate alarm sensitivity settings respectively. The detector shall be able to
differentiate between a long term drift above the pre alarm threshold and fast rise above the
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 61
threshold. The detector shall monitor the sensitivity of the smoke sensor. If the sensitivity shifts outside the UL limits, a trouble signal shall be sent to the panel. It shall be possible to
automatically change the sensitivity of individual intelligent addressable smoke detectors for day and night (alternate) periods. Each detector shall utilize an environmental compensation
algorithm that shall automatically adjust for background environmental conditions such as dust, temperature, and pressure. The detector shall provide a maintenance alert signal when
80% (dirty) of the available compensation range has been used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal when 100% or greater compensation has been used. The smoke chamber
shall be UL listed for field replacement. The electro-chemical CO sensor shall generate a CO alarm in compliance with UL-2034 requirements. The sensor shall have a nominal six-year
life. When the sensor approaches the end of its useful life, it shall transmit a maintenance condition to the control panel, indicating the CO sensor board replacement is required. Only
when the sensor is no longer operational shall a trouble condition be sent to the control panel. Sensors that transmit a common trouble indication for both sensor end-of-life and
other causes of detector trouble shall not be considered as equal. Performing a “sensitivity” check from the panel shall report the approximate number months of CO sensor life
remaining. Placing the CO detector in test mode shall facilitate the use of direct injection of small quantities of CO to check detector functionality. The CO sensor board shall be UL listed
as field replaceable. Replacement of the CO sensor shall not require any field calibration.
3. Photoelectric Smoke Detector: Provide analog addressable photoelectric smoke detectors with adjustable sensitivity range from 0.2 to 3.7 percent obscuration where shown and
required. Detectors shall provide complete analog features including alarm verification, environmental compensation, and multi-stage operation, were required.
4. Analog Heat Detectors: Provide Analog Heat Detectors. Analog heat detectors shall be field selectable for fixed temperature rating of 135 or 190 degrees, rate of rise operation of 15 degrees/minute, and will also include a low temperature warning (Supervisory condition)
when ambient temperature reaches 40 degrees F. Where otherwise required, provide conventional fixed temperature, weatherproof or explosion proof heat detectors in lieu of
analog heat detectors. Conventional device shall be individually addressable via intelligent
addressable module which shall be installed in heated, ventilated location. 5. Analog Duct Smoke Detector: Provide analog photoelectric duct-mounted smoke detectors
mounted in air ducts where shown and required. Duct detectors shall be programmed for alarm event sequencing or required by AHJ. Each detector shall be supplied with duct-mount housing, remote indicator/test station and sampling tubes sized according to duct width.
Provide necessary auxiliary relay outputs via addressable relay control modules with each detector in order to ensure required HVAC control, override and status reporting functions.
6. Intelligent Manual Pull Stations: Provide intelligent addressable manual stations where
shown. Station shall be double action with screw terminals, toggle switch, and integral addressable electronics w status LED. Station shall be constructed of red Lexan with white
raised letters and key reset switch. Station shall be keyed alike to FACP. Where ambient conditions preclude use of addressable devices, conventional weatherproof pull stations shall be used. Each conventional device shall be individually addressable via intelligent addressable module which shall be installed in heated, ventilated location.
a. Provide tamperproof clear Lexan covers with red frame and spacer, and audible trouble alarm, Stopper II or equal where shown.
7. Monitor Module: Provide Zone Addressable input Modules to enable monitoring and
supervision of related systems and devices via SLC addressable loop.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 62
8. Relay Module: Provide Addressable Relay to provide supervised control of auxiliary circuits (AHU's, door holders, etc.) via SLC addressable loop. Relay shall provide supervised output
rated for 3 amps @ 30VDC or .5 amps at 120VAC. Where current exceeds limitations, provide isolation relay (PAM-1 or equal) rated for required load.
9. Isolation Modules: Where additional circuit isolation is required beyond isolation of the
addressable loop interface, provide field-mounted Isolator Modules every 20 devices to protect circuit integrity in event of a wiring fault and ensure Style 6 wiring conventions.
10. Drill Switch: Provide a two position keyed Drill switch with addressable monitor module
located as shown on contract drawings. Switch shall be fully programmable to initiate a drill of programmed areas with-out transmitting Municipal Signal. Restoration of key switch to
“normal” shall return FACP and associated control equipment to normal with no other user interface to system.
G. Notification Appliances:
1. Provide flush mounted combination Audio/Visual signaling appliances. Stand alone devices may be used to augment combination units when necessary. Provide surface mount back
boxes and alternate outdoor-rated appliances where ambient conditions dictate. Provide wire guards or other physical protection devices as shown on contract documents.
2. Provide synchronized xenon strobes in compliance with NFPA 72, and rated per UL 1971
testing criteria. Strobes shall have effective intensity field selectable by installer in the range of 15CD to 115 CD.
3. Provide audible detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on a 1-gang, 3½ or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box at the locations shown on the drawings. The bases shall utilize a twist-lock design and provide screw terminals for all field wiring connections.
Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. The audible base shall support all detector types and shall be capable of single or group
operation. The audible base shall emit a temporal 3-3-3 fire alarm tone when smoke or heat
has been detected. The audible base shall emit a temporal 4-4-4-4 CO alarm tone when CO has been detected. The outputs shall be configurable for low or high output by moving a reversible jumper. The system shall be UL2017 listed for dual signaling for this purpose. The
audible bases shall provide a UL-268 reverberant room sound output of 90.8 dBA at 10ft (3m) for temporal 3-3-3 fire alarm and 84.1 dBA at 10 ft.(3m) for temporal 4-4-4-4 CO alarm.
H. System Accessories:
1. Municipal Connection: Provide one (1) telephone dialer/digital Communicator unit for off-site transmission of supervisory signals. Provide the cost for monitoring at a UL listed central
station for a period of one year.
2. Sprinkler System Devices: Coordinate following to ensure that required installation and wiring
of water flow and tamper switches is accomplished in manner that will result in complete operable and tested sprinkler system. Each device shall be monitored as separate and distinct point.
a. Water flow shall activate alarm sequence.
b. Tamper switches shall activate supervisory condition.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Provide fire alarm terminal cabinets where necessary. Cabinets shall have removable hinged cover with key lock and red finish and are intended to house
analog/addressable modules and facilitate filed wiring junctions.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 63
4. Remote Alarm Indicators: Provide remote LED indicators for sensors located behind locked
doors. Provide permanent label on each indicator identifying device type and actual location.
5. Exterior Strobe: Provide a flashing weatherproof strobe with minimum 150,000 candlepower output where shown. Strobe shall be properly installed on a weatherproof back box.
6. Auxiliary Power Supplies: Provide distributed network power supplies as required. Power
supplies shall communicate directly to main Fire Alarm System via SLC communications to support network-based synchronization, and supervision of each panel for ground fault, loss
of AC power and Battery Failure. Each notification circuit served shall be individually supervised via on-board circuitry.
7. Door Holders: Install flush, surface or floor-mounted 24VDC magnetic door holders where
shown and required. Door holders will not be required to operate under standby power, following 30 second delay upon loss of primary AC power.
8. Key Repository: Provide Knox Box or approved equal key repository where shown and in
accordance with local requirements.
I. Installation:
1. Installation shall be supervised and tested by system supplier. Work shall be performed by
skilled technicians under direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained and qualified.
J. Wiring:
1. Wiring for system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of National Electrical
Code and local electrical codes. Cable shall be installed in conduit in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, with outgoing and return loops physically separated in accordance with applicable codes.
2. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted.
3. Junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as 'Fire Alarm System' with decal or approved markings.
4. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE ALARM'.
K. Final Tests, Records and Warranty:
1. Perform complete final test indicating proper functioning of system in accordance with all
applicable codes and standards. Furnish copies of completed test report, as-built
documentation and Record of Completion in accordance with NFPA 72 guideline to Owner and Architect for record purposes.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 64
2. System test shall be conducted by UL certified testing company in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide final test report and Record of Completion indicating proper functioning of the system and conformance to specifications. Test and Certificate of Completion shall be performed by
factory-trained qualified technicians employed by Testing Contractor. Each and every device shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified.
4. Final testing, certification and documentation shall be performed by same company that shall
hold and execute Test and Inspection Contract.
5. In addition to pre-acceptance test, provide for complete and final Fire Department Acceptance Testing in accordance with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction and
applicable codes.
6. Provide a 3 year warranty from date of final acceptance on all equipment. Labor on installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 1 year. Provide warranty documentation in the
submittal.
7. Guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one year from the date of final acceptance of system.
L. Annual Testing and Support Contracts:
1. Include as part of base bid cost of Test and Inspection contract which will be in effect for 1 Year. 2. Contract shall allow for quarterly tests according to UL, NFPA and local requirements. In
addition to required testing and inspections, contract shall include cleaning and sensitivity test of each system detector following first year.
3. Upon expiration of warranty period and initial test and inspection contract, contract shall be renewable upon its expiration at discretion of Building Owner.
M. Training:
1. Provide services of manufacturer's representative-for an unlimited period, during normal business hours, to instruct owner's designated personnel and fire department response
teams on operation of system. N. Spare Equipment:
1. Provide system spare devices as follows: a. Manual stations - quantity of 3. b. System smoke detectors with bases - quantity of 5.
c. System heat detectors with bases- quantity of 2. d. Audio/Visual Units - quantity of 4. e. Strobe only units - quantity of 2.
f. Duct smoke detector head and housing - quantity of 2.
g. Addressable contact monitor modules - quantity of 2. h. Addressable relay modules - quantity of 2.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 65
2.26 INTRUSION ALARM CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Provide system of empty conduits, mounting boards, terminal cabinets, and junctions boxes.
Provide 3/4" thick exterior grade plywood mounting boards painted with two (2) coats of fire-retardant paint. Provide 3/16” diameter nylon pull-cord in empty conduits.
2.27 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD PROTECTION
A. Summary: Section Includes: Provide surge protective device (SPD) external to main
switchboard for the protection of building electrical system.
B. References:
1. ANSI/IEEE C.62.41 and C62.45. 2. UL 1449 – 3rd Edition.
3. UL 1283. 4. NEC – NFPA 70.
5. NEMA LS1. 6. NFPA.
7. OSHA. 8. IEEE Std. 1100.
C. Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings with wiring diagrams, installation information, testing and maintenance procedures, and operational information for the transient protection
system. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for approval before starting actual fabrication.
2. Submittal for Approval: Provide the following transient protection submittals:
a. Dimensional Drawing of each SPD type, indicating proposed mounting arrangements. b. Written functional description of the transient protection circuit in terms of components,
configuration, design approach, and performance capability per latest NEMA LS1. c. The means of connection of the SPD to the electrical distribution system per latest NEMA
LS1. d. Manufacturer will provide UL-1449, Third Edition data card showing the Suppressed
Voltage Rating (SVR) for the specific catalog number submitted. “Typical” UL 1449, Second Edition data is not acceptable.
e. Per the requirements of NEC Article 285.6, the devices shall be marked with the short circuit current rating. This rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current. Test
data from an independent testing laboratory shall be provided to demonstrate the short circuit current rating has been tested on a complete device.
f. Submit test report data clearly demonstrating the maximum surge current rating has been tested on a COMPLETE SPD unit including all necessary fusing/overcurrent protection, thermal disconnects, integral disconnects and monitoring systems. Manufacturers who cannot provide this data will not be considered.
g. Submit data demonstrating the SPD unit, including all overcurrent protection, is fully capable of a minimum repetitive surge current rating of 10,000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41,
Category C3 (10kA) impulses without failure or a change in performance characteristics
of more than 10%. h. Written detailed response to each paragraph of the specification indicating that the proposed product meets or exceeds this specification. If specific paragraphs are not met,
provide written explanations as to why not.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 66
D. Warranty: Description: Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than 5 years from data of installation.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents, acceptable manufactures are as follows: a. Liebert
b. Current Technology
2. Quality: The Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified, demonstrating world-class quality systems for the design and manufacture of the SPD units.
F. Environmental:
1. General Requirements: a. No audible noise shall be generated.
b. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. System shall be capable of use directly in computer rooms in any location without danger to disc units, disk packs, or
tapes. c. Operating Conditions:
1) 30 – 130 Degrees F. 2) 15 – 85 Percent Humidity Non-Condensing.
d. Enclosure: The unit shall have a heavy duty NEMA 12 dust-tight, drip-tight enclosure.
G. Surge Suppressors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Rated for a 208Y/120 volt, 60 Hertz, 3-phase, 4-wire switchboard. b. Surge suppressors shall be in accordance with the following requirements:
1) Unit shall be parallel in design and connect in parallel to main switchboard. Each surge suppression element (MOV) shall be individually fused so that a failure of one
element and/or fuse shall not affect other surge suppression elements. 2) Unit shall be UL 1449, 3rd Edition Listed.
3) Unit shall provide maximum UL 1449 2nd Edition Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) for 120, 120/208, or 120/240 volt system as follows: a) L-N = 400V. b) L-G = 400V.
c) N-G = 400V. d) L-L = 700V.
4) Unit shall provide maximum surge current rating of 100,000 amperes based on
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standard 8 by 20 microsecond current waveform. 5) Unit shall have a short circuit current rating, which equals or exceeds that of the Main Switchboard.
6) Unit shall be UL 1283 listed as an electromagnetic interference filter and provide 50 Ohm noise attenuation of at least 30 dB at 100 kHz, 50 dB at 1 MHz, 50 dB at 10 MHz, and 45 dB at 100 MHz.
7) Unit shall include solid-state, long-life externally mounted LED visual status indicators that indicate the on-line status and operational integrity of each phase of the unit. 8) Unit shall have a Form C summary alarm output contact rated for at least 1 amp at
120VAC for remote annunciation of SPD status.
9) Systems shall be provided with an integral, non-fused disconnect system which causes no interruption to the protected load for testing and maintenance. Disconnect
system shall not require removal or replacement for warranty or other repairs.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 67
10) Unit shall have an audible alarm with an alarm on/off switch to silence the alarm and a push-to-test switch to test the alarm function.
11) An adjustable (resettable) counter shall be provided to totalize transient voltage surges in both the normal and common mode. The readout shall be at least a seven-
digit LCD located on the unit front cover and provided with a 10 year battery backup to maintain counts in the event of power loss.
H. Installation:
1. General Requirements: a. Contractor shall install suppression system immediately next to or on top of service
equipment where so approved by the Engineer. b. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to service equipment shall be
sized in accordance with Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings and conductor lengths shall be as short as possible, preferably not to exceed 24”. Manufacturers who offer an integrated
SPD in the main service entrance equipment will provide information that clearly shows lead lengths, including the neutral and ground connections
c. Grounding: Suppressor ground shall be bonded to the equipment grounding conductor and service entrance ground.
2.28 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for access to concealed junction boxes and to other concealed parts of system that require accessibility for operation and maintenance. In general, electrical work shall
be laid out so access panels are not required.
B. Access panels shall be located in a workmanlike manner in closets, storage rooms, and/or other
non-public areas, positioned so that junction can be easily reached and size shall be sufficient for purpose (minimum size 12” x 16”). When access panels are required in corridors, lobbies, or
other habitable areas, they shall be located as directed.
C. Access panels shall be prime-painted and equipped with screwdriver operated cam locks.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Inland Steel Products Company – Milcor
2. Miami Carey 3. Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, Inc. – Way Locator
4. Specific Types:
a. Acoustical Tile Ceiling “Milcor Type AT” b. Plastered Surfaces “Milcor Type K”
c. Masonry Construction “Milcor Type M” d. Drywall Construction “Milcor Type DW” E. Furnish access panel Shop Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere to best industry practice and the following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 68
1. All work shall be concealed.
2. Route circuitry runs embedded in concrete to coordinate with structural requirements.
3. Equip each raceway intended for the future installation of wire or cable with a nylon pulling cord 3/16” in diameter and clearly identify both ends of the raceway.
4. Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes for proper wire pulling and device
installation. Include those omitted from the Drawings due to symbolic methods of notation.
5. Utilize lugs of the limited type to make connections at both ends of cables installed on the line side of main service overcurrent and switching devices. Provide cable limiters for each end
of each service entrance cable.
6. Beyond the termination of raceways, fireproof the following: a. All wires and cables within pad-mounted transformer enclosure.
b. All service feeder cables ahead of main service overcurrent protection devices, and elsewhere where not in raceways.
c. Fireproofing of wires and cables shall be by means of a half-lapped layer of arc proof or by means of sleeving of a type specifically manufactured for the purpose. Ends of tape
or sleeving shall be severed with twine. Fireproofing shall be extended up into raceways. After conductors have been finally shaped into their permanent configuration, fireproofing
tape or sleeving shall be coated with silicate of soda (water glass). Fireproofing shall be applied in an overall manner to raceway groupings of conductors.
7. Provide all sleeves through fireproof and waterproof slabs, walls, etc., required for electric work. a. Provide waterproof sealing for the sleeves through waterproof slabs, walls, etc.
b. Provide fireproof sealing for the sleeves through fireproof walls, slabs, etc. c. Provide fireproof sealing for the openings in fireproof walls, slabs, etc., resulting from
removal of existing electrical sleeves, conduits, poke-thru’s etc.
8. No splicing of wires will be permitted in Fire Alarm System.
9. Bundle wiring passing through pull boxes and panelboards in a neat and orderly manner. 10. Turn branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring out of wiring gutters at 90 degrees to circuit
breakers and terminal lugs. 3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS & INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide supervision, labor, materials, tools, test instruments
and all other equipment or services and expenses required to test, adjust, set, calibrate, and operationally check work and components of the electrical systems and circuitry throughout
Division 16 work.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay for all tests specified in Division 16, including expenses incident to retests occasioned by defects and failures of equipment to meet Specifications, at no
additional cost to the Owner. Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the Electrical work
shall be corrected.
1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall:
a. Replace wiring and equipment found defective (defined as failing to meet specified requirements) at no additional cost to the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 69
b. Submit three (3) copies of test results to the Engineer.
2. Do not void equipment warranties or guarantees by testing and checkout work. Checks and tests shall be supplemental to and compatible with the Manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Where deviations are apparent, obtain the Manufacturer’s approved review of procedures prior to testing. Where any repairs, modifications, adjustments, tests or checks
are to be made, the Contractor shall contact the Engineer to determine if the work should be performed by or with the Manufacturer’s Representative.
3. Tests are to:
a. Provide initial equipment/system acceptance. b. Provide recorded data for future routine maintenance and trouble-shooting.
c. Provide assurance that each system component is installed satisfactorily and can be expected to perform, and continue to perform its specified function with reasonable
reliability throughout the life of the facility. 1) At any stage of construction and when observed, any electrical equipment or system
determined to be damaged, or faulty, is to be reported to the Engineer. Corrective action by the Contractor requires prior Engineer approval, retesting, and inspection.
2) Prior to testing and start-up, equipment and wiring shall be properly and permanently identified with nameplates, and other identification as specified in Section 3.7. Check
and tighten terminals and connection points, remove shipping blocks and thoroughly clean equipment, repair damaged or scratched finishes, inspect for broken and
missing parts and review and collect Manufacturer’s Drawings and instructions for delivery to the Engineer. Make routine checks and tests as the job progresses to
ensure that wiring and equipment is properly installed. 3) Testing and checkout work is to be performed with fully qualified personnel skilled in the particular tests being conducted. Personnel are to have at least five (5) years of experience with tests of same type and size as specified.
4) Inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards as amended to date, unless otherwise specified.
a) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association – NEMA.
b) American Society for Testing and Materials _ ASTM. c) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE. d) National Electrical Testing Association – NETA.
e) American National Standards Institute – ANSI. f) C2: National Electrical Safety Code. g) Z244-1: American National Standard for Personnel Protection.
h) Insulated Cable Engineers Association – ICEA. i) Association of Edison Illuminating Companies – AEIC. j) Occupational Safety and Health Administration – OSHA.
k) OSHA Part 1910; Subpart S, 1910.308.
l) OSHA Part 1926; Subpart V, 1926.950 through 1926.960. m) National Fire Protection Association – NFPA.
n) 70B: Electrical Equipment Maintenance. o) 70E: Electrical Safety Requirements for Employer Workplaces. p) 70: National Electrical Code. q) 78: Lightning Protection Code.
r) 101: Life Safety Code. s) Inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:
t) Contract Drawings and Specifications. u) Contractor’s Short Circuit and Construction Study, in accordance with Section
16100. v) Manufacturer’s printed test procedures for respective equipment.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 70
4. Test Equipment: a. Test equipment used by the Contractor is to be inspected and calibrated.
b. Perform calibration and setting checks with calibrated test instruments of at least twice that of the accuracy of the equipment, device, relay or meter under test. Dated
calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment. Calibrations over six (6) months old are not acceptable on field test instruments. Inspect test instruments for proper operation
prior to proceeding with the tests. Record serial and model numbers of the instruments used on the test forms.
5. Test Procedures:
a. The Electrical Subcontractor is responsible for the preparation of the procedures and schedules for the work specified herein. This work is to be coordinated and compatible
with both the work and schedule of the other crafts. Sequence the tests and checks so that the equipment can be energized immediately after the completion of the application
tests. b. Submit proposed testing and checkout forms. The procedures shall provide specific
instructions for the checking and testing of each electrical component of each system. Schedule tests and inspections as the job progresses. Test procedures submitted shall
include job safety rules. c. After each electrical system installation is complete, perform the tests to determine that
the entire system is in proper working order and in accordance with applicable codes, Manufacturer’s instructions, Drawings, and Specifications. Tests are in addition to shop
tests of individual items at the Manufacturer’s plant. Perform insulation and ground resistance tests before operating tests.
d. Perform insulation tests on electrical equipment, apparatus, cables, motors, generators, transformers, circuit breakers and switches, switchgear, motor control centers, and similar electrical equipment, at the following items and conditions: e. Prior to energization and/or placing into service.
f. When damage to the insulation is suspected or known to exist. g. After repairs or modifications to the equipment affecting the insulation.
h. Where lightning or other surge conditions are known to have existed on the circuit.
i. Make openings in circuits for test instruments and place and connect instruments, equipment, and devices, required for the tests. Upon completion of tests, remove instruments and instrument connections and restore circuits to permanent condition.
j. List each circuit and measured resistance as test data. Maintain record of insulation resistance values. Identify conductor, or equipment, date that value was taken and resistance value. Arrange information in tabular form and submit to Engineer.
k. Report inspections, tests, and calibrations in writing on Engineer approved reports/forms. The recorded data form shall have the signatures of the persons conducting the tests, authorized witnesses and the Engineer. The forms shall serve as the test and inspection
checklist.
l. When the electrical tests and inspections specified or required within Division 16 are completed and results reported, reviewed, and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
may consider that portion of the electrical equipment system or installation electrically complete. The Contractor will then affix appropriate, approved, and dated completion or calibration labels to the tested equipment and notify the Engineer of electrical completion. If the Engineer finds completed work unacceptable, he will notify the Contractor in writing
of the unfinished or deficient work, with the reason for his rejection, to be corrected by the Contractor. The Contractor will notify the Engineer in writing when exceptions have been
corrected. The Contractor will notify the Engineer in writing when exceptions have been corrected. The Contractor will prepare a “Notification or Substantial Electrical
Completion” for approval by the Engineer following Engineer’s acceptance of electrical completion. If later in-service operation or further testing identified problems attributable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 71
to the Contractor, these will be corrected by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Authority.
C. Specific Tests: Perform the following specified tests. De-energize and isolate equipment and
cable prior to performing the tests.
D. Motors:
1. Before energizing any machine, visually inspect for serviceability. Check Manufacturer’s instruction manual for correct lubrication and ventilation. Align motor with driven equipment.
Check nameplate for electrical power requirements.
2. Test run motors uncoupled or unloaded, before placing into operation. Check the motor for rotation, speed, current and temperature rise under normal load and record the results.
Maintain the proper color codes for phase identifications. This may require swaps at the motor for proper rotation. Use motor phase rotation meter prior to lead connection at motor in
order to minimize later swaps.
E. Grounding Systems:
1. Test main building loops and major equipment grounds to remote earth, directly referenced to
an extremely low resistance (approximately 1 ohm) reference ground benchmark. Perform a visual inspection of the systems, raceway and equipment grounds to determine the adequacy
and integrity of the grounding. Ground testing results shall be recorded, witnesses, and submitted to the Engineer.
2. Perform ground tests using a low resistance, null-balance type ground testing ohmmeter, with
test lead resistance compensated for. Use the type of test instrument which compensates for potential and current rod resistances.
3. Test each ground rod and measure ground resistance. If resistance is not 25 ohms or less,
drive additional rods to obtain a resistance of 25 ohms or less. Submit tabulation of results to Engineer. Include identification of electrode, date of reading and ground resistance valve in
the test reports. 4. Test each building and major equipment grounding system for continuity of connections and for resistance. Ground resistance of conduits, equipment cases, and supporting frames, shall
not exceed 5 ohms to ground. Submit all readings to the Engineer.
5. Where ground test results identify the need for additional grounding conductors or rods that
are not indicated or specified, design changes will be initiated to obtain the acceptable values. The Contractor is responsible for the proper installation of the grounding indicated and specified.
6. Wire and Cable: (All conductors originating from main switchboard and distribution panels). a. Before energizing any cable or wire, megger the insulation resistance of every external
circuit wire to each other and to ground. Tests shall be conducted at voltages of 500 volts or lower. Continuity test each wire and cable to verify the field-applied tag per conductor. Continuity test each wire and cable to verify the field-applied tag per
conductor. Minimum insulation resistance valves shall not be less than two (2)
megohms. b. Take insulation resistance measurements for motor feeders. With motors disconnected,
measure insulation resistance from load side of contactors or circuit breakers. c. Check cables and wires for the proper identification numbering and/or color coding.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 72
d. Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single line diagram.
F. Power Distribution System:
1. Main Switchboard: a. Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition.
b. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest single-line diagram and report discrepancies in writing to Engineer within 24 hours.
c. Check for proper anchorage, required area clearance, physical damage, and proper alignment.
d. Inspect all doors, panels and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit and missing hardware.
e. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to Drawings. Report deviations to Engineer in writing within 24 hours.
f. Inspect all bus connections for high resistance. Use low resistance ohmmeter, or check tightness of bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to
manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque levels. g. Clean entire switchgear using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials prior to
energizing system and a second time just prior to turning over system to Owner. h. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
i. Verify proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. j. Verify appropriate contact lubricant on moving current carrying parts.
k. Exercise all active components. l. Inspect all indicating devices for proper operation.
m. Perform ground resistance tests. n. Perform insulation resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one (1) minute. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts minimum, and insulation resistance shall be 100 megohms minimum.
o. Perform an over-potential test on each bus station, each phase-to-ground, for five (5) minutes at manufacturer’s recommended potential. Test results are evaluated on a go,
no-go basis by slowly raising the test voltage to the required value. The final test voltage
shall be applied for five (5) minutes for DC test potentials, and one (1) minute for AC test potentials.
2. Circuit Breakers – Molded Case: a. Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation.
b. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. c. Inspect case for cracks or other defects. d. Check tightness of connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer’s
instruction for proper torque levels.
e. Perform a contract resistance test or measure millivolt drop at rated current. f. Perform an insulation resistance test at 1000 volts DC for one (1) minute from pole-to-
pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across open contract in each phase – 500V DC if circuit breaker is solid state. g. Adjustable trip breakers shall have minimum pickup current determined by primary current injection where applicable.
h. Perform long time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300% rated current through each pole separately. Determine trip time.
i. Determine short time pickup and delay by primary current injection if applicable to the particular breaker.
j. Determine ground fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection if applicable to the particular breaker.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 73
k. Determine instantaneous pickup currently by primary injection using run-up or pulse method. Clearing times shall be within four (4) cycles.
l. Verify trip unit reset characteristics. m. Perform adjustments for final settings in accordance with breaker setting sheet if
applicable to the particular breaker. n. Compare contract resistance or millivolt drop valves to adjacent poles and similar
breakers. Investigate deviations of more than 50%. Investigate any value exceeding Manufacturer’s recommendations.
o. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms. p. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall fall within Manufacturer’s published
time-current characteristic tolerance band. q. All circuit breakers mounted in switchboards and distribution boards shall be time-current
tested by primary current injection where possible, and also any remotely mounted breakers of frame size 400 ampere and larger.
r. Adjust settings and calibrate all circuit breakers as recommended in the short circuit analysis and coordination study.
3. Motor Control:
a. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage and grounding. b. Compare equipment nameplate data with design plans or starter schedule.
4. Motor Running Protection:
a. Compare overload heater rating with motor full-load current rating to verify proper sizing b. If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify proper rating considering motor
characteristics. c. Check tightness of bolted connections. d. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one (1) minute.
e. Measure insulation resistance of each starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective device open.
f. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground.
g. Test motor overload units by injecting primary current through overload unit and monitoring trip time at 300% of motor full-load current. h. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.
i. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. j. Perform insulation resistance test, 1000 VDC minimum test voltage and 100 megohms minimum insulation resistance.
k. Control wiring insulation test voltage shall be 1000 VDC. Manufacturer shall be consulted for test voltage where solid-state control devices are utilized. l. Perform overload tests at 300% of motor full-load current. Trip times shall be in
accordance with Manufacturer’s tolerances. Investigate values in excess of 120
seconds.
5. Automatic Transfer Switch: a. Inspect for physical damage. b. Verify that the short circuit withstand rating exceeds the available short circuit duty. c. Compare equipment nameplate information and connections with single-line diagram and
report any discrepancies. d. Check switch to ensure positive interlock between normal and alternate sources.
(Mechanical and Electrical.) e. Check tightness of all control and power connections.
f. Perform manual and electrical transfer operation. g. Ensure manual transfer warnings are attached and visible to operator.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 74
h. Perform insulation resistance tests phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch in both source positions.
i. Measure contact resistance in normal and alternate source position. j. Insulation resistance test voltages and minimum values to be in accordance with
Manufacturer’s published data. k. Determine contact resistance in micro-ohms. Investigate any value exceeding 500 micro-
ohms or any values which deviate from adjacent poles by more than 50%.
6. Panelboards:
a. Inspect for physical damage and proper grounding. b. Compare nameplate information with schedules and report any discrepancies.
c. Inspect all panelboards for cleanliness, workmanship, etc.
7. The following systems shall adhere to the general requirements of this section in addition to complying with the specific test requirements outlined in the respective sections listed:
a. Fire Alarm System. b. Emergency Generator System.
c. Lighting Control System.
8. Operating Instructions: Furnish operating instructions to Owner’s designated representative with respect to operations, functions and maintenance procedures for equipment and
systems installed. Cost of such instruction up to a full five (5) days of Electrical Subcontractor’s time shall be included in contract. Cost of providing a Manufacturer’s
Representative at site for instructional purposes shall also be included. 3.3 BRANCH CIRCUITRY
A. For all lighting and appliance branch circuitry, raceway sizes shall conform to industry standard
maximum permissible occupancy requirements except where these are exceeded by other requirements specified elsewhere.
B. Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply as evenly as possible.
C. Feeder connections shall be in the phase rotation which establishes proper operation for all equipment supplied.
D. Reduced size conductors indicated for any feeders shall be taken as their grounding conductors.
E. Feeders consisting of multiple cables and raceways shall be arranged such that each raceway of the feeder contains one (1) cable for each leg and one (1) neutral cable, if any.
F. For circuitry indicated as being protected at 20 Amps or less, abide by the following:
1. All 20 amp, 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire combined branch circuit homeruns shall be provided with a #8 AWG neutral conductor.
2. Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG copper.
3. Conductors operating at 120 volts extending in excess of 100 ft. or the last outlet or fixture
tap shall be No. 10 AWG copper throughout. 4. Lighting fixtures and receptacles shall not be connected to the same circuit.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 75
5. Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply point as evenly as possible.
G. Type MC Cable Installation:
1. Where cable is permitted under the products section, the installation of same shall be done in
accordance with code and the following: a. Cable shall be supported in accordance with code. Tie wire is not an acceptable means
of support. Cable supports such as Caddy WMX-6, MX-3, and clamps such as Caddy 449 shall be used. Where cables are supported by the structure and only need securing
in place, then ty-raps will be acceptable. Ty-raps are not acceptable as a means of support. All fittings, hangers, and clamps for support and termination of cables shall be
of type specifically designed for use with cable, i.e., romex connectors not acceptable. b. Armor of cable shall be removed with rotary cutter device equal to roto-split by Seatek
Co.; not with a hacksaw. c. Use split “Insuliner” sleeves at terminations.
3.4 SHORT-CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDIES
A. Scope of Services:
1. Provide a current and complete short-circuit study, equipment-interrupting or withstand
evaluation, and a protective-device coordination study for the electrical distribution system. a. The study shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal
and alternate sources of power throughout the low-voltage distribution system. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations which could result in
maximum-fault conditions shall be thoroughly covered in the study.
2. Short-Circuit Study: a. The study shall be in accordance with applicable ANSI and IEEE standards.
b. The study input data shall include the utility company’s short-circuit single- and three-phase contribution, with X/R ratio, the resistance and reactance components of each
branch impedance, motor and generator contributions, base quantities selected, and all other applicable circuit parameters.
c. Short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at each switchgear bus, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboards, and other significant locations through the system.
3. Equipment Evaluation Study: An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine
the adequacy of circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busways, switches, and fuses
by tabulating and comparing the short-circuit ratings of these devices with the maximum short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties. Evaluation study should be submitted prior to final approval of equipment submittals.
4. Protective-Device Coordination Study: a. A protective-device coordination study shall be performed to select or to verify the
selection of power fuse ratings, protective-relay characteristics and settings, ratios, and characteristics of associated voltage and current transformers, and low-voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings.
b. The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from the utility’s
incoming line protective device down to and including each motor control center and/or panelboard. The phase and ground overcurrent protection shall be included as well as
settings for all other adjustable protective devices.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 76
c. Coordination shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code and the recommendations of the IEEE Standard 399.
d. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer
ratios, manufacturer, type, range of adjustment, and recommended settings. A tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for all fuses in the system.
Discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the Owner’s attention.
e. The overcurrent relays in the existing incoming switchgear shall be included in this study. New settings for existing relays shall be covered within this study.
5. Arc Flash Analysis Study:
a. An arc flash study shall be performed to select the proper PPE labeling. b. Study shall follow procedures as outlined in IEEE 1584.
c. Provide labeling at all equipment as required by NFPA 70E 130.5. d. Labeling shall indicate required level of PPE, nominal system voltage and arc flash
boundary.
6. Study Report: a. The results of the power-system studies shall be summarized in a final report.
b. The report shall include the following sections: 1) Description, purpose, basis, and scope of the study and a single-line diagram of the
portion of the power system which is included within the scope of study 2) Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other equipment ratings versus calculated
short-circuit duties and commentary regarding same. 3) Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same. 4) Fault-current tabulations including a definition of terms and a guide for interpretation.
7. Implementation: The Contractor shall engage an independent testing firm for the purpose of
inspecting, setting, testing, and calibrating the protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and
other applicable devices as recommended in the power-system study report. 3.5 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRICAL WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS
A. Outlets and outlet size boxes shall be of galvanized cast ferrous metal only.
B. The finish of threaded steel conduit shall be galvanized only.
C. Wires for pulling into raceways for lighting and appliance branch circuitry shall be limited to
“THWN”.
D. Wires for pulling into raceways for feeders shall be limited to “XHHW”.
E. Plates for toggle switches and receptacles shall have gasketed snap shut covers suitable for wet
locations while in use.
F. Final connections of flexible conduit shall be neoprene sheathed.
G. Apply one (1) layer of half looped plastic electric insulating tape over wire nuts used for joining the
conductors of wires.
H. Enclosures, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, cabinet trims, wiring troughs and the like, shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, shall conform to the following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 77
1. They shall be constructed with continuously welded joints and seams.
2. Their edges and weld spots shall be factory treated with cold galvanizing compound.
3. Their connection to circuitry shall be by means of watertight hub connectors with sealing rings.
I. Enclosures for individually mounted switching and overcurrent devices shall be NEMA Class IV
weatherproof construction.
J. The covers, doors and plates and trims used in conjunction with all enclosures, pull boxes, outlet
boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and the like shall be equipped with gaskets.
K. Panels shall be equipped with doors without exception.
L. The following shall be interpreted as damp or wet locations within building confines:
1. Spaces where any designations indicating weatherproof (WP) or vapor proof appear on the
Drawings.
2. Below waterproofing in slabs applied directly on grade.
3. Spaces defined as wet or damp locations by Article 100 of the National Electric Code.
3.6 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN AIR HANDLING SPACES
A. Within air handling plenums:
1. Abide by the requirements specified for electric work in damp locations within building confines.
2. All cabling and electrical equipment installed within plenums shall be listed for plenum use.
3. Exclude the installation of type NM or NMC cable.
B. In spaces within suspended ceilings used for air handling purposes, abide by the requirements
specified for normal electric work conditions except:
1. Lighting fixtures recessed into the ceilings shall be certified as being suitable for this purpose.
3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT BANKS
A. The Electrical work required in conjunction with underground conduit banks shall include providing all conduits.
B. Conduits for underground banks shall be:
1. Trade diameter size as indicated but in no case less than one inch.
2. Polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40 (approved for encased burial) duct, rigid steel conduit for
vertical elbows and straight sections used to penetrate equipment pads, building foundation walls and concrete slabs.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 78
C. All conduits indicated as being incorporated into conduit banks unless specifically noted as rigid steel conduits shall be encased in a concrete envelope which accommodates the indicated
configuration of conduits and which encompasses dimensions as follows:
1. Outside surfaces of conduits to outside surface of envelope where reinforcement of
encasement is required – 6” minimum.
2. Outside surfaces of conduits to outside surface of envelope where no reinforcement of encasement is required – 3” minimum.
3. Spacing between centerlines of conduits assigned to different categories of use primary
feeders, secondary feeders, communications and signaling – 10-1/2” minimum.
4. Spacing between centerlines of conduits assigned to the same category of use – 7-1/2” minimum.
D. Reinforcement of the concrete encasement for conduit banks where required shall consist of No.
4 longitudinal reinforcing bars located 3” from the outside surface of the envelope and spaced 6” on centers all around. No. 8 wire reinforcing hoops set 8” apart shall be used to tie the
longitudinal bars together.
E. Install conduit in such a manner as to provide a minimum cover of 30 inches after final grading
except the cover may be reduced to a minimum of 18 inches to:
1. Tie into existing work.
2. Pass over other underground utilities. 3. Pass over underground obstructions.
4. Assist in the avoidance of low points.
F. Increase the minimum cover where required by field conditions.
G. Lay conduit to avoid low points during run. Pitch at a minimum of 3 inches per 100 feet away
from building.
H. Provide reinforcement for the concrete encasement of a conduit bank where:
1. It passes under or over underground utilities. 2. It passes under or over underground obstructions.
3. Its cover is reduced to less than 30 inches. 4. It runs through foundation walls and other building construction.
I. Concrete encasement reinforcing shall extend in each case 5 feet beyond the points at which the
determining conditions terminate.
J. Bends in conduit shall have minimum radii as follows:
1. For primary feeder 15’-0” except where specifically indicated otherwise or where turning up at termination point.
2. For primary feeder turning up at termination point – 4’-0”.
K. Install conduit so that adjacent joints are staggered at least 6 inches from one another.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 79
L. Offsets to accommodate field conditions shall be accomplished with two (2) bends of not more than ten (10) degrees each.
M. Plug both ends of all conduit stubs.
N. Seal the end of each conduit run terminating inside a building utilizing a water and gas-tight
sealant manufactured specifically for the purpose.
O. After conduit has been installed with concrete encasement completed, clear each conduit of all
obstructions and foreign matter by pulling a flexible mandrel (12” minimum length and a diameter 1/4" less than that of the conduit) and brush through it. In the event that obstructions are
encountered in any conduit which will not permit the mandrel to pass, remove and replace the blocked section. Include in the electric work all excavation, backfilling, repair of concrete
encasement and restoration of surface at grade involved in the conduit replacement.
P. Provide a nylon cord for the pulling of cable in each conduit in which no cable is to be installed as
part of the electric work.
Q. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all insulated racks as required for proper support of all
cables and wires.
R. Provide magnetic warning tape above each full length of duct bank 12 inches below grade.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. Identify individually:
1. Each panelboard. 2. Each switch and circuit breaker.
3. Each feeder, wire or cable or all systems. 4. Each switchboard.
5. Each end of nylon pullwire in empty conduit.
B. Each wire or cable in a feeder shall be identified at its terminal points of connection and in each pullbox, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
C. The nomenclature used to identify panelboards or load center shall designate the numbers assigned to them.
D. The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers shall:
1. Where they disconnect mains or services designate this fact.
2. Where they control feeders, designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied.
3. Where they control lighting and appliance branch circuitry, designate the name of the space
and the load supplied.
E. The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables shall designate the feeder number.
F. Identification for panelboards or load centers shall be by means of engraved Lamacoid
nameplates showing 1/4" high white lettering on a black background fastened to the outside face of the front.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 80
G. Identification for switches or circuit breakers shall be by means of the following:
1. Where individually enclosed – engraved Lamacoid nameplates showing 1/8” high white
lettering on a black background fastened on the outside front face of the enclosure.
2. Where in panelboards or load centers without doors – same as for individually enclosed.
3. Where in panelboards or load centers with doors – typewritten directories mounted behind transparent plastic covers, in metal frames fastened on the inside face of the doors.
H. Identification for wires and cables shall be by means of wrap around “brady” type labels.
I. Device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters, pilot lights and the like, whose function is not readily apparent shall be engraved with 1/8” high letters suitably describing
the equipment controlled or indicated.
J. Phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the
main busses of each switchboard and each panelboard. The letters shall be visible from at least one (1) “normal posture” location without having to demount any current carrying or supporting
elements.
K. Equip the front face of all switchboard pull boxes junction boxes and the like containing cables,
busing or devices operating in excess of 600 volts with enameled sheetmetal “red on white” signs reading “DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE.”
L. Equip all electric closets and the like with enameled sheet metal “red on white” signs reading “Electrical Equipment Room – No Storage Permitted”. Signs shall be mounted at clearly visible
locations within the rooms.
M. Provide a sign at the service entrance equipment room indicating the type and location of all on-
site emergency or standby power sources.
N. Identify each outlet box, junction box, and cabinet used in conjunction with empty raceway for
wires of a future system by means of indelible markings on the inside denoting the system.
O. Prior to installing identifying tags and nameplates, submit their nomenclature for approval.
Conform to all revisions issued by the Architect.
3.9 LIMITING NOISE PRODUCED BY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Perform the following work in accordance with field instructions issued by the Architect to assure that minimal noise is produced by electrical installations due to equipment furnished as part of the
Electrical work.
B. Check and tighten the fastenings of sheet metal plates, covers, doors and trims used in the
enclosures of electrical equipment.
C. Remove and replace any individual device containing one or more magnetic flux path metallic
cores (e.g., discharge lamp ballast, transformer, reactor, dimmer, solenoid) which is found to have a noise output exceeding that of other identical devices installed at the project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 81
3.10 SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS
A. Support work in accordance with best industry standards, Local Electric Code and the following:
1. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface mounting, which is required in a freestanding position.
2. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support
system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braces to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike
arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.
3. No work intended for exposed installation shall be mounted directly on any building surface. In such locations, flat bar members or spaces shall be used to create a minimum of ¼” air
space between the building surfaces and the work. Provide ¾” thick exterior grade plywood painted with two (2) coats of fire-retardant gray paint for mounting of panelboards.
4. Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric
conduits, raceways or cables for support.
5. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media.
6. Support less than 2” trade size, vertically run, conduits at intervals no greater than 8’. Support such conduits, 2-1/2” trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than they story
height, or 15’, whichever is smaller.
7. Where they are not embedded in concrete, support less than 1” trade size, horizontally run, conduits at intervals no greater than 7’. Support such conduits, 1” trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than 10’.
8. Support all lighting fixtures directly from structural slab, intermediate decking or framing member as directed by the Architect. No light fixtures shall be supported directly from the
roof deck.
9. Where fixtures and ceilings are such as to require fixture support from ceiling openings frames, include in the electric work the members necessary to tie back the ceiling opening
frames to ceiling suspension members or slabs so as to provide actual support for the fixtures noted above.
10. Support all runs of conduit and/or circuitry directly from structural slabs, intermediate decking or framing members.
11. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice.
12. Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include
floor anchor fastenings in all cases. 13. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastenings to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitably auxiliary channel or
angle iron bridging tying to building structural elements.
14. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 lbs. or less, fasten to concrete and solid masonry with bolts and expansion shields.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 82
15. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points exceed 100 lbs., but is 300 lbs. or less, conform to the following:
a. At field poured concrete slabs, utilize inserts with 20’ minimum length slip-through steel rods, set transverse to reinforcing steel.
3.11 SPLICING AND TERMINATING WIRES AND CABLES
A. Maintain all splices and joints in removable cover boxes or cabinets where they may be easily inspected.
B. Locate each completed conductor splice or joint in the outlet box, junction box, or pull box containing it, so that it is accessible from the removal cover side of the box.
C. Join solid conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by securely twisting them together and soldering, or by using insulated coiled steel spring “wire nut” type connectors. Exclude “wire nuts”
employing non-expandable springs. Terminate conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by means of a neat and fast holding application of the conductors directly to the binding screws or terminals of
the equipment or devices to be connected.
D. Join, tap and terminate standard conductors No. 6 AWG and larger by means of solder sleeves,
taps, and lugs with applied solder or by means of bolted saddle type or pressure indent type connectors, taps and lugs. Exclude connectors and lugs of the types which apply set screws
directly to conductors. Where equipment or devices are equipped with set screw type terminals which are impossible to change, replace the factory supplied set screws with a type having a ball
bearing tip. Apply pressure indent type connectors, taps and lugs utilizing tools manufactured specifically for the purpose and having features preventing their release until the full pressure has
been exerted on the lug or connector.
E. Except where wire nuts are used, build up insulation over conductor joints to a value, equal both
in thickness and dielectric strength, to that of the factory applied conductor insulation. Insulation of conductor taps and joints shall be by means of half-lapped layers of rubber tape, with an outer
layer of friction tape; by means of half-lapped layers of approved plastic electric insulating tape; or by a means of split insulating casings manufactured specifically to insulate the particular
connector and conductor, and fastened with stainless steel or non-metallic snaps or clips.
F. Exclude splicing procedures for neutral conductors in lighting and appliance branch circuitry
which utilize device terminals as the splicing points.
G. Exclude joints or terminations utilizing solder in any conductors used for grounding or bonding
purposes.
H. Exclude all but solder or pressure indent type joints in conductors used for signaling or
communication purposes.
I. Lugs for conductors used to make phase leg connections on the line side of the main service
overcurrent and switching device shall be of the limiter type.
3.12 PULLING WIRES INTO CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS
A. Delay pulling wires or cables in until the project has progressed to a point when general construction procedures are not liable to injure wires and cables, and when moisture is excluded
from raceways.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 83
B. Utilize nylon snakes or metallic fish tapes with ball type heads to set up for pulling. In raceways 2” trade size and larger, utilize a pulling assembly ahead of wires consisting of a suitable brush
followed by a 3-1/2” diameter ball mandrel.
C. Leave sufficient slack on all runs of wire and cable to permit the secure connection of devices and
equipment.
D. Include circular wedge-type cable supports for wires and cables at the top of any vertical raceway
longer than 20 feet. Also include additional supports spaced at intervals which are no greater than 10’. Supports shall be located in accessible pull boxes. Supports shall be of a non-
deteriorating insulating material manufactured specifically for the purpose.
E. Pulling lubricants shall be used. They shall be products manufactured specifically for the
purpose.
F. Slack on wires and cables located in cabinets and pull boxes shall be formed and set in place in
groupings corresponding to their occupancy of raceways. They shall also be arranged, with insulators and supports provided where necessary, such that cable shims or other such
temporary expedients do not have to be left permanently in place to prevent the wires and cables from shifting when covers or trims are removed.
3.13 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND PULL BOXES
A. Flush wall-mounted outlet boxes shall not be set back to back but shall be offset at least 12” horizontally regardless of any indication on the Drawings.
B. Locate all boxes so that their removable covers are accessible without necessitating the removal of parts of permanent building structure, including piping, ductwork, and other permanent
mechanical elements.
C. In conjunction with concealed circuitry, abide by one of the following instructions (as may be
applicable to the conditions) in order to assure the aforementioned accessibility. (Not required for circuitry concealed by removable suspended ceiling tiles.)
1. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a partition or wall, locate box or fitting so that its removable cover side, (or the face of any applied raised cover) penetrates through
to within 1/8” of the exposed surface of the building materials concealing the circuitry and apply a blank or device plate to suit the functional requirements.
2. For a large box on circuitry concealed in a partition, suspended ceiling, or wall, locate box
totally hidden but with its removable cover directly behind an architectural access door or panel (included for the purpose, separate from the electric work) in the building construction
which conceals the circuitry.
3. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed above and intended as an outlet for a surface mounted lighting fixture or other such electrical item, locate box so that its removable
cover side penetrates through to the exposed surface of the building materials concealing the circuitry. Arrange the mounting of the lighting fixture or other item so that it completely covers
the opening in the building construction caused by the box.
4. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a suspended ceiling, and intended as an outlet for a non-demountable type of recessed lighting fixtures or other such electrical
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 84
items, locate box totally hidden but with its removable cover not more than 1’ away from the building construction opening occupied by the demountable items.
D. Apply junction and pull boxes in accordance with the following:
1. Include all pull boxes in long straight runs of raceway to assure that cables are not damaged when they are pulled in.
2. Include junction and pull boxes to assure a neat and workmanlike installation of raceways.
3. Include junction and pull boxes to fulfill requirements pertaining to the limitations to the
number of bends permitted in raceway between cable access points, the accessibility of cable joints and splices, and the application of cable supports.
4. Include all required junction and pull boxes regardless of indications on the Drawings (which,
due to symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
E. Apply outlet boxes in accordance with the following:
1. Unless noted below or otherwise specifically indicated, include a separate outlet box for each
individual wiring device, lighting fixture and signal or communication system outlet component. Outlet boxes supplied attached to lighting fixtures shall not be used as
replacements for the boxes specified herein.
2. A continuous row of fixtures of the end-to-end channel type, designed for “through wiring”, and wired in accordance with the specification hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a
series of lighting fixtures, may be supplied through a single outlet box. 3. A series of separate fixtures, designed for “through wiring”, spaced not more than 4’ apart, and inter-connected with conduit or raceway and circuitry which is in accordance with the
Specifications hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a series of lighting fixtures, may be supplied through a single outlet box.
4. Connection to recessed ceiling fixtures supplied with pigtails may be arranged so that more than one (1), but not more than four (4) such fixtures are connected into a single outlet box. When adopting this procedure:
a. Utilize an outlet box no smaller than 5” square by 2-1/2” deep. b. Allow no fixture to be supplied from an outlet box in another room.
5. Multiple local switches indicated at a single location shall be gang-mounted in a single outlet box.
6. Include all required outlet boxes regardless of indications on the Drawings (which due to
symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
F. Install junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes in conjunction with concealed circuitry.
1. Exclude surface-mounted outlet boxes in conjunction with concealed circuitry.
2. Exclude unused circuitry openings in junction and pull boxes. In larger boxes each such
opening shall be closed with a galvanized sheet steel plate fastened with a continuous weld all around. In small outlet type boxes, utilize plugs as specified for such boxes.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 85
3. Close up all unused circuitry openings in outlet boxes. Unused openings in cast boxes shall be closed with approved cast metal threaded plugs. Unused openings in sheet metal boxes
shall be closed with sheet metal knock-out plugs.
4. Outlet boxes for switches shall be located at the strike side of doors. Indicate door swings are subject to field change. Outlet boxes shall be located on the basis of final door swing
arrangements.
5. Boxes and plaster covers for duplex receptacles shall be arranged for vertical mounting of the receptacle.
6. Equip outlet boxes used for devices which are connected to wires of systems supplied by
more than one set of voltage characteristics with barriers to separate the different systems.
G. Barriers in junction and pull boxes of outlet size shall be of the same metal as the box.
1. Barriers in junction and pull boxes which are larger than outlet size shall be of the polyester
resin fiberglass of adequate thickness for mechanical strength, but in no case less than 1/4" thick. Each barrier shall be mounted, without fastenings, between angle iron guides so that
they may be readily removed.
3.14 LOCATING AND ROUTING OF CIRCUITRY
A. In general, all circuitry shall be run concealed except that it shall be run exposed where the
following conditions occur:
1. Horizontally at the ceiling of permanently unfinished spaces which are not assigned to
mechanical or electrical equipment.
2. Horizontally and vertically in mechanical equipment spaces.
3. Horizontally and vertically in electric equipment rooms.
B. Concealed circuitry shall be so located that building construction materials can be applied over its thickest elements without being subject to spalling or cracking.
C. All circuitry and raceways shall not be run within slabs. If field conditions requires raceways to be embedded in field-poured structural building construction concrete fill or slab shall conform to the
following:
1. All proposed embedded raceways shall be indicated on plan and elevation and submitted to
the Architect and Structural Engineer for review and written approval prior to installation. Any
costs associated with the review and approval shall be borne by the Electrical Subcontractor. 2. They shall be run “single layer” with their outside surface no closer than 1” to any surface of
the structural concrete.
3. They shall not be located in any configuration which places the outside surface of one closer
than 3” to outside surface of another, except at tees, crosses or other single level wide angle junction points.
4. Where crossovers or close grouping are unavoidable, circuitry shall be carefully field
coordinated so as not to cause structural weakness.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 86
5. Where turned up or down into a wall or partition they shall, before entering same, be routed parallel for a long enough distance to assure that no relocation of the wall or partition will be
necessary to conceal the required bend.
6. They shall be routed in such a manner as to coordinate with the structural requirements of the building.
7. They shall be routed in accordance with field instructions issued by the Architect where such
instructions differ from Specifications set forth herein.
D. Circuitry run exposed shall be routed parallel to building walls and column lines.
E. Exposed circuitry located overhead shall be run in a completely accessible manner on the
underside of all piping and ductwork.
F. Circuitry run in suspended ceilings shall be routed parallel to building walls, column lines, etc.
G. Circuitry shall be routed so as to prevent electric conductors from being subject to high ambient temperature. Minimum clearances from heated lines or surfaces shall be maintained as follows:
1. Crossing where uninsulated: 3”. 2. Crossing where insulated: 1”
3. Running parallel where uninsulated: 36”. 4. Running parallel where insulated: 6”.
H. Circuitry shall not be run in elevator shafts, hoistways, and the like. Where outlets for trail cables,
pit lights, run be level lights, and the like, are involved, only the “final connection” outlet boxes themselves shall be located within or open into, the confines of the shaft.
I. Circuitry for miscellaneous systems indicated without notation as to location and routing shall be run as per the requirements and notations governing the adjacent light and power circuitry.
3.15 INSTALLING CIRCUITRY
A. The outside surface of circuitry, which is to be embedded in cinder concrete, shall be coated with
asphaltum paint.
B. In runs of conduit or raceway including flexible limit the number of bends between cable access
points to a total which does not exceed the maximum specified for the particular system. Where no such maximum is specified, limit the number to four (4) right angle bends or the equivalent
thereof.
C. In each conduit or raceway assigned for the future pulling in of wires, include a nylon drag cord.
In raceways 2” trade size and larger, the cord shall be pulled in utilizing a suitable brush, followed by an 85% diameter ball mandrel ahead of the cord in the pulling assembly. In the event that
obstructions are encountered, which will not permit the drag cord to be installed, the blocked section of raceway shall be replaced and any cutting and patching of the structure involved in
such replacement shall be included as part of the electric work.
D. Circuitry shall be arranged such that conductors of one feeder or circuitry carrying “going” current
are not separated from conductors of the same feeder or circuitry carrying “return” current by any ferrous or other metal. Where not within raceways, all “going” and “return” current conductors of
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ELECTRICAL
260000 - 87
one feeder or circuit shall be laced together so as to minimize induction heating of adjacent metal components.
E. Sleeves used where circuitry is to penetrate waterproof slabs, decks and walls, shall be of a type selected to suit the water condition encountered in the field.
3.16 PHYSICAL SEPARATION OF NORMAL, OPTIONAL STANDBY, AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS
A. ALL emergency system generation and distribution equipment shall be installed within dedicated
two-hour fire rated rooms, closets or shafts. All equipment, conduit, piping, ductwork, etc., alien to the emergency system shall not be located within these rooms, closets, or shafts except the
equipment that serves these rooms, closets or shafts.
B. All emergency equipment such as transfer switches, switchboards, transformers, and
panelboards, shall be installed in two-hour fire rated rooms. The two-hour fire rated rooms shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. All portions of the emergency system, such as feeders, located outside of rooms, closets, or shafts described in paragraph “B” shall also be enclosed within two-hour fire rated enclosures,
provided by the Electrical Subcontractor. Type, method and material of two-hour rated enclosures shall be approved by the Local Electrical Inspector.
D. Emergency system shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring, devices and equipment, and shall not enter the same raceways, boxes or cabinets with each other or other wiring, except
in transfer switches.
E. The Electrical Subcontractor has the option of using UL listed two-hour fire rated MI cable
systems only if approved by the Local Electrical Inspector. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for sizing, routing, installation, supports, etc., of this cable in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements. Submit for Architect conductor sizing calculations, voltage drop calculations, etc. for review and approval.
END OF SECTION 260000
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PV ARRAY
261000 - 1
SECTION 263100
PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Section 263100 – PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS. The installation (to manufacturer’s
specifications) of a 91.56kW-DC SunPower Helix solar array, mounting, inverters, whips,
combiner, and monitoring package.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 260000 – ELECTRICAL (Refer to drawing PV200 for details):
a. Section 262816.13 -- ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER: 300 Amp PV
interconnection circuit breaker in Main Switchboard (rated for back-feed).
b. Section 262200 -- LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER: A 75kVA Transformer
rating: 120/208V Delta Primary, 277/480V Wye Secondary, Outdoor, 3phase.
c. Section 262816.16 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Main
PV AC disconnect rating: 125Amp, 277/480V, 3phase, NEMA3R.
d. Section 262813 – FUSES: (3) 125Amp FRS-R-125 for PV AC disconnect.
e. Section 260913 -- ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING: Locus LGate 360
Revenue grade.
f. Section 260533.13 – CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: 2” EMT (or
equivalent) raceway from PV AC Disconnect to 5th floor rooftop chase.
g. Section 260543 -- UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
1) 2” (minimum) PVC conduit from PV AC disconnect to 75kVA transformer
(TR-1) (C-3 in PV200)
2) 3” (minimum) PVC/EMT from 75kVA Transformer to Main Switchboard.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PV ARRAY
261000 - 2
h. Section 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
1) (6) 2/0 Cu THWN-2 (2) #3 Cu THWN-2 from 300A Interconnection Circuit
Breaker to 120/208V Primary side of 75kVA transformer.
2) (3) 1/0 Cu THWN-2 (2) #6 Cu THWN-2 from 277/480V Secondary side of
75kVA transformer to supply side of PV AC disconnect.
2. Section 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE for 75kVA transformer base.
3. Section 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE ballast blocks for PV assembly
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Specifications: For each type of critical electrical component indicated. Include cut
sheet, data sheet, material specifications.
1. SunPower Helix Package:
a. SPR-E20-327-COM PV Module
b. SMA Tripower 24000TL Inverter
c. Helix Cable Management System
d. Helix Roof Mounting System
e. Helix Roof Power Station
f. Helix Single Tilt Field Assembly Sheets
g. Helix Ballast/Anchor Map & Bill of Materials
h. OMG PowerGrip Roof Mount System
i. Helix Ballast Block Specifications
2. Locus LGate 360
3. Square D H264RB Fusible Switch
4. Cooper Bussman 600V RK5
5. Dongan 43-75-565SH Transformer
B. PV Array Layout PV100
C. PV Array String Map PV101
D. PV One Line Drawing PV200
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 1
SECTION 270000
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The objective of this and related specification documents is to define a universal and
structured communications cable plant infrastructure for use on this project. The goal of
such a cable plant is to accommodate all current and anticipated voice and data systems
with little or no modification, thus reducing administration and maintenance demand for
resources.
B. The cable plant standards address a range of typical work and living areas found. The areas include
one-bedroom and studio apartments, fixed offices, open office furniture systems, conference rooms and
all support spaces. This document specifies the design and installation for the station outlets, station
cabling, communication support rooms, equipment rooms, backbone cabling and the service
provider company and access provider company entrance facilities.
C. This document does not specify the communications equipment such as the network
hubs, routers, telephone switch and servers. However, the interface between such
equipment and the cable plant is defined herein.
D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all Division 27
Sections.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. - Grounding & Bonding for Communications
Systems B. - Hangers and Supports for
Communications Systems C. - Boxes for
Communications Systems
D. - Ladder racks for Communications Systems the MDF and IDF’s
E. - Identification for Communications Systems
F. - Communications Equipment Room Fittings G. - Communications Backbone Cabling
H. - Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. - Communication Connecting Cords, Devices & Adapters
J. - Audio-visual System
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. This Infrastructure Standard is based on the TIA-568-C Series - Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standards, and TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, along with others noted below. These
documents are published by the Telecommunications Industry Association.
B. The design, cable and component selection, and installation practices shall conform with the
following:
1. TIAlEIA-526-7: Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
2. TIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; IEC
61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-1:
Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 2
3. ANSIfTIA-568-C-series: Generic and Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards.
4. ANSIfTIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
5. ANSIfTIA_-606-A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings.
6. ANSI-J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
7. TIA-758-A: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.
8. TIAlEIA-862: Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for Commercial Buildings
9. TIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards for Data Centers
10. TIA-1005: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises
11. TIA-1152: Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
12. Federal Communications Commission Title 47 I FCC Part 15, FCC Part 68
13. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3, 802.5, 802.11
14. National Electrical Code Article 770 "Optical Fiber Cables" and Article 800 "Communications
Circuits"
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
16. Local Electrical Code
17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code
18. NFPA 75 Protection of Electrical Computer Data Processing Equipment
19. OSHA 10 Safety Standards
20. Applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings and Approvals
21. UL 444 Communications Cables
22. National, state and local health, safety and building codes
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following definitions are specific to the communications environment and shall apply to this
document and its companion sections for clarification and direction.
1. Contractor: The Communications Contractor or sub-contractors responsible for installation,
termination, test and documentation of communications cabling, termination components,
pathway hardware, telecommunications equipment room hardware and related components
detailed in the technical sections of this Division of work.
2. Communications Cable Plant: All communications cabling, wiring, termination hardware, racks,
cabinets, labeling and all other associated hardware.
3. Communications Outlet: The device used to terminate station cables in couplers or connectors at
user locations. It is the interface between the Station Cable and the end user's equipment.
4. Horizontal (Station) Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects the
Communications Outlet to the MDF or IDF. It is typically run horizontally on the same floor in a star
topology emanating from the MDF or IDF.
5. Outlet ID: A unique alpha-numeric identification used for referencing a communications outlet.
The Outlet ID is a subset of the Cable ID.
6. Cable ID: A unique, alpha-numeric identification used for tagging the station cables, the jacks within
a communications outlet and the termination blocks or patch panels.
7. 110-Block: References throughout this document to a llO-Block signify a 100-pair llO-block
that is 4 rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables) wide or a 300-pair 110 block that is
12 rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables or 1 x 25-pair cable) wide
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 3
regardless of manufacturer or mounting type, unless otherwise noted.
8. Station Field: 8-position, 8-conductor Modular (8P8C; "RJ-45") termination panel used at the
MDF or IDF to distribute the station cables to the Station Outlets.
9. Backbone Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects each IDF with the
Data Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room or Entrance Facility or MDF. The Backbone
cabling is typically run vertically in a star topology emanating from the Data Center,
Telecommunications Equipment Room (MDF) or Entrance Facility to all IDF’s. Backbone cabling
consists of both copper and fiber cables.
10. Copper Backbone Field: RJ-45 style termination panel or 11O-Block used to terminate
backbone cabling in the Data Center, MDF or Telecommunications Data Equipment Room,
Entrance Facility or IDF.
11. Fiber Backbone Field: Fiber Optic Patch Panels used to terminate backbone cabling in the Data
Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facility or MDF.
12. Data Equipment Field: The area in a 19" rack that contains the active equipment that makes up the
local area network. This equipment could be made up of hubs, switches or other active
hardware.
13. The MDF: A room that serves as the distribution point of station cabling to the surrounding area
referred to as the MDF Zone. The MDF also houses all the terminations of station and backbone
cabling as well as network, voice, security and other active equipment.
14. MDF or IDF Zone: An area served by a Telecommunications Room. All Station Cabling from outlets
in a MDF or IDF Zone originate from that MDF or IDF.
15. Entrance Facility (EF): The room where the telephone Company point-of-demarcation
(DEMARC) is installed or originates from their public facilities. This is the service hand-off point
or the point of origin for extending the DEMARC to other rooms within the building.
16. Permanent (Cable) Link: Includes the Communications Outlet, station cable and termination
at the MDF or IDF’s.
17. Channel: Same as Basic Link, but also includes patch cords at the Communications Outlet and in
the MDF or IDF.
18. Cross-Connect: Group of connection points, wall or rack mounted, used to mechanically
terminate and administer building wiring.
19. Zone Cabling: A cabling plan, typically used in an open office area, which provides for a
reconfigurable link between the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect (e.g. at the IDF’s or MDF)
and the work area I user. An intermediate connection point is positioned close to the workstations
served.
20. Consolidation Point: In a Zone Cabling system, an intermediate connection point between the
permanently installed cabling extending from the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect, and
moveable horizontal cabling extending to the Telecommunications Outlet.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. The following abbreviations and acronyms shall apply to this document and its companion sections
for clarification and direction.
8P8C
AFF
ANSI
ATM
AWG
BAS
CDDI
cm
CM
CMP
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 4
CMR
dB
DTMF
EIA
EF
EIDF
Eight Position, Eight Conductor modular Jack. Often referred to as an "RJ-45".
Above Finished Floor
American National Standard Institute
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
American Wire Gauge Building
Automation System
Fiber Distributed Data Interface over Copper
centimeters
Communications cable rated for general purpose use
Communications cable rated for use in plenum areas
Communications cable rated for use in risers and vertical runs
Decibel
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Electronic Industries Association
Entrance Facility
Equipment Intermediate Distribution Facility
ELFEXT Equal-Level Far-End Cross Talk (pair-to-pair) FCC
FDDI
ft.
FIUTP
TR
HCP
IEEE
in.
kg.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
lbs.
LAN m
mm
Mbps
MDF
MHz
!lm
N
NEXT
OFNP
OFNR
OTDR
PBX
pF
Federal Communications Commission
Fiber Distributed Data Interface feet
Foiled Unshielded Twisted Pair
No shielding around individual pairs and an overall foil shield under the cable jacket
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 5
Telecommunications Room
Horizontal Connection Point
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers inch
kilogram
Pounds
Local Area Network
meters
millimeters
Megabits per second
Main Distribution Frame
Mega Hertz (lE6 Hz)
Micrometer or micron (lOE-6 meter)
Newton
Near End Cross Talk
Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum
Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser Optical
Time Domain Reflectometer
Private Branch Exchange (Telephone Switch) Pico
Farad (lOE-12 Farad)
PSNEXT Power Sum Near End Cross Talk
PVC
RU
TIA
TR
USOC
Polyvinyl Chloride
Rack Unit (1.75 inches) Telecommunications
Industry Association
Telecommunications Room
U
T
P
W
A
N
1.6 WORK BY VISION VOICE & DATA SOLUTIONS UNDER A SEPARATE
CONTRACT WITH THE OWNER
Unshielded Twisted
Pair Wide Area
Network
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. As a part of this contract with the Owner, Western Builders will subBeldencontract to provide:
1. Active electronics for interface with building voice and data cabling systems.
2. The telephone system & connections from telephone/data equipment to Contractor provided cabling.
3. Connections between Backbone and Horizontal Cabling.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 6
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for cabling and equipment provided under this Section:
1. Note that for satisfying submittal requirements, "Product Data" is usually more
appropriate than true "Shop Drawings" as usually defined. However, expression
"Shop
Drawings" is generally used throughout specification.
B. Refer to Belden Warranted Solution Standards for general guidelines on product or installation
information to be submitted.
C. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items submitted.
D. Include proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated
in specification and shown on drawings.
E. When manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct
cross-reference number for each item. Submittals shall be clearly marked and noted accordingly.
F. When equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional items under
one designation, submittals shall be complete and include required components.
G. Submittals should be grouped to include complete documentation of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal. Where applicable, dimensions shall be marked
in units to match those specified.
H. Submittals shall be in electronic form (Adobe Acrobat PDF) or paper.
1. Paper documents shall be original catalog sheets or photocopies thereof.
2. Facsimile (fax) sheets shall not be used by contractors.
1. Where submittals cover products containing potentially hazardous non-metallic materials,
Vision shall include "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) from manufacturer stating physical
and chemical properties of components and precautionary considerations required.
J. Upon request by the owner or engineer, the contractor shall submit one 2-foot section of each
cable type from cable reels sent to the site for Engineer's final approval. This two-foot section
shall have manufacturer's cable markings visible.
K. Contractor shall submit a floor plan outlet labeling spreadsheet indicating the Communications
Outlet ill for each communications outlet.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. Refer to Section 27 05 53, Identification for Communications Systems, for description of
Communications Outlet ID.
a. Floor plan outlet labeling drawings shall be provided, in Adobe Acrobat.
2. Drawings shall be submitted a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to substantial completion of the
work associated with the corresponding outlets.
3. Packaging: Material and equipment manufacturers shall demonstrate efforts to reduce
packaging waste and/or to use environmentally-preferable packaging materials. Examples include,
but are not limited to, the following: 1) reusable and/or returnable pallets or crates; 2)
FSC-certified wood or salvaged wood pallets or crates; 3) high recycled-content cardboard,
paper, steel, or plastic packaging; and 4) bio-based foam packing materials.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cable and component manufacturer(s) shall be a company specializing in communications cable,
accessories and/or equipment with minimum of 5 years documented experience in
producing cable, accessories and/or equipment similar to those specified herein providing a
warranted solution approved by cable manufacturer.
B. The Contractor shall have been in this business for minimum of 5 years and completed three
(3) projects equal in magnitude to the project specified in the following sections.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 7
C. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary certifications to provide for the Warranty as
specified herein.
1. The Contractor shall be an active participant in the Installers Program operated by the
Manufacturer of the Cabling and/or Termination Components used. The Contractor shall be a
participant in this program at the time of Bidding and remain so throughout the project.
2. Upon request, the Certified Installer(s) assigned to the Project shall be identified to the
Engineer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. This Article is applicable to all Division 27 Sections. B.
Refer to Division 1 General Provisions.
C. Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections which detail the requirements for each
subsection, the Contractor shall warranty non manufacturer materials, equipment, etc. for a
minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Mineral-fiber stopping materials that are exposed to supply or return air plenums or that are located
above suspended ceilings will be encapsulated or fully sealed to prevent direct exposure of the
mineral fibers to the plenum. Where sealants are used to encapsulate the mineral fiber materials (e.g.
smoke sealants used at perimeter fire-stopping joints) the sealants shall meet the requirements
Section, assuming there is one.
B. All mineral wool products shall contain minimum 75% combined post-consumer and post- industrial
recycled content and shall be documented in accordance with the "Sustainable Design and
Construction", Section assuming there is one.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to the individual technical specification sections for detailed Cable Routing and Installation,
Testing and Documentation requirements. The following apply to all communications cabling and
termination work.
3.2 CABLE ROUTING- GENERAL
A. Backbone cables should be routed separately from other building services so as to protect the
cabling from unnecessary abuse. Separate conduit or a telecommunications riser shaft is
recommended when it is deemed feasible.
B. When redundant riser paths are available, the backbone cables should be run in the two different
paths to provide backup in the case of damage to one of the cables. The size of each redundant cable
should be half of the typical single backbone run, so that the total strand/pair count of the two cables is
equal to the total strands/pairs required for the MDF.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. The contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without
damage to cable jacket.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 8
B. All routing shall be kept clear of other trades work and supported using the method(s)
detailed in the pertinent technical section(s).
C. During pulling operation an adequate number of workers shall be present to allow cable observation
at all points of raceway entry and exit, as well as to feed cable and operate pulling
machinery.
D. Pull cables in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pull all cable by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical assistance.
1. Where mechanical assistance is used, ensure that maximum tensile load for cable is not
exceeded. This may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of "break-
away" or other approved method.
F. All cables shall be installed splice-free unless otherwise specified. G.
Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.
H. Cable manufacturers recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded. I.
Pulling lubricant may be used and shall:
1. Be non-injurious to cable jacket and other materials used.
2. Not harden or become adhesive with age.
J. Minimum bend radii, as specified by the manufacturer, must be adhered to for cable pulling and
final installation.
1. Any cables bent or kinked to radius less than recommended dimension are not
allowed and shall be replaced at no expense to Owner.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
K. Repair damage to interior spaces caused by installation of cable, raceway or other hardware. Repairs
must match preexisting color and finish of walls, floors and ceilings.
L. Replace contractor-damaged ceiling tiles to match color, size, style and texture.
M. Pull cord (200 lb minimum) shall be installed with cable installed in conduit or innerduct. N.
Cabling shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
O. In a high-rise environment, provisions must be made to support the backbone cable passing
vertically through the building. The cables should be supported on each floor using an industry
approve support method.
3.4 TESTING
A. Tests shall be optionally conducted by the contractor during the course of construction when
identifiable portions) of installation are complete. Alternatively, testing can be conducted after entire
installation is complete if this does not delay the project schedule.
B. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit a written description of the intended test
procedures and submit sample test forms to the Engineer or owner.
1. The submitted information shall include the proposed file naming format to be used in
identifying the balanced twisted-pair cable (by 4-pair unit or pair), or optical fiber (by pair or strand)
which is the subject of the test record.
2. Failure to provide the above information shall be grounds for the Engineer or the Owner to
reject any and all Documentation of Results on related testing and to require a repeat of the
affected test.
C. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit to the owner (or owners representative) and the
Engineer, a proposed schedule for acceptance testing. This notification shall be a minimum of five (5)
working days in advance to allow for witnessing of the tests by a duly authorized
representative:.
D. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all equipment and personnel necessary to
conduct the acceptance tests.
E. Testing shall be completed and accepted by Owner and Engineer before Owner furnished
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 9
equipment and cross connects are installed. F.
All tests shall be documented.
G. Test results shall be submitted in the native software of the field test measurement device,
within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase (e.g. subsystem, cable type,
area, floor, etc.) or no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled occupancy of the subject area,
whichever
is earlier.
1. Interim documentation of Test Results in the native software of the field test measurement
device shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
H. Test results in the native software of the field test measurement device shall also be part of the
Final Documentation package submitted by the Contractor on the project.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall provide System Documentation to the
Engineer for approval. Documentation shall include:
1. Test Results
2. Record Drawings
3. Copies of all approved submittals indicating products used in the installation.
4. Phone numbers, physical addresses and Internet/webpage (URL) of local parts suppliers and service
companies covering the products installed.
B. Submit four (4) copies of all required documentation.
C. Documentation of Test Results shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
1. Test results shall be submitted in the format(s) native to the test instrument(s) used in
performing the testing.
2. Where unique software (other than an MS-Word™ compatible Word Processor or MS-
Excel™ spreadsheet) is required for viewing of the test results, the Contractor shall provide along
with the above documentation, three (3) licensed copies of such software. The software
shall run on a MICROSOFT Windows-based personal computer supplied by the Owner.
D. Final Documentation shall be submitted no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled
occupancy of the subject area. This is inclusive of all Test Results and draft Record Drawings.
1. Draft drawings may include mark-ups done by hand.
2. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30)
working days of the completion of each testing phase.
E. The Engineer or Owner may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable
system - at no additional cost - to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined
above and in the technical sections. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the
Contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Engineer
or Owner, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. All documentation - including hard copy and electronic forms of all Test Data and Record
Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 10
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO GROUND AND BOND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section details product and execution requirements for Communications Grounding and
Bonding.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this and
other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References and
Standards.
B. In addition, the following apply:
1. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment
2. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
3. ANSI J-STD-607-A - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) -2008
5. ANSIlNECAlBICSI-607-2011 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides information on
Definitions and Abbreviations used in this and related Sections. B.
Additional definitions (per referenced standards):
1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): busbar placed in convenient and
accessible location and bonded by means of bonding conductor for telecommunications to
building service equipment (power) ground.
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): interface to building telecommunications
grounding system generally located in telecommunications room. Common point of connection
for telecommunications system and equipment bonding to ground, and located in
telecommunications room or equipment room.
3. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications bonding infrastructure to building's service equipment (power) ground.
4. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) to telecommunications grounding
busbar (TGB).
5. Grounding Equalizer (GE): conductor that interconnects elements of
telecommunications grounding infrastructure.
6. Exothermic Weld: method of permanently bonding two metals together by controlled
heat reaction resulting in molecular bond.
7. Irreversible Compression: permanent mechanical bond between conductors or
conductor and connector using mechanical or hydraulic tool.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product or
installation information to be submitted by Contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the Project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 11
1.8 GUARANTEE
A. Refer to Division 1, "General Conditions", and "General Requirements" - Guarantee
Documents for general warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUSBARS
A. Material: Copper (aluminum not permitted)
1. 1/4" thick
B. Pre-drilled
1. Holes for use with standard sized two hole lugs
2. Hole spacing per ANSI Joint Standard J-STD-607-A.
3. Hole pattern shall accommodate two-hole lugs.
C. Insulators and stand-off brackets shall electrically isolate busbar from wall or other mounting surface.
D. Busbars shall be listed by nationally recognized testing laboratory.
E. Size:
1. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB) - 20" x 4" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI4420TMGB
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) - 12" x 2" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI14212TGB
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted). B.
Bonding Conductors shall be insulated.
1. Green Jacket or Black Jacket marked with Green Tape or Green adhesive labels per NEC
Guidelines.
2. Insulation shall be rated for the environment where it is installed. C.
Size:
1. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) to building's servIce equipment
(power) ground:
a. No. 3/0 AWG
2. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB; TMGB to TGB):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
3. Grounding Equalizer (GE):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Mechanical Connectors
Connector Body shall:
1. Be high-strength, high-conductivity cast copper alloy
2. Be sized to accommodate standard two hole lugs
3. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock-washers: Silicon Bronze or Stainless Steel
4. Shall be supplied as part of connector body
5. Split bolt connector types are not allowed
Connector shall:
6. Meet or exceed UL 467
7. Be clearly marked with catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer. B.
Compression Connectors
Connector Body: pure wrought copper.
1. Conductivity shall be no less than 99% by IACS Standards.
Connector shall:
1. Be. Listed by a NRTL
2. Be of IEEE 837, latest revision.
3. Be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 12
4. Be clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and
required compression tool settings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 13
5. Connection shall be irreversible.
6. Compression lugs shall be two-hole, long barrel, electro tin-plated with
inspection ports (Harger GECLB Series)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Permanently attach communications grounds prior to energizing communications equipment.
3.2 TOPOLOGY
A. Refer to the project drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide required elements and miscellaneous hardware necessary to establish
Telecommunication Bonding and Grounding infrastructure as specified. B.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install Compression Connectors with compression tool and die system, as recommended by
manufacturer of connectors.
C. Bonding and Grounding connections shall be tight and made with UL listed bonding and
grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc.
D. On the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT), Telecommunications Bonding
Backbone (TBB) and Grounding Equalizer (GE) all connections shall be Compression type. E.
Locate TGBs and TMGB per drawings.
1. Coordinate TMGB location and BCT routing with Owner.
F. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) shall be continuous and not interrupted by
Telecommunications Grounding Busbars (TGB).
1. TGBs shall be bonded to TEB via tap off of TBE.
2. Exception is "last" TGB on TEB (e.g., furthest from TMGB).
3. Grounding Equalizer(s) (GE) shall connect to TGBs to be interconnected. G.
Insulate Busbars from their support.
H. Structural Steel Framed Structures
1. In structural steel frame buildings, where the steel framework is accessible within the room, the
TMGB and each TGB shall be bonded to the structural steel frame using a minimum No. 6
AWG conductor.
2. Connections to the structural steel shall be by exothermically welding or with an electro tin-
plated bonding plate.
3. Where the structural steel is external to the room and is accessible, the structural steel should
be bonded to the TMGB or the TGB using a minimum No.6 AWG conductor.
1. Connections shall be bare metal to bare metal contact.
1. Clean surfaces of paint, dirt, oil, etc.
2. Apply anti-oxidant materials to both surfaces prior to installation. Harger part number
HCAJC8
J. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times.
1. Do not install insulation over bonding connections.
K. Terminate each bonding conductor on its own terminal lug.
1. Multiple conductors on single lug not permitted.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect bonding and grounding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 14
3.5 TESTING
A. Test impedance to earth ground at TMGB and TGBs.
B. Maximum allowable impedance to earth ground shall be 5 Ohms.
1. Correct system installation if measured impedance is higher than maximum allowable and retest to
verify impedance.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. Accurately record locations of grounding electrode(s), busbars (e.g., TMGB, TGBs) and bonding
conductors for telecommunications (BCT).
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 15
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems - Part 1 for requirements for Standards,
Submittals, Quality Assurance, Delivery, Storage, Handling, and
Guarantee for Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components for raceway and conduit.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". C. Reference
1. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including
the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and section sunder Division 01 General
Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Anchors, Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Plated.
Mounting, Attachment, and Anchoring Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
Refer to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for products identified in Part 1 of
this section.
Support Channel: Steel, electrostatically coated with zinc; or fiberglass or pre-galvanized (silver)
or black powder coat.
Threaded Rod: 112-inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch or 3/8-inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch zinc-
plated rod in various lengths.
Steel ladder rack or wire basket tray, 12-inch, 18-inch and 24-inch wide by 10' long pieces;
PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Threaded Rod Type to Be Used
1. Install the following types of threaded rod where required:
a. Unistrut-Type Support Channels: 1/2 inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch. b. Equipment Racks:
5/8 inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch.
2.1
A. B.
C.
D. E.
2.2 J-TYPE CABLE SUPPORT HOOKS
A. Cable support hooks shall be a wide-base type for use in a non-continuous pathway. B. Hooks shall be Galvanized
metal for smooth cable pull and corrosion resistance.
C. Hooks shall:
1. Comply with UL, CUL, NEC and TIA requirements for structured cabling systems.
2. Provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to limit cable bending per cable manufacturers'
recommendations.
3. Have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.
4. Should include an integrated cable retention clip
5. Be capable of being installed in a single- or multiple-hook ("tree") configuration. D. The use of "strap" or
"flexible" type cable supports shall not be permitted.
E. Hooks shall be 4 inch base diameter
F. Acceptable manufacturer: CADDY (ERICO)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for general installation guidelines.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting
items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting
with minimum interference with other items in the
vicinity.
E. Mount ladder type runway above equipment racks and attached to walls perpendicularly and vertically. Attach to
equipment racks using 6" stand-offs.
F. Fasten hanger rods, threaded rods, conduit clamps, and pull boxes to building
structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, beam clamps, and/or spring steel clips.
G. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; steel
expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete
surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs. Do not use double-sided adhesive tapes.
H. Independently support all raceways and cable trays from structural members only. Do not fasten
raceway supports to pipe hangers or rods, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, electrical
equipment, or raceway.
1. Under no circumstances are structural steel members to be drilled or welded without written
permission from the principle structural Engineer and Owner.
I. Fabricate raceway and cable runway supports, such as ceiling trapeze, from structural steel or
steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with
spring lock washers under all nuts. Attach raceway and cable tray to support structure
using appropriate strap or clamp hardware.
K. Do not fasten raceways with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for
temporary raceway support during construction, before wire and cable are pulled.
L. Securely attach backboards, enclosures, and cabinets to wall or floor with a minimum of four
anchors:
1. Install material and trim plumb.
2. Anchor surface-mounted enclosures using structural supports at each corner.
3. Provide accessory feet for freestanding equipment cabinets.
M. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support recessed mounted enclosures in stud walls.
N. Use fiberglass or special coated metallic supports in areas subject to corrosives.
O. Support cable runway and multiple raceways adjacent to each other by ceiling trapeze.
P. Support individual raceways by wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze; fastened by wood
screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion shields on concrete or
brick, and machine screws or welded thread studs on steelwork.
Q. Do not use nails anywhere or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry as a base for raceway or
box fastenings. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use
wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
R. The use of "bridle rings" shall not be permitted.
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
A. Where installed free-air above suspended ceiling or below raised floor, support cables using J-hook
type cable supports installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
B. Support hooks from structure. Do not support from ceiling pencil rod, black iron, ceiling grid, conduit,
ductwork, pipe or other trades work.
C. Space I-hook cable supports every 4 ft or in accordance with cable manufacturer's
specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 17
D. I-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider diameter
of cable type(s) being installed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
E. 3.3
A. J-hook fill capacities shall be based on initially installed quantity of cable plus 50%.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply fire-stopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Fire- stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire-stopping."
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to
communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 1 for
requirements for
Standards, Submittals, Quality Assurance, DeliverylStoragelHandling, and Guarantee for:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing
2. Surface Raceways
3. Outlet and Device Boxes
4. Pull and Junction Boxes.
5. Floor Boxes
6. Handholes and Boxes for Exterior Underground Wiring
7. Sleeves for Raceways I Sleeve Seals
8. Poke Through Fittings
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 01 General Requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 19
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for
products identified in Part 1 of this Section.
2.2 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum outlet box size shall be 4 inches (minimum) square by 2 1/8 inches deep
with single-gang trim ring (device cover), unless noted otherwise on drawings. Total
depth of the assembly including the trim ring shall not be less than 2 1/2 inches.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Size Communications Pull Boxes per TIA-569-B "Commercial Building Standard
for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" as detailed below, unless noted
otherwise on drawings.
B. Where a pull box is used with raceway(s) smaller than 11,4" trade size, minimum
junction box size
shall be 4 11/16" square by 2 1/8 inches deep, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
C. Where pull box is used with raceway(s) of 1%" trade size or larger, pull box shall:
1. for straight pull through, have a length of at least 8-times trade-size diameter of
largest raceway;
2. for angle and U pulls:
a. have a distance between each raceway entry inside box and opposite wall ofbox of at least
6-times trade-size diameter of largest raceway, this distance being increased by
sum of trade-size diameters of other raceways on same wall of box; and
b. have a distance between nearest edges of each raceway entry enclosing same conductor of
at least (1) six times trade-size diameter of raceway; or (2) six times trade-size
diameter of larger raceway if they are of different sizes.
c. for a raceway entering wall of a pull box opposite to a removable cover, have a distance from
wall to cover of not less than trade-size diameter of largest raceway plus 6-times
diameter of largest conductor.
2.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum communications raceway size shall be 1 inch, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Manufacturers: Carlon, Pyramid.
B. Size innerduct for maximum 40% fill (cable vs. innerduct LD.). Minimum innerduct
duct size shall be 1-1/4 inch (LD.) unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C. Indoor Innerduct shall be:
1. Corrugated.
2. Rated
a. Riser where installed in a vertical path defined as a "Riser" by applicable Codes
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
b. Plenum where installed in a return-air plenum
D. Innerduct color shall be as follows:
1. Riser: ORANGE
2. Plenum: ORANGE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for Outlet
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 20
Boxes for general installation requirements
3.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Spacing for Pull and Junction Boxes for Communications shall be as follows.
Separate lengths with
pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
1. I-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 100 feet.
2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of
raceway unless
Drawings show stricter requirements.
B. Provide Communications Pull Boxes on straight section of raceway.
1. Do not use Pull Boxes in place of bends in raceway unless shown on
drawings. C. Provide Communications Pull Boxes wherever there is a
reverse bend in run.
3.3 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Provide communications outlet boxes for each communications outlet or as
noted on drawings.
3.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS:
A. Provide one conduit from each communications outlet box. Horizontal conduit runs
between outlet
boxes are not allowed.
1. Terminate conduit above closest accessible ceiling.
a. Where no suspended ceiling is present, extend conduit to suspended ceiling.
2. Provide insulated bushings on all raceways.
3.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Flexible Non-metallic Innerduct (e.g. "Innerduct") shall be used as follows:
1. To segment conduits, thereby increasing their capacity.
2. As protection to backbone fiber optic cables installed in cable tray or Cable Support Hooks.
.
SECTION 27 -IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for labeling of
communications cabling, termination components, pathways and spaces.
B. All Backbone and Horizontal Cables, Communications Outlets and Termination components
(e.g. Copper and Fiber Optic Patch Panels) shall be clearly labeled by the Contractor to
identify them as unique throughout the project.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 21
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide samples of all label types planned
for the project.
These samples shall include examples of the lettering to be used and shall follow the standards
detailed below.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance requirements
for the project.
2.1 GENERAL
A. Labels shall be machine generated and be permanent.
B. No hand written or non permanent labels allowed unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. All labels and markings shall be physically and chemically resistant to damage that
would make the label unreadable.
D. Characters on all labels shall be Black printed on a background of contrasting color.
E. Labels shall match the Communications Outlet layout and Patch Panel design and
shall be as large as practicable (up to 16-point) to fit properly.
1. No lettering shall be smaller than lO-point.
F. Cable labels shall be self-laminating, White / Transparent Vinyl and incorporate an
integrated clear lamination which, when the label is wrapped around the cable, covers the
printed part of
the label.
1. Labels shall be of adequate size to accommodate the circumference of the cable(s)
being marked and properly self-laminate over the full extent of the printed area of the
label.
2. Labels used on larger cables (e.g. Copper Backbone) may be wrapped with clear non-
removable tape.
G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All cables, termination equipment and hardware shall be labeled in accordance with TIA
labeling standards.
B. All Cables shall be identified and labeled AT BOTH ENDS.
C. Cable labels shall be wrapped around the cable (not a "flag").
D. The printed identifier shall be covered by the clear laminating part of the cable label.
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
A. Technology Distribution Room (TDR)
1. The TDR room number shall be based on the guest room numbering.
2. The TDR room number shall include the floor number (i.e 05TDRN,
05TDRS). B. IDF/MDF - Existing, located in room 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 22
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
C. IDF/MDF - Existing located in rooms 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
3.3 MODULAR PATCH PANEL
A. Modular Patch Panels used to terminate Horizontal Cabling shall be labeled to identify:
- the Patch Panel I.D., and
- the individual Outlet I.D.s .
3.4 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Label each
cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF- MDF(M50-
###/SM-###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) M50-
### = Fiber Count; 50/125-micron multimode fiber
SM-### = Fiber Count; Single-mode fiber
B. Each Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall be clearly labeled with a unique identifying code to identify:
- The near end optical fiber adapter (e.g., coupler) letter.
- The used ports.
- The far end TR room number.
- The far end coupler letter.
- Fiber type (e.g., M50 or SM)
- Far end used ports.
1. The cable identifiers are to be secured to the front cover of the panel enclosure.
2. Patch panel labels shall be visible from front of panel without opening panel cover.
3. Place patch panel labels for fiber strands on manufacturer designated labeling areas.
3.5 BACKBONE COPPER CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Label each cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF-
MDF (###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) ### = Pair Count
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. The Communications Outlet shall be located in zones as indicated on drawings with a unique identifier.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 23
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
B. Each Communications Outlet shall be labeled with a unique identifier.
1. Each cable terminated at the Communications Outlet will be labeled with the same identifying code(s).
C. Communications Outlet labels shall be positioned in the recessed label holders on the
faceplate and covered with the clear plastic covers.
1. Where Communications Outlet Faceplates not incorporating recessed holders are allowed,
the faceplate labels shall be protected with a clear laminate.
D. Horizontal Cables shall be labeled with the Communications Outlet ill - matching the Jack to which it
is terminated - as detailed herein.
a. Horizontal Cables be labeled within 4-inches of the cable at each end.
E. The Communication Outlet labeling code: TBD F.
Communication Cable labeling code: TBD
3.7 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct containing fiber optic cable installed under this project shall be labeled where exposed.
1. This includes areas where the innerduct is installed in trays and in equipment rooms. B. The innerduct
shall be labeled with a durable Yellow Polyethylene tag that reads "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE"
1. The tag shall provide blank spaces for adding fiber count and cable destination information.
2. The destination of the cable(s) contained in the Innerduct and the fiber count shall be marked on the
tag.
a. Hand lettering is acceptable on this tag, using an indelible type ink. C. The tag
shall be secured to the Innerduct using self-locking ties.
Note: If armored optical fiber cable is used, the use of innerduct may not be required.
3.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING AND GROUNDING:
A. All telecommunications bonding and grounding should be labeled as close as practicable (Le. For
ease of access and to read the label) to the point of termination. B. Labels shall be non-metallic and
include the following:
WARNING
IF THIS BONDING CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL VISION VOICE &
DATA SOLUTIONS
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 24
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Equipment
Room Fittings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to General Requirements" which identifies related specification sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. CEA-31O-E, Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, 2005.
1.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
B. When a component is specified below as having a "powder coat finish", the surface finish shall
meet the following requirements:
1. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2197 - 98(2004) Standard Test Method for Adhesion of
Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion, Method A, there shall be no exposed metal or
discoloration with a 5.5-kg weight.
2. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3359 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Measuring
Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B, there shall be no flaking.
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
3. When tested in accordance with ASTM D522 - 93a(2008) Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend
Test of Attached Organic Coatings, there shall be no cracking or lifting on a .0125 inch diameter mandrel.
4. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3363 - 05 Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil
Test, coating shall withstand a minimum gauge hardness of 2H.
5. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2794 - 93(2004) Standard Test Method for
Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact), there shall be no chipping
or cracks with an 80 in-lb. direct hit or a 60 in-lb. indirect hit.
6. When tested in accordance with FED-STD-141, method 6192, with 1 kg load and 1000
cycles, there shall be a maximum 80-mg. loss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS (FREE STANDING)
A. Equipment Racks shall be of aluminum construction with a polyurethane or powder-coat finish.
1. Finish Color shall be BLACK.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 25
B. The Rack shall be 84" (213 cm) tall with an 18" (38 cm) base depth and 6" (15.24 cm) inside channel
depth.
C. The Rack base shall be pre-drilled for securing rack to the floor.
D. The Rack shall be UL Listed.
E. Rack rails shall be spaced for 19" mounting rail-to-rail and shall be of a U shaped
construction with 12/24 pre-tapped holes in the CEA-31O-E standard hole pattern specifications
(5/8" - 518" - 1/2") providing 45 rack spaces on both the front and rear.
1. Rails shall have a universal side-drilling pattern to allow racks to be bolted together or
attachment of accessories.
2. Equipment Racks shall accept Vertical and Horizontal Cable Management hardware as
described below.
F. Each rack shall be supplied with:
1. a ground bar and #6 AWG Ground lug,
2. a minimum of fifty (50) 12/24 mounting screws shall be included with each Equipment Rack, and
3. a minimum of ten (10) releasable (e.g. "hook & loop") cable support ties.
a. Ties shall be individual units with a latch. A roll of hook & loop material is not acceptable. G.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, Allen Tel, or Hubbell
2.2 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER
A. The vertical cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front and of each
equipment rack.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, 84 inches (213 cm), 45U high and
10 inch (15.24 cm) width. Cable management fingers shall be provided at 1U vertically to accommodate
routing of trunk cabling and neat, organized patch cord routing. Provided with 12-inch (15.24 cm) deep
(minimum) cable management fingers.
The horizontal cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front of each equipment
rack.
The vertical cable manager shall be double sided and equipped with dual hinge mounted doors on
the front. The vertical cable manager shall be provided with side cover panels for end racks.
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
The horizontal channel shall be comprised of two pieces:
1. the cable management panel, and
2. a hinged cover. B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C. The horizontal cable management channel shall be steel in construction and have a black powder
coat finish
D. The horizontal channel height shall be 2-RU (3.5").
E. The horizontal channels shall be manufactured of steel for rigidity.
1. Flat steel channel rings shall not be acceptable.
2. Channel depth shall be 2-RU (3.5")
F. The channel cover shall be hinged at the bottom and top, allowing it to snap open or closed.
1. There shall be no fasteners required for installation of the cover.
2. The cover shall not be removable unless the cover is in the horizontal position.
G. The horizontal channel base shall incorporate pass-through holes to allow patch cords to
connect at the rear of hubs.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 26
1. The pass-through holes shall be rolled edge design to prevent cable chafing. Rubber or plastic
grommets shall not be used.
H. The horizontal channel shall provide for a Rear Cable Organizer to provide for the attachment of a
cable channel equal to the channel cover used on the front.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 27
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
1. The rear cable organizer shall clip to the rear of the panel without the use of tools or
additional fasteners.
I. Manufacturer, Model: Belden or Allen Tel or Hubbell
1. 2-RU Horizontal Deep Channel w/Cover
2. Rear Cable Organizer
2.4 2-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W 2-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails:
a. CEA-31O-E Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Each 2-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. 19" Rack channels
2. Base angles
3. Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
D. Acceptable manufacturer: Belden, Allen Tel or Hubbell
2.5 4-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W x 29" D 4-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails: 19"W, Front & Rear
a. EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Static load capacity: 2,000 lbs.
D. Each 4-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. (4) 19" Rack channels
2. (2) Base angles
3. (2) Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
2.7 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder Rack shall be used in communications equipment rooms (i.e., IDF’s and MDF’s,
Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facilities) to route cabling overhead. B.
Ladder Rack shall be:
1. constructed of 0.065" thick steel, and
2. utilize tubular stringers to support rungs. a.
Stringers shall be 1-112" high.
b. Rungs shall be welded to stringers and shall be spaced 9" on center.
C. Ladder Rack width(s) shall be as shown on the project Drawings. D.
Ladder Rack finish shall be BLACK epoxy.
E. Provide Cable Retaining Posts
1. Height: 4"
2. Color: Black
3. Use at 2 foot intervals.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 28
F. Provide Ladder Rack Radius Drop
1. Color: Black
2. One at every location where cabling is routed through the rungs or tray elevation changes by 6
inches or more.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer: CPI or Hubbell or Siemon
2.8 RACK BRACING
A. Used to secure equipment racks to the overhead cable tray system to stabilize the racks. B. Two
(2) assemblies per rack.
C. Provide and install all appurtenances necessary to secure the racks to the overhead cable tray,
including all brackets, hooks, bolts, washers, nuts and additional accessories, as required
to meet requirements of various rack/cable tray orientations encountered.
2.9 CATV SPLITTER, TRANSCENERS AND RECENERS
A. Shelf
1. Provide and install shelf:
a. Mechanical Room (basement) - 3 RU mounting capacity
b.MDF (ground floor) - 4 RU mounting capacity
2. Install in MDF, room 121 (ground floor)
3. Coordinate location of shelf in Data Center Primary with IT group
4. Color: Black
5. Qty: 1 each
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Provide equipment racks and cabinets as shown on the project Drawings. B. All
racks shall be bolted to the floor per manufacturers recommendations. C. Racks
shall be secured to the cable tray as described above.
D. Provide Horizontal and Vertical Cable Management in equipment racks per the project
Drawings.
E. Provide ground bar or lug in each equipment rack.
1. Bond rack mounted ground bar or lug to telecommunications room ground bar.
2. Multiple racks in common room shall be joined and ground made common.
3.2 LADDER RACK
A. Provide ladder rack and accessories necessary for a complete system.
B. Size and layout of the ladder rack shall be as shown on the project Drawings. C. Install
ladder rack and accessories per manufacturers' installation instructions.
D. A ladder rack in the TDR shall be installed above the racks as indicated on the drawings.
E. The ladder rack shall always be aligned with the front of the racks and braced to the racks with
threaded rod and brackets or support brackets made by the tray or rack manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
F. Radius drops shall be used where the cable drops from ladder rack to rack and at elevation changes
6" or more.
G. Provide cable retaining posts at 2 foot intervals on both sides of all ladder rack
H. Where ladder rack must be supported from the building structure:
1. Provide 3/8" threaded rods for support of 12" wide or smaller tray.
2. Provide 1/2" threaded rods for support of tray greater than 12" in width.
1. Maximum allowable deviation of tray from level horizontal plane measured across length of ladder
rack shall be 1/2", with the tray loaded to capacity.
J. Bond tray components together using manufacturer's standard accessories.
K. Fasten cables to ladder rack at intervals not to exceed 4 ft.
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 29
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for intra-building backbone cabling.
B. Both Copper and Fiber Optic cables and termination components are covered herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. ANSIffIA-598-C-2005: Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
2. TIA/EIA 455-21-A: Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices
3. ANSIffIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant; lEC 61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part
4-1: Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement
4. ANSI ffIA/EIA-526-7: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable
Plant
5. UL 910: UL Standard for Safety Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for
Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air
6. UL 1666: Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed
Vertically in Shafts
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies Work by the Owner affecting the
subsystem(s) covered by this section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
E. The cable shall consist of a core of solid-copper conductors insulated with polyethylene covered
by a PVC skin.
F. Jacket Type: PVC; Black or Grey color. G.
Cable Rating: NEC Article 800, UL listed
H. The cable shall meet or exceed the transmission performance requirements of ANSIITIA-
568-C.2 Category 3 or higher.
1. Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 0.772MHz
2. Attenuation: 15 dB/100 meters @ 4 MHz
3. Max Average DC resistance: 26.5 Ohms/l000 ft
4. Max Average DC resistance: 1.50% (unbalanced)
5. Max Capacitance: </= 100 pF/lOO-meters (unbalanced p to g)
6. Mutual capacitance: 15.7-nF/1000 ft @ I-kHz
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 30
a. be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and occlusions to meet optical, mechanical, and
environmental requirements of this specification,
b. have been subjected to minimum tensile proof test by fiber manufacturer equivalent to 100- kpsi, and
c. be splice free. (Factory optical fiber splices are not allowed.)
d. Coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging optical fiber.
e. Individual fiber buffers shall be color coded in accordance with the reference documents. D.
Multimode Optical Fibers:
1. Core diameter shall be 50-micron
2. Transmission Windows: 850-nm and 1300-nm
3. Core Diameter: 50-microns ± 3-microns
4. Cladding Diameter: 125-microns ± 2-microns
5. Coating Diameter: 245-microns ± 5-microns
6. Attenuation (Max) @850-nm: 3.0-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
@1300-nm: 1.5-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
7. LED Bandwidth (min) @850-nm: 1500-MHzekm
@1300-nm): 500-MHzekm
8. Effective Modal BW (min) @850-nm: 2000-MHzekm
@1300-nm: nla
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (A.O): 1297-nm <OW < 1316-nm
10. Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.101 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 3 microns
12. Cladding Non-circularity: < 2.0%
13. Core Non-circularity: < 5.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.2 dB at specified wavelengths.
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.50 dB/km with
80% of measured fibers not exceeding 0.25 dB/km.
16. Minimum supported Ethernet distances shall be:
a. Gigabit Ethernet @850-nm: 1000-meters b.
Gigabit Ethernet @ 1300-nm: 600-meters
E. Single Mode Optical Fibers:
1. Core Diameter: 8.3 -microns
2. Transmission Windows: 13lO-nm and 1550-nm
3. Cladding Diameter: 125 -microns ± 1 -micron
4. Coating Diameter: 245 -microns ± 10 -microns
5. Maximum Attenuation (l31O-nm): 1.0-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
(1550-nm):0.8-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
6. Maximum Dispersion (131O-nm): 0.18-ps/nmekrn
(l550-nm): 17-ps/nmekm
7. Mode Field Diameter (13lO-nm): 9.3 ± 0.5 –micron (l550-nm): 10.5 ± 1.0 -microns
8. Cutoff Wavelength (A.ccf): < 1260-nm
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (/...0): 1301.5-nm < /...0 < 1321.5-nm lO.
Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.092 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 0.8 -microns
12. Coating-Cladding Concentricity: < 12 -microns
13. Cladding Non-circularity: < 1.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.1 dB at specified wavelengths
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP 3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.05-dB1km at
1550-nm. Maximum attenuation change shall not exceed 0.15-dBIkm at 1550-nm. F. Intra-
building Backbone Cable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 31
1. Cable shall be suitable for installation in free air, in building risers, in conduit, in cable tray, in
ladder rack and in innerduct.
2. The cable shall be constructed of all dielectric materials (no conductive materials).
3. Buffer Diameter: 900 -microns (tight buffer)
4. Strength Member: Aramid Yarn, fiberglass
5. Storage Temperature: -40° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
6. Operating Temperature: -20° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
a. Cables rated OFNP and intended for installation in plenum airspaces may carry a low
temperature rating of O°C.
7. Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
8. Maximum Tensile Strength (no irreversible change in attenuation). a.
During Installation 1300-N
b. Long Term 390-N
9. Bending Radius:
a. During Installation 20-times cable diameter b.
No Load l0-times cable diameter
10. Jacket Color
a. Laser-Optimized Multimode - Aqua (defined as fiber having Minimum Effective Modal
Bandwidth (MHz-krn) ~ 2000-MHz-km @ 850-nm)
b. Single-mode - Yellow
11. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Riser" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in
vertical run in shaft or from floor to floor and shall be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics.
a. Jacket material: PVC
b. These cables shall carry an OFNR rating.
12. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Plenum" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in air
handling spaces (plenum rated).
a. Jacket material: LSPVC or equivalent
b. These cables shall carry an OFNP rating.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Berk-tek, Superior Essex, Mohawk
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. Connectors shall be LC-type.
B. The optical fiber within the connector ferrule shall be mechanically secured and index
matching gel shall be included in connector.
1. Connector shall incorporate a fiber stub that is fully bonded into the ferrule. The other end of each
assembly shall be precisely cleaved and placed into an appropriate alignment mechanism
to support a mechanical splice.
C. Connectors shall accept fibers having a buffered diameter of 900-microns. D.
Mechanical Specifications-
1. Ferrule Material Ceramic or Glass-in-Ceramic
2. Housing Material Composite
3. Ferrule size 125 -microns ± 2-microns
D. The connector's performance (measured in a two plug plus an alignment sleeve
configuration), shall be as follows:
a. Insertion loss (average)
b. Cable Retention
c. Durability
d. Impact
e. Thermal Shock f.
Humidity
g. Reflectance (SM only)
per FOTP-171, MM S O.3-dB; SM S O.2-dB per
FOTP~6; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-21; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-2; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 32
FOTP-3; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-5; SO.2-dB Attenuation change
S -55 dB (average)
2. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot
b. Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot, Green (angled polished connectors)
3. SC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode Green (angled polished connectors)
F. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
2.4 FIBER OPTIC COUPLINGS
A. Couplings shall be duplex LC-type. B.
Coupling materials shall be plastic.
C. Alignment sleeve material shall be as follows:
1. Mu1timode Phosphor Bronze or Ceramic
2. Single-mode Ceramic
D. LC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Multimode AQUA
2. Single-mode BLUE
E. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Single-mode GREEN
2.5 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels shall:
1. be enclosed assemblies,
2. incorporate hinged or retractable front cover,
3. be rack mountable on standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks,
4. provide for strain relief of incoming cables,
5. incorporate radius control mechanisms to limit bending of fiber to manufacturer's
recommended minimums,
6. provide protection to both "facilities" and "user" sides of couplings, and
7. be configured to require only front access when patching.
B. Panels shall include provisions for permanent labeling of fiber optic cables.
1. Labeling shall be accessible from front of patch panel and shall not require disassembly of patch
panel enclosure or removal of front cover.
C. Connector couplings shall be mounted on assembly that snaps into patch panel enclosure.
1. This assembly shall be designed to accept variety of coupler types including, ST, SC,
Simplex SC, duplex SC and high-density mini-connectors (e.g., LC).
D. Access to inside of panel enclosure during installation shall be from front and rear.
1. Panels that require any disassembly of cabinet to gain entry will not be accepted. E.
Incoming cables shall not be accessible from patching area of panel.
1. The panel enclosure shall provide physical barrier to access of such cables. F.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
A. Route all cabling as identified in the project Drawings and specifications.
B. Prior to construction, confirm cable rating requirements (e.g., CMR, OFNR, OFCR, CMP, OFNP,
OFCP) for the planned cable route to insure compliance with applicable Code. Identify
any areas where cable other than that specified to the Engineer.
C. Cable shall be free of tension at both ends. In cases where cable must bear stress, provide wire-
mesh grips (e.g. Kellems) to spread stress over longer length of cable.
D. To reduce or eliminate EMI, position tray to provide for following minimum separation
distances from ~480V Power lines (where applicable):
1. Two (2) inches from power lines of <5-kVA (e.g., 20N120V power circuits).
2. Five (5) inches from fluorescent lighting.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 33
3. Six (6) inches from power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit or equivalent shielding in
proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 34
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
4. Twelve (12) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to a
grounded metal conduit pathway.
5. Twenty-four (24) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or
nonmetal pathways.
6. Forty-seven (47) inches from electrical motors and transformers.
E. All Backbone cabling shall be installed as continuous runs without splices.
3.2 BACKBONE COPPER UTP CABLING
A. The Pair Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Terminate Backbone Copper Cable on the Backbone Field in the TDR's and DCP C.
Terminate cable on 48 port patch panels.
1. These patch panels shall be rack-mounted. Refer to the project Drawings.
D. All columns shall be co-located as to simplify installation and subsequent tracing of cross- connect
wiring.
E. Where new cabling is to be integrated with new or existing cabling at the termination location(s),
it will be the responsibility of the Contractor, in cooperation with the Owner, to
coordinate placement of Voice Termination hardware the Local Exchange Carriers) serving the site.
F. When terminating cable, maintain pair twists per manufacturers recommendations.
G. Remove cable jacket only to extent required to make terminations.
H. Cabling entering and exiting fields shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
1. Label all cables and termination components per Section 27 05 53 "Identification For
Communications Systems".
J. The Contractor shall not be responsible for jumper wiring between the Intra-building, Inter- building
and Feed Blocks unless specifically noted otherwise.
K. The Contractor shall not be responsible for connection of Telco connectors to owner
furnished telephone equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.3 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING
A. Strand Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Install fiber optic cables in 1-1/4 inch (3.2 centimeters) innerduct (1.D.) when the run is not in conduit
or when the conduit is 3 inch (7.5 centimeters) or larger.
1. The color of innerduct shall be coordinated if installed near existing innerduct.
C. Visually inspect cables for cuts, blisters and abrasions during installation. D.
Provide cable slack in each backbone fiber optic cable.
1. Slack shall be in addition to length of fiber required for termination requirements.
2. Store cable slack in enclosure designed for this purpose.
3. Slack required shall be as follows:
a. Minimum of 5 meters (each cable if applicable) coiled and secured at the TDR.
E. Terminate backbone fiber optic cable in the specified connector type on the Backbone Fiber
Field
Hampton Inn & Suites Hotel, 135 Second Street, Waltham, MA
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 35
(Fiber Optic Patch Panel).
1. Mate all terminated fibers to couplings mounted in a Fiber Optic Patch Panels.
a. Couplings shall be mounted on a panel that, in turn, snaps into the housing assembly. b. Any
unused panel positions shall be fitted with a blank panel.
c. Connectors from two cables shall never share a common coupling panel.
d. Multimode and Single-mode optical fibers shall be segregated on the panels as to clearly identify
the distinction between the fiber types.
F. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively per the manufacturer's color code - starting with the lowest
number - and mapped "position for position" between patch panels. There shall be no
transpositions in the cabling.
G. Proper orientation of the LC "Keyways" is required at each termination location.
1. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively ie., 1,2,3,4...) on both ends of an optical fiber link.
2. The LC Couplings/Adapters shall be installed in opposite manners on each end (i.e., A-B, AB...on
one end and B-A, B-A... on the other).
1. Refer to TIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" H. Label
all cables and termination components per Section 270553 "Identification For Communications
Systems".
1. All couplings shall be fitted with a dust cap.
3.4 TESTING
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the
requirements for scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. Backbone UTP Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall be responsible for testing each cable segment.
2. Backbone UTP cable pairs shall be verified for wire map (transposed/reversed/split pairs) and shorts
through toning of each conductor.
3. Cable shield or coupled bonding conductor shall be verified for end-to-end continuity.
4. Backbone Voice cables shall be 100% free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for continuity,
pair validity and polarity and conductor position on the termination blocks (e.g. 110). Any mis-positioned
pairs shall be corrected.
C. Where cross-connection of Voice Cabling sub-systems (e.g., Primary and/or Secondary
Backbone) by the Contractor is specified, each subsystem shall be tested separately followed by a re-
test of the interconnected system after the cross-connection is complete.
D. Fiber Optic Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall detail proposed test plan for each cable type, including equipment to be used,
test frequencies and wavelengths, etc.
2. Test results shall include record of test wavelengths, attenuation measurements, fiber cable
type, fiber strand and overall cabling LD. number, measurement direction, test equipment type, model
and serial number, date, reference setup and crew member name(s).
3. Prior to installation:
a. Visually inspect reels and packaging for damage.
b. Review cable manufacturer's test report for each reel of cable provided to confirm
performance.
c. Perform testing at contractor option to verify performance and cable condition.
4. Post-Installation Testing shall include:
a. Attenuation (Insertion Loss) Testing
b.OTDR - All cables that contain splices and any cable which fail Attenuation testing. c. End-
to-End Optical Attenuation Insertion loss (average) perFOTP-171, MM:5 0.3-
dB; SM :5 0.2-dB
d. Cable Retention per FOTP-6; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change e.
Durability per FOTP-21;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
f. Impact per FOTP-2;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 36
g. Thermal Shock per FOTP-3; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change h.
Humidity per FOTP-5; ~0.2-dB Attenuation change
i. Reflectance (SM only) ~ -55 dB (average)
5. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot b.
Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot
6. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode GREEN
7. Insertion Loss
a. Measure Optical Attenuation perTIAI-526-14-B (Multimode) and TIAJEIA-526-7 (Singlemode)
b. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm and 1300 ± 20-nm wavelengths. c. Test
single-mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm and 1550 ± lO-nm wavelength.
d. Tests shall be performed in both transmission directions.
e. Fiber lengths less than or equal to 300 ft shall test to < 2.0 dB loss.
f. Fiber lengths greater than 300 feet shall test to loss value less than link loss budget for number
of installed connector mated pairs and optical fiber splices, if applicable.
8. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
a. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm wavelength.
b. Test single mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm wavelength.
c. Traces shall be examined for continuity and anomalies.
d. Launch cord shall be minimum 100 ft long, or as noted by test equipment manufacturer.
9. The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of short cable sections.
10. Access Jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing of the entire length of the cable, including
the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used.
11. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2-dB in a Multimode fiber, or 0.1-
.dB in a Single-mode fiber (if applicable) at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing
a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that fiber.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Backbone copper cabling test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor
pair (if applicable) and cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number,
date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
1. For category 3 and higher multi-pair cabling (e.g., 25-pair groupings), continuity verification
required.
2. For category 3 and higher 4-pair cabling, complete transmission performance measurements
required.
C. Backbone fiber optic cabling test results shall include a record of test wavelengths, attenuation
measurements, cable type, fiber strand and overall cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment
type, model and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
SECTION 27- COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for the Horizontal (Station) Cabling
subsystem.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 37
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
B. In this section, the Communications Outlet is considered to consist of a Frame / Faceplate into
which Modular Jacks or other couplings snap, the Modular Jacks and labeling/identification
components.
Unused jack positions are fitted with blanks.
PART I-GENERAL
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Samples of the Communications Outlet "Faceplate(s) shall be submitted prior to construction to
confirm color and material.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Project Drawings for quantities and location of Communications Outlets.
B. All Cables and Termination hardware shall be technically compliant with and installed in
accordance with referenced TIA documents.
C. All cables shall be suitable for installation in the environment defined and shall meet a
Plenum (CMP) rating (or permitted substitute as defined by the NEC).
D. Cables shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed, comply with Article 800 (Communications
Circuits) of the National Electrical Code and shall meet the specifications of
NEMA (low loss), UL 444, and ICEA (where applicable).
E. Horizontal (Station) Cable and Termination Components (Jack, Patch Panel) are specified to function
as a System.
1. Where required for warranty purposes, the manufacturers of cabling and termination
components used (if more than one) shall recognize each other in their Certification Programs. F. No
distinction between "Voice" and "Data" is made in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
G. Station Cable types include:
1. 4-pair Shielded Twisted Pair (FIUTP)
H. Station Cable types not applicable to this project include:
1. Fiber Optic to the Desktop
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s) of connecting components:
1. Includes Modular Jacks, Communications Outlets, and Modular Patch Panels.
2. Components by same manufacturer shall be used throughout project.
3. All components of which the structured cabling system is comprised shall be fully certifiable by one of
the acceptable manufacturers identified above.
J. Value Engineering: The contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the equipment list at
time of procurement and confirming availability with manufacturers and suggesting viable
replacements and/or upgrades that would incur no additional cost to the project
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 38
.
2.2 4-PAIR FIUTP CABLE
A. The 4-pair FIUTP cables shall be constructed of four (4) Foiled twisted pair (FIUTP) with 24- AWG or
23-AWG insulated solid copper conductors.
B. The cable shall incorporate an overall shield.
C. Cable shall meet or exceed TIA Category 6A performance criteria as defined by the
referenced TIA documents.
D. Outer jacket shall be as required to meet flammability requirements for cable type.
E. Cable outside diameter for any 4-pair FIUTP Cable shall not exceed 0.30 in. (7.62 mm) F.
Maximum Pulling Load should not be rated for less than 25 lbs. (11.34 kg)
G. Pairs of a114-pair cables shall be identified by a banded color code in which conductor
insulation is marked with a dominant color and banded with a contrasting color. By pair number, the pair
colors or dominant bands are:
Pair 1: Tip – White/Blue; Ring - Blue (or Blue/White)
Pair 2: Tip - White/Orange; Ring - Orange (or Orange/White) Pair
3: Tip - White/Green; Ring - Green (or Green/White)
Pair 4: Tip – White/Brown; Ring - Brown (or Brown/White) H.
The jacket color shall be as follows:
1. Horizontal Cable designated for Voice/Data - BLUE.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Mohawk.
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.4 COAX STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.5 MODULAR JACKS
A. Jacks shall be 8 position, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed.
B. Jacks shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
C. Jacks shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. D.
Jacks shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
E. Jacks shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant.
Nationally Registered Testing Laboratory (NRTL) VERIFIED for performance. UL
LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
F. Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall snap-mount in an industry standard
keystone opening.
G. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 VO rated thermoplastic.
H. Modular jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and
resilience.
1. Contact Plating shall be a minimum of 50-micro-inches of gold in the contact area over
50micro-inches of nickel.
1. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG stranded or solid conductors.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
J. The interface between jack and station cable shall be insulation displacement type contact.
1. Cable pairs shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to
better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.
2. Jacks shall be compatible with standard single conductor impact termination tools.
3. Jacks shall be supplied with wire retention caps.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 39
K. Jacks shall have an operating temperature range of -lOOC (14°F) to 60°C (140 OF). L. Jacks
shall be pinned per TIA T568B pinning as follows:
Pair 1 - Pins 5 & 4
Pair 2 - Pins 1 & 2
Pair 3 - Pins 3 & 6
Pair 4 - Pins 7 & 8
M. Jacks shall have an attached color-coded wiring instruction label as an aid to the installer. N. Jacks
shall be available in a variety of colors for identification or designation of applications
at the workstation or closet.
1. Default Jack color shall be White unless specified otherwise.
O. Jacks shall have a designation indicating perfonnance (e.g. "Category 6A", "Cat 6A" or
"C6A") either on the front or rear of the connector, which may be visible from the front of the
faceplate.
P. Jacks shall be compatible with TIAJEIA-606-A color code labeling and accept snap on icons
for identification or designation of applications.
Q. Jacks shall be supplied with installed dust covers to protect the jack opening and internal elements
during installation until the jack is in use.
1. No damage to the Jack pinning shall result from insertion or removal of these covers. R. Icons
used at the faceplate
1. Red for DATA
2. Blue for MEDICAL DATA
S. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.6 COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTORS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
A. Flush Faceplates shall accommodate the installation of wall mounted or surface raceway mounted
Communications Outlets.
B. Modular Jacks, fiber optic couplings (if applicable) and coaxial connectors (if applicable) shall snap into
the faceplate.
C. Faceplates shall be constructed of high impact 94 v-o rated thermoplastic (except where
noted otherwise, stainless steel).
D. Faceplates shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified.
E. Faceplate shall be configured to accommodate the number of modular jacks as required by the
location. Refer to installation details drawing.
F. Faceplates shall be available in White and stainless steel
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
1. Faceplate color(s) shall be coordinated with the owner to match the decor of the area in which
the Telecommunications Outlet is located.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell Allen Tel.
Faceplates shall have plastic covers over the mounting screws that can be replaced with a clear plastic
window over a printable paper insert.
Faceplate shall be configured to mount on standard, single gang outlet box when wall mounted.
Faceplates shall provide for TIAlEIA-606-A compliant station labeling
Faceplates at tack board surfaces, painted accent walls, and plastic laminate panels shall be plastic.
COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WALL-MOUNT TELEPHONE
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 40
Faceplates intended to be used in locations where a wall mounted phone set is required shall comply with
the following:
1. Faceplate shall be plastic construction,
2. Faceplate shall accommodate one (1) modular jack meeting the performance requirements for
modular jacks as defined above and positioned to mate with a wall- mounted telephone.
3. Faceplate shall mount on standard single gang outlet box, and
4. Faceplate shall include mounting posts appropriate for mounting a wall-mounted telephone
G.
H.
1.
J.
2.8
A.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
A. Modular Patch Panels shall provide for the termination of Horizontal (Station) cables.
B. The Panels shall incorporate 8 positions, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed Modular Jacks. C. The
Panels shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
D. The Panels shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. E. Jacks
shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
F. The Panels shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant. UL
VERIFIED for performance.
UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
G. Panels shall be rack mountable in standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks. H.
Panels shall be made of black anodized aluminum.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
1. Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at the top and bottom for stiffness.
2. Contact plating shall be a minimum 50-micro-inch gold plating on contact surfaces over 50-
100 micro-inch of nickel compliant with FCC part 68.
1. Panels shall be terminated in T568B wiring scheme.
J. Panels shall be equipped with an IDC-type termination made of fire retardant UL 94VO rated
thermoplastic and tin, lead solder plated IDC
1. Panels shall terminate 22-26 AWG solid conductors, maximum insulated conductors.
2. Panels shall provide wiring identification & color code and maintain a paired punch down
sequence that does not require the overlapping of cable pairs.
K. Panel circuit boards shall be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection.
L. Panels shall have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel.
M. Panels shall have rear cable support bar for strain relief, which shall clip to the rear of the patch
panel.
1. As an option, an external cable support bar may be used.
2. The Panel and cable support hardware shall insure that the minimum bend radius
requirements of the horizontal cabling are satisfied.
N. The port identification numbers on the panel front shall be located so as to minimize
obstruction by patch cords.
O. The panel front shall have two raised panel identification label fields to accept 1/2' label inserts.
P. Panels shall have self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels provided with the
panel for each 8-port adapter.
Q. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden.
2.11 DISTRIBUTION HUBS PATCH PANEL - CATV OVER UTP
A. Rack-mountable passive distribution hubs with 8 or 16 front mounts modular 8-pin jacks for
connection to UTP 4-pair cabling, and "F" fitting on rear panel for connection to coaxial backbone cable.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 41
B. Hubs shall be tested compliant with FCC Part 15 requirements. Bandwidth: 5 - 860 MHz. e. Hubs
shall be supplied with quantities of plug-in terminators to terminate all unused ports. D. Provide
quantities of hubs necessary to provide individual hub connection port for each television outlet in the
system.
3.3 Cable Routing
A. A "Service Loop" for every Horizontal Cable shall be stored in the ceiling above the outlet. . In cases
where cables are routed in the ceiling of the floor below (i.e. under open office spaces, conference
rooms), cables shall be stored in the ceiling of the floor below or prior to entering raceway.
1. Loop length shall be lO-ft. (3-meters).
2. The total length of the horizontal cable including the loop shall not exceed 295-ft (90-meters).
3. The loop shall be placed in the ceiling at the last support (e.g.. J-Hook) before the cables enter a
fishable wall, conduit, surface raceway or box.
4. Loop radius (minimum) shall be 4X the minimum bend radius for the cable.
3.3 Cable Routing
B. During installation, the minimum bend radius shall be eight times the outside diameter of FIUTP cables
and 20 times the outside diameter of fiber cables.
C. At the point of termination, the minimum bend radius shall be four times the outside diameter of FIUTP
cables and 10 times the outside diameter of fiber cables. If fiber cable manufacturer allows tighter bend
radius, shall not exceed manufacturers requirements.
D. FIUTP cables to be run a minimum of 2 in. (5 cm.) from AC power distribution cables unless in
separate steel channels.
E. A minimum separation of 5 in. (12.5 cm.) should be maintained between FIUTP communications
cables and fluorescent light ballasts.
F. All power and communications cables are to cross perpendicularly where crossings are absolutely
necessary.
G. Where cables are run in system furniture raceways, communications cables are to be run in separate
physical channels within the furniture system. A minimum separation of 2 in. (5 cm.) should be maintained
between the power and communications cable routes. Where power and communications cables are to
cross paths within the furniture system, cables are to cross perpendicularly.
H. The delivery of cable runs to the furniture system should be developed in accordance with the
capabilities of the particular system to be used. The cables can be fed down a power pole or a column
and enter the furniture using a flex conduit. Care should be taken to ensure that sufficient entry points are
provided into the furniture system and that the flex conduit is of sufficient diameter.
1. Cabling shall be run in free air, in conduit, in raceways or in cable tray as designated on the project
Drawings.
1. Where installed in Cable Tray, cables shall be laid neatly in the tray and not be tie wrapped.
After exiting the tray, cables shall be tie wrapped and supported every 3 to 5 ft (l to 1.5 m) with approved
non-continuous cable support devices, such as communications rated J-hooks.
2. Where installed in free-air, cables shall be supported using J-hook type cable supports installed in
accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
a. Spacing of I-hook cable supports shall be every 3 to 5 ft (1 to 1.5 m) or in accordance with cable
manufacturer's specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
b. J-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider the diameter
of the cable type(s) being installed.
3.4 Testing
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the requirements for
scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. All cabling shall be 100% fault free unless noted otherwise. If any cable is found to be outside the
specification defined herein, that cable and the associated termination(s) shall be replaced
by the contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated.
C. Testing of FIUTP Horizontal Cabling shall be as follows:
1. Testing shall be from the Jack at the Communications Outlet to the Patch Panel on which the cables
are terminated at the Telecommunications Room serving that location.
2. Testing shall be per TIA-1152 Permanent Link test configurations for the applicable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 42
categories of cabling under test.
3. All cables shall be free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for Continuity, Pair Validity and
Polarity, and Wire Map (Conductor Position on the Modular Jack).
3.4 Testing
4. In addition to the above, Performance Testing shall be performed on all cables. Testing of the
Transmission Performance shall include the following: Wire
map, including shield connection if present
Length
Insertion 10ssNEXT loss, measured from local end
NEXT loss, measured from far-end
PSNEXT loss, measured from local end
PSNEXT loss, measured from far-end
ACRF
PSACRF
Return loss, measured from local end
Return loss, measured from far-end
Propagation Delay
5. Delay Skew Cables shall be tested to the maximum frequency defined by the standards covering
the specified performance category.
a. Transmission Performance Testing shall be performed using a test instrument designed for
testing to the specified frequencies.
b. Test records shall verify "PASS" on each cable and display the specified parameters
comparing test values with standards based "templates" integral to the unit.
6. The Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) used for the cable type under test shall be
traceable to manufacturer's product data.
a. Test results obtained using an incorrect NVP will be rejected.
D. CATV OVER UTP Testing
1. Installer shall completely test all system functions and distribution lines. Levels at all outlets shall be
tested for signal strength using a signal strength meter (Blonder-Tongue FSM-Il or
equal).
2. A standard receiver fed from the same outlets shall show no visible components of cross modulation or
beat interference. At each outlet, signal strength shall be measured at lowest and highest frequency used
in the system and results recorded and entered in manuals.
3. The signal-to-noise ratio shall be tested at the last outlet on the longest branch by recording the signal
strength of the picture carrier of each channel and them recording the readings at the
same frequencies with the in put to the amplifiers terminated at 75 ohms.
4. All readings of the above tests shall be recorded and entered in the manuals.
3.5 Documentation
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable
(or Outlet) J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number, date,
reference setup, and crew member name(s).
C. Information added by the Contractor to Record Drawings relating to Horizontal Cabling shall
include cable routes, outlet locations and numbering and other detail necessary to document.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 43
3.6 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer's Warranty covering all Copper and Fiber Optic
Cabling and Connecting Components.
1. Materials shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from date of
substantial completion of this work.
2. Labor and workmanship shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from
date of substantial completion of this work.
3. The Warranty on the Station Cabling and Components shall be a complete System Channel
Warranty and cover the Permanent Link (Communications Outlet to Patch Panel or
Block) as defined by the referenced TIA documents.
4. This Warranty shall be direct from the manufacturer(s) of the cabling and
connecting components to the Owner.
B. All other materials shall carry the minimum Warranty as identified in Section 27
C. This guarantee shall include all labor. material and travel time. See Division 1 "General
Conditions" and "General Requirements" - Guarantee Documents for further requirements.
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES &
ADAPTERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Connecting
Cords,
Devices &
Adapters. B.
Included are:
1. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords
2. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
3. Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
C. Quantities and lengths for each item shall be as detailed in the Execution part of this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality
assurance requirements for the project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 44
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 4-PAIR MODULAR PATCH CORDS
A. 4-pair Modular Patch cords are used to connect equipment to the communications
outlet and for signal routing within the MDF and IDF’s.
B. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords shall:
1. be constructed of four (4), 24 AWG, 7/32 stranded tinned copper twisted pairs,
insulated with polyethylene, and
2. be twisted-pair (F/UTP).
C. Patch Cord Modular Plugs shall be 8P8C and be pinned TlA T568B.
1. The dimensions of the finished plug assembly shall allow for patch cords to be
positioned in adjacent ports of the Modular Patch Panel specified herein.
D. Patch Cord Jacket shall be colored PVC and be configured with a snagless molded boot of
matching color according to Hilton specifications
E. Patch Cords shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of TlA Category 6.
1. Where required by the Manufacturers performance Warranty, the Patch Cords shall be
by the cabling and/or connecting component manufacturer whose products are installed
under this
project or by a manufacturer recognized and approved by that manufacturer.
F. Patch Cords shall be 100% factory tested.
G. Patch Cords shall be Independently Verified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL).
H. Patch Cords shall be assembled by a manufacturer recognized by the manufacturer(s)
of the cable and termination components used in the horizontal station "link".
1. Patch Cords shall be channel balanced with the Jacks & Patch Panels specified
herein for use in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
1. Cable used to manufacture patch cords meets the category 6 specifications set forth by both
ANSIITlA-568-C.2-2009 and ISOIIEC 11801:2002.
2.2 COAX PATCH CORDS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Cords are used to connect equipment to the backbone cabling
and (if applicable) interconnect backbone cabling segments.
C. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
2.3 FiBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate multimode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cabling
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic ferrules.
4. have connector bodies that are BEIGE, BLUE, BLACK or CLEAR in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have an AQUA cable jacket, and
7. be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. C.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex LC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are BLUE in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 45
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. D.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex SC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system if specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are GREEN in color, with BLUE boot
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. E. Fiber Patch Cords shall be
100% factory-tested.
1. Test documentation and/or manufacturer's quality control certification shall be included with
each Patch Cord or be available from the manufacturer on request.
2. Fiber jumpers shall meet a minimum of IEEE 802.3 series of 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Standards as well as IEC-60793-2-l0 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser
bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish loose materials. Obtain written confirmation by an authorized
representative of client for all loose materials furnished.7
B. Prior to Construction, confirm connector types, length and quantities with client. For
purposes of bidding, consider requirements as detailed below.
3.2 QUANTITIES & LENGTHS
A. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patch panel in TDR
2. Provide lengths with minimal slacks
3. Provide 10% spare
B. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patient rooms, nurse stations, offices
2. Lengths - 7 foot
3. Color - Green
4. Provide 10% spare
C. Furnish Duplex Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
D. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
E. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (3) per Headend, Splitter and TDR's.
2. Provide lengths as required.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 1
SECTION 271000
WIRELESS NETWORK
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The objective of this and related specification documents is to define a universal and
structured communications cable plant infrastructure for use on this project. The goal of
such a cable plant is to accommodate all current and anticipated voice and data systems
with little or no modification, thus reducing administration and maintenance demand for
resources.
B. The cable plant standards address a range of typical work and living areas found. The areas include
one-bedroom and studio apartments, fixed offices, open office furniture systems, conference rooms and
all support spaces. This document specifies the design and installation for the station outlets, station
cabling, communication support rooms, equipment rooms, backbone cabling and the service
provider company and access provider company entrance facilities.
C. This document does not specify the communications equipment such as the network
hubs, routers, telephone switch and servers. However, the interface between such
equipment and the cable plant is defined herein.
D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all Division 27
Sections.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. - Grounding & Bonding for Communications
Systems B. - Hangers and Supports for
Communications Systems C. - Boxes for
Communications Systems
D. - Ladder racks for Communications Systems the MDF and IDF’s
E. - Identification for Communications Systems
F. - Communications Equipment Room Fittings G. - Communications Backbone Cabling
H. - Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. - Communication Connecting Cords, Devices & Adapters
J. - Audio-visual System
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. This Infrastructure Standard is based on the TIA-568-C Series - Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standards, and TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, along with others noted below. These
documents are published by the Telecommunications Industry Association.
B. The design, cable and component selection, and installation practices shall conform with the
following:
1. TIAlEIA-526-7: Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 2
2. TIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; IEC
61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-1:
Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement.
3. ANSIfTIA-568-C-series: Generic and Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards.
4. ANSIfTIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
5. ANSIfTIA_-606-A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings.
6. ANSI-J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
7. TIA-758-A: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.
8. TIAlEIA-862: Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for Commercial Buildings
9. TIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards for Data Centers
10. TIA-1005: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises
11. TIA-1152: Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
12. Federal Communications Commission Title 47 I FCC Part 15, FCC Part 68
13. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3, 802.5, 802.11
14. National Electrical Code Article 770 "Optical Fiber Cables" and Article 800 "Communications
Circuits"
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
16. Local Electrical Code
17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code
18. NFPA 75 Protection of Electrical Computer Data Processing Equipment
19. OSHA 10 Safety Standards
20. Applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings and Approvals
21. UL 444 Communications Cables
22. National, state and local health, safety and building codes
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following definitions are specific to the communications environment and shall apply to this
document and its companion sections for clarification and direction.
1. Contractor: The Communications Contractor or sub-contractors responsible for installation,
termination, test and documentation of communications cabling, termination components,
pathway hardware, telecommunications equipment room hardware and related components
detailed in the technical sections of this Division of work.
2. Communications Cable Plant: All communications cabling, wiring, termination hardware, racks,
cabinets, labeling and all other associated hardware.
3. Communications Outlet: The device used to terminate station cables in couplers or connectors at
user locations. It is the interface between the Station Cable and the end user's equipment.
4. Horizontal (Station) Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects the
Communications Outlet to the MDF or IDF. It is typically run horizontally on the same floor in a star
topology emanating from the MDF or IDF.
5. Outlet ID: A unique alpha-numeric identification used for referencing a communications outlet.
The Outlet ID is a subset of the Cable ID.
6. Cable ID: A unique, alpha-numeric identification used for tagging the station cables, the jacks within
a communications outlet and the termination blocks or patch panels.
7. 110-Block: References throughout this document to a llO-Block signify a 100-pair llO-block
that is 4 rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables) wide or a 300-pair 110 block that is
12 rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables or 1 x 25-pair cable) wide
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 3
regardless of manufacturer or mounting type, unless otherwise noted.
8. Station Field: 8-position, 8-conductor Modular (8P8C; "RJ-45") termination panel used at the
MDF or IDF to distribute the station cables to the Station Outlets.
9. Backbone Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects each IDF with the
Data Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room or Entrance Facility or MDF. The Backbone
cabling is typically run vertically in a star topology emanating from the Data Center,
Telecommunications Equipment Room (MDF) or Entrance Facility to all IDF’s. Backbone cabling
consists of both copper and fiber cables.
10. Copper Backbone Field: RJ-45 style termination panel or 11O-Block used to terminate
backbone cabling in the Data Center, MDF or Telecommunications Data Equipment Room,
Entrance Facility or IDF.
11. Fiber Backbone Field: Fiber Optic Patch Panels used to terminate backbone cabling in the Data
Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facility or MDF.
12. Data Equipment Field: The area in a 19" rack that contains the active equipment that makes up the
local area network. This equipment could be made up of hubs, switches or other active
hardware.
13. The MDF: A room that serves as the distribution point of station cabling to the surrounding area
referred to as the MDF Zone. The MDF also houses all the terminations of station and backbone
cabling as well as network, voice, security and other active equipment.
14. MDF or IDF Zone: An area served by a Telecommunications Room. All Station Cabling from outlets
in a MDF or IDF Zone originate from that MDF or IDF.
15. Entrance Facility (EF): The room where the telephone Company point-of-demarcation
(DEMARC) is installed or originates from their public facilities. This is the service hand-off point
or the point of origin for extending the DEMARC to other rooms within the building.
16. Permanent (Cable) Link: Includes the Communications Outlet, station cable and termination
at the MDF or IDF’s.
17. Channel: Same as Basic Link, but also includes patch cords at the Communications Outlet and in
the MDF or IDF.
18. Cross-Connect: Group of connection points, wall or rack mounted, used to mechanically
terminate and administer building wiring.
19. Zone Cabling: A cabling plan, typically used in an open office area, which provides for a
reconfigurable link between the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect (e.g. at the IDF’s or MDF)
and the work area I user. An intermediate connection point is positioned close to the workstations
served.
20. Consolidation Point: In a Zone Cabling system, an intermediate connection point between the
permanently installed cabling extending from the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect, and
moveable horizontal cabling extending to the Telecommunications Outlet.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. The following abbreviations and acronyms shall apply to this document and its companion sections
for clarification and direction.
8P8C
AFF
ANSI
ATM
AWG
BAS
CDDI
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 4
cm
CM
CMP
CMR
dB
DTMF
EIA
EF
EIDF
Eight Position, Eight Conductor modular Jack. Often referred to as an "RJ-45".
Above Finished Floor
American National Standard Institute
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
American Wire Gauge Building
Automation System
Fiber Distributed Data Interface over Copper
centimeters
Communications cable rated for general purpose use
Communications cable rated for use in plenum areas
Communications cable rated for use in risers and vertical runs
Decibel
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Electronic Industries Association
Entrance Facility
Equipment Intermediate Distribution Facility
ELFEXT Equal-Level Far-End Cross Talk (pair-to-pair) FCC
FDDI
ft.
FIUTP
TR
HCP
IEEE
in.
kg.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
lbs.
LAN m
mm
Mbps
MDF
MHz
!lm
N
NEXT
OFNP
OFNR
OTDR
PBX
pF
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 5
Federal Communications Commission
Fiber Distributed Data Interface feet
Foiled Unshielded Twisted Pair
No shielding around individual pairs and an overall foil shield under the cable jacket
Telecommunications Room
Horizontal Connection Point
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers inch
kilogram
Pounds
Local Area Network
meters
millimeters
Megabits per second
Main Distribution Frame
Mega Hertz (lE6 Hz)
Micrometer or micron (lOE-6 meter)
Newton
Near End Cross Talk
Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum
Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser Optical
Time Domain Reflectometer
Private Branch Exchange (Telephone Switch) Pico
Farad (lOE-12 Farad)
PSNEXT Power Sum Near End Cross Talk
PVC
RU
TIA
TR
USOC
Polyvinyl Chloride
Rack Unit (1.75 inches) Telecommunications
Industry Association
Telecommunications Room
U
T
P
W
A
N
1.6 WORK BY VISION VOICE & DATA SOLUTIONS UNDER A SEPARATE
CONTRACT WITH THE OWNER
Unshielded Twisted
Pair Wide Area
Network
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 6
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. As a part of this contract with the Owner, Western Builders will subBeldencontract to provide:
1. Active electronics for interface with building voice and data cabling systems.
2. The telephone system & connections from telephone/data equipment to Contractor provided cabling.
3. Connections between Backbone and Horizontal Cabling.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for cabling and equipment provided under this Section:
1. Note that for satisfying submittal requirements, "Product Data" is usually more
appropriate than true "Shop Drawings" as usually defined. However, expression
"Shop
Drawings" is generally used throughout specification.
B. Refer to Belden Warranted Solution Standards for general guidelines on product or installation
information to be submitted.
C. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items submitted.
D. Include proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated
in specification and shown on drawings.
E. When manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct
cross-reference number for each item. Submittals shall be clearly marked and noted accordingly.
F. When equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional items under
one designation, submittals shall be complete and include required components.
G. Submittals should be grouped to include complete documentation of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal. Where applicable, dimensions shall be marked
in units to match those specified.
H. Submittals shall be in electronic form (Adobe Acrobat PDF) or paper.
1. Paper documents shall be original catalog sheets or photocopies thereof.
2. Facsimile (fax) sheets shall not be used by contractors.
1. Where submittals cover products containing potentially hazardous non-metallic materials,
Vision shall include "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) from manufacturer stating physical
and chemical properties of components and precautionary considerations required.
J. Upon request by the owner or engineer, the contractor shall submit one 2-foot section of each
cable type from cable reels sent to the site for Engineer's final approval. This two-foot section
shall have manufacturer's cable markings visible.
K. Contractor shall submit a floor plan outlet labeling spreadsheet indicating the Communications
Outlet ill for each communications outlet.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. Refer to Section 27 05 53, Identification for Communications Systems, for description of
Communications Outlet ID.
a. Floor plan outlet labeling drawings shall be provided, in Adobe Acrobat.
2. Drawings shall be submitted a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to substantial completion of the
work associated with the corresponding outlets.
3. Packaging: Material and equipment manufacturers shall demonstrate efforts to reduce
packaging waste and/or to use environmentally-preferable packaging materials. Examples include,
but are not limited to, the following: 1) reusable and/or returnable pallets or crates; 2)
FSC-certified wood or salvaged wood pallets or crates; 3) high recycled-content cardboard,
paper, steel, or plastic packaging; and 4) bio-based foam packing materials.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 7
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cable and component manufacturer(s) shall be a company specializing in communications cable,
accessories and/or equipment with minimum of 5 years documented experience in
producing cable, accessories and/or equipment similar to those specified herein providing a
warranted solution approved by cable manufacturer.
B. The Contractor shall have been in this business for minimum of 5 years and completed three
(3) projects equal in magnitude to the project specified in the following sections.
C. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary certifications to provide for the Warranty as
specified herein.
1. The Contractor shall be an active participant in the Installers Program operated by the
Manufacturer of the Cabling and/or Termination Components used. The Contractor shall be a
participant in this program at the time of Bidding and remain so throughout the project.
2. Upon request, the Certified Installer(s) assigned to the Project shall be identified to the
Engineer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. This Article is applicable to all Division 27 Sections. B.
Refer to Division 1 General Provisions.
C. Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections which detail the requirements for each
subsection, the Contractor shall warranty non manufacturer materials, equipment, etc. for a
minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Mineral-fiber stopping materials that are exposed to supply or return air plenums or that are located
above suspended ceilings will be encapsulated or fully sealed to prevent direct exposure of the
mineral fibers to the plenum. Where sealants are used to encapsulate the mineral fiber materials (e.g.
smoke sealants used at perimeter fire-stopping joints) the sealants shall meet the requirements
Section, assuming there is one.
B. All mineral wool products shall contain minimum 75% combined post-consumer and post- industrial
recycled content and shall be documented in accordance with the "Sustainable Design and
Construction", Section assuming there is one.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to the individual technical specification sections for detailed Cable Routing and Installation,
Testing and Documentation requirements. The following apply to all communications cabling and
termination work.
3.2 CABLE ROUTING- GENERAL
A. Backbone cables should be routed separately from other building services so as to protect the
cabling from unnecessary abuse. Separate conduit or a telecommunications riser shaft is
recommended when it is deemed feasible.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 8
B. When redundant riser paths are available, the backbone cables should be run in the two different
paths to provide backup in the case of damage to one of the cables. The size of each redundant cable
should be half of the typical single backbone run, so that the total strand/pair count of the two cables is
equal to the total strands/pairs required for the MDF.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. The contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without
damage to cable jacket.
B. All routing shall be kept clear of other trades work and supported using the method(s)
detailed in the pertinent technical section(s).
C. During pulling operation an adequate number of workers shall be present to allow cable observation
at all points of raceway entry and exit, as well as to feed cable and operate pulling
machinery.
D. Pull cables in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pull all cable by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical assistance.
1. Where mechanical assistance is used, ensure that maximum tensile load for cable is not
exceeded. This may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of "break-
away" or other approved method.
F. All cables shall be installed splice-free unless otherwise specified. G.
Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.
H. Cable manufacturers recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded. I.
Pulling lubricant may be used and shall:
1. Be non-injurious to cable jacket and other materials used.
2. Not harden or become adhesive with age.
J. Minimum bend radii, as specified by the manufacturer, must be adhered to for cable pulling and
final installation.
1. Any cables bent or kinked to radius less than recommended dimension are not
allowed and shall be replaced at no expense to Owner.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
K. Repair damage to interior spaces caused by installation of cable, raceway or other hardware. Repairs
must match preexisting color and finish of walls, floors and ceilings.
L. Replace contractor-damaged ceiling tiles to match color, size, style and texture.
M. Pull cord (200 lb minimum) shall be installed with cable installed in conduit or innerduct. N.
Cabling shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
O. In a high-rise environment, provisions must be made to support the backbone cable passing
vertically through the building. The cables should be supported on each floor using an industry
approve support method.
3.4 TESTING
A. Tests shall be optionally conducted by the contractor during the course of construction when
identifiable portions) of installation are complete. Alternatively, testing can be conducted after entire
installation is complete if this does not delay the project schedule.
B. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit a written description of the intended test
procedures and submit sample test forms to the Engineer or owner.
1. The submitted information shall include the proposed file naming format to be used in
identifying the balanced twisted-pair cable (by 4-pair unit or pair), or optical fiber (by pair or strand)
which is the subject of the test record.
2. Failure to provide the above information shall be grounds for the Engineer or the Owner to
reject any and all Documentation of Results on related testing and to require a repeat of the
affected test.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 9
C. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit to the owner (or owners representative) and the
Engineer, a proposed schedule for acceptance testing. This notification shall be a minimum of five (5)
working days in advance to allow for witnessing of the tests by a duly authorized
representative:.
D. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all equipment and personnel necessary to
conduct the acceptance tests.
E. Testing shall be completed and accepted by Owner and Engineer before Owner furnished
equipment and cross connects are installed. F.
All tests shall be documented.
G. Test results shall be submitted in the native software of the field test measurement device,
within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase (e.g. subsystem, cable type,
area, floor, etc.) or no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled occupancy of the subject area,
whichever
is earlier.
1. Interim documentation of Test Results in the native software of the field test measurement
device shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
H. Test results in the native software of the field test measurement device shall also be part of the
Final Documentation package submitted by the Contractor on the project.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall provide System Documentation to the
Engineer for approval. Documentation shall include:
1. Test Results
2. Record Drawings
3. Copies of all approved submittals indicating products used in the installation.
4. Phone numbers, physical addresses and Internet/webpage (URL) of local parts suppliers and service
companies covering the products installed.
B. Submit four (4) copies of all required documentation.
C. Documentation of Test Results shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
1. Test results shall be submitted in the format(s) native to the test instrument(s) used in
performing the testing.
2. Where unique software (other than an MS-Word™ compatible Word Processor or MS-
Excel™ spreadsheet) is required for viewing of the test results, the Contractor shall provide along
with the above documentation, three (3) licensed copies of such software. The software
shall run on a MICROSOFT Windows-based personal computer supplied by the Owner.
D. Final Documentation shall be submitted no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled
occupancy of the subject area. This is inclusive of all Test Results and draft Record Drawings.
1. Draft drawings may include mark-ups done by hand.
2. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30)
working days of the completion of each testing phase.
E. The Engineer or Owner may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable
system - at no additional cost - to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined
above and in the technical sections. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the
Contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Engineer
or Owner, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. All documentation - including hard copy and electronic forms of all Test Data and Record
Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 10
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO GROUND AND BOND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section details product and execution requirements for Communications Grounding and
Bonding.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this and
other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References and
Standards.
B. In addition, the following apply:
1. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment
2. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
3. ANSI J-STD-607-A - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) -2008
5. ANSIlNECAlBICSI-607-2011 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides information on
Definitions and Abbreviations used in this and related Sections. B.
Additional definitions (per referenced standards):
1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): busbar placed in convenient and
accessible location and bonded by means of bonding conductor for telecommunications to
building service equipment (power) ground.
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): interface to building telecommunications
grounding system generally located in telecommunications room. Common point of connection
for telecommunications system and equipment bonding to ground, and located in
telecommunications room or equipment room.
3. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications bonding infrastructure to building's service equipment (power) ground.
4. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) to telecommunications grounding
busbar (TGB).
5. Grounding Equalizer (GE): conductor that interconnects elements of
telecommunications grounding infrastructure.
6. Exothermic Weld: method of permanently bonding two metals together by controlled
heat reaction resulting in molecular bond.
7. Irreversible Compression: permanent mechanical bond between conductors or
conductor and connector using mechanical or hydraulic tool.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product or
installation information to be submitted by Contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the Project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 11
1.8 GUARANTEE
A. Refer to Division 1, "General Conditions", and "General Requirements" - Guarantee
Documents for general warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUSBARS
A. Material: Copper (aluminum not permitted)
1. 1/4" thick
B. Pre-drilled
1. Holes for use with standard sized two hole lugs
2. Hole spacing per ANSI Joint Standard J-STD-607-A.
3. Hole pattern shall accommodate two-hole lugs.
C. Insulators and stand-off brackets shall electrically isolate busbar from wall or other mounting surface.
D. Busbars shall be listed by nationally recognized testing laboratory.
E. Size:
1. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB) - 20" x 4" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI4420TMGB
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) - 12" x 2" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI14212TGB
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted). B.
Bonding Conductors shall be insulated.
1. Green Jacket or Black Jacket marked with Green Tape or Green adhesive labels per NEC
Guidelines.
2. Insulation shall be rated for the environment where it is installed. C.
Size:
1. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) to building's servIce equipment
(power) ground:
a. No. 3/0 AWG
2. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB; TMGB to TGB):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
3. Grounding Equalizer (GE):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Mechanical Connectors
Connector Body shall:
1. Be high-strength, high-conductivity cast copper alloy
2. Be sized to accommodate standard two hole lugs
3. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock-washers: Silicon Bronze or Stainless Steel
4. Shall be supplied as part of connector body
5. Split bolt connector types are not allowed
Connector shall:
6. Meet or exceed UL 467
7. Be clearly marked with catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer. B.
Compression Connectors
Connector Body: pure wrought copper.
1. Conductivity shall be no less than 99% by IACS Standards.
Connector shall:
1. Be. Listed by a NRTL
2. Be of IEEE 837, latest revision.
3. Be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound.
4. Be clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and
required compression tool settings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 12
5. Connection shall be irreversible.
6. Compression lugs shall be two-hole, long barrel, electro tin-plated with
inspection ports (Harger GECLB Series)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Permanently attach communications grounds prior to energizing communications equipment.
3.2 TOPOLOGY
A. Refer to the project drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide required elements and miscellaneous hardware necessary to establish
Telecommunication Bonding and Grounding infrastructure as specified. B.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install Compression Connectors with compression tool and die system, as recommended by
manufacturer of connectors.
C. Bonding and Grounding connections shall be tight and made with UL listed bonding and
grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc.
D. On the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT), Telecommunications Bonding
Backbone (TBB) and Grounding Equalizer (GE) all connections shall be Compression type. E.
Locate TGBs and TMGB per drawings.
1. Coordinate TMGB location and BCT routing with Owner.
F. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) shall be continuous and not interrupted by
Telecommunications Grounding Busbars (TGB).
1. TGBs shall be bonded to TEB via tap off of TBE.
2. Exception is "last" TGB on TEB (e.g., furthest from TMGB).
3. Grounding Equalizer(s) (GE) shall connect to TGBs to be interconnected. G.
Insulate Busbars from their support.
H. Structural Steel Framed Structures
1. In structural steel frame buildings, where the steel framework is accessible within the room, the
TMGB and each TGB shall be bonded to the structural steel frame using a minimum No. 6
AWG conductor.
2. Connections to the structural steel shall be by exothermically welding or with an electro tin-
plated bonding plate.
3. Where the structural steel is external to the room and is accessible, the structural steel should
be bonded to the TMGB or the TGB using a minimum No.6 AWG conductor.
1. Connections shall be bare metal to bare metal contact.
1. Clean surfaces of paint, dirt, oil, etc.
2. Apply anti-oxidant materials to both surfaces prior to installation. Harger part number
HCAJC8
J. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times.
1. Do not install insulation over bonding connections.
K. Terminate each bonding conductor on its own terminal lug.
1. Multiple conductors on single lug not permitted.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect bonding and grounding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 13
3.5 TESTING
A. Test impedance to earth ground at TMGB and TGBs.
B. Maximum allowable impedance to earth ground shall be 5 Ohms.
1. Correct system installation if measured impedance is higher than maximum allowable and retest to
verify impedance.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. Accurately record locations of grounding electrode(s), busbars (e.g., TMGB, TGBs) and bonding
conductors for telecommunications (BCT).
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 14
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems - Part 1 for requirements for Standards,
Submittals, Quality Assurance, Delivery, Storage, Handling, and
Guarantee for Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components for raceway and conduit.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". C. Reference
1. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including
the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and section sunder Division 01 General
Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Anchors, Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Plated.
Mounting, Attachment, and Anchoring Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
Refer to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for products identified in Part 1 of
this section.
Support Channel: Steel, electrostatically coated with zinc; or fiberglass or pre-galvanized (silver)
or black powder coat.
Threaded Rod: 112-inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch or 3/8-inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch zinc-
plated rod in various lengths.
Steel ladder rack or wire basket tray, 12-inch, 18-inch and 24-inch wide by 10' long pieces;
PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Threaded Rod Type to Be Used
1. Install the following types of threaded rod where required:
a. Unistrut-Type Support Channels: 1/2 inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch. b. Equipment Racks:
5/8 inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch.
2.1
A. B.
C.
D. E.
2.2 J-TYPE CABLE SUPPORT HOOKS
A. Cable support hooks shall be a wide-base type for use in a non-continuous pathway. B. Hooks shall be Galvanized
metal for smooth cable pull and corrosion resistance.
C. Hooks shall:
1. Comply with UL, CUL, NEC and TIA requirements for structured cabling systems.
2. Provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to limit cable bending per cable manufacturers'
recommendations.
3. Have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.
4. Should include an integrated cable retention clip
5. Be capable of being installed in a single- or multiple-hook ("tree") configuration. D. The use of "strap" or
"flexible" type cable supports shall not be permitted.
E. Hooks shall be 4 inch base diameter
F. Acceptable manufacturer: CADDY (ERICO)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for general installation guidelines.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting
items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting
with minimum interference with other items in the
vicinity.
E. Mount ladder type runway above equipment racks and attached to walls perpendicularly and vertically. Attach to
equipment racks using 6" stand-offs.
F. Fasten hanger rods, threaded rods, conduit clamps, and pull boxes to building
structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, beam clamps, and/or spring steel clips.
G. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; steel
expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete
surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs. Do not use double-sided adhesive tapes.
H. Independently support all raceways and cable trays from structural members only. Do not fasten
raceway supports to pipe hangers or rods, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, electrical
equipment, or raceway.
1. Under no circumstances are structural steel members to be drilled or welded without written
permission from the principle structural Engineer and Owner.
I. Fabricate raceway and cable runway supports, such as ceiling trapeze, from structural steel or
steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with
spring lock washers under all nuts. Attach raceway and cable tray to support structure
using appropriate strap or clamp hardware.
K. Do not fasten raceways with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for
temporary raceway support during construction, before wire and cable are pulled.
L. Securely attach backboards, enclosures, and cabinets to wall or floor with a minimum of four
anchors:
1. Install material and trim plumb.
2. Anchor surface-mounted enclosures using structural supports at each corner.
3. Provide accessory feet for freestanding equipment cabinets.
M. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support recessed mounted enclosures in stud walls.
N. Use fiberglass or special coated metallic supports in areas subject to corrosives.
O. Support cable runway and multiple raceways adjacent to each other by ceiling trapeze.
P. Support individual raceways by wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze; fastened by wood
screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion shields on concrete or
brick, and machine screws or welded thread studs on steelwork.
Q. Do not use nails anywhere or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry as a base for raceway or
box fastenings. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use
wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
R. The use of "bridle rings" shall not be permitted.
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
A. Where installed free-air above suspended ceiling or below raised floor, support cables using J-hook
type cable supports installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
B. Support hooks from structure. Do not support from ceiling pencil rod, black iron, ceiling grid, conduit,
ductwork, pipe or other trades work.
C. Space I-hook cable supports every 4 ft or in accordance with cable manufacturer's
specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
D. I-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider diameter
of cable type(s) being installed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
E. 3.3
A. J-hook fill capacities shall be based on initially installed quantity of cable plus 50%.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply fire-stopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Fire- stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire-stopping."
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to
communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 1 for
requirements for
Standards, Submittals, Quality Assurance, DeliverylStoragelHandling, and Guarantee for:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing
2. Surface Raceways
3. Outlet and Device Boxes
4. Pull and Junction Boxes.
5. Floor Boxes
6. Handholes and Boxes for Exterior Underground Wiring
7. Sleeves for Raceways I Sleeve Seals
8. Poke Through Fittings
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 01 General Requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 17
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for
products identified in Part 1 of this Section.
2.2 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum outlet box size shall be 4 inches (minimum) square by 2 1/8 inches deep
with single-gang trim ring (device cover), unless noted otherwise on drawings. Total
depth of the assembly including the trim ring shall not be less than 2 1/2 inches.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Size Communications Pull Boxes per TIA-569-B "Commercial Building Standard
for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" as detailed below, unless noted
otherwise on drawings.
B. Where a pull box is used with raceway(s) smaller than 11,4" trade size, minimum
junction box size
shall be 4 11/16" square by 2 1/8 inches deep, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
C. Where pull box is used with raceway(s) of 1%" trade size or larger, pull box shall:
1. for straight pull through, have a length of at least 8-times trade-size diameter of
largest raceway;
2. for angle and U pulls:
a. have a distance between each raceway entry inside box and opposite wall ofbox of at least
6-times trade-size diameter of largest raceway, this distance being increased by
sum of trade-size diameters of other raceways on same wall of box; and
b. have a distance between nearest edges of each raceway entry enclosing same conductor of
at least (1) six times trade-size diameter of raceway; or (2) six times trade-size
diameter of larger raceway if they are of different sizes.
c. for a raceway entering wall of a pull box opposite to a removable cover, have a distance from
wall to cover of not less than trade-size diameter of largest raceway plus 6-times
diameter of largest conductor.
2.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum communications raceway size shall be 1 inch, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Manufacturers: Carlon, Pyramid.
B. Size innerduct for maximum 40% fill (cable vs. innerduct LD.). Minimum innerduct
duct size shall be 1-1/4 inch (LD.) unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C. Indoor Innerduct shall be:
1. Corrugated.
2. Rated
a. Riser where installed in a vertical path defined as a "Riser" by applicable Codes
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
b. Plenum where installed in a return-air plenum
D. Innerduct color shall be as follows:
1. Riser: ORANGE
2. Plenum: ORANGE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for Outlet
Boxes for general installation requirements
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 18
3.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Spacing for Pull and Junction Boxes for Communications shall be as follows.
Separate lengths with
pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
1. I-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 100 feet.
2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of
raceway unless
Drawings show stricter requirements.
B. Provide Communications Pull Boxes on straight section of raceway.
1. Do not use Pull Boxes in place of bends in raceway unless shown on
drawings. C. Provide Communications Pull Boxes wherever there is a
reverse bend in run.
3.3 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Provide communications outlet boxes for each communications outlet or as
noted on drawings.
3.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS:
A. Provide one conduit from each communications outlet box. Horizontal conduit runs
between outlet
boxes are not allowed.
1. Terminate conduit above closest accessible ceiling.
a. Where no suspended ceiling is present, extend conduit to suspended ceiling.
2. Provide insulated bushings on all raceways.
3.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Flexible Non-metallic Innerduct (e.g. "Innerduct") shall be used as follows:
1. To segment conduits, thereby increasing their capacity.
2. As protection to backbone fiber optic cables installed in cable tray or Cable Support Hooks.
.
SECTION 27 -IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for labeling of
communications cabling, termination components, pathways and spaces.
B. All Backbone and Horizontal Cables, Communications Outlets and Termination components
(e.g. Copper and Fiber Optic Patch Panels) shall be clearly labeled by the Contractor to
identify them as unique throughout the project.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 19
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide samples of all label types planned
for the project.
These samples shall include examples of the lettering to be used and shall follow the standards
detailed below.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance requirements
for the project.
2.1 GENERAL
A. Labels shall be machine generated and be permanent.
B. No hand written or non permanent labels allowed unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. All labels and markings shall be physically and chemically resistant to damage that
would make the label unreadable.
D. Characters on all labels shall be Black printed on a background of contrasting color.
E. Labels shall match the Communications Outlet layout and Patch Panel design and
shall be as large as practicable (up to 16-point) to fit properly.
1. No lettering shall be smaller than lO-point.
F. Cable labels shall be self-laminating, White / Transparent Vinyl and incorporate an
integrated clear lamination which, when the label is wrapped around the cable, covers the
printed part of
the label.
1. Labels shall be of adequate size to accommodate the circumference of the cable(s)
being marked and properly self-laminate over the full extent of the printed area of the
label.
2. Labels used on larger cables (e.g. Copper Backbone) may be wrapped with clear non-
removable tape.
G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All cables, termination equipment and hardware shall be labeled in accordance with TIA
labeling standards.
B. All Cables shall be identified and labeled AT BOTH ENDS.
C. Cable labels shall be wrapped around the cable (not a "flag").
D. The printed identifier shall be covered by the clear laminating part of the cable label.
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
A. Technology Distribution Room (TDR)
1. The TDR room number shall be based on the guest room numbering.
2. The TDR room number shall include the floor number (i.e 05TDRN,
05TDRS). B. IDF/MDF - Existing, located in room 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 20
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
C. IDF/MDF - Existing located in rooms 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
3.3 MODULAR PATCH PANEL
A. Modular Patch Panels used to terminate Horizontal Cabling shall be labeled to identify:
- the Patch Panel I.D., and
- the individual Outlet I.D.s .
3.4 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Label each
cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF- MDF(M50-
###/SM-###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) M50-
### = Fiber Count; 50/125-micron multimode fiber
SM-### = Fiber Count; Single-mode fiber
B. Each Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall be clearly labeled with a unique identifying code to identify:
- The near end optical fiber adapter (e.g., coupler) letter.
- The used ports.
- The far end TR room number.
- The far end coupler letter.
- Fiber type (e.g., M50 or SM)
- Far end used ports.
1. The cable identifiers are to be secured to the front cover of the panel enclosure.
2. Patch panel labels shall be visible from front of panel without opening panel cover.
3. Place patch panel labels for fiber strands on manufacturer designated labeling areas.
3.5 BACKBONE COPPER CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Label each cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF-
MDF (###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) ### = Pair Count
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. The Communications Outlet shall be located in zones as indicated on drawings with a unique identifier.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 21
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
B. Each Communications Outlet shall be labeled with a unique identifier.
1. Each cable terminated at the Communications Outlet will be labeled with the same identifying code(s).
C. Communications Outlet labels shall be positioned in the recessed label holders on the
faceplate and covered with the clear plastic covers.
1. Where Communications Outlet Faceplates not incorporating recessed holders are allowed,
the faceplate labels shall be protected with a clear laminate.
D. Horizontal Cables shall be labeled with the Communications Outlet ill - matching the Jack to which it
is terminated - as detailed herein.
a. Horizontal Cables be labeled within 4-inches of the cable at each end.
E. The Communication Outlet labeling code: TBD F.
Communication Cable labeling code: TBD
3.7 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct containing fiber optic cable installed under this project shall be labeled where exposed.
1. This includes areas where the innerduct is installed in trays and in equipment rooms. B. The innerduct
shall be labeled with a durable Yellow Polyethylene tag that reads "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE"
1. The tag shall provide blank spaces for adding fiber count and cable destination information.
2. The destination of the cable(s) contained in the Innerduct and the fiber count shall be marked on the
tag.
a. Hand lettering is acceptable on this tag, using an indelible type ink. C. The tag
shall be secured to the Innerduct using self-locking ties.
Note: If armored optical fiber cable is used, the use of innerduct may not be required.
3.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING AND GROUNDING:
A. All telecommunications bonding and grounding should be labeled as close as practicable (Le. For
ease of access and to read the label) to the point of termination. B. Labels shall be non-metallic and
include the following:
WARNING
IF THIS BONDING CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL VISION VOICE &
DATA SOLUTIONS
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 22
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Equipment
Room Fittings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to General Requirements" which identifies related specification sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. CEA-31O-E, Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, 2005.
1.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
B. When a component is specified below as having a "powder coat finish", the surface finish shall
meet the following requirements:
1. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2197 - 98(2004) Standard Test Method for Adhesion of
Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion, Method A, there shall be no exposed metal or
discoloration with a 5.5-kg weight.
2. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3359 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Measuring
Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B, there shall be no flaking.
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
3. When tested in accordance with ASTM D522 - 93a(2008) Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend
Test of Attached Organic Coatings, there shall be no cracking or lifting on a .0125 inch diameter mandrel.
4. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3363 - 05 Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil
Test, coating shall withstand a minimum gauge hardness of 2H.
5. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2794 - 93(2004) Standard Test Method for
Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact), there shall be no chipping
or cracks with an 80 in-lb. direct hit or a 60 in-lb. indirect hit.
6. When tested in accordance with FED-STD-141, method 6192, with 1 kg load and 1000
cycles, there shall be a maximum 80-mg. loss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS (FREE STANDING)
A. Equipment Racks shall be of aluminum construction with a polyurethane or powder-coat finish.
1. Finish Color shall be BLACK.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 23
B. The Rack shall be 84" (213 cm) tall with an 18" (38 cm) base depth and 6" (15.24 cm) inside channel
depth.
C. The Rack base shall be pre-drilled for securing rack to the floor.
D. The Rack shall be UL Listed.
E. Rack rails shall be spaced for 19" mounting rail-to-rail and shall be of a U shaped
construction with 12/24 pre-tapped holes in the CEA-31O-E standard hole pattern specifications
(5/8" - 518" - 1/2") providing 45 rack spaces on both the front and rear.
1. Rails shall have a universal side-drilling pattern to allow racks to be bolted together or
attachment of accessories.
2. Equipment Racks shall accept Vertical and Horizontal Cable Management hardware as
described below.
F. Each rack shall be supplied with:
1. a ground bar and #6 AWG Ground lug,
2. a minimum of fifty (50) 12/24 mounting screws shall be included with each Equipment Rack, and
3. a minimum of ten (10) releasable (e.g. "hook & loop") cable support ties.
a. Ties shall be individual units with a latch. A roll of hook & loop material is not acceptable. G.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, Allen Tel, or Hubbell
2.2 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER
A. The vertical cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front and of each
equipment rack.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, 84 inches (213 cm), 45U high and
10 inch (15.24 cm) width. Cable management fingers shall be provided at 1U vertically to accommodate
routing of trunk cabling and neat, organized patch cord routing. Provided with 12-inch (15.24 cm) deep
(minimum) cable management fingers.
The horizontal cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front of each equipment
rack.
The vertical cable manager shall be double sided and equipped with dual hinge mounted doors on
the front. The vertical cable manager shall be provided with side cover panels for end racks.
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
The horizontal channel shall be comprised of two pieces:
1. the cable management panel, and
2. a hinged cover. B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C. The horizontal cable management channel shall be steel in construction and have a black powder
coat finish
D. The horizontal channel height shall be 2-RU (3.5").
E. The horizontal channels shall be manufactured of steel for rigidity.
1. Flat steel channel rings shall not be acceptable.
2. Channel depth shall be 2-RU (3.5")
F. The channel cover shall be hinged at the bottom and top, allowing it to snap open or closed.
1. There shall be no fasteners required for installation of the cover.
2. The cover shall not be removable unless the cover is in the horizontal position.
G. The horizontal channel base shall incorporate pass-through holes to allow patch cords to
connect at the rear of hubs.
1. The pass-through holes shall be rolled edge design to prevent cable chafing. Rubber or plastic
grommets shall not be used.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 24
H. The horizontal channel shall provide for a Rear Cable Organizer to provide for the attachment of a
cable channel equal to the channel cover used on the front.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 25
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
1. The rear cable organizer shall clip to the rear of the panel without the use of tools or
additional fasteners.
I. Manufacturer, Model: Belden or Allen Tel or Hubbell
1. 2-RU Horizontal Deep Channel w/Cover
2. Rear Cable Organizer
2.4 2-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W 2-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails:
a. CEA-31O-E Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Each 2-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. 19" Rack channels
2. Base angles
3. Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
D. Acceptable manufacturer: Belden, Allen Tel or Hubbell
2.5 4-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W x 29" D 4-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails: 19"W, Front & Rear
a. EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Static load capacity: 2,000 lbs.
D. Each 4-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. (4) 19" Rack channels
2. (2) Base angles
3. (2) Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
2.7 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder Rack shall be used in communications equipment rooms (i.e., IDF’s and MDF’s,
Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facilities) to route cabling overhead. B.
Ladder Rack shall be:
1. constructed of 0.065" thick steel, and
2. utilize tubular stringers to support rungs. a.
Stringers shall be 1-112" high.
b. Rungs shall be welded to stringers and shall be spaced 9" on center.
C. Ladder Rack width(s) shall be as shown on the project Drawings. D.
Ladder Rack finish shall be BLACK epoxy.
E. Provide Cable Retaining Posts
1. Height: 4"
2. Color: Black
3. Use at 2 foot intervals.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 26
F. Provide Ladder Rack Radius Drop
1. Color: Black
2. One at every location where cabling is routed through the rungs or tray elevation changes by 6
inches or more.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer: CPI or Hubbell or Siemon
2.8 RACK BRACING
A. Used to secure equipment racks to the overhead cable tray system to stabilize the racks. B. Two
(2) assemblies per rack.
C. Provide and install all appurtenances necessary to secure the racks to the overhead cable tray,
including all brackets, hooks, bolts, washers, nuts and additional accessories, as required
to meet requirements of various rack/cable tray orientations encountered.
2.9 CATV SPLITTER, TRANSCENERS AND RECENERS
A. Shelf
1. Provide and install shelf:
a. Mechanical Room (basement) - 3 RU mounting capacity
b.MDF (ground floor) - 4 RU mounting capacity
2. Install in MDF, room 121 (ground floor)
3. Coordinate location of shelf in Data Center Primary with IT group
4. Color: Black
5. Qty: 1 each
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Provide equipment racks and cabinets as shown on the project Drawings. B. All
racks shall be bolted to the floor per manufacturers recommendations. C. Racks
shall be secured to the cable tray as described above.
D. Provide Horizontal and Vertical Cable Management in equipment racks per the project
Drawings.
E. Provide ground bar or lug in each equipment rack.
1. Bond rack mounted ground bar or lug to telecommunications room ground bar.
2. Multiple racks in common room shall be joined and ground made common.
3.2 LADDER RACK
A. Provide ladder rack and accessories necessary for a complete system.
B. Size and layout of the ladder rack shall be as shown on the project Drawings. C. Install
ladder rack and accessories per manufacturers' installation instructions.
D. A ladder rack in the TDR shall be installed above the racks as indicated on the drawings.
E. The ladder rack shall always be aligned with the front of the racks and braced to the racks with
threaded rod and brackets or support brackets made by the tray or rack manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
F. Radius drops shall be used where the cable drops from ladder rack to rack and at elevation changes
6" or more.
G. Provide cable retaining posts at 2 foot intervals on both sides of all ladder rack
H. Where ladder rack must be supported from the building structure:
1. Provide 3/8" threaded rods for support of 12" wide or smaller tray.
2. Provide 1/2" threaded rods for support of tray greater than 12" in width.
1. Maximum allowable deviation of tray from level horizontal plane measured across length of ladder
rack shall be 1/2", with the tray loaded to capacity.
J. Bond tray components together using manufacturer's standard accessories.
K. Fasten cables to ladder rack at intervals not to exceed 4 ft.
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 27
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for intra-building backbone cabling.
B. Both Copper and Fiber Optic cables and termination components are covered herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. ANSIffIA-598-C-2005: Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
2. TIA/EIA 455-21-A: Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices
3. ANSIffIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant; lEC 61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part
4-1: Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement
4. ANSI ffIA/EIA-526-7: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable
Plant
5. UL 910: UL Standard for Safety Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for
Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air
6. UL 1666: Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed
Vertically in Shafts
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies Work by the Owner affecting the
subsystem(s) covered by this section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
E. The cable shall consist of a core of solid-copper conductors insulated with polyethylene covered
by a PVC skin.
F. Jacket Type: PVC; Black or Grey color. G.
Cable Rating: NEC Article 800, UL listed
H. The cable shall meet or exceed the transmission performance requirements of ANSIITIA-
568-C.2 Category 3 or higher.
1. Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 0.772MHz
2. Attenuation: 15 dB/100 meters @ 4 MHz
3. Max Average DC resistance: 26.5 Ohms/l000 ft
4. Max Average DC resistance: 1.50% (unbalanced)
5. Max Capacitance: </= 100 pF/lOO-meters (unbalanced p to g)
6. Mutual capacitance: 15.7-nF/1000 ft @ I-kHz
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 28
a. be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and occlusions to meet optical, mechanical, and
environmental requirements of this specification,
b. have been subjected to minimum tensile proof test by fiber manufacturer equivalent to 100- kpsi, and
c. be splice free. (Factory optical fiber splices are not allowed.)
d. Coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging optical fiber.
e. Individual fiber buffers shall be color coded in accordance with the reference documents. D.
Multimode Optical Fibers:
1. Core diameter shall be 50-micron
2. Transmission Windows: 850-nm and 1300-nm
3. Core Diameter: 50-microns ± 3-microns
4. Cladding Diameter: 125-microns ± 2-microns
5. Coating Diameter: 245-microns ± 5-microns
6. Attenuation (Max) @850-nm: 3.0-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
@1300-nm: 1.5-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
7. LED Bandwidth (min) @850-nm: 1500-MHzekm
@1300-nm): 500-MHzekm
8. Effective Modal BW (min) @850-nm: 2000-MHzekm
@1300-nm: nla
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (A.O): 1297-nm <OW < 1316-nm
10. Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.101 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 3 microns
12. Cladding Non-circularity: < 2.0%
13. Core Non-circularity: < 5.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.2 dB at specified wavelengths.
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.50 dB/km with
80% of measured fibers not exceeding 0.25 dB/km.
16. Minimum supported Ethernet distances shall be:
a. Gigabit Ethernet @850-nm: 1000-meters b.
Gigabit Ethernet @ 1300-nm: 600-meters
E. Single Mode Optical Fibers:
1. Core Diameter: 8.3 -microns
2. Transmission Windows: 13lO-nm and 1550-nm
3. Cladding Diameter: 125 -microns ± 1 -micron
4. Coating Diameter: 245 -microns ± 10 -microns
5. Maximum Attenuation (l31O-nm): 1.0-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
(1550-nm):0.8-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
6. Maximum Dispersion (131O-nm): 0.18-ps/nmekrn
(l550-nm): 17-ps/nmekm
7. Mode Field Diameter (13lO-nm): 9.3 ± 0.5 –micron (l550-nm): 10.5 ± 1.0 -microns
8. Cutoff Wavelength (A.ccf): < 1260-nm
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (/...0): 1301.5-nm < /...0 < 1321.5-nm lO.
Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.092 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 0.8 -microns
12. Coating-Cladding Concentricity: < 12 -microns
13. Cladding Non-circularity: < 1.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.1 dB at specified wavelengths
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP 3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.05-dB1km at
1550-nm. Maximum attenuation change shall not exceed 0.15-dBIkm at 1550-nm. F. Intra-
building Backbone Cable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 29
1. Cable shall be suitable for installation in free air, in building risers, in conduit, in cable tray, in
ladder rack and in innerduct.
2. The cable shall be constructed of all dielectric materials (no conductive materials).
3. Buffer Diameter: 900 -microns (tight buffer)
4. Strength Member: Aramid Yarn, fiberglass
5. Storage Temperature: -40° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
6. Operating Temperature: -20° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
a. Cables rated OFNP and intended for installation in plenum airspaces may carry a low
temperature rating of O°C.
7. Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
8. Maximum Tensile Strength (no irreversible change in attenuation). a.
During Installation 1300-N
b. Long Term 390-N
9. Bending Radius:
a. During Installation 20-times cable diameter b.
No Load l0-times cable diameter
10. Jacket Color
a. Laser-Optimized Multimode - Aqua (defined as fiber having Minimum Effective Modal
Bandwidth (MHz-krn) ~ 2000-MHz-km @ 850-nm)
b. Single-mode - Yellow
11. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Riser" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in
vertical run in shaft or from floor to floor and shall be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics.
a. Jacket material: PVC
b. These cables shall carry an OFNR rating.
12. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Plenum" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in air
handling spaces (plenum rated).
a. Jacket material: LSPVC or equivalent
b. These cables shall carry an OFNP rating.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Berk-tek, Superior Essex, Mohawk
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. Connectors shall be LC-type.
B. The optical fiber within the connector ferrule shall be mechanically secured and index
matching gel shall be included in connector.
1. Connector shall incorporate a fiber stub that is fully bonded into the ferrule. The other end of each
assembly shall be precisely cleaved and placed into an appropriate alignment mechanism
to support a mechanical splice.
C. Connectors shall accept fibers having a buffered diameter of 900-microns. D.
Mechanical Specifications-
1. Ferrule Material Ceramic or Glass-in-Ceramic
2. Housing Material Composite
3. Ferrule size 125 -microns ± 2-microns
D. The connector's performance (measured in a two plug plus an alignment sleeve
configuration), shall be as follows:
a. Insertion loss (average)
b. Cable Retention
c. Durability
d. Impact
e. Thermal Shock f.
Humidity
g. Reflectance (SM only)
per FOTP-171, MM S O.3-dB; SM S O.2-dB per
FOTP~6; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-21; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-2; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-3; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-5; SO.2-dB Attenuation change
S -55 dB (average)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 30
2. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot
b. Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot, Green (angled polished connectors)
3. SC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode Green (angled polished connectors)
F. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
2.4 FIBER OPTIC COUPLINGS
A. Couplings shall be duplex LC-type. B.
Coupling materials shall be plastic.
C. Alignment sleeve material shall be as follows:
1. Mu1timode Phosphor Bronze or Ceramic
2. Single-mode Ceramic
D. LC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Multimode AQUA
2. Single-mode BLUE
E. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Single-mode GREEN
2.5 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels shall:
1. be enclosed assemblies,
2. incorporate hinged or retractable front cover,
3. be rack mountable on standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks,
4. provide for strain relief of incoming cables,
5. incorporate radius control mechanisms to limit bending of fiber to manufacturer's
recommended minimums,
6. provide protection to both "facilities" and "user" sides of couplings, and
7. be configured to require only front access when patching.
B. Panels shall include provisions for permanent labeling of fiber optic cables.
1. Labeling shall be accessible from front of patch panel and shall not require disassembly of patch
panel enclosure or removal of front cover.
C. Connector couplings shall be mounted on assembly that snaps into patch panel enclosure.
1. This assembly shall be designed to accept variety of coupler types including, ST, SC,
Simplex SC, duplex SC and high-density mini-connectors (e.g., LC).
D. Access to inside of panel enclosure during installation shall be from front and rear.
1. Panels that require any disassembly of cabinet to gain entry will not be accepted. E.
Incoming cables shall not be accessible from patching area of panel.
1. The panel enclosure shall provide physical barrier to access of such cables. F.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
A. Route all cabling as identified in the project Drawings and specifications.
B. Prior to construction, confirm cable rating requirements (e.g., CMR, OFNR, OFCR, CMP, OFNP,
OFCP) for the planned cable route to insure compliance with applicable Code. Identify
any areas where cable other than that specified to the Engineer.
C. Cable shall be free of tension at both ends. In cases where cable must bear stress, provide wire-
mesh grips (e.g. Kellems) to spread stress over longer length of cable.
D. To reduce or eliminate EMI, position tray to provide for following minimum separation
distances from ~480V Power lines (where applicable):
1. Two (2) inches from power lines of <5-kVA (e.g., 20N120V power circuits).
2. Five (5) inches from fluorescent lighting.
3. Six (6) inches from power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit or equivalent shielding in
proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 31
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
4. Twelve (12) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to a
grounded metal conduit pathway.
5. Twenty-four (24) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or
nonmetal pathways.
6. Forty-seven (47) inches from electrical motors and transformers.
E. All Backbone cabling shall be installed as continuous runs without splices.
3.2 BACKBONE COPPER UTP CABLING
A. The Pair Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Terminate Backbone Copper Cable on the Backbone Field in the TDR's and DCP C.
Terminate cable on 48 port patch panels.
1. These patch panels shall be rack-mounted. Refer to the project Drawings.
D. All columns shall be co-located as to simplify installation and subsequent tracing of cross- connect
wiring.
E. Where new cabling is to be integrated with new or existing cabling at the termination location(s),
it will be the responsibility of the Contractor, in cooperation with the Owner, to
coordinate placement of Voice Termination hardware the Local Exchange Carriers) serving the site.
F. When terminating cable, maintain pair twists per manufacturers recommendations.
G. Remove cable jacket only to extent required to make terminations.
H. Cabling entering and exiting fields shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
1. Label all cables and termination components per Section 27 05 53 "Identification For
Communications Systems".
J. The Contractor shall not be responsible for jumper wiring between the Intra-building, Inter- building
and Feed Blocks unless specifically noted otherwise.
K. The Contractor shall not be responsible for connection of Telco connectors to owner
furnished telephone equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.3 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING
A. Strand Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Install fiber optic cables in 1-1/4 inch (3.2 centimeters) innerduct (1.D.) when the run is not in conduit
or when the conduit is 3 inch (7.5 centimeters) or larger.
1. The color of innerduct shall be coordinated if installed near existing innerduct.
C. Visually inspect cables for cuts, blisters and abrasions during installation. D.
Provide cable slack in each backbone fiber optic cable.
1. Slack shall be in addition to length of fiber required for termination requirements.
2. Store cable slack in enclosure designed for this purpose.
3. Slack required shall be as follows:
a. Minimum of 5 meters (each cable if applicable) coiled and secured at the TDR.
E. Terminate backbone fiber optic cable in the specified connector type on the Backbone Fiber
Field
Hampton Inn & Suites Hotel, 135 Second Street, Waltham, MA
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 32
(Fiber Optic Patch Panel).
1. Mate all terminated fibers to couplings mounted in a Fiber Optic Patch Panels.
a. Couplings shall be mounted on a panel that, in turn, snaps into the housing assembly. b. Any
unused panel positions shall be fitted with a blank panel.
c. Connectors from two cables shall never share a common coupling panel.
d. Multimode and Single-mode optical fibers shall be segregated on the panels as to clearly identify
the distinction between the fiber types.
F. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively per the manufacturer's color code - starting with the lowest
number - and mapped "position for position" between patch panels. There shall be no
transpositions in the cabling.
G. Proper orientation of the LC "Keyways" is required at each termination location.
1. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively ie., 1,2,3,4...) on both ends of an optical fiber link.
2. The LC Couplings/Adapters shall be installed in opposite manners on each end (i.e., A-B, AB...on
one end and B-A, B-A... on the other).
1. Refer to TIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" H. Label
all cables and termination components per Section 270553 "Identification For Communications
Systems".
1. All couplings shall be fitted with a dust cap.
3.4 TESTING
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the
requirements for scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. Backbone UTP Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall be responsible for testing each cable segment.
2. Backbone UTP cable pairs shall be verified for wire map (transposed/reversed/split pairs) and shorts
through toning of each conductor.
3. Cable shield or coupled bonding conductor shall be verified for end-to-end continuity.
4. Backbone Voice cables shall be 100% free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for continuity,
pair validity and polarity and conductor position on the termination blocks (e.g. 110). Any mis-positioned
pairs shall be corrected.
C. Where cross-connection of Voice Cabling sub-systems (e.g., Primary and/or Secondary
Backbone) by the Contractor is specified, each subsystem shall be tested separately followed by a re-
test of the interconnected system after the cross-connection is complete.
D. Fiber Optic Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall detail proposed test plan for each cable type, including equipment to be used,
test frequencies and wavelengths, etc.
2. Test results shall include record of test wavelengths, attenuation measurements, fiber cable
type, fiber strand and overall cabling LD. number, measurement direction, test equipment type, model
and serial number, date, reference setup and crew member name(s).
3. Prior to installation:
a. Visually inspect reels and packaging for damage.
b. Review cable manufacturer's test report for each reel of cable provided to confirm
performance.
c. Perform testing at contractor option to verify performance and cable condition.
4. Post-Installation Testing shall include:
a. Attenuation (Insertion Loss) Testing
b.OTDR - All cables that contain splices and any cable which fail Attenuation testing. c. End-
to-End Optical Attenuation Insertion loss (average) perFOTP-171, MM:5 0.3-
dB; SM :5 0.2-dB
d. Cable Retention per FOTP-6; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change e.
Durability per FOTP-21;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
f. Impact per FOTP-2;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 33
g. Thermal Shock per FOTP-3; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change h.
Humidity per FOTP-5; ~0.2-dB Attenuation change
i. Reflectance (SM only) ~ -55 dB (average)
5. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot b.
Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot
6. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode GREEN
7. Insertion Loss
a. Measure Optical Attenuation perTIAI-526-14-B (Multimode) and TIAJEIA-526-7 (Singlemode)
b. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm and 1300 ± 20-nm wavelengths. c. Test
single-mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm and 1550 ± lO-nm wavelength.
d. Tests shall be performed in both transmission directions.
e. Fiber lengths less than or equal to 300 ft shall test to < 2.0 dB loss.
f. Fiber lengths greater than 300 feet shall test to loss value less than link loss budget for number
of installed connector mated pairs and optical fiber splices, if applicable.
8. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
a. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm wavelength.
b. Test single mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm wavelength.
c. Traces shall be examined for continuity and anomalies.
d. Launch cord shall be minimum 100 ft long, or as noted by test equipment manufacturer.
9. The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of short cable sections.
10. Access Jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing of the entire length of the cable, including
the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used.
11. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2-dB in a Multimode fiber, or 0.1-
.dB in a Single-mode fiber (if applicable) at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing
a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that fiber.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Backbone copper cabling test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor
pair (if applicable) and cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number,
date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
1. For category 3 and higher multi-pair cabling (e.g., 25-pair groupings), continuity verification
required.
2. For category 3 and higher 4-pair cabling, complete transmission performance measurements
required.
C. Backbone fiber optic cabling test results shall include a record of test wavelengths, attenuation
measurements, cable type, fiber strand and overall cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment
type, model and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
SECTION 27- COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for the Horizontal (Station) Cabling
subsystem.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 34
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
B. In this section, the Communications Outlet is considered to consist of a Frame / Faceplate into
which Modular Jacks or other couplings snap, the Modular Jacks and labeling/identification
components.
Unused jack positions are fitted with blanks.
PART I-GENERAL
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Samples of the Communications Outlet "Faceplate(s) shall be submitted prior to construction to
confirm color and material.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Project Drawings for quantities and location of Communications Outlets.
B. All Cables and Termination hardware shall be technically compliant with and installed in
accordance with referenced TIA documents.
C. All cables shall be suitable for installation in the environment defined and shall meet a
Plenum (CMP) rating (or permitted substitute as defined by the NEC).
D. Cables shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed, comply with Article 800 (Communications
Circuits) of the National Electrical Code and shall meet the specifications of
NEMA (low loss), UL 444, and ICEA (where applicable).
E. Horizontal (Station) Cable and Termination Components (Jack, Patch Panel) are specified to function
as a System.
1. Where required for warranty purposes, the manufacturers of cabling and termination
components used (if more than one) shall recognize each other in their Certification Programs. F. No
distinction between "Voice" and "Data" is made in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
G. Station Cable types include:
1. 4-pair Shielded Twisted Pair (FIUTP)
H. Station Cable types not applicable to this project include:
1. Fiber Optic to the Desktop
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s) of connecting components:
1. Includes Modular Jacks, Communications Outlets, and Modular Patch Panels.
2. Components by same manufacturer shall be used throughout project.
3. All components of which the structured cabling system is comprised shall be fully certifiable by one of
the acceptable manufacturers identified above.
J. Value Engineering: The contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the equipment list at
time of procurement and confirming availability with manufacturers and suggesting viable
replacements and/or upgrades that would incur no additional cost to the project
.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 35
2.2 4-PAIR FIUTP CABLE
A. The 4-pair FIUTP cables shall be constructed of four (4) Foiled twisted pair (FIUTP) with 24- AWG or
23-AWG insulated solid copper conductors.
B. The cable shall incorporate an overall shield.
C. Cable shall meet or exceed TIA Category 6A performance criteria as defined by the
referenced TIA documents.
D. Outer jacket shall be as required to meet flammability requirements for cable type.
E. Cable outside diameter for any 4-pair FIUTP Cable shall not exceed 0.30 in. (7.62 mm) F.
Maximum Pulling Load should not be rated for less than 25 lbs. (11.34 kg)
G. Pairs of a114-pair cables shall be identified by a banded color code in which conductor
insulation is marked with a dominant color and banded with a contrasting color. By pair number, the pair
colors or dominant bands are:
Pair 1: Tip – White/Blue; Ring - Blue (or Blue/White)
Pair 2: Tip - White/Orange; Ring - Orange (or Orange/White) Pair
3: Tip - White/Green; Ring - Green (or Green/White)
Pair 4: Tip – White/Brown; Ring - Brown (or Brown/White) H.
The jacket color shall be as follows:
1. Horizontal Cable designated for Voice/Data - BLUE.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Mohawk.
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.4 COAX STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.5 MODULAR JACKS
A. Jacks shall be 8 position, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed.
B. Jacks shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
C. Jacks shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. D.
Jacks shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
E. Jacks shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant.
Nationally Registered Testing Laboratory (NRTL) VERIFIED for performance. UL
LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
F. Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall snap-mount in an industry standard
keystone opening.
G. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 VO rated thermoplastic.
H. Modular jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and
resilience.
1. Contact Plating shall be a minimum of 50-micro-inches of gold in the contact area over
50micro-inches of nickel.
1. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG stranded or solid conductors.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
J. The interface between jack and station cable shall be insulation displacement type contact.
1. Cable pairs shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to
better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.
2. Jacks shall be compatible with standard single conductor impact termination tools.
3. Jacks shall be supplied with wire retention caps.
K. Jacks shall have an operating temperature range of -lOOC (14°F) to 60°C (140 OF). L. Jacks
shall be pinned per TIA T568B pinning as follows:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 36
Pair 1 - Pins 5 & 4
Pair 2 - Pins 1 & 2
Pair 3 - Pins 3 & 6
Pair 4 - Pins 7 & 8
M. Jacks shall have an attached color-coded wiring instruction label as an aid to the installer. N. Jacks
shall be available in a variety of colors for identification or designation of applications
at the workstation or closet.
1. Default Jack color shall be White unless specified otherwise.
O. Jacks shall have a designation indicating perfonnance (e.g. "Category 6A", "Cat 6A" or
"C6A") either on the front or rear of the connector, which may be visible from the front of the
faceplate.
P. Jacks shall be compatible with TIAJEIA-606-A color code labeling and accept snap on icons
for identification or designation of applications.
Q. Jacks shall be supplied with installed dust covers to protect the jack opening and internal elements
during installation until the jack is in use.
1. No damage to the Jack pinning shall result from insertion or removal of these covers. R. Icons
used at the faceplate
1. Red for DATA
2. Blue for MEDICAL DATA
S. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.6 COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTORS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
A. Flush Faceplates shall accommodate the installation of wall mounted or surface raceway mounted
Communications Outlets.
B. Modular Jacks, fiber optic couplings (if applicable) and coaxial connectors (if applicable) shall snap into
the faceplate.
C. Faceplates shall be constructed of high impact 94 v-o rated thermoplastic (except where
noted otherwise, stainless steel).
D. Faceplates shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified.
E. Faceplate shall be configured to accommodate the number of modular jacks as required by the
location. Refer to installation details drawing.
F. Faceplates shall be available in White and stainless steel
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
1. Faceplate color(s) shall be coordinated with the owner to match the decor of the area in which
the Telecommunications Outlet is located.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell Allen Tel.
Faceplates shall have plastic covers over the mounting screws that can be replaced with a clear plastic
window over a printable paper insert.
Faceplate shall be configured to mount on standard, single gang outlet box when wall mounted.
Faceplates shall provide for TIAlEIA-606-A compliant station labeling
Faceplates at tack board surfaces, painted accent walls, and plastic laminate panels shall be plastic.
COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WALL-MOUNT TELEPHONE
Faceplates intended to be used in locations where a wall mounted phone set is required shall comply with
the following:
1. Faceplate shall be plastic construction,
2. Faceplate shall accommodate one (1) modular jack meeting the performance requirements for
modular jacks as defined above and positioned to mate with a wall- mounted telephone.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 37
3. Faceplate shall mount on standard single gang outlet box, and
4. Faceplate shall include mounting posts appropriate for mounting a wall-mounted telephone
G.
H.
1.
J.
2.8
A.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
A. Modular Patch Panels shall provide for the termination of Horizontal (Station) cables.
B. The Panels shall incorporate 8 positions, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed Modular Jacks. C. The
Panels shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
D. The Panels shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. E. Jacks
shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
F. The Panels shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant. UL
VERIFIED for performance.
UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
G. Panels shall be rack mountable in standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks. H.
Panels shall be made of black anodized aluminum.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
1. Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at the top and bottom for stiffness.
2. Contact plating shall be a minimum 50-micro-inch gold plating on contact surfaces over 50-
100 micro-inch of nickel compliant with FCC part 68.
1. Panels shall be terminated in T568B wiring scheme.
J. Panels shall be equipped with an IDC-type termination made of fire retardant UL 94VO rated
thermoplastic and tin, lead solder plated IDC
1. Panels shall terminate 22-26 AWG solid conductors, maximum insulated conductors.
2. Panels shall provide wiring identification & color code and maintain a paired punch down
sequence that does not require the overlapping of cable pairs.
K. Panel circuit boards shall be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection.
L. Panels shall have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel.
M. Panels shall have rear cable support bar for strain relief, which shall clip to the rear of the patch
panel.
1. As an option, an external cable support bar may be used.
2. The Panel and cable support hardware shall insure that the minimum bend radius
requirements of the horizontal cabling are satisfied.
N. The port identification numbers on the panel front shall be located so as to minimize
obstruction by patch cords.
O. The panel front shall have two raised panel identification label fields to accept 1/2' label inserts.
P. Panels shall have self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels provided with the
panel for each 8-port adapter.
Q. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden.
2.11 DISTRIBUTION HUBS PATCH PANEL - CATV OVER UTP
A. Rack-mountable passive distribution hubs with 8 or 16 front mounts modular 8-pin jacks for
connection to UTP 4-pair cabling, and "F" fitting on rear panel for connection to coaxial backbone cable.
B. Hubs shall be tested compliant with FCC Part 15 requirements. Bandwidth: 5 - 860 MHz. e. Hubs
shall be supplied with quantities of plug-in terminators to terminate all unused ports. D. Provide
quantities of hubs necessary to provide individual hub connection port for each television outlet in the
system.
3.3 Cable Routing
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 38
A. A "Service Loop" for every Horizontal Cable shall be stored in the ceiling above the outlet. . In cases
where cables are routed in the ceiling of the floor below (i.e. under open office spaces, conference
rooms), cables shall be stored in the ceiling of the floor below or prior to entering raceway.
1. Loop length shall be lO-ft. (3-meters).
2. The total length of the horizontal cable including the loop shall not exceed 295-ft (90-meters).
3. The loop shall be placed in the ceiling at the last support (e.g.. J-Hook) before the cables enter a
fishable wall, conduit, surface raceway or box.
4. Loop radius (minimum) shall be 4X the minimum bend radius for the cable.
3.3 Cable Routing
B. During installation, the minimum bend radius shall be eight times the outside diameter of FIUTP cables
and 20 times the outside diameter of fiber cables.
C. At the point of termination, the minimum bend radius shall be four times the outside diameter of FIUTP
cables and 10 times the outside diameter of fiber cables. If fiber cable manufacturer allows tighter bend
radius, shall not exceed manufacturers requirements.
D. FIUTP cables to be run a minimum of 2 in. (5 cm.) from AC power distribution cables unless in
separate steel channels.
E. A minimum separation of 5 in. (12.5 cm.) should be maintained between FIUTP communications
cables and fluorescent light ballasts.
F. All power and communications cables are to cross perpendicularly where crossings are absolutely
necessary.
G. Where cables are run in system furniture raceways, communications cables are to be run in separate
physical channels within the furniture system. A minimum separation of 2 in. (5 cm.) should be maintained
between the power and communications cable routes. Where power and communications cables are to
cross paths within the furniture system, cables are to cross perpendicularly.
H. The delivery of cable runs to the furniture system should be developed in accordance with the
capabilities of the particular system to be used. The cables can be fed down a power pole or a column
and enter the furniture using a flex conduit. Care should be taken to ensure that sufficient entry points are
provided into the furniture system and that the flex conduit is of sufficient diameter.
1. Cabling shall be run in free air, in conduit, in raceways or in cable tray as designated on the project
Drawings.
1. Where installed in Cable Tray, cables shall be laid neatly in the tray and not be tie wrapped.
After exiting the tray, cables shall be tie wrapped and supported every 3 to 5 ft (l to 1.5 m) with approved
non-continuous cable support devices, such as communications rated J-hooks.
2. Where installed in free-air, cables shall be supported using J-hook type cable supports installed in
accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
a. Spacing of I-hook cable supports shall be every 3 to 5 ft (1 to 1.5 m) or in accordance with cable
manufacturer's specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
b. J-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider the diameter
of the cable type(s) being installed.
3.4 Testing
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the requirements for
scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. All cabling shall be 100% fault free unless noted otherwise. If any cable is found to be outside the
specification defined herein, that cable and the associated termination(s) shall be replaced
by the contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated.
C. Testing of FIUTP Horizontal Cabling shall be as follows:
1. Testing shall be from the Jack at the Communications Outlet to the Patch Panel on which the cables
are terminated at the Telecommunications Room serving that location.
2. Testing shall be per TIA-1152 Permanent Link test configurations for the applicable
categories of cabling under test.
3. All cables shall be free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for Continuity, Pair Validity and
Polarity, and Wire Map (Conductor Position on the Modular Jack).
3.4 Testing
4. In addition to the above, Performance Testing shall be performed on all cables. Testing of the
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 39
Transmission Performance shall include the following: Wire
map, including shield connection if present
Length
Insertion 10ssNEXT loss, measured from local end
NEXT loss, measured from far-end
PSNEXT loss, measured from local end
PSNEXT loss, measured from far-end
ACRF
PSACRF
Return loss, measured from local end
Return loss, measured from far-end
Propagation Delay
5. Delay Skew Cables shall be tested to the maximum frequency defined by the standards covering
the specified performance category.
a. Transmission Performance Testing shall be performed using a test instrument designed for
testing to the specified frequencies.
b. Test records shall verify "PASS" on each cable and display the specified parameters
comparing test values with standards based "templates" integral to the unit.
6. The Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) used for the cable type under test shall be
traceable to manufacturer's product data.
a. Test results obtained using an incorrect NVP will be rejected.
D. CATV OVER UTP Testing
1. Installer shall completely test all system functions and distribution lines. Levels at all outlets shall be
tested for signal strength using a signal strength meter (Blonder-Tongue FSM-Il or
equal).
2. A standard receiver fed from the same outlets shall show no visible components of cross modulation or
beat interference. At each outlet, signal strength shall be measured at lowest and highest frequency used
in the system and results recorded and entered in manuals.
3. The signal-to-noise ratio shall be tested at the last outlet on the longest branch by recording the signal
strength of the picture carrier of each channel and them recording the readings at the
same frequencies with the in put to the amplifiers terminated at 75 ohms.
4. All readings of the above tests shall be recorded and entered in the manuals.
3.5 Documentation
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable
(or Outlet) J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number, date,
reference setup, and crew member name(s).
C. Information added by the Contractor to Record Drawings relating to Horizontal Cabling shall
include cable routes, outlet locations and numbering and other detail necessary to document.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 40
3.6 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer's Warranty covering all Copper and Fiber Optic
Cabling and Connecting Components.
1. Materials shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from date of
substantial completion of this work.
2. Labor and workmanship shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from
date of substantial completion of this work.
3. The Warranty on the Station Cabling and Components shall be a complete System Channel
Warranty and cover the Permanent Link (Communications Outlet to Patch Panel or
Block) as defined by the referenced TIA documents.
4. This Warranty shall be direct from the manufacturer(s) of the cabling and
connecting components to the Owner.
B. All other materials shall carry the minimum Warranty as identified in Section 27
C. This guarantee shall include all labor. material and travel time. See Division 1 "General
Conditions" and "General Requirements" - Guarantee Documents for further requirements.
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES &
ADAPTERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Connecting
Cords,
Devices &
Adapters. B.
Included are:
1. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords
2. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
3. Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
C. Quantities and lengths for each item shall be as detailed in the Execution part of this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality
assurance requirements for the project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 41
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 4-PAIR MODULAR PATCH CORDS
A. 4-pair Modular Patch cords are used to connect equipment to the communications
outlet and for signal routing within the MDF and IDF’s.
B. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords shall:
1. be constructed of four (4), 24 AWG, 7/32 stranded tinned copper twisted pairs,
insulated with polyethylene, and
2. be twisted-pair (F/UTP).
C. Patch Cord Modular Plugs shall be 8P8C and be pinned TlA T568B.
1. The dimensions of the finished plug assembly shall allow for patch cords to be
positioned in adjacent ports of the Modular Patch Panel specified herein.
D. Patch Cord Jacket shall be colored PVC and be configured with a snagless molded boot of
matching color according to Hilton specifications
E. Patch Cords shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of TlA Category 6.
1. Where required by the Manufacturers performance Warranty, the Patch Cords shall be
by the cabling and/or connecting component manufacturer whose products are installed
under this
project or by a manufacturer recognized and approved by that manufacturer.
F. Patch Cords shall be 100% factory tested.
G. Patch Cords shall be Independently Verified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL).
H. Patch Cords shall be assembled by a manufacturer recognized by the manufacturer(s)
of the cable and termination components used in the horizontal station "link".
1. Patch Cords shall be channel balanced with the Jacks & Patch Panels specified
herein for use in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
1. Cable used to manufacture patch cords meets the category 6 specifications set forth by both
ANSIITlA-568-C.2-2009 and ISOIIEC 11801:2002.
2.2 COAX PATCH CORDS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Cords are used to connect equipment to the backbone cabling
and (if applicable) interconnect backbone cabling segments.
C. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
2.3 FiBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate multimode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cabling
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic ferrules.
4. have connector bodies that are BEIGE, BLUE, BLACK or CLEAR in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have an AQUA cable jacket, and
7. be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. C.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex LC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are BLUE in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
WIRELESS NETWORK
2710000 - 42
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. D.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex SC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system if specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are GREEN in color, with BLUE boot
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. E. Fiber Patch Cords shall be
100% factory-tested.
1. Test documentation and/or manufacturer's quality control certification shall be included with
each Patch Cord or be available from the manufacturer on request.
2. Fiber jumpers shall meet a minimum of IEEE 802.3 series of 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Standards as well as IEC-60793-2-l0 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser
bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish loose materials. Obtain written confirmation by an authorized
representative of client for all loose materials furnished.7
B. Prior to Construction, confirm connector types, length and quantities with client. For
purposes of bidding, consider requirements as detailed below.
3.2 QUANTITIES & LENGTHS
A. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patch panel in TDR
2. Provide lengths with minimal slacks
3. Provide 10% spare
B. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patient rooms, nurse stations, offices
2. Lengths - 7 foot
3. Color - Green
4. Provide 10% spare
C. Furnish Duplex Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
D. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
E. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (3) per Headend, Splitter and TDR's.
2. Provide lengths as required.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 1
SECTION 272000
IP Telephone System
1. GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
HAP invites proposals and pricing for the system from firms that have experience in furnishing, installing
and maintaining such systems for building entities of similar size and complexity in the region, and that
have the staff capacity and expertise to do so for HAP Live 155.
It is the intent of HAP that the telephone system will interface with a digital access entry system in of the
north and south entry points of the building as well as providing telephony, voicemail, and call forwarding
services to all the tenants of the building. The phone system required interface capabilities will be
described in detail in section 2.17 of this document.
The primary goal of this document is to invite a telephone system vendor to propose and competitively
price a phone system that will provide for the communication needs of the tenants, interface with building
access control devices, reduce maintenance, line and operational costs, increase productivity and
simplify system administration.
1.2 Project Schedule
To be determined.
1.3 Proposal Response Format
Please prepare your responses to this invitation using the following format.
1.3.1 Technical Proposal
1.3.1.1 Section 1, Letter of Transmittal
Include a brief statement demonstrating your understanding of the system to be purchased and the work
to be performed.
1.3.1.2 Section 2, Vendor Description & Qualifications
Provide a brief description of your firm’s qualifications and experience as it relates to the subject of this
purchase as defined by Section 1. Provide in this section the required reference information as listed in
Section 1.21.
1.3.1.3 Section 3, System Description
Provide a complete and detailed technical and functional description of the equipment and services
proposed. Include in this section your responses to all required items listed in Section 2 of the purchase
document.
1.3.1.4 Section 4, Project Plan
Provide a complete typical project work plan, detailing all tasks that will be performed under the contract.
Include a listing of all tasks, and name the responsible parties for completing the tasks. Provide
responses to all items in Section 3 of the purchase document. Provide a typical project schedule and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 2
cutover plan itemizing each task, and identify the length of time necessary for a successful installation.
Identify any HAP resources that you will require to complete the installation.
1.3.1.5 Section 5, Warranty, Maintenance and Post-Installation Support
Provide complete responses to all the stated requirements for a full warranty and subsequent
maintenance agreements.
1.3.1.6 Section 6, Exceptions
Clearly state any exceptions to the requirements listed in the RFP, and any exceptions to the HAP 155
Live special conditions. (See Attachment A)
1.3.1.7 Section 7, Pricing
Explain in detail the pricing for the proposed system. Complete the Summary Pricing Sheet as described
in Section 6 of this purchase document. The Summary Pricing Sheet must be signed by an authorized
representative of the Contractor’s firm. Describe all costs that HAP Live 155 Project will incur on an
annual basis, including capital, operating, maintenance and upgrades. Complete the Detailed Pricing
Spreadsheets.
1.4 Evaluation Criteria
Evaluation of proposals and selection of the preferred contractor will be by
The project GC evaluating the criteria to be included in the assessment of pricing proposals will include
the following key points:
Total projected life cycle costs
Qualifications of the contractor
Good name of the manufacturer
System capabilities, features, functionality, reliability and capacity
Relevant experience of the contractor
Ease of user experience and ease of administration
Qualifications/experience of proposed project manager
Warranty and maintenance
Installation and cutover plan and schedule
Responsiveness of pricing proposal
1.5 Minimum Requirements
Contractors must meet the following minimum requirements in order for their proposals to receive further
consideration. Minimum requirements may be met by a prime contractor or any subcontractor on the
prime contractor’s team.
1. Contractor must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the telecommunications industry, furnishing,
installing and supporting telephone and intercommunications systems of similar size and complexity.
2. The proposed system design and configuration must meet or exceed all of the requirements of the
pricing proposal document with regard to capacity, functionality, performance, reliability, scalability,
survivability and security as detailed in section 2.
3. Contractor must submit with its proposal a comprehensive and detailed system warranty, maintenance
and ongoing support program that meets or exceeds all the requirements stated in section 3 of the pricing
document including performance monitoring, maintenance, preventive maintenance, trouble resolution,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 3
response times, escalation procedures, management and statistical reporting, and penalties for non-
compliance.
4. Contractor must assign a Project Manager with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in managing
installations of similar size and scope.
5. Contractor must submit a detailed work plan and schedule.
6. Contractor must submit a minimum of three (3) references including project descriptions and current
contact information of the individual that can comment on the Contractor’s performance. The reference
projects provided should be for IP-based telephone and intercommunications systems, of the same make
and model, and of similar size and complexity to the HAP Live 155 project.
7. Contractor must submit detailed pricing as described in Section 6 of this document.
1.10 Manufacturer’s Guarantee
Part A - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating that the Contractor is qualified and certified by the
manufacturer to perform the work described in the pricing document pertaining to manufacturer’s
products.
Part B - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer, in the event that the
Contractor is unable to complete an acceptable installation within the terms and conditions of such
contract, will perform or cause to be performed all installation obligations of the contractor for the awarded
contract at no additional cost to HAP Live 144 project.
Part C - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating the manufacturer, in the event that the Contractor
is unable to provide continuing maintenance within the terms and conditions of such contract, will perform
or cause to be performed all maintenance obligations of the contractor for the awarded contract at a cost
to the Town no greater than the Contractor's then prevailing rates per the pricing proposal.
Part D - For a five-year period from the date the HAP has accepted the installation pursuant to the terms
of the contract the manufacturer's guarantee will also include the following:
1. Parts supply and replacement.
2. Manufacturing field support and maintenance to protect HAP from interruption of service due to the
inability of the Contractor to meet his service obligations. This support and maintenance will be provided
at the costs identified in this proposal. The determination of what constitutes inability of the Contractor to
meet service obligations under the contract shall be that of the Town in its sole discretion.
3. Continued enhancement and upgrade of the proposed system hardware and software.
Part E - In the event the Contractor proposes to supply principal components of the system from different
manufacturers, separate written guarantees from the manufacturers must be supplied as requested
above. Contractors should request direction from the HAP Live 155 project if a question is raised as to
whether an item comprises a principal component requiring a separate manufacturer's guarantee.
Part F - The Contractor must demonstrate that it has a stable and long-term relationship with the
manufacturer. Provide documentation that this relationship is, at a minimum, 5 years in duration. The
above referenced manufacturer's guarantee must be submitted with the proposal.
1.11 Award
An award will be made to the Contractor whose proposal is most responsive to the needs of the HAP Live
155 project as determined solely by the GC.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 4
1.12 Proposal Costs
Contractors are solely responsible for their own expenses in preparing a pricing proposal and for
subsequent negotiations with the GC for the HAP 155 Live project, if any. If HAP and or the GC elect to
reject all proposals, the neither HAP or the GC will be liable to any Contractor for any claims, whether for
costs or damages incurred by the Contractor in preparing the proposal, loss of anticipated profit in
connection with any final Contract, or any other matter whatsoever. The GC is likely to require one or
more meetings with Contractors that have been selected as finalist for this project. Contractors are solely
responsible for their own expenses attributable to any activity or materials related to such meetings.
1.13 Completeness of Proposal
By submission of a pricing proposal the Contractor warrants that all components required to run the
system have been identified in the proposal, or will be provided by the Contractor at no charge.
1.14 Reservation of Rights
The GC and HAP reserve the right to:
Reject any and all pricing proposals received in response to this request for Bid.
Waive or modify minor irregularities in pricing proposals received.
Utilize any and all ideas and suggestions submitted in the proposals received.
Change the quantities of equipment or service to be furnished in order to reflect any system
requirements which may become known after issuing the request for a bid. The unit prices furnished with
the proposal will be used to modify the contractor's quoted price.
Negotiate with multiple Contractors to serve the best interests of HAP.
Act as a self-reference for any vendor with which the HAP has prior experience.
Should HAP or the GC be unsuccessful in negotiating a contract with the selected Contractor within an
acceptable time frame, HAP may conduct negotiations with another Contractor.
1.15 Compliance with Applicable Laws and Ordinances
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable state and federal laws, and ordinances, codes and
regulations.
1.16 Withdrawal of Proposals
Once its pricing proposal is submitted and received for consideration and comparison with the other
proposals similarly submitted, the Contractor agrees that it may not and will not withdraw it within ninety
(90) consecutive calendar days after the actual date of the opening of proposals unless extended by
addendum.
1.17 Subcontractors and Third Parties
It is the intention of the GC and HAP to award a single contract for the work to be performed. Contractors
intending to enter into partnerships, or use subcontractors or third parties to provide any
components/subsystems or to perform any portion of the work must include a description of which
portion(s) of the Contract will be performed by partners, subcontractors or third parties, the names and
addresses of the partners/subcontractors/third parties, and the expected amount of money each will
receive under the Contract. Contractors may not use the services of other Partners, subcontractors, third
parties not named in the Contractor's pricing proposal without prior written permission from the GC and or
HAP. The contractor shall be completely responsible for the actions of its partners, subcontractors, third
party providers, the components/subsystems that they provide, and the performance of their work as if
the partners, subcontractors, third parties were employed directly by the Contractor.
1.19 Insurance Bond
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 5
Insurance Requirements
Vendor/Contractor shall agree to maintain in force at all times during the contract the following minimum
coverage and shall name the GC and HAP as an additional Insured on a primary and non-contributory
basis to all policies except Workers Compensation. All policies should also include a Waiver of
Subrogation. Insurance shall be written with Carriers approved in the State of Connecticut and with a
minimum AM Best’s Rating of “A-“VIII. In addition, all Carriers are subject to approval by HAP
(Minimum Limits)
General Liability Each Occurrence
General Aggregate
Products/Completed Operations
Aggregate
$1,000,000
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
Auto Liability Combined Single Limit
Each Accident $1,000,000
Umbrella
(Excess Liability)
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
If any policy is written on a “Claims Made” basis, the policy must be continually
renewed for a minimum of two (2) years from the completion date of this contract. If the
policy is replaced and/or the retroactive date is changed, then the expiring policy must be endorsed to
extend the reporting period for claims for the policy in effect during the
contract for two (2) years from the completion date.
Workers’ Compensation and WC Statutory Limits
Employers’ Liability EL Each Accident $500,000
EL Disease Each Employee $500,000
EL Disease Policy Limit $500,000
Original, completed Certificates of Insurance must be presented to The GC and HAP prior to contract
issuance. Vendor/Contractor agrees to provide replacement/renewal certificates at least 60 days prior to
the expiration date of the policies.
1.20 Contractor Qualifications and Minimum Requirements
1.20.1 Contractor References
The Contractor must demonstrate experience and capability in the installation and maintenance of the
proposed systems, by providing evidence of successful completion of projects of similar size and scope.
The Contractor shall provide a list of at least three (3) customer references, with the following information:
Customer name and location
Contact person(s): name, title, telephone number and email address
System and size (number of locations and stations)
System installation date
Years’ system has been maintained by contractor
Any special features or functionality implemented or proposed
HAP & the GC may make any investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of Contractors
to perform the work, and Contractors shall furnish HAP all such information and data for this purpose as
HAP and the GC may request.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 6
1.20.2 Project Management Team
A critical component of the GC & HAP’s evaluation of the Contractor will be the
team of individuals that the Contractor proposes to perform the installation.
The Contractor shall identify and appoint a competent and experienced Project Manager to act as its
representative, and to supervise its employees and partners/subcontractors/third party providers during
the installation, cutover, and final testing of the system. The resume of the proposed Project Manager,
including references, shall be submitted with the proposal. During any subsequent interviews, the
proposed Project Manager shall attend. The GC and HAP will use this opportunity to evaluate the
proposed Project Manager, and his/her communications skills and project management/leadership
capabilities. The Contractor shall not replace the Project Manager without the GC’s or HAP’s written
approval.
The Contractor shall also identify additional key personnel who shall support the designated Project
Manager, and be available to the Town in the absence of the primary Project Manager. The Contractor
shall clearly describe escalation procedures available to the HAP. Once the key project team members
have been assigned and accepted, the GC and/or HAP will reserve the right to approve any proposed
substitutions.
The Contractor shall not rely on GC staff for support in excess of normal project participation. HAP and/or
GC staff participation is expected to include providing access to facilities, providing documentation,
attendance at project meetings, and necessary coordination. The Contractor shall clearly identify any
HAP or GC resources it requires.
1.21 Public Announcements
Public announcements or news releases pertaining to this contract shall not be made without prior
permission of HAP.
1.22 Contract Template
Attached hereto as Attachment A are HAP’s standard terms and conditions. Contractors shall be
prepared, if selected, to agree to the terms stated in the contract. Material changes to the terms and
conditions will not be permitted. This pricing document and Contractor’s response to the pricing document
will be attached as exhibits to the resulting contract in order to establish the scope of work or for any other
relevant reason. Contractors shall list any exceptions to the HAP’s standard terms and conditions in
Section 6 of their pricing proposals.
1.23 Acceptance of Proposals
This Request for Proposal should not be construed as an agreement to purchase goods or services.
Although project costs will be a heavily weighted factor, the GC and or HAP are not bound to enter into a
Contract with the Contractor who submits the lowest priced proposal or with any Contractor. Neither
acceptance of a proposal nor execution of a Contract will constitute approval of any activity or
development contemplated in any proposal that requires any approval, permit or license pursuant to any
federal, state, or
municipal statute, regulation or by-law.
1.24 Liability for Errors
While the GC and HAP will use considerable efforts to ensure an accurate representation of information
in this Request for Proposal, the information contained in this Request for Proposal is supplied solely as a
guideline for Contractors. The information is not guaranteed or warranted to be comprehensive or
exhaustive. Nothing in this pricing request document is intended to relieve Contractors from forming their
own opinions and conclusions with respect to the matters addressed in this request for bid
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 7
1.25 Modifications of Terms
HAP reserves the right to modify the terms of this Request for Proposal at any time at its sole discretion.
This includes the right to cancel this Request for Proposal at any time prior to entering into a Contract
with the successful Contractor.
1.26 Ownership of Proposals and Public Disclosure
All documents, including proposals, submitted to the Town become the property of HAP.
1.27 Patents
The proposer shall hold and save the Town of Montville and its officers, agents, servants, and employees
harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses for, or on account of, any
patented or unpatented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance
of the contract, including its use by HAP, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the proposal
documents.
1.28 Payments
1. HAP will make such payments to the proposer not less than 30 days following the approval of an
invoice submitted for service provided.
2. HAP is exempt from the payment of excise taxes imposed by the Federal Government, and the Sales
and Use tax of the State of MA, under State Statue 12-412, such taxes should not be included in the
proposal price.
1.29 Non-Collusive Proposal Statement
All proposers shall be required to provide a signed non-collusive statement
(Attachment B) with all the public proposals as follows:
a. The proposal has been arrived at by the proposer independently and has been submitted without
collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding, or planned common course of action with, any
other vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the Legal Notice for Proposals,
designed to limit independent proposals or competition.
b. The contents of the proposal have not been communicated by the proposer or their employees or
agents to any person not an employee or agent of the proposer or its surety on any bond furnished with
the proposal, and will not be communicated to any such person prior to the official opening of the
proposal.
2 System Requirements
2.1 Current Environment New Construction
2.2 Summary of Proposed Telephone System Requirements
The HAP Live 155 intends to deploy an IP telephone system consisting of the following primary elements:
IP telephone system, including all necessary server components will
155 Pleasant Street, Northampton, MA
70 IP Telephones Bundles with base and Dect unit
5IP Telephones at the HAP office
1 IP Teleconferencing Telephones.
The system to be installed should be capable of expansion in terms of additional IP telephones, and
Analog Ports. Upon completion the systems installed will perform as a single system and include the
following functionality:
A coordinated dialing scheme - The dialing scheme will facilitate calling among all extensions. The
numbering plan will allow users at any extension to dial any other extension on the network by dialing a 3-
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 8
digit extension number. The system will recognize the number dialed and route the call appropriately.
Departments and Users will keep existing extension numbers where possible.
Network-wide automatic route selection – The system shall have the ability to route calls from any
extension via the most appropriate available facilities system-wide.
Centralized attendant service - Incoming main number calls directed to any site shall be able to be to
be answered and processed from any location.
Incoming call routing - Incoming calls to main listed numbers or DID numbers shall be able to be routed
to attendant positions or extensions, regardless of the number dialed, based upon time of day, day of
week, attendant availability, or other parameters.
Feature transparency - System features shall be able to be employed transparently across the network.
Calling number/name display on sets – Telephones with displays and attendant consoles will have the
ability to display the extension number and the name of the individual of the originating extension of any
call placed between any extensions on the network. The feature will further apply to call routing
information when calls are forwarded or transferred between extensions on the network.
Networked messaging system – All sites on the network will be served by a single voice messaging
system or multiple systems capable of full integration to act as a single messaging system. Full
integration between the messaging system and the telephone system must extend to all extensions.
Number portability – Any extension number in HAP’s numbering range must be able to operate at the
building. There should be no requirement to dedicate certain number blocks to specific nodes.
System administration – The telephone system and peripheral systems must be configured to allow all
nodes to be administered from one or more LAN-based workstations that may be located anywhere on
the network, or from secure remote locations. Minimum system administration functionality is defined in
the System Management and Administration section of this document.
Call Accounting and Reporting
IP Duress Call Features
· The capability to initiate a "Silent Duress" call and escalate to the appropriate security person(s),
local or remote
· Location identification by handset location.
· Deployment of a front line link to first responder.
· Not an all or nothing feature, can be deployed to selected phones.
· Work on all phones, IP and analog.
All components shall be new, no refurbished components will be considered. Contractors shall submit a
detailed design and configuration diagram indicating the specific components in each building and floor,
and the connectivity among components for their proposed system with their bids.
2.3 Telephone System Life Cycle
The anticipated operating life cycle of the proposed system must be at least seven (7) years. Contractors
must guarantee support for their proposed systems for the entire system life cycle. Said support must
encompass the following:
Maintenance
Spare Parts
System administration and reconfiguration
Hardware and software upgrades
Documentation updates
Training/retraining
2.4 Proposed Telephone System Location
Contractors shall provide a proposed equipment rack layout for all required equipment spaces and wiring
closets. Contractors shall provide the physical and environmental parameters for all switching equipment
and ancillary systems. Contractors shall install its equipment in available space in existing 19” equipment
racks in room 212, or supply a new rack to support its equipment if there is inadequate space in the
existing rack. Contractors shall state the precise preparation requirements needed to accommodate the
system, including:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 9
Space requirements in rack units
Thermal dissipation (BTU/hour)
Power requirements: voltage/current rating and receptacle type per component
Temperature/humidity operating range
Wall/floor/ceiling surface requirements
Lighting requirements
2.5 Telephone System Standards
The proposed system must adhere to current and proposed industry
standards as they pertain to VoIP. Discuss your system’s support for such
standards, including, at a minimum, the following:
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
H.323 suite of standards for multimedia communications over IP
Media encoding standards (G711, G729)
QoS prioritization (802.1Q, 802.1p, Diffserv)
Web Services/Services Oriented Architecture
Enhanced 911 – Provide detailed ALI information beyond the ALI assigned to the trunk being used to
call 911.
Discuss these and other relevant standards that apply to VoIP, specifically as they pertain to your
proposed solution, and how the Town may benefit from your implementation of these standards.
2.6 Security
The system shall be secure and possess mechanisms to protect critical tables, databases, and operating
systems. Access to the system by Town operations personnel and the service provider should be
controlled through the use of passwords and other appropriate security measures to prevent unauthorized
alteration or destruction of critical tables, databases, programs, etc.
2.7 Telephone System Station Equipment
HAP will deploy a configuration of primarily IP telephones, with limited use of analog telephones. Power
to IP telephones shall be provided by PoE switches to be provided by the contractor.
Stations shall be ADA compliant and hearing aid adaptable. Contractors must provide a listing of each
type of telephone instrument available and the add/delete price for each model. These add/delete prices
will be used during station review process to determine any incremental costs/cost reductions resulting
from the station reviews. The unit cost will apply until system cutover. The system will be required to
support, at a minimum, the following telephone type:
IP telephone set equipped with multiple, fixed and programmable line appearance keys, feature keys,
displays of adequate size and resolution to allow users to take advantage of set-based applications, and
speakerphones.
The default IP Telephone set will be equipped with at a minimum:
24 programmable buttons or soft keys
At least the following fixed function keys:
· Mute
· Menu
· Cancel
· Redial
· Transfer/Conference
· Message
· Volume up
· Volume down
· Speaker
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 10
Dual Ethernet Port (other devices such as computer workstation can be daisy chained off of phone)
The default Analog Telephone set will be equipped with at a minimum:
8 programmable buttons or soft keys
At least the following fixed function keys:
· Redial
· Mute
· Transfer
· Conference
· Hold
· Message
· Volume up
· Volume down
· Speaker
The cordless IP telephone sets will be equipped with at a minimum:
Wired Base Station
Speaker Phone
Call Hold/Forward/Transfer
Contractors shall submit the following information to describe the proposed
IP telephone sets.
Functionality – Describe the features standard to each set, including capacity (# of line appearance keys,
# of simultaneous calls), features, hard keys, soft keys, ease of use
Display – Describe the display, including size (length and width), resolution (pixels), and the number of
lines and characters that can be displayed.
Describe what is displayed during various operations (while on hook, while off hook, while dialing a call,
while on a call, while initiating a conference or transfer). Describe other display functionality including call
logs, speed dial lists, directory(s), etc.
Applications – Describe the applications that can be accessed via the IP set. Describe the applications
that are included in your proposal pricing and any additional applications that are currently deliverable.
Identify whether the system includes an application development tool that allows the development of
additional applications, and the standards that are supported (HTML, XML, etc.).
Headset Support – Describe the ability of the proposed sets to support wired and wireless headsets.
Describe whether the sets have headset jacks.
Describe whether the sets support Bluetooth wireless headsets, and whether an outboard appliance is
required.
Power Consumption – Identify the power required to serve each IP telephone set in WATTS. Identify the
power requirements in an on hook condition, off hook condition, and during call setup.
Consoles – PC-based console with capabilities to monitor line status/presence, transfer calls to an
extension, and transfer calls to voice mail. No PC-based consoles should be provided in the base price.
Analog single line telephone sets - The system shall support the connection of analog devices such as
analog telephones, fax machines, credit card authorization devices, and modems.
Softphones – software supporting telephone service integrated into a PC, with no physical telephone
set. No softphones shall be included in the base price.
Cordless telephones.
Contractors must provide a description and photographs of the entire family of telephone instruments that
may be used on their proposed system, identifying instrument size, fixed and assignable button
appearances and features, and color selections.
2.8 Station Reviews
The exact quantity, type and configuration of telephone instruments to be installed will be determined as a
result of detailed station reviews to be conducted by the successful Contractor, with assistance from HAP.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 11
Station reviews shall include on-site meetings with representatives from HAP to determine the
requirements, and properly apply the capabilities of the new system to each station. HAP requires that the
successful Contractor physically visit and interview representatives from HAP at the site in order to
understand the configuration and operation and to complete the system configuration.
2.9 Desktop Integration
Contractors shall submit descriptions of the desktop integration features available in their systems.
Include in this discussion the following, at a minimum:
Ability for users to manage telephone feature configuration from the desktop
Ability for users to manage voice mailboxes from the desktop
LDAP Integration
Presence and status features
Ability to do “click-to-dial” by mouse-clicking a telephone number listed in a directory, embedded in an
email or website, document or other source
Ability to access voice mail messages from the desktop
2.10 Mobility
Contractors shall describe the ability of their proposed systems to support mobile workers, including the
following.
2.10.1 Telecommuters
For employees that may work remotely, regardless of frequency, the system should have the ability for
those workers to make and receive calls as if the worker was in the office. HAP envisions functionality
allowing workers to “log in” from a remote site, using an IP telephone or softphone client. This
functionality shall provide all the capabilities that the worker would enjoy if he/she was at his/her office.
When activated, incoming calls to the worker’s extension shall ring at the remote site, and provide all the
information (caller ID, for example) and feature access (call transfer, conference, for example) that the
worker has when working from the office. Also when activated, outgoing calls shall access the HAP
network (PSTN) facilities and shall be captured and reported on by the call accounting system, should a
call accounting system be implemented. The worker shall be part of the HAP extension dial plan when
this feature is activated.
Contractors shall submit a detailed description of the mobility functionality included in their proposals to
support telecommuters, and also provide a description of other telecommuter capabilities available with
the proposed solution. Contractors shall submit details regarding the client software. Contractors will
provide unit pricing for this functionality.
2.10.2 Cellular Telephone Integration
Describe the capability for cell phone-to-desktop phone integration to support mobile staff. This capability
is not to be confused with simple call forwarding to a cell phone. The preferred capability is that office
extensions can be extended to a cell phone, without the caller knowing that the call is being extended.
Contractors shall describe this functionality in detail, including any necessary hardware or software, the
process by which the feature can be activated locally and remotely, and costs. Contractors will provide
unit pricing for this functionality.
2.10.3 Hot-Desking
Describe the capability for users to log in to an IP phone other than his/her desktop telephone. The
desired capability is that a user may log-in to an alternate telephone, and that alternate telephone takes
on the extension number and all the characteristics and configuration of the user’s desktop telephone.
Contractors shall describe this functionality in detail, including any necessary hardware or software, the
process by which the feature can be activated and deactivated, and costs. Contractors will provide unit
pricing for this functionality.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 12
2.11 Network Services
The system must support interconnection to a wide complement of network services, including the
following:
Loop start and ground start central office trunks
T-1
ISDN PRI & BRI
10/100/1000 Ethernet (gigabit Ethernet link required for LAN and WAN connectivity)
2.12 Features and Capabilities
Contractors shall provide a complete list and description of all system and station features available with
the proposed system. The Town will evaluate the system and user feature sets based upon the
applicability of the features to HAP requirements, the ease of use of the features, the ease of
management, configuration and reconfiguration of the features, whether features are standard or optional,
and costs.
The Contractor shall describe which features and settings can be controlled, configured and reconfigured
by end users, which are controlled by the system administrator, and the level of flexibility that the system
administrator has to allow or disallow end user control. The Contractor shall describe the tools available
to end users to control, configure or reconfigure features and settings.
2.13 System Administration and Management
System administration and management tools shall be provided to enable HAP to manage the system.
The proposed system shall include the hardware, all required software, programming, and the necessary
link to the telephone system. The system shall be able to be accessed via the HAP network and remotely
via VPN or web portal, with appropriate security. As a minimum, the system must support the following:
2.13.1 Moves, Additions and Changes
The system shall provide a means for the Town to perform moves, additions, and changes in real time, or
on a scheduled basis.
2.13.2 Class of Service Definition and Maintenance
The system shall provide a means for the Town to assign classes of service which define the set of
privileges and features available for each station. The system shall also provide a means for the Town to
create new classes of service as the need arises. Contractors shall identify the number of classes of
service that the system will support.
2.13.3 Control of Network Services
The system shall allow the Town to exercise access to and control over network services attached to the
system.
2.13.4 System Performance Monitoring and Reporting
The proposed system shall be equipped with all necessary hardware and software to monitor system
performance, generate alarms, conduct diagnostic tests, and create reports providing summary and
detailed history of the system performance. Contractors shall describe all conditions and parameters that
are monitored and reported on. Selected conditions and parameters that shall be included are:
Voice quality on the IP network
Security (reporting on security breaches, attempted security breaches)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 13
Resource utilization
Alarms and actions taken
Trunk utilization
Nothing in Section 2.13 is intended to absolve the selected Contractor of any of its responsibilities to
develop and load all initial databases, perform MAC work, monitor system performance, respond to
alarms, and otherwise conduct preventive and responsive maintenance in compliance with the terms of
the warranty or any future maintenance agreements.
2.14 Voice Mail/Unified Messaging System
2.14.1 General
Contractors shall propose a voice mail system. For the initial installation, the system shall be sized to
support the required number of current users and include the following functionality at a minimum:
Forward to email.
Password protected mailboxes.
Record a call to voice mail.
Email Delivery.
As more sites are added, the Town must be able to add ports and storage to meet their requirements.
Contractors shall identify the maximum capacities of their proposed system and any thresholds that will
require additional investment, such as a larger server.
Contractors shall submit a complete description of their voice mail system.
Include a list and description of all features and functions of the system, and state whether they are
standard or optional.
2.14.2 Integration with Telephone System
The voice mail system must be fully and transparently integrated with the proposed telephone system.
Integration capabilities shall include, at a minimum:
Lighting message waiting indicator on telephone sets.
Providing stutter dial tone on sets not equipped with a message waiting indicator.
Forwarding of calls to personal greeting.
Transfer of calls directly to a voice mailbox.
Transfer of calls from a coverage point directly to the mailbox of the originally intended destination.
Out-calling.
2.14.3 Desktop Integration
Contractors shall describe the ability of the voice mail system to integrate with desktop PC’s, smart
phones and other devices. Desirable features include:
Inbox-style display of voice mail messages.
Ability to manage voice mail messages from desktop (select individual messages, listen, save, delete,
forward, forward with annotation, fast forward, reverse).
Ability to manage user mailbox from the desktop (select/change
greeting, change number of rings before forward to mailbox).
2.14.4 Automated Attendant
The voice mail system shall include automated multi-level attendant functionality. Calls made to specific
numbers may, at the discretion of HAP, receive a recorded announcement followed by a menu of choices
(press ‘1’ for Main Office, ‘2’ for Guidance, etc.).
HAP shall have the ability to pre-record multiple automated attendant greetings that may be activated on
a scheduled basis or on demand by secure access from any telephone or PC on the Town network,
remotely via VPN, or via a secure web portal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 14
The Town shall have the ability to record and activate new messages in real time to react to specific
situations such as weather delays.
2.15 System Paging Requirements
The system will have the paging ability and shall include the following functionality.
Ability for a user with proper permissions and security to page from a telephone system handset to a
single IP Telephone, a group of IP Telephones, or all Telephones.
Ability to “talk back”. When a user pages an IP telephone, the user at the receiving end of the page
should be able to respond either by talking back to the microphone built in to the phone, or to pick up the
telephone handset to have a private conversation.
Optional Ability for stand-alone IP speakers, or loudspeaker
integration within areas not within earshot of IP phones such as
hallways within the town hall.
2.16 Call Accounting System
All proposals must include a call accounting system integrated with the telephone system. The call
accounting system must be fully and transparently integrated with the proposed telephone system. The
call accounting system shall perform, at a minimum, the following functions:
1. Logging of all incoming and outgoing PSTN calls.
2. Caller ID / ANI tracking of incoming calls through multiple internal transfers.
3. Summary reports by individual station or groups of stations including costing.
4. Summary reports by date/time period(s).
5. Summary reports by individual trunk(s) or line(s).
6. Summary reports by calling and called number(s).
7. Call history search based on phone extension, calling number, called number, date, and/or time.
8. A graphical user interface (GUI) for all administrative, searching, and reporting functions.
9. Optional, set real-time alarms to detect toll fraud and generate reports that detail telecom misuse.
The Call Accounting System must meet capacity requirements for the newly installed system as well as
capacity for growth.
2.17 Public Safety Phone System Interoperability
The newly installed phone system should have the ability to interoperate with the phone system at the
Public Safety Building.
Three-digit dialing
System Fail Over/Resiliency, in the event either controller goes off line the controller at the other site
will assume control. When the faulty controller returns to an on-line status the system (phones) will fail
back to original controller.
PRI Fail Over/Resiliency, maintain service continuity if either PRI circuit is interrupted.
Integration into call accounting system
2.18 Cable/Termination Requirements and Specifications
Cabling for IP phones will be reworked or newly installed as necessary. Whether reworked on newly
installed the following applies:
All cables shall be installed/tested or reworked/tested to TIA/EIA-568-C, specifications and standards.
Test all UTP cabling for Wire Map, Cable Length, Insertion Loss, Near End Cross Talk (NEXT), Power
Sum Near End Cross Talk (PSNEXT), Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT), Power Sum Equal
Level Far End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT), Return Loss, Propagation Delay, Delay Skew, DC Loop
Resistance, and provide a
detailed report of all cable tests. Labeling of all work area faceplates/outlets, cables, patch cords,
terminations, patch panels and port identifiers shall be in accordance with
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 15
ANSI/TIA-606-B.
3. Warranty, Maintenance & Post-Installation Support
3.1 Design and Operation
Contractor shall warrant that the equipment, components, and services sold or provided in response to
this request for bid will perform in accordance with their respective design specifications, and will operate
in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications when operated and maintained in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for a minimum of seven (7) years from
Acceptance. This represents the anticipated life cycle of the proposed system.
3.2 Configurations
Contractor shall warrant that the configurations of equipment and services proposed in response to this
RFP represent sound design principles being applied to provide a total system solution to the
requirements stated in the request for bid, and that the equipment and services provided will operate
together in a manner to perform the functions expressed in the request for bid.
3.3 Equipment Models
Contractor shall warrant that the equipment offered is standard new equipment, and the latest model of
regular stock product, with parts regularly used for the type of equipment offered; also that no attachment
or part has been substituted or applied contrary to manufacturer's recommendations and standard
practice. Contractor shall furnish the current version of software for all systems provided. If a new version
or release is issued after contract execution, but prior to the shipment of the system, then
the Town shall have the option of substituting the new version or release in
place of the originally proposed version or release, at no additional charge.
3.4 Product Life Cycle
Contractor shall warrant that the components offered are not currently at or near the end of their product
life cycle. Contractors shall submit a statement identifying the length of time from cutover that Contractors
will guarantee new parts availability and manufacturer support.
3.5 Current Installations and Demonstrations
The Contractor warrants that all of the equipment and software proposed must be currently installed in a
user environment and able to be demonstrated. Experimental or unannounced equipment or software will
not be acceptable unless specifically stipulated by HAP.
3.6 Warranty Coverage
The Contractor warrants that the system as priced, including all hardware and software, will include a
complete warranty covering all parts, labor, software updates, travel and all other expenses, for a period
of a minimum of one (1) year from final Acceptance. The Contractor will serve as a single point of contact,
and provide the name, address and telephone number of the individual to contact when maintenance is
required. The Contractor shall further provide escalation procedures and contact names and numbers to
be used when normal maintenance procedures are not adequate to resolve problems.
3.7 Equipment Replacement
During the warranty period, any equipment that must be replaced as a result of conditions covered under
warranty will be replaced with new equipment
of the same make and model.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 16
3.8 Maintenance during Warranty
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide maintenance services on a 7x24 basis. The
Contractor will respond to major failures within four (4) hours. Response time is defined as the amount of
time for a qualified technician to arrive on the HAP site. For the purposes of warranty and maintenance, a
major failure is defined as any failure that affects the following:
20% of station equipment out of service
20% of network services out of service
The failure of any peripheral system (messaging, system administration, etc.)
Deterioration of voice quality to an average of below a MOS of 3.8
Failure of any integration functionality between systems installed under this contract, or between
systems installed under this contract and other existing systems
Any failure whatsoever which substantially impedes the HAP’s ability to operate, as determined solely
by HAP.
3.9 Routine Repairs
During the warranty period, and during any subsequent maintenance agreements, other routine repairs
will be completed before the end of the next business day.
3.10 End of Warranty Period
After the warranty has expired, HAP may elect to enter into service and maintenance agreements with the
selected Contractor. During any such maintenance agreements, the Contractor shall provide
maintenance services on a 7x24 basis under the same terms as the initial warranty as described in
Section 3.8. Maintenance shall include all parts and labor, monitoring the system for alarm conditions and
responding to such alarms, software upgrades necessary to keep the system compliant with
manufacturer support requirements, travel and all other expenses necessary to support the system.
The Contractor will respond to Major Failures as defined in Section 3.8 within four (4) hours. Response
time is defined as the amount of time for a qualified technician to arrive on the Town’s site from the time
that HAP initiates a call for service. Contractors shall describe the processes used for initiating and
tracking trouble tickets (i.e., web portal, telephone, etc.), and how the Town will be able to track trouble
tickets.
HAP will evaluate life cycle costs for an expected life of seven (7) years. Contractors shall provide post-
warranty maintenance pricing on an annual basis. Contractors may submit guaranteed pricing for as
many years as they wish. Otherwise, HAP will assume that maintenance costs will increase 3% annually
in determining total life cycle costs.
3.11 System Failure
In the event of a major system failure, whether due to circumstances covered under warranty or
maintenance agreement, or due to Acts of God or nature, or any other cause, the Contractor will have a
replacement system readily available, which can be installed and operational within 48 hours to provide
rudimentary telephone service to HAP.
3.12 Preventative Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide performance monitoring of the system primary components and peripheral
systems as part of the initial warranty and any subsequent maintenance agreements. If this function is
optional, provide pricing separately.
3.13 Performance Monitoring
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 17
The Contractor shall provide performance monitoring of the system primary components and peripheral
systems as part of the initial warranty and any subsequent maintenance agreements. If this function is
optional, provide pricing separately.
3.14 Remote Diagnostics
The Contractor shall have a remote diagnostics and maintenance capability that permits the Contractor to
monitor system performance, and perform routine diagnostics and maintenance from a remote
maintenance facility, and will identify the location and capabilities of this facility. If this function is optional,
provide pricing separately.
4 Scope of Services
4.1 Implementation Planning
Following the notice of award and contract negotiations, the Contractor will immediately develop a
detailed phasing and implementation plan and schedule for all aspects of the systems implementation
including:
Telephone system common equipment (servers, routers, gateways)
Voice mail system
Call accounting
System configuration and development of all required databases for telephone system and intercom
system
All station equipment and end devices (handsets and speakers), including station reviews, set
configuration, set labeling, placement, tone and test and interconnection
System administration application
Integration of telephone system
Interconnection to PSTN
Interconnection and integration with the Town WAN and LAN
Interconnection of IP telephones and peripheral devices to the HAP LAN
Furnishing and installation of required cross-connects and/or patch cords to provide complete
connectivity from telephone system common equipment to station equipment
Testing of all system functionality, as described in Section 4.8 below
Delivery of system documentation, as described in Section 4.9 below
Training per the requirements stated in Section 5 of this RFP
4.2 Equipment Delivery and Storage
The Contractor is responsible for the safe transport, rigging, moving and shipping of all components to
their final installation location. All components shall be delivered directly to their final installation location.
The Contractor will provide the HAP with an itemized accounting of each item of equipment upon delivery
to Town premises pursuant to the final negotiated contract. Only HAP personnel who are designated and
authorized by the Town to receive delivery shall be the recipients of those deliveries, and only the
signatures of those designated staff members shall be accepted upon the receipts.
4.3 Site Preparation
Unless otherwise specified, the Town will perform any necessary site preparation (space preparation,
power enhancements, lighting, cooling, backboards, and any other construction). Site inspections shall be
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 18
performed by the Contractor prior to delivery and installation to ensure that all required site preparation
items have been completed satisfactorily at the HAP facility. The site inspections will be coordinated and
scheduled with HAP staff. The Contractor shall provide all site requirements with its proposal.
The Contractor will certify that the sites are suitable for the system following this inspection.
4.4 Regulations
All work and materials shall comply with all federal and state laws, municipal ordinances, regulations and
directions of inspectors appointed by proper authorities. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all
permits and licenses required for the performance of the work, and shall post all notices required by law.
4.5 Payment of Material and Services
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, tools, equipment,
transportation, and other facilities necessary for the performance and completion of the work. The
Contractor shall verify conditions at the facility, including door openings and passages. Any and all
special handling requirements shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor.
4.6 Premises
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages to the structure or property of HAP caused by the
Contractor, or any subcontractor or other direct or indirect employee of the Contractor throughout the
course of this installation. Throughout the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the work area
free from debris of all types, and remove from the premises all rubbish resulting from any work being
performed by him on a daily basis. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall leave the
premises in a clean and finished condition.
4.7 Burn-in Testing
The Contractor shall perform factory burn-in tests of all hardware for a
period of three (3) days prior to shipment of the system to the Town. Town
personnel shall have the option to witness such tests.
4.8 Project Completion
The Contractor shall acknowledge that successful completion of this project shall include the installation,
testing, and Acceptance, following a successful Performance Period as described below, by the following
Acceptance Criteria:
Prior to Acceptance by HAP, the Contractor shall be responsible for performing testing and inspections to
verify that the installation and all equipment and materials are performing in compliance with the
manufacturer's specifications. HAP personnel shall have the option of witnessing the testing.
At a minimum, pre-cutover functional tests as part of the acceptance test plan shall include:
All required operator and system features for each installed system, subsystem and station
Placement and reception of test calls under a variety of conditions: busy, no answer, call forward, etc.
Tests to correctly place and receive calls via connected common carrier facilities
Voice quality tests
Integration between Town Hall and Public Safety IP telephone systems
Administrative and maintenance subsystem capabilities
Demonstration of acceptable performance in the presence of traffic overloads
Demonstration of automatic fault detection, survivability and recovery following artificially-induced
failures of each subsystem
Upon demonstration of the completion of successful testing and inspection by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall perform the system cutover based on the schedule and plan described in Section 4.1.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 19
Upon satisfactory completion of the cutover, a Performance Period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar
days shall commence. The Performance Period is defined as 30 consecutive calendar days of operating
in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications, subsequent to testing and inspection.
If a Major Failure (as defined in Section 3.8 above) occurs during the Performance Period, the Contractor
shall remedy the problem in accordance with manufacturer's published specifications, and the
Performance Period shall recommence. Upon successful completion of the Performance Period, and
within three business days, the Town and the Contractor shall meet to confirm Acceptance, and the Final
Acceptance Form shall be executed. If a successful Performance Period cannot be accomplished within
ninety (90) calendar days after commencement of the first Performance Period, HAP reserves the right to
find the Contractor in default, and terminate the Contract. In that event, the Contractor shall remove the
equipment, and HAP Town shall not be responsible for any payment whatsoever to the Contractor,
except for any materials left in place and elected to be reused by HAP.
4.9 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide two (2) complete sets of technical documentation including system manuals,
technical specifications, as-built drawings (hard copy and electronic using AutoCAD or Visio), and a
complete inventory of all components, including at least the serial number, model number, manufacturer,
description, and location installed. The inventory database shall be provided in electronic format
agreeable to HAP.
5 Training Requirements
5.1 End User Training
The Contractor shall supply complete station user training for all station equipment types and other end
user equipment, for all station users, utilizing live equipment, within two weeks prior to system cutover, at
no cost to HAP. HAP will provide appropriate space and assist in scheduling of classes for station user
training. Each user will be provided with written training materials for his/her telephone station equipment.
In addition, a supply of training materials/user guides shall be provided to HAP for future use. User guides
shall also be made available on line.
5.2 System Administration Training
The Contractor shall supply complete training for a minimum of two (2) persons on the operation of the
system management and administration functions, within two weeks prior to the system cutover, at no
cost to HAP. Training will be provided on all primary and peripheral systems and services installed under
this contract.
5.3 Certified System Specialist Training
The Contractor shall provide pricing for the training necessary for HAP to assume responsibility for
system maintenance, should HAP choose to do so after the warranty period has expired, for all primary
and peripheral systems and services installed under this contract. Training will be adequate for personnel
to become "certified" system technicians and/or administrators. Provide pricing exclusive of travel and out
of pocket expenses. Provide the locations where training is conducted. Identify available training courses,
syllabuses and schedules, and provide pricing for on-going training and re-certification programs.
5.4 Post-Cutover Training
“Train the Trainer” or equivalent training shall be provided at no cost to up to three (3) staff. The
Contractor shall provide the materials and support necessary for the HAP to provide training on an
ongoing basis to new employees and refresher training to existing employees. Provide descriptions of all
training programs available, length of classes, and quantities of individuals per class. Provide copies of
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 20
training materials. Training materials and manuals should be available for download to HAP via the
Internet.
6 Pricing Proposal
6.1 Pricing Format
Pricing for the proposed system must be provided in summary format on the table in Section 6.7, and in
detail, by individual component or chargeable item, on the attached detailed spreadsheets (Attachment
3). Each chargeable item of equipment, hardware or software must be listed. The unit purchase and
installation prices must apply from the date of contract until cutover. Add-on unit prices must apply for
one full year after final Acceptance.
6.2 Life Cycle Cost Comparison
HAP will develop a total seven (7) year life cycle cost for the proposed systems, and use this as the
methodology for cost comparison among the proposals. The calculation will include:
All acquisition/purchase costs for the proposed system
All installation costs for the proposed system
All design, configuration, project management and professional services costs for the proposed system
and all subsystems
All annual post-warranty maintenance costs. Contractors shall provide post-warranty maintenance pricing
per the requirements stated in Section 3 of the request for bid on an annual basis. Contractors may
submit guaranteed pricing for as many years as they wish. Otherwise, HAP will assume that maintenance
costs will increase 3% annually in determining total life cycle costs. Annual maintenance costs may not
increase by more than the Consumer Price Index.
6.3 Approximation of Quantities
The quantities given in the proposal are approximate only, being given as a basis for the uniform
comparison of proposals, HAP does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of work
will correspond therewith. An increase or decrease in the quantity for any unit price item shall not be
regarded as sufficient grounds for an increase or decrease in the unit price of that item, nor in the time
allowed for the completion of the work.
6.4 Pricing Timeframe
It is required that all pricing and provisions of the Contractor's proposal remain in effect for a minimum of
90 days from the submittal date or the completion of negotiations, whichever is the latest.
6.5 Authorized Signature
Proposals must be signed below by a representative of the Contractor authorized to commit the
Contractor to the quoted price and all of the terms and requirements stated in the request for bid.
Contractor’s signature below signifies compliance with all the terms and requirements of the request for
bid.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 1
SECTION 281000
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the
Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Electronic Access Control
B. Related sections
1. 28 13 00 Access Control
2. 28 13 33 Access Control Interfaces
C. Products
1. A PaxLock Electronic Lock for enhancing security at a facility.
2. Paxton Access Control software for programming, configuring, maintaining and
monitoring the Electronic Locks.
3. Paxton wireless bridges to allow for wireless communication of events and Lock settings
between the Access Control software and the Electronic Locks.
D. System
1. The above products combined shall form a Paxton Access Control System (ACS) that
meets all of the requirements specified in this document.
2. The ACS shall allow the PaxLocks to use all of its features as well as provide the
additional features listed in this specification.
3. The ACS shall be scalable, allowing for additional Electronic Locks and other access
control hardware from the same manufacturer without requiring change or affecting
functionality of existing Electronic Locks.
4. The system shall require a Server which shall store the access control database,
containing user and hardware information and configuration settings.
a. The Server can be a robust standard desktop PC running the access control
software.
1.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
E. Electronic Locks shall be installed on doors within the site to provide access control
except exit doors to the outside of the building.
F. The Electronic Locks shall meet the access control requirements of the project.
G. The Electronic Locks shall be installed into the site with the Paxton access control system
for exit doors to the outside of the building.
H. The Electronic Locks shall be installed with additional Paxton access control hardware
and software to form a complete access control solution.
I. Overall Electronic Lock capability
1. The Electronic Lock shall provide a wireless solution to access control.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 2
2. The Electronic Lock shall be capable of controlling a single entry point and expanding
one door at a time, up to a minimum of 1000.
3. Each Electronic Lock shall be able to manage the hardware necessary to secure one
door.
4. Each Electronic Lock shall provide access control in a single direction and provide free
access in the other direction.
J. Access control equipment provided by the manufacturer shall be ‘plug-and-play’, allowing
for quick and simple installation.
K. Components of the Electronic Lock:
1. Hardware, which shall consist of a wireless, battery powered, Electronic Lock, which shall
provide control and monitoring of an access point.
2. Communication shall consist of a wireless router provided by the ACS manufacturer,
allowing the Electronic Lock to communicate with the access control software.
L. The Electronic Lock shall provide the following as a minimum:
1. Access Control.
2. Door state monitoring (Door forced, Door left open).
3. Event reporting to the access control software.
4. Wireless communication with the access control software.
5. License free configuration and monitoring software and lifetime updates at no charge.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Control Unit (ACU): An intelligent peripheral control unit that provides the
interface between the Management and Monitoring Subsystem and the devices installed
at the access portal for the purpose of restricting access and monitoring the portal status.
B. Reader: A proximity reader or biometric reader that captures the credential information
and passes it to the ACU for processing.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. PC: Personal computer, used as the Central Station, workstations, and file servers.
E. Token: The electronic credential issued to a person. This device contains the encoded
number that is used to determine if access will be granted or denied.
F. IP: Internet Protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
G. TCP: Transport Control Protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
H. USB: Universal Serial Bus.
I. WAN: Wide area network.
J. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.
K. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific limited security system
functions.
L. DDA compliant: Abides by the Disability Discrimination Act.
M. PoE: Power over Ethernet.
N. Open air: Without obstruction or interference.
O. Server: A PC that contains the database of users and access control settings, which runs
the access control software.
1.5 ACCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION
A. General
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 3
1. Users shall be identified and processed through the means of:
a. Presenting a token to a reader.
2. The system shall not use facility codes for card credentials. Each token/credential shall
have a unique 40 bit encryption for high security.
3. The system shall provide for unique card serial numbers, so the user will not need to
determine the next sequence of cards to purchase.
B. Access Control Software
1. The Electronic Lock shall be configurable using software provided by the manufacturer.
a. This software will have been included with the Electronic Lock at no additional cost.
b. This shall be the same software as used for the existing access control hardware.
2. The software shall feature:
a. A graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree format that
complies with interface guidelines of Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. System license shall be for the entire system and shall include capability for future
additions that are within the indicated system size limits specified in this Section. There
shall be no license fee or yearly renewal fees.
4. Access shall be restricted using password-protected operator login.
5. The software at a minimum shall support the following operating systems:
a. Windows XP
b. Windows 7
c. Windows Vista Business
d. Windows Server 2003 & 2008
e. Windows 8 & Windows 8.1
6. Number of PCs required
a. There shall not be a limit to the number of PCs that can run the configuration
software. (Limits shall be placed based on the SQL licensing.)
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment used shall be covered by a manufacturer’s warranty for a minimum of 5 years.
The following aspects shall be covered:
1. Electrical
2. Electronic
3. Component
4. Mechanical
B. Equipment used shall be provided with firmware upgrades from the manufacturer free of
charge.
C. Any change made in the software shall automatically be sent to the Electronic Lock when it is
next online.
D. Access control system capabilities shall be at a minimum:
1. 1000 access points
2. 50,000 users/tokens
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The ACS vendor shall offer a 5-year non-prorated warranty to cover the Electronic Lock
components and include all software upgrades.
1.8 RELATED DOCUMENTS
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 4
A. The ACS must interact with other physical parts of the facility and any construction either new
or remodelled.
B. When determining locations for placement of access control devices, the installer shall follow
all appropriate building codes and laws concerning life safety and construction.
1.9 COMPLIANCE
A. All Electronic Locks shall comply with the following standards:
1. IPX4 for Moisture resistance
2. ANSI/UL 10C for Fire resistance (20 min fire doors)
3. CAN/ULC S104 for Fire resistance (20 min fire doors)
4. FCC rule part 2.1093 and KDB 447498 D01 for portable RF exposure
5. UL 294
6. CSA C22.2 NO. 205-12
7. Part 15 of the FCC Rules
8. FCC Part 15 Subpart C for Intentional Radiators
9. Industry Canada RSS-210 for licence-exempt Radio Apparatus
B. All wireless bridges shall comply with the following standards:
1. ETSI EN 300 328 for wireless transmission
2. IEC/EN 60950-1 for indoor safety
3. FCC Part 15 Subpart C for Intentional Radiators
4. EN 301-489 for Radio Apparatus
5. UL 294
1.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FUNCTIONALITY
A. Through use of an Electronic Lock, it shall be possible to control access through a door:
1. A token holder shall be able to present their token to the door handle to gain valid
access.
2. Presentation of an invalid credential shall not allow access.
3. Users shall always be permitted exit.
B. The Electronic Lock shall include key override functionality
1. 2 keys shall be provided at no extra cost.
2. It shall be possible to unlock the door using a key, regardless of the Electronic Locks
configuration
3. It shall be possible to unlock the door using a key, regardless of the Electronic Locks
battery state.
C. The Electronic Lock shall be wireless:
1. Data communication with the Server shall be wireless
2. Power shall come from an internal source
D. The access control software shall record door entry events.
1. An event shall be generated for the following:
a. Following a valid credential being read, when the door is unlocked.
b. Following an invalid credential being read, when the door is not unlocked.
c. When the door is forced.
d. When the door is left open.
e. When the battery level is low.
2. All events shall be time and date stamped.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 5
3. All events shall contain which door they relate to.
4. All events from the Electronic Lock shall be communicated with the Server in real-time
E. The Electronic Lock shall remain functional while offline
1. The Electronic Lock shall make access control decisions without communication with the
Server.
2. The Electronic Lock shall store recent events while offline, updating the Server with the
events when communication is re-established.
F. The access control software shall monitor the battery life of Electronic Locks
1. It shall be possible to view an Electronic Locks remaining battery life in the ACS software.
a. Battery life shall be displayed as 5 states.
1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Radio frequency
1. The Electronic Lock shall communicate with an Ethernet bridge.
a. The carrier frequency shall be 2.405 Ghz.
b. Each Ethernet bridge shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 10 Electronic
Locks.
c. The distance that an Electronic Lock can be located from an Ethernet bridge shall be
(in ‘open air’) at minimum 65' (20m).
2. The Electronic Lock shall communicate with a USB bridge.
a. The carrier frequency shall be 2.405 Ghz.
b. Each USB bridge shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 10 Electronic
Locks.
c. The distance that an Electronic Lock can be located from a USB bridge shall be (in
‘open air’) at minimum 100' (30m).
3. All wireless communication shall use AES 128bit encryption.
B. TCP/IP
1. The Ethernet Bridge shall communicate with the ACS Server
a. Communication shall be possible over the WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
2. The USB Bridge shall communicate with the ACS Server over a WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
a. Communication shall be possible over the WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
C. The system shall utilise standard networking protocols to allow installation on corporate
infrastructure.
D. No manual addressing shall be required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer: Paxton
1. Email address:
a. {US} [supportUS@paxton-access.com]
2. Telephone number:
a. {US} [877.438.7298]
3. Skype:
a. {UK} skype:Paxton.support
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 6
C. The components of the Electronic Lock shall be available from a single source manufacturer
to assure compatibility of products.
D. The manufacturer of the Electronic Lock shall also provide an Access Control System that is
compatible with the Electronic Lock.
E. The manufacturer of the Electronic Lock shall also provide a Door Entry System that is
compatible with the ACS.
F. Components shall consist of:
1. Access Control Software. The manufacturer shall have in its employ the software
engineering staff that write and manage the code for the ACS, and shall maintain all
licensing required.
2. Electronic Locks. The manufacturer of the Electronic Locks shall be the same as for the
Access Control System and the Access Control Software.
3. Wireless bridges. The manufacturer of the Electronic Locks shall also supply a selection
of wireless bridges to allow the wireless Electronic Locks to communicate with an ACS.
G. Substitution Limitations
1. It shall be possible to install an Electronic Lock into an existing Paxton ACS.
2. It shall be possible to install an Electronic Lock as a functional replacement of an existing
reader and door lock.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC LOCK
A. It shall be possible to incorporate the Electronic Lock into an existing ACS with the addition of
a wireless bridge.
B. The system shall comprise single-door Electronic Locks to ensure maximum system
resilience through fully distributed intelligence.
C. The Electronic Lock shall not include any switch settings to be adjusted.
D. The Electronic Lock shall come with no less than a five (5) year warranty.
E. It shall be possible to fit the Electronic Lock onto any door of 2" (51mm) thickness.
2.3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRONIC LOCK
A. Proximity Reader
1. The item shall contain a proximity reader. At a minimum, the following token technology
shall be supported:
a. Paxton HiTag2 125KHz
b. EM4100/02
2. The following formats of credential shall be supported:
a. Keyfob
b. Token
c. ISO card
d. Watchprox
3. The read range shall reach a maximum of 2.2" (55mm).
B. Display
1. The item shall house 2 LEDs
a. 1 x Red LED
b. 1 x Green LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following events:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 7
a. Valid credential read – access granted
b. Invalid credential read – access denied
(i) Invalid permissions
(ii) Unknown credential
(iii) Barred credential
c. Update in progress
d. Binding to system
C. Audio
1. The item shall contain a sounder for audible feedback
2. A tone shall sound to indicate the following events:
a. Valid credential read – access granted
b. Invalid credential read – access denied
(i) Invalid permissions
(ii) Unknown credential
(iii) Barred credential
c. Update started
d. Binding to system
3. It shall be possible to disable audible feedback
D. User interaction
1. The item shall contain a proximity reader.
2. The item shall contain a key override.
3. The item shall include a handle on both sides.
a. The manufacturer shall provide an option of handle designs:
(i) Eclipse
(ii) Galaxy
b. The handle shall not rotate more than 70 degrees in a single direction.
c. The handle shall rotate at least 70 degrees for the latch to retract fully.
d. On the insecure side of the door:
(i) The handle shall be free to rotate when access is not permitted.
(ii) Upon presentation of a valid credential, rotating the handle shall unlock the door.
e. On the secure side of the door:
(i) Rotating the handle shall unlock the door, allowing exit at all times.
4. It shall be possible to configure the item to only read a presented credential when a
button is pressed
a. This shall be configured in the ACS software.
b. The button shall be located on the insecure side of the door.
c. When configured to work in this mode, the item shall not read passing tokens (in a
busy corridor for example).
E. Lock case
1. The Electronic Lock shall support a cylindrical lockset.
2. The manufacturer shall provide the item with a variety of lock cases:
a. C Keyway
b. SFIC
3. The lock case shall be compatible with a back set of 2.75" (70mm).
F. Power supply
1. The item shall be powered using 4 x AA Alkaline batteries
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 8
a. The batteries shall be located on the secure side of the door.
b. The batteries shall be accessible using a specialist tool provided by the ACS
manufacturer.
2. Battery life shall allow for a minimum of 20,000 operations before requiring replacement.
a. Users shall always be able to exit, regardless of battery level or state.
b. Access using key override shall be possible when batteries require replacing.
3. The lock motor shall be powered by the ACU power supply.
4. 4 x AA Alkaline batteries shall be provided with the item at no extra cost.
G. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C).
H. Housing
1. The item shall be stylish and modern.
2. The item shall have a similar look and feel on both sides of the door.
3. There shall be no visible fixings on the item.
I. Dimensions
1. The item shall contain the same footprint on both sides of the door.
2. The dimensions (for each side of the door) shall not exceed:
a. Excluding handle:
(i) A width of 3.8" (95mm) at its widest part
(ii) A height of 8.0" (205mm)
(iii) A depth of 1.3" (33mm)
b. Including handle:
(i) A width of 6.9" (175mm)
(ii) A height of 8.0" (205mm)
(iii) A depth of 3.0" (77mm)
J. Features
1. The item shall contain a low power mode:
a. While in the low power mode, the item shall have increased energy efficiency
2. The item shall store locally at minimum 10,000 credentials
3. The item shall communicate with the access control Server.
a. The item shall communicate all events in real-time.
b. The item shall communicate with the access control Server at least every hour.
(i) In low power mode, the item shall communicate with the access control Server at
least every 3 hours.
4. The item shall remain functional while offline
a. The item shall make access control decisions without communication with the Server.
b. The item shall store recent events while offline, updating the Server with the events
when communication is re-established.
(i) The item shall store at minimum 3,584 events while offline.
5. The item shall report its battery life to the Server.
a. It shall be possible to view an Electronic Locks remaining battery life in the ACS
software.
Battery life shall be displayed as 5 states to represent the remaining charge
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 9
2.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR TOKENS
A. The manufacturer of the ACS shall be able to supply Paxton HiTag2 125KHz tokens.
1. The supplied tokens shall contain an authentication method to deter the copying and
unauthorised use of tokens.
2.5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR USB BRIDGE
A. Display
1. The item shall house 3 LEDs
a. 1 x Green LED
b. 1 x Red LED
c. 1 x Blue LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following:
a. If the item is powered
b. If the item is connected to USB / there is USB activity
c. Wireless activity / communication with the wireless Electronic Lock
B. Power supply
1. The item shall be powered from USB
a. The item shall draw a voltage of 5 V (± 0.25)
b. The item shall draw a maximum current of 150mA
C. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C).
D. Housing
1. The item shall be provided with a mounting bracket at no extra cost.
2. The item shall feature an internal aerial.
E. Dimensions
1. The USB bridge shall contain the same footprint as the Ethernet bridge from the same
manufacturer.
2. The dimensions shall not exceed:
(i) A width of 2.7" (70mm)
(ii) A height of 7.7" (195mm)
(iii) A Length of 3.9" (100mm)
F. The ACS shall be limited to only one USB bridge
G. A USB bridge shall support at minimum 10 Electronic Locks
2.6 SPECIFIC REQUIRMENTS FOR ETHERNET BRIDGE
A. Display
1. The item shall house 3 LEDs
a. 1 x Green LED
b. 1 x Red LED
c. 1 x Blue LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following:
a. If the item is powered
b. If the item is connected to the LAN/WAN
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 10
c. Wireless activity / communication with the wireless Electronic Lock
B. Power supply
1. It shall be possible to power the item by Mains supply voltage:
a. A supply voltage as low as 100V AC shall be supported.
b. A supply voltage as high as 240V AC shall be supported.
2. It shall be possible to power the item via the Ethernet lead using PoE:
3. When powered:
a. The item shall draw a voltage of 12 V (± 2)
b. The item shall draw a maximum current of 150mA
C. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C -).
D. Housing
1. The manufacturer shall provide the item with two housing variants:
a. White plastic PCB housing:
(i) The housing shall be wall mountable.
(ii) The housing shall contain room for a Power Supply.
b. Black/Grey desk housing:
(i) The housing shall be provided with a mounting bracket at no extra cost.
2. The item shall feature an internal aerial.
E. Dimensions
1. The dimensions shall not exceed:
a. For White plastic PCB housing:
(i) A width of 7.9" (200mm)
(ii) A height of 3.1" (80mm)
(iii) A Length of 7.9" (200mm)
b. For Black/Grey desk housing:
(i) A width of 2.7" (70mm)
(ii) A height of 7.7" (195mm)
(iii) A Length of 3.9" (100mm)
F. The ACS shall support at minimum 200 Ethernet bridges
G. An Ethernet bridge shall support at minimum 10 Electronic Locks
2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
A. It shall be possible to configure the following Electronic Lock settings from the ACS software:
1. Door name
2. Reader name
3. Door open time
4. Time period to keep the door unlocked during
5. Lock operation
a. Configure to unlock each time a credential is presented
b. Configure to toggle the lock locked/unlocked
6. Enable/Disable alarm for door forced
7. Enable/Disable alarm for door left open
8. Enable/Disable sound
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 11
9. Enable/Disable low power mode
B. Changes in the configuration software shall take affect when the Electronic Lock next
communicates with the ACS.
2.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Perform a final inspection of the installed door hardware and access control
system and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether each component representing the opening assembly is properly installed,
adjusted, operating and performing to system operational narratives.
B. Commissioning and Testing Schedule: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control
System."
2.9 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.0 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.1 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies,
conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with
corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set
should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and
functionality.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 1
SECTION 282300
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. CCTV - Closed Circuit Television System.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 00 (16050) - Common Work Results for Electrical
2. Section 26 05 53 (16075) - Identification for Electrical Systems
3. Section 26 35 33 (16280) - Power Factor Correction Equipment
4. Section 27 05 00 (16050) - Common Work Results for Communications
5. Section 28 16 00 (13730) – Intrusion Detection
6. Section 28 31 00 (13850) - Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Publications:
1. C2 “ASC C2 Eighth Interim Collection of the National Electrical Safety Code”
2. C62.41 “Surge Voltages In Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits”
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
2. 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
3. 1449 “Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors”
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. CCTV: Closed Circuit IP based Surveillance system.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Video cameras, camera outlets, camera controls, monitors, PoE switches, signal processing
equipment, control stations, distribution components, a network video recorders, and
accessories to generate video images, process them, and distribute them.
B. System shall display images on monitors and provide for remote control of video-camera
equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component specified.
Include data on features, ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: For CCTV equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Network Diagram showing wiring and cable distances. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of CCTV equipment and components certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 2
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems.
F. Maintenance Data: For CCTV equipment and components to include in maintenance manuals
refer to Section 01 78 23 - “Operating and Maintenance Data” and Section 01 77 00 -
"Closeout Procedures”. In addition to those requirements, include the following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at the site
for ready access.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
CCTV equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of CCTV
equipment and are based on the specific system indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with 47 CFR 15, 17, and 76.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: System components are equipped and rated for the environments
where installed.
1. Service Conditions for Indoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous operation under
the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature: 32 deg F to 106 deg F.
b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 90 percent (non-condensing).
1.08 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate work of this section with requirements of surveillance equipment provider.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of surveillance equipment and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with warranties made by Contractor under the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flir Digimerge is the Preferred Manufacturer:
FLIR Systems, Inc, 27700 SW Parkway Ave, Wilsonville, OR 97070, USA
866.344.4674
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions accepted of similar or more robust solution manufacturers
2.02 CCTV COMPONENTS
A. Dome Camera: 3.1 MP, True Day/Night; 3mm wide angle; UNI; UTP.
1. HDIP based, wide-angle Acceptable Products:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING
311300 - 1
SECTION 311300
SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all work necessary to perform selective clearing within the limits indicated on the
Drawings, and as specified herein. Selective clearing work shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
1. Tree pruning.
2. Flush cutting shrubs and trees, and grinding of stumps and backfilling of holes with
clean fill and topdress with 6 in. loam.
3. Complete stump removal of trees removed by the Owner in designated fenced areas.
4. Weeping tree crotches and cavities.
5. Removal of deadwood and brush.
6. Removal of all rubbish, debris, and other materials to be disposed of as a result of the
work of this section.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION Clearing and grubbing; Removal and disposal
of felled trees and stumps outside of the work limits of this section.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
Z133.1 Safety Requirements for Pruning, Trimming,
Repairing, Maintaining and Removing Trees, and
for Cutting Brush
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING
311300 - 2
Z133A Best Management Practices Tree and Shrub
Fertilization
2. Tree Care Industry Association, 3537 Stratford Rd., Wantagh, NY 11793 (TCIA):
Ref. 1 Pruning Standards for Shade Trees
Ref. 2 Standard for Fertilizing Shade and Ornamental
Trees
Ref. 3 Bracing, Cabling and Guying Standard for Shade
Trees.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for review, proposed methods and materials for
selective clearing, including a schedule indicating specific dates for implementing specific
work items in each major work area.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All tree work shall be performed by a professional Certified Arborist with a minimum five
years experience, who has successfully completed a certification program equal to the
Massachussetts Certified Arborist (MCA) program/examination sponsored by the
Massachusetts Arborists Association, 8-D Pleasant Street, South Natick, MA 01760; (508)
653-3320; FAX: (508) 653-4112; E-mail: MaarbAssn@aol.com.
B. Selective clearing methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI Z133.1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TREE PRUNING
A. Tree pruning shall be "Class II Medium Pruning" conforming to NAA Ref. 1.
B. Schedule of trees to be pruned and extent of pruning shall be as agreed upon with the
Architect. Tree pruning shall be as directed and approved by the Architect. Notify Architect
minimum 3 days in advance of scheduled pruning of existing trees to remain.
3.2 TREE REMOVAL
A. Trees indicated on the Drawings as "Remove" or trees tagged in the field by the Architect
to be removed shall be felled. Stumps shall be completely removed. Holes shall be
backfilled with clean fill and topdressed with 6 in. loam.
B. Tags of each felled tree shall be saved and returned to the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SELECTIVE TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING
311300 - 3
3.3 PRUNING GIRDLING ROOTS
A. Where specified in the schedule, the Contractor shall remove girdling roots from base of
trees. Removal shall include sawing and splitting as required to remove roots.
3.4 DEADWOOD AND BRUSH REMOVAL
A. Deadwood and brush within the limits of work indicated on the Drawings shall be disposed
of as follows:
1. Brush, limbs, and other material less than 6 in. in diameter shall be chipped and legally
disposed of off-site.
2. All deadwood shall be chipped and legally disposed of off-site.
3. Limbs 6 in. and larger shall be legally disposed of off-site.
B. All debris material not otherwise indicated shall be legally disposed of off-site.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 1
SECTION 312300
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary for site excavating,
backfilling, and compacting, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
B. The work of this section shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Site excavation, filling, and grading.
2. Excavation and backfill for site structures and utilities, including rock removal if
necessary.
3. Preparation of subgrade for slabs and pavements.
4. Grading for landscape and pavement areas.
5. Sheeting, bracing, and support of excavations as necessary.
6. Drainage and dewatering as necessary to perform work in the dry.
7. Placement and compaction of fills.
8. Placement and compaction of aggregate base other than beneath pavements.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK.
2. Section 321216, BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING.
3. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING.
4. Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
5. Furnishing and installing utility bedding and embedment materials is included under the
appropriate utility specification section.
6. Aggregate base courses beneath paving is included under the applicable paving
specification section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 2
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
D 422 Particle - Size Analysis of Soils
D 698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft³ (6000kN-m/m³))
D 1556 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm)
Drop
D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
D 3017 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
D 3740 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction
D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
E 329 Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of
Materials Used in Construction
E 548 General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence
2. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.(AGC):
Manual Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction
1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings
of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions
which may influence the work of this Section.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 3
B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all
conditions affecting work under this Section including work which has been let for
construction under previous bid packages. No claim for additional costs will be allowed
because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.
C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required
for his own information.
1.6 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED
A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions,
natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently
available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the
Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed.
B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed
are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during
the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies
that may be found therein.
C. A geotechnical report, has been prepared for use by the Architect in the design of the
Project. This report is available for general information and viewing at the office of the
Architect.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to retain a Geotechnical Consultant, to perform on-site
observation and testing in accordance with Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
during the following phases of the construction operations. The services of the
Geotechnical Consultant may include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill beyond the building
areas.
2. Observation during placement and compaction of fills.
3. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required.
4. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a
frequency and at locations determined by the Geotechnical Consultant. The results of
these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis
so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated
deficiencies. During the course of construction, the Geotechnical Consultant will advise
the Architect in writing with copy to Contractor if, at any time, in his opinion, the work is
not in substantial conformity with the Contract Documents.
5. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather.
B. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or D 3017.
1. Make at least one field density test of the subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area,
but in no case less than three tests.
2. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of
overlaying paved areas, but in no case less than three tests.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 4
C. The Geotechnical Consultant's presence does not include supervision or direction of the
actual work by the Contractor, his employees, or agents. Neither the presence of the
Geotechnical Consultant, nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse
the Contractor from defects discovered in his work.
D. The Owner reserves the right to modify or waive Geotechnical Consultant services.
E. Testing of soils shall be in accordance with the following:
Property ASTM Test Method
Particle-Size Analysis D 422
Liquid Limit D 4318
Plasticity Index D 4318
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. A 10 lb. sample of each off-site material proposed for use, and of any on-site material when
so requested by the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant, shall be submitted for approval.
1. Samples shall be delivered to office of the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant, as
directed.
2. Samples required in connection with compaction tests will be taken and transported by
the Geotechnical Consultant.
1.9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property
and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets,
curbs, paving, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and
private property. Protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and
without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the
project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of
operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, existing bench marks,
monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
C. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 in. above
grade, which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to
indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be
clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be
maintained at all times until completion of Project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 5
1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities
to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not
to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying
natural ground or excavation bottom.
B. The Contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away
from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 2.0% slope)
shall be maintained at all times.
C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not
cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to existing work, nor to the
work completed or in progress, nor to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, nor cause
any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped
effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation, and shall conform to applicable Federal and
State laws, orders, and regulations.
D. Under no circumstances place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in
excavations containing free water.
E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to
remove water.
F. Where, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Consultant, pumping of excavations is not
effective in maintaining a dry firm subgrade, other dewatering methods acceptable to the
Geotechnical Consultant, shall be employed. This may include the use of well points or
deep well dewatering.
1.11 FROST PROTECTION
A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected,
unless footings or slabs can be poured immediately after the excavation has been
completed. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete is delayed.
B. Completed footings which have not been backfilled shall be protected from freezing by
temporary additional earth cover, insulating blankets, heaters, or other methods acceptable
to the Architect.
C. Frozen material shall not be placed as fill or backfill.
1.12 SHORING AND SHEETING
A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of
earth at side of excavations.
B. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations, or in the absence of such regulations,
comply with the requirements contained in the AGC Manual.
C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all
necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 6
1.13 LEDGE/ROCK
A. Ledge/Rock shall be defined as sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge of mineral matter in
place of such hardness and texture that it:
1. Mechanical Definition of Ledge/Rock: Cannot be effectively loosened or broken down
by ripping in a single pass with a late model tractor-mounted hydraulic ripper equipped
with one digging point of standard manufacturer's design adequately sized for use with
and propelled by a crawler type tractor rated between 210-and 240-net flywheel
horsepower, operating in low gear, or
2. Manual Definition of Ledge/Rock: In areas where the use of the ripper described above
is impracticable, rock defined as sound material of such hardness and texture that it
cannot be loosened or broken by a 6-lb. drifting pick. The drifting pick shall have a
handle not less than 34 in. in length.
1.14 COORDINATION
A. Prior to start of earthwork the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Architect
for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling
inspection procedures and requirements.
B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect
prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to
be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of
these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials
by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk.
D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING LANDSCAPE
A. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and shall conduct his
construction operations so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing
of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the Work.
1. Except where clearing is required for permanent works, for approved construction
roads, and for excavation operations, all trees, native shrubbery, and vegetation shall
be preserved and shall be protected from damage which may be caused by the
Contractor's construction operations and equipment. Existing trees to remain shall be
suitably protected from damage with fencing or other means acceptable to the
Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 7
2. Movement of crews and equipment within the right-of-way and over routes provided for
access to the work shall be performed in a manner to prevent damage to property.
Where unnecessary destruction, scarring, damage, or defacing may occur as a result
of the Contractor's operations the same shall be repaired, replanted, reseeded, or
otherwise corrected at the Contractor's expense.
B. Where indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Architect, disturbed areas shall be
temporary seeded.
1.16 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WATER SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall comply with applicable Federal and State laws, orders, and
regulations concerning the control and abatement of water pollution.
B. The Contractor's construction activities shall be performed by methods that will prevent
entrance, or accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, debris, and other
objectionable pollutants and wastes into streams, water courses, lakes, and underground
water sources.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE OF MATERIALS
A. Material shall be obtained from required on-site excavation, to the extent that suitable
material is available, and from off-site sources, to the extent that suitable material is not
available from on-site excavation.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM,
or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75
mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious
matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH,
OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsuitable material is defined as surficial organics, surficial and buried topsoil and
subsoil, old foundations and pavement, and compressible and deleterious materials.
2. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
2.2 EMBANKMENT MATERIALS
A. Embankment material shall be a granular material conforming to the following:
1. Liquid Limit shall not exceed 35%.
2. Plasticity Index shall be in the range of 2 to 10.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 8
3. Gradation shall conform to the following:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
2 in. 100
3/4 in. 80-100
No. 4 60-85
No. 40 35-60
No. 100 15-40
No. 200 0-12
2.3 BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. On-site material for use in compacted backfill shall be natural, inorganic, granular soil,
taken from areas of excavation after stripping of topsoil and removal of unsuitable material.
Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations
B. Material containing organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, or soft or frost-susceptible soil
is unsuitable for any of the following uses:
Backfill beneath site structures
Backfill beneath pavement and within 5 ft. of subgrade
Bearing strata material
Bedding
C. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and
SM or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
D. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
E. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand as specified under individual paving Sections.
H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 9
I. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent
passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
J. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
K. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a
1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
L. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
M. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.4 FILTER FABRIC
A. Filter fabric shall be a non-woven polypropylene fabric made specifically for use in
subsurface drainage structures equal to Mirafi 140N, manufactured by Tencate, 365 South
Holland Drive, Pendergrass, GA 30567; Tel 800 685 9990; Tel 706 693 2226; Fax 706 693
4400; www.mirafi.com, or approved equal.
2.5 SOIL STABILIZATION GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
A. Geotextile reinforcing fabric shall be Mirafi® HP 370, high performance geotextile,
manufactured by Mirafi Construction Products, 365 South Holland Drive, Pendergrass, GA,
USA 30567; 1-888-795-0808; 1-706-693-2226; 1-706-693-2083, fax; www.mirafi.com; for
base course reinforcement and soil stabilization/reinforcement applications, or approved
equal.
1. Geotextile fabric shall be produced from high tenacity polypropylene yarns, specifically
designed to provide separation, filtration, and reinforcement for moderate to severe site
condition, ensuring long-term performance in new pavement construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. When excavations have reached required subgrade, Contractor shall have subgrades
surveyed to determine if subgrade elevations will allow for the indicated depth of proposed
materials to be placed on them.
1. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material to achieve required subgrade elevation,
as directed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 10
2. If survey indicates that subgrade elevations are too high, continue excavation and
reconstruct subgrades to required elevation as directed, without additional
compensation.
3. If survey indicates that subgrade elevations are too low, add compacted backfill or fill
material to achieve required subgrade elevation as directed, without additional
compensation.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons (13.6 tonnes).
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make
and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of
concrete, utility lines, and fill and backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as
required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only.
B. Sheeting shall be installed where required to maintain safe and workable conditions in
excavations. Sheeting, including necessary swales and struts, shall be selected and
designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for
safety and/or conformance to law.
C. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation
operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage
and movement.
D. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done
by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special
payment will be made.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 11
E. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as
backfill or fill materials.
1. Excavation material, other than topsoil, which is not required for or is unsuitable for
backfill or fill materials, shall be legally disposed of off-site.
F. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to
accommodate bedding material.
G. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels ("over-excavation"), shall be
filled to those levels with compacted Engineered Fill Material.
H. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, structure, concrete, or other
construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be
removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material. Subgrade
shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed.
I. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, brace, and remove forms for concrete,
install structures, piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 in. above
top of pipe or conduit shall not be greater than the sum of outside diameter of the pipe or
the conduit plus 2 ft. (pipe O.D. + 2 ft.). Sides of trench above this level shall be sloping, at
an angle 30 degrees or less from vertical, from this level to grade. In materials where
sloping walls are not stable, trench walls shall be sheeted.
J. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
K. Rock/Ledge Removal: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock/ledge shall be
excavated to a depth 6 in. or more below bottom of structures by either “manual” or
“mechanical” methods as defined herein.
L. Below-ground Demolition
1. Underground items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new
work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished, and/or removed only with the
approval of the Architect.
M. Proofroll areas to support foundations, pavements with a 35 ton rubber tired roller in four
passes in two perpendicular directions. Undercut to level of stable soils in unstable areas.
Perform work in presence of Geotechnical Engineer.
3.3 FILLING
A. Filling shall be done in any area only after the Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed
subgrade.
B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 ft. horizontal to 1 ft. vertical shall
be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 ft. to prevent the formation of
slippage planes.
C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end
of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 12
3.4 FILL, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION
A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering,
forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed.
B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant has
inspected and approved subgrade, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is
ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making
necessary examinations.
C. Filter Materiall for use in areas beyond the building limits and beyond structures shall be
placed in lifts not exceeding 12 in. in loose thickness and compacted to 90% of maximum
density, determined by ASTM D 1557.
D. Where pumping of excavations is not effective and where permitted by the Architect or
Geotechnical Consultant, Bedding Course may be placed below water without compaction
in lieu of Filter Material or Engineered Fill. There will be no adjustment in Contract price.
E. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to
foundation wall, footing, utility line and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such
items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to
prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling the difference in elevation of backfill
on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 in.
1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items.
2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the
structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been
designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings.
F. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be +2 in.
from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately
compensate within each 100 ft.2 area.
G. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted in accordance
with requirements of ASTM D 1557, and as specified in the following table:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 13
COMPACTION TABLE
Area Subgrade Max. Compacted Compaction
or Compaction Thickness Per of Each Lift
Structure Minimum % Lift - in. Minimum %
Above pipe cover
to subgrade 85 12 90
Area or structure
not otherwise noted 85 12 90
Concrete equipment pad 90 8 95
Footing, foundation,
manhole, or similar
structure, and within
2 ft. horizontally 90 8 95
Pavement, including
1 ft. beyond edge 90 8 95
Pipe cover -- 6 95
Engineered Fill 95 6 95
H. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated supported
item (base course, footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth
beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes:
1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course,
footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 ft. beyond the exterior face or
edge of item.
2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at 45o angle with
the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher
and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall
apply.
I. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the
surrounding area fill.
J. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect and Geotechnical Consultant, and equipment shall be replaced
and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained.
K. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before compaction of the next lift is started.
L. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled
equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 4 in. thick layers, to the specified
compaction, using mechanical tampers.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 14
3.5 GEOTEXTILE FABRICS
A. Geotextile fabrics shall be installed at locations indicated on the Drawings, in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum
12 in. at seams.
3.6 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill materials shall be limited to Optimum
Moisture (-1% to +2%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable
within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction.
B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified
densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method
approved by the Geotechnical Consultant.
1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction.
Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient
moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water
distributing equipment at the site for this purpose.
C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content
before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced
or shall be scarified by use of plows, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to
meet the above requirements.
D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display
pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction
equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability.
E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills
which, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Consultant, become inundated or excessively
moistened shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above.
3.7 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall be responsible for dust control during all construction operations. During
the progress of the work, the Contractor shall conduct his operations and maintain the area
of his activities including sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary, so as to
minimize the creation and dispersion of dust. If the Architect decides that it is necessary to
use calcium chloride for more effective dust control, the Contractor shall furnish and spread
calcium chloride as directed. Methods and materials for dust control shall be as approved
by the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
312300 - 15
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's
property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 1
SECTION 321216
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision to construct
the bituminous (asphalt) concrete paving, including aggregate base course, new pavement
and repairs to existing pavement following curb installation, in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Establishment of subgrade elevation; grading; geotextile, and subbase.
2. Section 321416, BRICK UNIT PAVING.
3. Section 321640, GRANITE CURBING.
4. Section 329115, PLANTING SOILS; Planted embankment with loam and sod.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
M 20 Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement
M 81 Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid Curing Type)
M 140 Emulsified Asphalt
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 979 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONROLS
312500 - 1
SECTION 312500
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, and shall perform all op-
erations required to complete the work shown on the drawings, as directed by the Owner, as
herein specified, and as required to properly complete the work.
B. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following as outlined in these specifications or
shown on the Contract Plans:
1. Installation of erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the plans and as neces-
sary to prevent sediments from the project area from leaving the limit of work, or entering
the existing storm drain systems in the vicinity, or entering the proposed storm drain sys-
tems.
2. Maintaining of erosion and sedimentation controls throughout the construction process,
including all controls existing at the site at the commencement of work.
3. Removal of erosion and sedimentation controls at the completion of the project or when
directed by the Owner.
C. All sedimentation and erosion controls must comply with the terms of any environmental
permits issued for this project.
D. Anti-Tracking Pads (Construction Entrances) shall be installed as detailed on the drawings, at
no additional cost to the Owner, where deemed necessary by the Engineer to prevent the
tracking of mud, sediments, soil, or debris onto the public ways or onto surfaces unprotected
by downgradient erosion and sedimentation controls. Smaller anti-tracking pads may be re-
quired in the vicinity of significant grading areas to contain loose earth materials within the ac-
tive grading areas.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork
B. Section 32 90 00 Landscape Work
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. All work and materials shall conform to the latest applicable sections under the state's
various jurisdictions; the Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, Massachu-
setts Highway Department, hereinafter referred to as the "Standard Specifications"; as
well as the codes and standards referenced in the individual sections. In case of conflict,
the codes and standards referenced in the individual sections shall govern.
2. All work and materials shall also be in full accordance with the latest rules, regulations,
and safety orders of the State's Division of Industrial Safety OSHA, A.N.S.I. - A10.1 Safe-
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONROLS
312500 - 2
ty Code for Building Construction, and all other state, county, city, municipality, and the
utility laws rules, and regulations. Nothing in these Plans and Specifications shall be
construed to permit work not conforming to the above.
3. When the Specifications call for material or construction of better quality or larger size
than is required by the above-mentioned codes and standards, then the provisions of the
Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of said codes and standards.
If there is any direct conflict between the above-referenced codes and standards and
Plans or Specifications, the codes and standards shall govern.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings and/or catalog cuts and manufacturer's specifications
for all materials required under this Section.
B. Review by the Owner shall be general and shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsi-
bility for the details of installation and dimension necessary for the proper construction of the
work as required.
C. The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately of availability for specified material or de-
lay of materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STRAW BALES:
A. Straw bales for this work shall consist of straw only and shall be composed only of the dry
stalk of a cereal plant, with all the nutrient grain or seed removed. Straw bales shall contain
no living plant material or seed product. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that straw
bales are free of invasive plant material and seeds. Straw bales for use as sedimentation
traps or perimeter barriers shall be rectangular shaped bales of straw weighing at least forty
(40) pounds per bale either wire-bound or string-tied. Bales shall be installed with bindings
horizontal to the ground surface. Stakes for anchoring straw bales shall be one-inch by one-
inch (1” x 1”) construction grade timber.
2.02 SILT FENCE:
A. Silt Fence shall meet the requirements of Section M9.50.0 of the Standard Specifications.
Silt Fence shall have a high sediment filtration efficiency and minimum clogging properties.
B. Fence posts shall be as recommended by the fabric manufacturer.
2.03 CATCH BASIN PROTECTION:
A. Catch basin protection shall consist of an open-top geotextile bag that is specifically designed
to hang underneath a storm grate to filter sediment-laden stormwater runoff.
2.04 STONE AND ROCK
A. Stone and rock material for use in sediment and erosion control measures shall conform to
the material specifications of the Massachusetts Highway Department. In general, all soil
material must be clean, stable, and free or silt, clay, and organics. Sizing of the stone shall be
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONROLS
312500 - 3
as shown on the drawings or shall be determined by the Contractor and shall be appropriate
for expected flow rates and velocities. Storms with return periods of not less than two-years
should be used in determining the sizing of stone and rock.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Other materials required for completion of the work in this Section shall be of adequate quali-
ty and construction such that intended performance is satisfied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:
A. Location and Type of Sedimentation Control Barrier: Temporary erosion and sedimentation
controls shall be installed as shown on the plans, as necessary to control erosion, or as di-
rected by the Engineer. Unless a specific type of Sedimentation Control Barrier is indicated
on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the type of system shall be at the Contractor's op-
tion.
1. Silt Fence:
a. Height of silt barrier fence shall not exceed 36 inches.
b. Posts are to be a maximum 10 feet apart, driven securely a minimum 12 inches into
the ground. Splice fence only as detailed.
c. Install fence in a dug trench 6 inches wide and 6 inches deep. Tuck fence into trench
and backfill with the soil compacted over the fabric.
d. When joints are necessary, filter fabric shall be spliced together only at a support
post, with a minimum 6-inch overlap, and securely sealed.
e. Inspect fencing after each rainfall and make any required repairs immediately. Re-
move sediment deposits when they reach one-third the fence height.
f. When fence is removed, any sediment deposits shall be dressed to conform to exist-
ing grade, fine-graded and seeded. In sodded areas, remove sediment completely.
2. Straw bales
a. Straw bales are to be entrenched and backfilled to a minimum 4" depth. Anchor
each bale with two (2) wood stakes driven through the bale to a minimum 12 inch
depth into undisturbed soil.
b. Inspect bales frequently and repair or replace promptly as needed or as directed.
c. Remove bales after they no longer serve a purpose, but not before uphill slopes are
permanently stabilized.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONROLS
312500 - 4
B.Soil Stockpiling Specifications:
1. Any area proposed for use as a stockpile site shall be reviewed and approved by the
Engineer prior to its use.
2. Any excavated soil or sediment material and topsoil stockpiles shall be located and sta-
bilized so as to minimize washing into wetland areas, waterways, or drainage systems.
3. Any stockpiles of potentially erodible soil which are to remain in place for more than two
weeks shall receive temporary seeding and mulching and shall have a sedimentation
control barrier (silt fencing or erosion logs) installed around the entire perimeter of the
pile. Said sediment control barrier shall be in addition to any project perimeter barriers
indicated on the Drawings.
4. Any stockpiles which show signs of erosion shall have additional mulch and seed placed
on them until they have been considered stabilized by the Engineer.
C. Catch Basin Protection:
1. Remove the grate from catch basin or drop inlet and install the geotextile filter bag in ac-
cordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Re-install grate into catch basin or
drop inlet frame, ensuring that the grate is fully and securely seated.
D. Removal:
1. Temporary erosion and sedimentation controls shall be removed from the site only after
Immediate Stabilization of disturbed upgradient areas, as defined in Section 32 90 00 -
Landscape Work.
E. Maintenance:
1. Areas of construction shall remain in a stable condition at the close of each construction
day. Erosion controls shall be inspected at this time, and maintained or reinforced to
meet the specifications given on the Drawings and the requirement of all applicable
permits.
2. All construction areas shall be restored to original condition or better upon completion of
the project.
3. During active construction, sedimentation control barriers shall be inspected at the close
of each work day and after each rainstorm. Any breaches in the sedimentation control
barriers shall be repaired prior to the continuation of the work.
4. All erosion control devices shall be inspected regularly. Any entrapped silt shall be re-
moved and sedimentation control barriers and other devices shall be replaced as nec-
essary.
5. Erosion control devices shall remain in place until all disturbed surfaces have been sta-
bilized with a vegetative cover or until the Engineer has authorized their removal. No
additional payment will be made for cleaning or replacing.
6. All open trenches shall be filled and stabilized at the close of each workday.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONROLS
312500 - 5
3.02 ADDITIONAL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
A. The erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the drawings are the minimum
measures required to initiate the disturbance of soil at the site. The Contractor shall select,
erect, maintain, and dispose of other sediment and erosion controls as necessary to meet
the requirements of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Owner’s Representative will make periodic inspections of the site and shall advise the
Contractor of the need for additional erosion and sedimentation controls necessary to meet
the performance standards of this Section.
C. Additional erosion and sedimentation control necessary to address transient conditions on
the site, such as following the placement of topsoil but prior to the establishment of grass
cover, shall be provided by the Contractor as needed and at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 2
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in. (475-mm)
Drop
D 3549 Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving
Mixture Specimens
D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
D 2041 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
D 2950 Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods
3. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
SS-S-1401 Sealing Compound, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt
Pavements
4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete
paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 460 for bituminous pavement for roadways and parking
areas, Section 701 for bituminous sidewalks, and Section 405 for aggregate base
course.
a. MHD Specifications Section 472 for repairs to existing pavements after
installation of new curb.
B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work
which might damage them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall
be repaired before acceptance.
C. Repair and/or replace existing paved areas damaged during this Project. Workmanship
and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work,
except as otherwise noted.
D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.
E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the
course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in
conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 3
F. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located.
2. Contractor shall have a minimum 5 years experience installing bituminous concrete
pavements and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of comparable
scale within the past 3 years.
G. Contractor shall provide and pay for testing procedures specified herein. Testing Agency
Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, and in
accordance with Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.
H. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection and testing of paving and associated work in accordance with Section 014000,
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.
I. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt
Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested
physical and performance properties.
B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job
mix proposed for the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, cross walks, lane separations, and defined
parking spaces. Indicate, with international graphics symbol, spaces dedicated to people
with disabilities.
D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
E. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising
at time of placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and
rising at time of placement.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DENSE GRADED BASE COURSE
A. Material for dense graded base course shall consist of hard durable particles of fragments
of stone. Materials that break up when alternately frozen and thawed or wetted and dried
shall not be used. Coarse aggregates shall have a percentage of wear, by the Los Angeles
test, of not more than 45. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural or crushed sand.
1. Material shall be dense graded crushed stone conforming to MHD Specifications
Section M2.01.7.
2.2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
A. Asphaltic shall be a standard plant-mixed, hot-laid paving material for road work, consisting
of clean, crushed rock aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt equal to Class I, TypeI-1, in
accordance with MHD Specifications Section M3.11.03, except as modified herein. The
master range composition tolerances for bituminous concrete materials shall be as follows:
Table A (As modified)
Percent by Weight Passing Square Opening Sieves
Standard
Sieve Size Base Course Binder Course Top Course
(Dense Mix)
2 in. 100
1 in. 55-80 100
3/4 in. 80-100
5/8 in.
1/2 in. 40-65 55-80 100
3/8 in. 80-100*
No. 4 20-45 28-50 55-80
No. 8 15-33 20-38 48-63
No. 16 36-49
No. 30 8-17 8-22 24-38
No. 50 4-12 5-15 14-27
No. 100 6-18
No. 200 0-4 0-5 4-8
Bitumen 4.0-5.0 4.5-5.5 7-8
* For dense mix the maximum aggregate size allowable shall be 3/8 in.
AASHTO M20.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 5
1. Base or bottom course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 2 in. sieve,
and bitumen content of 4.5% + 1/2% by weight.
2. Binder course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve, and
bitumen content of 5% + 1/2% by weight.
3. Top course paving for sidewalks shall conform to composition for "Dense Mix".
B. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be
submitted to and approved by Architect at least two weeks before work is scheduled to
begin.
2.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Bituminous material for prime coat shall be one of the following:
1. Cut-back asphalt (rapid-curing type) conforming to AASHTO M 81, Grade RC-70 or
RC-250.
2. Emulsified asphalt rapid-setting type conforming to AASHTO M 140, Grade RS-1.
B. Bituminous material for tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt rapid-setting type conforming
to AASHTO M 140, Grade RS-1.
C. Bitumen shall be a rapid-setting type emulsified asphalt conforming to AASHTO M 140,
Grade RS-1.
D. Bituminous crack sealer shall be a hot-applied bituminous sealer conforming to Fed. Spec.
SS-S-1401.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation
under Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING before
work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to
receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at
required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
conforming to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING.
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 6
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Architect as specified in Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING,
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be
uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing pavement.
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section
shall conform to the following:
1. Material shall be legally disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected and tested by an independent testing agency,
provided and paid for by the Contractor, prior to installation of paving base course.
Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this
Section of the specification.
1. Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) Proctor compaction test results indicating
conformance to compaction density requirements specified herein.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods
employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first
class road work, and the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 402, "Dense Graded Crushed Stone for Sub-Base".
B. Compaction of aggregate base course shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined
by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course.
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.
D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted
measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a 6 ton steel
wheel roller or vibratory roller equivalent to a 6 ton static roller, or an approved equivalent.
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures
only after they have been set to required grade and level.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 7
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until
material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement
lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and
otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding
with next operation.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course
at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to
penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand
over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
3.4 ASPHALTIC PAVING
A. Asphaltic paving mixture, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be
observed as to weather, condition of base, etc., shall conform to MHD Specifications
Section 460 Class I Bituminous Concrete Pavement for roadway and parking areas and
Section 701 Sidewalks, Wheelchair Ramps, and Driveways for sidewalks.
B. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be
submitted to and approved by Architect at least two weeks before work is scheduled to
begin.
C. Asphaltic base, binder, and wearing courses shall each be applied individually, in single lifts
of full thickness indicated on the Drawings.
D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40o F.
or 60o F. as indicated in Paragraph 1.06.
E. Adjacent concrete work, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire
operation. Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original
condition.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 8
F. Existing paved surfaces to be resurfaced shall be cleaned of foreign and objectionable
matter with blowers, power brooms, or hand brooms immediately before applying
bituminous pavement. Cracks shall be cleaned and bituminous crack sealer applied to fully
seal pavement.
G. The surface of the pavement to be resurfaced shall receive a bituminous prime coat before
laying asphaltic binder course. Prime coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic
residue of 5 to 7 gal./100 sq. yd. after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry
and clean when prime coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until
vehicle has completely evaporated from prime coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed
before prime coat has dried or dusted over.
H. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours,
unless artificial light, satisfactory to Architect, is provided. Loads which have been wet by
rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be
permitted.
I. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Rolling shall begin
as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays
in rolling freshly spread mixture will not be permitted. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally,
starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas.
Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to 1/2 width of roller rear
wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in
surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin
patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be
subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in
compactable condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by
use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal of mixture, as required. Rolling of
each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over
unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to
permit mixture to become cold.
J. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand
tampers shall weigh at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100
sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in
which they can be employed effectively.
K. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way
defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture, and compacted to density of
surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be
immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work.
L. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the
course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new
pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. New material at joints
shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base,
and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to
existing pavement when subjected to traffic.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 9
M. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement (if greater than or equal to seven
days since binder placed), manholes, and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is
placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5 to 7
gal./100 yd.2 after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack
coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely
evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has
dried or dusted over.
N. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as
will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder
width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface.
Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved
material along edge.
1. After final rolling, vehicular traffic shall not be permitted on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened, and in no case less than six hours.
O. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to the following
tolerances when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right
angles to centerline of paved area.
1. For sidewalk pavement surface course - 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
2. At joint with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush
transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 ft.
3. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed + 0.05 ft.
4. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be
corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to
this Section.
3.5 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement
section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches
(300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base
course to form new subgrade.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still
hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished
flush with adjacent surfaces.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 10
3.6 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PAVEMENT
A. Subgrade shall be done in strict accordance with Paragraph 3.01, above.
B. Aggregate base course shall be replaced in strict conformance with Paragraph 3.02, above.
C. Asphaltic concrete paving mixture, equipment, and methods of mixing and placing shall
conform to MHD Specifications Section 472 for Bituminous Concrete for Patching, and
Paragraph 3.03, above.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168.
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from
four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by
nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
321216 - 11
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 1
SECTION 321313
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision to construct
the Portland cement concrete paving work, including aggregate base course, in accordance
with the Drawings and Specifications.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; Inspection and testing.
2. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Establishment of subgrade elevations, geotextile and subase.
3. Section 321640, GRANITE CURBING.
4. Section 033013, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK; Concrete for structures.
5. Section 079200, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
6. Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
305R Hot Weather Concreting
306R Cold Weather Concreting
325.9R Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Concrete
Bases.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 2
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C 962 Guide for Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
D 226 Asphalt-Saturated Organic Roofing Felt for Use in Membrane
Waterproofing and Built-Up Roofing
D 1557 Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10 lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457 mm)
Drop
D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):
Appendix to Part 1191 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies
with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 3
B. ACI Publications: Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the
Portland cement concrete paving shall conform to ACI 325.9R.
C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and
examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement
construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity
directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
E. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work
which might damage them have been completed. Damage caused during construction
shall be repaired before acceptance.
F. Existing paved areas shall, if damaged or removed during course of this project, be
repaired or replaced under this section of the specification. Workmanship and materials for
such repair and replacement, except as otherwise noted, shall match as closely as possible
those employed in existing work.
G. Pavement, base, or subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION MOCK-UP PANELS
A. General
1. Schedule mock-up casting for acceptance 30 days prior to casting of concrete surfaces
represented by the mockups.
2. Locate mock-up panels in non-public areas accepted by the Architect.
3. Continue to cast mock-ups until acceptable mock-ups area produced. Accepted mock-
ups shall be the standard for color, texture, and workmanship for the work.
4. Mock-up sequence of forming, placing, form removal, curing, and finishing shall be
reviewed and accepted by the Architect.
5. Mock-up formwork shall be inspected and accepted by the Architect before placing of
concrete.
6. Use the same concrete mixes and placement procedures, accepted in mock-ups, in the
final work, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
7. Protect accepted mock-ups from damage until completion and acceptance of the work
represented by the mock-up.
8. Remove mock-up panels from site at completion of project, as directed by the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 4
B. Construct mock-up panels or areas as indicated to demonstrate the ability to cast concrete
for concrete paving to achieve shape, color, jointing and textured finish required. Mock-ups
shall include or meet the following requirements:
1. Provide mock-up panel 5 ft. x 10 ft. size, full depth.
2. Provide mock-ups simulating actual design and execution conditions for concrete mix
materials, reinforcement, formwork, placing sequence, form removal, curing, finishing,
and methods and materials of stain removal and correction of defective work.
3. On mock-ups where directed by the Architect, provide minimum of three variations of
mix color to be used in the repair of defective work, in order to determine acceptable
color and texture match.
4. Demonstrate in the construction of the mock-up formwork the sealer material, form
release agent, and curing materials and methods to be used.
5. Include control joints and expansion joints with joint sealer.
C. Source of Materials. Utilize the same source, stock, or brand of concrete materials for each
class or mix of concrete which is to be exposed. Do not interchange materials or mixes
until an additional mock-up shows that uniformity in finish texture and color, as compared to
original mock-up will be maintained. If necessary, obtain and stockpile materials in
sufficient quantity to ensure continuity and uniformity.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Description of Methods and Sequence of Placement. For each type of specially-finished
concrete provide description of methods and sequence of placement.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Form release agent.
2. Preformed joint filler.
C. Submit samples of the following:
1. Preformed joint filler.
D. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
materials complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Curing compounds.
4. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.9 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall provide a minimum of four (4) test results indicating compliance with
minimum compressive strength requirements of fully cured concrete pavement.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 5
B. The Owner reserves the right to inspect and test paving and associated work in accordance
with Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate material for base course shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free-
draining material, consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace
slag, practically free from loam and clay, and which can be readily compacted to form a
stable foundation.
1. Material shall be dense graded crushed stone conforming to MHD Specifications
Section M2.01.7.
2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
A. Portland cement concrete for pavements and slabs shall be air-entrained type with a
maximum water-cement ratio of 0.50 conforming to ACI 325.9R. Minimum compressive
strengths at 28 days shall be 4,000 psi.
1. Concrete shall be air-entrained type, conforming to ASTM C 94. Air content by volume
shall be 6% + 1%, and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 231.
2. Concrete slump shall be no less than 2 in. nor greater than 4 in., determined in
accordance with ASTM C 143.
3. Cement shall be Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Only one
color of cement, all of the same manufacturer, shall be used for the work. Type III
cement shall be used only with the prior approval of the Architect.
4. Fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33.
5. Concrete shall contain a water reducing agent to minimize cement and water content of
the concrete mix at the specified slump. Water reducing agent shall conform to ASTM
C 494.
6. No calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be added to the
concrete. No admixtures other than those specified shall be used in the concrete
without the specific written permission of the Architect in each case.
2.3 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by
mass of cementitious material.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS FOR UNCOLORED CONCRETE
A. Curing shall be by moist curing or by use of curing compound.
B. Curing paper shall be a nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated kraft bituminous product
conforming to ASTM C 171. Four mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing
paper.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 6
C. Water: Potable.
D. Curing compound shall be a clear compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1 or white
pigmented compound conforming to ASTM C 309 Type 2, Class B.
2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, expansion joints shall be located 30 ft. o.c.,
maximum.
B. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed, nonbituminous type joint filler conforming to
ASTM D 1752, Type II, similar to Sealtight Cork Expansion Joint Filler, manufactured by
W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, IL 60120, or approved equal.
1. Premolded filler shall be one piece for the full depth and width of the joint leaving a
sealant recess as indicated.
2. Use of multiple pieces of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of
joint will not be permitted.
3. Except as otherwise noted on the Drawings, joint filler shall be 3/8 in. thick.
C. Dowels shall be furnished under this Section, and shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
2.6 SEALANT
A. Sealant for sealing of expansion joints in concrete walks shall be a two component
polyurethane based sealant conforming to Section 079201, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
2.7 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Control joints indicated to be sawn shall be made by saw cutting concrete slab after
concrete is finished and when the surface is stiff enough to support the weight of workmen
without damage to the slab. Saw blade shall cut into slab at least 1 in., but in no case less
than 25% of slab depth.
B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, control joints shall be located 10 ft. o.c.
maximum.
2.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Transverse construction joints shall be placed whenever placing of concrete is suspended
for more than 30 minutes.
1. Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be used if construction joints occurs
at location of control joint.
2. Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location.
2.9 GROUT
A. Grout shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement to two parts sand, by
volume. Only sufficient water shall be used to enable grout to barely hold its shape when
squeezed into a ball in the hand. Sand for grout shall be "Fine Aggregate", conforming to
ASTM C 33.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 7
B. Nonshrink grout shall be pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. Compressive
strength in 28 days shall be 5,000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified
strength of the adjacent concrete. Manufacturer shall provide evidence that the material
meets the requirements of the COE CRD-C 621 (558). Grout permanently exposed to view
shall be nonoxidizing; metallic grout may be used in other locations.
1. Nonshrink grout shall be one of the following, or approved equal:
Manufacturer Product
Gifford-Hill Co. Supreme
Master Builders Co. Embeco
U.S. Grout Corporation Five Star Grout
2.10 BOND BREAKER
A. Bond breaker shall be asphalt felt conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I or 6 mil polyethylene
sheeting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GRADING
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation
under Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING before
work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to
receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at
required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
conforming to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below aggregate base course to a compaction of at least 90% of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Architect as specified in Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING,
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be
uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing pavement.
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 8
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section
shall conform to the following:
1. Material shall be legally disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected and tested by an independent testing agency,
provided and paid for by the Contractor, prior to installation of paving base course.
Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this
Section of the specification.
1. Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) Proctor compaction test results indicating
conformance to compaction density requirements specified herein.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods
employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first
class road work, and the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 402, "Dense Graded Crushed Stone for Sub-Base".
B. Compaction of aggregate base course shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined
by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course.
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.
D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted
measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a 6 ton steel
wheel roller or vibratory roller equivalent to a 6 ton static roller, or an approved equivalent.
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures
only after they have been set to required grade and level.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until
material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement
lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and
otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding
with next operation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 9
3.3 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
A. Paving mix, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as
to weather, condition of base etc., shall meet the requirements of ACI 325.9R. Pavement
shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings.
B. The Architect shall be notified of concrete placement sufficiently in advance of start of
operation to allow his representative to complete preliminary inspection of the work,
including subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used.
C. Normal concrete placement procedures shall be followed. Concrete shall arrive at the
jobsite so that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When
conditions develop that required addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission
of the Architect must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its
place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material.
D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40o F.
(4.4o C).
E. Adjacent work, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.
Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions.
F. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is
to be placed shall thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water
on surface.
G. Concrete which has set or partially set before placing shall not be employed. Retempering
of concrete will not be permitted.
H. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous
mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of forms.
I. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be cleaned
of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and
washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no
free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 in. thick, shall
be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed
immediately, before grout has dried or set.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Concrete flatwork surfaces shall be screeded off, bullfloated, power or hand floated,
troweled and finished true to line and grade, and free of hollows and bumps. Surface shall
be dense, smooth, and at exact level and slope required.
1. Finished concrete surface for subbases shall be woodfloated to a slightly rough
surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/4 in. in 10 ft. Refer to Section 033001,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITEWORK.
2. Finished concrete surface for exposed concrete walks, ramps and pads shall be wood-
floated and steel troweled to a smooth surface, as indicated on the Drawings. Surface
shall not deviate more than 1/8 in. in 10 ft.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 10
B. Broom Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal surfaces of concrete surfaces which
will be exposed shall be given a light broomed finish, with direction of grooves in concrete
surface perpendicular to direction of travel. After concrete has set sufficiently to prevent
coarse aggregate from being torn from surface, but before it has completely set, brooms
shall be drawn across it to produce a pattern of small parallel grooves. Broomed surface
shall be uniform, with no smooth, unduly rough or porous spots, or other irregularities.
Coarse aggregate shall not be dislodged by brooming operation.
C. Immediately following finishing operations, arrises at edges and both sides of expansion
joints shall be rounded to a 1/8 in. radius.
D. Where finishing is performed before end of curing period, concrete shall not be permitted to
dry out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until end of curing period,
or until curing membrane is applied.
3.5 CURING
A. It is essential that concrete be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end of
specified curing period. It is equally essential that water not be added to surface during
floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after concrete placement.
Between finishing operations surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of
waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall
be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent
drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete. None of the water so applied
shall be troweled or floated into surface.
B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or application of
a curing compound.
1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with
seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become
moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period
surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to
prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete.
2. If concrete is cured with a curing compound, compound shall be applied at a rate of
200 sq. ft. per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other.
3. Curing period shall be seven days minimum.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and
at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless
pavement terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is
placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 11
3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints (isolation joints) shall be 3/8 in. wide and unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings, shall be located 30 ft. o.c. and at places where pavement meets other
structures. Expansion joint shall be formed in the concrete to required width with
preformed joint filler in place. Joint filler shall extend the full width and depth of the slab.
Joint filler shall extend the full length of the expansion joint.
1. Depth of joint filler shall be as required to form a 1-1/4 in. deep sealant and backer rod
recess below finished concrete surface.
2. Doweled Joints: Install sleeves and dowel bars at expansion joints as indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
3.8 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Joints shall be sawn as soon as the concrete will withstand the energy of sawing without
raveling or dislodging aggregate particles. For most concrete mixtures, this means sawing
should be completed within the first 6 to 18 hours and never delay more than 24 hours.
Early-entry saws may be used to allow cutting to begin within a few hours after placement.
B. Control joints indicated shall be sawn 1/8 in. wide by using a diamond blade concrete
power saw. Saw shall cut into slab at least 25% of slab depth. Saw cut joints shall be
straight and accurate to line.
1. Saw cut joints shall be sawn flush to vertical surfaces.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, control joints in pedestrian pavements
shall be located 10 ft. o.c. maximum.
3.9 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured when the
mean daily temperature is below 40oF. or is excepted to fall to below 40oF. within 72
hours, and the concrete after placing shall be protected by covering, heat, or both.
B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to
the approval and direction of the Architect. Procedures shall be in accordance with
provisions of ACI 306R.
3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and
reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort shall be
made to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival
on the job.
B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95oF., or above), ingredients in the concrete
shall be cooled insofar as possible and cold mxing water shall be used to maintain the
temperature of the concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of
ACI 305. Any concrete with a temperature above 95oF., when ready for placement will not
be acceptable, and will be rejected.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 12
C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air
temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc.) and relative
humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after
placing in forms. Data should be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions
surrounding the construction of any part of the structure can be ascertained.
3.11 SEALING OF JOINTS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, expansion joints and control joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant in accordance with Section 079200, EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40
deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2
specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi (3.4 MPa).
D. In-Place Density:
1. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM C 42.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 13
E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28
days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type
of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.
H. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
I. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.13 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened
sufficiently. If necessary 1/2 in. thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect the exposed
surface.
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of
cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with
portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 1
SECTION 321416
BRICK UNIT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the brick
pavers, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Brick pavers shall be set as
follows:
1. On bituminous setting bed, over concrete base slab, with sand swept joints.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITEWORK; Concrete base.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
M 81 Cut-back Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 67 Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
C 216 Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
C 902 Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick
C 1272 Heavy Vehicular Paving Brick
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 2
D 36 Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)
D 113 Ductility of Bituminous Materials
D 3381 Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Furnish ten individual brick pavers as samples, showing extreme variations in
color and texture.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the
following items:
Brick paver
Neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive
C. Test Report: Submit reports from tests conforming to ASTM C 67 methods indicating:
1. Compressive strength, psi.
2. Absorption, 5 hr. submersion in cold water.
3. Absorption, 24 hr. submersion in cold water.
4. Maximum saturation coefficient.
5. Initial rate of absorption (suction).
6 Abrasion index.
7. Freeze-thaw.
8. Efflorescence.
1.6 SAMPLE PANEL
A. Construct a sample panel of brick paving on the specified base and setting bed before start
of any brick paving.
1. Sample panel shall exhibit proposed color range, texture, bond, jointing, pattern, and
workmanship.
2. Size of panel shall be 6 ft. x 6 ft., minimum.
B. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit
pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including
same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as
indicated:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 3
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Brick pavers shall be carefully packed by the supplier for shipment.
B. Brick shall be stored off the ground and protected against staining and other damage.
C. Pavers damaged in any manner will be rejected and replaced with new materials at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from
one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with
ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit
paver work damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and
when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately
before application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.
2. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F (4
deg C) and when base is dry.
1.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES
A. Finished surfaces adjacent to the brick paving work shall be adequately protected from
soiling, staining, and other damage during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK PAVERS
A. Brick pavers manufactured by Endicott Clay Products Co., Fairbury, NE 68352 has been
specified herein as a basis for the design of the brick paving. Brick pavers of other
manufacturers will be accepted if the Architect determines that the alternate product
submitted is equivalent to the product specified. Brick pavers shall be equal to the
following:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 4
1. 4”x8”x2 ¼” Endicott Brick Pavers: Medium Ironspot 46.
B. Brick shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Average absorption, 24 hr. cold-water absorption test = 4% or less.
2. Average compressive strength of not less than 10,500 psi for any five bricks tested.
3. Capable of withstanding at least the equivalent of 100 cycles of freeze-thaw conditions.
4. Permissible paver tolerances shall conform to ANSI/ASTM C 902.
5. Paver shall not vary from nominal dimensions by more than 1/8 in.
C. Color and texture shall match the sample at the office of the Architect, and shall be as
approved by the Architect from samples submitted by the Contractor prior to delivery.
D. Brick shall be uniform in color, size, appearance, and dimensions, and shall have smooth
regular edges where they are closely butted.
E. Spacers: Manufactruer’s plastic spacers; size 3/32”.
2.2 BITUMINOUS SETTING BED
A. Asphalt cement to be used in the bituminous setting bed shall conform to AASHTO M 320.
B. Fine aggregate to be used in the bituminous setting bed shall be clean, hard sand with
durable particles and free from adherent coating, lumps of clay, alkali salts, and organic
matter. Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from "coarse" to "fine" with 100% by weight
passing the No. 4 sieve and shall meet the gradation requirements when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3..
C. Fine aggregate shall be dried and shall be combined with hot asphalt cement, and the mix
shall be heated to approximately 300oF. at an asphalt plant. The approximate proportion of
materials shall be 7% cement asphalt and 93% fine aggregate. Each ton of material shall
be apportioned by weight in the approximate ratio of 145 lb. asphalt to 1,855 lb. sand. The
Contractor shall determine the exact proportions to produce the best possible mixture for
construction of the bituminous setting bed to meet specified requirements.
2.3 NEOPRENE-MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE
A. Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of oxidized asphalt combined with 2
percent neoprene and 5 percent long-fibered mineral fibers containing no asbestos, similar
to Hanover Paver Mastic, manufactured by Hanover Architectural Products, 5000 Hanover
Road, Hanover, PA 17331; Tel. 717-637-0500. Neoprene modified asphalt adhesive shall
meet the following requirements:
1. Mastic (asphalt adhesive):
a. Solids (base) content by volume = 75+1%.
b. Weight = 8 to 8.5 lb./gal.
c. Solvent vehicle = Varsol (over 100oF. flash).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 5
2. Base (2% neoprene, 5% fibers, 50% asphalt):
a. Melting point (ASTM D 36) = 200oF., minimum.
b. Penetration at 77oF. 100 gram load 5 second (0.1 mm) = 23 to 27.
c. Ductility (ASTM D 113 at 25oC, 5 cm/minute) = 125 cm, minimum.
2.4 SAND JOINT FILLER
A. Joint filler between paver joints shall be sand.
1. Sand shall be a clean, washed, uniformly well graded masonry sand with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-
mm) sieve, conforming to ASTM C 144, except that the fineness modulus shall be
2.25+ 0.10. Sand shall be from a single source. Source of supply shall not be changed
during course of job without written permission of the Architect.
2. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
2.5 WATER
A. Water shall be potable and shall be free of injurious contaminants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ACCEPTABILITY OF BASE
A. Contractor shall examine the concrete base slab to determine its adequacy to receive brick
paving and setting bed. Concrete shall have fully cured. Evidence of inadequate base
shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect.
B. Start of work of this Section shall constitute acceptance of concrete base slab.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that
might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of
colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
D. Joint Pattern: Herringbone field and rowlock edge patterns.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 6
E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor
1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of
paving.
F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated.
Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
G. Provide brick rowlock edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing
field pavers.
3.4 BITUMINOUS SETTING BED
A. Bituminous setting bed shall be installed over the fully cured concrete base. Control bars
3/4 in. deep shall be placed directly over the base approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart and
parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades
required for accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated. If grades must be
adjusted, wood chocks under depth control bars shall be set to proper grade. Set two bars
parallel to each other to serve as guides for the striking board. The depth control bars must
be set carefully to bring the pavers, when laid, to proper grade.
B. While still hot (not less than 250oF.) some of the bituminous bed material shall be placed
between the parallel depth control bars. This bed shall be pulled with the striking board
over the control bars several times. After each passage, low porous spots shall be
showered with fresh bituminous material to produce a smooth, firm, and even 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick setting bed. As soon as this initial panel is completed, advance the first bar to
the next position in readiness for striking the next panel. After the depth control bars and
wood chocks have been removed, carefully fill any depressions that remain.
1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm) while still hot.
Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished
grades indicated.
2. Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or
troweling. If troweled on, use trowel with serrations not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is dry to the touch.
3.5 SETTING BRICK PAVERS – BITUMINOUS BED
A. Brick pavers shall be on a bituminous setting bed over a prepared concrete base. All
setting shall be done by competent masons under adequate supervision.
B. Brick pavers with chips, cracks, stains, or other defects which might be visible in the
finished work shall not be used.
C. After the modified asphalt adhesive is applied, carefully place the pavers by hand in straight
courses with hand tight joints and uniform top surface.
D. Brick pavers shall be set true to the required lines and grades in the pattern detailed on the
Drawings. Brick pavers shall be neatly cut and fitted at all perimeters and closures to fit
neatly and closely, with joints uniform in thickness. Pavers shall be cut with a water-cooled,
cut-off wheel masonry saw using a diamond blade.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
BRICK UNIT PAVING
321416- 7
3.6 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Joints between pavers shall be hand tight and shall be uniform in thickness. Joint
thickness shall not exceed 1/16 in.
B. Joint filler sand shall be swept dry into the joints between pavers until the joints are
completely filled. Surface shall be swept clean. Swept surface shall than be thoroughly
dampened with a low-volume fine spray of water. Additional sand shall then be swept dry
into the joints between pavers until the joints are completely filled.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF BRICK SURFACES
A. After completion of brick paving, surfaces shall be carefully cleaned, removing all dirt,
excess filler, and stains.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 1
SECTION 321443
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide and install pervious unit paving as shown on Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not
limited to:
1. Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; Inspection and testing.
2. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Excavation and backfill and establishment of subgrade elevations.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil
Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer
and 18-in. (475-mm) Drop
C 67 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing
Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units.
C 131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to
Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by
Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
C 136 Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse
Aggregate.
C 140 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile, Section 8 – Freezing and
Thawing.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 2
D 448 Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for
Road and Bridge Construction.
C 936 Standard Specification for Solid Interlocking
Concrete Pavers.
C 979 Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
D 698 Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil
and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb (2.49
kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop.
D 1557 Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil
and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (4.54
kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop.
D 1883 Test Method for California Bearing Ratio of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils.
D 4254 Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density
and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative
Density.
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil
Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer
and 18-in. (475-mm) Drop
B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI)
Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavement
Manual.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Manufacturer’s drawing and details: Indicate perimeter conditions, junction with other
materials, expansion and control joints, paver layout, patterns, edge treatment, color
arrangement, installation and setting details. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of
paving joints to fixtures and project formed details.
C. Minimum 3 lb (2 kg) samples of subbase, base and bedding aggregate materials.
D. Sieve analysis of aggregates for subbase, base and bedding materials per ASTM C 136.
E. Permeable concrete pavers:
1. Manufacturer’s product catalog sheets with specifications.
2. Four representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color, and finish.
Submit samples indicating the range of color expected in the finished installation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 3
3. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work of this Section.
4. Laboratory test reports certifying compliance of the concrete pavers with ASTM C 936.
5. Manufacturer’s material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified
materials and products.
6. Manufacturer’s written quality control procedures including representative samples of
production record keeping that ensure conformance of paving products to the project
specifications.
F. Paver Installation Subcontractor:
1. A copy of Subcontractor’s current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement
Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.
2. Job references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide
Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and email
address.
3. Written Method Statement and Quality Control Plan that describes material staging
and flow, paving direction and installation procedures, including representative
reporting forms that ensure conformance to the project specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Paver manufacturer shall be an Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Certified
Producer.
2. Paver manufacturer shall be a member in good standing with the National Concrete
Masonry Association.
3. Paver manufacturer shall provide systematic testing of concrete pavers during
production by a National Concrete Masonry Association Certified Masonry Testing
Technician.
4. Paver manufacturer shall provide independent quality assurance test results for
concrete pavers manufactured and tested within a calendar year.
B. Paver Installation Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installation similar in
design, material and extent indicated on this project.
2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete
Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.
C. Review the manufacturers’ quality control plan, paver installation subcontractor’s Method
Statement and Quality Control Plan with pre-construction meeting of representatives from
the manufacturer, paver installation subcontractor, general contractor, engineer and/or
owner’s representative.
D. Mock-Ups:
1. Install a 10 ft x 10 ft (3 x 3 m) paver area, including edge treatment.
2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding layer, joint sizes, lines, laying
pattern(s), color(s) and texture of the job.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 4
3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged.
4. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work.
5. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged container
packaging with identification tags intact on each paver bundle.
1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of
buildings adjacent to paving.
2. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped
cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.
3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product or
existing construction
D Storage and Protection: Store materials in protected area such that they are kept free from
mud, dirt, and other foreign materials.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install in rain or snow.
B. Do not install frozen bedding materials.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials: Provide [Specify area] [Specify percentage] additional material for use by
owner for maintenance and repair.
B. Pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Pavers shall be Turfstone “Eco-Paver”, manufactured by Wausau Tile Co., Wausau, WI or
approved equal.
1. Pavers shall be non-reinforced and shall have a minimum compressive strength of
5000 psi.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 5
2.2 CRUSHED STONE FILLER, BEDDING, BASE AND SUBBASE
A. Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum
CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883.
B. Do not use rounded river gravel.
C. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve.
D. Joint/opening filler, bedding and base: conforming to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in
Tables below:
Joint/Opening Filler
ASTM No. 9 Grading Requirements
Sieve Size Percent Passing
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 85 to 100
2.36 mm (No. 8) 10 to 40
1.16 mm (No. 16) 0 to 10
No. 50 0 to 5
Bedding
ASTM No. 8 Grading Requirements
Sieve Size Percent Passing
12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 100
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 85 to 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 10 to 30
2.36 mm (No. 8) 0 to 10
1.16 mm (No. 16) 0 to 5
Base
ASTM No. 57 Grading Requirements
Sieve Size Percent Passing
37.5 mm (1 1/2 in.) 100
25 mm (1 in.) 95 to 100
12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 25 to 60
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0 to 10
2.36 mm (No. 8) 0 to 5
E. Gradation criteria for the bedding and base:
1. D15 base stone /D50 bedding stone < 5.
2. D50 base stone/D50 bedding stone > 2.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 6
2.3 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be Border Concepts Edging, "Border King", manufactured by Border
Concepts, Inc., P.O. Box 471185, Charlotte, NC 28247, or approved equal. Steel edging
shall be shop fabricated, 1/4 in. thick x 5 in. deep, steel, primed and painted black. Edging
shall be furnished in 16 or 20 ft. lengths.
1. Steel edging shall accommodate staking steel edging every 30 in. o.c.
2. Steel stakes shall be minimum 15 in. long, tapered.
3. Provide manufacturer's end stake and splicer unit if applicable.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard touch-up paint for in field touch-up of scratched or
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Engage an experienced installer who has successfully completed paver installations similar
in design, material, and extent indicated for this project.
B. Hold a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute, concrete paver
installer certification program.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions:
1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the paver installation
subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to
installation of interlocking concrete pavers.
2. Compaction of the soil subgrade should be determined by the project engineer. If the
soil subgrade requires compaction, compact to a minimum of 95% standard Proctor
density per ASTM C 698. Compacted soil density and moisture should be checked in
the field with a nuclear density gauge or other test methods for compliance to
specifications. Stabilization of the soil and/or base material may be necessary with
weak or continually saturated soils, or when subject to high wheel loads. Compaction
will reduce the permeability of soils. If soil compaction is necessary, reduced infiltration
may require drain pipes within the open-graded sub base to conform to local storm
drainage requirements.
a. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations
conform to specified requirements.
b. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade to the Owner, General
Contractor and paver installation subcontractor.
c. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, [concrete collars
around] utility structures, and drainage pipes and inlets.
3. Do not proceed with installation of bedding and interlocking concrete pavers until
subgrade soil conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated
subcontractor.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 7
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Verify that the soil subgrade is free from standing water.
B. Stockpile joint/opening filler, base and subbase materials such that they are free from
standing water, uniformly graded, free of any organic material or sediment, debris, and
ready for placement.
C. Edge Restraint Preparation:
1. Install edge restraints per the drawings [at the indicated elevations].
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Any excess thickness of soil applied over the excavated soil subgrade to trap
sediment from adjacent construction activities shall be removed before application of
the [geotextile] and subbase materials.
2. Keep area where pavement is to be constructed free from sediment during entire job.
[Geotextiles] Base and bedding materials contaminated with sediment shall be
removed and replaced with clean materials.
3. Do not damage drainpipes, overflow pipes, observation wells, or any inlets and other
drainage appurtenances during installation. Report any damage immediately to the
project engineer.
B. Open-graded base
1. Moisten, spread and compact No. 57 base in 100 mm (4 in.) lift over the compacted
subgrade with a minimum 10 t (10 T) vibratory roller until there is no visible movement
of the No. 57 stone. Do not crush aggregate with the roller.
2. The surface tolerance the compacted No. 57 base should not deviate more than. ±1
in. (25 mm) over a 10 ft (3 m) straightedge.
C. Bedding layer
1. Moisten, spread and screed the No. 8 stone bedding material.
2. Fill voids left by removed screed rails with No. 8 stone.
3. The surface tolerance of the screeded No. 8 bedding layer shall be ±3/8 in (10 mm)
over a 10 ft (3 m) straightedge.
4. Do not subject screeded bedding material to any pedestrian or vehicular traffic before
paving unit installation begins.
D. Permeable interlocking concrete pavers and joint/opening fill material
1. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) and joint widths shown on the drawings. Maintain
straight pattern lines.
2. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut units. Cut pavers subject to tire traffic
shall be no smaller than 1/3 of a whole unit.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
PERVIOUS CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
321443 - 8
3. Cut pavers and place along the edges with a masonry saw.
4. Fill the openings and joints with No. 9 stone.
5. Remove excess aggregate on the surface by sweeping pavers clean.
6 Compact and seat the pavers into the bedding material using a low-amplitude, 75-90
Hz plate compactor capable of at least 4,000 lbs (18 kN) centrifugal compaction force.
This will require at least two passes with the plate compactor.
7. Do not compact within 6 ft (2 m) of the unrestrained edges of the paving units.
8. Apply additional aggregate to the openings and joints, filling them completely. Remove
excess aggregate by sweeping then compact the pavers. This will require at least two
passes with the plate compactor.
9. All pavers within 6 ft (2 m) of the laying face must be left fully compacted at the
completion of each day.
10. The final surface tolerance of compacted pavers shall not deviate more than ±3/8 (10
mm) under a 10 ft (3 m) long straightedge.
11. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent
drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After sweeping the surface clean, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings.
B. Lippage: No greater than 1/8 in. (3 mm) difference in height between adjacent pavers.
C. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent drainage
inlets, concrete collars or channels.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. After work in this section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for
protecting work from sediment deposition and damage due to subsequent construction
activity on the site.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 1
SECTION 321543
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the stabilized
stone dust paving systems, including edging, as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING; Excavation
and backfill and establishment of subgrade elevations.
2. Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil
Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer
and 18-in. (475-mm) Drop
2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: The following samples shall be submitted:
Material Sample Size or Quantity
Decomposed granite 1 lb. (for color approval)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 2
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the
following materials:
Stabilizer
Steel edging
C. Test results for stabilized crushed stone surfacing indicating compliance with ADA
Requirements for accessibility and slip resistance.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Crushed granite sample of sufficient quantity shall be submitted to stabilizer manufacturer
for recommended blending proportions and procedures to be followed by crushed granite
supplier. Blending operations shall be performed at crushed granite supplier facility, and
provided to Contractor pre-blended in accordance with stabilizer manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Installer shall provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing crushed
granite surfacing containing stabilizer binder/additive or ability to follow installation
instructions.
C. Installer shall provide documentation of at least three (3) installations similar in scale (all
reference projects to be equal or greater than 75% of the total square footage of the project
being bid on) using specified stabilizer solution material, completed over the past five (5)
years. If Contractor is not able to meet experience qualifications, Contractor shall be
required to have a representative from Stabilizer Solutions be present on site for pre-
construction training, installation of mockup, and at least 25% of the project installation.
Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with this requirement. If
contractor is unable to meet these requirements a qualified replacement contractor will be
located subject to all qualifications listed above and Owner approval.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform gradation of decomposed granite material or 3/8” or 1/4" minus crushed aggregate
in accordance with ASTM C 136 – Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Course.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. General
1. Schedule mock-up for acceptance 30 days prior to constructing decomposed granite
surfaces represented by the mockups.
2. Locate mock-up panels in non-public areas accepted by the Architect.
3. Continue to construct mock-ups until acceptable mock-up is produced. Accepted
mock-up shall be the standard for color, texture, mix ratio, and workmanship for the
work.
4. Use the same decomposed granite /stabilizer mix and placement procedure, accepted
in mock-ups, in the final work, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
5. Protect accepted mock-ups from damage until completion and acceptance of the work
represented by the mock-up.
6. Remove mock-up panels from site at completion of project, as directed by the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 3
B. Sample panel shall be 5 ft. x 5 ft. minimum.
C. Source of Materials. Utilize the same source, stock, or brand of stabilizer material for all
decomposed granite surfacing. Do not interchange materials or mixes until an additional
mock-up shows that uniformity in finish texture and color, as compared to original mock-up
will be maintained. If necessary, obtain and stockpile materials in sufficient quantity to
ensure continuity and uniformity.
1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Each bidder is required to visit the site of the Work to verify the
existing conditions. No adjustments will be made to the Contract Sum for variations in the
existing conditions.
1. Where surfacing is indicated to fit with other construction, verify dimensions of other
construction by field measurements before proceeding with the work.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install decomposed granite or crushed 3/8” or 1/4" minus
aggregate paving during rainy conditions or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit and falling.
1.10 PROTECTION OF TREES AND PLANTING
A. Special care shall be taken for construction of stone dust surfacing. Limited access will be
permitted only for construction of the surfacing including aggregate base. Contractor shall
not stockpile any materials or store any equipment on areas adjacent to the proposed
surfacing and shall minimize travel of construction equipment to within layout of surfacing
only.
B. Observe and maintain all tree protection fencing; refer to Section 015639, TEMPORARY
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION.
1.11 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. The Owner reserves the right to test and inspect materials and construction of crushed
stone surfacing in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty signed by stabilizer manufacturer, installer, and Contractor,
agreeing to repair or replace all work of this section which exhibits defects in materials or
workmanship. Warranty shall cover stabilizer, decomposed granite and aggregate base
work. "Defects" is defined to include, but not limited to, differential settlement, ponding of
water, abnormal aging or deterioration of stabilized paving system, and failure to perform
as required.
1. Warranty Period: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Contractor shall provide unconditional maintenance and repairs as required through the
warranty period.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Material for aggregate base course shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free-
draining material, consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace
slag, practically free from loam and clay, and which can be readily compacted to form a
stable foundation.
1. Material shall be dense graded crushed stone conforming to MHD Specifications
Section M2.01.7.
2.2 DECOMPOSED GRANITE
A. Decomposed granite shall be a local decomposed granite or decomposed stone consisting
of inert materials that are hard and durable, with stone free from surface coatings and
deleterious materials.
1. Source: Read Custom Soils, 5 Pond Park Road, Suite 1, Hingham, Mass. 02043; Tel.
781-828-6300, or accepted equal.
a. Color: ‘Natural Gray”.
2. Contractor shall obtain written approval of decomposed granite material from Stabilizer
Solutions, indicating manufacturer’s acceptance of selected material for blending.
2.3 STABILIZER
A. Stabilizer additive shall be "Stabilizer”, a non-toxic, colorless, odorless, concentrated
powder organic binder capable of binding crushed aggregate screenings, manufactured by
Stabilizer Solutions, Inc., 33 South 28th Street, Phoenix, AZ 85034; Tel. 602-225-5900; 1-
800-336-2468; Fax: 602-225-5902; E-mail: info@stabilizersolutions.com, or approved
equal.
1. Stabilizer material shall be provided by supplier pre-mixed with stone dust
(decomposed granite) material specified herein.
2.4 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be manufactured by Border Concepts, Inc., P.O. Box 471185, Charlotte,
NC 28247, or approved equal. Steel edging shall be shop fabricated, 1/4 in. thick x 6 in.
deep, steel, primed and painted black. Edging shall be furnished in 16 or 20 ft. lengths.
1. Steel edging shall accommodate staking steel edging every 30 in. o.c.
2. Steel stakes shall be minimum 15 in. long, tapered.
3. Provide manufacturer's end stake and splicer unit if applicable.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard touch-up paint for in field touch-up of scratched or
2.5 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE
A. Herbicide shall be LESCO Ornamental Herbicide 5G, pre-emergent grassy and selected
broadleaf weed control for ornamental plants, nursery stock and ground covers, #019515,
manufactured by LESCO, Rocky River, OH 44116; Sierraron, manufactured by Scotts;
Preen, manufactured by Lebanon Seaboard Corporation, or approved equal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation
under Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING before
work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to
receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at
required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
conforming to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING.
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Architect as specified in Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING,
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be
uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing pavement.
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section
shall conform to the following:
1. Material shall be legally disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected and tested by an independent testing agency,
provided and paid for by the Contractor, prior to installation of paving base course.
Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this
Section of the specification.
1. Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) Proctor compaction test results indicating
conformance to compaction density requirements specified herein.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods
employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first
class road work, and the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 402, "Dense Graded Crushed Stone for Sub-Base".
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 6
B. Compaction of aggregate base course shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined
by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course.
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.
D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted
measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a 6 ton steel
wheel roller or vibratory roller equivalent to a 6 ton static roller, or an approved equivalent.
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures
only after they have been set to required grade and level.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until
material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement
lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and
otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding
with next operation.
3.4 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be installed at locations indicated on the Drawings. Where required,
edging shall be cut square and accurately to required length.
1. Steel edging shall be securely staked in required position. Stakes shall be driven every
30 in. o.c. along length of edging, or set with modified rebar in concrete footings at
spacinfg indicated on the Drawings.
2. Adjacent lengths of edging shall overlap or be spliced together with manufacturer's
standard splicer unit.
3. Edging shall be set plumb and vertical at required line and grade. Straights sections
shall not be wavy; curved sections shall be smooth and shall have no kinks or sharp
bends.
3.5 STONE DUST (DECOMPOSED GRANITE) SURFACING
A. Stabilizer shall be provided thoroughly and unifomly pre-blended with approved
decomposed granite from local supplier, at rate, and by method in strict accordance with
Stabilizer Soultions’ printed instructions.
1. Blend 12 to 16-lbs (contact manufacturer for exact blend) of Stabilizer per 1-ton of
decomposed granite or crushed aggregate screenings. It is critical that Stabilizer be
thoroughly and uniformly mixed throughout decomposed granite or crushed aggregate
screenings.
2. Bucket blending is not acceptable. Blending with a rake and or shovel is not
acceptable.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 7
3. Blend material dry.
B. Decomposed granite surfacing shall be done only after excavation and construction work
which might injure it has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be
repaired before acceptance.
C. Decomposed granite surfacing shall be constructed on a compacted aggregate base or
sand-based structural soil mix as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Pre-blended stabilized decomposed granite or crushed aggregate screenings shall be
spread evenly over the base in 1-1/2 in. maximum lifts, rolled and compacted to 85% of
maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. Final compacted thickness shal be 3 in.
1. Contractor shall wait a minimum of 24 hours after placing stabilized decomposed
granite material prior to compaction. Longer periods may be required for material to
adequately dry. Consult manufacturer to make determination.
E. Water shall be added to decomposed granite for full-depth moisture penetration prior to
compacting.
1. Minimum 25 to 45-gallons of water per 1-ton must be applied to achieve saturation of
stabilized pathway profile.
2. During water application randomly test for depth using a probing device, which reaches
full depth.
F. Upon thorough moisture penetration, compact stabilized decomposed granite to 85%
relative compaction with 2 to 4 ton durable drum roller or 1000 lb. single drum roller as
required to achieve a dense, hard packed surface conforming to the finish grades indicated.
1. Do not use vibratory rollers or compactors.
2. Do not begin compaction for 12 hours after placement and up to 72 hours.
3. Contractor shall hand tamp areas adjacent to irrigation or plantings with 8 in. or 10 in.
hand tamper.
4. If surface aggregate dries significantly quicker than subsurface material, lightly mist
surface before compaction operations.
G. Variations in smoothness of finished stone dust surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in.
when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to
centerline of stone dust surface areas. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which
retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with
new material conforming to this specification.
H. Crushed stone surface shall comply with ADA Requirements for slip resistance and
accessibility, with a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for accessible routes and 0.8
for ramps, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028.
I. Allow finished surface to dry completely before permitting use.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING
321543 - 8
3.6 INSPECTION
A. Finished aggregate surfacing shall be smooth, uniform and solid. Cured and compacted
aggregate shall be firm throughout profile with no spongy areas. Loose material shall not be
present on the surface after installation, but may appear after use and according to
environmental conditions. Aggregate shall remain stable underneath loose decomposed
granite on top. Surfacing shall appear “natural” yet stable throughout. Any significant
irregularities in surfacing shall be repaired to the uniformity of the entire installation.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Remove debris, such as paper, grass clippings, leaves or other organic material by
mechanically blowing or hand raking the surface as needed. Any plowing program required
during winter months shall involve the use of a rubber baffle on the plow blade or wheels on
the plow that lifts the blade 1/4" off the paving surface.
B. During the first year, a minor amount of loose aggregate will appear on the paving surface
(1/16” to 1/4"). If this material exceeds a 1/4", redistribute the material over the entire
surface. Water thoroughly to the depth of 1”. Compact with power roller of no less than
1000 lbs. This process should be repeated as needed.
C. If cracking occurs, simply sweep fines into the cracks, water thoroughly and hand tamp with
an 8” – 10” hand tamp plate.
3.8 REPAIRS
A. Excavate damaged area to the depth of the stabilized aggregate and square off sidewalls.
B. If area is dry, moisten damaged portion lightly.
C. Pre-blend the dry required quantity of stabilizer powder with the proper quantity of
aggregate in a concrete batch mixer.
D. Add water to the pre-blended aggregate and stabilizer. Thoroughly moisten mix with 25 to
45 gallons per 1 ton of pre-blended material or to approximately 10% moisture content.
E. Apply moistened, pre-blended aggregate to excavated area to finish grade.
F. Compact with an 8 in. to 10 in. hand tamper or 250 lb to 300 lb. roller. Keep traffic off areas
for 12 to 48 hours after repair has been completed.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRAVEL PAVING
321545 - 1
SECTION 321545
GRAVEL PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the gravel
paving for vehicular parking, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; Inspection and testing.
2. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING; Excavation
and backfill and establishment of subgrade elevations.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil
Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54-kg) Rammer
and 18-in. (475-mm) Drop
2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. A 10 lb. sample of each stone aggregate shall be submitted for the Architect's approval of
material gradation and color.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRAVEL PAVING
321545 - 2
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. General
1. Schedule mock-up for acceptance 30 days prior to constructing gravel paving
represented by the mockups.
2. Locate mock-up panels in non-public areas accepted by the Architect.
3. Continue to construct mock-ups until acceptable mock-up is produced. Accepted
mock-up shall be the standard for color, texture, mix ratio, and workmanship for the
work.
4. Use the same aggregate materials and placement procedure, accepted in mock-ups, in
the final work, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
5. Protect accepted mock-ups from damage until completion and acceptance of the work
represented by the mock-up.
6. Remove mock-up panels from site at completion of project, as directed by the Architect.
B. Sample panel shall be 5 ft. x 5 ft. minimum.
C. Source of Materials. Utilize the same source of aggregate materials for all gravel paving.
Do not interchange materials or mixes until an additional mock-up shows that uniformity in
finish texture and color, as compared to original mock-up will be maintained. If necessary,
obtain and stockpile materials in sufficient quantity to ensure continuity and uniformity.
1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. The Owner reserves the right to test and inspect materials and construction of gravel
paving in accordance with the requirements of Section 014000, QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Material for aggregate base course shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free-
draining material, consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace
slag, practically free from loam and clay, and which can be readily compacted to form a
stable foundation.
1. Material shall be dense graded crushed stone conforming to MHD Specifications
Section M2.01.7.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRAVEL PAVING
321545 - 3
2.2 GRAVEL TOP COURSE
A. Stone shall be an angular, durable dense graded crushed stone meeting the following
gradation:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
3/8 in. 100
1/4 in. 80 - 100
No.4 15 - 85
No. 8 0 - 5
No. 200 < 1
2.3 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be manufactured by Border Concepts, Inc., P.O. Box 471185, Charlotte,
NC 28247, or approved equal. Steel edging shall be shop fabricated, 1/4 in. thick x 6 in.
deep, steel, primed and painted black. Edging shall be furnished in 16 or 20 ft. lengths.
1. Steel edging shall accommodate staking steel edging every 30 in. o.c.
2. Steel stakes shall be minimum 15 in. long, tapered.
3. Provide manufacturer's end stake and splicer unit if applicable.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard touch-up paint for in field touch-up of scratched or
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation
under Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING before
work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to
receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at
required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
conforming to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING.
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Architect as specified in Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING,
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be
uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing gravel paving.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRAVEL PAVING
321545 - 4
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section
shall conform to the following:
1. Material shall be legally disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected and tested by an independent testing agency,
provided and paid for by the Contractor, prior to installation of paving base course.
Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this
Section of the specification.
1. Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) Proctor compaction test results indicating
conformance to compaction density requirements specified herein.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods
employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first
class road work, and the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 402, "Dense Graded Crushed Stone for Sub-Base".
B. Compaction of aggregate base course shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined
by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course.
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.
D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted
measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a 6 ton steel
wheel roller or vibratory roller equivalent to a 6 ton static roller, or an approved equivalent.
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures
only after they have been set to required grade and level.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until
material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement
lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and
otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding
with next operation.
3.3 EDGING
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRAVEL PAVING
321545 - 5
A. Steel edging shall be installed at locations indicated on the Drawings. Where required,
edging shall be cut square and accurately to required length.
1. Steel edging shall be securely staked in required position. Stakes shall be driven every
30 in. o.c. along length of edging.
2. Adjacent lengths of edging shall overlap or be spliced together with manufacturer's
standard splicer unit.
3. Edging shall be set plumb and vertical at required line and grade. Straights sections
shall not be wavy; curved sections shall be smooth and shall have no kinks or sharp
bends.
3.5 GRAVEL PAVING
A. Gravel paving shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure
them have been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before
acceptance.
B. Gravel paving shall be constructed on a compacted aggregate base.
C. Gravel shall be spread evenly over the aggregate base in thickness indicated on the
Drawings, rolled with a 3 to 5 ton steel-wheeled roller, and compacted to 95% of maximum
density as determined by ASTM D 1557.
D. Water shall be added to gravel paving as required to achieve a dense, hard packed surface
conforming to the finish grades indicated.
E. Variations in smoothness of finished gravel paving shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in.
when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to
centerline of gravel surface areas. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain
water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new
material conforming to this specification.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE CURBING
321640 - 1
SECTION 321640
GRANITE CURBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision to construct
the granite curbing, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; Inspection and testing.
2. Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION; Salvaging existing granite curbing for reuse
under work of this Section.
3. Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - SITEWORK; Concrete for base.
4. Section 044302, GRANITE; Granite block seat walls.
5. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Establishment of subgrade elevations, subase and base course.
6. Section 321216, BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING.
7. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
C 615 Structural Granite
2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):
Specifications Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridges
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete shop drawings of each curb type and size for Architect's approval.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE CURBING
321640 - 2
1.6 SAMPLE SECTION
A. A sample curb section of each type of specified stone, full dimension, 6 ft. long minimum,
shall be fabricated prior to start of granite curbing. The work will be inspected by the
Architect. If the original sample is not acceptable, the Contractor shall construct additional
sample sections until an accepted sample is obtained. The accepted sections shall
become the standard for the entire job, and shall remain undisturbed until completion of all
granite curbing.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, granite curb materials and construction shall conform to the
applicable portions of the following:
1. MHD Specifications Section 500, "Curb and Edging."
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Granite curb units shall be delivered to the job adequately protected from damage during
transit.
B. Curb shall be protected against staining, chipping, and other damage. Cracked, badly
chipped, or stained units will be rejected and shall not be employed in the work.
1.9 REUSE OF EXISTING GRANITE CURBING
A. Maximum reuse shall be made in the new work of existing granite curbing which is
removed and stacked under Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION. Existing curb to be
reused shall be reset in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GRANITE CURB
A. To the extent available, maximum reuse shall be made in the new work of existing granite
curbing which is removed and stacked under Section 024110, SITE PREPARATION.
B. New granite curb required to complete the work of this Section shall be a structural granite
conforming to ASTM C 615, Class I Engineering Grade, suitable for curbstone use. Curb
shall be free from seams which impair structural integrity, and with percentage of wear less
than 32%, as determined by ASTM C 131. Granite curb shall be as follows:
B. Granite For Curb: shall be a fine grained domestic gray granite to match existing curb and
approved by the Architect.
C. Curb materials shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M9.04.0 and shall meet
requirements specified in the following subsection of Division III, Materials of the MHD
Specifications:
Item Section Type
Vertical Granite Curb M9.04.1 VA4
Transition Granite Curb M9
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE CURBING
321640 - 3
D. Provide sawn vertical faces on both sides for all curb sizes. Provide thermal finish on
pavement/paver side only.
2.2 CEMENT MORTAR
A. Mortar for pointing joints between curbstones shall be a cement mortar composed of one
part Portland cement and two parts sand, by volume with sufficient water to form a
workable, stiff mixture.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. Concrete for continuous haunch shall conform to Section 033001, CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE - SITEWORK.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
A. Areas to receive granite curb will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade
elevation under Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of
subgrade to receive curbing, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding
subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
conforming to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING.
C. Subgrade of areas to receive curbing shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond curb edge.
D. Excavation required in subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Architect as specified in Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING,
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be
uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing granite curb.
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section
shall be legally disposed of off-site.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
GRANITE CURBING
321640 - 4
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Architect. Subgrade shall be approved by the
Architect before installation of aggregate base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by
inspection procedures shall be repaired under this Section of the specification.
3.2 SETTING CURB
A. Curb shall be raised or flush as indicated on the Drawings. Curb shall be set in continuous
concrete haunch over compacted or undisturbed subgrade with concrete bottom at
minimum 6 in. below bottom of curb. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be filled
to required level with base course material as specified above.
B. Vertical face of vertical curb shall be plumb, with curb top parallel to adjacent surface.
C. Curb shall be set accurately to line and grade in continuous haunch. Curb units shall be
fitted together as closely as possible. Curb shall not be field cut.
D. Joints, between curb units shall be carefully filled with a cement mortar, and neatly pointed
on the top and front exposed portions. After pointing, excess mortar shall be cleaned from
curb surface.
E. Backfill material on each side of curb shall be thoroughly compacted by means of power
tampers. Extreme care shall be taken not to destroy alignment. Curb sections disturbed
during backfilling or otherwise shall be reset to line and grade, and properly backfilled.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 1
SECTION 329115
STRUCTURAL SOIL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work of this section consists of all Structural Soil (CU-Soil) work and related items as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1. CU-Soil™ is a proprietary material patented by Cornell University (US Patent
#5,849,069) and marketed under the registered trademark, CU-Structural Soil®. Only
licensed companies are authorized to produce this material, meeting the specifications
described in this text.
2. For a list of licensed CU-Soil™ producers, call AMEREQ, INC. at 800-832-8788.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to the following:
1. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING.
2. Section 321313, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING.
3. Section 321543, STABILIZED STONE DUST SURFACING.
1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials
2. USDA: United States Department of Agriculture
3. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
4. Standard Specifications: Regional or Municipal Standard Specifications
Documentation for the location of proposed usage
5. AOAC: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 2
1.5 SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS
A. At least 30 days prior to ordering materials, the installing contractor shall submit to the
engineer representative samples, certificates, manufacturer’s literature and test results for
materials specified below. No materials shall be ordered until the required samples,
certificates, manufacturer’s literature, producer’s current license and test results have been
reviewed and approved by the landscape architect and/or engineer. The engineer reserves
the right to reject any material that does not meet CU-Structural Soil® specifications.
Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples.
B. Submit from licensed producer, 1/2 cubic foot representative sample of clay loam, one cubic
foot representative sample of crushed stone, and one cubic foot representative sample of
CU-Structural Soil® mix for approval. In the event of multiple source fields for clay loam,
submit a minimum of one set of samples per source field or stockpile. The samples of all
clay loam, crushed stone, and CU-Structural Soil® shall be submitted to the engineer as a
record of the soil color and texture.
C. Submit soil test analysis reports for sample of clay loam from an independent soil-testing
laboratory. The testing laboratory for particle size and chemical analysis may include a
public agricultural extension service agency.
D. Submit a mechanical analysis of the clay loam sample and particle size analysis including
the following gradient of mineral content:
USDA Designation Size in mm.
Gravel +2 mm
Sand 0.05 – 2 mm
Silt 0.002-0.05 mm
Clay minus 0.002 mm
1. Sieve analysis shall be performed and compared to USDA Soil Classification System.
2. Sieve analysis shall be done by a combined hydrometer and wet sieving using sodium
hexametaphosphate as a dispersant in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction
of organic matter by hydrogen peroxide.
E. Submit a chemical analysis, performed in accordance with current AOAC Standards,
including the following:
a. pH and buffer pH.
b. Percent organic matter as determined by the loss of ignition of oven dried
samples. Test samples shall be oven dried to a constant weight at a
temperature of 230 degrees F, plus or minus 9 degrees.
c. Analysis for nutrient levels by parts per million.
d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil/water sample measured
in Millimho per cm.
e. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC).
f. Carbon/Nitrogen Ratio.
F. Submit one cubic foot sample of crushed stone which will be used in production of CU-
Soil™.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 3
G. Provide particle size analysis:
USDA Designation Size in mm.
3” +76 mm
21/2” 63-76 mm
2” 50-63 mm
11/2” 37-50 mm
1” 25-37 mm
¾” 19-25 mm
H. Fine gravel 2-19 mm
I. Provide the manufacturers analysis of the loose and rodded unit weight
J. Losses from LA Abrasion tests- not to exceed 40%
K. Minimum 90% with 2 or more fractured faces
L. Percent pore space analysis
M. At the engineer’s discretion, the sample of CU-Structural Soil® may be tested for the
following:
N. Compaction in accordance with ASTM D698/AASHTO T99
O. California Bearing Ratio in accordance with ASTM D1883- soaked CBR shall equal or
exceed a value of 50
P. Measured dry-weight percentage of stone in the mixture
Q. The approved CU-Structural Soil® sample shall be the standard.
R. Any deviation from the specified crushed stone and clay loam specifications shall be
approved by Amereq Inc., and Landscape Architect.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivered CU-Structural Soil® shall be at or near optimum compaction moisture content as
determined by AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698) and should not be placed in frozen, wet or
muddy sites.
B. Protect CU-Structural Soil® from exposure to excess water and from erosion at all times.
Do not store CU-Soil™ unprotected. Do not allow excess water to enter site prior to
compaction. If water is introduced into the CU-Soil™ after grading, allow water to drain to
optimum compaction moisture content.
1.7 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS
A. All areas to receive CU-Structural Soil® shall be inspected by the installing contractor
before starting work and all defects such as incorrect grading, compaction, and inadequate
drainage shall be reported to the engineer prior to beginning this work.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 4
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of installing contractor: The work of this section should be performed by a
contracting firm which has a minimum of five years experience. Proof of this experience
shall be submitted as per paragraph, SAMPLES and SUBMITTALS, of this section.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 CLAY LOAM
A. Soil shall be a “loam” with a minimum clay content of 20% or a “clay loam” based on the
“USDA classification system” as determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM D-422) and it
shall be of uniform composition, without admixture of subsoil. It shall be free of stones,
lumps, plants and their roots, debris and other extraneous matter. It shall not contain toxic
substances harmful to plant growth. Clay loam shall contain not less than 2% or more than
5% organic matter as determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried samples. Test
samples shall be oven-dried to a constant weight at a temperature of 230 degrees F., plus
or minus 9 degrees.
B. Mechanical analysis for the loam or clay loam shall be as follows:
Textural Class % of Total Weight
Gravel less than 5%
Sand 20-45%
Silt 20-50%
Clay 20-40%
C. Chemical analysis: Meet, or be amended to meet the following criteria:
1. pH between 5.5 to 6.5
2. Percent organic matter 2% - 5% by dry weight
3. Adequate nutrient levels
4. Soluble salt less than 1.0 mmho/cm
5. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) greater than 10
6. Carbon/Nitrogen ratio less than 33:1
D. Loam or clay loam shall not come from USDA - classified prime farmland.
2.2 FERTILIZER (if needed)
A. Should nutrient analysis suggest that the loam or clay loam need additional nutrients, it
shall be amended by Amereq’s licensed producer.
2.3 SULFUR (if needed)
A. Sulfur shall be a commercial granular, 96% pure sulfur, with material and analysis
appearing on the labeled container.
B. Sulfur used to lower pH shall be a ferrous sulfate formulation.
C. Application rates shall be dependent on soil test results.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 5
2.4 LIME (if needed)
A. Agricultural lime containing a minimum of 85% carbonates.
B. Application rates shall be dependent on soil test results.
2.5 CRUSHED STONE
A. The size of the crushed stone shall be 0.75 inches to 1.5 inches allowing for 5% – 10%
being greater than 1.5 inches, and 5% – 10% less than 0.75 inches.
B. Acceptable aggregate dimensions will not exceed 2.5:1.0 for any two dimensions.
C. Minimum 90% with two or more fractured faces.
D. Results of Aggregate Soundness Loss test shall not exceed 18%.
E. Losses from LA Abrasion tests shall not exceed 40%.
2.6 HYDROGEL
A. Hydrogel shall be a coated potassium propenoate-propenamide copolymer (Gelscape®
Hydrogel Tackifier) as manufactured by Amereq, Inc. 800-832-8788.
2.7 WATER
A. The installing contractor shall be responsible to furnish his own supply of water (if needed)
free of impurities, to the site.
2.8 CU-STRUCTURAL SOIL®
A. CU-Soil™ is a proprietary material patented by Cornell University (US Patent #5,849,069)
and marketed under the registered trademark, CU-Structural Soil®. Only licensed
companies are authorized to produce this material, meeting the specifications described in
this text. For a list of licensed CU-Soil™ producers, call AMEREQ, INC. at 800-832-8788.
B. A uniformly blended urban tree mixture of crushed stone, clay loam and Gelscape®
Hydrogel Tackifier, as produced by an Amereq-licensed company, mixed in the following
proportion:
Material Unit of Weight
specified crushed Stone 100 units dry weight
specified clay loam 20 – 25 units (to achieve minimum CBR of 50)
Gelscape® Hydrogel Tackifier 0.035 units dry weight
moisture ASMT D698/AASHTO T-99 optimum moisture
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CU-SOIL™ MIXING AND QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. All CU-Structural Soil® mixing shall be performed at the licensed producer’s yard using
appropriate soil measuring, mixing and shredding equipment of sufficient capacity and
capability to assure proper quality control and consistent mix ratios. No mixing of
CU-Structural Soil® at the project site shall be permitted.
B. Maintain adequate moisture content during the mixing process. Soils and mix components
shall easily shred and break down without clumping. Soil clods shall easily break down into
a fine crumbly texture. Soils shall not be overly wet or dry. The licensed producer shall
measure and monitor the amount of soil moisture at the mixing site periodically during the
mixing process.
C. Raw materials shall be mixed off-site, only at the licensed producer’s facility, on a flat
asphalt or concrete paved surface to avoid soil contamination.
D. Should the independent laboratory test results of the clay loam reveal a need to amend it,
to meet specifications, the amending materials should be added to the clay loam following
the rates and recommendations provided by Amereq.
3.2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
A. The installing contractor shall notify the engineer of any subsurface conditions which will
affect the contractor’s ability to install the CU-Soil™.
B. The installing contractor shall locate and confirm the location of all underground utility lines
and structures prior to the start of any excavation.
C. The installing contractor shall repair any underground utilities or foundations damaged
during the progress of this work.
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
A. Do not proceed with the installation of the CU-Structural Soil® material until all walls, curb
footings and utility work in the area have been installed. For site elements dependent on
CU-Structural Soil® for foundation support, postpone installation of such elements until
immediately after the installation of CU-Structural Soil®.
B. Install subsurface drain lines as shown on the plan drawings prior to installation of
CU-Structural Soil® material.
C. Excavate and compact the proposed subgrade to depths, slopes and widths as shown on
the drawings. Maintain all required angles of repose of the adjacent materials as shown on
the drawings. Do not over excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or
structures.
D. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade
elevations shall slope parallel to the finished grade and/or toward the subsurface drain lines
as shown on the drawings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 7
E. Clear the excavation of all construction debris, trash, rubble and any foreign material. In
the event that fuels, oils, concrete washout silts or other material harmful to plants have
been spilled into the subgrade material, excavate the soil sufficiently to remove the harmful
material. Fill any over excavation with approved fill and compact to the required subgrade
compaction.
F. Do not proceed with the installation of CU-Structural Soil® until all utility work in the area
has been installed. All subsurface drainage systems shall be operational prior to
installation of CU-Structural Soil®.
G. Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage. Use ½” plywood and/or plastic
sheeting as directed to cover existing concrete, metal and masonry work and other items
as directed during the progress of the work.
1. Clean up all trash and any soil or dirt spilled on any paved surface at the end of each
working day.
2. Any damage to the paving or architectural work caused by the installing contractor shall
be repaired, as directed by the engineer.
H. Maintain all silt and sediment control devices required by applicable regulations. Provide
adequate methods to assure that trucks and other equipment do not track soil from the site
onto adjacent property and the public right of way.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CU-STRUCTURAL SOIL® MATERIAL
A. Install CU-Structural Soil® in 6 inch lifts and compact each lift.
B. Compact all materials to at least 95% Proctor Density from a standard compaction curve
AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698). No compaction shall occur when moisture content exceeds
maximum as listed herein. Delay compaction if moisture content exceeds maximum
allowable and protect CU-Structural Soil® during delays in compaction with plastic or
plywood as directed by the engineer.
C. Bring CU-Structural Soil® to finished grades as shown on the drawings. Immediately
protect the CU-Structural Soil® from contamination by toxic materials, trash, debris, water
containing cement, clay, silt or materials that will alter the particle size distribution of the
mix with plastic or plywood as directed by the engineer.
D. The engineer may periodically check the material being delivered, prior to installation for
color and texture consistency with the approved sample provided by the installing
contractor as part of the submittal for CU-Structural Soil®. If the engineer determines that
the delivered CU-Soil™ varies significantly from the approved samples, the engineer shall
contact the licensed producer.
E. Engineer shall ensure that the delivered structural soil was produced by the approved
CU-Soil™ licensee by inspecting weight tickets showing source of material.
F. CU-Soil™ should not be stockpiled long-term. Any CU-Soil™ not installed immediately
should be protected by a tarp or other waterproof covering.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STRUCTURAL SOIL
329115 - 8
3.5 FINE GRADING
A. After the initial placement and rough grading of the CU-Structural Soil® but prior to the start
of fine grading, the installing contractor shall request review of the rough grading by the
engineer. The installing contractor shall set sufficient grade stakes for checking the
finished grades.
B. Adjust the finish grades to meet field conditions as directed.
1. Provide smooth transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction.
2. Fill all dips with CU-Soil™ and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the slope.
3. The tolerance for dips and bumps in CU-Structural Soil® areas shall be a 3” deviation
from the plane in 10’.
4. All fine grading shall be inspected and approved by the engineer prior to the installation
of other items to be placed on the CU-Structural Soil®.
C. The engineer will inspect the work upon the request of the installing contractor. Request
for inspection shall be received by the engineer at least 10 days before the anticipated date
of inspection.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
A. The engineer will inspect the work upon the request of the installing contractor. Request
for inspection shall be received by the Architect at least 10 days before the anticipated date
of inspection.
3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the CU-Structural Soil® installation operations, clean areas within the
contract limits. Remove all excess fills, soils and mix stockpiles and legally dispose of all
waste materials, trash and debris. Remove all tools and equipment and provide a clean,
clear site. Sweep, do not wash, all paving and other exposed surfaces of dirt and mud until
the paving has been installed over the CU-Structural Soil® material. Do no washing until
finished materials covering CU-Structural Soil® material are in place.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LANDSCAPE GRADING
329119 - 1
SECTION 329119
LANDSCAPE GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision to complete
the site grading work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; Topsoil and other planting materials
testing.
2. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING ;
Excavation, backfill; establishment of subgrade elevations.
3. Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
4. Section 329200, LAWNS AND GRASSES.
5. Section 329300, TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method
D 2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the Rubber-
Balloon Method
1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all
conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed
because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LANDSCAPE GRADING
329119 - 2
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Architect reserves the right to perform on-site observation during the grading
operations. The observations may include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Observation of subgrade preparation for slab-on-grade and paved areas.
2. Observation of rough and finish grading operations.
B. Perform field density tests (conducted by independent inspection and testing agency and
paid for by the Contractor) in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2167.
1. Make at least one field density test of the subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area,
but in no case less than three tests.
2. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of
overlaying paved area, but in no case less than five tests.
3. Test reports shall be submitted to Architect within one business day.
C. If, in the opinion of the Architect, based on reports of the testing service and inspection, the
subgrade or fills which have been placed are below the specified density, additional
compaction and testing will be required until satisfactory results are obtained.
1. The results of density tests of soil-in-place will be considered satisfactory if the average
of any four consecutive density tests which may be selected are in each instance equal
to or greater than the specified density, and if not more than one density test out of five
has a value more than 2% below the required density.
D. The Architect's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the
Contractor, his employees, or agents. Neither the presence of the Architect, nor any
observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects
discovered in his work.
1.7 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property
and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets,
curbs, paving, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and
private property.
B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the grading work, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction
of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during
the grading work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of
operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, existing bench marks,
monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Prior to start of grading operations, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the
Architect for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and
scheduling inspection procedures and requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LANDSCAPE GRADING
329119 - 3
B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect a
minimum of two days in advance prior to start of grading operations requiring inspection
and/or testing.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to
be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of
these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials
by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE OF MATERIALS
A. Material shall be obtained from required on-site excavation, to the extent that suitable
material is available, and from off-site sources, to the extent that suitable material is not
available from on-site excavation. Refer to Sections 329200 and 329300 for planting soil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMPACTION
A. Refer to Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING for
required levels of subgrade compaction at paved areas.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, scarified subgrade in landscape areas shall be compacted
to 86% - 88% compaction ASTM D698 Standard Proctor.
2. Planting Soil – Planting Pits and Beds: Refer to Section 329115, PLANTING SOILS.
3. Planting Soil - Lawn Areas: Refer to Section 329115, PLANTING SOILS.
3.2 GRADING - GENERAL
A. Uniformly grade areas within the limits of site grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surfaces within specified tolerances, and between points
where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.
B. The degree of finish required will be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or
scraper operations.
1. Ditches: Finish ditches to ensure proper flow and drainage. Conduct final rolling
operations to produce a hard, uniform, and smooth cross-section.
2. Grade Breaks located on the plans indicate crisp transitions, not blended or rounded
edges. These should be clean, sharp, and uniform in line and curve as indicated on the
plans
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LANDSCAPE GRADING
329119 - 4
3.3 ROUGH GRADING
A. General: Rough grading shall include the shaping, trimming, rolling and refinishing of all
surfaces of the subbase, shoulders, earth embankments and the preparation of grades as
shown on the Drawings. The grade of shoulders and sloped areas may be done by
machine methods.
B. Do all cutting, filling and grading to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Grade
evenly to within the dimensions required for grades shown on the Drawings and specified
herein. No stones larger than 4 in. shall be placed in uper 6 in. of fill. Fill shall be left in
compacted state at the end of work day and sloped to drain.
1. Architect may make such adjustments in gardes and alignments as are found
necessary to avoid special conditions encountered.
2. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
3. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
C. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
4. Up to 2 in. in 10 ft. – 0 in. tolerance shall be permitted on slopes provided the slopes
are uniform in appearance and without any abrupt changes.
5. Traffic of men and equipment across soil subgrade areas shall be prohibited following
excavation to the required lines and grades.
3.4 FINE GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Finish Grading:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with
loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish
elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.
2. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with
the finish surface not more than 0.00 ft. above or 0.10 ft. below the required subgrade
elevation, compacted as specified, and graded to prevent ponding of water after rains.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LANDSCAPE GRADING
329119 - 5
3. Pavements: Shape the surface of the areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-
section, with the finish surface not more than 1/2 in. above or below the required
subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and graded to prevent ponding of water
after rains. Include such operations as plowing, discing, and any moisture or aerating
required to provide the optimum moisture content for compaction. Fill low areas
resulting from removal of unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and other
deleterious materials, using satisfactory soil material. Shape to line, grade, and cross-
section as shown on the Drawings.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified
tolerances.
C. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or
adverse weather, scarify the surface, re-shape, and compact to the required density prior to
further construction.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil
material, trash and debris, and dispose of it legally off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 1
SECTION 329200
LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all materials and equipment, and do all work required to complete the seeding and
sodding of lawns, including furnishing and placing planting soil, as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Establishment of subgrade elevation.
2. Section 329119, LANDSCAPE GRADING.
3. Section 329300, TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: The following samples shall be submitted:
Material Quantity (lb.)
Fertilizer 1
Lime 1
Compost 1
Seed, each mix 1
Loam borrow 1
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 2
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the
following materials:
Fertilizer
C. Certificates: Labels from the manufacturer's container certifying that the product meets the
specified requirements shall be submitted for the following materials:
Commercial fertilizer
Grass seed
Ground limestone
1.6 OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Work will be subject to inspection at all times by the Architect. The Owner reserves the right
to engage an independent testing laboratory in accordance with requirements of Division
01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS to analyze and test materials used in the construction of
the work. Where directed by the Architect, the testing laboratory will make material
analyses and will report to the Architect whether materials conform to the requirements of
this specification.
1. Cost of tests and material analyses made by the testing laboratory will be borne by the
Owner when they indicate compliance with the specification, and by the Contractor
when they indicate non-compliance.
2. Testing equipment will be provided by and tests performed by the testing laboratory.
Upon request by the Architect, shall provide such auxiliary personnel and services
needed to accomplish the testing work.
3. Gradation of granular materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136.
Sieves for determining material gradation shall be as described in ASTM E 11.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency, experienced in the testing of
agricultural soils and acceptable to the Architect, to perform the topsoil/planting soil tests
and analyses specified herein. All costs associated with testing shall be the Contractor's
responsibility.
1. Particle size analyis shall include the following gradient of mineral content:
USDA Designation Size in mm
Gravel + 2 mm
Very coarse sand 1-2 mm
Coarse sand 0.5-1 mm
Medium sand 0.25-0.5 mm
Fine sand 0.1-0.25 mm
Very fine sand 0.05-0.1 mm
Silt 0.002-0.05 mm
Clay < 0.002 mm
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 3
2. Chemical analysis shall include the following:
a. pH and buffer pH
b. percentage of organic content by oven-dried weight
c. Nutrient levels by parts per million, including phosphorus, potassium, magnesium,
manganese, iron, zinc, and calcium. Nutrient test shall include testing laboratory
recommendations for supplemental additions to the soil, if necessary, based on the
requirements for ornamental horticultural plants. Recommendations shall include
rates at which additives are to be applied.
d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil/water sample.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Digging Sod:
1. Sod shall not be dug at the nursery or approved source until ready to transport sod to
the site of the work or acceptable storage location.
2. Before stripping, sod shall be mowed at a uniform height of 2 in.
3. Cut sod to specified thickness and to standard width and length desired.
B. Transportation of Sod:
1. Sod transported to the Project in open vehicles shall be covered with tarpaulins or other
suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent injury. Closed
vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the sod.
2. Evidence of inadequate protection following the digging, carelessness while in transit,
or improper handling shall be cause for rejection.
3. Sod shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times. Such protection shall
encompass the entire period during which the sod is in transit, being handled, or are in
temporary storage.
4. Upon arrival at the temporary storage location or the site of the work, sod material shall
be inspected for proper shipping procedures. Should the sod be dried out, the Architect
will reject the sod. When sod has been rejected, the Contractor shall at once remove it
from the area of the work and replace it with acceptable material.
5. Unless otherwise authorized by the Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at
least two working days in advance of the anticipated delivery date of sod material.
Certificate of Inspection when required shall accompany each shipment.
C. Handling and Storage of Sod:
1. Sod material shall be handled with extreme care to avoid breaking or tearing strips.
2. Sod shall not be stored for longer than 30 hours prior to installation. Sod shall be
stored in a compact group and shall be kept moist. Sod shall be prevented from
freezing.
3. Sod that has been damaged by poor handling or improper storage will be rejected by
the Architect.
D. Deliver seed in original sealed containers, labeled with analysis of seed mixture,
percentage of pure seed, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, location of
packaging, and name of seed grower. Damaged packages will not be accepted.
E. Seed shall be stored under cool and dry conditions so that the endophytic seed in the
mixture is capable of maintaining a high level of endophytes
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 4
F. Deliver fertilizer in sealed waterproof bags, printed with manufacturer's name, weight, and
guaranteed analysis.
1.9 PLANTING SEASON
A. Planting season shall be as follows:
Material Planting Season
Spring Fall
Seeding and sodding 3/15 to 5/15 8/15 to 10/15
B. Planting shall only be performed when weather and soil conditions are suitable for planting
the material specified in accordance with locally accepted practice.
C. Planting season may be extended with the written permission of the Architect.
1.10 ACCEPTANCE
A. Acceptance:
1. The Architect will inspect all work for Substantial Completion upon written request of
the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the
anticipated date of inspection.
2. Acceptance of material by the Architect will be for general conformance to specified
requirements, and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance
to the Contract Documents.
3. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the
judgement of the Architect, the Architect will recommend to the Owner that the work of
this Section be accepted.
B. Sod and seed areas will be accepted when in compliance with all the following conditions:
1. Roots are thoroughly knit to the soil;
2. Absence of visible joints (sodded areas);
3. All areas show a uniform stand of specified grass in healthy condition;
4. At least 60 days have elapsed since the completion of work under this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials shall be extracted or recovered and manufactured from within 500 miles of project
site.
2.2 SEED
A. Seed mixture: Standard grade seed of the most recent season's crop. Seed shall be dry
and free of mold. Seed shall be inoculated with endophytes. Seed mixture shall be as
follows:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 5
SEED MIX
% by Weight Minimum % Minimum %
Name of Seed in Mixture Purity Germination
Certified Julia, Dawn
Or Shamrock Kentucky
Bluegrass 40 98 99
Shademaster Creeping
Red Fescue 40 98 85
Commander Perennial
Ryegrass 20 90 80
2.3 SOD
A. Certified Turfgrass Sod: Superior sod grown from certified, high quality seed of known
origin or from plantings of certified grass seedlings or stolons. It shall be inspected by the
certification agency of the state in which it is grown to assure satisfactory genetic identity
and purity, overall high quality and freedom from noxious weeds as well as excessive
quantities of other crop and weedy plants at time of harvest. All seed or original plant
material in mixture must be certified. Turfgrass sod shall meet the published state
standards for certification.
1. Sod shall be a mixture of four or five current and improved bluegrass varieties found in
the top 25% of the NTEP (National Turfgrass Evaluation Proceedings), with last two
tests spanning over 8 years. Mixture shall contain approximately equal proportions of
each hybrid component.
B. Sod shall be nursery grown on cultivated mineral agricultural soils. Sod shall have been
mowed regularly and carefully, and otherwise maintained from planting to harvest.
C. Thickness of Cut: Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 5/8 in., plus or
minus 1/4 in., at the time of cutting. Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth
and thatch.
D. Strip Size: Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length.
Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or minus 1/2
in. on width, and plus or minus 5% on length. Broken strips and torn and uneven ends will
not be acceptable.
E. Strength of Sod Strips: Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support
their own weight and retain their size and shape if suspended vertically when grasped in
the upper 10% of the section.
F. Moisture Content: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content
(excessively dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 6
G. Time Limitations: Sod shall be harvested, delivered, and transplanted within a 36 hour
period unless a suitable preservation method is approved prior to delivery. Sod not
transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the Architect prior to its
installation.
H. Thatch: Sod shall be relatively free of thatch. A maximum of 1/2 in. (uncompressed) thatch
will be permitted.
I. Diseases, Nematodes, and Insects: Sod shall be free of diseases, nematodes, and soil-
borne insects. State Nursery and Plant Materials Laws require that all sod be inspected
and approved for sale. The inspection and approval must be made by the State
Agricultural Department, Office of the State Entomologist.
J. Weeds: Sod shall be free of objectionable grassy and broad leaf weeds. Turfgrass sod
shall be considered free of such weeds if less than five such plants are found per 100 sq. ft.
of area.
1. Turfgrass sod shall not be acceptable if it contains any of the following weeds: common
bermudagrass (wiregrass), quackgrass, johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill,
Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel and
bromegrass.
2.4 SOD FARM GROWING MEDIUM
A. Soil in which sod was grown shall be classified as loam or sandy loam (silt loam is not
acceptable) and shall conform to the following grain size distribution for material passing
the #10 sieve:
U.S. Sieve No. % Passing by Weight
Minimum Maximum
10 100 ---
20 75 100
40 30 85
100 12 45
270 5 25
0.002 mm 1 4
1. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15% by weight of the total sample.
2. Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM
D422.
3. The organic content shall be between 3.0 and 8.0 percent.
2.5 PLANTING SOIL
A. Existing Topsoil
1. Existing topsoil from on-site source(s) may be used for planting soil, to the extent
available, if it meets the requirements of this Section for planting soil, or if approved by
the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 7
B. Planting Soil
1. Planting soil shall be composed of a natural, fertile, friable soil typical of cultivated
topsoils of the locality, suitable for the germination of seeds and support of vegetative
growth, with additives, if required, to achieve particle distribution and organic content
specifications . Topsoil shall be taken from a well-drained, arable site, free of subsoil,
large stones, earth clods, sticks, stumps, clay lumps, roots, other objectionable,
extraneous matter or debris nor contain toxic substances. Planting soil shall have a pH
value between 5.5 and 6.5 and organic matter content of 5 to 10% of total dry weight.
2. Planting soil shall have the following mechanical analysis (see paragraph 1.6 for
particle sizes):
Approximate Particle Distribution
Gravel Less than 10%
Coarse to medium sand 55 – 65%
Fine to very fine sand 15 – 25%
Silt 10– 20%
Clay 15 – 20%
3. Minimum planting soil nutrient levels shall be: Nitrogen @ 5% average of organic
matter, Phosphorus @ .02 to .05% average of total soil content, Potassium @ 1.2%
average of total soil content.
4. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with planting soil test results, as specified in
Paragraph 1.6, before the start of planting operations. If planting soil does not fall within
the required particle distribution, organic content, or pH range, it shall be adjusted to
meet the specifications through the addition of sand, compost, limestone, or aluminum
sulfate to bring it within the specified limits.
2.6 COMPOST
A. Compost shall be derived from organic wastes such as food and agricultural residues,
animal manures, mixed solid waste and biosolids (treated sewage sludge) that meet all
State Environmental Agency requirements. The product shall be well composted, free of
viable weed seeds and contain material of a generally humus nature capable of sustaining
growth of vegetation, with no materials toxic to plant growth.
1. Compost shall have the following properties:
Parameters Range
pH 5.5 – 8.0
Moisture Content 35% - 55%
Soluble Salts £ 4.0 mmhos (dS)
C:N ratio 15 – 30:1
Particle Size < 1”
Organic Matter Content > 50%
Bulk Density < 1000 lbs./cubic yard
Foreign Matter < 1% (dry weight)
2. Compost generator shall also provide minimum available nitrogen and other macro and
micro nutrients to determine fertilizer requirements.
3. Compost shall be “AllGro”, distributed by AllGro, 4 Liberty Lane West, Hampton, NH
03842; “Agresoil”, distributed by Agresource, 100 Main Street, Amesbury, MA 01913;
or approved equal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 8
4. Guidelines for quantity of compost required to achieve suitable soil organic content in
soil mixes for ornamental horticultural planting shall be as recommended by the
compost manufacturer.
2.7 LIMESTONE
A. Ground limestone shall be an agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 85% total
carbonates, by weight. Ground limestone shall be graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
No. 10 100
No. 20 90
No. 100 60
2.8 WATER
A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to seeded or sodded
areas.
2.9 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
A. Starter fertilizer shall be HD Scotts Starter Fertilizer or approved equal.
B. Fertilizer shall conform to the following:
1. When applied as a topsoil amendment, fertilizer shall have an analysis that will deliver
appropriate amounts of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium as required to remedy
deficiencies revealed by testing the topsoil.
a. 50% of nitrogen shall be derived from natural organic source of ureaform.
b. Available phosphorus shall be derived from superphosphate, bone meal, or
tankage.
c. Potassium shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 60% potash.
C. Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer's standard container printed with
manufacturer's name, material weight, and guaranteed analysis.
2.10 SUPERPHOSPHATE
A. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as commonly used for
agricultural purposes, and containing not less than 20% available phosphoric acid. The
superphosphate shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers, each
bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any superphosphate which becomes
caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will be rejected.
2.11 CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH
A. Cellulose fiber mulch shall be composed of virgin wood, contain a green color additive, be
weed free, and non-polluting, containing no germination or growth - inhibiting factors,
similar to Hydro Mulch, manufactured by Conwed Corporation, St. Paul, Minnesota 55113.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 9
2.12 WEED CONTROL
A. Weed control for stockpiled topsoil shall be a non-selective weed killer for control of grassy
and broadleaf weeds; weed control shall have short residual, allowing seeding and sodding
operations to occur within 7 days of application.
2.13 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be manufactured by Border Concepts, Inc., P.O. Box 471185, Charlotte,
NC 28247, or approved equal. Steel edging shall be shop fabricated, 1/4 in. thick x 6 in.
deep, steel, primed and painted black. Edging shall be furnished in 16 or 20 ft. lengths.
1. Steel edging shall accommodate staking steel edging every 30 in. o.c.
2. Steel stakes shall be minimum 15 in. long, tapered.
3. Provide manufacturer's end stake and splicer unit if applicable.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard touch-up paint for in field touch-up of scratched or
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Subgrade shall be examined to ensure that rough grading and all other subsurface work in
lawn areas and other areas to be seeded or sodded is done prior to start of seeding or
sodding.
B. Existing subgrade shall be loosened or scarified to a minimum depth of 3 in. prior to
spreading topsoil. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade, and shall be
cleared of stones greater than 3 in., sticks, and other extraneous material.
3.2 SPREADING OF PLANTING SOIL
A. Planting soil shall not be spread until it is possible to follow immediately or within 24 hours
with seeding or sodding operations. If topsoil is spread prior to this time it shall be
cultivated to loosen soil prior to seeding or sodding.
B. Planting soil shall not be placed when subgrade or topsoil material are frozen, excessively
wet, or excessively dry.
C. Planting soil shall be spread in a uniform layer, to a thickness which will compact to the
depth required to bring final lawn and grass surfaces to required elevation. Unless
otherwise indicated minimum depth of topsoil for seeded and sodddd areas shall be 6 in.
1. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top
of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting
soil mixture.
D. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading
to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with
planting or maintenance operations.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 10
E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow
surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
F. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before
planting.
3.3 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER AND CONDITIONERS
A. Fertilizer and conditioners shall be applied at the following rates:
1. Compost - as required by test results of topsoil.
2. Limestone - as required by test results of topsoil.
3. Fertilizer - as required by test results of topsoil.
B. Mixing with planting soil:
1. Fertilizer and conditioners shall be spread over the entire lawn areas at the application
rates indicated above.
2. Materials shall be uniformly and thoroughly mixed into the top 4 in. of planting soil by
discing, rototilling, or other approved method.
3.4 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be installed at locations indicated on the Drawings. Where required,
edging shall be cut square and accurately to required length.
1. Steel edging shall be securely staked in required position. Stakes shall be driven every
30 in. o.c. along length of edging.
2. Adjacent lengths of edging shall overlap 8 in. or be spliced together with manufacturer's
standard splicer unit.
3. Edging shall be set plumb and vertical at required line and grade. Straights sections
shall not be wavy; curved sections shall be smooth and shall have no kinks or sharp
bends.
3.5 FINISH GRADING
A. Refer to Section 329119, LANDSCAPE GRADING.
B. Contractor shall set grade lines for Architect’s review and approval.
1. Final surface of topsoil immediately before seeding and sodding shall be within + 1/2 in.
of required elevation, with no ruts, mounds, ridges, or other faults, and no pockets or
low spots in which water can collect. Stones, roots, and other debris greater than 1 in.
in any dimension, which are visible at the surface, shall be removed and the resulting
holes filled with topsoil, leaving a uniform planar surface.
C. Finish grade surface with a drag or rake. Round out all breaks in grade, smooth down all
lumps and ridges, fill in all holes and crevices. Rolling with a light roller is acceptable, if the
surface is scarified afterward.
1. Lawn: Compaction of topsoil for finish grade shall be 85% to 88%.
D. In the event of settlement, the Contractor shall readjust the work to required finished grade.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 11
3.6 SEED APPLICATION
A. Seed shall be applied in two applications; by mechanical spreader.
B. First Application: Seed shall be broadcast by means of an approved mechanical spreader,
to give a uniform application at the following rates:
Seed Application Rate
lb./1,000 s.f.
Seed Mixture 4.0
(unless otherwise recommended by seed
supplier)
1. Seed shall be applied in two equal applications for uniform coverage; direction of travel
of spreader for second pass shall be perpendicular to that of the first pass. Seeding
shall not be done when it is raining or snowing, or when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.
2. Following seeding the area shall be lightly raked to mingle seed with top 1/8 to 1/4 in. of
soil. Area shall then be fine graded. Stones and other debris greater than 1 in. in any
dimension which are visible on surface shall be removed.
C. Following seeding and raking, entire area shall be rolled with a hand roller having a weight
of 60 to 90 lb./ft. of width, and a minimum diameter of 2 ft. Entire area shall then be watered
by use of lawn sprinklers, or other approved means. Initial watering shall continue until the
equivalent of a 2 in. depth of water has been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate
which will not dislodge the seed. Watering shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as
required to prevent drying of the surface, until the grass attains an average height of 1/4 in.
Watering methods and apparatus which may cause erosion of the surface shall not be
permitted.
D. Rope off entire seeded area to prevent vehicles and pedestrians from entering area.
3.7 SODDING
A. Edges of the sodded areas shall be smooth, and all sodded areas shall conform to the
design cross sections and grade. At edges adjacent to curbs, paved areas, etc., top
surface of earth in sod shall be 1/2 in. below adjacent hard surface.
B. Sod shall be placed and all sodding operations completed within 72 hours following
stripping from sod source bed.
C. On slopes steeper than 2 to 1, sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wood pins or
other approved methods, spaced at not less than 1 pin per square foot.
D. Surface of completed sodded area shall be smooth. Sod shall be laid edge-to-edge, with
tight-butted, staggered joints. Sod shall be carefully placed to insure that it is neither
stretched or overlapped. Immediately after laying sod shall be pressed firmly into contact
with sod bed by tamping or rolling, to eliminate air pockets. Following compaction, topsoil
shall be used to fill all cracks, and excess soil shall be worked into grass with rakes or other
suitable equipment. Sod shall not be smothered with excess fill soil.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 12
E. Immediately after sodding operations have been completed, entire surface shall be
compacted with a cultipacker roller or other approved equipment weighing 100 to 160 lb./ft.
of roller.
F. Completed sod shall immediately be watered sufficiently to uniformly wet the soil to at least
1 in. below the bottom of sod bed.
3.8 CONTRACTOR MAINTENANCE
A. Except as otherwise specified below, maintenance shall include all operations required to
produce an established lawn, including but not limited to:
Fertilizing
Mowing
Replanting
Watering
Weeding
B. Maintenance of seeded areas shall begin upon completion of seeding and shall continue
until acceptance of the building, or until mowing as specified below is completed, or until
average height of grass is 1-1/2 in., whichever occurs later.
1. Watering
a. Week No. 1: Provide all watering necessary to keep seed bed moist at all
times. Perform watering daily or as necessary to maintain moist soil to a
depth of 4 in.
b. Week No. 2 and until acceptance of the building, or until mowing as
specified below is completed, or until average height of grass is 1-1/2 in.,
whichever occurs later: Water as necessary to maintain adequate
moisture in the upper 4 in. of soil to promote seed germination.
2. Mowing
a. Not more than 40% of the grass leaf shall be removed during the first or
subsequent mowings.
b. Bluegrass and other cool season grasses shall be maintained between 1-
1/2 in. and 2-1/2 in.
c. All clippings shall be removed.
C. Maintenance of sodded areas shall begin upon completion of sodding and shall continue
for 45 days thereafter, unless sodding is not completed until after September 15, in which
case maintenance shall continue until the June 15 following.
1. Watering
a. Week No. 1: Provide all watering necessary for rooting of sod. Soil on sod
pads shall be kept moist at all times. Perform watering daily or as
necessary to maintain moist soil to a depth of 4 in. Watering shall be done
during the heat of the day to prevent wilting.
b. Week No. 2 and Subsequent Weeks: Water as necessary to maintain
adequate moisture in the upper 4 in. of soil to promote deep root growth.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
LAWNS AND GRASSES
329200 - 13
2. Mowing
a. Mowing shall not be attempted until the sod is firmly rooted and securely in
place. Not more than 40% of the grass leaf shall be removed during the
first or subsequent mowings.
b. Bluegrass and other cool season grasses shall be maintained between 1-
1/2 in. and 2-1/2 in.
c. All clippings shall be removed.
d. After 2 mowings, the Contractor shall top dress the sod with an application
of fertilizer at the rate of 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1000 square feet.
D. After grass has sprouted, seeded areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass shall be
replanted as often as necessary to establish an acceptable stand of grass.
1. Scattered bare spots, shall not exceed 15 sq. in. each.
E. Weeds and growth other than varieties of grass named in grass seed formula shall be
removed. Removal may be accomplished by use of suitable herbicides or by physical
removal, in which case top growth and roots shall both be removed, and bare spots
exceeding specified limits shall be reseeded.
F. If lawn or grass is established in the fall and maintenance is required to continue into spring
months, lawn and grass shall receive an application of lime and fertilizer in the spring. Lime
and fertilizer shall be spread in a uniform layer over the entire lawn surface, at the following
rates.
Material Application Rate
Lime 100 lb./1000 sq. ft.
Fertilizer 20 lb./1000 sq. ft.
G. Remove rope barricades only after second cutting of lawns.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 1
SECTION 329300
TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all materials and equipment, and do all work required to complete the planting,
including furnishing and placing planting soil, aeration pipes and tree watering components,
as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Section 312300, SITE EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING;
Establishment of subgrade elevation.
2. Section 329119, LANDSCAPE GRADING.
3. Section 329200, LAWNS AND GRASSES.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
All standards shall include the latest additions and amendments as of the date of
advertisement for bids.
1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):
Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock (Sponsor:
American Nursery and Landscape Association)
A 300 American National Standards for Tree Care
Operations
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 2
E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
F 405 Corrugated Polyethylene (Pe) Tubing and Fittings
4. "Hortus Third", A Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the United States and
Canada, Cornell University, L.H. Bailey Hortorium, MacMillian Publishing Co., New
York, NY.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: The following samples shall be submitted:
Material Sample Size or Quantity
Mulch 1 ft.3
Compost 1 ft.3
Soil separator 1 ft.3
Topsoil 1 ft.3
Planting soil 1 ft 3
Tree stake 24 in. length
Tree wrap 24 in. length
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the
following materials:
Aluminum sulfate
Antidessicant
Fertilizer
Fungicide
Herbicide
Insecticide
Compost
Tree wrap
C. Certificates: Labels from the manufacturer certifying that the product meets the specified
requirements shall be submitted for the following materials:
Commercial fertilizer
Limestone
Compost
D. Test Reports: Test reports from an approved testing agency indicating compliance with the
specifications shall be submitted for topsoil and any other materials designated by the
Architect.
1.6 OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Work will be subject to inspection at all times by the Architect. The Owner reserves the right
to engage an independent testing laboratory in accordance with requirements of Division
01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS to analyze and test materials used in the construction of
the work. Where directed by the Architect, the testing laboratory will make material
analyses and will report to the Architect whether materials conform to the requirements of
this specification.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 3
1. Cost of tests and material analyses made by the testing laboratory will be borne by the
Owner when they indicate compliance with the specification, and by the Contractor
when they indicate non-compliance.
2. Testing equipment will be provided by and tests performed by the testing laboratory.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency, experienced in the testing of
agricultural soils and acceptable to the Architect, to perform the topsoil/planting soil tests
and analyses specified herein. All costs associated with testing shall be the Contractor's
responsibility.
1. Particle size analyis shall include the following gradient of mineral content:
USDA Designation Size in mm
Gravel + 2 mm
Very coarse sand 1-2 mm
Coarse sand 0.5-1 mm
Medium sand 0.25-0.5 mm
Fine sand 0.1-0.25 mm
Very fine sand 0.05-0.1 mm
Silt 0.002-0.05 mm
Clay < 0.002 mm
2. Chemical analysis shall include the following:
a. pH and buffer pH
b. percentage of organic content by oven-dried weight
c. Nutrient levels by parts per million, including phosphorus, potassium, magnesium,
manganese, iron, zinc, and calcium. Nutrient test shall include testing laboratory
recommendations for supplemental additions to the soil, if necessary, based on the
requirements for ornamental horticultural plants. Recommendations shall include
rates at which additives are to be applied.
d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil/water sample.
1.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Identification of plant names shall be as listed in "Hortus Third".
B. Selection of Plant Materials: Submit to the Architect the names and locations of nurseries
and/or re-wholesalers or distributors proposed as sources of acceptable plant material.
Inspect all plant materials to determine that they meet the requirements of this section.
Proposed materials shall be flagged at the nurseries by the Contractor prior to viewing by
the Architect.
1. Schedule with the Architect a time for viewing plant material at the nursery and/or re-
wholesaler or distributor facilities. Trips shall be efficiently arranged to allow Architect to
maximize viewing time. A minimum of four weeks shall be allowed for this viewing prior
to time that plants are to be transported to the project site.
2. Architect may choose to attach a seal to each plant, or representative samples.
3. If requested by the Architect, photographs of plant material or representative samples
of plants shall be submitted by the Contractor.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 4
4. If re-wholesalers or distributors are proposed as sources of plant material, the
Contractor shall supply the Architect with names and locations of nurseries from which
plants were obtained.
5. Viewing and/or sealing of plant materials by the Architect prior to shipping does not
preclude the Architect's right to reject material for non-conformance to specifications at
the site of planting.
1.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Identification of plant materials shall be as named in "Hortus Third".
B. Selection of Plant Materials: Contractor shall submit to Architect a complete list of all
proposed nurseries including location, contact #, plant list for each nursery, all proposed
substitutions, credits and/or additional charges. No tagging will occur until this list is
complete and submitted. Contractor shall be responsible for delays if list is not submitted
complete and in advance of proposed tagging dates.
1. Inspect all nursery materials to determine that the materials meet the requirements of
this section. Proposed materials shall be flagged by the nurseries for review by the
Contractor and the Architect.
2. Schedule with the Architect a time for viewing plant material at the nursery. Trips to
nurseries shall be efficiently arranged to allow Architect to maximize viewing time. A
minimum of six weeks shall be allowed for this viewing prior to time that plants are to
be dug.
3. Architect may choose to attach seal to each plant, or representative samples.
4. Viewing and/or sealing of plant materials by the Architect at the nursery does not
preclude the Architect's right to reject material at the site of planting.
5. Architect will provide a maximum of two (2) tagging trips.
C. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species
and size of plant material as it will be furnished for the Project. Take photographs from an
angle depicting true size and condition of the plant to be provided. Include a scale rod or
other measuring device in each photograph. Include a minimum of three photographs
showing best plant quality and worst plant quality for each species to be furnished. Clearly
identify photographs with botanical name, size and source nursery.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in
successful establishment of plants. Installer shall provide evidence of the following
credentials:
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements
in Division 01 General Requirements."
3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
4. 3 projects similar scale (within 10% of SF of proposed project) within last 5 years
5. 3 references with phone numbers
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 5
6. 3 photos each for each reference project
7. Positive responses from all references
8. Reference project review by Architect and Owner within New England area
B. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
C. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized
by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
1.11 PLANT MATERIAL QUANTITIES
A. In the event of a discrepancy in plant material quantities between the Drawings and the
Plant List(s), the larger quantity shall be required.
1.12 UNAVAILABILITY OF PLANT MATERIALS1
A. Before changes or substitutions can be made due to unavailability of plant material, submit
satisfactory evidence that the Contractor has advertised for a one month period in a trade
journal such as the "American Nurseryman", (Tel. 312-427-7339 and Fax: 312-427-7346),
with no response, or has undertaken other methods of locating plant material acceptable to
the Architect.
1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transportation of Plant Material: Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be
covered with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle
to prevent injury to the plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent
overheating of the plants. Trees shall not be transported when daytime air temperatures
are below 20°.
1. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times. Such protection shall
encompass the entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled, or
are in temporary storage.
2. Unless otherwise authorized by the Architect, notify the Architect at least two working
days in advance of the anticipated delivery date of any plant material. A legible copy of
the bill of lading, showing the quantities, kinds, and sizes of materials included for each
shipment shall be furnished to the Architect, if requested.
B. Storage: Unless specific authorization is obtained from the Architect, unprotected plants
shall not remain on the site of work longer than three days prior to being planted.
1. Plants that are not planted immediately shall be protected as follows:
a. Earth balls shall be kept moist, not be allowed to freeze, and their solidity carefully
preserved.
2. Both the duration and method of storage of plant materials shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect.
C. Handling of Plant Materials: Exercise care in handling plant materials to avoid damage or
stress.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 6
1.14 REJECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or
improper handling or storage, shall be cause for rejection.
B. Upon arrival at the temporary storage location or the site of the work, plants shall be
inspected for proper shipping procedures. Plants with roots dried out, large branches
broken, balls of earth broken or loosened, or areas of bark torn shall be subject to rejection
by the Architect.
C. Rejected plants shall be removed from the area of work and replaced with same species of
the required size and quality.
1.15 DIGGING/PLANTING SEASONS
A. Spring Digging: Spring digging of plant materials may commence as soon as the ground
has thawed and weather conditions make it practicable to dig at the nursery.
1. Deciduous plants shall not be dug after they have leafed out.
2. Broadleaf evergreens and conifers shall not be dug after new growth or candle push is
visible.
B. Fall Digging: Fall digging of plant materials may commence after dormancy has begun and
shall continue until such time as the ground has frozen or weather conditions make it
impractical to work.
1. Fall digging hazards shall conform to American National Standards Institute, Inc.
(ANSI) species and guidelines.
2. Trees proposed for this Project which present a fall digging hazard, shall be sourced in
the Spring and be ready for a Fall 2017 planting. Such trees include, but are not limited
to Betula and Quercus species. A comprehensive list is included below in case
substitutions become necessary.
a. Betula varieties
b. Carpinus varieties
c. Cercis canadensis varieties
d. Cupressocyparis leylandii
e. Crataegus varieties
f. Fagus varieties
g. Halesia varieties
h. Ilex opaca varieties
i. Lagerstroemia varieties
j. Magnolia grandiflora varieties
k. Malus varieties
l. Nyssa sylvatica varieties
m. Oxydendrum arboretum varieties
n. Prunus varieties
o. Quercus – all Oaks except Q. palustris
p. Sassafras albidum
q. Taxodium distichum varieties
r. Ulmus parviflora varieties
s. Zelkova varieties
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 7
C. Planting Seasons: Planting shall only be performed when weather and soil conditions are
suitable for planting the material specified, in accordance with locally accepted practice,
approval of the Architect, and to maintain the Contractor’s guarantee.
1.16 ACCEPTANCE FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. The Architect shall inspect all work of this Section for Acceptance for Substantial
Completion upon receipt of written notice of completion by the Contractor. The request
shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection.
B. Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified
size, character, and quality, and shall not diminish responsibility for full conformance to the
Contract Documents.
C. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of
the Architect, the Architect shall recommend that Acceptance for Substantial Completion of
the work of this Section be given by the Owner.
D. Acceptance in Part
1. The work may be Accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best
interest to do so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to complete
the work in parts.
2. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions
of this Contract.
1.17 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain plant material until the completion of the guarantee period
and Final Acceptance of work, as described in paragraph 1.19 of this Section.
1.18 GUARANTEE
A. Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after the date of Acceptance by the
Owner.
1. When the work is Accepted in parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each of
the partial Acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all
guarantee periods terminate at one time.
B. Plants shall be healthy, free of pests and disease, and in flourishing condition at the end of
the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead and dying branches and branch tips, and
shall bear foliage of normal density, size, and color.
C. Replace dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by
the Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period, without cost to the Owner, as
soon as weather conditions permit and within the specified planting period.
1. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species.
Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification.
2. Make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no
extra cost to the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 8
3. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional one year period
from the date of their Acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement
plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the
Owner may elect one more replacement or credit for each item.
D. At the end of the guarantee period, and no less than five days prior to final inspection,
staking and guying materials, and tree wrap and ties shall be removed from the site.
1.19 FINAL INSPECTION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect shall, upon receipt of written notice of end
of guarantee period, inspect the work for Final Acceptance. Request shall be received at
least ten calendar days before the anticipated date for Final Inspection.
B. Upon completion and reinspection of full repairs or replacements necessary in the
judgment of the Architect at that time, the Architect shall recommend to the Owner that
Final Acceptance of the work of this Section be given.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS
A. Except as otherwise specified, size and grade of plant materials and their root balls shall
conform to ANSI Z60.1.
B. Plants shall have outstanding form; symmetrical, heavily branched with an even branch
distribution, densely foliated and/or budded, and a strong, straight, distinct leader where
this is characteristic of species. Plants shall possess a normal balance for the species
between height and spread. The Architect will be the final arbiter of acceptability of plant
form.
1. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact
leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees
required.
2. Small Upright and Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to
species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to
ANSI Z60.1.
3. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with
relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1.
4. Deciduous Shrubs: Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum
number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape,
and height of shrub.
5. Coniferous Evergreens: Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous
evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.
6. Coniferous Evergreens: Form and Size: Specimen-quality, exceptionally heavy, tightly
knit, symmetrically shaped coniferous evergreens.
7. Broadleaf Evergreens: Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf
evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.
C. Plants shall be healthy and vigorous, free of disease, insect pests and their eggs, and
larvae.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 9
D. Plants shall have a well-developed fibrous root system.
E. Plants shall be free of physical damage such as scrapes, broken or split branches, scars,
bark abrasions, sunscalds, fresh limb cuts, disfiguring knots, or other defects.
F. Plants shall meet the sizes indicated on the Plant List. Plants larger or smaller than
specified may be used only if accepted in writing by the Architect.
G. Where a size or caliper range is stated, at least 50% of the material shall be closer in size
to the top of the range stated.
H. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery.
I. All trees and shrubs shall be labeled. Labels shall be durable and legible, stating the
correct plant name and size in weather-resistant ink or embossed process. Labels shall be
securely attached to all plants prior to delivery to the site, being careful not to restrict
growth.
J. Plants indicated as "B&B" shall be balled and burlapped.
1. Unless otherwise permitted by the Architect, plants shall be nursery grown.
2 Plants shall be grown for at least two years under climatic conditions similar to those in
the locality of the Project.
3. Nursery grown plants shall be dug in the current planting season. No heeled in plants
or plants from cold storage that were dug in the previous season shall be accepted.
K. Container grown plants shall be well rooted and established in the container in which they
were grown. They shall have grown in the container for a sufficient length of time for the
root system to hold the planting medium when taken from the container, but not long
enough to become root bound. Container grown plants exceeding the sizes indicated in
ANSI Z60.1 shall have containers which are not less than 75% of the ball sizes for
comparable B&B plant material. Each container plant shall be inspected and circling roots
loosened or pruned as needed.
L. Canes or Trunk(s) and Branches:
1. Very well formed and sturdy with distinct leader and no crotches that may interfere with
growth of leader. Trees with included bark in crotches shall be avoided.
2. Branching well spaced and uniformly distributed both vertically and around the
circumference to form a well balanced plant.
3. Scars shall be free of rot and not exceed ¼ the diameter of the wood beneath in
greatest dimension unless completely healed (except pruning scars).
4. Pruning scars clean cut leaving little or no protrusion from the trunk or branch.
5. Graft union completely healed.
6. No mechanical or pest damage.
7. No extreme succulence.
8. Evidence of adequate twig growth in the past 2-4 years, and well-formed buds.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 10
M. Foliage:
1. Densely supplied with healthy, vigorous leaves of normal size, shape, color and texture
(except shrubs moved bare-root or deciduous shrubs when dormant).
2. One half of the foliage should be growing on the lower 2/3 of the trunk.
3. No chlorosis.
4. No more than 5% of total foliage affected by pest or mechanical damage.
N. Root System:
1. Sturdily established and evenly distributed.
2. Container grown plants shall be well developed and hold the soil ball together when
removed from the container.
3. Container grown plants shall not be excessively rootbound (except if deliberately grown
rootbound to produce a dwarf plant).
2.2 PLANTING SOIL
A. Existing Topsoil
1. Existing topsoil from on-site source(s) may be used for planting soil, to the extent
available, if it meets the requirements of this Section for planting soil, or if approved by
the Architect.
B. Planting Soil
1. Planting soil shall be composed of a natural, fertile, friable soil typical of cultivated
topsoils of the locality, suitable for the germination of seeds and support of vegetative
growth, with additives, if required, to achieve particle distribution and organic content
specifications . Topsoil shall be taken from a well-drained, arable site, free of subsoil,
large stones, earth clods, sticks, stumps, clay lumps, roots, other objectionable,
extraneous matter or debris nor contain toxic substances. Planting soil shall have a pH
value between 5.5 and 6.5 and organic matter content of 5 to 10% of total dry weight.
2. Planting soil shall have the following mechanical analysis (see paragraph 1.6 for
particle sizes):
Approximate Particle Distribution
Gravel Less than 10%
Coarse to medium sand 55 – 65%
Fine to very fine sand 15 – 25%
Silt 10– 20%
Clay 15 – 20%
3. Minimum planting soil nutrient levels shall be: Nitrogen @ 5% average of organic
matter, Phosphorus @ .02 to .05% average of total soil content, Potassium @ 1.2%
average of total soil content.
4. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with planting soil test results, as specified in
Paragraph 1.6, before the start of planting operations. If planting soil does not fall within
the required particle distribution, organic content, or pH range, it shall be adjusted to
meet the specifications through the addition of sand, compost, limestone, or aluminum
sulfate to bring it within the specified limits.
5. Planting soil for ericaceous shrubs shall have a pH value range of 4.5 to 5.0.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 11
2.3 STRUCTURAL SOIL
A. Refer to Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
2.4 COMPOST
A. Compost shall be derived from organic wastes such as food and agricultural residues,
animal manures, mixed solid waste that meet all State Environmental Agency
requirements. The product shall be well composted, free of viable weed seeds and contain
material of a generally humus nature capable of sustaining growth of vegetation, with no
materials toxic to plant growth.
1. Compost shall have the following properties:
Parameters Range
pH 5.5 – 6.5
Moisture Content 35% - 55%
Soluble Salts £ 4.0 mmhos (dS)
C:N ratio 11 – 22:1
Particle Size < 1”
Organic Matter Content > 50%
Bulk Density < 1000 lbs./cubic yard
Foreign Matter < 1% (dry weight)
2. Compost generator shall also provide minimum available nitrogen and other macro and
micro nutrients to determine fertilizer requirements.
3. Compost shall be “AllGro”, distributed by AllGro, 4 Liberty Lane West, Hampton, NH
03842; “Agresoil”, distributed by Agresource, 100 Main Street, Amesbury, MA 01913;
or approved equal.
4. Guidelines for quantity of compost required to achieve suitable soil organic content in
soil mixes for ornamental horticultural planting shall be as recommended by the
compost manufacturer.
2.5 LIMESTONE
A. Limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone containing no less than 50% of total
carbonates, and 25% total magnesium with a neutralizing value of at least 100%. The
material shall be ground to such a fineness that 40% will pass through a No. 100 U.S.
Standard Sieve, and 98% will pass through a No. 20 U.S. Standard Sieve. The lime shall
be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in the
original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any
lime which becomes caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will be
rejected.
2.6 ALUMINUM SULFATE
A. Aluminum sulfate shall be unadulterated and shall be delivered in containers with the name
of the material and manufacturer and net weight of contents.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 12
2.7 WATER
A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation and shall be free from ingredients harmful to plant life.
2.8 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil
reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. Manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted
for approval.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-
insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil
reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.9 LIQUID BIOLOGICAL AMENDMENTS (In lieu of fertilizer)
A. Liquid Biological Amendments standards:
1. Desired Levels Of Organisms (Direct Microscopy)
• 10 to 150 or more µg active bacteria /ml.
• 150 µg to 300 or more µg total bacteria /ml compost tea 2 to 10 µg or more
active fungi /ml.
• 5 to 20 or more µg total fungal biomass/ml.
• 2,000 or more protozoa 1,000 or more flagellates 1,000 or more amoebae 10 –
30 ciliates.
• 2 to 10 BENEFICIAL nematodes/ ml (desired; typically lacking in tea) 1 - 5
bacterial-feeders up to 5 fungal-feeders 1 - 5 predatory nematodes (typically
lacking in tea) No root-feeding nematodes.
2. Minimum of 10% active bacteria and fungi
3. Protozoa Inoculums:
• 4,000 or more protozoa/ml. 2,500 or more flagellates, 1,500 or more amoebae
10-30 ciliates.
4. Nematode extractions:
• 24-32 beneficial nematodes/ml. 10-12 bacterial-feeders, 7-10 fungal feeders
and 7-10 predatory nematodes.
5. Mychorrizal Spores:
• 9 Species Endo (31,200 prop/lb).
• 11 Species Ecto (1.5 billion prop/lb)
2.10 SUPERPHOSPHATE
A. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as commonly used for
agricultural purposes, and containing not less than 20% available phosphoric acid. The
superphosphate shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers, each
bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any superphosphate which becomes
caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will be rejected.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 13
2.11 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be a 100% fine-shredded pine bark, of uniform size and free from rot, leaves,
twigs, debris, stones, or any material harmful to plant growth. Bark shall have been
shredded and stockpiled no less than six months and no more than two years before use.
No chunks 3 in. or more in size, and thicker than 1/4 in. shall be left on site.
2.12 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS
A. Wood Stakes: Straight, sound, rough sawn lumber 2 in. x 2 in., if square, or 2-1/2 in.
diameter, if round. Stakes shall be stained dark green. Wire for staking shall be 12 gauge
steel.
B. Wire for Guying: Galvanized steel 1 x 19 preformed 3/16 in. diameter. Thimbles and
nicopress clips shall be used for connections and splices.
C. Turnbuckles: ¼” x 73/4” Galvanized steel with a 21/2” in. lengthwise opening fitted with
eyebolts, as manufactured by Crown Bolt Inc., or approved equal.
D. Hose: High quality braided rubber hose, 3/4 in. diameter and suitable length, black in color.
E. Strapping: Arbortie, manufactured by DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC, 530
Washington Street, San Francisco, CA 94111Tel: 800 458 7668 or 415 781 9700; Fax: 800
277 7668 or 415 781 0191, or approved equal.
2.13 WRAPPING MATERIAL
A. Tree wrapping material shall be equal to the following:
1. Osnaburg Cloth, 4-7/8 in. wide, unbleached, pinked on both edges, manufactured by
The Carnegie Textile Co., 1734 Ivanhoe Road, P.O. Box 10276, Cleveland, OH 44110.
2. Tree wrap shall be secured to the trunk using bio-degradable tape suitable for nursery
use and expected to degrade in sunlight in less than two years after installation.
3. Option: Arbor Tape, supplied by American Arborist Supplies, 882 S Matlack Street, Unit
A, West Chester, PA 19382: Phone: 800-441-8381/610-430-1214; Fax: 610-430-8560;
E-mail Address: info@arborist.com, or approved equal.
2.14 ANTIDESICCANT
A. Antidessicant shall be an emulsion specifically manufactured for plant protection which
provides a protective film over plant surfaces which is permeable enough to permit
transpiration. Antidessicant shall be delivered in manufacturer's sealed containers and shall
contain manufacturer's printed instructions for use.
B. Antidessicant shall be equal to the following:
Product Manufacturer
Wilt-Pruf Wilt-Pruf Products, Inc.
P.O. Box 469
Essex, CT 06426
Winter Shield Rockland Corporation
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 14
2.15 FUNGICIDE
A. Fungicide shall be "Bordeaux Mix", manufactured by Hi-Yield, or approved equal.
2.16 INSECTICIDE
A. Insecticide shall be LESCO Horticultural Oil spray, #001150, for control of insects and
mites, manufactured by LESCO, Rocky River, OH 44116, or approved equal.
A. Insecticide shall be LESCO Sevin Brand SL, #019106, for broad spectrum control for most
trees, shrubs and ornamentals, manufactured by LESCO, Rocky River, OH 44116, or
approved equal.
2.17 POST-EMERGENT HERBICIDE
A. Herbicide shall be QuikPRO™ herbicide, formulated as a water-soluble granule and
packaged in easy-measure bottles, complete weed control, manufactured by Monsanto, or
approved equal.
2.18 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE
A. Herbicide shall be LESCO Ornamental Herbiicide 5G, pre-emergent grassy and selected
broadleaf weed control for ornamental plants, nursery stock and ground covers, #019515,
manufactured by LESCO, Rocky River, OH 44116, or approved equal.
2.19 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be manufactured by Border Concepts, Inc., P.O. Box 471185, Charlotte,
NC 28247, or approved equal. Steel edging shall be shop fabricated, 1/4 in. thick x 6 in.
deep, steel, primed and painted black. Edging shall be furnished in 16 or 20 ft. lengths.
1. Steel edging shall accommodate staking steel edging every 30 in. o.c.
2. Steel stakes shall be minimum 15 in. long, tapered.
3. Provide manufacturer's end stake and splicer unit if applicable.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard touch-up paint for in field touch-up of scratched or
2.20 TREE WATERING COMPONENTS
A. Trees Planted in Gravel and Lawn Areas: Tree watering stake shall be Deep Drip Tree
Watering Stake, manufactured by Green King, LLC – World Headquarters,162 W. Boxelder
Place – Suite #2, Chandler, AZ 85225;Tel: (480) 422-0251; Fax: (480) 503-2329; Email:
info@deepdrip.com, or approved equal.
1. Stakes shall be 14 in., 24 in., or 36 in. as recommended appropriate by manufacturer
for size of tree or shrub.
B. Quick coupling valves shall be 1 in. heavy duty brass construction one-piece body design,
with locking rubber cover. Furnish to the Owner the following additional items: three hollow
coupler keys and three swivel hose ell adapters.
1. For use on systems using non-potable water, locking rubber cover shall have molded-in
warnings of "DO NOT DRINK" in English and Spanish
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 15
C. Aeration Pipe: shall be smooth interior wall, perforated corrugated polyethylene tubing
conforming to ASTM F 667, equal to ADS N-12 Semi-Rigid Smooth Interior Corrugated
Polyethylene Piping, manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc., 4640 Trueman
Boulevard Hilliard, OH 43026; Tel. 1-800-821-6710; Fax: 1-614-658-0204, or approved
equal.
1. All adapters shall be provided as required by the manufacturer, and are required to
construct the proposed system.
2. Aeration grate shall be nickel bronze, manufactured by J.R. Smith Manufacturing Co.,
Montgomery, AL 36109, or approved equal.
3. Aeration grate shall be secured with vandal resistant fasteners.
D. Swing Pipe: shall be manufactured by Irritrol. or approved equal.
E Dripperline and Integral Dripperline Components: The dripperline shall be Techline CV or
Techline pressure compensating dripperline or 8mm Techlite non-pressure compensated
dripperline, manufactured by Netafim Irrigation, Inc., or approved equal.
1. Techline CV/Techline/8mm Techlite Fittings: All Techline CV/Techline/8mm Techlite
connections shall be made with approved Techline CV/Techline/8mm Techlite insert
fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Immediately before digging and following consultation with the Architect, spray all
evergreen or deciduous trees in full leaf with Transplant Biostimulant, applying an adequate
film over trunks, branches, twigs and foliage and apply Transplant Biostimulant to the root
ball area
B. Dig, and ball and burlap (B&B) plants with firm, natural balls of earth, of depth and diameter
not less than that recommended by the American Standard for Nursery stock. Plants
moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation. Remove all grass, weeds and accumulated soil resulting from nursery
cultivation from the top of the root ball prior to digging so that the original trunk flare shows
on top of the root ball.
C. Use only natural burlap and jute twine. Do not use synthetic fibers or wire to ball and
burlap root balls. Wire baskets will be acceptable if removed in accordance with these
specifications.
D. All plant material in transit or temporary stored shall be covered with burlap or similar
covering to keep plants from drying out.
E. Ship and store bare root material in refrigerated trucks and storage areas. Keep roots
moist and cool until time of planting.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 16
F. If the construction schedule requires trees over 3 ½” in caliper to be planted in the fall, that
are of a species considered to be difficult to transplant in the fall, these trees shall be root
pruned the previous spring in the nursery.
1. The Architect will determine tree species to be root pruned.
2. A trench shall be dug around the tree at the limit of the proposed root ball to a minimum
depth of 24” and back-filled.
3. A 3” high saucer shall be built around the tree outside the edge of the trench.
4. The tree shall be guyed or braced.
5. The tree shall be watered as necessary through the summer.
6. When the tree is dug in the fall, the digging shall be done using methods that preserve
the new root growth growing in the soft soil of the trench.
7. Root pruning, when required, shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner, except
for owner pre-purchased trees.
3.2 EXAMINATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Examine subgrade and rough grading before planting. Alert Architect to unacceptable
rough grading or subgrade conditions.
3.3 DECOMPACTION OF PLANTING AREAS
A. After subgrade levels have been reached and immediately prior to placing planting soils,
the entrie subgrade area shall be loosened to a minimum depth of 12 inches utilizing the
bucket of a backhoe or equivalent equipment.
B. Any subgrade areas which have become heavily compacted (defined as exceedig 86% -
88% compaction ASTM C698 Standard Proctor) including, but not limited to, temporary
parking areas, material stockpile areas, temporary roadways, construction areas, areas
shown on the plans, or areas identified by Architect shall be deep-scarified. Immediately
prior to placing soils, heavily compacted areas shall be loosened to a minimum depth of 36
inches using the teeth of a backhoe or other suitable equipment. Frequency of compaction
tests shall be one per 200 square feet.
C. Using a wide-track bulldozer size D-5 or smaller, compact the scarified subgrade to 86% -
88% compaction ASTM D698 Standard Proctor. Contractor shall provide shovel dug test
pits to the full depth of the mitigation, where located per the direction of the Architect, in
order for the Architect to review whether the work has been done as required. Backfill the
pits after the review(s).
D. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and that no further earthwork is
required to bring the subgrade to proper elevations. Provide a written report to Architect
indicating that subgrade has been placed to the required elevations, has been
decompacted according to the Contract Documents and is ready for inspection at least 3
days prior to placing planting soil. Perform no work of placing and spreading planting
mixes until elevations have been confirmed and written report has been accepted by the
Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 17
E. After the soils have been loosened and inspected, topsoil may be spread by using a wide
track bulldozer size D-5 or smaller or may be dumped and spreada with bucket of a
backhoe from the edge of the loosened area. No rubber-tired equipment or heavy
equipmenmt except for small bulldozer shall pass over the subsoils (subgrade) after
theyhave been loosened. If Contractor plans to utlilize such areas for any use of heavy
equipment, this should be carried out prior to beginning the process of loosening soils or
filling in that area, or it shall be rescarified to meet this specification requirement.
3.4 SOIL DRAINAGE/DETRIMENTAL SOILS
A. Test drainage of five planting pits in locations as directed by the Architect. Pits shall be
filled with water twice in succession. The time at which water is put into the pit for a second
filling shall be noted. Architect shall then be notified of the time it takes for pit to drain
completely. Planting operations shall not proceed until Architect has reviewed test drainage
results.
1. To test drainage, dig a whole about 1 foot deep. Fill with water and allow it to drain
completely. Immediately refill the pit and measure the depth of the water with a ruler.
15 minutes later, measure the drop in water in inches, and mulitply by 4 to calculate
how much water drains in an hour.
2. Less than 1 inch per hour is poor drainage, indicating the site may stay wet for
periods during the year. Plants that don't tolerate poor drainage will suffer. 1 to 6 inches
of drainage per hour is desirable. Soils that drain faster than 6 inches per hour have
excessive drainage, and you should consider choosing plants that tolerate dry
conditions and "droughty" soils.
B. The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions that are
considered detrimental to growth of plant material. Submit proposal and cost estimate for
correction of the conditions for Architect's approval before starting work.
3.5 LAYOUT OF PLANTING AREAS
A. Individual trees shall be located in the field as indicated on the Drawings for Architect’s
approval prior to planting. Contractor shall provide one foreman, one loader with operator
and two laborers to work with Architect in the field to determine the final location and
orientation of each tree prior to planting. It is anticipated that this process may take several
days to complete. Contractor shall plan to have this layout crew available to work with
Architect at a slow and deliberate pace in order to achieve the desired results.
B. Individual shrubs and perennials to be planted shall be laid out in plant beds by the
Contractor in ample time to allow inspection by the Architect.
3.6 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade and shall be cleared of stones greater
than 2 in., sticks, and other extraneous material.
3.7 PLANT PIT EXCAVATION
A. Planting pits for trees and shrubs shall be excavated to the depth and dimensions indicated
on the Drawings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 18
B. Excavation shall not begin until locations are approved by the Architect.
3.8 EDGING
A. Steel edging shall be installed at locations indicated on the Drawings. Where required,
edging shall be cut square and accurately to required length.
1. Steel edging shall be securely staked in required position. Stakes shall be driven every
30 in. o.c. along length of edging, .
2. Adjacent lengths of edging shall overlap 8 in.
3.9 SPREADING OF PLANTING SOIL
A. Planting soil shall be spread in lifts not greater than 12 inches and compacted to a density
between 82% and 86% Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density in accordance with ASTM
D698. The surface area of each lift, including the subgrade after it has been compressed by
a backhoe, shall be scarified by raking prior to placing the next lift.
B. Place and spread planting medium to a depth greater than required such that after
settlement, finished grade shall conform to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the
Drawings. Ensure proper drainage in an uninterrupted pattern free of hollows and pockets.
C. Remove stiff clods, lumps, brush, roots, stumps, litter and other foreign material and stones
over 1 inch diameter and legally dispose of off-site.
D. Surfaces shall be graded and smoothed, eliminating all sharp breaks by rounding, scraping
off bumps and ridges, and filling in holes and cuts.
3.10 PLACING STRUCTURAL SOIL
A. Refer to Section 329115, STRUCTURAL SOIL.
3.11 PLANTING
A. Tree, shrub, and groundcover beds shall be excavated to the depth and widths indicated on
the Drawings. If the planting pit for any tree is dug too deep, soil shall be added to bring it
to correct level, and the soil shall be thoroughly tamped. Walls of plant pits shall be dug so
that they are sloped as shown on the Drawings, and scarified. Do not excavate compacted
subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures.
B. Plants shall be set as indicated on Drawings. Plants shall be set so that the root flare is at,
or slightly above, finished grade. Plants located in poorly drained soils shall be set 2 to 4
inches above finished grade, gradually sloping between the top of the root ball and the
surrounding finished grade.
C. Plants shall be turned to the desired orientation when required by Architect.
D. Containerized plants shall be removed from container taking care not to damage roots.
The side of the root ball shall be scarified to prevent root-bound condition before positioning
in planting pit.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 19
E. Plants shall be positioned in center of planting pits, set plumb, and rigidly braced in position
until all planting soil has been tamped solidly around the balls.
F. Pits shall be backfilled with planting soil. Soil shall be worked carefully into voids and
pockets, tamping lightly every 6 in.
1. When pit is two-thirds full, plants shall be watered thoroughly, and water left to soak in
before proceeding.
2. At this time, ropes or strings on top of balls shall be cut and shall be pulled back. Burlap
or cloth wrapping shall be left intact around ball except that portions of wrap that are
exposed at top of ball shall be turned under and buried. Non-biodegradable ball
wrapping and support wire shall be totally removed from ball and planting pit.
3. Wire baskets shall be completely cut away from sides of root ball, and removed from
pit. Bottom of basket may remain.
4. Remove nursery plant identification tags.
G. Backfilling and tamping shall then be finished and a saucer formed around plant pits as
indicated on the Drawings.
H. Saucer shall be filled with water and water left to soak in. Saucer shall then be filled with
water again.
3.12 PERENNIALS
A. Set out and space plants 12 inches (300 mm) apart .
B. Perennials: Dig at least 18" deep, but 12" is adequate. Work 4-6" humus into the top layers
of soil by digging or tilling.
C Perennials: Check root ball after removing plant from its container. Encircling roots need to
be gently loosened from the tight mat of root-bound plants. If roots are very dense at
bottom of pot, slice off the bottom 1". If roots are seriously disturbed when planting, cut
back some foliage to reduce the water stress that will occur. Plant at the same soil level as
the plant was in its container.
D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of
recovery from transplanting shock.
3.13 TREE WATERING COMPONENTS
A. Trees Planted in Gravel and Lawn Areas: After tree has been placed in the hole, insert 2-3
Deep Drip Tree watering stakes vertically in the hole surrounding the tree before back-filling
with soil. Stake size shall be as recommended by manufacturer. The top of Deep Drip can
either be above ground level or below ground.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 20
B. Quick coupler valve shall be installed in a valve box with a locking lid.
1. Clearance between the highest part of the valve and the bottom of the valve box lid
shall be 2 in., minimum, and 4 in., maximum. The lid shall not rest on any part of the
valve.
2. Clearance between the top of the piping and the bottom of the valve box or the valve
box knock-outs shall be 2 in., minimum. Valve box shall not rest on piping.
3. Clearance between the valve body and the sides of the valve box shall be 3 in.,
minimum.
C. Pre-assemble quick coupler swing joint using brass nipples and fittings as recommende3d
by manufacturer. Use Teflon tape for all threaded joints.
D. Aeration pipe shall be installed to the lines, grades, and slopes indicated on the Drawings
in accordance with ASTM F 449.
1. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321.
E. Dripperline Installation:
1. Install all dripperline inside perforated aeration pipe as indicated on the Drawings.
Dripperlne shall be installed in areas designated, and shall have an average depth of 4
inches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All in-line emitter tubing shall be
installed on the high side of the plant material being watered to help insure dispersion
of the water. Use only Teflon tape on all threaded connections.
F. Aeration grates shall be installed at required elevation, and as indicated on the Drawings
and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3.14 LIQUID BIOLOGICAL AMENDMENTS (In lieu of fertilizer)
A. In all new planting areas, create injection sites made every 2 feet in a grid pattern. If the
viable root zone varies from this area, adjust the pattern accordingly. Each injection site
shall have a 2-inch wide diameter by 8-inch deep column that will act as leaching fields
during the planting process. After the liquid and aeration injection is completed, the
injection columns shall be backfilled with a custom blend of long-term granular food
sources that include 25% feathermeal, 75% humate plus corresponding mychorrizal
spores.
B. Early spring injection for both Ecto and Endo Mychorrizal plants shall consist of 50%
concentrated liquid Biological Amendment with 1/2 gallon per a 100 gallons of soluble kelp,
humic acid and molasses (or fish hydrolysate).
3.15 FERTILIZER APPLICATION
A. Fertilizer, if required, shall be applied at the rates recommended by soil testing results.
3.16 FUNGICIDE
A. Immediately after planting, all trunks of deciduous trees shall be sprayed with fungicide,
applied as directed by chemical manufacturer.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 21
3.17 PRE-EMERGENT-HERBICIDE
A. Immediately after planting, pre-emergent herbicide shall be applied to ornamental shrub
beds and and around base of trees, in strict accordance with chemical manufacturer's
printed instructions.
3.18 POST EMERGENT-HERBICIDE
A. Upon the appearance of weeds within planted areas, pre-emergent herbicide shall be
applied to ornamental shrub beds and and around base of trees, in strict accordance with
chemical manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.19 INSECTICIDE
A. Upon the appearance of insect problems, all trunks of deciduous trees shall be sprayed
with insecticide, applied as directed by chemical manufacturer.
3.20 WRAPPING
A. Trunks of deciduous trees shall be spiral wrapped to a minimum height of the first major
branch. Wrap shall be applied from base up so that layers overlap and shed water. Secure
at the top with flexible weatherproof tape, as specified.
3.21 STAKING AND GUYING
A. Each tree shall be staked or guyed immediately following planting. All evergreen trees and
deciduous trees over 4” caliper shall be guyed. Plants shall stand verticle and plumb after
staking or guying. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root
masses. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Stakes and guys shall be
installed as indicated on the Drawings.
3.22 MULCHING
A. Mulch shall be applied as follows (entire area listed shall be mulched):
Plant Type Mulch Area Mulch Depth, in.
Tree Saucer 3
Shrub Saucer or Bed 3
Ground Cover Bed 3
Mulch shall not be allowed to cover the base of trunks.
3.23 PRUNING
A. Each tree and shrub shall be pruned to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning
shall be done after delivery of plants and after plants have been inspected and approved by
the Architect. Pruning procedures shall be reviewed with Architect before proceeding.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
329300 - 22
B. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs.
No tree paint shall be used.
C. Dead wood, suckers, and broken, weak, interfering and badly bruised branches shall be
removed.
3.24 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until
Final Acceptance.
B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, fertilizing,
removal of dead material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of
guys, adjusting and replacing of damaged tree wrap material, resetting plants to proper
grades and upright position, and furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to
keep plantings free of insects and disease, and in a healthy growing condition.
C. Daily watering of 1 gal./caliper inch should be delivered to the root ball of each tree during
the first summer after planting. Continue through fall, reducing frequency. For trees larger
than 3 inch caliper, fill saucer with 6 – 8 gallons twice per week during hot, dry weather,
and once per week during cooler, wetter periods.
D. Planting areas shall be kept free of weeds, grass, and other undesired vegetative growth.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 1
SECTION 331000
WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install water pipe, valves,
hydrants, fittings, retaining devices, and thrust blocks. Contractor shall also purchase and provide all
fittings, tapping sleeves and valves as required to make proper extension of the water mains as
shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall provide necessary excavation, bedding, backfilling, paving
repair, and traffic control for the water main extension operations and all other work under this
Section. A new water system shall be constructed from the existing water line in Pleasant Street as
shown on the plans.
B. Contractor shall tap or shall cause to tap into the existing water line as shown on the plans and install
all tees, valves, and valve boxes as necessary. Contractor shall provide all necessary excavation,
bedding and backfilling, materials, and paving repair for these operations.
C. All work and materials shall be performed to the standards of the Northampton Department of Public
Works.
E. All work associated with the fire service line, including all fittings and valves, shall be installed by a
Massachusetts licensed sprinkler fitter in accordance with Massachusetts General Laws Chapter
146, Section 81-88.
F. Related Work:
1. Section 31 20 00 - General Earthwork
2. Section 32 10 00 - Paving and Surfacing
1.03 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates: None
1.04 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Prices: None.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.Refer to Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures for administrative and procedural requirements
for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data and installation in-
structions for each product specified, in accordance with the requirements of Division-1. Products in-
clude, but are not limited to, the following items:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 2
1. Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings
2. Type K copper pipe
3. Valves and valve boxes
4. Curb Stops and Service Boxes
5. Tapping Sleeves as required
C. Submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility to coordinate materials approval with the
Owner.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Shop Assembly – Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field work.
B. Qualification of Workmen
1. Provide at least one person thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, who
shall be completely familiar with the requirements of work described in this Section, and who
shall be present at all times during progress of the work of this Section and who shall direct
all work performed under this Section.
2. For all work and operation of the required equipment, use only personnel thoroughly trained
and experienced in the skills required.
1.07 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
State Building Code, Plumbing Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining
thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regula-
tions, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,
rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Owner’s Representative rules
otherwise.
B. The Contractor shall comply with the Northampton Department of Public Works’ instructions and
requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary inspections and fees by the
Northampton Department of Public Works shall be conducted or paid for at the sole expense of
the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for all necessary coordination and scheduling with
the Northampton Department of Public Works. Tapping procedures for new connections to exist-
ing mains shall be performed by the Contractor or the Northampton Department of Public Works if
required. Contractor shall provide all equipment, labor, tools, materials, and services for excava-
tion, bedding, backfilling, and pavement repair during construction.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be re-
quired to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper car-
rying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules
and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. All necessary inspections and fees by the Northampton Department of Public Works shall be
conducted or paid for at the sole expense of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for all
necessary coordination and scheduling with the Northampton Department of Public Works. Tap-
ping procedures for the new connections to existing mains shall be performed by the Contractor
or the Northampton Department of Public Works if required. Contractor shall provide all equip-
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 3
ment, labor, tools, materials, and services for excavation, bedding, backfilling, and pavement re-
pair during construction.
C. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,
in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or rea-
sonably implied in both.
B. Where there is a conflict between Plans and Specifications regarding quantities, the larger
amount shall be provided.
C. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall provide record drawings of all pipe locations and sizes, pipe depths, and all valve
locations in accordance with the provisions of Division-1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Copper pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM-B88, Type K, annealed copper tubing.
All fittings shall meet the requirements of the Northampton Department of Public Works. All pipe
and fittings from the water main to the backflow preventer shall be copper.
B. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151, Class 51.
C. Ductile iron fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110.
D. All pipe and fittings shall have a bituminous outside coating in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C151 and C110, respectively. All pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined and seal coated
in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104 except the lining thickness shall be twice that specified in
Section 4.8.1.
E. Cast iron or ductile iron fittings shall conform to ANSI Specification A21.10. Plugs and caps shall
conform to AWWA Specification C100, Class D.
F. Steel couplings (solid sleeves) for joining water mains shall be products as specified by the
Northampton Department of Public Works.
G. Joints for pipe and fittings shall be push-on or mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111
except where flanged joints are shown on the Drawings.
H. Flanged joints shall be 125 pound threaded flanges conforming to ANSI B16.1 for pipe and ANSI
A21.10 for fittings. The pipe flanges shall be flat faced and suitable for 250 psi working pressure.
Gaskets shall be 1/8" thick, full face and meeting the material requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111
for mechanical joint gaskets. Bolts and nuts shall be low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A307,
Grade B.
I. Restrained joints shall be suitable for 250 psi working pressure and fabricated of heavy section
ductile iron casting. Gaskets shall meet the material requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111 for me-
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 4
chanical joint gaskets. Bolts and nuts as required shall be low carbon steel conforming to ASTM
A307, Grade B.
2.02 STEEL COUPLINGS
A. Steel couplings shall be as specified by the Northampton Department of Public Works.
B. The contractor shall submit shop drawings for the Owner's approval on the types of couplings to be
employed in the work, prior to purchase.
2.03 THRUST BLOCKS AND JOINT RESTRAINTS
A. Mechanical joint retainer glands (bolted follower rings with set screws) shall be used as shown in the
details on the Drawings and in accordance with Table 1.
B. Mechanical joint retainer glands shall be as manufactured from ductile iron EBAA Iron, Inc.,
Eastland, TX or approved equal and shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
C. Mechanical joint retainer glands used shall be cast from 60-45-12 ductile iron and shall have bolt
circles, bolt holes, and "M" and "N" dimensions which will permit the glands to be used with standard
mechanical joint bells and standard length bolts, as per specification ANSI A21.11-1980 and AWWA
C111-80. The glands may be modified in configuration to permit the greatest holding power for the
set screws when installed with no more than 70 ft. lbs. of torque on the screws. An acceptable
torque wrench will be used to assure proper torque limits. All "T" bolts and set screws will be
tightened alternately 180 degrees apart and will be re-checked to assure final torque of 70 on the set
screws and AWWA torque limits on the "T" bolts. The set screws shall be made of "EBALLOY"
ductile iron. The screws shall have a Rockwell hardness of C40-45 converted from Brinnell and shall
have sufficient physical shock resistance to perform the task for which they are intended. Threads
shall be rolled, not cut. Retainer glands shall be as manufactured by Northampton Department of
Public Works approved vendor or equal.
D. The Contractor shall advise the Owner of the details of the retainer glands to be employed upon the
work by a written submittal, for approval.
E. Thrust blocks shall be installed in addition to mechanical joint retainer glands and shall be used at all
tees, bends, plugs/caps and hydrants in accordance with Table 2. Minimum bearing area shall be as
shown on Table 2. Felt roofing paper shall be placed over bolts, nuts or to prevent the removal of
joints.
F. Concrete for thrust blocks shall be no leaner than one part cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, and 5-1/2 parts
stone and shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Transit mix concrete may
be used subject to approval. Straps and anchors shall be cold-rolled steel, painted with bitumastic.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 5
TABLE 1: Joint Restraint
Minimum Length of Pipe in Feet to be Restrained on Either Sides of the Fitting
Diameter
(in)
Plug/Cap Bend
90-deg 45-deg 22.5-deg 11.25-deg
6 38 30 13 6 3
8 38 30 13 6 3
10 46 37 15 7 4
12 54 43 18 9 4
Tees Tee Run - 18 feet on either side of tee
Tee Branch - minimum of three full lengths of pipe
Hydrants Entire length of hydrant branch
In-line Valves 18 feet on either side of valve
TABLE 2: Thrust Blocks:
Diameter
(in)
Area of Bearing Face
of Thrust Block
(sf)
6 4
8 4
10 4
12 6
2.04 GATE VALVES
A. All gate valves shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C500. Valves up to 12" diameter
shall be designed for 200 psi working pressure and 400 psi hydrostatic test. The gate valves of up to
12" diameter shall be furnished for installation with the valve stem vertical, as designed.
B. Valves shall have mechanical joint by mechanical joint ends, mechanical joint flanged ends or
flanged by flanged ends as indicated on the Drawings. Valves shall be of the iron body, bronze
mounted, double disc, parallel seat, non-rising stem type fitted with "O-Ring" seals. The operating
nut shall be standard AWWA 2" square. M.J. valves shall have mechanical joints equal to ANSI
A21.11. All ferrous parts of the valve, except finished or bearing surfaces, shall be given two coats of
asphalt varnish. After the valves are assembled and tested, a third coat shall be applied on the
exterior.
C. Extension stems shall be provided of sufficient length so that the operating nuts are within 4 ft of
finished grade. The stuffing box construction shall be of the "O-Ring" type. Operating nuts shall be
2" square. Valves shall have gearing if required to conform to Northampton standards. Large
diameter valves shall have small diameter bypass valves if directed by the Owner.
2.05 VALVE BOXES
A. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves and shall be cast iron, heavy pattern, adjustable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 6
type, with cast iron cover. The upper section shall have a bottom flange of sufficient bearing area to
prevent settling. The bottom section shall enclose the valve stuffing box and operating nut. Boxes
shall be of lengths adapted to 5' pipe cover or more and have a minimum of 6" overlap in the most
extended position. Covers shall have the word "WATER" cast in the top.
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the
work of this Section shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify
that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in accordance with the original design, all pertinent
codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations, regardless of
character of materials and obstructions encountered.
B. Unauthorized Excavation: Materials removed beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions
shall be corrected as noted below at Contractor's expense:
1. Under footings: Backfill to indicated subgrade elevation using lean concrete or gravel borrow.
2. Elsewhere: Backfill and compact with materials as specified. Over excavation at trenches,
manholes, and structures shall be backfilled with Granular Fill.
C. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Geotechnical Engineer for
inspection. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, excavate and replace as recommended
by the Geotechnical Engineer and directed by the Owner. Removal of unsuitable material and its
replacement shall be paid on basis of unit prices established in the Agreement.
D. When changes are authorized from the elevations and dimensions indicated, resulting in more
earthwork than originally indicated, the Contractor shall be paid for additional volume of earthwork on
basis of unit prices established in the Agreement. When authorized changes result in a decreased
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 7
volume, the Contractor shall allow a credit for the deleted volume on basis of unit prices established
in the Agreement.
E. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with Subsurface Investigation Report,
local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible
because of space restrictions or instability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of
excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
F. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FIRE SERVICE LINE
A. The fire service line as indicated on the drawings shall be installed by a Massachusetts licensed
sprinkler fitter in accordance with Massachusetts General Laws Chapter 146, Section 81-88. For the
purposes of this requirement, the fire service line shall include the tee fitting specific to the fire
service, the fire service valve, the fire service pipe from the valve to a point 10 feet outside the
building, and all associated joints, couplings, joint restraints and other materials.
3.04 LAYING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe, lining or
coatings. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying,
and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the pipe linings or
coatings shall be repaired as directed by the Owner. Handling and laying of pipe and fittings shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and as specified herein.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used
in the work, and when laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. Ductile iron pipe and
fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Standard Specification C600
except as otherwise provided herein. A firm, even bearing throughout the length of the pipe shall be
constructed by hand tamping selected material at the sides of the pipe up to 1' over the top of the
pipe. Blocking will not be permitted. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid, it shall
be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor, at his own
expense.
C. All pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When laying is not in progress, including lunchtime,
the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plugs or other approved means. Good
alignment shall be preserved in laying. The deflection at joints shall not exceed that recommended
by manufacturer. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided, if required,
for crossing utilities which may be encountered upon opening the trench. Solid sleeves shall be used
only where approved by the Owner.
D. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right
angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be joined with a bell shall be beveled to conform to
the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be undamaged.
E. The Contractor shall have on hand at the start of the job, two 1/32 bends, two 1/16 bends and two
1/8 bends for each size of pipe. These shall be used as job conditions require.
F. Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed at fittings and other locations as directed by the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 8
Minimum bearing area shall be as shown on Table 3 herein. Joints shall be protected by felt roofing
paper prior to placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed against undisturbed material, and shall not
cover joints, bolts or nuts, or interfere with the removal of any joint. Wooden side forms or sand bags
shall be provided for thrust blocks.
G. All fitting shall be properly supported with additional blocking if necessary to maintain the alignment
of adjoining pipe.
3.05 PUSH-ON JOINTS
A. Push-on joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipe shall be laid
with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the
pipe, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The plain end of the pipe to be laid shall then be
aligned and inserted in the bell of the pipe to which it is to be joined, and pushed home with a jack or
by other means. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the rubber
gasket is correctly located.
3.06 MECHANICAL JOINTS
A. Mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111 and the
manufacturer's instructions. Thoroughly clean and lubricate the joint surfaces and rubber gasket with
soapy water before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified torques. Under no conditions
shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench be used to secure greater
leverage.
3.07 FLANGED JOINTS
A. Flanged joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. Extreme care shall be exercised to
insure that there is no restraint on opposite ends of pipe or fitting which will prevent uniform gasket
compression, cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to flanges or flanged fittings.
Adjoining push-on joints shall not be assembled until flanged joints have been tightened. Bolts shall
be tightened alternately and evenly. After installation apply a bitumastic coating to bolts and nuts.
3.08 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Restrained joints shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. The joint assembles shall be made
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.09 STEEL COUPLINGS
A. Steel coupling joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
exterior of the pipe spigots shall be cleaned as specified under Section 3.03 above.
3.10 GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves and boxes shall be set with the operating stem vertically aligned in the center of the
valve box. Valves shall be set on a firm foundation and supported by tamping selected excavated
material under and at the sides of the valve. Valves shall be tightly closed before being placed in line
and shall remain so until the joints on each side are completely made.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 9
3.11 VALVE BOXES
A. Valve boxes shall be installed vertically, centered over the operating nut, and the elevation of the tap
shall be adjusted to conform with the finished surface of roadway or other surfaces at the completion
of the contract. Valve boxes shall be carefully placed to insure the free and proper operation of the
valves, and shall be securely held during backfilling. Concrete collars shall be constructed around
the valve boxes.
3.12 LOCATING INSTALLED WATER SUPPLY COMPONENTS
A. Prior to backfilling, the Contractor shall obtain detailed measurements and swing ties for the installed
components.
3.13 BACKFILLING FOR WATER PIPES AND APPURTENANCES
A. As soon as practicable after pipes have been laid, the trenches shall be backfilled to a level at least
six (6) inches above the top of the pipe with the materials indicated on the Drawings formed in
successive layers not more than six (6) inches in depth, uniformly distributed and thoroughly
compacted. Special care shall be taken to consolidate the gravel or sand under the pipe. All
backfilling shall be done in a manner which will prevent subsequent settling and damage to the pipe.
B. Above this level, all backfill materials shall be Gravel Fill and conform to the gradation noted in
Section 31 00 00 of these Specifications. No frozen materials shall be used for backfill and backfill
shall not be placed on material frozen to a depth of over three (3) inches. If during the backfilling
operation the top layer becomes frozen to a depth of over three (3) inches, the frozen materials shall
be removed before a succeeding layer of backfill is placed. Frozen excavated material which will be
suitable when dry shall be allowed to thaw and dry before being used for backfill. Stumps, rubbish,
sod, clay, silt, large stones, and other unsuitable materials will not be used for backfill.
C. All backfilling shall be formed in successive layers not more than six (6) inches in depth, uniformly
distributed and thoroughly compacted in accordance with Section 31 00 00. Backfill material shall be
moist prior to and during compaction.
D. No load greater than eight (8) tons shall be moved over any pipe or structure until a fully compacted
backfill of at least two (2) feet has been placed over the top of the pipe or structure. Compliance with
this requirement is not to be construed as relieving the Contractor of any responsibility concerning
damage to the pipe.
3.14 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. As pipeline sections are completed, they shall be given a pressure and leakage test in sections of
approved length. The Contractor shall furnish all water, gauges, etc. necessary for this testing. All
testing shall be observed by a representative of the Owner.
B. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for carrying out a pressure test and leakage test on the
pipelines. The procedures and method for carrying out the pressure and leakage tests shall be
approved by the Owner.
C. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, etc., as required in conjunction with testing a
portion of the pipe between valves. Furnish a test pump, gauges, and any other equipment required
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 10
in conjunction with carrying out the hydrostatic tests.
D. All pipelines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 50% above the normal operating
pressure and this pressure maintained for at least one hour. The leakage test shall be conducted at
the maximum operating pressure as determined by the Owner, and this pressure shall be maintained
for at least two hours during the test. Hydrant branch gate valves shall remain open during this test.
The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with the Specifications for
Installation of Cast Iron Water Mains, AWWA C600.
E. Sections of pipe failing to pass the pressure or leakage test shall be repaired by the Contractor and
subject to additional tests until meeting the test requirements.
3.15 DISINFECTION AND FLUSHING
A. After a section of main or service line has been hydrostatically tested and found acceptable, it shall
be thoroughly flushed by the Contractor. Flushing of the main is to be followed by sterilization in
accordance with the AWWA Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains (AWWA C601) and in
accordance with the requirements of the Northampton Department of Public Works. All water lines
installed under this Section shall be disinfected and flushed, including branches for drinking
fountains and yard hydrants.
B. The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be determined by the Owner in the field.
Taps for chlorination and sampling shall be installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
uncover and backfill the taps as required.
C. The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the
lines. A chlorine solution shall be injected into the water main to provide a minimum of 50 ppm Free
Chlorine Residual throughout the pipe. This solution shall be permitted to remain in the main for a
minimum of 24 hours. At the end of this period the water in the main should contain at least 24 ppm
Residual Chlorine. Test results of Chlorine residuals after 24 hours shall be submitted to the
Northampton Department of Public Works.
D. Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities,
and replaced with water from the distribution system. All treated water flushed from the lines shall
be disposed of by discharging to the nearest sanitary sewer or by other approved means. No
discharge to any storm sewer or natural water course will be allowed. Bacteriological sampling and
analysis of the replacement water shall then be made by the Northampton Department of Public
Works in full accordance with AWWA specification C601. The Contractor will be required to
rechlorinate, if necessary, and the line shall not be placed in service until the requirements of the
State Public Health Department are met.
E. Special disinfecting procedures shall be used in connections to existing mains, and where the
method outlined above is not practical.
F. All disinfection work shall take place under the supervision of a representative of the Northampton
Department of Public Works.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. All valve boxes shall be located flush with the pavement surface within plus 0.05 or minus 0.05 feet.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 11
3.17 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Owner, remove reconstruct, and/or reinstall all components of the site water
system which do not meet the requirements of this Section.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, leave all components of the water system completely
disinfected and approved by the Northampton Department of Public Works to enter into service.
Restore all surfaces to the condition existing prior to the start of the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 1
SECTION 333000
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications section, apply to work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install sanitary
sewer pipe and manholes, to make new sewer connections to the new and existing sew-
er system, and to adjust sewer manholes to grade as required by the work.
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connection of the proposed sewer sys-
tem to the existing sewer line in the adjacent street and with meeting Northampton De-
partment of Public Works (NDPW) standards for all work and materials.
Contractor is responsible for coordinating all installation with NDPW and providing testing
required by NDPW for all system components, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing required notice to NDPW for witnessing
installations, testing, etc. Contractor is also responsible for all testing and permit fees and
applications.
B.Related Work
1. General Earthwork - Section 31 00 00
1.03 ALTERNATES
A.Alternates: None
1.04 UNIT PRICES
A.Unit Prices: None
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data and in-
stallation instructions for each product specified, in accordance with the requirements of
Division-1. Products include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1.PVC Sewer Pipe
2.Precast sanitary manholes and grease trap
3.Cleanouts
4.Flexible Connectors
5.Flexible Butyl Resin Gaskets
6.All Manhole Covers
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 2
1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.Exact location of all existing utilities shall be determined by the Contractor in the field.
Contractor's attention is called to the presence of many underground utilities within the
work area.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Workmen
1.Provide at least one person thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills
required, who is completely familiar with the requirements of work described in this
Section, and who shall be present at all times during progress of the work of this
Section and who shall direct all work performed under this Section.
2.For all work and for operation of the required equipment, use only personnel
thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required.
1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING
A.Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of this and all other
trades.
B.Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS
A.Contractor shall provide record drawings of all sanitary sewer structure locations, pipe
sizes and inverts in accordance with the provisions of Division-1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SANITARY SEWER PIPE
A.Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe for sanitary sewers shall conform to the requirements for
ASTM D 3034 for SDR 35 pipe. PVC resin compound shall conform to ASTM D 1784.
Gasketed joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. Couplings and Fittings
shall be the same material as the pipe and shall have bell and/or spigot configurations
compatible with that of the pipe and other pipe types to be joined.
2.02 PRECAST SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES
A.Precast Concrete: Precast concrete manholes shall be supplied to the dimensions shown
on the Drawings and shall be manufactured of air-entrained 4,500 psi cement concrete true
to line, plane and dimensions. Precast structures shall be constructed in accordance with
ASTM C478. All precast units shall be subject to inspection by the Architect and any units
showing defects or damages before the completion of the project shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The precast units shall be certified by the
manufacturer to meet the requirements of Section M4.02.14 of the Massachusetts
Department of Public Works Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. Precast
units shall be bituminous coated on all exterior surfaces.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 3
B.Manhole Cover: The manhole cover shall be an iron frame and cover conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO-M105, Class No. 30 unless otherwise specified. All frame and
cover requirements and manufacturer's model numbers shall be as specified by the
Northampton Department of Public Works. Substitutions will be allowed only after a clear
showing that the proposed product is of at least equal or greater strength and quality.
Manhole cover shall be labeled “SEWER” in accordance with NDPW Standards.
C.Steel Castings: Cast steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 27, Grade op-
tional, and shall be thoroughly annealed.
D.Structural Steel: Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36 or A 283,
Grade B or better.
1. E. Ladder Rungs: Ladder rungs (manhole steps) shall conform to AASHTO M199
(ASTM C 478, paragraph 11) and shall be copolymer polypropylene plastic with 1/2" Ø
Grade 60 steel reinforcement.
2.03 FLEXIBLE BUTYL RESIN GASKETS
A.Flexible butyl resin gaskets shall be provided for all new structures. Gaskets shall con-
form to the provisions of AASHTO M-198 and shall be manufacturer's recommended siz-
es.
2.04 MASONRY MATERIALS
A.Manhole Brick: ANSI/ASTM C 32, Grade MS
B.Masonry Mortar: ANSI/ASTM C 270, Type M.
1.For minor amounts of mortar, packaged materials complying with ANSI/ASTM C
387, Type M, will be acceptable.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Cleanouts shall be installed as required by NDPW, including Wye connections, sweep,
box frame and lid, and all other appurtenances, as per NDPW Standards. Contractor
shall coordinate with NDPW to determine required locations.
B. Flexible pipe-to-manhole connectors meeting ASTM C923 shall be used at all manhole
penetrations. Resilient rubber material shall conform to ASTM C923. Stainless Steel
shall be 300 series conforming to ASTM C923, ASTM A666, and A240.
C. Flexible pipe connectors shall provide a positive seal against infiltration and exfiltration
and shall be leakproof, rootproof, and resistant to chemicals, ultraviolet rays, fungus
growth, and normal sewer gases. Flexible pipe connectors shall conform to ASTM D
5926 and C 1173 and applicable portions of ASTM C 443, C 425, C 564 and D 1869.
D. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the work of this Section shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the
approval of the Architect.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1.Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2.Verify that sanitary sewers may be installed in accordance with the original design,
all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced
standards.
B. Discrepancies
1.In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2.Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A.Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations,
regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
B.Unauthorized Excavation: Materials removed beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions shall be corrected as noted below at Contractor's expense:
1.Under footings: Backfill to indicated subgrade elevation using lean concrete or
gravel borrow.
2.Elsewhere: Backfill and compact with materials as specified. Over excavation at
trenches, manholes, and structures shall be backfilled with Granular Fill.
C.When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Geotechnical Engi-
neer for inspection. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, excavate and re-
place as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer and directed by the Architect.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement shall be paid on basis of unit prices
established in the Agreement.
D.When changes are authorized from the elevations and dimensions indicated, resulting in
more earthwork than originally indicated, the Contractor shall be paid for additional volume
of earthwork on basis of unit prices established in the Agreement. When authorized
changes result in a decreased volume, the Contractor shall allow a credit for the deleted
volume on basis of unit prices established in the Agreement.
E.Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with pertinent subsurface
investigation reports, local codes, and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace
where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or instability of material
excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
F.Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 5
3.03 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES AND GREASE TRAP
A.New Pipe Connections: All new pipe connections to the sanitary sewer manholes and
the grease trap shall be made through a precut opening in the structure and shall utilize
flexible pipe-to-manhole connectors for maximum water tightness. Cut ends of
connection passing through structure wall to conform to the shape of and be flush with
the inside wall, and provide concrete and brick trough for smooth flow transition to outlet
conduit. Encase entering connection in 6" of concrete for a minimum length of 12" to
provide additional support from connection to undisturbed ground. Connection shall be in
compliance with NDPW Standards and shall be witnessed by NDPW.
1.Provide concrete which shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi.
2.Use an epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete
and conduit materials.
B.Existing Pipe Connections: Shall be finished in a manner which will not impede or introduce
turbulence to the flow of sewage within the manhole.
C.Adjust manhole structures to grade as required by the work, using appropriate brick and
mortar techniques or by reuse of existing structure components.
D.Frame castings shall be set in full mortar bed resting directly on the manhole structure.
Grade adjustment using masonry units will not be permitted.
E.Inlet pipe shall extend through the structure wall for a sufficient distance beyond the outside
wall to allow for satisfactory connections. The concrete shall be constructed neatly around
the pipe to prevent leakage into or out of the manhole. The structure shall not be backfilled
until all mortar has completely set.
F.Construct smooth masonry trough from all inlets to outlet, with shelves pitching to trough at
one inch per foot.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A.Bedding Pipes: The bedding for the pipe shall be as shown on the Drawings, with recesses
excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm
bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. The haunching shall be placed
as shown on the Drawings, firmly compacted to the specified density.
B.Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the
directions of the Manufacturer.
C.Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At
minimum, envelop all PVC pipe in 6 inches of 3/4"-1-1/2” crushed stone that meets the
Massachusetts Highway Standards (Standards) M2.01.1. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and
debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
D.Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other types of pipe with standard
manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E.Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 6
3.05 BACKFILLING FOR SEWER STRUCTURES AND PIPE
A.Gravel Fill in accordance with Standards M1.03.0, Type C shall be used for backfill under,
over, or around the structures and pipes, except for special materials (i.e., pipe bedding,
haunching, and initial backfill) as specified on the Drawings. No frozen materials shall be
used for backfill and backfill shall not be placed on material frozen to a depth of over three
inches. If during the backfilling operation, the top layer becomes frozen to a depth of over
three inches, the frozen materials shall be removed before a succeeding layer of backfill is
placed. Frozen excavated material which will be suitable when dry shall be allowed to thaw
and dry before being used for backfill. No additional compensation will be made for
excavating, storing and rehandling of frozen materials. Stumps, rubbish, sod and other
unsuitable materials shall not be used for backfill.
B.All backfilling shall be formed in successive layers not more than 6 inches in depth, uniformly
distributed and thoroughly compacted. Backfill material shall be moist prior to and during
compaction.
C.No load greater than 8 tons shall be moved over any pipe or structure until a fully compacted
backfill of at least 2 feet has been placed over the top of the pipe or structure. Compliance
with this requirement is not to be construed as relieving the Contractor of any responsibility
concerning damage to the pipe.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Finish all surfaces and inverts to the following tolerances:
1.Manhole Covers: Plus 0.05 feet to minus 0.05 feet from elevation shown on the
Drawings.
2.Pipe Line Invert Elevations: Plus 0.05 feet to minus 0.05 feet from elevation shown
on the Drawings.
3.07 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Architect, remove, reconstruct, and/or reinstall all components of the
site sanitary sewer system which do not meet the requirements of this Section.
3.08 CLEANING UP
A.Upon completion of the work of this Section, leave all components of the sewer system
completely free from silt, debris and obstruction. Restore all surfaces to the condition
existing prior to the start of the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 1
SECTION 334000
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, and shall perform all opera-
tions required to complete the work shown on the drawings, as directed by the Owner, as herein
specified, and as evidently required to properly complete the work.
B. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following as outlined in these specifications or shown
on the Contract Documents:
1. Furnish and install drainage pipes as shown on the plans.
2. Furnish and install catch basins, drain manholes, and other related structures as shown on
the plans.
3. Furnish and install all underdrains and cleanouts to grade.
4. Furnish and install all infiltration systems as shown on the plans.
5. Other work as shown and detailed on the plans.
C. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
designated Sections:
1. Section 31 20 00 - General Earthwork
2. Section 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
3. Section 32 90 00 - Landscape Work
1.03 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates: None
1.04 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Prices: None
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures for administrative and procedural requirements
for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data and installation
instructions for each product specified, in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 2
CONDITIONS. Products include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and fittings
2. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and fittings
3. Drainage Structures
4. Drainage Structure frame, grates and covers
5. All other items specified in this Section
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Perform storm drainage work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Special Requirements:
1. Protection: Comply with all applicable regulations and safety orders in effect at the place of
construction. Protect this and adjacent properties from all damage due to this operation.
Protect open excavations, trenches, etc., with fences, covers, or railings as required to main-
tain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
2. Responsibility: The Contractor is responsible for the finished condition of his work. Notify the
Owner promptly in writing if any conditions exist which are contrary to requirements. Restore,
without extra cost to the Owner, street pavements, walks, curbs, gutters, trees, etc., that may
be damaged in the performance of work under this section, in a manner prescribed by author-
ities having jurisdiction.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. All work and materials shall also be in full accordance with the latest rules, regulations, and
safety orders of the State's Division of Industrial Safety, OSHA, A.N.S.I. - A10.1 Safety Code
for Building Construction, and all other state, county, city, municipality, and utility laws rules,
and regulations. Nothing in these Plans and Specifications shall be construed to permit work
not conforming to the above.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Exact location and dimensions of all existing utilities shall be determined by the Contractor in the
field prior to commencing construction and ordering structures.
1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of this and all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements neces-
sary to the approval of the Owner’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Other contractors, as well as various utility companies, may also be working on the site. The Con-
tractor must coordinate his activities with all such parties so as to prevent conflicts in construction
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 3
operations.
B. The final location and elevation of all existing utilities must be verified by the Contractor prior to
construction.
C. Contractor shall coordinate the relocation of all gas, water, electric, telephone, and cable tv utili-
ties required as a result of this project.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAIN PIPE
A. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) STORM DRAIN PIPE
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes for storm drain shall conform to the requirements for ASTM D
3034 for SDR 35 pipe. PVC resin compound shall conform to ASTM D 1784. Gasketed
joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. Couplings and fittings shall be the
same material as the pipe and shall have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with
that of the pipe and other pipe types to be joined.
2. Pipe shall be joined with a watertight sleeve and gasket system provided by the pipe manu-
facturer.
3. Pipe shall be perforated by the manufacturer, where perforated pipe is indicated on the draw-
ings.
B. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) STORM DRAIN PIPE
1. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes for storm drain shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D 3350 for Polyethylene plastic pipe and fitting materials. Fittings shall be the same
material as the pipe and shall have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that for
the pipe. All HDPE storm drain pipe shall be corrugated with smooth interior in accordance
with AASHTO M-294 for corrugated polyethylene pipe, 12” to 36” diameter.
2. Pipe shall be joined with a watertight sleeve and gasket system provided by the pipe manu-
facturer.
3. Pipe shall be perforated by the manufacturer, where perforated pipe is indicated on the draw-
ings.
C. DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) FOR STORM DRAIN
1. Ductile iron pipe (DIP) and ductile iron fittings shall conform to the requirements of M5.05.3 of
the Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges.
2.02 INLET GRATES
A. Inlet grates shall be Neenah Foundry combination inlet frame, grate, and curb box model R-3165
with grate Type A, or approved equal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 4
2.03 AREA DRAINS
A. Area drains shall consist of drain basins fabricated from PVC materials including integral gasket-
ed fittings for incoming and outgoing pipe connections. Fabricated area drains shall have a load
rating of H-20 when installed per manufacturer’s requirements. Area drains shall have ductile
iron frames and locking slotted grates rated at H-20 with a minimum diameter of eighteen inches.
2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN STRUCTURES
A. Precast Concrete: Precast concrete storm drain manholes and catch basins shall be supplied to
the dimensions shown on the drawings and shall be manufactured of air-entrained 5000 psi ce-
ment concrete true to line, plane and dimensions. Precast structures shall be constructed in ac-
cordance with ASTM C 478. All precast units shall be subject to inspection by the Owner’s Rep-
resentative and any units showing defects or damages before the completion of the project shall
be removed and replaced at the expense of the contractor. The precast units shall be certified by
the manufacturer to meet the requirements of Subsection M4.02.14 of the Massachusetts High-
way Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. Bottom slab may be mono-
lithically molded with walls or, at Contractor's option, cast-in-place concrete bases as detailed
shall conform to Division 3. Joints between sections shall be flexible, watertight rubber gaskets,
or other approved jointing compound. Piping shall be secured in openings using non-shrink
grout.
B. Masonry Units:
1. Brick shall conform to "Sewer Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)", ASTM C32, Grade MS; or
"Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)", ASTM C62, Grade SW.
2. Concrete Block shall be solid block and shall conform to the "Specifications for Concrete Ma-
sonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes,” ASTM C139.
3. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M. The mortar shall be composed of Portland
Cement hydrated lime, and sand, in the proportions of 1 part cement to 1/4 part hydrated lime
to 3 1/2 parts sand (by volume).
4. Cement shall be Type I or II Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150.
5. Hydrated lime shall be Type S, conforming to ASTM D207.
6. Sand for masonry Mortar shall conform to ASTM C144.
C. Frame and grate: Shall be an iron frame and slotted cover conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO-M105, Class No. 30 unless otherwise specified, of a style to be approved by the Owner.
Finish with one coat of coal tar epoxy paint.
D. Steel Castings: Cast Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A27, Grade optional, and
shall be thoroughly annealed.
E. Iron Castings: Heavy-duty, cast-iron, conforming to ASTM A48.
1. Ladder Rungs: Ladder rungs (manhole steps) shall conform to AASHTO M199 (ASTM C
478, paragraph 11) and shall be copolymer polypropylene plastic with 1/2" diameter Grade 60
steel reinforcement.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 5
2.05 SUBSURFACE INFILTRATION SYSTEMS
A GENERAL: Infiltration systems are designed for underground stormwater management.
The chambers may be used for retention, recharging, detention or controlling the flow of
on-site stormwater runoff.
B SYSTEM PARAMETERS
1. The system shall be comprised of perforated high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe meetingthe following criteria:
a. All pipes shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations
b. 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) shall meet ASTM F2648
c. Manning’s “n: value for use in design shall be 0.012
d. Pipe perforations shall conform to ASTM F2306
2. Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting ASTM F2648. The joint shall be soil-tight and gaskets, when applicable, shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gasketsshall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable wrap to ensure thegasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used on thegasket and bell during assembly.
3. Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connection shall utilize a spun-on orwelded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance requirementsof ASTM F2306.
4. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer recommended instal-lation guidelines.
5. Cleanouts shall be Neenah R-7506 series or equal.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Manhole Brick: ANSI/ASTM C 32, Grade MS
B. Masonry Mortar: ANSI/ASTM C 270, Type M. For minor amounts of mortar, packaged materials
complying with ANSI/ASTM C 387, Type M, shall be acceptable.
2.07 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of
the work of this Section shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
Representative.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and veri-
fy that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that storm drains may be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, all per-
tinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 6
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. In general, all storm drainage pipe shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. The sequence
of installation shall be as follows:
1. Excavate trench to the required line, grade, and width.
2. Install Bedding for Pipes: The bedding for the pipe shall consist of crushed stone and shall
be shaped to conform relatively closely to the lower 10 % of the pipe.
3. Install pipe: All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing through-
out each length.
4. Backfill the pipe trench with crushed stone to a depth of at least six inches over the top of the
pipe.
5. Continue to backfill pipe trench with suitable backfill material.
B. Pipe Joints: Pipe joints shall be made using appropriate manufactured couplings and fittings, and
shall be installed so that the continuity of the invert is maintained throughout the sections of pipe.
C. Cleaning Piping: Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progress-
es. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops.
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between different types of pipe with standard manufactured adapters
and fittings.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF STORM DRAIN STRUCTURES
A. Storm drain structures shall be built to the lines, grades, dimensions and design shown on the
plans and in accordance with these specifications. Construction shall include necessary frames,
covers, gas/oil hoods, and other accessories as shown on the plans or otherwise required.
B. All structures shall be placed on a 12” thick foundation of compacted crushed stone.
C. The joints between precast sections shall be provided with an elastic gasket as specified in this
section.
D. Frame castings shall be set in full mortar beds. Set frame and lid of manholes and catch basins
at the elevations shown on the Drawings within the acceptable tolerances herein defined.
E. Inlet and outlet pipes shall extend through the walls for a sufficient distance beyond the outside
walls to allow for satisfactory connections. The pipe openings shall be equipped with an elastic
gasket to prevent leakage into or out of the structure.
F. No structure shall be backfilled until all mortar around pipe openings has completely set.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA August 3, 2016
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 7
G. Alteration of the adjacent finish grade to compensate for improperly constructed area drain tops
will not be permitted.
H Installation of area drains shall be per manufacturer’s requirements.
3.04 BACKFILLING FOR PIPES AND STRUCTURES
A. All suitable materials obtained from the excavation for the structures, pipes and culverts shall be
used for backfill under, over, or around the structures, pipes, and culverts. No frozen materials
shall be used for backfill and backfill shall not be placed on frozen material. If during the backfill-
ing operation the top layer becomes frozen, the frozen materials shall be removed before a suc-
ceeding layer of backfill is placed. Frozen excavated material which will be suitable when dry
shall be allowed to thaw and dry before being used for backfill. No additional compensation will
be made for excavating, storing and rehandling of frozen materials. Stumps, rubbish, sod and
other unsuitable materials will not be used for backfill.
B. All backfilling shall consist of suitable material formed in successive layers not more than 6 inches
in depth, uniformly distributed and thoroughly compacted. When suitable backfilling materials
cannot be obtained from excavation, the material shall consist of satisfactory borrow.
C. No load greater than 8 tons shall be moved over any pipe or structure until a fully compacted
backfill of at least 2 feet has been placed over the top of the pipe or structure. Compliance with
this requirement is not to be construed as relieving the Contractor of any responsibility concerning
damage to the pipe.
D. Backfill material to a point 2 feet over a pipe shall contain no stones larger than 3 inches in great-
est dimension. Backfill below the haunches of pipes shall be placed in 6 inch layers and com-
pacted simultaneously on both sides of the pipe. Backfill material shall be moist prior to and dur-
ing compaction.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Finish all surfaces and inverts to the following tolerances:
1. Frames, Covers, and Grates: Plus 0.05 feet to minus 0.05 feet from elevation shown on the
Drawings.
2. Pipe Line Invert Elevations: Plus 0.05 feet to minus 0.05 feet from elevation shown on the
Drawings.
3.07 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Owner, remove, reconstruct, and/or reinstall all components of the drainage
systems which do not meet the requirements of this Section.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, leave all components of the drainage and sewerage
systems completely cleaned of silt, debris and other obstructions; free of water or other liquids,
and approved to enter into service. Restore all surfaces to the condition existing prior to the start
of the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
GZA Engineers and
GeoEnvironmental, Inc. Scientists
An Equal Opportunity Employer M/F/V/H
655 Winding Brook Drive
Suite 402
Glastonbury, Connecticut
06033
860-286-8900 (phone)
860-652-8590 (fax)
www.gza.com
August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00
HAP, Inc.
322 Main Street, Suite 1
Springfield, MA 01105-2403
Attention: Mr. Peter A. Serafino
Project Manager
Re: Preliminary Geotechnical Engineering Report
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
Dear Mr. Serafino:
GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. (GZA) is pleased to present this Preliminary Geotechnical
Engineering Report for the proposed redevelopment of property at 129 Pleasant Street in
Northampton Massachusetts.
This report was prepared in accordance with our June 30, 2014 proposal and agreement
with HAP. Report Limitations are attached in Appendix A.
BACKGROUND
Our understanding of the existing conditions and proposed project are based on:
· A September 15, 2011 (existing conditions) survey plan prepared by Harold Eaton &
Assoc. of Hadley Massachusetts;
· A May 21, 2014 (existing conditions) survey plan prepared by Holmberg & Howe of
Easthampton Massachusetts; and
· A November 12, 2013 conceptual plan prepared by PFRA+LDa Architects of
Northampton Massachusetts.
Existing Conditions
The estimated ¾-acre project site is located on the southwest side of Pleasant Street
and north and northwest of the Manhan Rail Trail, a rail bed converted to a bike and
walking path. Adjacent to the site to the northwest is a 5-story brick building.
The site is currently occupied by a two-story multi-unit residential building with a footprint
of approximately 4,200 square feet. Based on our observation, the existing building does
not have a basement. Asphalt-paved driveways and parking areas are present on-site along
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 2
with asphalt and concrete walkways, while portions of the site are covered by grass lawns
and landscaping.
The Existing Conditions Plan is presented as Figure 1.
Proposed Development
The new five-story wood structure building will have a footprint of about 13,000
square feet. The building will generally front Pleasant Street and the bike path.
At-grade parking will be located in the rear of the building on the lowest level
along with mixed use office, retail and residential space. Four levels above will be 1-
bedroom and studio apartments. The Conceptual Design Plan as prepared by PFRA+LDa
Architects, LLP is presented as Figure 2.
The following details about the proposed development have been assumed by
GZA:
· The design finish floor elevation has not been provided, but we assume that it
will be close to the existing ground surface elevation;
· No below-grade level is currently planned for the new building;
· No significant grade changes are proposed (>3 feet);
· Column loads will be 250 kips or less.
OBJECTIVE
The objective of our work was to provide preliminary geotechnical recommendations for
design and related construction of the proposed building and related site improvements.
SCOPE OF SERVICES
To achieve the objective, GZA performed the following scope of work:
· Facilitated and observed one day of test borings;
· Reviewed the data collected relative to the conceptual design plans; and
· Prepared this preliminary geotechnical report.
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS AND LABORATORY TESTING
Two test borings, located at opposite ends of the site, were completed on July 30, 2014.
The explorations were located in the field by line of sight and tape measuring from existing
site features. The locations of the explorations are indicated on Figures 1 and 2 and logs of
the borings are included in Appendix B.
The borings were drilled by Seaboard Drilling of East Longmeadow, Massachusetts using
a truck-mounted drill rig.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 3
The borings were advanced using both hollow stem augers and rotary wash methods with
casing. Boring GZ-1 was drilled with rotary wash methods and 3-inch inside diameter
(ID) steel casing to a depth of 30 feet. From 30 to 50 feet the boring was advanced with
rotary wash methods without casing. Boring GZ-2 was drilled using 2½-inch ID hollow
stem augers. The drilling methods are noted on the logs.
Split spoon soil samples were obtained semi-continuously through the top 12 feet of soils
and at 5-foot intervals thereafter in general accordance with ASTM D 1586, the Standard
Penetration Test (SPT). The SPT consists of advancing a 1-3/8 inch inside diameter
standard split spoon sampler at least 18 inches with a 140-pound hammer dropping from a
height of 30 inches. The SPT value, referred to as the “N” value, is the number of blows
per foot of penetration required to drive the sampler from 6 to 18 inches of penetration, a
commonly used indicator of soil density and consistency.
Groundwater measurements made during drilling are recorded on the logs, and are
summarized in the text below.
A GZA engineer observed the explorations, classified the subsurface materials and
prepared boring logs. The soils were classified according to the modified Burmister
classification system. Details of the modified Burmister classification system are
presented with the logs in Appendix B.
LABORATORY TESTING
Two (2) soil samples collected from the borings were tested for grain size distribution by
sieve analysis to confirm field classification. Atterberg Limits were determined for two (2)
samples of varved clay and moisture contents were determined on five (5) samples of
alluvial and varved clay deposits. Laboratory test results are attached in Appendix C.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The subsurface materials encountered were consistent with our understanding of the
geology and previous development at the site. The materials encountered included existing
fill, alluvium (layered sand, silt and clay) overlying glacial lake deposits (varved silt and
clay).
The following presents a generalized description of the subsurface strata encountered in the
explorations.
Existing fill was encountered in both explorations ranging in thickness from 3 to
5.5 feet. The fill ranged in consistency from silty sand and gravel to sandy silt. SPT N
values indicate that the density of the fill we encountered is loose.
Alluvial deposits were encountered in both borings beneath the fill, consisting of
layers of sand and silt with lesser amounts of gravel. The bottom of the alluvium was
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 4
encountered about 20 to 25 feet below grade. SPT N-values indicate that the density of the
alluvial soils is medium dense.
Varved silt and clay was encountered in the borings below the alluvium, but it was
not fully penetrated by either of the borings. At Boring GZ-1, the thickness of this stratum
was at least 28 feet. The consistency of the varved silt and clay encountered varied from thin
(less than 1-inch thick) layers of gray silty clay and clayey silt to more massive layers (more
than 2-feet thick) of gray clay. Frequent fine sand partings were observed within the samples.
SPT N-values indicate that the consistency of the varved silt and clay ranged from very soft to
medium stiff.
Groundwater
Groundwater was encountered in both explorations at depths ranging from about 13
to 15 feet below grade, after about 10 minutes of stabilization time. Note that fluctuations
of the groundwater levels will occur due to variations in rainfall and other factors different
than those prevailing at the time the readings were taken.
PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section presents preliminary geotechnical design and construction recommendations.
Unless indicated otherwise, these recommendations are consistent with the 8th Edition of
the State Building code including the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) and the State
amendments under 780 CMR.
Building Foundations
Assuming that column loads will be 300 kips or less, the proposed building may be
supported on shallow spread or strip footings bearing on a working mat at least 12 inches
of compacted Structural Fill overlying the naturally-deposited, undisturbed alluvial (sand
and silt) soils. Note that if heavier column loads are anticipated, deep foundations may be
required.
Existing fill, topsoil, utilities, tree stumps, pavement, previous building foundations
and any other deleterious materials encountered within the new building area should be
removed and replaced with compacted Structural Fill. The limits of removal should extend
from the exterior edge of new footings, downward and outward at a 1H:1V to the top of
naturally deposited soils. Because the naturally-deposited alluvial soils will be easily
disturbed during construction, a working mat of at least 12 inches of compacted Structural
Fill should be immediately placed to protect the natural subgrade surface from disturbance.
A maximum net allowable bearing pressure of 4,000 pounds per square foot (psf) is
recommended for design for footings.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 5
For isolated footings less than three feet wide, the allowable bearing pressure
should be reduced by the ratio of the footing width divided by 3 feet. In no case should
continuous footings bearing on soil be less than 18 inches wide, and isolated footings
should not be less than 24 inches wide. For frost protection, exterior footings should
extend at least 4 feet below final exterior grade. Interior footings or footings in heated
areas should bear at least 18 inches below the bottom of the floor slab. Soil bearing
surfaces below completed foundations and slabs should be protected against freezing
before and after concrete placement. If construction is performed during freezing weather,
footings on soil should be backfilled to a sufficient depth (up to 4 feet) as soon as possible
after they are constructed. If backfilling cannot be accomplished, insulating blankets,
heating in enclosures or other means may be used for protection against freezing.
For site preparation and foundations designed and constructed in accordance with
the recommendations of this report, estimated total building settlements are expected to be
less than 1 inch, the majority of which will occur during construction. Maximum
anticipated differential settlement between adjacent columns is less than ½ inch.
Excavation should be performed with a smooth-edged bucket to reduce the
potential for subgrade disturbance of the naturally-deposited soils. Exposed alluvial soil
subgrades should be lightly surface-compacted with a large vibratory plate compactor or a
small vibratory roller in order to re-compact soils which become loosened by excavation.
If the naturally-deposited soil subgrade becomes disturbed at any time during excavation, it
should be over-excavated and replaced with either Structural Fill or Crushed Stone
wrapped in geotextile fabric.
Slabs-on-Grade
Slabs-on-grade for the proposed building should bear on a base course consisting of
at least 12 inches of Select Fill or Crushed Stone, over one of the following:
· naturally-deposited inorganic soils (alluvium); or
· compacted Structural Fill bearing on naturally deposited soils.
The modulus of subgrade reaction recommended for slab design is 150 pounds per
cubic inch.
Vapor barrier and waterproofing requirements of the building code should be
incorporated into the design. Subgrades for slabs-on-grade should be prepared according
to the recommendations in the “Slab-on-Grade Subgrade Preparation in the Proposed
Building Areas” section that follows.
Earthquake Design Criteria
Soils at this site are not considered susceptible to liquefaction. Based on criteria set
forth in Section 1613.5.2 of the 2009 IBC, the Site Class is E.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 6
Lateral Earth Pressures
Active and passive lateral pressure coefficients of 0.33 and 3.0, respectively are
recommended for design of retaining walls that are unrestrained at the top. For walls that
are restrained, a lateral pressure coefficient of 0.6 is recommended. Total and buoyant unit
weights of 130 and 68 pounds per square foot are recommended for compacted fill.
Retaining walls should be backfilled with free-draining granular material so that
hydrostatic pressures are relieved by drainage.
Surcharge loads should be added to static loads for design. A minimum static
surcharge pressure of 250 psf should be used for the design of retaining walls.
Lateral loads can be resisted by the friction at the base of the footing. The
coefficient of friction for resistance to lateral sliding of foundation walls, retaining walls if
any), slabs, and footings is 0.45. This value is for new concrete placed directly on crushed
stone or compacted granular Structural Fill.
In general, passive soil pressure for footings with a shallow embedment (interior
column footings) should be ignored in calculating lateral load resistance. For cases where
passive earth pressure is considered to resist lateral loads (i.e., deeply embedded footings),
the upper foot of soil should be ignored. The recommended maximum allowable passive
soil pressure of 250 pcf (equivalent fluid pressure) may be used to calculate the lateral
resistance. Where passive pressure will be used to resist lateral load, the backfill around
the footing should be compacted within an area which extends at least 3 feet beyond the
footing (at the bottom of the footing) or a distance equal to at least 2 times the depth from
the finish grade to bottom of footing (whichever is greater).
The recommendations provided above do not include hydrostatic pressures on the
walls. Therefore, free draining backfill must be used for wall backfill (Select Fill per the
Recommended Fill and Backfill Section) within 3 feet laterally of the back of the wall.
Foundation drains are required for site retaining walls and for any building walls subject to
unbalanced lateral earth pressures. Refer to corresponding foundation drainage
recommendations in the following sections.
The minimum factors of safety for sliding and overturning of retaining walls under
static loads should be 1.5 and 2, respectively. Passive pressure at the toe of the walls
should not be included as a resisting force when analyzing for overturning and sliding. For
mechanically stabilized modular block retaining walls, factors of safety and designs should
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 7
Pavement Design
Preliminary minimum pavement design sections are as follows:
Light Duty
Asphalt
Heavy Duty
Asphalt
Layer
(in descending order)
Thickness (inches) Thickness (inches)
Bituminous Finish Course 1.5 1.5
Bituminous Binder Course 1.5 2.5
Base Course 6 8
Subbase Course 6 12
* See Recommended Fill and Backfill Section for material definitions.
The modulus of subgrade reaction recommended for rigid concrete pavement
design (by others) is 150 pounds per cubic inch.
Subgrade Preparation Beneath Paved Areas
Beneath new pavement existing topsoil, fill, pavement, and foundations should be
removed to a depth sufficient to construct the total pavement thickness including asphalt,
base and subbase courses.
Prior to subbase placement and construction of the pavement section, subgrades
should be subjected to intensive surface compaction with a minimum of 8 passes of a
vibratory roller with a minimum static weight of 10,000 pounds, and capable of producing
a minimum dynamic force of 30,000 pounds. Vibrations should be discontinued if
disturbance or weaving of the subgrade is observed. Any weak or unstable areas identified
should be overexcavated and replaced with compacted Structural Fill.
Note that, if existing fill is left in-place below parking areas and driveways, a risk
remains of long term settlement due to the inconsistent quality of the fill, the
undocumented compaction effort (if any) applied to those materials, the possible presence
of deleterious materials. In order to reduce the risk, the Owner may elect to further or fully
remove the existing fill beneath proposed paved areas and to replace it with engineered,
compacted fill.
Recommended Fill and Backfill
Considering project requirements and available on-site and local materials, it is
recommended that earth materials for fill, backfill and refill for this project be specified as
follows:
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 8
Structural Fill for use as fill within the building area (except where Select Fill is
specified) should be gravelly sand or sand and gravel free from ice, snow, roots, sod,
rubbish or other deleterious or organic matter and shall conform to the following
graduation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
3”
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
100
40-85
10-50
0-12
Select Fill for use immediately below slabs-on-grade, as backfill above retaining
wall drains (if any) and as site retaining wall backfill within three (3) feet laterally of
below-grade building walls, slab base course and other applications requiring free draining,
non-frost susceptible backfill. The fill should be free of ice, snow, roots, sod, rubbish and
other deleterious or organic matter and shall conform to the following gradation
requirements.
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
3”
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
100
30-95
10-70
0-6
Pavement Base and Subbase below pavements should conform to the
Massachusetts Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges Section M1.03.0 Type
B, Gravel Borrow. The use of recycled asphalt and concrete from off-site sources is
prohibited.
Crushed Stone for use as subgrade protection, a working mat, in wet conditions to
aid in dewatering and for underslab drainage systems, should consist of ⅜- or ¾-inch
minus angular crushed stone.
Geotextile Fabric should be used to separate crushed stone from surrounding soils.
The fabric should consist of a filtration-type non-woven geotextile (Mirafi 1100N or
approved equal).
Ordinary Fill for use as general fill and backfill in landscaped areas should be
friable inorganic soil essentially free of trash, ice, snow, tree stumps, roots and organic
materials. Ordinary fill shall contain no stone or rubble exceeding two-thirds of the
specified loose lift thickness for material placement.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 9
The recommended minimum degree of compaction for fill and backfill, based on
the percentage of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 (modified
Proctor), is:
Below Structures (footings and slabs) - 95%
Pavement/Sidewalk/Exterior Slab Base and Subbase - 95%
Behind Retaining Walls - 95%
Below Pavement Subbase - 92%
Utility Trenches (within 2 feet of surface) - 95%
Utility Trenches (more than 2 feet below surface) - 92%
Areas of General Landscape - 90%
Recommended maximum loose lift thicknesses for soil fill and the minimum
number of passes of compaction equipment are summarized on the following table.
Maximum
Loose Lift Thickness
Minimum
Number of Passes
Compaction
Method
Maximum
Stone
Size
Below
Structures
and
Pavement
Less
Critical
Areas
Below
Structures
and
Pavement
Less
Critical
Areas
Hand-operated vibratory
plate or light roller in
confined areas
3” 6” 8” 6 4
Hand-operated vibratory
drum rollers weighing at
least 1,000# in confined
areas
6” 8” 10” 6 4
Light vibratory drum
roller, minimum dynamic
force 3,000# per foot of
drum width
6” 10” 14” 6 4
Medium to heavy vibra.
drum roller, min. dynamic
force 5,000-8,000# per
foot drum width
8” 12” 18” 6 4
The Contractor should reduce or stop drum vibration if pumping or weaving of the
subgrade is observed.
Crushed Stone should be compacted to an unyielding surface.
Compaction within 5-feet of foundation and retaining walls should be performed
using hand-operated roller or plate compactors to reduce the potential for construction-
induced damage to the walls. Extra care should be used when compacting adjacent to
walls. Where walls are buried on both sides, backfill and compaction should proceed on
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 10
both sides of the wall so that the difference in top of fill on either side does not exceed 2
feet. Where backfill of walls is only on one side, the wall should be designed for
unbalanced loading conditions. In addition, walls with unbalanced loads should be
compacted with hand-operated rollers of plates not weighing more than 250 pounds within
10 feet laterally of the unbalanced walls.
Reuse of Site Soils
Excavated materials and construction subgrades will consist of existing fill and
alluvial soils, large portions of which are not likely to meet the recommended gradations
for Structural Fill or Select Fill due to the high silt and clay (fines) content.
The high percentages of fines in the existing fill and naturally-deposited soils will
make them slow draining and very difficult to reuse particularly during wet and winter
weather conditions and when the moisture content is above optimum. Subgrades
comprised of these materials will be susceptible to disturbance when exposed to
precipitation and construction traffic. Compaction and maintenance of subgrades will be
difficult; in particular if they become wet. These soils will be susceptible to frost heave.
These soils should not be used for applications requiring free-draining Select Fill.
Project planners should assume that Structural Fill, Select Fill and Crushed Stone
will need to be imported for the project and that excavated on site soils will not be readily
reused, necessitating their export.
Foundation Drains
With groundwater at about 10 to 15 feet below grade and no planned basement,
perimeter foundation drains are not expected to be needed. If the proposed building has a
deep elevator pit, foundation drainage may be required in this area. Alternatively, the
elevator pit could be designed water-tight and to withstand hydraulic uplift pressures.
GROUNDWATER CONTROL
Excavations for foundations are not expected to encounter significant quantities of
groundwater, however, deeper excavations for some utilities may. Additionally, surface
water may enter open excavations during periods of precipitation. It is anticipated that
construction dewatering (where required) can be accomplished by creating interceptor
trenches or ditches around the perimeter of the excavations and by open pumping from
filtered sumps located within excavations. Dewatering should be performed as necessary
to allow excavation and observation of the subgrades in the dry and to maintain stable and
dry bottoms. In addition, constructing small temporary earth berms and grading to force
drainage away from the excavation is recommended to control surface water runoff.
Discharge of accumulated water should be in accordance with local, State and Federal
regulations.
129 Pleasant Street – Prelim. Geotechnical August 29, 2014
File No. 05.0045338.00 Page No. 11
EXCAVATION SLOPES
The Contractor is responsible for construction site safety and should be aware that slope
height, slope inclination and excavation depths should in no case exceed those specified in
local, state or federal safety regulations (e.g. OSHA Health and Safety Standards for
Excavations, 29 CFR Part 1926). Temporary cut and fill slopes in soil should be no
steeper than 1.5H:1V. As a safety measure, it is recommended that all vehicles and earth
stockpiles be kept a minimum lateral distance away from the edge of excavations at least
equal to the slope height. Slope faces should be protected against the weather elements.
ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDED EXPLORAITONS
After the footprint, height and location of the building have been established we
recommend that a design-phase geotechnical study be completed for the site. We
anticipate that the scope for a design-phase study would likely include additional test
borings (with at least one extended to bedrock).
We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this project. Please call the
undersigned at (860) 286-8900 if you need additional information.
Very truly yours,
GZA GEOENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
Christopher J. Tonzi Dan T. Kinard
Senior Project Manager Consultant/Reviewer
Thomas E. Billups, P.E.
Associate Principal
Attachments:
Figure 1: Existing Conditions Plan (with Explorations)
Figure 2: Conceptual Design Plan (with Explorations)
Appendix A: Limitations
Appendix B: Exploration Logs
Appendix C: Laboratory Test Results
FIGURES
Figure 1.
Existing Conditions Plan
(with Explorations)
Drawn By: CJT
Reviewed by: DTK
Date: August 29, 2014
Approx. Scale: 1"=45'
Base plan source: May 21, 2014 (existing
conditions) survey plan prepared by
Holmberg & Howe of Easthampton
Massachusetts.
Legend:
Approximate Test Boring
Location and ID
GZ-1
GZ-2
APPENDIX A
LIMITATIONS
April 2012 PAGE 1
GEOTECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
Use of Report
1.GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. (GZA) prepared this report on behalf of, and for the exclusive use of
our Client for the stated purpose(s) and location(s) identified in the Proposal for Services and/or
Report. Use of this report, in whole or in part, at other locations, or for other purposes, may lead to
inappropriate conclusions; and we do not accept any responsibility for the consequences of such
use(s). Further, reliance by any party not expressly identified in the agreement, for any use, without
our prior written permission, shall be at that party’s sole risk, and without any liability to GZA.
Standard of Care
2.GZA’s findings and conclusions are based on the work conducted as part of the Scope of Services set
forth in Proposal for Services and/or Report, and reflect our professional judgment. These findings
and conclusions must be considered not as scientific or engineering certainties, but rather as our
professional opinions concerning the limited data gathered during the course of our work. If
conditions other than those described in this report are found at the subject location(s), or the design
has been altered in any way, GZA shall be so notified and afforded the opportunity to revise the
report,as appropriate, to reflect the unanticipated changed conditions .
3.GZA’s services were performed using the degree of skill and care ordinarily exercised by qualified
professionals performing the same type of services, at the same time, under similar conditions, at
the same or a similar property. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made.
Subsurface Conditions
4.The generalized soil profile(s) provided in our Report are based on widely-spaced subsurface
explorations and are intended only to convey trends in subsurface conditions. The boundaries
between strata are approximate and idealized, and were based on our assessment of subsurface
conditions. The composition of strata, and the transitions between strata, may be more variable and
more complex than indicated. For more specific information on soil conditions at a specific location
refer to the exploration logs.
5.In preparing this report, GZA relied on certain information provided by the Client, state and local
officials, and other parties referenced therein which were made available to GZA at the time of our
evaluation. GZA did not attempt to independently verify the accuracy or completeness of all
information reviewed or received during the course of this evaluation.
6.Water level readings have been made in test holes (as described in the Report) and monitoring wells
at the specified times and under the stated conditions. These data have been reviewed and
interpretations have been made in this Report. Fluctuations in the level of the groundwater however
occur due to temporal or spatial variations in areal recharge rates, soil heterogeneities, the presence
of subsurface utilities, and/or natural or artificially induced perturbations. The water table
encountered in the course of the work may differ from that indicated in the Report.
April 2012 PAGE 2
7.GZA’s services did not include an assessment of the presence of oil or hazardous materials at the
property. Consequently, we did not consider the potential impacts (if any) that contaminants in soil
or groundwater may have on construction activities, or the use of structures on the property.
8.Recommendations for foundation drainage, waterproofing, and moisture control address the
conventional geotechnical engineering aspects of seepage control. These recommendations may not
preclude an environment that allows the infestation of mold or other biological pollutants.
Compliance with Codes and Regulations
9.We used reasonable care in identifying and interpreting applicable codes and regulations. These
codes and regulations are subject to various, and possibly contradictory, interpretations.
Compliance with codes and regulations by other parties is beyond our control.
Cost Estimates
10.Unless otherwise stated, our cost estimates are only for comparative and general planning purposes.
These estimates may involve approximate quantity evaluations. Note that these quantity estimates
are not intended to be sufficiently accurate to develop construction bids, or to predict the actual cost
of work addressed in this Report. Further, since we have no control over either when the work will
take place or the labor and material costs required to plan and execute the anticipated work, our cost
estimates were made by relying on our experience, the experience of others, and other sources of
readily available information. Actual costs may vary over time and could be significantly more, or
less, than stated in the Report.
Additional Services
11.GZA recommends that we be retained to provide services during any future: site observations,
design, implementation activities, construction and/or property development/redevelopment.
This will allow us the opportunity to: i) observe conditions and compliance with our design
concepts and opinions; ii) allow for changes in the event that conditions are other than
anticipated; iii) provide modifications to our design; and iv) assess the consequences of changes
in technologies and/or regulations.
APPENDIX B
EXPLORATION LOGS
"## $%&’()*+, - ./0
1./0 $)+2
1./0 ’*&%,2
1./0 $)+2 &+3 423)54
1./0 ’*&%,2 &+3 $)+2
1./0 ’*&%,2 &+3 423)54
"#$"$#%&$’ $(
)$*"$’+’%
6)+2 (* ’*&%,2
723)54 (* ’*&%,2
6)+2 (* 423)54
8*&%,2
723)54
6)+2
92%; <*$(
<*$(
723)54 <()$$
<()$$
92%; <()$$
=&%3
8*+,),(2+’; >#*?,@6(A
<BC DE94
1 F
F E G
G E H
H E .I
.I E J/
-J/
",-.%&) .$&,. /#-0+, 1 .-’2
K2+,)(;
’-*+
LM"9NOP <"DKP 6QDN<R
L%&S2#P <&+3P 6)+2,R
)$*"$’+’%
7"TUM
7)+*%
R<22 )32+()$)’&()*+ *$ $)+2, (&V#2A
,$/ 3+4
"#$%#&&’( )#* +,%&#-%(-(
"#$
"%& ’()*+&(,%(-./0 1(23
-55#+0&-%&$’.
&+3
,*42
#)((#2
(%&’2
-I/
JI E I/
F/EJI
./EF/
/E./
"+#)+’% 54
6+&/7%
"#$"$#%&$’-,
%+#*
=)WX#; U%W&+)’ <*)#,
<QOC Y 8O"Z
8&++*( M*##
8#&;2; <QOC
8O"Z Y <QOC
<)#(; 8O"Z
/
.EI
IE./
./EF/
F/EG/
.@G[
.@H[
.@.\[
.@JF[
<QOC
8O"Z -G/.@\G[
7&(2%)&# BQ
&2+’%&(&)-%&$’ $( (&’+.
"((2%V2%W CX%2&3 K)&A
92%; O**,2
O**,2
723)54 K2+,2
K2+,2
92%; K2+,2
>#*?,@6(A
<BC DE94
<)#(, &+3 8#&;, O)]5)3 O)4)( 1I/
8’&(&+2 .$&, ),-..&(&)-%&$’ .4.%+* 98.).; 9-.%* 2 <=>?;
$#/-’&) .$&, ),-..&(&)-%&$’
58#*&.%+# .$&, ),-..&(&)-%&$’
/#-2-%&$’ 2+.&/’-%&$’
7M ^ 753 M*(&%;
=<" ^ =*##*? <(24 "5W2%
<<" ^ <*#)3 <(24 "5W2%
<< ^ <_#)( <_**+ <&4_#2%
‘ ^ ‘+3),(5%V23 <&4_#2 a<X2#V; C5V2b
78 ^ 7*3)$)23 8&#)$*%+)& <&4_#2%
9 ^ 9)V%&’*%2
7 ^ 7&’%*’*%2
‘<8< ^ ‘+)$)23 <*)# 8#&,,)$)’&()*+ <;,(24 a"<C7 KFGHcb
DZ8>8 ^ D2? Z*%d 8)(; >5)#3)+W 8*32
eUM ^ e2)WX( *$ M*3,
eU=^ e2)WX( *$ =&442%
<BC ^ <(&+3&%3 B2+2(%&()*+ C2,( a"<C7 K.IH\b
DE94 ^ 8545#&()S2 +54V2% *$ 5+’*%%2’(23 V#*?, $*% (X2 4)33#2 (?* ,)fE)+’X )+(2%S&#, aV#*?,@$**(bA
1 G
G E ./
./ E J/
J/ E I/
- I/
<)#(, &+3 8O&;, O)]5)3 O)4)( -I/
8#2&+ L%&S2#,
aO)((#2 *% +* $)+2,b
L%&S2#, ?)(X 6)+2,
a"__%2’)&V#2 &4*5+( *$ $)+2,b
8#2&+ <&+3,
aO)((#2 *% +* $)+2,b
<&+3, ?)(X 6)+2,
a"__%2’)&V#2 &4*5+( *$ $)+2,b
<&+3
7*%2 (X&+ I/0
,4&##2% (X&+ D*A G ,)2S2A
L%&S2#
7*%2 (X&+ I/0
#&%W2% (X&+ D*A G ,)2S2A
6)+2 L%&)+23 <*)#,
7*%2 (X&+ I/0 *$ 4&(2%)&#
,4&##2% (X&+ D*A F// ,)2S2A
8*&%,2 L%&)+23 <*)#,
7*%2 (X&+ I/0 *$ 4&(2%)&#
#&%W2% (X&+ D*A F// ,)2S2A
*-@$# 2&0&.&$’./ABCD .EFGBHI
Le
LB
L7
L8
<e
<B
<7
<8
7O
8O
UO
7=
8=
U=
B(
6)V%*5, BN"C aB(b E O)WX(?2)WX(P ,_*+W;P 4*,(#; S),)V#2 *%W&+)’ 4&((2%P ?&(2% ,]522g2, %2&3)#; $%*4 ,&4_#2A C;_)’&##; +2&% (*_ *$ 32_*,)(A
6)+2 L%&)+23 BN"C aB(b E O)WX(?2)WX(P ,_*+W;P #)((#2 S),)V#2 *%W&+)’ 4&((2%P ?&(2% ,]522g2, %2&3)#; $%*4 ,&4_#2A C;_)’&##; V2#*? $)V%*5, _2&(A
U%W&+)’ <)#( aUOb E C;_)’&##; W%&; (* 3&%d W%&;P *$(2+ X&, ,(%*+W =F< *3*%A C;_)’&##; ’*+(&)+, ,X2##, *% ,X2## $%&W42+(,A O)WX(?2)WX(A ‘,5&##;
$*5+3 +2&% ’*&,(&# %2W)*+,A 7&; ’*+(&)+ ?)32 %&+W2 *$ ,&+3 $%&’()*+,A
U%W&+)’ 8#&; aU=b E C;_)’&##; W%&; (* 3&%d W%&;P X)WX _#&,()’)(;A ‘,5&##; $*5+3 +2&% ’*&,(&# %2W)*+,A 7&; ’*+(&)+ ?)32 %&+W2 *$ ,&+3 $%&’()*+,A
D223 *%W&+)’ ’*+(2+( (2,( $*% $)+&# )32+()$)’&()*+A
CS ^ 6)2#3 9&+2 <X2&% C2,( aC*%S&+2b <X2&% <(%2+W(X
BB ^ B*’d2( B2+2(%*42(2% <X2&% <(%2+W(X
BQ ^ B#&,()’)(; Q+32f
e+ ^ 7*),(5%2 8*+(2+(
8U ^ 8*+,*#)3&()*+
‘8 ^ ‘+’*+$)+23 8*4_%2,,)*+ C2,(
‘‘ ^ ‘+’*+,*#)3&(23 ‘+3%&)+23 aC%)&f)&#b C2,(
<Q ^ <)2S2 "+&#;,),
K< ^ K)%2’( <X2&%
BQK ^ BX*(*)*+)g&()*+ K2(2’(*%
__4 ^ B&%(, B2% 7)##)*+
MN8 ^ M2’*S2%;
MhK ^ M*’d h5&#)(; K2,)W+&()*+
^ 72&,5%23 e&(2% O2S2#
APPENDIX C
LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
Project Name 129 Pleasant Street Project Location Northampton, MA Reviewed By
Project No.05.0045338.00 Assigned By C. Tonzi
Project Manager C. Tonzi Date Date Reviewed 8/14/2014
Consol.
Boring/
Test Pit No.
Sample
No.
Depth
ft.
Lab
No.
Water
Content
%
LL
%
PL
%
OD
LL
%
Sieve
-200
%
Hyd
-2µ
%
ORG
%
Dry
unit
wt. pcf
Torvane
or Type
Test
sc
psf
Failure
Criteria
s1 - s3
or t
psf
Strain
%1 + e0
Laboratory Log
and
Soil Description
GZ-1 S-2 2-4 1 29.3 92.3 Gray CLAY & SILT, trace Sand
GZ-1 S-6 15-17 2 22.8 10.3
Brown f-m SAND, little Silt,
trace Gravel
GZ-1 S-8 25-27 3 43.6 40 24 Gray CLAY & SILT, trace Sand
GZ-1 S-10 35-37 4 50.3 55 30 Gray Silty CLAY
GZ-1 S-13 50-52 5 55.0
195 Frances Avenue
Cranston, RI 02910 401-467-6454
LABORATORY TESTING DATA SHEET
Identification Tests Strength Tests
8/14/2014
Cc
ASTM D422
Gravel Sand Fines
0.0%7.7%92.3%
Lab #Exploration Depth WC LL PL PI
1 GZ-1 2-4'Gray CLAY & SILT, trace Sand 29.3
Sieve Size % Passing
¾"100.0
½"100.0
#4 100.0
#10 100.0
#20 99.8
#40 99.4
#60 98.9 Tested by:
195 Frances Ave., Cranston, RI 02910 #100 96.9 Reviewed by:
401-467-6454 #200 92.3
GZA Project # 05.0045338.00
LM Date:8/13/14
MBP Date:8/14/14
Sample Description
S-2
74-14-0003
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
3" 2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0.0010.010.1110100Percent Finer by Weight Grain Size (mm)
U.S. STANDARD SIEVE AND HYDROMETER
SAND
C
L
A
Y
GRAVEL
Fine Coarse Coarse Fine Medium
SILT
ASTM D422
Gravel Sand Fines
4.9%84.8%10.3%
Lab #Exploration Depth WC LL PL PI
2 GZ-1 15-17'Brown f-m SAND, little Silt, trace Gravel 22.8
Sieve Size % Passing
¾"95.1
½"95.1
#4 95.1
#10 95.0
#20 93.7
#40 86.9
#60 69.2 Tested by:
195 Frances Ave., Cranston, RI 02910 #100 32.0 Reviewed by:
401-467-6454 #200 10.3
GZA Project # 05.0045338.00
LM Date:8/13/14
MBP Date:8/14/14
Sample Description
S-6
74-14-0003
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA
3" 2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0.0010.010.1110100Percent Finer by Weight Grain Size (mm)
U.S. STANDARD SIEVE AND HYDROMETER
SAND
C
L
A
Y
GRAVEL
Fine Coarse Coarse Fine Medium
SILT